Owner's Manual

2017 Q7

Vorsprung durch Te ~~?~ (HO

 Foreword
Thank you for choosing an Audi - we value your trust in us
Your new Audi will allow you to experience the best in groundbreaking technolo-
gy and prem ium quality equipment a vehicle has to offer. We recommend that
you read your Owner's Manual thorough ly so that you qu ickly become acquaint-
ed wi t h your Audi and make use of all of it s featu res.

In addition to explaining how the diffe rent features work, we provide many use-
f ul tips and informa t ion concerning your safety, how to care for your vehicle and
how to mainta in your veh icle's val ue. We also give you usef ul tips and informa-
tion on how to dr ive your vehicl e more efficiently and in an environmen t ally
frie ndly manne r.

We hope you enjoy dr iving your Audi and we wish you safe and pleasant motor-
ing.

AUDIAG

u
co
.....
N
r-...
N
.....
0
0
:E:
'<t
Table of contents

About this Owner's Manual ...... 6 Driving ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... .. 79

General information . . . . . .......... .. 79
Cockpit . . . . . . .............. . ... . . . 8 Steering .......... . . . . . .......... .. 81
Cockpit overview .......... ... . . . . 8 Start ing and stopping the eng ine ..... . . 82
Controls at a glance ... ........ ...... . 8 Start/Stop system . . . . . ............ .. 84
Instrument cluster . . .......... ...... . 10 Electromechanical parking brake ...... . 87
Multifunction steering wheel ... . . . . . . . 12 Start ing to drive . . . . . . . . ...... .. . . . . . 88
Driver information system ............ . 15 Offroad driving . . . ... . ..... . ...... ... 89
Head-up display . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . ... . 20 Tilt angle display . . . . . . . . .......... .. 90
On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD) . . . . . 21 Automat ic transmission 91
Indicato r lights . ................ ... . 22
Trailer towing . . . . . . ............ .. 98
Starting and driving ... . ..... . .. . 34 Driving with a trail er . . . . . .......... .. 98
Opening and closing ........ .. .. . 34 Trailer towing information 100
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 34
Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . . .. .. . 40 Driver assistance ............... .. 102
Child safety lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 43 Assistance systems ............ .. 102
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 43 Electronic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 102
Panorama glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 45 Speed warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 102
Garage door opener (Homelink) . . . .. .. . 46 Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 102
Camera-based traffic sign recognit ion . .. 104
Lights and Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Predictive efficiency assist. . . . . . . . . . . .. 105
Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Audi adaptive cruise contro l . . . . . . . . . .. 107
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Predictive control (eff iciency assist) . . . .. 113
V1s1on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Traffic jam assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Distance ind icat or and distance wa rnin g 116
Digital compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Audi pre sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Seats and storage ... .. .... .. .. .. . 59 Audi pre sense basic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
General information . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 59 Audi pre sense front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 59 Audi pre sense rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 60 Audi pre sense city . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Head restraints . . . . . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 63 Settings in the Infotainment system . . . . 122
Memory function . . . . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 64 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 65 Audi active lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Sockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 66 Audi side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Sto rage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Night vision assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Audi drive select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Parking systems 138
Warm and cold . . .......... ...... . 71 General information ......... .. .. .. .. 138
Climate control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Rear parking system ......... .. .. .. .. 139
3 zone deluxe automatic climate control . 72 Parking aid pl us . . . . ......... .. .. .. .. 139
4-zone deluxe automatic climate control . 75 Rearview camera . . . ......... .. .. .. .. 140
Steer ing wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Periphera l cameras . ......... .. .. .. .. 143
Adjusting the parking aid . . . . . .. .. .. .. 146

2
 Table of contents

Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Configuration thro ugh myAudi . . . . . .. .. 189

Trai ler hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Opening Audi connect (Infotainment) . .. 190
Audi connect Infota inment services . .. .. 190
Intelligent Technology .......... 148 Wi-Fi hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 195
Electronic stabilization control (ESC) . . . . 14 8 Configuring the data connection . . . . .. .. 196
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . ... . 150 Audi connect (Infota inment) general
Electromechanica l steer ing, all- wheel information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 196
steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Troub leshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... 198
All-wheel drive (quattro) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Energy ma nagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Audi connect vehicle control .... 199
Not ice about data recorded by the Event I ntrod uction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 199
Data Recorder and vehicle control Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 199
mod ules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Additional options . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 200
Remote locking and un locking . . . ...... 200
Infotainment system . .. .. .. .. .. . 156 Vehicle sta t us report . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 200
Multi Media Interface . .. .. .. .. .. . 156 Parking location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 200
Traffic safety information .. .. .. .. .. .. . 156 Geofencing Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 201
I nt roduction . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 156 Speed Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 201
MMI On/Off knob with joystic k function . . 156 Valet Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ...... 201
Infotainment system display . . . . . . . . . . 157 Stolen Vehicle Locator . . . . . . . . . . ...... 201
MMI operat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Online Aud i service request . . . . . . ...... 201
MMI touc h . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Contro l knob with joystick f unction . . . . . 162 Eme r gency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 I ntrod uction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Letter/numbe r speller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Free tex t search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Online roads ide assista nce . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Menus and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
N a vigation ........................ 205
Voice recognition system . .. .. .. . 169 Opening navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . 168 Ente ring a desti nat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Command overview inform ation . .. .. .. . 169 Personal rou t e assist ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 11
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . 170 Alte rnative rou t es . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 12
External voice operat ion 174 Additional settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . 215
Telephone ........................ 176 Online map display . . .............. .. 217
I ntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Map update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Using the te lephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Radio ............................. 223
Listening to voicema il . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Opening the radio . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 223
Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Radio funct ions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 224
Addit ional settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Radio menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 226
Troubleshoo ti ng . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Presets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 22 6
Addition al settings . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 226
~
...... Audi connect (Infotainment) . . . . 189 Troub leshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 227
~ I ntroduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
N
8 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
0
:E:
'<t

3
Table of contents

Media . . . . ... . . . . . .......... . . . . . .. 228 Side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 228 Side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... .... .. . 228
Media drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 229 Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Bluetooth audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 231 Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Wi -Fi audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 232 Child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Online media and Internet radio . . . . . .. . 233 Securing child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Multimedia connections . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 234 LATCHsystem (lower anchorages and
Playing media. . . . ............ . ... .. . 237 tethers for childr en) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Additional settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 240 Additional inform at ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Supported media and file formats . . . .. . 243
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 244 Maintenance and Care ......... .. 314
Checking and Filling ........... .. 314
Audi smartphone interface . . . . . . 247 Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 314
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .......... . . . . . .. 247 Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 315
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Refueling . . ... . . . . . . . . . .......... .. 316
Troubleshoot ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Selective catalytic reduction (AdBlu e/
DEF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 318
System settings ..... .. .. .. .. 249
.. .. . Emissions control systems . . . . . . . . . . .. 321
Setting the date and time .. .. .. .. ..
249 .. . Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 322
MMI sett ings . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ..
249 .. . Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 324
Connection manager . . . . .. .. .. .. ..
250 .. . Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 328
System update . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ..
252 .. . Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 329
Sound settings . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. ..
253 .. . Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 330
Volume settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Windshield washer system . . . . .. .. .. .. 331
Restarting the MMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Service int erval display 332
Software license informat ion 2 54
Wheels ..... . . . ... . ..... . ...... . .. 333
Safety first . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 256 Wheels and Tires . . . . . ........... .. .. 333
Driving safety ................. .. . 256 Tire pressure monitoring system . . . .. .. 351
Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 256 Run-flat tires . . . . . . . . ........... .. .. 352
Correct passenger seat ing positions . . .. . 257
Driver's and front passenger's footwell . . 260 Care and cleaning . . . . .......... .. 354
Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 261 General info rmat ion . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 354
Storing cargo correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 261 Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 354
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 263 Cleaning and care information . . . .. .. .. 355
Placing your vehicle out of service .. .. .. 359
Safety belts ......... .. .... .. .. .. . 265
General information . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 265 Troubleshooting ......... .. .. .. .. 360
Why use safety belts? . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 266 Emergency assistance ... .. .. .. .. 360
Safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 268 General information . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 360
Belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . .. .... .. .. .. . 271 Equip ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 360
Tire mobility kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 360
Airbag system ................... . 273 Replacing a whee l . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 362
Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Monito ring the Advanced Airbag System . 285

4
 Table of contents

Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . ... . 367
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 1

Emergency situations ... .... . ... . 372

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... .... . 372
Start i ng by pushing or tow ing . .... .... . 372
St arti ng w it h jumpe r cables . . .... .... . 372
Using the jump st art cable . . . .... .... . 373
Towingw ithatowtr uck .. . . . ... . .... . 374
Raising the veh icle . . . . . . . . . . .... .... . 376

Accessories and Technical Data . 378

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 378
Vehicl e specifications . . . . . . . ......... 378
Notes about tec hnical data . . . ......... 378
We ight s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 379
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . ... . 379
Capacit ies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 379
Gasoline engin es . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 380
Diesel eng ines . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... 380

Consumer Information . . . . . . . . . . 381

War ranty coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Operat ing your veh icle outs ide t he U.S.A.
or Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Aud i Service Repair Manuals and
Lit erature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Maint enance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 1
Accessories and t echnical changes . . . . . . 383
Declarat ion of Compli ance,
Telecommun ications and Electronic
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Index . . ... . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . ... . 385

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

5
About this Owner's Manual

This Owne r's Man ual applies to a ll versions of

this mode l. It contains important information,
(D Tips

tips, suggestions and warn ings for using your ve- Text with this symbol contains additional use-
hicle. fu l information.

Keep this manua l in your vehicle at all times . This

is especially important if you loan your vehicle to
others or sell it.

This owner's manua l describes the equipment

range specified for this mode l at the time of
printing. Individual equipment options described
may on ly be available at a later date or may only
be offered in certain countries .

Some sections in this manual do not apply to all

vehicles. When this is the case, the beginning of
the sect ion ind icates the validity, for example
"Applies to vehicles : with cruise contro l system".
Optional or vehicle-specific equipment is also
ident ified with an asterisk "*" .

The illustrations in th is manual are a guide .

Some of the detai ls in your vehicle may differ
from the illustration.

All directions, such as "left", "right", "front" and

"rear", are based on the vehicle's direct ion of
travel.

* Optional or vehicle -s pecific equipment

.,._ The section continues on the next page.

& Cross reference to a "WARNING" w ith in a

c::>
section. If a page number is indicated, the
WARNING is located outs ide of the section.

&, WARNING
-
Text with this symbol contains information
about safety and how to reduce the risk of se-
rious personal injury or death.

(D Note
Text with this symbol contains info rmat ion
about reducing the risk of damage to your ve-
hicle.

@ For the sake of the environment

Text with this symbol contains info rmat ion on
protecting the environment .

6
u
....
"'
N

"....
N

0
0

...
l'.

7
Cockpit overview

Cockpit overview
Controls at a glance

Fig. 1 Cockpit : left section

Fig. 2 Cockpit: rig ht sect ion

8
 Coc k pit o v e rv iew

(!) side assist displays, warn ing abo ut @ Buttons fo r:

exiting the vehicle . .... ........ 126 - All-weather lights 48
@ Door handle - Night vision assist .......... . 131
@ Cent ral locking switch ....... ... 38 - Rea r fog lights . . . . . . . .... ... 48
@ Memory buttons ........... ... 64 @ Power exte rior m irror adjustment 52
® Vent @ Power windows .............. . 43
® Thumbwhee l for vent and button @ Infotainment system display 157
for wide vent, depending on equip- @ Lockable glove compa rtme nt 67
ment . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . ... . . 71 @) Front passenger 's airbag .... ... 27 7
0 Lever for: @ Drives for CD, DVD, SI M cards .. . 229
- Turn signals and high beams ... 49 @ Swit ch for cooled glove compa rt -
- High beam assistant .... . . . . . 49 me nt .. . ... . ............... . 67
- Active lane assist ........... . 123 @ Depend ing on equ ipment, buttons
- Traffic jam assist ...... . .... . 114 for :
@ Mult ifunction steer ing whee l with: - drive select . ............... . 134
- Horn - Sta rt/Stop system . . . . .... . . . 84
- Driver's airbag . . .... . . . . . . . . 27 7 - Electronic Stabilization Control
- Drive r informat ion system con - (ESC) . . . . . . . . . ... . ...... ..- 149
trols . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 12 - Emergency flashers ......... . so
- Audio/v ideo, telephone, nav iga- - Parking system ............. . 138
tion and voice recognition con - - Hill hold ass ist . . . . . . . .... . . . 150
t rols . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 14 - Extend ing/retracting the Info-
- Button @/steering wheel heating 14 tainment system display ... . . . 1S7
- Sh ift paddles .......... ..... 94 @ Climate contro l system . ... . .. . . 71
® Instrument cluster ........... . 10 @) Storage compartment and outlet 6 7, 66
@ Reset t rip odometer ... . . . . . .. . 12 @ Cup holder and mount for vehicle
@ W indshield washe r system lever 55 key .... . ... . . . . . ........... . 66
@ I STAR T ENGINE ST OPI button . . . 82 @ Infotai nment system on/off
@ St eer ing whee l adjustment, de - button . . . . . . ............... . 156
pending on equipmen t @ Center armrest w ith sto rage com -
- Mechan ica l .............. ... 81 partment. Depending on vehicle
- Power . . . . . . . . . .... ........ 81 equipment, it may have:
@ Leverfo r: - Aud i m usic interface ........ . 235
- Cru ise cont rol sys t em 102 @ Starting the engine if the re is a
- Adaptive cruise cont rol ...... . 107 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . .... ... 84
@ Data link connector for On-board @ Electromechanical parking brake 87
Diagnostic System (OBD II) ..... 21 @ Automa t ic tr a nsmission se lector
@ Hood release .. . . . .... . ... . . . . 323 lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... ... 91
@ Ins t rumen t illum ination . . . . . . . . 52 @ Infotainment system unit 156
@ Button for switch ing the head-up
d isplay on/off, adjust ing the (D Tips

u
height . . . . . . ...... .. . . . . . . . . 20 Some the equipment listed here is only instal-
co
...... @ Switch for lugg age compa rtment led in certa in models or is available as an op-
N
r-...
N lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... ........ 40 tion.
......
0
0
:E:
@ Headlight control sw itch .... ... 48
'<t

9
Cockpit overview

Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster overview
The instrument cluster is the central information center for the driver.

Fig. 3 Instrument cluster overview (analog)

Fig. 4 Instrument cluster overview (Audi virtual cockpit)

(D Engine coolant temperature gauge 11 @ Speedometer

@ Tachometer .................
- with OFF status indicator .... .
- with READYstatus indicator . . .
@ Tab area . . . . ... ... . ......
@ Central area with
- Driver informat ion system .... .
- Indicator lights . . .... .... . . .
® Status line (displayed on one or two
lines)
@ Speedometer/convenience
0 Fuel level
. 11 ® Left additional display (divided in
82 two sections in the expanded view)
82,84 There may be additional indicator lights in the
.... 12 tachometer @ , the speedometer @ , the status
line ® and, depending on the instrument clus-
15 ter, above or below the central area @ .
22 The following pages will primarily show illustra-
tions of the ana log instrument cluster. The ap-
pearance or the location of the items shown may
display differ in the Audi virtual cockpit*. ...,
12

10

& WARNING
Do not ass ume the roads are free of ice based
on the outside temperature display. Be aware
that there may be ice on roads even when the
outs ide temperature is around 41 °F (+S °C)
and that ice can increase the risk of accidents .
@ Tips
- Depending on vehicle equipment, the in-
strument illumination (needles and gauges)
may turn on when the lights are off and the
ignition is sw itched on . The illumination for
the gauges reduces automat ically and even -
tually turns off as brightness outside in-
creases . This funct ion reminds the driver to
turn the low beams on at the app ropr iate
time .
- You can se lect the units used for tempe ra-
tu re, speed and othe r measureme nts in the
Infotainment system ¢ page 249.
- If your vehicle is stationary or if yo u are driv-
ing at very low speeds, the temperat ure dis-
played may be sligh t ly higher t han the ac-
tua l tempe rat ure outside due to the heat ra-
diating from the engine.
- At t emperatures below 41 °F (+S °C), a
snowflake symbol appears in front of the
temperature display ¢ .&..
Coolant temperature indicator
The coolant tempe rature display (D ¢ page 10,
fig . 3 or ¢ page 10, fig. 4 only funct ions when
the ignition is switched on . To prevent engine
damage, please observe the follow ing notes
about t he temperature ranges.
Cold range
If only the LEDs at the bottom of the gauge turn
on, the engine has not reached operating t em-
perature yet . Avoid high engine speeds, full ac-
celerat ion and heavy engine loads .
Norma l range
~
,..... The engine has reached its operating temper a -
~ ture once t he LEDs up t o the center of the gauge
8o turn on . If the . ind icator light in the instru-
:E:
'<t
Coc k pit o v e rv iew
ment cluster d isp lay turns on, the coo lant tem -
peratur e is too high ¢ page 26 .
(D Note
- Auxilia ry headlights and ot her accesso ries in
front of the coo ling -air intake impa ir the
cooling effect of the coolant . This increases
the risk of the engine overheating dur ing
high outside temperat ures and heavy en-
gine load.
- The front spoiler a lso helps to distribute
cooling air correctly while driving. If the
spoiler is damaged, the cooling effect will
be impaired and the risk of the eng ine over -
heating will increase . See an authorized
Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Fa-
cility for assistance .
@ Tips
Diesel engines: due to the h igh efficiency of
these engines, the engine may not a lways
reach operat ing temperatu re in cold outside
temperat ures . This is norm al and not a cause
for concern.
Tachometer
The ta chometer displays the engine speed in rev-
olutions per minute (RPM).
The beg inning of t he red zone in the tachometer
indica t es the maxim um permissible engi ne speed
for all gea rs once t he engi ne ha s bee n broken in.
Before reach ing t his zone, you shou ld shift into
the next highest gear, select the D/S se lector lev-
er posit ion, or remove your foot from the acc eler-
ator pedal.
(D Note
The need le in the tachometer @ ¢ page 10,
fig . 3 or ¢ page 10, fig . 4 may on ly be in t he
red area of the gauge for a sho rt time or there
is a risk of engine damage . The location where
the red zone begins varies depending on the
engine. IJII,,
11
Cockpi t o v erv ie w

Trip odometer and odom et er

@ For the sake of the environment
The trip odometer shows the distance driven
Upshifting early helps you to save fuel and re-
s ince it was last reset. It can be used to measure
duces operating noise.
short distances .
@ Tips The t rip odometer ca n be reset to zero by press-
Depending on the engine : the engine speed ing the Efilreset button.
may be limited when the engine is cold - the The odometer shows the total distance that the
full engine output will not be ava ilable . When vehicle has been driven.
the engine is at operating temperature, the
red area in the tachometer moves to a higher Malfunction indicat or
RPM range . If there is a malfunc t ion in the instrumen t clus-
ter, DEF will appear in the trip odometer display .
Fuel level Have the malfunction corrected as soon as possi -
ble .
The display (j) ~ page 10, fig. 3 or ~ page 10,
fig. 4 only functions when the ign ition is swit ch- Cl) Tips
ed on . When the display has reached the reserve
The units of measurement can be set in the
mark, a red LEDturns on and the ~ indicator
light t urns on ~ page 31 . The red LEDwill blink Infotainment system ~ page 249.
when the fuel level is very low.
Multifunction steering
For the tank capacity in you r vehicle , refer to the
Technical Data ~ page 379.
wheel
Operating
Cl) Note
Never drive until the tank is completely emp-
ty. The irregular supp ly of fuel that results
from that can cause engine misfires . Uncom-
busted fuel will then enter the exhaust sys -
tem . This can cause overheating and damage
to the cata lytic converter .

Odometer

Fig. 6 Drive r info rma tion system display

Fig. 5 Ins trum e nt clust e r: odo me ter and reset bu tt on

Fig. 7 Left sid e of multifun ction ste ering wheel

Requir ement: th e ignition must be switched on. ..,.

12
 Cockpit overview

The drive r informa t ion system contains mult iple @ IVIEWIbutton

tabs © c:;,fig . 6 that display various information Switching views or red ucin g the d isp lay
@. ¢ page 14 .
The fo llow ing tab s are ava ilable, d epend ing o n
@ ~ Button
vehicle equ ipment:
Ret urn t o fu nctions at higher levels
First tab Vehicle (on-board computer)
<=>page15 @ Ill and @ control buttons
Se co nd Messages Open/close the se lecti on men u or options menu
tabal <=>
page 13.
Third tabb) Night vision ass ist* c:;,page 131
0 Left thumbwheel
Fourth tab Radio <=>page16
- Selecting a function in a menu/list : t urn the
Media c:;,page 16
left thumbwheel to the des ired function (fo r
Fifth t ab Telephone * c:;,p age 1 76
examp le, select ing a frequency).
Sixth tab Navigation" c:;,page 205 - Confirming a selection : press the left thumb-
Map* wheel (J) c:;,fig. 7.
•> This t ab is only visible when there is at least one indi cator - Zooming in/out on the map : whe n a map is
light or message displayed. disp layed, turn the left thumbw heel up/down
bl This tab is only visible if Night vision assist* has been act i- to zoom in/o ut on the map .
vated.

@ l<11>
I Button
- Switching tabs: press the !<1 t>I button re peat ed -
ly until t he des ired tab is shown (for example,
Radio).

Control buttons

Fig. 8 Sel ection menu and opt ions menu view

u
Left control button fu nction in t he se lecti on m enu us ing t he left
(0
t hum bwhee l (for examp le, select ing a freque n-
;::j - Opening/closing the selection menu : p ress the
r--.
cy band). ..,.
~ respe ctive left cont rol button on the st eer ing
0
~ wheel c:;,fig . 8. You can sele ct and co nfirm a
<t

13
Cockpit overview

Right control button Other function buttons

- Opening/closing the options menu : press the
respective right control button on the steering
whee l ~ fig. 8 . You can change any context-de-
pendent functions and settings using the left
thumbwheel (for example, additional station
information).

(D Tips
The availability of a se lection menu or options
menu depends on the function that is select- Fig. 11 Right side of the multifunction steering wheel
ed.
(D 0 Button
Switching views - Accepting a call: press the 0 button when
there is an incoming call.
- Ending a call: press the 0 button during an ac-
tive phone call.
- Opening the call list : if no phone call is in prog-
ress and there are no incoming calls, press the
0 button.
@ ~ Button
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit - Switching the voice recognition system on:
Fig. 9 Expanded view
briefly press the E:9
button. Say the desired
command after the Beep.
- Switching the voice recognition system off:
press and hold the [:9 button. Or: say the com-
mand Cancel.

For more information about the voice recognition

system, see ~ page 169, Voice recognition sys-
tem or Q page 249.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
Fig. 10 Classic view @ Right thumbwheel

You can adjust the volume of an audio source or a

Applies to: vehicles with Audi virtual cockpit
- Switching views: press the IVIEW! button @)
~ page 12, fig. 7 to sw itch from the classic
view ~ fig. 10 to the expanded view ~ fig. 9. To
return to the class ic view, press the IVIEW I but -
ton again .
Applies to : vehicles with analog instrument cluster
- Reducing the display: press the IVIEW I button
to switch from the classic to reduced d isplay .
To return to the class ic view, press the !VIEWI
button aga in.
system message (for example, from the voice
recognition system) when the sou nd is playing.
- Increasing or decreasing the volume: turn the
right thumbwheel up or down.
- Muting/pausing : press the right thumbwheel.
Or: turn the right thumbwheel down.
- Unmuting or resuming : turn the right thumb-
wheel up. Or: press the right thumbwheel.
© !144
1/ lt>t>I!Button
- Selecting the previous/next track or station :
press the l1<1
<1Ior lt>t>
II button . .,,.

14
 Cockpit overview

- Fast forwarding / rewinding audio files : press Resetting values to zero

or IC>1>
and hold the l1<l<II 1! button until the desired
Requirement: the Fuel consumption, Short-term
location in the file is reached. memory or Long-term memory display must be
®0 button I steering wheel heating ~ selected.

- Steering wheel heating (analog instrument
cluster) : for additional info rma tion, see
¢page 77.
- Programmable steering wheel button - open-
ing a function : press the m button on the mul -
tifunction steering whee l.
- Programmable steering wheel button - re-
questing a function : press and ho ld the m but -
ton .
- Programmable steering wheel button - chang·
ing a function : press and ho ld the m button.
Se lect and confirm an entry. Or
- Select in the Infotainment system: !MENUI but-
ton > Vehicle > left contro l button > Vehicle
settings > Steering wheel button assignment .
® Iq.. vl Button
- Repeating the last navigation prompt : press
the la,w
l button whe n route guidance is act ive .
"' To reset the val ue for the respect ive memory to
zero, press and hold the left t humbwheel 0
¢ page 12, fig. 7 on the multi function steering
wheel for one second. Or
"' On the multifunction steering wheel, select:
the right control button> Reset values.
Adjusting additional displays (Audi virtual
cockpit)*
"' On the multifunction steering wheel, select the
right control button > Additional display.
"' Select the desired additional display.
In the first tab (on -board comp uter), you can call
up the following disp lays one after the other by
turning the left thumbwheel on the mult ifunc-
tion steer ing wheel.
- Time and date ¢ page 249
- Digita l speedomete r*

- Changing the voice guidance volume : when - Average con sum ption
route guidance is active, t urn the right t hu mb - - AdBlue range* ¢page 318
whee l upward or downward during a navigat ion - Short-term memory overview
prompt. - Long-term memory overview
- Energy consumers ¢ page 16
Driver information - Driver assistance * ¢ page 107
- Tra ffic sign recognition* ¢ page 104
system
The short-te rm memory collects driving informa-
On-board computer
tion from the time the ignition is switched on un-
til it is switched off. If you continue driving w ith-
in two hours after switching the ignition off, the
new values are included when calculating the cur-
rent trip information.

Unlike the short-term memory, the long-term

memo ry is not erased automatically. You can se-
lect the time period for evaluating trip informa-
t ion yourse lf. ..,.

Fig. 12 Inst rument cluster: fuel consumption disp lay

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

15
Cockpi t o v er v iew
Fuel consumption
The current fue l cons umption can be shown us-
ing a bar graph ¢ fig . 12. The ave rage cons ump-
tion stored in the short-term memory is also dis-
played . If the ba r is green, your vehicle is saving
fue l through the following function:
- Recuperation: electrica l energy can be stored in
the vehicle battery when t he vehicle is coasting
or driving downhi ll. The bar will move toward
0 .
@ Tips
The date, time of day and t ime and date for-
mat can be set in the Infotainment system
¢page 249 .
Energy consumers
Fig. 13 Instrument cluste r: energy cons um e rs
In the Energy consumers view, the othe r equip-
ment that is currently affecting fuel consumption
is listed in the first tab (on-board computer) . The
d isplay shows up to three energy consumers @
¢ fig. 13 . The equ ipment using the most power is
listed first . If more tha n three items us ing power
are switched on, the equipment that is currently
using the most power is d isplayed.
A gauge @ also shows the current total con-
sumpt io n of all other consumers.
Radio
Requ irement: radio mode must be started
¢ page 223 and the radio/med ia tab must be
d isp layed .
.. Press the left control button on the mult ifunc-
tion steer ing whee l ¢ page 13 .
16
Depend ing on veh icle equipment, the following
functions may be avai lable in the driver informa -
t ion system.
- Selecting the frequen cy band: select and con-
firm a freq uency band .
- Selecting a station fr om the station list : select
and confirm a rad io station.
- Selecting a station from the preset s list : select
and confirm Preset s and then a radio station .
- Opening a media source : se lect and confi rm To
media .
Addition a l sett ings
- Select: right control button> desired entry.
Depend ing on the function selected, the follow-
ing additional settings may be possible :
- "Now Playing" screen: see ¢ page 227 .
'
Media
Requirement: a media drive must contain audio/
video files ¢ page 229 and the radio/med ia tab
must be d isp layed .
.. Press the left control button r=;,page 13.
Depend ing on veh icle equipment, t he following
funct ions may be ava ilable in the dr iver informa-
tion system.
- Selecting a media source: select and confirm a
so urce such as the SD card.
- Change to radio: select and confirm To radio .
- Playing an audio/v ideo file : select and confirm
a file .
- Pausing/ resuming playback: press the right
thumbwhee l @ ¢ page 14, fig . 11. To resume
playback, press the right t hu mbwheel again.
- Restarting playback of an audio fi le: select the
fi le that is currently playing , if necessary . Press
t he left thumbwheel.
- Opening additional tra ck information : select:
right control button > Show "Now Playing"
screen.
For additional information , see ¢ page 240.
 Cockpit overview

Recent calls: the recent calls list contains all in-

@ Tips
- The media drives do not play files that are
prot ecte d by ORM and that are identified
with the symbol~-
- Please note that within a media source in
the driver information system, only playlists
that were selected through the MMI control
panel can be played¢ page 238.
- Pay attention to the Infotainment system
display if necessary. Depending on these-
lected function, it may be necessary to use
the MMI control panel.
Telephone
Appl ies to: vehicles with tele ph one
coming, outgoing and missed calls.
Caller information: the name, phone number or
Unknown appears in the driver information sys-
tem display depending on if the caller has been
stored in the directory and if the phone number
has been transmitted.
Functions during an incoming call
-Answering a call: press the left thumbwheel
when there is an incoming call.
- Declining a call: select and confirm Decline
when there is an incoming call.
- Ending a phone call: select and confirm End
call .
Functions during a phone call :

- Making an additional call : select and confirm

Hold call. Press the left control button > Direc-
tory or Call list > an entry.
- Answering a call while in a call and while
there is another call on hold : select and con-
firm Answer . The active call is replaced with the
incom ing call.

Additional functions include:

Fig. 14 Example: telep hone functior-is in the driver infor-
mation system
Requirement : a cell phone must be connected to
the MMI ¢ page 176 and the telephone tab
must be displayed.
~ Press the left control button on the multifunc-
tion steering wheel.
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
functions may be available in the driver informa-
tion system.
Mute : if you select and confirm this function, the
other person on the phone cannot hear you. You
can hear the other person .
Holding/resuming a call : you can put a current
call on hold and resume a call.
Swap call: you can alternate between two phone
calls at the same time . One of the calls will be on
hold. End call ends the active phone call. A call
that was placed on hold stays on hold and can be
taken off hold with Resume.

- Accessing a contact : select and confirm Call Conference call: a call on hold and up to five ac-
list/ Favorites/ Directory . Select and confirm tive parties (depending on the cell phone service
a contact. provider) can be added to a conference call. To
make an additional call, put all participants in
Directory contacts : the driver information sys-
the current conference call on hold using Hold .
tem only displays directory contacts that have a
By pressing the left control button, you can make
phone number stored. If several phone numbers
additional calls from the directory or the call list.
are stored with a contact, the list of stored num-
u
(0
Resume takes all parties off hold . .,.
......
N
bers is displayed first when the entry is selected .
r--.
N
......
For more information about the displayed sym-
0
0 bols , refer to ¢ page 184.
:E
<t

17
Cockpi t o v erv ie w

Additional settings
@ Tips
- Select: righ t con t rol button> desired entry.
- The telephone functions can only be con-
tro lled with the multifunction steering Depend ing on the function selected, the follow-
whee l if the telephone equipment was in- ing addi t ional settings may be possible :
stalled at the factory.
- page 216
Map display r::!>
- The telephone functions depend on the cell
- Day/night map r::!>page216
phone and whether they are supported by
- page 216
Map or ientat ion r::!>
your cell phone service provider or not.
- Automatic zoom r::!>page 217
- The Call wait ing function must be activated
in your cell phone and in the MMI to be
alerted when there is an incoming call dur- Navigation view with route guidance
ing an active call. The call options depe nd started
Appl ies to: vehicles with navigat ion system and Aud i virt ual
o n the cell phone and serv ice provider. You cockpit
can obtain more informat ion from yo ur ce ll
phone se rvice provider.

Navigation
App lies to: vehicles w ith navigation system

Requirement: a destination must be entered

page 206, route g uidance must be started and
r::!>
the navigation tab must be disp layed.
Fig. 15 Standard map w hen ro ute guidance is active (Audi
"' Press the left control button on the mult ifunc- virtual cockpit)
page 13.
tion st eering whee l r:!>
Requireme nt: a dest inat ion must be entered
Depending on vehicle eq uipment, t he following page 206, route guidance must be sta rt ed and
r::!>
fu nctions may be available in the d river informa- t he naviga t ion tab m ust be displayed.
tion system .
Depend ing o n the vehicle equipment and these-
- Displaying navigation during active route lected view r::!>page 14, t he following informa t ion
guidance: select and confirm Map or Street will be displayed in the d river info rmation sys-
view* (analog instr ument clust er). tem :
- Showing the map when route guidance is not
active : se lect and confirm Map . <DMap content (such as po ints of int erest)
- Accessing last destinations : se lect and confirm @ Current vehicle position
Last destination s > the desired destination .
@ A bar graph appears when there is an upcom-
- Accessing f avorite s: select and confirm Favor-
ing turn. The fewer bars are shown, the shorter
ites> the desired destination.
the d istance is unt il the turn . If there is not an
- Starting route guidance to the stored home
upcoming turn, the distance to the destination/
addre ss: se lect and confi rm Cancel route guid-
stopover and the calcu lated arriva l t ime is dis-
ance if necessary and then Home address.
played in the right speedometer.
If you have not started route guidance, a com-
@ Name of the street where you are currently
pass (in the analog instr ument cluster) or a map
driving
(Audi virtua l cockp it)* will be disp layed.

- Canceling active route guidance: on the multi-

funct ion steer ing wheel, select: right control
button > Cancel route guidance.

18
 Cockpit overview

Map view with route guidance started
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and map view
Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can al-
so have the active route guidance display in the
map view* in the driver information system .
W1 St
Ill
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
information may be shown in the driver informa-
t ion system .
(D Distance to the destination or stopover
@ Distance to the next maneuver
® Display of the road that is currently being
traveled or the road that you will turn onto dur-
ing the next maneuver
@ Map content such as points of interest or traf-
fic information

Zooming in/out on the map (Zoom): when a

map is displayed, turn the left thumbwheel
down/up to zoom in/out on the map.
Fig. 16 Diagra m : map when rou te guidanc e has started
(ana log inst ru me nt cluster )

Requirement : a destination must be entered

q page 206, route guidance must be started and
the navigation tab must be displayed.

Street view with route guidance started

Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and street view

Depending on the vehicle equipment, the active route guidance will be displayed in the street view* in
the driver information system .
I~
lg
!:r;
:~

Fig. 17 Example: display of a turn in the street view (analog instr ument clus ter)

Requirement: a destination must be entered (D Distance to the destination or stopover

q page 206, route guidance must be started and @ Displaying an expressway, highway or main
the navigation tab must be displayed . road as preparation for an upcoming change
u
(0 Depending on vehicle equipment, the following in direction
......
N
r--.
N
information may be shown in the driver informa- ® Lane recommendation
......
0 tion system 9 fig. 17: @ Calculated arriva l time
0
:E
<t

19
Cockpi t o v erv ie w
® Dist ance to the next maneuver
@ Display of the expressway, highway or main
road onto whic h you will be turn ing
(z) Direct ion arrow for the upcoming maneuver
® A bar graph appears when a direction arrow
is displayed. The fewer bars are shown, the
shorter the distance is unt il the turn .
® Current vehicle positio n
@ Addit ional information (on-board computer)
The f oll ow ing funct ions are also available when
route guidance is active:
- Changing the voice guidance volume: turn the
right thumbwhee l up or down dur ing voice
guidance.
& WARNING
The route calculated by the navigation system
is a recommendation for reaching your desti-
nation. Obey traffic lights, stopping restric -
tions, one-way streets, lane change restr ic-
tions, etc.
@ Tips
- Also see the chapter c::>page 8, Controls at a
glance.
- An exclamation point" !" in front of the
street name indicates that the informat ion
about this street or this section of the route
is not comp lete in the navigation data con-
tained in the MMI. Obey traffic laws in one-
way streets and pedestria n zones.
Head-up display
Appl ies t o: vehicles with head-up di splay
Fig. 18 Instrument panel : knob fo r the head-up d isplay
20
The head-up disp lay proj ects certain wa rnings or
selected information from the assist systems* or
navigation * on the windsh ield . The display ap-
pears w ith in the driver's field of vision.
Switching on/ off
.. To switch t he head-up display on or off, press
the knob~ ¢ fig . 18.
Adjusting the height
The height of the display can be adjusted to t he
individ ual driver.
.. Make sure you are seated correctly
page 257 .
c::>
.. Turn the knob~ to adjust the disp lay.
Settings in the Infotainment system
.. Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
sistance > Head-up display.
Display content
In the Infotainment system, you can specify
which information should be disp layed: For ex-
ample, this can include navigation information*,
adaptive cruise control* or camera-based traffic
sign recognition*.
The display of certain information and some of
the red indicator lights cannot be hidden in the
Infotainment system.
Brightness
You can adjust the display brightness in the Info-
ta inment system. The display br ightness decreas-
es automatically as the amount of light decreas-
es. The background brightness is adjusted w ith
the instr ument illumination c::>
page 52.
Picture rotation
You can rotate the picture in the Infotainment
system clockwise or counterclockwise .
(D Note
To prevent scrat ches on the glass covering the
head-up display, do not place any objects in
the projection opening. ..,_
 Cockpit overview

@ Tips On-Board Diagnostics

- Sunglasses w ith polarization filters and un -

favorable lighting conditions can have a
negative effect on the display.
- An optimum display depends on the seat
position and the height adjustment of the
head-up display.
- A specia l windshield is needed for the head-
up d isplay function.
- For information on cleaning, see ¢ table In-
terior cleaning on page 356. Fig. 19 Locatio n of Data Link Connector (DLC)

On-Board Diagnostics monitors the components

On-Board Diagnostic
System (OBD)
Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
The malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) ¢'4
in the
instrument cluster is part of the On-Board Diag-
nostic System (OBD II).
The indicator light turns on when the ignition is
switched on and turns off once the engine is
started and is running in idle at a stable speed.
This indicates that the MIL is functioning correct-
ly.
If the light does not turn off after starting the
engine or turns on while driving, this may indi-
cate there is a malfunction in the engine. If the
indicator turns on, the catalytic converter may be
damaged .
Drive with reduced engine performance (avoid
high speeds for extended periods of time and/or
fast acceleration) and have the malfunction cor-
rected. See an authorized Audi dealer or author -
ized Audi Service Facility .
of your emission control system. Each monitored
component in your engine system has been as-
signed a code. In case of a malfunction , the com-
ponent will be identified and the fault stored as a
code in the control module memory.
The MIL light may also illuminate if there is a
leak in the on-board fuel vapor recovery system.
If the light illuminates after a refueling, stop the
vehicle and make sure the fuel f iller cap is prop-
erly closed (only vehicles with gasoline engine)
<=>page 316 .
In order to make an accurate diagnosis, the st or-
ed data can only be displayed using special diag-
nostic equipment (generic scan tool for OBD).
In order to connect the special diagnostic equip-
ment, push the plug into the Data Link Connector
(DLC). The DLCis located to the right of the hood
release ¢ fig . 19 .
Your authorized Aud i dealer or qualified work-
shop can interpret the code and perform the nec-
essary repair.

The electronic speed limiter may be faulty if the _& WARNING

~ ~·
indicator light turns on . For additional informa-
Do not use the diagnostic connector for per-
tion, see ¢ page 102, Electronic speed limiter .
sonal use. Incorrect usage can cause malfunc-
The MILindicator light may also turn on if the tions, which can increase the risk of a colli-
fuel filler cap is not closed correctly sion!
c>page 316 .

u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

21
Cockpi t o v er v iew

Indicator lights Cooling system

r=;,page 26
Description
Engine oil pressure
The indicato r lights in the inst rument cluste r r=;,page 27
blink or t ur n on. They indicate funct ions or ma l- Engine oil level
functions . ¢ page 27
Messages may appear with some indicator lights . Alterna t or
A wa rni ng signal w ill sound at the same time. ¢ page 27
The indica t or lights and messages in the instru-
Safety be lt
ment cluster display can be covered by other d is-
¢ page 27
plays. To show them again, select the second tab
with the mu ltifunction steering wheel ¢ page 12 . Electromechanical power steer ing,
If there are several malfunctions, you can display a ll-wheel steering* ,/
them one at a time using the thumbwheel. ¢ page 152
Steering lock
Some ind icator lights in the disp lay can display in
¢ page 28
several colors .
Engine start system
r=;,page 28
& Central indicator light
Transmission
If the . or Q indicator light turns on, check ¢ page 95
the message in the instrument cluster .
Hood
¢ page 28
Overview
Adaptive cruise contro l* ,/
Some ind icator lights turn on briefly as a function r=;,page 109
check when you switch the ign ition on . These sys-
Traffic jam ass ist*
tems are marked with a./ in the following tables .
¢ page 114
If one of these indicato r lights does not t urn on,
there is a malfunction in that system . Air suspension*
r=;,page 28
Red indicator lights
--------------
Central indicator light
Night vision assist*
r=;,page 132
r=;,page 2 2,
Night vision assist*
Aud i pre sense*
r=;,
page 132
r=;,page 117
Ad Blu e*
USA models :
r=;,page 318
Brake system ,/
r=;,page 25 Ad Blue*
Canada models: ¢ page 318
Brake system .I
Yellow indicator lights
r=;,page 25 --------------
Centra l indicator light
USA models :
r=;,page 22
Elect romechanica l parking brake
r=;,page 26 Electronic Stabilization Contro l
(ESC)
Canada models:
¢ page 29
Elect romecha nica l park ing brake
r=;,page 26

22
 Cockpit overview

Electronic Stabilization Control Engine oil sensor

(ESC)./ ¢ page 31
¢page29 Engine warm -up request
Electronic Stabilization Control ¢ page 31
(ESC)
Battery charge
¢ page 149
c>page 27
Brake system
Tank system
¢ page29
i=>page 31
USA models:
Washer fluid level
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)./
¢ page 31
¢ page29
Windshield wipers
Canada models:
¢ page 31
Anti-lock braking system (ABS)./
¢ page29 Remote control key
Safety systems ./ ¢ page 82
¢ page29 Driver's door
USA models: ¢ page 31
Brake pads Battery in remote control key
¢ page29 ¢ page 36
Canada models: Bulb failure indicator
Brake pads ¢ page 31
¢ page29
Headlight range control system
Electromechanical parking brake ¢ page 32
¢ page26
Adaptive light*
Tire pressure c>page 32
¢ page 351
Light/rain sensor
' Tire pressure c>page 32
_ ¢ page351
Active lane assist*
- Engine control c>page 124
¢page30
Audi side assist*
Engine control (diesel engine) c>page 131
¢ page30
Audi pre sense*
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ¢ page 122
./
Night vision assist*
¢ page30
c>page 134
Diesel particulate filter*
¢ page30 Parking aid*
c>page 146
Engine speed limitation
¢ page 30 Transmission
c>page 95
Engine oil level (MIN)
¢ page27 Steering lock
u
co
...... c>page28
N Engine oil level (MAX)
r-...
N
...... ¢ page326 Engine start system
0
0 c>page28
:E:
'<t

23
Cockpi t o v er v iew

Electromechan ical power stee ring, Active lane assist*

all-wheel steer ing* page 124
c::>
<=:>
page 152 Predictive eff iciency assist*
Air suspension* <=:>
page 105
c::>
page28
USA models:
Air suspension* Predictive efficiency assist *
c::>page28 <=:>
page 105
Sport differentia l* Canada model s:
c::>
page32 Predictive eff iciency assist *
Backrest* <=:>
page 105
page 61
c::> Predictive eff iciency assist*
¢ page 105
Emergency call function*
c::>
page204 Predictive eff iciency assist*
c::>
page 105
Ad Blue*
page 318
c::> Predictive eff iciency assist*
<=:>
page 105
Ad Blue*
page 318
c::> Hill descent assist
c::>
page 150
Other indicator lights
-Turn
-------------
signa ls
Start/Stop system*
c::>
page 84
<=:>
page 32
Start/Stop system*
Trailer turn signals*
~ page 84
c::>page33
Remote control key
USA models : c::>
page 84
Cruise control system*
<=:>page102 Ad Blue*
page 318
c::>
Canada mod e ls:
Cruise control system* Transmission
<=:>
page 102 page 95
c::>

Adapt ive cruise control* Air suspension*

<=:>
page 109 page 13 7
c::>

Adapt ive cruise control* Adaptive cruise contro l*

<=:>
page 109 page 110,
c::>
Traffic j am assist*
Adapt ive cruise control*
¢ page 116
<=:>page109
Traffic j am assist*
Adaptive cruise control*
page 116
c::>
<=:>
page 109
Audi pre sense*
Adaptive cruise control *
<=:>
page 122
page 110, c::>
c::> page 113
USA mode ls:
Adapti ve cruise control *
)\\ page 113
c::>
Elect romechanical parking brake
c::>
page 26
Traffi c jam assist*
page 114
c::>

24
 Coc k pit o v e rv iew

Canada mod els: If the ABSind icator light 9 (USAmodels) I

liJ Bl
(Canada models), the ESCindicator light

I.
Elect romechanical pa rking bra ke
¢page 26 and the brake system indicator light 1111 (USA
Hill descent assist models) (Canada models) all turn on and
c::;,page150
t his message appears, then the ABS, ESCand
&..
braking distribution are malfunctioning c::;,
Child safety lock
c::;,page43 Do not continue dr iving. See an author ized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility for as-
USA models :
&. .
s istance c::;,
Speed warning system*
c::;,page102 1111(USA model s) / . (Canada model s) Park-
Canada model s: ing brake : malfunction! Safely stop vehicle. See
Speed warn ing system * owne r's manual
¢page 102 - If the indicator light and the message appear
Active lane ass ist* w hen the vehicle is stationar y or after switch-
¢page 124 ing the ignition on, check if you can re lease the
Audi side assist* parking brake. If you cannot release the park-
page 131
c::;,
ing brake, see an author ized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility. If you can release
Camera-based traffic sign recogni- the parking brake and the message st ill ap-
tion* pea rs, see an author ized Audi dealer or author-
page 105
c::;,
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
Night vision assist* t he ma lfu nction corrected.
page 134
c::;,
- If the indicator light and message appear wh ile
'
High beam assistant*
D
AUTO page 49
c::;,
driv ing, the hill start ass ist or emergency brak-
ing function may be ma lfunctioning. It may not
High beams be possible to set t he par king brake or re lease
c::;,
page 49, it once it has been set. Do not park your vehicle
High beam assistant* on hills . See an authorized Audi dea ler or au -
page 49
c::;, thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
Brake booster : restri cted . You can cont inue driv-
BRAKE
/(©)Brake system ing . Please conta ct Service

If th is indicator light turns on, there is a malfunc- There is a ma lfunction in the brake booster. The
tion in the brake system. brake booste r is available, but its effectiveness is
red uced. Braking behavior may be different from
1111( USA models ) / . (Canada models )
how it normally funct ions and the brake pedal
Brakes: stop vehicle and check bra ke fluid level
may vibrate .
Stop the vehicle and check the bra ke fluid level.
Drive to an authori zed Audi dealer or autho rized
See an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have t he
Service Facility for assistance if necessary .
malfunction corrected.
1111( USA mod els) / . (Canada mod els)
Brakes: ma lfuncti on! Stop vehicle safely A WARNING
u If the indicator light turns on and th is message - Read and fo llow the warnings in
co
......
N appears, there is a malfunction in the brake c::;,
page 322, Working in the engine com-
r-...
N
...... boos t er. partment before opening the hood and
0
0 checking the brake fluid level.
:E:
'<t

25
Cockpi t o v er v iew
- If the brake system indicator light does not
turn off or it turns on while driv ing, the
brake fluid level in the reservoir is too low,
and this increases the risk of an acc ident .
Stop the vehicle and do not continue dr iv-
ing . See an author ized Audi dealer or au-
tho rized Aud i Serv ice Facility fo r ass istance.
- If the bra ke system indicator light turns on
together with the ABS and ESC ind icator
ligh t s, the ABS/ ESC regula t ing func t ion may
be malfunctioning. Functions that stabili ze
the vehicle are no longer ava ilable . This
could cause the vehicle to swerve, which in-
creases the risk that the ve hicle w ill slide.
Do not continue driving. See an author ized
Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facili-
ty for assistance.
PARK/(
®)/!®Electromechanical parking
brake
If t he - (USA models) I. (Canada models)
ind icator lig ht t ur ns on , the par king brake was
se t .
If t he - (USA models)/ . (Canada mode ls) in-
d ica t or light is blin king , the bra king fo rce has not
bu ilt up e nough o r it has decre ased. Select t he P
selec t or leve r posit ion t o secure the veh icle .
Make sure the indicator light is off befo re yo u
start driving.
Ill Parking brake: malfunction! Please contact
Service
There is a malfunc t ion in the park ing brake . Drive
to a n author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi
Serv ice Facility im medi at ely to have t he m alfunc-
t ion cor rec t ed .
II ( USA models )/ (Ci1)(Canada model s) Parking
brake: caution! Vehicle parked too steep
There is not enoug h braking force to hold the ve-
hicle in place. The brakes have over heated. The
ve hicle co uld ro ll away eve n on a small incline.
Ill (USA models )/ ¢Cil)J
( Canada models ) Parking
brake : applied
26
If this message appears, press the brake pedal
first and then release the parking brake if neces-
sa ry.
Ill (USA model s)/ ¢Ci1)
(Canada models) Parking
brake: emergency braking
The eme rgency brak ing func t ion was tr iggered .
Please release parking brake
Releas e the parking brake if this message ap-
pears.
Please press brake pedal to relea se parking
brake
To release t he pa rking brake , press t he brake
pedal and press t he ~ bu t ton at t he same time,
o r start driving with hill start assis t q page 88,
Starting to drive.
(D Tips
For addi t iona l informat ion on the parking
brake, see ~ page 8 7.
-L Cooling system
• Turn off engine and check coolant level. See
owner 's manual
The coo lant level is too low.
Do not con t inue dr iving and switch the e ng ine
off. Che ck the coolant leve l q page 328 .
- If the coo lant level is too low, add coolant
q page 328 . Only continue driving once the in-
dicato r ligh t turns off.
• Coolant temperature: too high . Let engine
run with vehicle stationary
Let the engine run at idle fo r a few min utes to
cool off, until the indicator light turns off .
- If the indicator light does not tu rn off, do no t
continue driving the vehicle. See an authorized
Audi dea le r or a uthori zed Audi Service Facility
for assistance.
A WARNING
- Never open the hood if you can see or hear
steam or coolant escaping from the engine

compartment. This increases the risk of
burns. Wa it until you no longer see or hear
steam or coolant escaping .
- The engine compartment in any vehicle can
be a dangerous area. Stop the eng ine and
allow it to cool before working in the engine
compartment. Always follow the informa -
t io n found in ¢ page 322, Working in the
engine compartment.
(I) Note
Do not continue driving if the . ind icator
light turns on as this increases the risk of en -
gine damage.
~ Safety belt
The . ind icator light stays on unt il the drive r's
and front passenger's safety be lts are fastened.
Above a certain speed, t here will also be a wa rn-
ing tone .
@ Tips
For addit iona l information on safety be lts ,
see ¢ page 265.
t3 Generator/vehicle battery
If the . or (•) indicator light turns on, there is a
malfunct ion in the generato r o r the veh icle elec-
tr ica l system .
• Electrical system: malfunction! Safel y stop
vehicle
Do not cont inue d riving and switc h the eng ine
off. See an a utho rized Aud i de al e r or aut hor ized
Audi Service Facility for assistance .
(•) Electrical system: malfunction! Res tart not
poss ible . Please conta ct Service
The vehicle battery was disconnected from the
vehicle electrical system and will no longer
charge . Drive to an author ized Audi dealer or au-
thor ized Audi Se rvice Facility immed iate ly.
u Do not stop the engine, or you will not be able to
co
......
N
r-...
start it aga in . If you can no longer sta rt the en-
N
...... g ine , see an authori zed Audi dealer or authorized
0
0
:E: Audi Service Fac ility for assistance.
'<t
Coc k pit o v e rv iew
(•) F.lectricalsystem: malfunction! Please con-
tact Se rvice
Drive t o an authori zed Audi dealer or autho rized
Audi Service Facility immed iate ly. Because the ve-
hicle battery is discharging, turn off all unneces-
sary el ectrical equipment such as the radio . See
an a utho rized Aud i dea ler or authorized Audi
Service Facility if the battery charge level is too
low.
(•) Electrical system: low battery charge. Bat-
tery will be charged while driving
The st arting ability may be impa ired.
If this message tu rns off after a little whi le, the
vehicle battery cha rged e nough while driving.
If the message does not turn off and stay off
whe n driving, have an author ized Audi dealer or
autho rized Aud i Serv ice Facility repa ir the mal-
funct ion.
't:::?: Engine oil pressure
• Turn off engine . Oil press ure too low
Stop the engine and do not cont inue d riving.
Check the eng ine oi l level ¢ page 326 .
- If the eng ine o il level is too low, add engine oil
¢ page 326 . Only continue driving once the in-
d icator light turns off .
- If the engine oil level is correct and the indica-
tor light still turns on, turn t he e ngine off and
do not cont inue driving . See an authorized Aud i
deale r or a uthorized Aud i Service Facility fo r as-
sis t ance .
(D Tips
The oil pressure warni ng is not an oil level in-
dicator. Always check the oil level regularly .
~ Engine oil level (MIN)
• Please add oil immediatel y.
Add engine oil immediately ¢ page 326.
El Please add max. x qt (l) oil. You can contin·
ue driving Ill-
27
Cockpi t o v er v iew
Add the maximum amount of oil indicated in the
disp lay as soon as possible ¢ page 326.
~ - Steering lock
• Steerin g : malfunction ! Please stop ve hicle
There is a malfunction in the electronic stee ring
lock. You cannot t urn the ignition on .
Do not tow your vehicle because it cannot be
st eered. See an aut horized Audi dealer or aut hor-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance .
EllSteerin g lock: malfunc ti on! Please contact
Service
There is a malfunction in the electronic steering
lock.
Drive to an authori zed Audi dea ler or authori zed
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunct ion corrected.
A WARNING
-
Do not tow your veh icle when the re is a mal-
function in the electronic stee ring lock - this
increases the risk of an accident.
~ Engine start system
• Eng ine start system : malfunction ! Please
con tact Service
Do not switch the ignit ion off because you may
not be able to switc h it on aga in.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
=
malfunct ion corrected .
Engine start system : malfunction ! Please
contact Service
There is a malfunction in the engine start ing sys-
tem.
Drive to an authorized Audi dea ler or authorized
Audi Service Facility imm ediately to have t he
malfunct ion corrected.
28
Hood
· c:::::::,
• Warning! Hood is not locked. Stop vehicl e
and check the lock
If t he indicator light turns on and the message
appears , the hood locking mechanism is not en-
gaged correctly .
Stop immediately and close the hood
¢ page 323 .
0/Q Air suspension
Applies to: vehicles with air suspension
• Air s uspension : malfunction . Saf ely stop ve -
hicle . Stee ring and ground cle arance limited
Due to a system malfunction, your vehicle's
ground clearance is very low at the front or rea r
axle* (in veh icles with all-wheel stee ring). Be-
cause of this, the wheels no longer have enoug h
clea rance t o steer correctly.
See an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility for assis t ance .
• Air suspens ion: mal funct ion! You can con-
t inue driving slowl y. Speed limited to max.
35 mph (60 km/ h)
There is a ma lfunction that can resu lt in restrict-
ed driving st ability. The speed is limited to a
maximum of 35 mph (60 km/h) .
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the
malfunc t ion corrected .
• Air suspens ion: malfunction! You may con-
tinue driving slowl y at max. 3 5 mph (6 0 km/ h)
There is a ma lfunction that can res ult in restric t -
ed driving stability .
Drive to an authori zed Audi dealer or authori zed
Audi Service Facility immediate ly at a maxim um
speed of 35 mph (60 km/h) to have the malfunc-
tion corrected .
• Air sus pension: s ervice mode. Vehicle can be
moved but handling may be impaired
Carefully drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
autho rized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the service mode deactivated. jll,,
 Cockpit overview

II Air suspension: malfunction! Please contact Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Service Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the
malfunction corrected.
There is a system malfunct ion that can result in
rest ricted driving stability or reduced ground
clearance.
(D Tips
For additional infor mat ion on ESCand ABS,
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized see ¢ page 148.
Audi Service Facility imm ediately to have the
malfunct ion corrected.
!f Safety systems
II Air suspension: vehicle too low. Limited
ground clearance The E,iindicator light monitors the safety sys-
tems.
The ground clearance is very low due to a system
malfunction. Wait until the air suspension sys- If the m indicator light turns on or blinks, there
tem has restored normal ground clearance . Oth- is a ma lfunction in a safety system .
erwise, conditions such as an uneven road surface Drive t o an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
can lead to vehicle damage . Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the
B Suspension : malfunction! You may continue malfunction corrected.
driving
,&
~
WARNING
-
There is a suspension control malfunction .
Have the safety systems inspected immedi-
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized ately. Otherwise, there is a risk that the sys-
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the tems may not activate during a collision,
malfunct ion corrected. which increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
J=J,t
!J Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
((D) Brake system
If the D] indicator light blinks wh ile driving, the
ESCor ASR (Anti -Slip Regulation) is actively regu- liJBrakes overheating. Please shift to D
lating .
There was a heavy load on the brakes. Place the
G1
If thE: indicator light turns on, the system has selector lever in the D/S position in order to use
switched the ESCoff. In this case, you can switch the engine brak ing effect and reduce the load on
the ignition off and then on to switch the ESCon the brakes.
again. The ind icator light turns off when the sys-
tem is functioning fully. wt:t./(0)Brake pads
If thefilindicator light turns on, ESCwas
II (USA models).!EiJ (Canada models) Brake
switched off using the !B,«Ibutton <=>
page 148 .
pads: wear limit reached. You can continue driv-
Stabilization control (ESC/ ABS): malfunction! ing. Please contact Service
See owner's manual
The brake pads are worn.
DJindicator
If thE: light and the fJ]J(USA mod -
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized
els)/11] (Canada models) ABS indicator light turn
Audi Service Facility as soon as possible to have
on and the message appears, there is a malfunc-
the malfunction corrected .
tion in the ABS or the electronic differential lock.
u This also causes the ESCto malfunct ion. The
co
......
N
r-... brakes still funct ion w ith their normal power, but
N
...... ABS is not active .
0
0
:E:
'<t

29
Cockpi t o v er v iew
d::, Engine control
II Drive system : malfunction! Please contact
Service
There is an engine control malfunction .
Drive s low ly to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thor ized Audi Service Facility to have the engine
checked .
W Engine control (diesel engine)
Applies to: vehicles with diesel engines
The engine is preheat ing if the El
indicato r light
turns on when the ign ition is switched on.
If the indicator light does not turn on or blinks
while driving, there is an eng ine control malfunc -
tion .
Immediately drive slowly to an authori zed Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Serv ice Facility to have
the malfunction corrected.
o Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL)
The malfunction indicato r lamp (MIL) is part of
the On-Board Diagnostic System (080 II). The
¢..ijc;ymbol turns on when the ign ition is switched
on and t urns off again on ce the eng ine is started
and running at a steady id le speed . This indicates
that the MIL is functioning correctly.
The indica t or light turns on if there is a malfunc-
tion in the engine electronics . See an a uthorized
Aud i dea ler o r a uthorized Audi Serv ice Facility to
have the ma lfunction corrected . For additiona l
information, see c>page 21.
The indicator light can also turn on if the fuel fill-
er cap is not closed correct ly ~ page 316.
effls> Diesel particulate filter
Applies to: vehicles with diesel engine and diesel particulate
filter
II Particulate filt er: malfunction! See owner's
manual
The diesel pa rticulate filter requires regene ra-
tion. To suppo rt the fil t er's se lf-cleani ng func-
tion :
30
Drive app roximate ly 15 m inutes at a minimum
speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) with the se lector lev-
er in S, and ma intain an engine speed of approxi-
mately 2,000 RPM. The result ing temperature in-
crease can burn off the soot in the filter. The ind i-
cator light will turn off when the cleaning has
completed successfully .
If the indicator light does not turn off, drive im-
med iate ly to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Se rvice Facility to have the malfunct ion
corrected .
A WARNING
Always adapt your speed to the cur rent
weather, road and traffic cond it ions. You
should never d isobey traffic laws in order to
follow dr iving recommendations.
(D Tips
For additional informat ion on the d iesel pa r-
ticulate filte r, see c>page 321.
!?>iEngine speed limitation
II) Engine speed maximum XXXX RPM
The eng ine speed is automatically limited to the
speed displayed in the inst rument cluste r. This
pro t ects t he engine from overheati ng.
The eng ine speed limita t ion deactivates once the
engine is no longe r in the critical temperatu re
range and you have re leased the accelerator ped-
al once .
If the engine speed limitation was activated by
an engine cont rol malfunct ion, the II ind icator
light a lso turns on. Make sure the engine speed
does not go above t he speed displayed, for exam -
ple when downshif t ing . Drive t o an authori zed
Audi dealer or au t horized Audi Service Fac ility im-
med iate ly to have the ma lfunction corrected.
(D Tips
Depending on t he engine: t he engine speed
may be limited when the eng ine is co ld - the
full engine output will not be available. When
the eng ine is at operating temperature, the II>
 Coc k pit o v e rv iew

red area in the tachometer moves to a higher li}'J

Tank system : malfunction! Please cont act
RPM range. Service
The re is a m al function in the fuel tank system.
~....Engine oil sensor
Drive to an author ized Audi dealer or authorized
• Oil level syste m: malfunction! Please co n- Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the
tact Service malfunction corrected.
The sensor to check the engine oil leve l has
fa iled. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or au -
(D Tips

thorized Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have For more information on fuel ing, see
the ma lfunction corrected . c:;,page 316.

• Oil level sen sor: o il change nece ss ary. Please

contact Service
Fue l has en t ered the eng ine oi l as a res ult of fre -
q uent short dr ives . Avoid hig h engine speeds, full
acceleration and heavy engine loads . Drive to an
authorized Audi dealer or authoriz ed Audi Service
Facility immediately to have the oil changed .
~ Washer fluid level
mPlease add was her fluid
Fill the washer fluid for the windsh ield washer
system and the headlight washer system * when
the ignit ion is switched off 9 page 331.

• Oil press ure se nsor: malfunction ! Please ~ , Windshield wipers

contact Service
There is a malfunction in the oil pressure sensor.
Drive to an autho rized Aud i dea le r o r a uthorized
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunct ion corrected.
f Engine warm-up request
n Please warm up eng ine
Fue l has entered the engine oi l, either from low
outside temperat ures or freq uent short drives.
Drive unti l the engine is warm so that the fue l in
the eng ine oil will evaporate. Avoid high engine
speeds, full acce lerating and heavy eng ine loads
when doing this.
$ vVindshield wipers : malfun ction ! Please con-
tact Service
The re is a ma lfunction w ith t he windshield wip-
ers .
Drive to an author ized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi Service Facility immed iately to have the
malfunction corrected .
~ Driver's door
IJI Driver's door: malfun ction! Shift to P before
leaving vehicle . See owner's manual
The re is a ma lfunction in the d river's door . Select
t he P selector leve r pos ition to secure the vehicle.

Drive to an au t horized Audi dealer or authorized

BilTank system Audi Service Facility immed iately to have the
ID'J
Please refuel malfu nction corrected.

If the indicator light turns on for the f irst time

Bulb failure indicator
-:cp:-
and the message appea rs, there are about 2.6
gal lons (10 liters) of fuel left in the tank . If the II ind icator light tu rns o n, a bulb has
failed. The message indica t es the location of the
u
li}'J
Please refuel immediately
co bulb. Replace the bulb immediately.
......
N
r-...
If the indicator light t urns on the message ap-
N Vehicle light s : malfunction! Please contact
...... pears, the fue l tank is almost empty. Refuel the
0
0 Service
:E: vehicle immediate ly.
'<t

31
Cockpi t o v er v iew
There is a malfunction in the headlights or the
light switch. Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or
author ized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to
have the ma lfunction corrected.
.,&.WARNING
- light bul bs are under pressure and can ex-
plode when bulbs are replaced, which in-
creases the risk of injury .
- With HID headlights (xenon headlights), the
high -voltage component must be handled
correctly . Othe rw ise, there is a risk of fata l
mJury.
~!DDynamic headlight range control
II Headlight range control : malfun ction! See
owner 's manual
There is a malfunction in the headl ight range
control system, which may cause g lare fo r othe r
d rivers.
Drive to an autho rized Aud i dealer or authorized
Aud i Service Facility immediately to have t he
malfunct io n corrected.
§0 Audi adaptive light
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adapt ive light
m;J
Audi adaptive light: malfunction! See own -
er's manual
Adapt ive light is not wor king . The headlights st ill
fu nction.
Drive to an authorized Aud i dealer or aut horized
Aud i Service Facility immediately to have t he
malfunct io n corrected.
@.DLight/rain sensor
ralAutomatic headlights : malfunction! See
owner 's manual
£I Automatic wipers: malfunction! See owner's
manual
The li ght/rain sensor is malfunct ion ing .
The low beams remain switched on at all times
for safety reasons when the lig ht switch is in the
32
AUTOposition. However, you can cont inue to
turn the lights on and off using the light switch .
You can sti ll contro l all functions that are inde-
pendent of the rain senso r th rough the wind-
shield wiper lever .
Drive to an authorized Audi deal er or authorized
Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have the
malfunction corrected .
I-I Sport differential
Appli es to: vehicles with sport different ial
Ill Sport differential: malfunct ion! Please con-
tact Service
There is a ma lfunction.
Drive to an aut horized Audi dealer or aut horized
Audi Service Facility immediate ly to have the
malfunction corrected.
Ill Sport differential:
temperatur e too high.
Please adapt driving style
The tr ansmission temperatu re has increased sig-
nificantly d ue to t he sporty dr iving manner. Drive
in a less sporty manne r unt il the temperat ure re-
turns to t he norma l range and t he indicator lig ht
switches of .
.,&.WARNING
Contact an author ized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility if the spo rt differen-
tial is fa ulty or malfunctioning. The repair
must be performed by trained perso nnel us-
ing the correct oil in order to ensure safety .
¢¢ Turn signals
If the . or B indicator lig ht blinks , a t ur n sig-
nal is t ur ned on . If both indica t or li ght s are bl ink-
ing, t he emergency flashers are on .
If an ind icator light blinks tw ice as fast as usual,
a turn signal bul b has fai led. Caref ully drive to an
aut horized Aud i dealer o r aut horized Aud i Service
Facil ity immed iate ly to have t he malfunction cor-
rect ed.
 Cockpit o v erview

¢1.~Trailer turn signals

Applies to: vehicles wit h tra iler hitc h

The turn s ignals a re a ctivated in tra ile r mode if

the . indicator lig ht blinks.

If a turn signal on the trailer or on the veh icle

fa ils wh ile in tra ile r mode, the indicator light w ill
not blink tw ice as fas t to indicate this .

u
co
......
N
r--...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

33
Opening and closing
Opening and closing
Central locking
Description
You can lock and un lock the veh icle centrally . You
have the following options:
- Remote control key <=> page 3 7,
- Sensors in the door handles" <=> page 37,
page 39,
- Lock cylinder on the driver's door <=>
or
page 38.
- Interior central locking switch <=>
Turn signals
The turn signals flash tw ice when you unlock the
vehicle and flash once when you lock the vehicle.
If they do not flash, then one of the doors , the
rear lid or the hood is not closed.
Automatic locking (Auto Lock)
The Auto Lock funct ion locks all doors and the
luggage compartment lid once the speed has ex-
ceeded approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
The vehicle can be unlocked if the opening func-
tion in the centra l locking system sw itch is used
or one of the door handles is pulled.
In the event of a crash with a irbag deployment,
the doors will a lso automat ica lly unlock to allow
access to the veh icle.
Selective door unlocking
The doors and luggage compartment lid will lock
when they close . You can set in the Infotainment
system whether only the dr iver's door or the en-
tire vehicle should be unlocked when unlocking
<=>page 39.
Unintentionally locking yourself out
Only lock your vehicle when all of the doors and
the luggage compartment lid are closed and the
remote control key is not in the vehicle . This
he lps to prevent you from locking yourse lf out
accidentally .
The follow ing cond itions prevent you from lock -
ing your remote control key in the vehicle :
34
- If the driver's door is open, the vehicle cannot
be locked by pressing the !'.rlbutton on the re-
mote contro l key or by touching the locking
sensor* on a door .
- If the most recently used convenience key* is
detected in the luggage compartment, the lug-
gage compartment lid automatica lly unlocks
again after closing it.
- If the convenience key* that was last used is de-
tected ins ide the vehicle, then the vehicle will
not be able to lock from the outside .
Closing aid on the doors*
The vehicle doors are equipped with closing aids.
When closing a door, yo u only have to let it fall
lightly into the latch. It then closes automatically
<=>&. .
A WARNING
-
- When you lock your vehicle from outs ide,
nobody - especially children - sho uld rema in
inside the vehicle. Remember, when you
lock the vehicle from the outside the win-
dows cannot be opened from the inside.
- When you leave the vehicle, always take the
ign it ion key with yo u. This will prevent pas-
sengers (ch ildren, for examp le) from acci-
dentally being locked in the vehicle shou ld
they accidentally press the power locking
switch in the doors.
- Do not leave children inside the vehicle un-
supervised. In an emergency it would be im-
possible to open the doors from the outside
w ithout the key.
- Applies to vehicles with power side door
closer*:
- When closing a door, make sure nothing
can interfere with the door. Th is could
cause ser ious personal inj ury.
- You can stop the door from closing at any
time by pulling on the inside or outside
door handle.
(D Tips
- Do not leave valuables unattended in the ve-
hicle. A locked vehicle is not a safe!

- The LED in the drive r's door rai l blinks when
you lock the vehicle . If t he LED lights up for
approximately 30 seconds after locking,
there is a malfunct ion in the cent ral locking
system. Have the p roblem corrected by an
a ut horized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi
Se rvice Facility.
Key set
Fig. 2 0 Your vehicle key set
@ Remote control key with integrated
mechanical key
You can unlock/ lock your veh icle w ith the remote
control key. A mecha nica l key is integ rated in the
remo te contro l key ~ pag e 36.
@ Key fob with vehicle code
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Open the key tag and scratch to reveal the veh icle
code. You can unlock the Audi connect vehicle
control services* for your veh icle with t his vehicle
code . For additional informat ion, see
~ pag e 199.
Replacing a key
If a key is lost, see an authorized Audi dealer or
author ized Audi Service Facility. Have this key de-
activated . It is important to bring a ll keys with
you . If a key is lost, you should report it to you r
ins ura nce company.
Number of keys
You can check the number of keys ass igned to
your veh icle in the Infotainment system . To do
~
......
~
this, select the IM ENU Ibutto n > Vehicl e> left
control button > Service & checks > Vehicle in-
N
8 formation . This way, you can m a ke sure t hat you
0
:E have all t he keys when purch asing a used vehicle .
<t
Open ing and closing
Electronic immobilizer
The immobilizer preve nts unau t hori zed use of
t he vehi cle .
Under certai n circumstan ces, t he vehicle may not
be able to start if there is a key from a diffe rent
vehicle manufa cture r on the key chain .
Data in the master key
When driving, service and ma intenance-re levant
dat a is cont inuo us ly stored in you r remote con-
t rol key . Your Audi se rvice advisor can rea d out
t his data and t ell you abo ut t he work yo ur vehicle
needs. This app lies also t o vehicles w ith a con-
ven ience key*.
Personal convenience settings
If two people use one vehicle, it is recommended
th at each perso n always uses "thei r own " maste r
key. When the ignit io n is t urne d off or when the
vehicle is locked , pe rsonal conve nien ce settings
for the follow ing systems are stored a nd as -
s igned to the remote master key.
- Climate con tr ol syst em
- Steer ing whee l heating *
- Central locking system
- Interior lighting*
- Exterior light ing
- Rain sensor
- Memory function *
- Par king aid*
- Adapt ive cr uise con t rol*
- Act ive lane assist*
- Side assist*
- Traff ic jam assist *
- Distance warning*
- Night visio n assis t*
- Aud i p re sense *
- Spe ed wa rning*
The stored settings are automat ica lly recalled
whe n you unlock the vehicle, ope n the doo rs or
tu rn on th e ign ition .
_&.WARNING
- Always t ake t he ve hicle key w ith you wh e n
-
leaving t he veh icle, eve n for a s hort per iod of
ti me. This app lies part icularly w he n ch ildr en
35
Opening and c lo s i n g

remain in the vehicle. Otherw ise the children LED and battery in the remote control key
cou ld start the engine or operate electrical
equipment such as power windows.

@ Tips
- The operation of the remote contro l key can
be temporarily disrupted by interfe rence
from transmitters near the vehicle working
in the same frequency range (such as a cell
phone or radio equipment) . Always check if
your vehicle is locked!
Fig. 22 Remote control key: removing the ba tte ry holde r
- For an explanation on conformity with the
FCCregulations in the United States and the
Industry Canada regulations, see
¢ page 384 .

Removing the mechanical key

Fig. 23 Remot e control key (rea r side): removing the bat·

t ery ho lde r

LED in the remote control key

Fig. 2 1 Remot e cont rol mast er key: remov ing t he mec hani·
cal key
.. Press the release buttons @ ¢ fig. 21 and re-
move the mechanical key from the remote con-
trol key.
Using the mecha nica l key, you can:
- Lock/un lock the glove compartment.
- Manually lock/u nlock the veh icle c::;,page 39.
- Emergency lock t he doors c::;,page 39 .
The LED@ informs you of the remote cont rol key
func ti o n.
"' If you press a bu tton briefly, the LEDblinks
once .
"' If you press and hold a button (convenience
open ing/clos ing), the LED blinks several times.
"' If the LEDdoes not blink, the remote contro l
key battery is dead. The Illindicator light tu rns
on and the message Remote control key: re-
place key battery appears. Replace the battery
in the remote control key.
Replacing the remote control key batte ry
"' Press t he release but t ons @ ¢ fig. 22 and re-
move the mechan ica l key.
"' Press the release buttons © c::;,fig. 23 on the
battery holder while pull ing the battery holder
out of the remote control key in the direction of
the arrow .
"' Insert the new battery with the'' +" symbo l fac·
ing down.
"' Slide the battery holde r carefully into the re·
mote contro l key.

36
 Open in g and closing

.. Inse rt the mechanical key. is un locked when unlocking the vehicle

¢ page 39.
@JFor the sake of the environment
.&_WARNING
Discharged batteries must be disposed of us-
ing methods that will not harm the environ-
- No one, especially children, should stay in the
ment . Do not dispose of them in household vehicle when it is locked from the outside, be-
trash . cause the windows can no longer be opened
from the inside ¢ page 40. Locked doors
(D Tips make it more difficult for emergency workers
to get into the veh icle, wh ich puts lives at
The replacement battery must meet the same
risk.
specifications as the original battery in the re-
mote control key.
@ Tips

Unlocking/locking by remote control
Fig. 24 Remote control key: button programm ing
- Only use the remote control key when you
are within view of the veh icle.
- The vehicle can only be locked when these-
lector lever is in the P position .
- Do not use the remote control when you are
inside the vehicle . Otherwise, you could un-
intentionally lock the vehicle . If you then try
to open a door, the anti-theft alarm will
trigger. If this happens, press the unloc k
button@.
- Only use the panic function in an emergen-
cy.

.. To unlock the vehicle, press the @ button

Unlocking/locking with the convenience
¢fig. 24. key
.. To lock the vehicle, press the {fJ button once. Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
.. To unlo ck the luggage compartment lid, press
the c::::Jbutton briefly . The doors and luggage compartment lid can be
.. To open the luggage compartment lid, press unlocked/locked without using th e remote con-
and hold the C:$ button for at least one second . trol key.
.. To trigger the alarm, press the red IPANIC I but-
ton. The vehicle horn and emergency flashers
turn on .
.. To switch off the alarm, press the red IPANIC I
button again .

If the vehicle is unlocked and none of the doors,

the hood, or the luggage compa rt ment lid are
opened within 45 seconds, the veh icle locks
again automatically. This feature prevents the ve-
hicle from being accidentally left unlocked over a Fig. 25 Door handle: locking the vehicle

long period of time.

u
(0
Unlocking the vehicle
...... The settings in the Infotainment system deter-
N
r--. .. Grip the door hand le. The door un locks auto-
N
...... mine if the entire vehicle or only the driver's door
0 mat ically .
0
:E
<t

37
Opening and c lo s i n g
• Pullon the door handle to open the door.
Locking the vehicle
• Se lect the P posit ion, because the vehicle can-
not be locked otherwise .
• To lock the veh icle, close the door and touch
the sensor in the door handle once ¢ fig. 25 . Do
not hold the door handle while doing this .
You can un lock/lock the vehicle at every door.
The remote control key cannot be more than ap -
proximate ly 4 feet (1. 5 m) away from the door
handle. It makes no difference whether the mas -
ter key is in your jacket pocket or in your brief-
case, for example .
If you hold the door handle while locking, this
can impair the locking function.
The door cannot be opened for a br ief period di-
rectly aft er lock ing it. This way you have the op-
portun ity to check if the doors locked correctly.
The settings in the Infotainment system deter-
mine if the ent ire vehicle or only one of the doors
is unlocked when unlocki ng the vehicle
¢ page 39 .
A WARNING
Read and following a ll WARNINGS ¢ &. in De-
scription on page 34 .
@ Tips
If your vehicle is left standing fo r a long peri-
od of time, note the following:
- The energy management system grad ually
turns off unnecessa ry cohvenience functions
to prevent the vehicle batte ry from draining
and to ma intain the vehicle's ab ility to start
for as long as possib le. You may not be able
to unlock your vehicle using the convenie nce
key.
38
Central locking switch
Fig. 26 Driver's doo r: cen t ral locking switch
• To lock the vehicle, press t he @ button ¢ &. -
• To unlock the vehicle, press the 63button.
When locking the vehicle with the central locking
switch , the following applies:
- Opening the door and the luggage compart-
ment lid from the outside is not possib le (for
security reasons, such as when stopped at a
light) .
- The LED in the centra l locking switch turns on
when all doors are closed and locked .
- You can open the doors ind ividually from the
inside by pulling the door handle .
- In the event of a crash with airbag dep loyment,
the doors unlock a utomatica lly to allow access
to the vehicle .
A WARNING
- The central locking switch a lso works when
the ignition is switched off and automatical -
ly locks the entire vehicle when the IDbut-
ton is pressed .
- The central locking switch is inoperative
when the vehicle is locked from the outs ide .
- Locked doors ma ke it more diffic ult for
emergency workers to get into the vehicle,
which puts lives at risk . Do not leave anyone
behind in the vehicle, especially child ren.
- Read and following a ll WARNINGS ¢ &. in
Description on page 34.
{D Tips
Your vehicle locks automatically when it
reaches a speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) (Auto
Lock)¢ page 34. You can unloc k t he vehicle
 Open ing and closing

aga in using the 63button in t he cent ra l lock- Emergency locking/unlocking the doors
ing sw itch.

Setting the central locking system

In the Infotainmen t syst em, you can set which

doors the central locking system will unlock .

.. Select in the Info t ainment system: ! M E NUI but -

ton > Vehicle > left cont rol but to n > Vehicle
settings > Central locking .

Door unlocking - yo u can decide if All doors or Fig. 27 Driver's doo r : doo r lock cylinder

only the Driver's door should unlock . The lug-

gage compartment lid also un locks when All is
selected. If you se lect Driver's door in a vehicle
with a convenience key*, only the door whose
handle you pull will un lock.

If you select Driver 's door, all the doors and lug -
gage compartment lid will unlock if you p ress the
m button on the remote contro l key twice.

Disable rear lid handle - if you se lect On, t he lug-

gage com partment lid han dle is locked . In t his
case, the luggage compartment lid can be
opened with the .c:sbutton on the remote con-
trol key or wit h the ,c:s button in the driver's
door. In vehicles w it h a convenience key*, you can
still open the luggage compa rtment lid us ing the
handle if an authorized remote control key is
near the proximity sensor* .
Fold mirrors * - if you select On, the exterior rear-
view mirrors fold in a utomatically whe n you press
the ~ button on the remote control key or to uch
the sensor * in the handle .
Tone when locking 1> - if you select On, a tone
will sound when you lock t he vehicle.
Fig. 28 Door: em erge ncy locking
If the central locking system malfu nctions, you
must u nlock/lock the doo rs separately using the
mechan ica l key.
Unlocking/locking the driver's door with the
mechanical key
.. Remove the mechanical key c>page 36 .
.. Insert the key into the slot under the door han-
d le and pull the cap off c> fig. 2 7.
.. To unlo ck t he driver's door, tur n th e key t o t he
open posi t ion @ c>fig . 2 7.
.. To lock t he driver 's doo r, se lect t he P position
an d tur n the key once to t he clos ing pos ition @
c> A, .

Locking the front passenger's door/rear

doors with the mechanical key
The emergency lock is located on the rear side of
the front passenger's door and the rear doors. It
is only visible when the door is open .

.. Remove the me chanical key c>page 36 .

u .. Remove the cap from the openi ng c>fig . 28 .
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
~ ll This fun ct ion is not availa ble in al l coun tri es .

39
Opening and c lo s i n g
.. Insert the key in the inside slot and t urn it all
the way to the right (right door) or left (left
door).
A WARNING
Read and following all WARNINGS c::>& in De-
scription on page 34.
Anti-theft alarm system
If the anti-theft alarm system detects a vehicle
break- in, a udio and visua l wa rning signals are
tr iggered . The anti-theft alarm system is act ivat-
ed when the vehicle is locked as usua l. It
sw itches off when the veh icle is unlocked.
If t he alarm is tr iggered, it w ill shut off automat-
ically after a certain amount of time. Switch the
ign it ion on or press t he m button on the remo t e
con t rol key t o turn off t he alarm.
Luggage compartment
lid
Automatic luggage compartment lid
The luggage compartment lid can be opened and
closed electrically .
Fig. 29 Driver's door: opening the luggage co mpartment
l id
40
- - --
' lil
--.;::s
Fig. 30 Luggage compartment lid : @ closing button, @
lock button (vehicles wit h convenience key*)
The luggage compa rtment lid can on ly be opened
in the P selector lever position.
Opening the luggage compartment lid
.. Press and hold the c::5 but to n on t he remote
control key for at least one second. Or
.. Pull the c::5 switch in the dr iver's door briefly
c::>fig.29 . Or
.. Press the hand le in the luggage compartment
lid .
Closing the luggage compartment lid
.. When the ign ition is switc hed on, pull the c:s
switch in the driver's doo r until the luggage
compartment lid is closed c::>&_. Or
.. Press the c::5 button in the luggage compart-
ment lid c::>fig . 30. The luggage compartment
lid will automat ically lower and close c::> &_. Or
.. Applies to: veh icles with convenience key: Press
the c::5 button on the remote control key unt il
t he luggage compartment lid closes c::>&_.
Make sure there is e nough distance between
you and the luggage compartment lid. There
should be a maximum 9 feet (3 m) of dis t ance .
Or
.. App lies to: veh icles with convenience key: Press
the ~ button in the luggage compartment lid
fig. 30 . The remote control key must not be
c::>
more than approx imately 4 feet (1.5 m) away
from the luggage compartment and it must not
be inside the vehicle. The luggage compa rt-
men t lid will a ut oma ti ca lly lower a nd close. The
veh icle locks c::>&_. Or
.. Lightly pull the luggage compartment lid at the
inner grip . The luggage compartment lid will
automatically lower and close c::> &_. Or .,,.

~ Press the handle in the luggage compartment
lid. The luggage compartment lid will automat-
ically lower and close ¢ .&_.
St oring the luggag e compartm ent lid
op e ning posit ion
~ Bring the luggage compartment lid into the de-
sired open position. The position must be at a
certain height or higher to sto re .
~ Press and hold the cs but t on for at least four
seconds to store the new open position . A visu -
al and audio signal will follow .
~ To set a higher open position, wait at least five
seconds and then carefully press the luggage
compartment lid upward.
~ Press and hold the cs button again for at least
four seconds to store the desired opening posi-
tion .
The opening/closing process will stop immed i-
ately if:
- You pull/ release the cs switch in t he driver's
door , or
- Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:
Press/release the cs button on the remote
contro l key, or
- Applies to: vehicles with conve nience key: Press
the cs button or the {f) button in the luggage
compartment lid, or
- You push the handle in the luggage compart-
ment lid, or
- When something blocks the luggage compart-
ment lid or makes it diff icu lt for the lid to
move .
If you press the handle or one of the cs or tfl but-
tons (vehicles w ith convenience key*) now , the
luggage compartment lid will either open or
close, depending on its angle.
_& WARNING
- After closing the luggage compartment lid,
make sure that it is latched. Otherwise the
luggage compa rtment lid could open sud-
denly when driving, which increases the risk
u
co of an accident.
~ - Pay careful attent ion when closing the lug-
8
0
gage compartment lid. Otherw ise, you could
:E:
'<t
Op e ning and cl os ing
cause serious injury to yourse lf or others de-
spite the pinch protection.
- To reduce the risk of pinching injuries, al-
ways make sure that no one is in the operat-
ing area of the luggage compartment lid; in-
cluding the hinge areas and the upper and
lower edge of the luggage compartment lid .
- Never drive with the luggage compartment
lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases
can enter the vehicle interior and create the
risk of asphyx iat ion .
- If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle
rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the
luggage compartment lid may not open
comp letely under certa in circumstances or it
could close by itself if open due to the ext ra
weight. To reduce the risk of injury, the
open luggage compartment lid must there-
fore have additional support or the cargo
must first be removed from the rack .
(D Note
The luggage compa rt ment lid can bump into
objects s uch as the garage ceiling when open-
ing and become damaged.
(D Tips
- The settings in the Infotainment system de-
termine if the luggage compartment lid can
be opened using the hand le ¢ page 39.
- There are aud io signa ls when closing the
luggage compartment lid with the remote
cont rol key (vehicles with convenience key*)
or with the cs button in the dr iver's door.
- When the vehicle is locked, the luggage
compartment lid can be unlocked separately
by pressing the cs button on the remote
control key. The luggage compartment lid
locks automatically when it is closed again .
- Applies to: vehicles with convenience key:
The luggage compartment lid can be closed
w ith the convenience from a distance up to
approximately 9 ft (3 m).
- The luggage compartment lid can be oper-
ated manually if the vehicle battery is low .
It is necessa ry to use more force when do ing .,.
41
Opening and closing
this. Move the lid slowly to reduce the
amount of force needed .
- When the trailer socket is being used (for
example, for a bicycle rack), the luggage
compartment lid can be opened and closed
using the handle or the foot motion activa-
tion (vehicles with convenience key*).
Opening/closing the luggage compartment
lid with foot motion activation (kicking
movement)
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key and sensor-control-
led luggage compartment lid
Fig. 31 Rear of t he vehicle: foot movement
You can open and close the luggage compar t -
ment lid wit h foot mo t ion activation.
Requirements: you must be carrying your vehicle
key with you. You must be standing at the center
behind the lugg age compartment lid. You should
be approximately 8 in (20 cm) from the rear of
the vehicle . The ignition must be switched off .
Make sure you have firm footing .
- Move your foot back and forth below the bump-
er Q fig. 31. Do not touch the bumper. The lug-
gage compartment lid will open/close once the
system detects the movement .
The luggage compartmen t lid will only open/
close if you perform the movement as described.
This prevents the luggage compartment lid from
opening or closing due to similar movements,
such as when you walk between the rear of the
vehicle and your garage door .
The closing of the luggage compartment lid is in-
dicated by a warning signal and can be canceled
by making the described movement again .
The foot movement does not lock the vehicle .
42
General information
In some situations, the function may be limited
or temporarily unavailable . This may happen if:
- the luggage compartment lid was closed imme-
diately before
- you park close to a hedge and the branches
move back and forth under the vehicle for a
long period of time
-you clean your vehicle, for example with a pres-
sure washer or in a car wash
- there is heavy rain
- the bumper is very dirty, for example after driv-
ing on salt-covered roads
- there is interference to the radio signal from
the vehicle key, such as from cell phones or re-
mote controls
.&,.WARNING
- Pay careful attention when closing the lug-
gage compartment lid. Otherwise, you could
cause serious injury to yourself or others de-
spite the pinch protection.
- To reduce the risk of pinching injuries, al-
ways make sure that no one is in the operat-
ing area of the luggage compartment lid; in-
cluding the hinge areas and the upper and
lower edge of the luggage compartment lid .
- Never drive with the luggage compartment
lid ajar or open, because poisonous gases
can enter the vehicle interior and create the
risk of asphyxiation.
- If there is a luggage rack (such as a bicycle
rack) on the luggage compartment lid, the
luggage compartment lid may not open
completely under certain circumstances or it
could close by itself if open due to the extra
weight. To reduce the risk of injury, the
open luggage compartment lid must there-
fore have additional support or the cargo
must first be removed from the rack.

Luggage compartment lid emergency
release
Fig. 32 Inner luggage comp artme nt lid: access to th e
emerge ncy release
• Remove the mechanica l key ~ page 36 .
• Pry out the cover us ing the mechanical key
¢ fig. 32 .
• Press the lever in t he direct io n of the arrow to
release the luggage compartment lid .
Child safety lock
The child safety lock prevents the rear doors
from being opened from the inside and the rear
power windows from be operated .
Fig. 33 Sect ion of driver's door : child safety lock butto ns
• To activate/deactivate the inner door handle
and the power window switch for the respective
rear door , press the left/right t button in the
driver 's door ¢ fig. 33 . The ind icator light in the
but ton tu rns on/b links .
• To activate/d eact ivate the child safety lock on
bot h sides, you must press the t buttons one
after t he othe r.
u Opening and closing the windows
(0
...... It is not possible to operate the rear climate con-
N
r--.
N tro l system* w hen the child safe ty lock is switch-
......
0
0 ed on. The SET REAR function allows yo u to app ly
:E
<t
Open ing and closing
all sett ing s to the rear using the climate control
system controls in the coc kpit ¢ page 77 .
Message in the instrument cluster display
[81Childproof catch : malfun ction! Please con·
tact Service
The re is a ma lfunction in the ch ild safety lock .
Press the t button aga in.
If the message stays on, dr ive immediately to an
authorized Audi dealer o r a uthorized Audi Serv ice
Facility t o have the ma lfunction repaired .
A
=
WARNING
-
- Always take the ve hicle key with yo u when
leav ing the vehicle, even for a s hort pe riod
of ti me. This applie s pa rtic u la rly w hen chil-
dren remain in t he vehi cle . Otherwise chil-
d ren cou ld sta rt the en g ine or operate elec -
trica l equipment (such as power windows),
which increases the risk of an acc ident.
- A ma lfunction in the ch ild safety loc k could
allow the rear doors to be opened from t he
inside, which increases the risk of an acci-
dent.
Power windows
Controls
The driver can control all power windows.
CX)
~
M
0
::'>
CX)
(D
Fig. 34 Driver's door: power window controls
All power window switc hes are equipped wit h a
two-stage fu nction :
• To open or close the window comp letely, press
t he switc h down or pull t he switc h up briefly to IJi,,-
43
Opening and cl os i n g
the second level. The operation will stop if the
switch is pressed/pu lled again.
~ To se lect a position in between opened and
closed, press/pull the switch to the first leve l
until the desired window position is reached.
Powe r w indow switch es
(D Left front door
@ Right front door
@ Left rear door
@ Right rear door
A WARNING
-
- Always take the vehicle key with you when
leaving the vehicle, even for a short period
of time. This applies particularly when chil-
dren rema in in the vehicle . Otherwise ch il-
dren could start the engi ne or operate e lec-
trical equipment (such as power windows),
wh ich increases the risk of an accident. The
power windows cont inue to function unti l
the driver's door or front passenger's door
has been opened.
- Pay ca reful attention when closing the win-
dows. Pinching cou ld cause serious injuries .
- When loc king the vehicle from outside, the
vehicle must be unoccupied since the win-
dows can no longer be opened in an emer-
gency.
(D Tips
You can still open and close the windows for
approximately 10 minutes after turning the
ignition off. The power windows do not switch
off until the driver's door or front passenger's
door has been opened.
Convenience opening/closing
Applies to: vehicles with convenience key
All of the windows and the roof* can be opened/
closed at the same time .
Convenience opening feature
~ Press and hold the IIIbutton on the remote con-
trol key until all of t he windows reach the de-
sired position and the roof* is tilted open .
44
Convenience closing fe atur e
~ Press t he {D button on the remote control key
until the roof* is closed c::>.&.,
, or
~ Touch the sensor * on the door handle until all
of the windows and the roof * are closed. Do not
place your hand in the door handle when doing
this.
Setting convenience opening in t he
Infota inment system
~ Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle
setting s > Centr al locking > Long press to
open window s.
A WARNING
- To reduce the risk of injury, never close the
windows or the roof* carelessly or in an un-
controlled manner.
- For secur ity reasons, the windows and the
roof* can only be opened and closed with
the remote control key at a maxim um dis-
tance of approx imately 6.5 feet (2 m) away
from the vehicle . Always pay attention when
using the~ button to close the windows
and the roof* so that no one is pinched. The
clos ing process will stop immediately when
the ~ button is released.
(D Tips
Applies to: vehicles wit h panorama g lass roof:
the power sunshade also opens/closes when
opening/closing the roof.
' Correcting power window malfunctions
You can reactivate the one-touch up/down func-
tion if it malfunctions.
~ Pull the power window switc h up until the win-
dow is completely raised.
~ Release the switch and pull it up aga in for at
least one second .
 Open in g and closing

Panorama glass roof A

Panorama glass roof, opening/closing the
- WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury, always pay atten-
sunshade tion when closing the panorama glass roof.
Applies to: vehicles with panorama glass roof Always switch off the ignition whe n exiting
The front segment can tilt and slide open . the veh icle.

(D Note
Always close the panorama glass roof when
leaving your vehicle . Rain can cause damage
to the interior equipment of your vehicle, par-
ticularly the electronic equ ipment.

Fig. 35 Section of the front headliner: pano rama glass roof
button
@ Tilting and closing the roof
• To tilt the sunroof completely open, press the
~ button up briefly to the second level.
• To close the sunroof comp letely, pull the ~
button down briefly to the second level ¢ &,. .
• To set a position between opened and closed,
press/pull the ~ button up to the first level
until the roof reaches the desired position.
{D Tips
- For information about convenience open-
ing/closing, seer;::;,page 44.
- You can still operate the panorama glass
roof for about 10 minutes after the ignition
is switched off. The switch is deactivated
once the driver's or front passenger's door is
opened.
- The panorama g lass roof will on ly open
down to -4°F (-20°).
Panorama glass roof emergency operation
Applies to: vehicles with panorama glass roof

@ Opening and closing the roof If an object is detected when closing, the roof
will open again automatically. In this case, you
• To move the roof into the reduced wind noise can then close it with the power emergency clos-
pos ition, push the~ button back briefly to the ing function.
second level.
• To open the sunroof completely, push the~ • Within five seconds after the sunroof opens au-
button back briefly again to the second level. tomatically, pull the applicable button until the
• To close the sunroof completely, push the~ roof is closed.
button forward briefly to the second level
QA .
• To select a partially open position, push the~
button forward/back to the first level until the
desired position is reached.

© Opening and closing the sunshade

• To open the sunshade comp letely, slide the .;r- ;,.
switch back briefly to the second level.
• To close the sunshade completely, slide the :ft.,,
~ switch forward briefly to the second level.
......
~ • To select a partially open position, slide the ~c-'.!.
~ switch to the first level until the sunshade
0
~ reaches the desired position .
<t

45
Opening and c lo s i n g
Garage door opener
(Homelink)
Description
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener (Homelink)
Fig. 36 Garage doo r ope ner: examp les of usage fo r differ·
ent sys t ems
With th e garag e door open er (Homelink), you
can activate systems such as the garage doors,
security systems or house lights from inside you r
veh icle. Three buttons are integrated in the head-
liner that can be programmed to up to three re-
mote controls .
To be able to operate systems us ing the gar age
door opener, the buttons in the headliner must
first be programmed .
_& WARNING
When operating or programming the garage
door opener, make sure that no people or ob-
jects are in the area immediately surrounding
the equipment. Peop le can be injured or prop-
erty can be damaged if struck when closing .
(D Tips
- For security reasons, we recommend that
you clear the programmed buttons before
selling the vehicle .
- Fo r additional informat ion about Homelink,
visit www.homelink.com.
- For an explanation on conformity with the
FCCregulations in the United States and the
Industry Canada regu lations, see
c::>
page384 .
46
Operation
Applies to: vehicles with garage doo r opener (Home link)
Requirements : the button in the head liner must
be programmed c::> page 46 and the veh icle
must be w ithin range of the system, such as the
garage door.
.. Press the button to open the garage door. The
LED @ c::> page 46, fig. 37 bl inks or turns on .
.. Press t he button again to open the garage
door.
(D Tips
When opening or closing the garage door, do
not press and hold the button longer ten sec-
onds or the garage door opener will switch to
programming mode.
Programming buttons
Applies to: vehicles with garage door opener (Home Link)
N
0
..
0
~
m
Fig. 37 He adlin e r: controls
You can prog ram both fixed code and rolling code
systems using th is procedure.
Programming / reprogramming buttons
Requirement : the vehicle m ust be in range of the
system, such as the garage door, that you would
like t o program .
.. Switch the ignit ion on .
.. Press and hold the button in the headliner that
you would like to program for at least two sec-
onds. Or
.. Select in the Infotainment system : I MENU ! but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle ..,.
 Opening and closing

settings > Garage door opener > Program ga-
rage door opener> Program button 1/ Pro-
gram button 2 / Program button 3 (repro-
gram). The yellow LED® blinks .
.,.Follow the instructions in the Infota inment sys-
tem .
Synchronizing a button 1>
- In some cases, the system must be pro-
grammed using an alternative mode. Select
in the Infotainment system: !MENU! > Vehi-
cle > left control button > Vehicle settings >
Garage door opener > Program garage door
opener > right control button > UR-Mode /
D-Mode .

Requirement: the button must already be pro-

grammed and must be synchronized with the
system that you would like to program .
.,.Switch the ignition on .
.,.Press the button in the headliner that you
would like to synchroni ze .
.,.Follow the instructions in the Infota inment sys-
tem .

Deleting button programming

The programmed buttons cannot be de leted indi-

vidually . They must be deleted all at once . Repro-
gram the buttons if necessary .
.,.Switch the ignition on .
.,.Select in the Infotainment system: !MENUI but-
ton > Vehicle > left contro l button > Vehicle
settings > Garage door opener > Delete button
programming > Yes, delete now.

Displaying the version/status/country code

.,.Select in the Inf otainment system: !MENUI but-

ton >V ehicle > left contro l button >Vehicle set-
tings > Garage door opener > Version informa-
tion .

{D) Tips
- The garage door opener may need to be
synchronized with the system motor after
the programming. Follow the manufactur-
er 's instructions for doing this.
- The programming process can take up to 30
seconds. The hand transm itter may need to
be operated again during the process.
- Make sure the batteries in the hand trans-
mitter are charged before starting the pro-
u
gramming process.
co
......
N
r--...
N
......
0
0
:E: l) Only appl ies to ro lling code systems
'<t

47
Light s and Vision
Lights and Vision
Exterior lighting
Switching the lights on and off
::===== =----==
===== ~!
Fig. 38 Instrument panel : light switch with buttons
Light sw itch ·ti:
Turn the light switch to the corresponding posi-
tion when the ignition is switched on. ;oo: and the
selected pos ition turn on (except pos ition 0).
In some markets, the daytime running lights, tail
lights and license plate light are always on .
0 - The day t ime running lights a utomatica lly t urn
on. In veh icles for certain markets, you can
sw itch the automatic daytime runn ing lights on
and off in the Infotainment* system.
AUTO - The headlights automatically adap t to the
surrounding brightness.
;oo: - Parking lights
tD - Low beam headlights
Buttons
When you t ur n the light sw itch to the AUTO or
low beam headlight position tD, yo u can activate
the following functions:
jD - All weather lights . The headlights automati -
cally adjust so that there w ill be less glare, for
example when the road surface is wet.
0$ - Rear fog lights
Automatic headlight range control system
Your vehicle is equipped with a n automatic head-
light range contro l system that red uces glare for
oncom ing traffic if the veh icle load changes. The
headligh t range adju sts automa tic a lly.
48
Audi adaptive light
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive light
Adap t ive ligh t pr ovides bet ter visibility when it is
dark by adapting t he ligh t s t o the roa d conditions
based on speed, such as on expressways, rura l
M
roads, at intersections, and in curves. The adap -
tive light only functions when the light switch is
:,
in the AUTO position .
A WARNING
- Automatic headlig hts* are on ly intended to
assist the driver . They do not relieve the
driver of responsib ility to check the head-
lights and to t ur n them on manua lly bas ed
on t he curre nt ligh t and vis ibility conditions.
For exa m ple, fog cannot be detec ted by the
light sensors. So always switch on the low
beams under these weather condit ions and
when dr iving in the dark tD .
- The rear fog lights shou ld only be turned on
in acco rdance with traffic regulations, to
prevent glare for traffic behind your vehicle.
- Always observe legal regulat ions when us-
ing the lighting systems desc ribe d.
{l) Tips
- The lig ht s ensor for t he a utomat ic he ad -
ligh t s* is in the rearview mir ror mount. Do
not p lace any stickers in this area on the
w indshield .
- A warning t one will sound if you ope n t he
door when the exte rior Lights a re switched
on.
- Only the front headlights turn on when t he
daytime running lights are switched on* . In
vehicles in certain markets, t he tail lights
w ill also t urn on .
- In cool or damp weather, the inside of t he
head lights, t urn signa ls and ta il lig hts can
fog over due to the temperature difference
between the inside and outside . They w ill
clear shortly afte r swit ching them on . This
does not affect the service life of t he light-
mg.
 Lights and V is ion

Turn signal and high beam lever High beam assistant

App lies to : vehicles with high beam assistant
The lever operates the turn signals, the high
beams and the headlight flasher . The high beam assistant automatically turns the
high beams on or off depending on the surround-
N
0 ing conditions .
0
>
u.
C0
A camera on the rearview mirror mount can de-
tect light sources from other road users . The high
beams sw itch on or off automatically depending
on the posit ion of vehicles driving ahead and on-
coming vehicles, the veh icle speed and other en-
vironmental and traffic conditions.

Activating high beam assistant

Fig. 39 Turn s ignal and high beam lever
Turn signals ¢¢
The turn signals activate when you move the lev-
e r into a turn signal position when the ign ition is
switched on.
(D - Right turn signa l
@ - Left turn signal
The turn s ignal blinks three times if you just tap
the lever.
High beams and headlight flasher ~D
Move the lever to the corresponding posit ion:
@ - high beams on (vehicles w ith high beam as-
sistant* ¢ page 49)
© - High beams off or headlight flasher
The II ind icator light in the instrument cluster
turns on.
A WARNING
High beams can cause glare for other drivers,
which increases the risk of an acc ide nt . For
this reason, only use the high beams or the
head light flasher when they w ill not create
glare for other drivers.
Requirement: the light sw itch must be set to the
AUTOposit ion and the high beam ass istant must
be switched on in the Infota inment system
¢p age 50 .
.,.To act ivate the high beam ass istant, tap the
lever forward @ ¢ page 49, fig . 39 . The lj!ain-
d icator light appears in the instrument cluster
disp lay and the high beams a re switched on/off
automatically. If the high beams were com-
pletely or partially switched on, the II
ind ica-
to r light turns on.
Switching the high beams on/off manually
If the high beams did not swit ch on/off automat-
ically as expected, you may swit ch them on or off
man ua lly inst ead:
.,.To switch the high beams on manua lly, tap the
lever forwa rd @ ¢ page 49, fig. 39. The in- II
dicator light turns on.
.,.To switch the high beams off man ually, pull the
lever back @ ¢ page 49, fig. 39. The high beam
assistant is deactivated .
Operating the headlight flasher
.,.To operate t he headlight flasher when th e high
beam ass istant is activated and hig h beams are
sw itched off, pull the lever back © ¢ page 49,
fig. 39. The high beam assistant remains ac-
tive .

u
(0
Messages in the instrument cluster display
......
N
r--.
N
mlAudi adaptive light: malfun ction! See own-
...... er's manual ..,.
0
0
:E
<t

49
Light s and Vision
Ir.a
Headlight assistant: malf unction! See own-
er's manual
Drive to an a utho rized Aud i de al e r or authorized
Aud i Serv ice Facility immediately to have the
malfunction corrected . You can still switch the
high beams on or off manually .
II Headlight assistant : currently unavailable.
Camera view restricted due to surroundings.
See owner's manual
The camera view is blocked , fo r example by a
st icker or debr is.
The sensor is located between the interior rear-
view mir ror and the windshield . Do not place any
stickers in th is area on t he windshield .
_& WARNING
High beam assistant is only int ended to assist
t he driver. The dr iver is still res ponsible for
cont rolling the headlights and may need to
switch them on and off manually depend ing
on light and visib ility conditions . It may be
necessary to ope rate them manua lly in s itua-
tions such as:
- In adve rse weathe r cond itions such as fog,
heavy ra in, b low ing snow or sp raying water .
- On roads where oncoming traffic may be
partia lly obscured, such as exp ressways .
- When there a re road users that do not have
s ufficient lighting, s uch as bicyclers o r
vehicles with dirty ta il lamps.
- In tight curves and o n steep hills .
- In poorly lit areas .
- Wit h stro ng reflecto rs, such as signs.
- If t he area of the windsh ield near the senso r
is fogged over, dirty, icy or covere d with a
st icker .
Adjusting the exterior lighting
The functions are adjust ed in the Infotainm ent
system.
• Select in the Infotainment system: IM E NU I but-
ton > Vehicle > left contro l button > Vehicle
setting s > Exterior lighting .
50
Automatic headlights
You can adjus t the following se tti ngs in the Au-
to-dimming high beams menu:
Activation time -you can adj ust if the headlights
swit ch on Early, Medium or Late accor ding to t he
sens itivity of t he light sen sor .
Headlight assistant* - you can switch the high
bea m assis t ant* on and off.
Entry/exit lighting
When it is dark, the Entry/ exit lighting illumi-
nates the area a round the vehicle when unlocking
the veh icle and after switch ing off the ignit ion
and opening the dr iver's door .
The Entry/ exit lighting only works when it is
dark and the light sw itch is in the AUTO posit ion.
Daytime running lights
USA models: the daytime running lights can be
switch ed on/off . Select On or Off.
Canada models: t his function canno t be sw itched
off. They activate automatically each time t he ig-
nit ion is switched on.
Emergency flas hers
- -- ---~
·--
~~ ~-~-~
·--- -- -- --___
,
~-- ::..--
- - ~- ,,.. A .. 'l- "'.A
Fig. 4 0 Center conso le: emerge ncy flashe r butto n
The emergen cy fl ashe rs makes ot her d rivers
aware of your veh icle in dangerous situations.
• Press the ~ button to switch the emergency
flashe rs on or off .
You can indicate a la ne change or a turn when the
eme rgency flashers are switched o n by using the
turn s ignal leve r. The eme rgency flashe rs stop
tempor ar ily. ll-
 Lights and Vision

The emergency flashers also work when th e igni- Rear interior lighting
tion is turned off.

@ Tips
You should switch the emergency flashers on
if:
- you are the last car in a traffic jam so that
all other vehicles approaching from behind
can see you, or if
-your vehicle has broken down or you are
having an emergency, or if
Fig. 42 Headliner: reading lights, version 1
-your vehicle is being towed or if you are tow-
ing another vehicle

Interior Lighting
Front interior lighting

~
0
9
!
Fig. 43 Headliner: reading light s, version 2

.,.Version 1: to turn a reading light on or off,

Fig. 41 Headliner: front interior lighting (example)
Press the corresponding button fig.
c:-:>
-!;I- Door contact switch on/off. The interior light -
ing is controlled automatically.
-M-- Interior lighting on/off
~ Switch the rear reading lights on/off from
* -
the cockpit.
Applies to: vehicles with touch-sensitive reading
lights : To turn the respective reading light on or
off, touch the surface @ briefly. To activate the
manual dimming function, touch the surface @
when the light is switched off and keep touching
it until the desired brightness is reached.
press the ~ button .
.,.To activate the manual dimming function*,
touch the surface when the light is switched off
~~ and keep touching it until the desired
brightness is reached.
41:
.,.Version 2 (touch-sensitive reading lights with
manual dimming function*): to turn a reading
light on or off, briefly touch the surface @
¢fig. 43.
.,.To activate the manual dimming function,
touch the surface @ when the light is switched
off and keep touching it until the desired
brightness is reached.
For vehicles with third-row seats*, the luggage
compartment light can be switched on and off
like a reading light with the~ button c:-:>fig. 43 .
This requires the luggage compartment lid to be
closed .

u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

51
Light s and Vision

Interior lighting Instrument illumination

Applies to : vehicles wit h interior light ing
~ Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU I but-
ton > Vehicle > left contro l but ton > Vehicle
settings > Interior lighting.
The brightness of the illumination for the instru-
ments, display and head-up display* can be ad-
justed .

The interior lighting turns on when you switch

~~"'
t== ~====== =-===~=:::::::=====~
the headlight s on while the igni t ion is on . ~

The storage compartment in the door is illumi-

nated when you reach your hand into the storage
compartment.

Version 1
To adjust the brightness of individua l zones, se-
lect Front brightness*, Door brightne ss or Foot- Fig. 44 Ins tr ument ill uminat ion
well brightnes s. Turn the cont rol knob to the left
~ Press the knob to release it .
or to the right. Press the control knob to confirm
~ Turn the knob toward" -" or" +" to reduce or in-
the br ightness .
crease the br ightness.
Version 2 ~ Press the knob again to return it to its original

Select and confirm one of the displayed profiles position.

by pressing the control knob.
Individual: you can customize the brightness and
color of individual zones. Press the right control
button. Press the control knob again to confirm
the settings.
Audi drive select: the interior and conto ur light -
ing color changes depending on the driving mode
selected in drive select* <=>
page 134.
(D Tips
The setting is automat ically stored and as-
signed to the remote control key that is being
used.
(!) Tips
Depending on vehicle equipment, the instru-
ment ill umination (needles and gauges) may
turn on when t he lig hts are off and the igni-
tion is switched on. The ill um ination for the
gaug es reduces automatically and eventua lly
turn s off as br igh t ness outs ide increases. This
f unct ion remin ds t he dr iver to tur n t he low
beams on at the appropriate t ime.
Vision
Adjusting exterior mirrors

Fig. 4 5 Driver's door : knob for the exter ior mirrors

Turn the knob to the desired position:

52

0 - all adjustment functions are deactivated .
Q/ P - adjusting the left/right exter ior mirror.
Move the knob in the desired direction .
®- Heat ing* the mirror glass depending on the
outside temperature .
8 - Folding exterior mirrors* . To fold the mirrors
out, turn the knob to one of the other pos itions .
In the Infotainment system, you can select if the
mirrors fo ld in automatically when you lock the
vehicle 9 page 39.
Front passenger's exterio r mirror tilt
function*
To help you see the curb when backing into a
parking space, the surface of the mirror tilts
slightly . For th is to happen, the knob m ust be in
the posit ion for the front passenger's exterior
mirror.
You can adjust the t ilted m irror surface by turn-
ing the knob in the desi red direction. When you
move out of reverse and into another gear, t he
new mirror position is stored and assigned to the
key you are using.
The mirror goes back into its orig inal position
once you drive forward faster than 9 mph
(15 km/h) or turn the ignition off .
A WARNING
Curved mirror surfaces (for examp le convex)
enlarge the f ield of vision . However, they
make objects in the mirror appear sma ller
and farther away. Your may estimate incor-
rectly whe n you use these m irrors to gauge
your distance from the vehicles behind you
when changing lanes, wh ich increases the risk
of an accident.
(D Note
- Applies to vehicles with power folding exte-
rior mirrors: if the mirror housing was
moved by outside forces (such as an impact
whe n maneuvering), you m ust use the pow-
u er folding func t ion to fo ld the mirror all the
co
......
N way out. The mirro rs will make a loud noise
r-...
N
...... when they latch into place . The mirror hous -
0
0 ing must not be moved back into place by
:E:
'<t
Light s and Vis ion
hand because this would impai r the func -
tion of the mirror mechanism.
- Applies to vehicles without power folding
exterior mirrors: if the mirror housing was
moved by outside forces (such as an impact
when maneuvering), you must move it back
in place by hand .
- If you wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash, you must fold the exter ior mirrors in
to reduce the risk of damage to the m irrors.
Never fold power fo lding exter ior mirrors*
by hand . Only fold them in and out using
the power controls.
(D Tips
- If the power adjusting function malfunc-
tions, the glass in both mirrors can be ad-
justed by pressing on the edge of it by hand .
- The exterior m irror settings are stored with
the memory funct ion* 9 page 64 .
Dimming the mirrors
Your vehicle is equipped with a manual or auto-
matic* dimming rearview mirror .
Manual dimming rearview mirror
.. Pull the lever on the bottom of the m irror back.
Automat ic dimming rearview mirror*
.. The inte rior and exte rior m irrors dim automat i-
cally when light shines on them, for examp le
from headlights on a veh icle beh ind you.
A
=
WARNING
If the glass on an automatic dimming m irror
breaks, electro lyte can leak out. This liquid
can irritate the skin, eyes and respiratory sys-
tem. If there is contact with the fluid, flush
immediately with plenty of water. Consult a
physician if necessa ry.
- Repeated or long-term exposure to electro-
lyte fluid can lead to irritation of t he air-
ways, especia lly in peopl e with ast hma or
ot her respiratory condit ions. Take deep
breat hs immedi at ely afte r leaving the vehi-
cle or, if this is not poss ible, open all of t he
doors and windows as wide as possib le.
53
Lights and Vision

- If electrolyte fluid enters the eyes, flush Comfort sun visor

them thoroughly with a large amount of
clean water for at least 15 minutes and then
seek medical attention .
- If electrolyte fluid comes into contact with
the skin, flush the affected area with clean
water for at least 15 minutes and then clean
with soap and water and seek medical at-
tention. Clean affected clothing and shoes
thoroughly before wearing again .
- If the fluid was swallowed and the person is
conscious, flush the mouth with water for at
least 15 minutes. Do not induce vomiting
unless this is recommended by medical pro-
fessionals. Seek medical attenti .on immedi-
ately.
The front of the double sun visor can be released
from its retainer and turned toward the door . The
sun visor can also be moved back and forth
le ngthwise in this position Q fig . 46.
Vanity mirror
The mirror lighting switches on when the cover
over the vanity mirror opens.
Sunshade
Appl ies to: vehicles with sunshade

(D Note
If the glass on an automatic dimming mirror
breaks, electrolyte can leak out . This liquid
damages plastic surfaces and paint. Clean
this liquid as quickly as possible, for example
Fig. 47 Rear door : sunshade
with a wet sponge .

@ Tips
- If the light reaching the rearview mirror is
obstructed, the automatic dimming mirror
will not function correctly,
- The automatic dimming mirrors do not dim
when the interior lighting is turned on or
the reverse gear is selected .

Fig. 48 Rear window : sunshade

Sun visors

Rear door sunshade

"'Pull the sunshade out and attach it to the re-
tainer on the upper door frame Q fig. 47 .

Rear window sunshade

"' Pull the sunshade out and attach it to the re-

tainer on the luggage compartment lid
~ fig. 48 .

Fig. 46 Comfo rt sun visor

54
 Lights and V ision

Windshield wipers ® - Clean the w indshield . The wipers w ipe one

time after several seconds of driving to remove
Switching the wipers on water droplets . You can switch this funct ion off
by moving the lever to posit ion ® within 10 sec-

•• ®
@
! cb
onds of the afterwipe . The afterwipe function is
reactivated the next time you switch the ignit ion
on.

• @ Clean the headlights*. The headlight washer sys-

tem* operates only when the low beam head-
• @ lights are on. If you move t he lever to posit ion

Fig. 4 9 Windshield wiper lever

•® ® · t he headlights and the night vision assist
camera* are cleaned at inte rvals.

® - Wipe t he rear window. The number of w ipes

-
en
0
9
depends on the windsh ield wiper movement .
:i
cb The rear wiper automat ically switches on when
the reverse gear is selected and the front wind-
shield wipers are on and running.

(J)- Clean the rear window . The number of wipes

depends on how long the lever is held in position
(J).

Fig. SO Rear w indow wiper operat ion

Move the windshield wiper lever to the corre·
spond ing position:
@ · Windshield wipers off
(D - Rain sensor mode. The winds hield wipers
switch on once the vehicle speed exceeds approx-
imately 2 mph (4 km/h) and it is raining. The
higher the sensitivity of the rain sensor that is set
(switch ® to the right), the earlier the wind·
shield wipers react to moisture on the wind-
shield . You can deactivate the rain sensor mode
in the Infota inment system, which switches the
intermittent mode on. To do th is, select : !MENU !
but t on > Vehicle > lef t cont rol but t on > Driver
assistan ce > Rain sensor . In intermittent mode ,
you can adjust the interva l t ime using the switch
®·
@ · Slow wip ing
@ - Fast wip ing
u shield can damage the wiper blades.
~ @ - Single wipe. If you hold the lever in th is posi-
~ tion longer, the wipers switch from slow wiping
~
A WARNING
- The rain sensor is on ly intended to assist the
driver. The drive r may still be responsib le
for manually switching the wipers on based
on visibili t y cond itions .
- The winds hield may not be t reated w ith wa -
ter- repelling w indshield coating agents. Un-
f avorable condit ions, such as wet ness, dark-
ness or low sun, can result in increased
glare, which increases the risk of an acci-
dent . Wiper blade chatter is also possib le.
- Properly f unct ioning w indshield wiper
blades are requ ired for a clear view and safe
driving<:::>page 56, Replacing wiper
blades .
(D Note
- If there is frost, make sure t he win dshield
w iper bl ades are not froze n t o the wind-
shield. Switching on the w indshie ld w ipers
w hen the blades are frozen to the wind-
- The windshie ld wiper system must be
switched off (lever in position 0) before us-

g to fast w iping. ing a car wash. This prevents the wipers

:E
<t

55
Light s and Vi s ion

from switching on unintentionally and caus- · Replacing wiper blades

ing damage to the windshield wiper system.

@ Tips
- The windshield wipers switch off when the
ignition is switched off. You can activate the
windshield wipers after the ignition is
switched back on by moving the windshield
wiper lever to any posit ion.
- Worn or dirty windshield wiper blades result
in streaking. This can affect the rain sensor
Fig. 51 Removing windshie ld wiper blades
funct ion. Check your windshield wiper
blades regularly.
Windshield wiper service position / blade
- The washer fluid nozzles for the windshield replacement position
washer system are heated at low tempera-
tures when the ignition is on . "'T o br ing the windshield w ipers into the service
position, turn the ign it ion off and move the
- When stopp ing temporarily, such as at a
w indshie ld wiper lever into position @
traffic light, the speed of the windshield
¢page 55, fig. 49.
wipers automatically reduces by one level.
"'To bring the wipers into the starting position ,
turn the ignition on and move the windshield
Cleaning the wiper blades
wiper lever into position @ for at least two sec-
Clean the wiper blades when you see wiper onds ¢ page 55, fig. 49.
streaks. Use a soft cloth and a glass cleaner. You can also turn the serviceposition on or off in
the I nfotainment system:
Windshield wiper
"' Switch the windshie ld wipers off (position @
"' Place the windshield wiper arms in the service ¢ page 55, fig . 49).
position ¢ page 56 . "' Select: the IMENU Ibutton > Vehicle > left con-
"' Fold the windshield wiper arms away from the trol button > Service & checks > Wiper change
winds hield. position .

Rear window wiper Removing the wiper blade

"' Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
A WARNING
-
Dirty windshield wiper blades can impair vi-
sion, which increases the risk of an accident.
"' Fold the windshie ld wiper arm away from the
windshield.
"' Press the locking knob (D ¢ fig. 51 on the w iper
blade. Hold the wiper blade firmly.
"' Remove the w iper blade in the direction of the
arrow.

Installing the wiper blade

"' Insert the new wiper blade into the mount on
the wiper arm @ until it clicks into place.
"' Place the wiper arm back on the windsh ield.
"' Turn the service position off . 1111>

56
 Lights and V is ion

A WARNING
Removing the wiper blade
.,. Fold the wiper arm away from the rear window.
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
.,. Remove the wiper blade from its holder.
blades should be replaced once or tw ice each
year . Installing the wiper blade
.,. Press the wiper blade mount into the retainer .
(D Note
.,. Fold the window wiper arm back onto the rear
- Only fold the windshield wipers away when window.
they are in the service position . Otherwise,
you risk damaging the paint on the hood or
the windshie ld wiper motor.
A WARNING
For safety reasons, the windshield wiper
- You should not move your vehicle or operate
blades should be rep laced once or twice each
the windshield wiper lever when the wiper
year.
arms are fo lded away from the windshield.
The windshield wipe rs would move back in-
to their original position and could damage Digital compass
the hood and winds hield.
Switching the compass on and off
- To reduce the risk of damage to the wiper
Applies to: vehicles with digita l compass
system, always loosen blades which are fro-
0
zen to the windsh ield before operating the N
0

wipe rs. l
Cl)
- To reduce the risk of damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline, kerosene, paint
thinner, or other so lvents on or near the
wiper blades.
- To reduce the risk of damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do not attempt
to move the wipers by hand.
Fig. 53 Rearview mirror: digita l compass is switched on
@ Tips
- You can also use the service position, for ex- .,.To turn the compass on or off, press the button
ample, if you want to protect the windsh ield @ until the compass in the mirror appears or
from icing by using a cover. disappears .
- You cannot activate the service position The digital compass only works when the ignition
when the hood is open. is turned on. The directions are indicated with ab-
breviations: N (north), NE (northeast), E (east),
Replacing rear wiper blade SE (southeast), S (south), SW (southwest), W
(west), NW (northwest) .

@ Tips
To prevent inaccurate compass readings, do
not bring any remote controls, electrical devi-
ces or metallic objects near the mirror.

Fig. 52 Rear w indow wiper : installing the wiper bla de

57
Light s and Vision

Adjusting the magnetic zone

Applies to: vehicles with digital compass

The magnetic zone must be adjusted correctly for the compass to read accurately.

Fig. 54 Magnetic zone map

• Press and hold the button @ ~ page 57, fig. 53

unt il the number of the selected magnetic zone
appears in the rea rview mir ror .
• Press the button @ repeatedly to select the
correc t magnetic zone . The sele ct ion mode
turns off after a few seconds .
A WARNING
To reduce the risk to yourse lf and ot her driv·
e rs, calibra t e the compass in an area where
there is no traffic .

Calibrating the compass

App lies to: vehicles with digital compass

If the display is incorrect or inaccurate, the com-

pass must be recalibrated .

• Press and hold the button @ until a C appears

in the rearv iew mirror.
• Drive in a circle at about 6 mph (10 km/h) unt il
a d irec t ion is displayed in t he int erior rearv iew
mirror .

58
 Seats and storage

Seats and storage - To reduce the risk of an accident, only adjust

the driver's seat when the vehicle is station-
General information ary.
- Exercise caution when adjusting the seat
A WARNING height. Unsupervised or careless seat ad-
See ¢ page 256, Driving safety for important justment can pinch fingers or hands, which
information, tips, suggestions and warnings increases the risk of injury.
that you should read and follow for your own - The front seat backrests must not be re-
safety and the safety of your passengers. clined too far back when driving, because
this impairs the effectiveness of the safety
Front seats belts and airbag system, which increases
the risk of injury.
Power seat adjustment

Multifunction button
Applies to : vehicles with mult ifunct ion butto n

You can adjust the massage function, lumbar

support, side bolsters and upper thigh support
using the multifunction button .

Fig. 55 Front seat: adjus tin g the seat (version B)

@ - Moving the seat forward/back: press the but-

ton forward/back.
@ - Moving the seat up/down : press the button
up/down. To adjust the front seat cushion, press
the front button up/down. To adjust the rear seat
cushion, press the rear button up/down .
@ - Adjusting the backrest angle : press the but-
ton forward/back.
© - Switching the massage fun ction* on/off
fig. 55. Select the type of massage with the
c::>
multifunction button* c::> page 59 .
CD-lumbar support or multifunction but t on*
c:>page 59 . To adjust the lumbar support , press
the button in the applicable location .
A WARNING
Fig. 56 Infotainment system : seat sett ings
Operating
"'If you turn the multifunction button CD
page 59, fig. 55 to the left or to the right,
c::>
the possible seat settings @ are shown in the
Infotainment system c::>fig. 56 .
.,.To select a seat setting, turn the multifunction
button CD in the corresponding direction until
the desired seat setting is outlined in red.
.,.The arrows @ represent the possible adjust-
ments. For example, to lower the lumbar sup-
port, press the multifunction button CD
The corresponding arrow © lights up.
down.

- The power front seats can also be adjusted

when the ignition is switched off. To reduce The following seat settings @ are possible:
u the risk of injury, children should never be
(0
......
Massage function* - select the Wave, Pulse,
N
r--.
left unattended in the vehicle for this rea- Stretch, Lumbar or Shoulder massage type or
N
...... son.
0 Off. You can adjust the intensity of each massage ..,.
0
:E
<t

59
S ea ts and s tor a ge

from 1 through 5 . You can switch the selected Rear seats

massage on/off using the button @ ¢ fig. 56 .
Adjusting the seats (second row seats)
Lumbar support - you can adjust the lumbar sup-
port up/down and to be st ronge r/weaker. The forward/back position" of the seat surface
and the angle of the backrest can be adjusted.
Side bolster s* - you can increase/decrease the
latera l support in the seat using the s ide bo lsters
on the seat surface and the backrest.

Upper thigh support* - you can increase/de-

crease the upper th igh support .

(D Tips
- The massage function switches off a uto-
matically after approx imately 10 minutes .
- The air in the s ide bolsters* is released as
Fig. 58 Second row seats: adjust ing t he backrest angle
soon as the driver's door opens. This makes
is possible to enter and exit the vehicle
more comfortab ly. As soon as you sta rt d riv-
ing the veh icle, the s ide bo lsters fi ll.
··-.._,,,___
··-·-·--..____ ____
-...···-----_....._____
...... ..
Center armrest
There is a storage compartment under the arm-
rest.

Fig. 59 Second row seats: adjusting t he forward/back pos i-

t ion

Adjusting the angle of the outer backrest

Fig. 57 Comfort center armrest between the driver's seat
and front passe nger's seat
• To adjust the angle, raise the armrest from the
start ing pos it ion notch by no t ch.
• To bring the armrest back into the starti ng po-
sition, ra ise it out of the t op notch and fold it
back down.
• Pull the lever upward and push the backrest
back to the des ired position¢ fig. 58. Release
the lever.
• Pull the handle upward so that the backrest will
tilt forward. Release the lever and push the
backrest back to put t he back rest in its basic
posi t ion .
Adjusting the angle of the center backrest
• Pull the release strap a nd push the backrest
back to the des ired position ¢ page 68,
fig. 75. Release the st rap.

The arm rest can be moved forward/back sepa-
rately for the dr iver/front passenge r.
Adjusting forward and backward*
• Pull the handle up and slide the seat forward or
back c> fig. 59.
• Release the handle and cont inue slid ing the
seat unt il it locks in place .

60

_& WARNING
- To reduce the risk of an accident, the seat
can only be adjusted when the vehicle is sta-
tionary .
- Be careful when adjusting the seat. Adjust-
ing the seat without paying attention can
pinch fingers or limbs, which increases the
risk of injury .
-A lways pull forward on the backrest to make
sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
place.
Entry / exit assistance (second row seats )
Applies to: vehicles with entry assistance
Entry/exit assistance creates easier access to the
third-row seating*.
•
Fig. 60 Second-row seating: fo l ding t he seat down
Fig. 61 Second-row seating : fo l ding the seat upright
To be able to enter and exit, you must fo ld the
backrest on the second row seat down, and then
fold the seat upward.
Folding the second row seat backrest down
u
(0
.,. Pull the lever upward o:::>page 60, fig. 58. Or
......
N .,.From the third row seat*, pull the release strap
r--.
N
...... on the seat in front -arrow- o:::>fig. 60.
0
0
:E
.,.The backrest folds down by itself.
<t
Seats and storage
Folding the second row seat upward
.,. Pull the seat up by the lever (!) until it is folded
upward o:::>fig. 61.
If the second row seats are not folded down and
locked into the floor when you begin to drive,
then the II ind icator light turns on in the instr u-
ment clust er display as well as the message Sec-
ond seat row not locked. Risk of injury for rear
passengers.A warning tone will also sound.
A
- WARNING
- When the second row seats are folded
down, they must not be used as a footrest
or have objects placed on them as this in-
creases the risk of an accident.
- To reduce the risk of an accident, never al-
low people to ride in the third row* if the
second row seats are folded upward .
- To reduce the risk of an accident, never drive
with objects on the folded third row* backr-
ests if the second row seats are folded up-
right.
- Be mindful of persons in the third row*
when folding down the second row seats.
Not paying attention when folding down
seats can cause pinching injuries .
- Always pull forward on the backrest to make
sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
place.
- If you are unlocking the second row seat
backrest from the third row seat* o:::>fig. 60,
be careful of any passengers in the second
row seats or within the backrest's range of
motion. Not paying attention when folding
down seats can cause injuries .
(D Note
Move the rear head restraints down before
folding the rear backrests forward
¢ page 63. This is especially true if the Rear
Seat Entertainment (RSE)* is installed, be-
cause it could be damaged.
61
S ea ts and s tor a ge

Folding the backrest down/up (third row
seats)
Applies to vehicles with third row seats
Meaning of the LED in the button
- If the LEDblinks, the backrest is still not in its
end position.
- If the LEDturn s on, the backrest is in its end
posi t ion.

_& WARNING
Fig. 62 Third row seats: folding the headrest
Fig. 63 Third row seats: folding the backrest
(D
Folding the backrest down / up
The buttons are located in the rear area @ and in
the luggage compartment @ ¢ fig. 63.
.,.Press the button CDor @ until the backrest is
completely folded down or up.
You can fo ld the backrests up or down at the
same time using the button CD and @ .
(I}
If the backrests are not in their locked position,
thr 9 indicator light and the message Please
move third seat row to its end position. See
owner's manual appear in the instrument cluster
disp lay. A warning tone will a lso sound.
Unfold ing th e head rest raint s
The head restraint is automatically folded in
when the backrest is folded down . You must
manually unfo ld the head restraint after unfold-
ing the backrest .
- Be carefu l when fo lding and unfolding t he
backrests. Not paying attention and not
checking when fo ld ing/unfolding the backr-
ests can lead to pinch ing injuries.
- Always pull forward on the backrest to make
sure it is check if it is correctly locked in
place.
- Do not drive if the indicator light in the but-
ton is blinking ¢ fig. 63. This situation in-
creases the risk of an accident, since the
backrest is not locked in place and it is not
in its e nd position .
- To reduce the risk of an accident, never drive
with persons in the third row-seat if the
seats a re not folded comp letely upright .
Note
- To reduce the risk of damage, make sure the
second-row seat backrest is upr ight before
folding the th ird-row seat backrest up or
down .
- Do not place any objects on the third row
seat backrest if it is not completely folded
down.
Tips
- Very low temperatures can cause malfunc -
t ions when folding and unfolding the backr-
ests . If this is the case, moving the vehicle
to a warmer a rea (such as a garage) will
help.
- The backrest cannot be fo lded down or up if
the vehicle door on the side to be adjusted
is closed .

.,.Unfold the head restraint by tilting it upward

until you feel it click into p lace.

62
 Seats and storag e

Head restraints
Front head restraints
Applies to: vehicles with adjustable head restra ints

Fig. 6 6 Rear seat: remov ing the head rest raint

If passengers will be sitting in the rear seats,

Fig. 6 4 Front seat: adjusting the head restraint
Adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is as
even as possible with the top of your head. If that
is not possible, try to adjust as close to this pos i·
tion as possible.
Adjusting the head restraints
.,.To move the head restraint upward/forward,
hold it at the sides with both hands and slide it
upward/forward until you feel it click into
place.
.,.To move the head restrai nt downward/back·
ward, press t he side button and slide the head
res t raint downward/bac kward. Release the but -
ton and slide the head restra int farther until it
clicks into place.
move the head restraints in the second row all
the way up or fold up t he head restra ints on the
occupied third row seats¢ _& .
Moving the head restraint s
.,.To move the head restraint upward, hold it at
the sides with both hands and slide it upward
until it clicks into place ¢ fig. 65.
.,.To move the head restrain t down, press the
button -arrow· ¢ fig . 65 and slide the head re·
straint downward.
Folding the head restraints for the third row
seats* down and up
.,. Fold the head restraint down by pulling on the
t ab ¢ page 62, fig. 62.
.,.Unfold t he head res t ra int by t ilting it upwa rd
until you fee l it click into pla ce.

A WARNING
-
Removing the head restraints

Always read and follow the applicab le warn - .,.Move the head restraint upward as far as it can
ings ¢ page 2 59, Proper adjustment of head go.
restraints. .,. Press t he re lease point¢ fig. 66 using the me-
chan ica l key <=>page35, Key set a nd press the
but t on -arrow- ¢fig. 65. Pull the head restr aint
Rear head restraints out of the bac kres t at the same time ¢ _& .
"'
"'
N Installing the head restraints

I .,.Slide t he posts on the head restra int down into

t he guides unt il the posts click int o place .
.,. Press the but ton -arrow- r=>fig. 65 a nd slide t he
he ad res t raint all t he way dow n. You sho uld not
be able to remove the head res t rai nt from the
u
(0
...... backrest without pressing the button . .,.
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E Fig. 65 Second row seats: adjust ing the head restra int
<t

63
S ea ts and s tor a ge

_& WARNING Remote control key

- Always read and follow the applicable warn-
ings q pag e 259, Proper adjustm ent of
head restraints .
- Only remove the head restraints for the sec-
ond row seats when it is necessary for in-
sta lling a child safety seat ~ page 295,
Child safety. Install the head rest raint again
immediately once the child safety seat is re-
moved. Driving with the head res t raints re-
moved or not in t he upright position in-
Applies to: vehicles with memo ry function
The driver's seat profile can be assigned to the
remote control key when the vehicle is locked.
.. Select in the Infotainment system: IMENUj but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Vehicle
setting s > Seat s > Driver's seat> Store set-
t ings on remote control key.
@ Tips

creases the risk of serious injury . If you do not wish to have the seat profile for
another driver ass igned to the remote control
key, switch the memory f unction off in the In-
Memory function fotainment system.
Description
App lies to: vehicles with memory function Memory buttons
Applies to : vehicles with memory funct ion
Using the memory funct ion , you can qu ickly and
easi ly store a pe rsonal seat profile for the driver
and fron t passenger and recall the settings. The
memory function is controlled by t he remo t e
control key and the memory buttons in the driv-
er's/front passenger's* door .

The drive r's seat profile is stored aga in and as-

signed to the remo t e control key each time the
vehicle is locked. When you open the door, the
seat profi le is automatica lly recalled. If two peo-
Fig. 67 Dri ver's door : memory function butto ns
p le use the ve hicle, it is recommended that each
person a lways uses their "own" remote contro l
The memory buttons are located in the driver's/
key.
front passenger's * door .
Two seat profiles can be stored each using the
memory buttons . Once they are stored, these Storing a seat profile
seat profiles can be selected at any time. .. Press the ISETI button . The LEDin the button
turns on.
The fo llowing settings are stored:
"' Press memory button [I] or ~-
Remote Memory button
A signal tone will sound when it is s uccessfully
control
stored.
key
Driver Driver Front pas- Accessing a seat profil e
senger "' If the driver's/front passenger's door is open
Seat X X X and the ignition is switched off, press the mem -
Steering ory button .
X X .. If the driver's/front passenger's door is closed
wheel*
or the ignition is sw itched on, press and hold
Both exte rior
X X the memory button until the seat profile is
mirrors *
comp letely set. .,..

64
 Seats and storag e

A WARNING Ashtray
Applies to: vehicles with ashtray
- For sa fety reasons, th e seat setting can only
be recalled when the veh icle is stationary to
red uce the risk of a n accident.
- I n an emergency, seat adjustment operation
can be stopped by press ing the ISETI button
or the buttons @ or @ ¢ pag e 59, fig. 55. 619

Adjusting the front passenger's seat in the

Infotainment system
Applies to: vehicles with memory function ---

Fig. 68 Door trim: rear ashtray

The driver can move the front passeng er's seat
into various positions.
Adjusting the front passenger's seat from
the driver's seat
~ Se lect in the Info t ainment syst em: !MENU I but-
ton > Vehicle > left contro l butto n > Vehicle
settings > Seats > Front passenger's seat > Ad-
ju st seat position.
~ You can now adjust the front passenger's seat
using the d river's seat buttons ¢ page 64,
fig . 67 .
Opening / closing
~ To open the rear ashtray, tap the cover on the
rim .
Emptying
~ To empty the rear ashtray, press the rear side
of t he cover down when it is open ¢ fig. 68. The
ashtray will lift up out of its mo unt.
~ To insert t he rear as htray again, press it into
the mount unt il it clicks into place.

Align with driver's seat A WARNING

~ Select in the Infot ainment syst em: !MENUI but- Neve r use t he asht ray t o hold pa per, be cause
ton > Vehicle > left co ntro l bu t to n > Vehicle t his increases t he risk of a fire.
settings > Seats > Front passenger's seat >
Align with driver's seat > Set now.
~ Press and hold the control knob until the ad-
just ing process is complete.

@ Tips
The lumbar support an d upper t high s upport
sett ings are not transferred when a ligning
th e front passenger's seat with the driver's
seat.

u
(0
.-I
N
r--.
N
.-I
0
0
:E
<t

65
S ea ts and s tor a ge
Sockets
Fig. 69 Rear center con sole: 12 volt socket
Fig. 70 Lugg age compa rtmen t s ide trim panel: 12 volt
socket
The 12-volt sockets can be used for electrical ac-
cessories . The power usage must not exceed
120 watts .
There is an additional 12 Volt socket* in the cen -
ter conso le storage compartment .
A WARNING
The sockets and the electrical accessories con-
nected to them only function when the igni-
tion is switched on . Incorrect usage can lead
to ser ious injuries o r bu rns . To reduce the risk
of injuries, never leave children unattended in
the vehicle with the vehicle key.
CDNote
- To reduce t he risk of damage to the vehicle
electrica l system, never attempt to charge
the veh icle battery by connecting accesso-
ries t hat provide power, such as solar pane ls
or battery chargers, to the 12 Volt sockets
or the cigarette lighter.
- To reduce the risk of damage to the sockets,
on ly use plugs that fit correct ly.
66
Storage
Cup holders
Fig. 71 Rear center armres t: cup ho lde rs
Your veh icle has cup holders in t he front cen t er
console, in the door po ckets, in the center arm -
rest in the second row seat and o n the left and
right side in the third row seat* .
Cup holder in the cent er armrest in th e
second row seat
.,. Fold the center armrest downward by pressing
the button in the second row middle seat .
.,.Press the button to open t he cup holder
~ fig. 71 .
...Set your beverage in t he holder.
...To close the cup holder, fold th e cover back un-
til it clicks into plac e .
A WARNING
- Do not put any hot beverages in the cup
-
holder while the vehicle is moving. Hot bev-
erages could spill, which increases the risk
of injury.
- Do not use any breakab le beverage contain-
ers (for example , made out of glass or por-
celain). You could be injured by them in the
event of an accident.
CDNote
Beverage containers in the cup holders should
a lways have a lid. If not, beverages could spill
and cause damage to veh icle equipment, such
e lectron ics or seat covers .
 Seats and storage

Cooled glove compartment

Appl ies to: vehicles with cooled glove compartme nt
The cooled glove compartment only functions
when the AIC system is switched on .
-.-
Fig. 72 Glove compartment: switching cooling mode on/
off
~ Turn the knob @ counter-clockw ise to switch
the cooling on. The symbols on the knob must
appear as they do in ~ fig. 72 .
~ Turn the knob @ clockwise to switch the cool -
ing off .
A
- WARNING
- Always keep the glove compartment lid
closed while dr iving to reduce the risk of in-
jury .
!i:CI:!·
- Only use the storage compartments in the
door trim panels to store small objects that
will not stick out of the compartment and
impair the range of the side airbags.
- Make sure that the view to the rear is not
obstructed by hanging garments.
- Hang only lightweight clothing and be sure
that there are no heavy or sharp-edged ob-
jects in the pockets.
- Do not use coat hangers to hang the cloth-
ing because this could impair the effective-
ness of the side curtain airbags .
Luggage compartment
General information

If the heating is switched on, switching the glove

A WARNING

compartment cooling mode off is recommended. Read and follow the important safety precau-
tions in r::!>page 261, Storing cargo correctly.

Additional storage compartments

You will find a variety of storage compartments

and holders at var ious locations in the vehicle.

- Glove compartment : the glove compartment

can be locked using the mechanical key
page
<=> 35, Key set.
- In the door trim panels
- Safety vest compartment in the door trim pan-
els on the driver's side and front passenger's
side
- Storage compartment* in the center console
- Storage compartment under the front center
armrest
- Garment hooks above the rear doors
- Nets on the backrests of the front seats
- Net on the left luggage compartment trim pan-
el

u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

67
Seats and storage
Luggage compartment cover
Fig. 73 Luggage compartment: cover attached
Fig. 74 Luggage compar tm ent: removing and installing
the luggage compartment cover
Attaching
., Pull the cover out and attach it in the mounting
eyelets in th e side trim panel ~ fig. 73.
Removing
., Pull the lever in the direction of the arrow
~ fig. 74 and rem ove the cove r upward .
Installing
., Place the left and right s ides of the cover into
the mounts on the side trim panel.
., Push the cover downward until it clicks into
place.
A WARNING
The luggage compartment cover is not a sur-
face for stor ing objects. Objects placed on the
cover could endanger all vehicle occupants
during sudden braking maneuvers or in a
crash .
68
(D Note
- Let the luggage compartment cover roll up
slowly to reduce the risk of damage.
- Also read and fo llow the applicab le warn -
ings ~ (j) in Folding the backrest down/up
(third row seats) on page 62.
Increasing the size of the luggage
compartment
The backrests can be folded down individually*
or together.
Fig. 75 Second row seats: release st rap on the center back·
rest
Fig. 76 Luggage compartment : folding down the second
row seats
Folding the backrest down
., Pull the lever upward ~ page 60, fig . 58. The
backrest will swing forward. Or
., Pull the release strap at the rear side of the
seat ~ fig. 76.
., Let the backrest latch into the lowest position .
Folding the backrest upright
., Pull the lever up ~ page 60, fig. 58 and fold the
backrest upright until it locks into place ~ _&. Ill>
 Seats and storag e

Folding th e center backrest down* Luggage compartment net

• To rele ase the back rest, pull the release strap Applies to: vehicles with luggage compartment net

at the front or rear side of t he seat ¢ fig. 75 or The cargo net prevents small objects from slid-
fig. 76.
r::!> ing .
• Fold the backrest forward .

Folding the center backrest upright *

• Fold the backrest upwa rd un til it locks into
pla ce ¢ A .

The center backrest may be folded down sepa-

rately* . This allows you to tr ansport long obje cts
(such as skis) inside the vehicle.

_& WARNING - Fig. 77 Lugg age compar tm ent : cargo net stre tch ed out
- The backrest must be latched secure ly to
ensure that the safety belt is protecting the ""Attach the hooks for the luggage comp ar tment
center seating posit ion . net in the tie-downs ¢ fig . 77.
- The backrest must be securely latched so
objects cannot slide forward out of the lug- Cargo floor
gage compartment dur ing sudden braking .
a,
M
- To red uce the risk of injury in vehicles with
third row seats*, the center backrest must ..
0
~
ID
be in the upright pos ition and locked into
place if there are passengers riding in the
third row*.

(D Note
Make sure the oute r safety belts are not
pinched or damaged when folding the seat
Fig. 7 8 Luggage compartme nt: inst alling th e cargo floor
up.
- Read and follow the warnings ¢ .&.in Entry/ Removing and installing the cargo floor
exit assistance (second row seats) on
page 61 and ¢(Din Folding the backrest ""To remove the cargo floor, pull the entire cargo
down/up (third row seats) on page 62 . floor toward the back of t he vehicle .
• To inst all the cargo floor, insert the tabs at
- Move the rear head restraints down before
both s ides into the openings and slide the car-
fo ld ing the rear backrests forward
go floor a ll the way in toward the backrest
¢ page 63 . This is especia lly true if the Rear
¢ fig. 78 .
Seat Entertainment (RSE)*is insta lled, be-
cause it could be damaged .

u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

69
S ea ts and s tor a ge

Roof rack area exposed to wind. Adapt your driving

..
and speed to the current cond itions .

i j (D Note
ii Make sure that the luggage compartment lid
and the panorama g lass roof* do not come in-
to contact with objects on the roof when they
are open.

@ For the sake of the environment

Fig. 79 Roof: mounting points for the roof rack

Your vehicle will use more fue l due to the in-
creased wind resistance . So remove the roof
• To open the flap above the attachment points, rack after us ing it.
press the flap downward in the front a rea.
{!) Tips
If luggage or cargo is to be carried on the roof,
When installing roof rack systems on the roof
you must observe the following:
rail, the ESCuses sensors to adapt itself to a
- Only a specially designed roof rack may be used different center of gravity.
on your vehicle . These roof racks are the basis
for a complete roof rack system . Additional at-
tachments/carrier systems are necessary to
transport luggage and sports equipment. We
recommend roof racks and attachmen t s from
t he Audi Gen uine Accessories prog ram .
- When ins t all ing the roof rack, ma ke sure that it
is mounted only at the designated points on
the roof q fig . 79.
- The maxim um permissible roof load for your
vehicle is 220 lbs (100 kg). The roof load is the
total of the weight of the roof rack, the attach-
ments and the cargo you are carrying . However,
please note the permissible load of the carrier
system being used, the perm issib le axle loads
and the permissible total veh icle weight
q page378 .

A WARNING
- Follow the installation instructions provided
with the roof rack system. If you do not se-
cure the roof rack syst em and objects on the
roof correc t ly, they cou ld come loose from
the vehicle and cause an accident .
- The risk of an accident increases when using
a roof rack system, because it changes the
dr iving character istics by sh ifting the center
of gravity and/or the increasing the surface

70
 Warm and cold

Warm and cold (®} For the sake of the environment

Climate control system
Description
Applies to: vehicles with 3-zon e del uxe automatic climate
control or 4-zone de luxe automa t ic climate control
The climate control system warms, cools and re-
moves humidity from the air in the vehicle interi-
or . It is the most effective when the windows and
sunroof* are closed. If there is a bui ld-up of heat
inside the veh icle, ventilat ion can help to speed
up the cooling process.
In all heating mode functions except for defrost,
the blower on ly switches to a higher speed once
the eng ine coolant has reached a sufficient tem-
perature.
Pollutant filter
The pollutant filter removes pollutants such as
dust and pollen from the air .
Key recognition
The climate control settings are automatically
stored and assigned to the remote control key
that is in use .
- If you would like to reduce fuel consump-
tion, switch the air conditioning off. This
will also reduce emissions.
- In vehicles with a diesel engine, you can
switch the auxiliary heater off in the Info-
tainment system.
(D Tips
- To prevent interference with the heating
and cooling output and to prevent the win-
dows from fogging over, the air intake in
front of the windshield must be free of ice,
snow or leaves.
- Condensation from the cooling system can
drip and form a puddle of water under the
vehicle. This is normal and does not mean
there is a leak .
- The energy management system may tem-
porarily switch off certain functions, such as
the seat heating* or rear window defogger.
These systems are ava ilable again as soon
as the energy supply has been restored.

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

71
Warm and cold

3 zone deluxe automatic climate control

Operation
Applies to: vehicles with 3-zone del uxe automatic climate control

Fig. 80 3 -zone deluxe automat ic climate contro l: cont rols

;
:,,::
·~.
--- - +
--- I
I

J J

Fig. 8 1 3-zo ne deluxe automat ic clima t e control system: rear controls

Press the switches and knobs to turn the func-
tions on or off . When the funct ion is switched on,
the LED in the respec t ive button or knob turns
on . The driver and front passenger sett ings can
be adju sted sepa rat ely.
OFF climate control system
You can switch the climate control system on and
off using the OFF button. It also sw itches on
when yo u pre ss anothe r button or a knob. Airflow
from outside is bloc ked when t he climate con tr ol
syst em is swi tc hed off.
A/C Cooling mode
Press the knob @ to turn cooling mode on or off.
The air is not coo led and humidity is not removed
whe n coo ling mode is sw itched off . This can
cause fog on the windows . Cooling mode
swi t ches off a utomatically whe n t he outside tem-
peratu re is be low ze ro.
~ Cooling mode
The maximum cooling mode can be switched
switched on and off using the~ button. The a ir
is not cooled and hum id ity is not removed when
cooling mode is swi t ched off . This can cause fog ._,.

72

on the windows. Cooling mode switches off auto-
matica lly when the outside temperature is below
zero. When the cooling mode is switched on, efx
the vehicle interior is cooled and dehumidified as
quickly as possible.
c'.E) Recirculation mode
In recirculation mode, the air inside the vehicle is
circulated and filtered. This prevents the unfil-
tered air outside the vehicle from entering the
vehicle interior. Switching recirculation mode on
when driving through a tunnel or when sitting in
traffic is recommended <=> ,& .
Using the button, recirculation mode is switched
on and off using the~ button. You can also
switch off the recirculation mode by pressing the
knob @ (left side) or the off using the :!: button .
AUTOAutomatic mode
Automatic mode maintains a constant tempera-
ture inside the vehicle. Air temperature, airflow
and air distribution are controlled automatically .
You can switch automatic mode on or off by
pressing the knob @ (left side).
Temperature
You can adjust the temperature between 60°F
(+16°() and 84°F (+28°() by turning the knob
@ . If outs ide of this range, LOor HI will appear
in the climate control system display . At both of
these sett ings, the climate control system runs
continuously at maximum cooling or heating
power. There is no temperature regulation.
8fr Blower
You can manually adjust the volume of air gener-
ated by the blower to your preference by turning
the knob (D. The blower should always run at a
low sett ing to prevent the windows from fogging
and to ensure a continuous exchange of air inside
the vehicle. To have the blower regulated auto-
mat ically, press the knob @ (left side).
Air distribution
u You can use the buttons to select the vents
co
......
N
where the air will flow. To have the air dist ribu-
r-...
N
......
tion regulated automatically, press the knob @
0
0 (left side).
:E:
'<t
Warm and cold
J ,J Seat heating/ventilation*
If you press the JI~ button, the seat heating/
ventilation is switches on at the highest level (3).
The LEDsindicate the temperature level. To re-
duce the temperature, press the button again. To
switch the seat heating/ventilation off, press the
button repeatedly until the LEDturns off.
3EDefogging
The windshield and side windows are defrosted
or cleared of condensation as quickly as possible.
The maximum amount of air flows mainly from
the vents below the windsh ield. Recirculation
mode switches off. The temperature should be
set at +72°F (+22°() or higher . The temperature
is controlled automat ically.
Defrost is switched on and off switched on and
off using the ~ button. You can switch the func-
t ion off by pressing the knob @ (left side).
Applies to vehicles with windshield defogger: the
windshield defogger switches on automatically
when outside temperatures are low. If you would
like to switch the windshield defroster on man-
ually, press the :!: button . The LEDin the button
blinks.
,!! Rear window defogger
Press the button ~ to switch the rear window de-
fogger on. It only operates when the engine is
running . It switches off automatically after 10 to
20 minutes, depending on the outs ide tempera-
ture .
To keep the rear window defogger on continuous-
ly, press and hold the ~ button longer than
three seconds . This is stored until the ignition is
switched off.
Synchronization
The function is activated by pressing and holding
the knob @ (left side) . When synchron ization is
switched on, the settings for the driver's side are
applied to the front passenger's side and the rear
(except for seat heating/vent ilation*). Synchroni-
zation switches off if the settings are changed on
the front passenger's side or in the rea r. ..,.
73
Warm and cold
Vents
You can open or close the center and rear vents in
the cockpit and the vents in the rear center con-
sole and door pillars using the ridged thumb-
wheels. The levers adjust the direction of the air -
flow from the vents.
Residual heat
You can activate the residual heat function when
the ignition is switched off by pressing the knob
@ (left side). The residual heat from the coolant
is used to heat the vehicle inter ior. The residual
heat function switches off automatically after
about 15 minutes.
A WARNING
- You should not use the recirculation mode
for an extended period of time, because no
fresh air is drawn in and the windows can
fog when coolin g mode is switc hed off. This
increases the risk of an accident.
- Individuals with red uced sensitivity to pain
or temperature could develop burns when
using the seat heating function. To reduce
74
the risk of injury, these individuals should
not use seat heating.
(D Note
To avoid damage to the heating elements in
the seats, do not kneel on the seats or place
heavy loads on a small area of the seat.
Setup
Applies to : vehicles wit h 3 -zone de luxe automatic climate
control
The climate control system basic settings are ac-
cessed in the Infotainment system.
"' Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Air condi-
tioning
Seat heating/seat ventilation*
You can adjust the seat heating/ventilation bal-
ance for the driver and front passenger.
Automatic auxiliary heater*
The auxili ary heater helps to warm the vehicle in-
terior more quickly.
 Warm and cold

4-zone deluxe automatic climate control

Operation
Applies to: vehicles with 4 -zone del uxe automatic climate cont rol

Fig. 82 4-zone deluxe automat ic climate control: cockpit contro ls

Fig. 83 4-zone deluxe automatic climate control system: rear cont rols

Press the knobs, buttons or rocker switches to OFF button in the rear only switches the A/C sys-
turn the functions on or off . When the funct ion is tem on/off in the rear of the vehicle . Airflow
switched on, the LEDin the respect ive button or from outside is blocked when the climate contro l
knob t ur ns on. The rocker switches are touch- system is switched off.
sensitive. The driver a nd front passenger settings
A/C Cooling mode
can be adjusted separate ly.
Cooling mode is sw itched on and off by pressing
You can adjust the settings for the rear of the ve-
the A/Con/off . The air is not cooled and humid ity
hicle using the controls in the rear ~ fig. 83 .
is not removed when cooli ng mode is sw itched
OFF climate control system off . This can cause fog on the w indows . Cooling
u mode switches off a utomat ically when the out-
(0
...... You can switch the climate control system on and
N
r--. side temperatu re is below ze ro. IJo-
N off using the OFF button . It also switches on
......
0
0 when you press anot he r button or a knob . The
:E
<t

75
Warm and c ol d
~~ Cooling mode*
The max imum coo ling mode can be switched
sw itched on and off using the ~f.!ibutton. The ai r
is not coo led and humidity is not removed when
coo ling mode is switched off . This can cause fog
on the windows. Cooling mode switches off auto-
matically when the outs ide temperature is be low
zero. When the cooling mode is switched on,~
the vehicle inter ior is cooled and dehumidified as
qu ickly as possible .
~ Recirculation mode
In recirculation mode, the a ir inside the vehicle is
circu lated and filtered. This prevents the unfil-
tered a ir outside the vehicle from entering the
veh icle interior . Switch ing recirculation mode on
when dr iving th rough a tunnel or when sitting in
traffic is recommended ~ _&..
Using the button, recirculation mode is switched
on and off using the o's) button . You can also
sw itch the recircu lation mode off by pressing the
knob @ or the off us ing the J%butto n .
AUTO Autom ati c mode
Automatic mode ma inta ins a constant tempera-
ture ins ide the vehicle . Air temperature, airflow
and a ir distribution are cont rolled automatically .
You can switc h automatic mode on or off by
pressing t he knob @ .
Temperature
You can adjust the temperature between 60° F
(+16°() and 84°F (+28°() by turn ing the knob
@ . If outs ide of this range, LOor HI will appear
in the climate control system d isplay. At bot h of
these sett ings, t he climate contro l system runs
con t inuously at maximum cool ing or heat ing
power. There is no t empe rature regulat ion .
86'~Blower
You can adjust the volume of air generated by the
blower to your preference usi ng the rocker
sw itches @ . The blower should always ru n at a
low se tt ing to prevent t he win dows from fogg ing
and to ens ure a continuous exchange of air ins ide
the vehicle . To have the b lower regu lated auto-
mat ically, press the knob @ .
76
Air distribution
You can use the rocker sw itches @ to adjus t the
vents where the air w ill flow out of . Press the
rocker switches @ repeatedly unti l the desired
air distribution setting is disp layed in the climate
contro l system controls . To have the air d istribu-
tion regulated automatically, press the knob @ .
J 3!JSeat heating / ventilation*
If you press the JI 3M button, the seat heating/
ventilation is switches on at the highest level (3) .
The LEDs ind icate th e temperatu re level. To re-
duce the temperature, press the button aga in. To
switch the seat heating/ventilat ion off, press the
button repeatedly unti l the LED turns off .
® MAXDefogging
The windshield and side windows are defrosted
or cleared of condensat ion as quick ly as poss ible.
The maximum amount of air f lows mainly from
the vents below the windsh ield. Recirculation
mode switches off . The temperature should be
set at +72°F (+22°() or hig her . The t emperature
is controlled automat ica lly.
Defrost is sw itched on and off® MAXbutton.
You can also switch the funct ion off by pressing
the knob @ .
Applies to vehicles with windsh ield defogger: the
winds hield defogger switches on automatically
whe n outside temperatures are low . If you would
like to sw itch t he winds hield defroster on ma n-
ually, press t he :fx button . The LED in the button
blinks.
QWREARRear window defogger
Press the button ~ to switch the rear window de-
fogger on . It o nly operates when t he engine is
run ning . It sw itches off automatically after 10 to
20 minutes, depending on the outs ide tempera-
ture .
To keep the rea r window defogger o n cont inuous -
ly, press and hold the QiPREAR button longer
t han th ree seconds. This is stored unt il the igni-
tion is swit ched off.
 Warm and cold

SYNCSynchronization
Use the rocker switch (;) to select the funct ion.
When synchronization is switched on, the set-
tings for the driver's side are applied to the front
passenger's side and the rear (except for seat
heating/ventilation*). When the settings on the
front passenger 's side or in the rear are changed,
the synchron izat ion is automatically switched off
and 4-zone appears in the display.
SET REARfunction
Use the rocker switch (D to select the funct ion.
When the function is switched on, you can adjust
all settings for the rear using the climate control
system controls in the cockpit. The rear climate
control system controls cannot be operated at
the same time . This function switches off auto-
matically after a certain period of time or after
leaving the menu.
(D Note
To avoid damage to the heating elements in
the seats, do not kneel on the seats or place
heavy loads on a small area of the seat.
(D Tips
It is not possible to operate the rear climate
control system controls when the power child
safety lock is switched on. With With the
SETREARfunction, you can apply all settings
to the rear using the climate control system
controls in the cockpit ~ page 43.
Setup
Applies to: vehicles with 4 -zone del uxe automat ic climate
contro l
The climate control system basic settings are ac-
cessed in the Infotainment system .

Vents .. Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! but -

ton > Vehicle > left control button > Air condi-
You can open or close the center and rear vents in
tioning
the cockpit and the vents in the rear center con-
sole and door pillars using the ridged thumb- Seat heating/seat ventilation*
wheels. The levers adjust the direct ion of the air-
You can adjust the seat heating/ventilation bal-
flow from the vents. The wide vent is opened and
ance for the driver, front passenger and rear pas-
closed using the~ button ~ page 8, fig. 2 @ .
sengers .
Residual heat
Footwell temperature
You can activate the residual heat funct ion when
You can adjust the footwell temperature so that
the ignition is switched off by pressing the knob
it is cooler or warmer.
@ (left side). The residual heat from the coolant
is used to heat the vehicle inter ior. The resid ual Auto recirculation
heat function switches off automatically after
When switched on, automat ic recirculat ion con-
about 15 minutes.
trols the recirculation mode automatically . You
& WARNING
must press the ® MAXbutton if fog forms on
the windows.
- You should not use the recirculation mode
for an extended period of time, because no Automatic auxiliary heater*
fresh air is drawn in and the windows can The auxiliary heater helps to warm the vehicle in-
fog when cooling mode is switched off. This terior more quickly.
increases the risk of an accident .
- Individuals with reduced sensitivity to pain
or temperature could develop burns when
Steering wheel heating
Applies to: vehicles with stee rin g wheel heating
u using the seat heating function . To reduce
co
......
N the risk of injury, these individuals should The steering wheel rim can be heated .
r-...
N
...... not use seat heating.
0 .. Press the button on the multifunction steering
0
:E:
'<t
wheel to switch the steering wheel heating on ..,_

77
Warm and cold

and off ~ ¢ page 14, fig. 11. The message

Steering wheel heating: on/ Stee ring wheel
heating : off appears in t he instr ument cluster
display.

The temperatu re is maintaine d at a constant lev-

e l when steering whee l heating is switched on.

The stee ring wheel heat ing settings are st ored

a utomatically and ass igned to t he remote cont rol
key that is in use .

78

Driving
General information
Breaking in
A new vehicle must be broken in for the first
1,000 mi les (1,500 km). Do not dr ive at speeds
that will exceed 2/3 of the maximum permitted
engine speed (RPM) for the first 600 miles
(1,000 km), and avoid full acceleration during
this period . You may gradually start increasing
the RPM and the speed between 600 miles
(1,000 km) and 1,000 miles (1,500 km) .
During the first hours of use, the engine has a
higher internal friction than later on when all
moving parts have settled into place with each
other.
How the vehicle is driven during the first 1,000
miles (1,500 km) also affects the engine quality.
Drive at moderate engine speeds after the initia l
break-in period, particularly when running a cold
engine . This will reduce engine wear and improve
the m ileage.
Do not drive at too low of an engine speed (RPM).
Shift down if the engine stops running "smooth-
ly". Extremely high engine speeds are automati-
cally reduced.
Reducing the risk of vehicle damage
([) Note
When driving on poor roads, by curbs and on
steep ramps , make sure that low-hang ing
components such as the spoiler and exhaust
system do not come into contact with these
or they could be damaged. This especially ap-
plies to vehicles with low ground clearance
and vehicles that are heavily loaded.
Driving through water on roads
Note the following to reduce the risk of vehicle
damage when driv ing through water, for example
u
on flooded roads:
co
......
N When you drive with anticipation, you do not
r-...
N
......
- The water must not be any higher than the bot-
0
0 tom of the vehicle body.
:E:
'<t
D r iving
- Do not drive faster than walking speed.
A WARNING
After driv ing through water or mud, the effec-
tiveness of the brakes may be reduced due to
moisture on the brake rotors and brake pads.
A few careful brake applications should dry
off the brakes and restore the full braking ef-
fect .
(D Note
- Vehicle components such as the engine,
transmission, suspension or electrical sys-
tem can be severely damaged by driving
through water .
- Always switch the Start/Stop system" off
when driving through water¢ page 84 .
(D Tips
- Determine the depth before driving through
water.
- Do not stop the vehicle, drive in reverse or
switch the engine off when driving through
water.
- Keep in mind that oncoming vehicles may
create waves that raise the water level and
make it too deep for your vehicle to drive
through safely .
- Avoid driv ing through salt water, because
this can cause corrosion.
Economical and environmentally-friendly
driving
The amount of fuel consumpt ion, the environ-
mental impact and the wear to the engine,
brakes and tires depends mostly on your driving
style. With an ant icipatory and economic driving
style, fuel consumption can be reduced by ap-
proximately 10-15%. The following tips will help
you conserve the environment and your money at
the same time.
Anticipatory driving
A vehicle uses the most fuel when accelerating.
need to brake as often and so you accelerate less.
When possible, let your vehicle coast with a gear ..,.
79
Dr iv ing
engaged, for examp le when you notice that the
next traffic light is red . This produces an engine
braking effect, wh ich helps to protect the brakes
and tires and reduces the emissions and fuel con-
sumpt ion t o zero (fuel shut-off during decelera-
tion) .
Shift efficientl y
Upshifting earlier is an effective way to save fuel.
Staying in a gear too long uses fue l unnecessari-
ly.
Press down on t he acce lerator peda l slowly and
avoid "kick-down".
Avoid full acceleration
You sho uld rarely t ravel at the maximum vehicle
speed. High speeds cause a disp ropor t ionately
high increase in fuel consumption, emissions and
traffic noise . Driving more slowly saves fue l.
Reduce idling time
The Start/Stop system* he lps to reduce the id ling
time automatically. In vehicles wit ho ut t he Start/
Stop system*, it is efficient to switch the engine
off when stopped at rai lroad crossings and long
red lights . Stopping the engine for 30 -40 sec -
onds already saves more fuel than the amount of
extra fuel needed to restart the eng ine.
It t akes a very long t ime in idle to wa rm t he en -
gine up to operating temperature . Wear and
emissions are especially high in the wa rm-up
phase. Therefore, yo u should begin driving im-
mediately after starting the engine. Avoid high
RPMs while do ing th is .
Have ma intenance performed regularly
By having maintenance performed regu larly on
your veh icle, you can help to reduce fuel con-
sumpt ion before yo u even start to dr ive. The
maintenance condition of your vehicle not only
affects traffic safety and long -term value but a l-
so impacts fuel consumption . A poorly main-
tained engine can lead to fuel consumpt ion that
is 10% higher tha n normal.
80
Avoid short trips
The eng ine and exh a ust clean ing syste m mus t
reach t heir op t ima l operating temperatu re to ef-
fectively reduce consumption and emissions.
A cold engine uses a d isp roportion ately high
amoun t of fue l. The e ngine re aches opera ti ng
temperat ur e and cons umption norma lizes on ly
after approximate ly 2.S mi les (4 km) .
Check the tire pressure
To save fue l, ma ke sure the t ires are always in-
flated to the corre ct press ur e ~ page 343. The
fuel consumpt ion can increase by S% if the pres-
s ur e is only 0 .S bar too low. Due to the increased
rol ling resistance, low tire pressures w ill also
lead to greater tire wear and will affect driving
behavior.
Do not drive on winter tires year -round, as this
will consume up to 10% more fue l.
Eliminate unnecessary weight
Since eve ry po und of ext ra weight increases fuel
consump t ion, a quick inspect ion of the luggage
compartment may be wo rth it t o avoid unneces -
sary weight .
When not be ing used, a roof ra ck sho uld be re-
moved to decrease the w ind resis t ance of the ve-
hicle . This will save yo u approx ima t ely 12% fue l
at speeds from 6 2 - 7S mph (100 - 120 km/h) .
Save energy
The eng ine d rives the generator, which generates
electri city; t he fuel consumpt ion also increases
with t he deman d for e lec t ricity . The refore, sw itch
electrica l eq uipment off when you no longe r
need it . Examples of eq uipment that uses a lot of
energy are air blowers at a high setting, the rear
window defogger and seat heating* .
CJ) Note
Do not leave eng ine idling unattended after
starting. If warning lights should come on to
indicate imprope r operation, they would go
unheeded. Extended idling also prod uces
heat, which could result in overheating or
other damage to the vehicle or othe r proper-
ty .
 Driving

.,. Bring the steering wheel into the desired posi-

(D Note
- Have your vehicle maintained properly and
in accordance with the service recommenda-
tions in your Warranty & Maintenance book-
let. lack of proper maintenance as well as
improper use of the vehicle will impair the
function of the emission control system and
could lead to damage .
- Do not alter or remove any component of
the Emission Control System unless ap-
proved by the manufacturer.
- Do not alter or remove any device, such as
heat shields, switches, ignition wires ,
valves, which are designed to protect your
vehicle's Emission Control System and other
important vehicle components.
{t) Tips
The consumption estimates as published by
ENVIRONMENTALPROTECTIONAGENCY
(EPA) and Transport Canada may not corre-
spond to your actual consumption on the
road, which will vary depending upon veh icle
load and speed, road and weather conditions,
trip length, etc.
Steering
Manual steering wheel position adjustment
Applies to: vehicles with manual steering wheel adjustment
The steering wheel position is adjustable up and
down and forward and back .
tion.
.,. Push the lever against the steering column un-
til it is secu re.
A
=
WARNING
-
Incorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-
ment and an incorrect seating position can
cause serious injuries .
- Only adjust the steering column when the
vehicle is stationary so that you do not lose
control of the vehicle.
-Adjust the driver's seat or steering wheel so
that there is at least a 10 in (25 cm) dis-
tance between your chest and the steering
wheel. If you do not maintain this distance I
the airbag system will not be able to provide
its full protection.
- If your physical characteristics prevent you
from sitting at least 10 in (25 cm) or more
away from the steering wheel, see if an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility can provide adapters that
will help.
- If your face is level with the steering wheel,
the airbag does not provide as much protec-
tion during a collision. Always make sure
that the steering wheel is level with your
chest.
- Always hold the steering wheel with your
hands in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi -
tions to reduce the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys .
- Never hold the steering wheel in the 12
o'clock position or with both hands on the
rim or the center of the steering wheel.
Holding the steering wheel incorrectly sig-
nificantly increases the risk of injury to the
hands, arms and head if the driver airbag
deploys.

Fig. 84 Steerin g column : leve r to adjus t the s tee ring wheel

pos ition
u
(0
......
N .,.Pull the lever in the direction of the arrow
r--.
N
...... ¢ ,& .
0
0
:E
<t

81
Dr iv ing

Power steering wheel position adjustment Starting and stopping

Applies to: vehicles with power steering whee l adj ustment
the engine
The steering wheel position can be adjusted elec-
Starting the engine
trically up and down and forward and back.
The ! START ENGINE STOPI button switches the
ignition on and starts the engine.

Fig. 85 Steering column: switch to adj ust the steering

wheel position

Fig. 86 Cockpit: START ENGINESTOP but t on

.. To adjust the height, press the switch up/down.
The steer ing column will cont inue moving as
long as you are pressing the switch .
.. To move the steering whee l forward or back,
press the swit ch forward/bac k. The steer ing
column will con t inue moving as long as you a re
pressing the switch.
The stee ring wheel can also be adjusted when the
ignit ion is swit ched off .
In vehicles with memory function*, the steering
column set t ings a re stored together wit h the
seat pos it ion.
Easy seat entry
App lies to: vehicles with power steering whee l adjustment
Easy seat entry makes it easier to enter and exit
the vehicle by adjusting the steering column au-
toma tically.
" Select in the Infota inment syst em: IMENU I but-
ton > Vehi cle > left contro l button > Vehicle
settings > Seats > Driver 's seat > Easy entry
fun ction .
When easy seat entry is switched o n, the stee ring
column goes bac k up into the par k posi t ion when
the ign ition is switched off. Afte r ente ring the ve-
h icle, t he steering column ret urns t o t he stored
position once t he ignition is switched on.
Starting the engine
.. Press the brake pedal.
.. Press the ISTART ENGINE STOP ! button
¢ fig. 86 . The eng ine will start.
.. There may be a slight delay when starting the
eng ine in diesel vehicles in colde r tempera-
tures. The refore, you must ho ld the brake pedal
down unti l t he engine sta rts. The El ind icator
light tu rns on while the eng ine is preheating.
Switching the ignition on/ off
If you would like to switch the ignition on with-
out starting the engine, follow these steps:
.. Press the ISTART ENGINE STOP ! button with-
out pressing the brake peda l. Vehicles without
the Start/Stop system*: the needle in the tach-
ometer moves into t he READY posit ion.
" To switch the ignit io n off, press the but ton
aga in. The needle in t he tachomete r moves into
t he OFF position.
The prewarming runs a utomat ically in diesel
vehicles when the igni t ion is sw itched on.
Equipment that uses a lot of electricity is sw itch-
ed off tempo rarily when you start the engine .
If the engine does not start immediately, the
start ing procedure stops a utomat ically after a
short time. Repeat the starting procedure .

82

Start/Stop system*
See the information in r:!:>page 84, Start/Stop
system.
A
,~ WARNING
-
To reduce the risk of poisoning, never allow
the engine to run in confined spaces.
@ Note
Avoid high engine speed, full throttle , and
heavy engine load if the engine has not
reached operating temperature yet. You could
damage the engine.
@ For the sake of the environment
Do not let the engine run while parked to
warm up. Begin driving immediately. This re-
duces unnecessary emissions.
(D Tips
- Some noise after starting the engine is nor-
mal and is no cause for concern.
- If you leave the vehicle with the ignition
switched on, the ignition will switch off af-
ter a certain amount of time. Make sure that
electrical equipment such as the exterior
lights are switched off.
Starting the engine
.,.Bring the vehicle to a full stop.
.,.Press the ISTAR T ENGI N E STOPI button
page 82, fig. 86 .
r::!:>
Emergency off function*
If it is absolutely necessary, the engine can also
be turned off while driving at speeds starting at
4 mph (7 km/h) . To switch the engine off, press
the ! START ENGINE STOPI button twice in a row
briefly or press and hold for longer than two sec-
onds.
A WARNING
u
- Never turn off the engine before the vehicle
co
...... has come to a complete stop. The full func-
N
r-...
N tion of the brake booster and the power
......
0
0 steering is not guaranteed. You must use
:E:
'<t
Driving
more force to turn or brake. Because you
cannot steer and brake as you usually
would, this could lead to accidents and seri-
ous injuries .
- Always take the key with you whenever you
leave your vehicle. Otherwise, the engine
could be started or electrical equipment
such as the power windows could be operat-
ed. This can lead to serious injury.
- For safety reasons, always park the vehicle
with the selector lever in the P position .
Otherwise, there is the risk that the vehicle
could roll unintentionally .
(D Note
If the engine has been under heavy load for
an extended period of time, heat builds up in
the engine compartment after the engine is
switched off and there is a risk of damaging
the engine. For this reason, let the engine run
for at idle for approximately two minutes be-
fore shutting it off.
(D Tips
For up to 10 minutes after stopping the en-
gine, the radiator fan may turn on again auto-
matically or it may continue to run (even if
the ignition is switched off) for the following
reasons :
- The coolant temperature is increasing due
to trapped heat .
- If the engine is warm and the engine com-
partment also heats up from strong sun-
light.
- Applies to: vehicles with diesel particulate
filter: The emissions control system is heat-
ed through the regeneration process, even if
the engine has not reached its operating
temperature yet .
Messages
Engine running. Warning! Turn off ignition be-
fore leaving vehicle
This message appears and a warning tone sounds
if you open the driver's door when the engine is
running . .,._
83
Dr iv ing

Please press brake pedal Starting the engine when there is a

malfunction
This message appears if you do not press the
brake pedal whe n st arting the engine. It may not be possible to start the engine under
certain circumstances, for example if the battery
Ill Remote control key: key not recognized . Is in the vehicle key is drained, if interference is af -
the key still in the vehicle?
fected the key or if there is a system malfunc-
This indicator light turns on and th is message ap- tion.
pears if the ignit ion key was removed from the
vehicle when the engine was running . If the igni-
tion key is no longe r in the veh icle, you cannot
switch on the ignit ion or sta rt the engine once
you stop it. You also cannot lock the vehicle from
the outs ide.

Shift to P, otherwise vehicle can roll away.

Doors do not lock if gearshift is not in P
This message appears for safety reasons if the
selecto r lever is in the N position whe n you
switch the ignition off . Move the selector lever to
the P position. Otherwise the vehicle is not pro-
tected from rolling and it cannot be locked.
II Remote control key: hold back of key
against the designat ed area. See owner's man-
ual
If the indicator light turns on and th is message
page 84.
appears, there is a malfunction c::>
Shift to P before leaving car, otherw ise vehicle
can roll away
This message appears if the driver's door is
opened while the ignition is switched on and the
transmission has not been shifted to the P posi-
tion . Shift the transmission into the P position
and turn off the ignition if you are leaving the ve-
hicle. Otherwise the vehicle could roll. Also see
page 86 .
c::>
Fig. 8 7 Cente r conso le/ remote control key: start ing t he
eng ine if there is a ma lfunct ion
Requireme nt: the message Remote control key:
hold back of key aga inst the des ignated area.
See owner's manual must display and the in- II
dicator light must turn on.
.,.Place the remo t e control key on the locat ion
shown in the illustration y>l}c::>fig. 87.
.,.Press the brake pedal.
...Press the !START ENGINE STOP ! button. The
engine will start.
.,.Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to have
the ma lfunction corrected .
@ Tips
You can view the message again by pressing
the IS TART ENGI N E STOP I button.

Start/Stop system
Description
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system

The Start/Stop system can help increase fue l

economy and reduce CO2 emissions.

In Start /Stop mode, the engine shuts off auto-

matically when the vehicle is stopped, such as at
a traffic light . The ignition remains switched on .,.

84
 D r ivi ng

during this stop phase. The e ng ine will restart
automatically when needed.
The Start/Stop system is automatically activ ated
as soon as the ignit ion is switched on .
Basic requirements for Start / Stop mode
- The driver's door must be closed.
- The driver 's sea t belt much be fas t ened .
- The hood must be closed .
- The vehicle must have driven faster than 2 mph
(3 km/h) since the last time it stopped.
- A trailer must not be hitched to the vehicle .
If you leave the vehicle during a stop phase, the
e ngine can be restarted withi n app roximately 30
seconds if the following requirements are met:
- The driver's door must be closed, the dr iver
must be wear ing the safety belt and the brake
peda l mus t be pressed . Or:
- The driver's door must be closed, t he bra ke
pedal mus t be pressed and a gear must be se-
lected .
(D Note
Always sw itch the Start/Stop system off when
driving t hrough water~ page 84.
@ Tips
.,. Brake the vehicle to a stop. The engine stops
shortly before the vehicle comes to a stop or if
the vehicle is stat ionary l) . Keep your foot on
the brake pedal. The [I] indicator light appears
in the status line at the bottom of the instru-
ment cluster display . The need le in the tachom -
eter also moves into the READY1l posit ion .
.,.The engine starts again when you take your
foot off the brake pedal. The indicator light
t urns off .
Addit ional inform ation
The eng ine stops in the P, N and D selector lever
positions .
If you select the R position during a Stop phase,
the engine will star t again .
Select the P position quickly to prevent the en-
gine from sta rting unintentionally when shifting
through R.
You can determ ine for yourse lf if the eng ine will
stop or not by reducing or increasing the amount
of force you use to press the brake pedal. For ex-
ample, if you only lightly pre ss on the brake ped-
al in stop-and-go traffic or when turn ing, the en-
gine will not switch off when the vehicle is sta -
t ionary . As soon as you press the brake down
harder, the engine will switch off .

The engine stops shortly before the vehicle (D Tips

comes to a stop 1 >.
- Press the brake peda l during a Stop phase
to keep the vehicle from rolling.
Stopping /starting the engine
- The ignition will turn off if you press the
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
! ST ART ENGINE STOPI button during a stop
phase . The needle in the tachometer moves
into the OFF position.

General information
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system

The standard Start/Stop mode can be canceled

for various system-related reasons .

Engine does not switch off

Fig. 88 Inst rument cluste r: engine switched off (stop
Before and during each stop phase, the system
u phase)
(0
...... checks if certain conditions have been met . If the liJl,,
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E ll Market -specific
<t

85
Dr iv ing
[jj indicator light appears in the instrument clus-
ter disp lay, the engine will not be stopped, for
examp le in the follow ing s ituations:
- The eng ine has not reached t he minimum re-
quired temperature for Start/Stop mode .
- The inter ior temperature selected by the cli-
mate contro l system has not been reached.
- The outs ide temperature is ext remely high/low.
- The windshield is being defrosted .
- The vehicle battery charge level is too low.
- The steering wheel is turned at a sharp angle or
is mov ing.
- After engaging the reverse gear .
- On sharp inclines.
-At high a ltitudes.
Engine automaticall y restarts
The standard Start/Stop mode will be cance led
during a stop phase in the fo llowing s ituations.
The engine resta rt s wit hout any action by the
d river.
- The vehicle rolls, for examp le while on a slope.
- The inter ior temperature differs from the tem-
perature se lected in the A/C system.
- The windshield is being defrosted.
- The brake pedal is pressed several times in a
row.
- The vehicle battery charge level is too low.
- Power consumption is high.
The engine can tu rn off again when the condi-
tions for Start/Stop mode are met .
Ign ition is switched off automatically
To prevent the veh icle bat t ery from d rain ing, the
ign it ion will switch off a utomat ica lly under the
following conditions:
- The Sta rt/Stop system has stopped the eng ine .
- The vehicle is stationary.
- You left the vehicle and the eng ine was not re-
started within approximate ly 30 seconds.
If this happens, you will see the message Igni-
tion turn s off automaticall y in the instrument
cluster and the activated low beams are replaced
by the parking light. The parking lights will
sw itch off after approx imately 30 minutes or
when you lock the vehicle.
86
The ignition also sw itches off when you lock the
vehicle from the outside during a stop phase.
If t he Start/Stop system has not tu rned off t he
engine or if you have switched the St art/Stop sys -
tem off manually, the ignition will not be auto -
matically switched off and the engine will contin-
ue to run Q .&..
_& WARNING -
To reduce the risk of poisoning, never allow
the engine to run in confined spaces.
(D Tips
- If you leave the ve hicle with the D/S or R se-
lector lever position engaged, the parking
brake is automatically set.
- If you select the D or N selector lever posi-
t ion after sh ifting into reverse, the vehicle
must be driven faster than 6 mph (10 km/h)
in order fo r the engine to switch off again .
Manually switching the Start/ Stop system
off / on
Applies to : vehicles with Start/Stop system
If you do not wish to use the system, you can
switch it off manually.
-- - - - --=-
,__ -~-----__
~ . ~- • -
· - -- ~
,,,.. ~ .. 'l>
...
'* A
-
Fig. 89 Center console: Start/Sto p system button
.,.To switch the Start/Stop system off/on man-
ually, press t he l(:.l).. I button . The LEDin the but-
ton turns on when the system is switched off.
@ Tips
If you switch the system off du ring a stop
phase, the engine will start aga in automati-
cally.

Messages in the instrument cluster display
Applies to: vehicles with Start/Stop system
Automatic start / stop deactivated: Please
restart engine manually
This message appears whe n specific condi t ions
are not met dur ing a stop phase. The Star t/Stop
system wi ll not be ab le to restart the engine . The
engine must be started with the
I STAR T ENGINE ST OPI button.
Automatic start / stop system: malfunct ion!
Function unavailable. Please contact Service
There is a malfunction in the Start/Stop system .
Drive the ve hicle to an author ized Audi dealer or
author ized Service Facility as soon as poss ible to
have the ma lfunction corrected.
Electromechanical
parking brake
Fig. 90 Cent er console: park ing brake
Your veh icle is equipped with an electromechani-
cal parki ng brake (D ¢ fig. 90. The parking brake
is designed to prevent the vehicle from rolling
u nintent io nally and replaces the hand brake.
Setting / manually releasing the parking
brake
"' Pull the(®) switc h to set the pa rking brake . The
LED in t he switch turns on. The - (USA mod-
els) . (Canada mode ls) indicato r light a lso
tu rns o n in the inst rument cluste r display .
"'T o release the parking brake manu al ly, press
the brake o r acce lera t o r pedal whi le the igni-
u t ion is switched on and press t he® ) switch at
co
....
N the same time. The LED in the button and the
r-...
....
N
0
indicator light in the display t urn off .
0
:E:
'<t
D r iving
Releasing the parking brake automatically
Requirement: the d river's doo r mus t be closed.
"' To start d riving and release the parking brake
automatically, press the accelerator pedal as
usual.
In add it ion to releas ing the parking brake auto -
matically, other convenie nce a nd safety functions
are avai lab le when you start driv ing ¢ page 88,
Starting to drive .
Preventing the automatic parking brake
release
The veh icle cou ld beg in rol ling unintentionally,
depe ndi ng on the hill or if tow ing a t ra ile r.
"' To prevent the park ing brake from releasi ng au -
t omatically, pu ll and hold the®) switch and
press the accele rator peda l. The pa rking brake
remain s se t a nd prevents the vehi cle from roll-
ing backwa rd.
"' You ca n release the® ) switch again once you
are sure that yo u are giving enoug h driving
force to the wheels by pressing the accelerator
pedal.
Emergency braking function
You ca n use the emergency braking function in an
eme rgency sit uation, or if the standard brake op -
eration ma lfunctions o r is disab led .
"' Pull a nd ho ld t he(®) switch .
"' As soon as you release the ®> switc h or acceler -
ate, t he braking stops .
Pulling and ho ld ing the®) sw itch w hile driving
t he ve hicle ac t ivat es the eme rge ncy brak ing func -
tion. The ve hicle is brak ed at all four wheels by
activating the hydraulic brake system . The brak -
ing effect is simi lar to heavy bra king ¢ A_.
To reduce the risk of ac tivat ing the emergency
braki ng by mist ak e, a war ning tone (b uzzer)
sounds when the®) sw itch is pulled . Emergency
braking stops as soon as the(®) switc h is released
or the accelerator pedal is pressed .
Parking
"' Press t he bra ke pedal to stop the veh icle .
"' Pull the®) swit ch to set t he par king brake.
"' Select the P se lec t or lever position .
87
Driving
"'Turn the engine off ¢ .&, .
"'Turn the steering wheel when parking on in-
clines so that the wheels will roll into the curb
if the vehicle starts moving .
A WARNING
- Do not press the accelerator pedal inadver-
tently if a gear is selected when the vehicle
is stationary and the engine is running . Oth-
erwise, the vehicle will start to move imme-
diately and this could result in an accident.
- Emergency braking should only be used in
an emergency, when the normal brake pedal
has failed or the brake pedal is obstructed .
During emergency braking, your vehicle will
brake similar to heavy braking. ESC and the
associated components (ABS, ASR, EDL)
cannot overcome the laws of physics.
Around curves and when road or weather
conditions are bad, a full brake application
can cause the vehicle to skid or the rear end
to swerve, which increases the risk of an ac-
cident.
- If the power supply fails, you cannot set the
parking brake if it is released. In this case ,
park the vehicle on level ground and secure
it by placing the selector lever in the P posi-
tion. See an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for assistance.
- Always take the vehicle key with you when
leaving your vehicle, even if for a short peri-
od of time. This applies particularly when
children remain in the vehicle. Otherwise,
children could start the engine, release the
parking brake or operate electrical equip-
ment such as power windows, which in-
creases the risk of an accident .
- No one, especially children, should remain
in the vehicle when it is locked . Locked
doors make it more difficult for emergency
workers to get into the vehicle, which puts
lives at risk .
{D) Tips
When stopping at a traffic signal or stopping
in city traffic, you can set the parking brake
manually. The vehicle does not have to be
held with the brake pedal. The parking brake
88
eliminates the tendency to creep when a se-
lector lever position is engaged. As soon as
you press the accelerator pedal, the parking
brake releases automatically and your vehicle
starts to move¢ page 88.
(D Tips
- Occasional noises when the parking brake is
set and released are normal and are not a
cause for concern.
- The parking brake goes through a self-test
cycle at regular intervals when the vehicle is
stopped . Any noises associated with this are
normal.
- If there is a power failure, the parking brake
will not set if it is released, and it will not
release if it is set ¢ & . See an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility for assistance.
Starting to drive
Various convenience and safety functions may be
available when the vehicle begins driving, de-
pending on vehicle equipment.
Starting on hills with the parking brake set
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed .
"'To start driving comfortably when on a hill, set
the parking brake and begin driving as usual.
The braking force of the parking brake does not
release automatically until the wheels build up
enough driving force .
Starting on hills with hill hold assist
Hill hold assist makes it easier to start on hills .
Requirement: the driver's door must be closed
and the engine must be running.
"'To activate hill hold assist , press and hold the
brake pedal for several seconds. The vehicle
must be in an uphill direction of travel.
After releasing the brake pedal , the braking pow-
er is maintained for a brief moment ¢ A to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling back when starting.
During this time, you can easily begin to move
your vehicle. 111>
 D r iving

After driving offroad

_& WARNING
- If you do not begin driving immediately or - After driving offroad, remove branches and
other debris from the radiator grille, under-
the engine stalls after releasing the brake
body, and wheels . Look especially for foreign
pedal, your vehicle may begin to roll back-
objects (such as stones) that may be stuck in
ward . Press the brake pedal or set the park-
the tire tread.
ing brake immed iately.
- Clean the vehicle body and underbody and in-
- The intelligent technology of hill hold assist
spect the vehicle for possible damage.
cannot overcome the lim itations imposed by
natural physical laws. The increased comfort - Clean the windows, headlights, tail lights and
offered by hill hold ass ist should not cause the license plate if they are dirty.
you to take safety risks . - Perform a brake test (especially after driving
- Hill hold assist cannot hold the veh icle in through water).
place on all hills (for example, if the ground
is slippery or icy).
_& WARNING
- To reduce the risk of an accident, always - Be especially cautious and aware when driv-
make sure the vehicle is situated safely ing under difficu lt cond it ions and when off-
wh ile stat ionary. road. Veh icle damage and injuries may occur
when dr iving at excessively high speeds or
with incorrect driving maneuvers.
Off road driving
- Always adjust your speed and driving style
General information to the roads, terrain, traff ic and weather
conditions . Drive especially slowly if there is
The electronic stabilization contro l (ESC) func- low visibility when offroad.
tions were enhanced for driving offroad. Offroad
- Please note that the wheels can sp in more
mode can be activated when driving in situat ions
and the vehicle can swerve when in offroad
where slippage or a differential lock function is
mode, espec ially when the road is slippery
necessary Q page 149. The hill descent ass ist is
or has loose surface material.
a lso available, which automatically brakes the ve-
- Driving stability is reduced when in offroad
hicle and maintains a constant speed as a result
mode.
~ page 150. In addition, your Audi prov ides con-
tinuous all wheel drive.
@ For the sake of the environment
However , your Aud i is not a purely offroad vehi- Avoid harming the environment and show
cle . Your vehicle was not designed to d rive unde r consideration for nature .
extreme ope rating conditions such as driving in
an expedition style. (D Tips
Only drive in terrain that is suitable for the vehi- Only drive where it is permitted and always
cle and your driving ability . Never take any un- stay on the prov ided roads and paths .
necessaryrisks!
Explanation of technical terms
Before driving offroad
- Check the eng ine oil level, the tire pressure, the The following data is based on idea l conditions .
coolant level and the fluid level in the washer The values may vary depending on the load,
fluid reservoir . ground composition and the environment. The
- Store pieces of luggage and other objects in the driver is therefore responsible for deciding
u
co whether a vehicle can hand le a specific situation
......
N
luggage compartment and secure them from
r-...
N
......
sliding out of place. ¢£ . ~
0
0
:E:
'<t

89
Dr iv ing

Incline angle Difficult terrain and off - road

A rising difference in a ltitude (incline) on a 109
yard (100 m) stretch is given in perce ntage or de -
g rees . Data indicating whether the vehicle can
drive up an incline by itself (dependent on the
road surface and the engine power among other
factors). Maximum permitted incline angle: 31 °
Ground clearance
The distance between t he road s urface and the
lowest point on the vehicle underbody .
- Vehicles with steel suspension: gro und clear -
ance : 8 .3 in (210 mm)
- Vehicles with air suspension* : max imum
ground clear a nce: 9.7 in (245 mm)
When dr iving in unf a miliar areas an d off road,
drive slowly and keep on the watch for unexpect-
ed obstacles (such as potho les, rocks, tree
stumps, etc .).
To prevent t he vehicle from bottom ing o ut and to
reduce t he risk of underbody damage, yo u should
drive across uneven gro und on only one side of
the ve hicle so that only two of your wheels cross
the uneven area, instead of driving across the
center of the uneve n area with all four wheels.
Drive quickly thro ugh sandy or marshy off-road
sections and do not stop, if at all possib le .
Driving through water

Also read the information fo und in page 79.

&, WARNING
9

Exceed ing the specified max imum values can
lead to severe personal injur ies or vehicle
damage.
- All data was co llect ed on f lat, firm, non -
s lippery road surfaces and under d ry weath-
er conditions .
- Ideal conditions do not apply to offroad
driving. Neve r go a ll the way up to the maxi-
mum va lues , but rather always leave a sa fe-
ty margin.
Messages
There is only one motto when driving in difficult
conditions and offroad: drive slowly and with
caution!
Observe the fo llowing when driv ing on unpaved
Driving on a slope
If you a re ever unable to drive up a hill, do not try
to turn around . Drive back down in reverse in-
stead . Othe rwise you run the risk of tipping over .
If the vehicle threatens to t ip over when driving
across a slope, you must immediat ely steer
downhill in the direction of the slope.
Do not park your vehicle on steep hills .
To reduce the risk of tipping over, drive on hills in
the d irection of the downward slope (fall line) -
never crosswise.
Tilt angle display
Description
Applies to: vehicles with a tilt ang le disp lay

roads:

.I
• Only drive in t errain that is s uit a ble for the ve-
hicle and your d riving ability. Never take any
unnecessary risks!
l 1ft r offr:'l;ic1
Allroad
Comfort

J Dynam ic
Auto
·,1- _,....
0 0- .
~
l

~
Jl•

~
'\
• ,.
~

~
11·

• Drive slowly and carefu lly.

• Pay attention to the ground clearance of your
Individual \ 11•

.,t,.
11•

vehicle.
• Activate the offroad mode as needed
Fig. 91 Infota inme nt system : tilt an gle disp lay
¢ page 149.
• Use the hill descent assist when dr iving down You can see t he ve hicle position in relat io n to a
steep hills 9 page 150. level p lane using the t ilt ang le display in the In-
fotainment system . Both the sideways angle @ .,.

90
 D r ivi ng

and the lengthwise angle @ of the veh icle are and downs hifts at a higher RPM to improve fue l
disp layed. The accuracy depends on the driving efficiency.
situation and is normally around 1 °. The side-
The tra nsmission switches to a sporty mode after
ways angle of your vehicle should not exceed the
a kick-down or when the driver uses a sporty
yellow range in the gauge. If it reaches the red
driving style characterized by quick acce lerator
range, there is a risk that the vehicle might tip
peda l movements, heavy acceleration, frequent
A.
c::,
changes in speed and t raveling at the maximum
Displaying the tilt angle display speed .

.. Select in the Infotainment system: I MENUI but- If desired, the driver can also se lect the gears
ton >V ehicle > Lift / Offro ad or Allro ad*. manually (tiptronic mode) c::,page 94.

Showing the additional display

Selecting a selector lever position
To change the contents shown in the rig ht area of
,.._
0
the screen, select in the Infota inment system: N
0
right control button > Additiona l display. ~
a,
m
Angle : this displays the curren t steering wheel
angle and the maxim um angle that was reached
during a drive . These values are reset when the
ignition is switched off .

Posit ion: d isp lays the height, direction and geo-

coordinates of the current vehicle pos ition.
Fig. 92 Center console: se lecto r lever
Off : on ly the air suspension display remains o n.

The curren t se lector lever posi t ion is show n next

& WARNING to the se lector lever c::,fig. 92. The curren t se lec-
- Do not exceed t he yellow range in the tor lever position is a lso shown in t he instrument
gauge . Your vehicle can tip, which increases cluster disp lay.
the risk of an acc ident.
.. You may need t o release the selector lever lock
- Under some circumsta nces, the vehicle can
depending on wh ich selecto r lever pos it ion is
tip over or til t sideways even if the sideways
selected and which one you wou ld like to se-
angle is low . The angle display does not re-
lect .
place the driver's attention. To reduce the
.. To do th is, press the locking button (!) on the
risk of an accident, make sure the vehicle
selector lever <=>fig. 92.
does not t ip, especia lly when you are driving
.. To engage the nearest selector lever position,
at h igh speeds.
move the selector lever forward/back until you
fee l the first pressure po int. The selec t or lever
Automatic transmission will return to its orig inal position .
.. To skip over one selec t or lever posit io n, move
Introduction
the selector lever past the pressure point into
The automat ic transmission is controlle d e lec- the desired position. The selector lever will re-
tronica lly. Power is transfe rred using a torque turn to its origina l position .
converte r.
For exa mple , you can s kip over the N position if
u When a moderate driving style is used , the yo u wou ld like to go d irectly from D into R. ..,.
(0
......
N
r--.
transmission selects the most economical driving
N
......
0
mode. The t ransmission upshifts at a lower RPM
0
:E
<t

91
Dr iv ing
Selector lever lock
The se lector lever lock prevents you from se lect-
ing a position unintentionally, causing the vehicle
to roll. When engaging some selector lever posi-
tions, you must press th e locking button CD on
the selecto r lever and/or press the brake pedal
¢fig. 92.
You must press the brake pedal to engage a se-
lector lever position when the engine is running
and the vehicle is stationary.
You do not have to press the brake peda l if you
shift from a drive gear (D/S) to reverse gear (R)
within one second. This allows you to "rock" the
veh icle to free it when it is stuck .
P - Park
This se lector lever posi t ion prevents the vehi cle
from rolling . Only shift into park when the vehi -
cle is stat ionary ¢ .&.. To select the P se lector lev-
er position, press th e P button @ on the selector
lever ¢ fig. 92. P appears next to the selector lev-
er.
You can on ly shift out of park when the engine is
running and you are press ing the brake pedal. To
release the parking lock, press the brake peda l,
press the locking button CD on the selector lever
and select the desired pos it ion ¢ fig . 92 .
P engag es automatically if you switch the engine
off while the selector lever is in D, E, S, R or man-
ual mode.
If you switch the engine off when the N se lector
lever position is select ed, the transmission re-
mains in N for approximately 30 minutes and
then Pis engaged. The vehicle is not secured
from rolling in the N selector lever position, so
you need to set the parking brake<®>¢ page 87 .
You must use the parking lock emergency release
before towing the vehicle¢ page 96.
R- Reverse
The reverse gear is engaged in this pos ition . Only
select reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary
and the engine is running at idle speed ¢ .&.. To
engage the R selector lever pos ition, press the
92
brake peda l, press the locking button CD on the
se lector lever and select the R position ¢ fig. 92.
A confi rmation tone will sound when the reverse
gear is engaged.
N - Neutral (idle )
The tra nsmission is in idle in th is position. To en-
gage the N selector lever position, press the lock-
ing button CD on the selector lever and sh ift into
the N pos ition ¢ fig. 92 .
If you switch the eng ine off when the N selector
lever posit io n is selected, the transm iss ion re-
mai ns in N for approx imately 30 minutes and
then Pis engaged.
You cannot se lect the N pos ition when the igni-
tion is switched off . When dr iving through an au-
tomat ic car wash, fi rst select the N position and
then turn the eng ine off.
For safety reasons , the veh icle cannot be locked
when the t ransmiss ion is in the N pos it ion .
D/ S - Driving forward
When the transm ission is in the D/S posit ion, it
can be operated either in the normal D mode or
in the S sport mode . Move the selector lever back
to engage the S sport mode. You ca n only select
the S selector lever position when the Dor E pos i-
tion is se lected. To select the Dor E position
again when S is engaged, move t he selector lever
ba ck ¢ .&.. To sh ift from N to D when traveling at
speeds below 1 mph (2 km/h), press the brake
pedal and shift into the D position ¢ .&..
In t he normal mode D, the transmission auto-
matically selects the suitable gear ratio. It de-
pends on engine load, vehicle speed and driving
style.
Select the s port mode S for spo rt y d riving. The
vehicle makes full use of the engine 's power.
Shifting may become noticeable when accelerat -
ing .
The S se lect or lever posit ion engages automat i-
cally when you select Dynamic mode in d rive se -
lect* . .,.

,~A
WARNING
Read and follow all WARNINGS.
- The vehicle can roll even if the ignition is
switched off.
- Power is st ill transmitted to the wheels
when the engine is running at idle. To pre-
vent the veh icle from "creeping", you must
keep your foot on the brake in all selector
lever positions (except P and N) when the
engine is running.
- Before opening the hood, select the P selec-
tor lever pos ition and set the parking brake.
This reduces the risk of an accident. Always
read and follow the applicable warnings
¢ page 322, Working in the engine com-
partment.
@ Tips
If you accidentally se lect N while driving, take
your foot off the acce lerator pedal and wa it
for the engine to slow down to idle before se-
lect ing Dor S.
Driving tips
Starting the engine
.. The P or N position must be selected.
Starting from a stop
.. Press and hold the brake pedal.
.. Start t he engine c:>page 82.
.. Press the locking button @ on the selector lev-
er and select the D, E, Sor R position
¢ page 91.
.. Wait a moment until the transmission shifts.
You will notice a slight movement when the
gear engages .
.. Release the brake pedal and press the accelera-
tor pedal ¢ & -
Various convenience functions are availab le for
starting on hills c:>page 88.
Stopping temporarily
~ .. Press the brake pedal to stop the vehicle, for
~ example at a traffic light. Do not press the ac-
~ celerator peda l when doing this.
0
0
:E:
'<t
D r iving
.. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when you
start driving, set the parking brake when stop-
ping on steep hills ¢ A -
.. The parking brake will release automatically
and the vehicle will start moving once you press
the accelerator pedal.
Stopping/parking
If the selector lever is not in the P position when
you open the driver's door, the vehicle could roll.
.. Press and hold the brake peda l c:>A -
.. Set the parking brake.
.. To select the P se lector lever position, press the
P button @ on the selector lever c:>page 91,
fig. 92.
Under certain conditions, such as driving in the
mountains or when towing a trailer, it may be
helpful to switch to manua l mode temporarily
and shift manually to adapt to the driving condi-
tions c:>page 94.
On hills, activate the parking brake first and then
shift into the P position c:>page 87. This prevents
too much stress from being placed on the locking
mechanism .
A
- WARNING
- The vehicle can roll even when the eng ine is
switched off.
- Unintended vehicle movement can lead to
serious injuries .
- To reduce the risk of an accident, do not
press the accelerator pedal when changing
the selector lever position wh ile the vehicle
is stationa ry and the engine is running .
- To reduce the risk of an accident, never se-
lect the R or P positions while dr iving.
- Do not inadvertently press the accelerator
pedal when the vehicle is stationary . Other-
wise the ris k of an accident increases be-
cause the vehicle will start to move immedi-
ately, even if the parking brake is set.
(D Tips
For safety reasons, the park ing brake only re-
leases automatically when the drive r's door is
closed.
93
Dr iv ing

Hill descent control

The hill descent control system assists the driver

when driving down hills.

Hill descent control activates when the transmis-

sion is in the Dor S position and you press the
brake pedal. The transmiss ion automatically se-
lects a gear that is suitable for the hill. Hill de·
scent contro l t ries to mainta in the speed ach-
ieved at the time of braking, within phys ica l and Fig. 94 Stee ring whee l: shifting man ually

technical limita t ions. If may sti ll be nece ssary to

adjust t he speed with the brake pedal.
Hill descen t contro l switches off o nce the hill lev-
els out o r yo u press the accelerator peda l.
When operating the cruise contro l system*
~page 102, hill descent cont rol is also act ivated
when the speed is set.
,&. WARNING
Hill des cent control cannot overcome physi ca l
lim itation s, so it may not be able to maint ain
a constant speed under all condit ions . Always
be ready to apply the brakes .
Shifting manually (tiptronic mode)
The tiptronic mode allows the driver to shif t the
gears manually .
Fig. 93 Cente r console: shifting manually wit h the se lector
lever
Shifting with the selector lever
You can shift into t iptronic mode while stat ionary
and wh ile dr iving .
.. To shift into tiptronic mode, push the selecto r
lever from the D/S position to the right . As
soon as the transm iss ion switches over, the M
t ra nsmission setting will appea r in the instru-
ment cluste r display .
.,.To shift up a ge a r, tap the sele ctor lever fo r-
ward 0 ~ fig. 93.
.,.To shift down a gear, tap the se lect or lever back
0.
.,.To switch tiptronic mode off, pus h the selector
lever back into the 0/S pos ition.
Shifting with the shift paddles
You can operate t he shift paddles in the D/S or M
selector lever positions .
.,.To shift up a ge ar , tap the shift paddle 0
~fig. 94 .
.,.To shift down a gear, tap the 0 shift paddle .
.,.To engage the lowes t gear, hold t he 0 shift
padd le .
.,.If you do not press a shift button within a sho rt
time while in the D/S pos it ion, the transm ission
will return to automat ic mode. To keep shifting
using the shift paddles, move the selector leve r
to the right out of the D/S position .
.,.When you want t o shift out of tiptron ic mode,
press a nd ho ld t he 0 shift padd le for a longer
pe riod of t ime or move t he sele ctor lever back
and release it.

The t ra nsmission automat ica lly shifts up or down

before crit ical engi ne speed is reac hed . .,.

94

The transm ission only all ows manual shift ing
when the engine speed is wit hin the permitted
range .
(D Tips
- If you shif t to the next lowest gear, t he
transm ission w ill only shift if the engine w ill
not be over-rewed.
- With kick-down , t he tran smission shifts to a
lower gear, depending on vehicle speed and
engine speed.
- tiptronic does not wo rk if the t ransmiss ion
is running in emergency mo de.
Kick-down
Kick-down enables maximum acceleration.
W hen you press the accelerator pedal dow n be-
yon d t he resistan ce point , t he aut om at ic trans-
mission downshifts into a lower gear and t he en-
gine utilizes its fu ll power, depend ing on veh icle
speed and engine RPM. It shifts up into t he next
higher gear once the maximum specified engine
RPM is reached .
A WARNING
- lector lever position again. You can t hen cont inue
Please note that the wheels could spin on
slic k or slippery roads when kick-down is ac-
ti ve.
Transmission malfunction
• Transmission : malfunction! Please stop ve-
hicle and shift to P
Do not cont inue driv ing. Select the P selector lev-
er position and contact an autho rized Audi dealer
or author ized Audi Service Facility for assistance .
rmSelector lever: malfunction! You may contin-
ue driving. Please contact Service
There is a system malfunct ion in the t ransmis-
sion. Drive to an author ized Audi dealer or au-
thor ized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to have
the ma lf unction corrected.
u
co
......
N
r-...
rmP button: malfunction! Auto P when engine
N
...... off. Please contact Service
0
0
:E:
'<t
D r iving
There is a ma lf unct ion in the P but t on on t hese -
lector lever . The transmission automatically en-
gages in P when you switch off the engine . Drive
to an autho rized Audi dealer or authori zed Aud i
Service Facility immed iate ly to have the ma lfunc-
t ion corrected .
rm
Transmission: malfunction! Gear change on-
ly possible using both paddle levers. Please con-
tact Service
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
sion. You can continue dr iving with restr icted
funct ion. The selector lever is not work ing . Gears
can on ly be selected by tapping both shift pad-
dles at t he same time whe n the vehicle is stat ion-
ary ~ page 94, fig. 94. Pay atte nt ion t o t hese-
lected t ransmission position in t he instr um ent
cluster display. The parking lo ck engages auto -
mati cally when you turn off t he engine. Drive to
an aut horized Audi dealer or aut horized Aud i
Service Facility immed iate ly to have the ma lfunc -
t ion corrected .
rm
Transmission: Please press brake pedal and
select gear again
Press t he brake pedal and select t he desired se-
dr iving.
rm
Transmission: too hot . Please adapt driving
style
The transmission temperature has increased sig-
nificantly due to t he sporty dr iving ma nner . Drive
in a less sport y manner unt il t he tempera t ure re-
tu rns to t he norma l range and t he indi cator light
switch es of.
rm
Transmission: malfunction! You can contin-
ue driving. See owner's manual
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
sion. You may contin ue driving. Drive to an au-
t horized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility soon to have the mal f uncti on corrected .
rm
Transmission: malfunction! You can contin -
ue driving in D until engine off
There is a system malfu nction in the transmis -
sion. The transmission is switc hing to emergency
mode. If you turn the engine off, you w ill not be ..,.
95
Dr iv ing
ab le to select any other selecto r lever posit ions
after starting the engine again. Drive to an au-
thor ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
rected.
r;]Transmission: malfunct ion! You can contin-
ue driving with limited function. Please contact
Service
There is a system malfunction in the t ransmis -
sion. The transm ission is switching to emergency
mode . This mode only shifts into certain gears or
will no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authori zed
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunct ion corrected.
r;]Transmission: malfunct ion! You may contin-
ue driving . No reverse gear
There is a system malfunction in the transmis-
sion . The transmission is switching to emergency
mode. This mode only shifts into certain gears or
will no longer shift at all. The engine may stall.
You cannot engage the reverse gea r. Drive to an
author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service
Facility immediately to have the malfunction cor-
rected.
r;] Danger of rolling away! P not possible.
Please apply parking brake
- The parking lock was released using the emer-
gency release ¢ page 96. Or
- The parking lock can no longer be engaged.
Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility immed iately to have
the malfunc t ion corrected .
r;] Move selector lever to automati c position
There is a malfunct ion in the t ipt ronic mode. End
tiptronic mode by pushi ng the selector lever to
the left into t he D/S position.
96
Parking lock emergency release
The parking lock must be released with the
emergency release when driving through moun-
tains/maneuvering.
Fig. 9 5 Driver's side footwe ll: releas ing the pa rking lock
us ing the e mergency release
The emergency release is located under the floor
mat on the driver's side .
Releasing the parking lock using the
emergency release
"'To preven t the vehicle from rolling unintent ion-
ally, set the parking brake ®l ¢ page 87 or
press the bra ke pedal.
"' There are two slits on the cover. Posit ion t he
screwdr iver from the vehicle t ool kit in one of
the slits on the cover and pry t he cover off.
"' Insert the socket wrench (from the vehicle tool
kit) into the open ing ¢ fig. 95.
"'Turn the socket wrench all the way clockwise (D
and press it downward @ until it locks into
place .
"' Leave the socket wrench inserted i=:>&_.
Resetting the parking lock
"' Press the brake pedal and start the engine.
"' Keep the brake peda l pressed and engage the
following selector lever pos it ions one after the
other: N, D and back to N.
"'Turn the engine off again.
"' Grasp th e socket wrench with both ha nds and
pu ll it up and out caref ully to remove i=:>
(D.
"' Inst all the cover.
When the parking lock emergency release is
used, the r;Jindicator light and t he N select or
lever position tur n on in the instr ument cluster. ..,.
 Driving

The message Danger of rolling away! P not pos-

sible. Please apply parking brake also appears.

A WARNING
- Only activate the emergency release while
on a level surface or a slight slope.
- The parking tock may only be released using
the emergency release if the parking brake
is set. If it is not functioning, secure the ve-
hicle from rolling using the brake pedal or
other suitable means, such as blocking a
front and a rear wheel. An unsecured vehicle
may roll away, which increases the risk of an
accident.
- To reduce the risk of an accident, you must
not drive when the emergency release is ac-
tivated.

(D Note
- Read and follow the important instructions
about towing c::;,page 3 74.
- The risk of damage increases if you do not
remove the socket wrench carefully when
resetting the parking lock.

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

97
T r ailer towing
Trailer towing
Driving with a trailer
General information
Your Audi was designed primarily for passenger
transportation.
If you plan to tow a trailer, please remember that
the additional load will affect durability, econo-
my and performance.
Trailer towing not on ly places more stress on the
vehicle, it also ca lls for more concentration from
the dr iver.
For this reason, always follow the operating and
driving instructions provided and use common
sense.
@ Note
If you are going to tow a trailer, you must ac-
tivate the tra ile r operation mode
¢page 100 .
Technical requirements
Traile r hitch
Use a weight-carrying hitch conforming to the
gross trai ler weight. The hitch must be suitab le
for your ve hicle and tra iler and must be mounted
securely on the vehicle 's chassis at a technically
sound locat ion . Use on ly a trailer hitch with a re-
movable ba ll mount . Always chec k w it h t he t rail-
er hitch man ufa ctur er to make sure t hat you a re
using the correct hitch.
Do not use a bumper hitch.
The hitch m ust be installed in such a way that it
does not interfere with the impact -absorbing
bumper sys t em . No mod ificat ions should be
made to the vehicle exhaust and brake systems .
From t ime to t ime, che ck t ha t a ll hit ch mo unti ng
bolt s rem ai n securely faste ned.
When you are not tow ing a tra iler, remove the
tra ile r hitc h ba ll mount . This prevents the hitch
from causing damage shou ld your veh icle be
st ruck from be hind¢ &. .
98
Trailer brakes
If your tr ai ler is equipped wit h a bra king syst em,
check to be sure t hat it con forms t o a ll regu la-
tions.
The tr a iler hydrau lic brake system mus t not be
directly connecte d t o t he vehicle's hydr auli c
brake system ¢ &. .
Safety chains
Always use safety chains between your vehicle
and t he tra ile r.
Trailer lights
Trailer lights must meet all regulations. Be sure
to check w ith your author ized Audi dealer for cor-
rect wir ing , sw itches and relays .
Mirrors
If you a re unab le to see the traffic behind you us-
ing the regular outs ide mirrors, then you must in-
stall extended mirro rs. It is important that you
always have clear vision to the rear.
A WARNING
-
- After remov ing the t ra iler hitch, do not
sto re it in your vehicle . In case of sud den
braking , t he hitch co uld fly forwar d a nd in-
jure you or your passenge rs.
- If a tra ile r has e lectr ica l brakes p lease not e
t hat the se brakes ar e not activated by the
fact ory-fi tt ed contro l uni t - risk of accident!
- Never inst all a "we igh t d istribut ing" or
"lo ad equ al izing" trailer hitc h o n your veh i-
cle. The vehicle was not desig ned fo r these
kinds of trailer hitches. The hitch attach -
ment can fai l, caus ing the tra iler to tear
loose from the vehicle .
- The Gross Veh icle Weight Rating for your
veh icle, found on the safety compliance la-
be l on the driver's s ide B-pillar, m ust never
be exceeded under any circumstances. Ex-
ceed ing the Gross Vehicle Weight Rati ng of
your veh icle is likely to damage your vehicle,
and such damage will not be covered by
your Limit ed New Vehicle War ranty. Exceed -
ing t he Gros s Vehicle We ight Ratin g will al-
so cha nge the pe rform a nce and ha ndli ng .,._

characteristics of your vehicle, which could
cause a crash resulting in serious injury or
death.
Operating instructions
Trailer towing weights
The maximum permissible unbraked trailer
weight is 1,650 lbs (750 kg) .
The maximum permissible braked trailer weight
is:
- Q7 2.0: 5,500 lbs (2,500 kg)
- Q7 3 .0: 7,700 lbs (3,500 kg)
These specifications apply when driving on roads
having an incline of less than 12% .
Permissible tongue load
For best vehicle handling under these changed
conditions, adjust the trailer load so that the
tongue load is at the maximum allowable or
slightly lower . You can get an approximation of
the tongue load with a bathroom scale or you can
measure the load at a trucking company or
weighing station.
The maximum permissible load on the ball hitch
may not exceed:
- Q7 2.0: 550 lbs (250 kg)
- Q7 3 .0: 770 lbs (350 kg)
It is recommended to use the maximum permis-
sible load. Please also observe the information
¢ page 343, ¢ page 347.
Trailer load distribution
Be sure the load in the trailer is held securely in
place to prevent it from shifting forward, back-
ward or sideways.
Never allow a passengerto ride in a trailer ¢ .&.
in Messages on page 100.
Ball mount
The trailer hitch may only be used with suitable
u
co ball mount and ball. Installation of the hitch ball
......
N must be carried out in accordance with the manu-
r-...
N
......
0
facturer's instructions .
0
:E:
'<t
Trailer towing
Engine cooling system
Towing a trailer makes the engine work harder. It
is important that the cooling system's perform-
ance is up to the additional load. Make sure that
the cooling system has enough fluid.
Tire pressure
When towing a trailer, inflate the tires of your
vehicle to the tire pressure listed under "Full
load" on the label <:!;>page 343. Inflate trailer
tires to trailer and tire manufacturers' specifica-
tions.
Lights
The headlight settings should be checked with
the trailer attached before driving off. Check to
make sure both vehicle and trailer lights are
working properly.
Safety chains
Be sure trailer safety chains are properly connect-
ed from the trailer to the hitch on the vehicle .
Leave enough slack in the chains to permit turn-
ing corners. When you install safety chains, make
sure they will not drag on the road when you are
driving.
The chains should cross under the trailer tongue
to prevent it from dropping in case of separation
from the hitch.
Setting drive select(air suspension)*
Make sure the vehicle is on a level surface before
hitching the trailer and before adjusting the
tongue weight. The driving mode must be in Au-
to or Comfort ¢ page 134, ¢ (D
If you would like to drive in the Dynamic driving
mode, then you must select this mode before
hitching the trailer and before adjusting the
tongue weight. Please note that your vehicle will
lower and the ground clearance is reduced.
If you have to drive through difficult road condi-
tions, you can raise the vehicle again after hitch-
ing the trailer or after adjusting the tongue
weight ¢ page 136.
(D Note
Vehicles with air suspension*:
99
T r ailer towing
- Changes in temperature or load can affect
the height of the vehicle .
- Always se lect Auto or Comfort mode. Ot h-
erwise, the tongue load specified for your
vehicle will no longer be applicable.
Messages
Driving with a trailer requires extra caution .
Weight distribution
Towing a loaded trailer w ith an empty car res ults
in a hig hly unstable dist ribution of weight. If t his
cannot be avo ided, drive at ve ry low speeds o nly
to avoid the risk of losing st eeri ng con t rol.
A "balanced" rig is eas ie r to operate and cont rol.
This means that t he t ow veh icle should be loaded
to the exte nt poss ible a nd permiss ible , while
keep ing the tra ile r as lig ht as possib le unde r t he
circumstances . Whenever possible, transfer
some cargo to the luggage compa rtment of the
tow vehicle whi le observ ing tongue load req uir e-
ments and ve hicle loading considerat ions.
Speed
The higher the spee d, t he more d ifficult it be-
comes for the drive r to co ntro l t he rig. Do not
drive at the maximum permissible speed. Reduce
your speed even more if load, weather or w ind
conditions a re unfavorable - part icularly when
going downhill.
Redu ce veh icle spee d immediately if the trai le r
shows the slightest sign of swaying. Do not try
to stop the swaying by accelerating .
Observe speed lim its. In some areas, speeds for
ve hicles towing trai lers are lower than for reg ular
veh icles.
Always a pp ly b rakes early. When dr iving down -
hill, shift into a lower gear to use the engine
braking effect to slow the veh icle. Use of the
brakes a lone can cause them to ove rheat and fail.
Air suspension*
If you a re connecting a tra iler t o a fact ory-ins t al-
led t rai ler hitch, t rai ler mode a utomat icall y
switches on in the ai r suspensio n. This will limit
the reg ulation by the a ir suspension whi le dr iv-
100
ing . If you want to swit ch off tra iler mode wh ile
driving, for example when using a bicycle rack
system, se lect in the Infota inment system :
I M ENUI button> Vehicle > left control button>
Vehicle settings > Air suspension: trailer .
If the vehicle has a retrofitte d tra iler hitc h, the
trailer mo de might not switch on automatically .
In this case, switch the tra iler mode on before
hitc hing the tra iler and switch it off after un-
hitc hing the tra ile r.
Coolant tempe rature
page 11 m ust
The coo lant tempe rat ure gauge c:::>
be obse rved caref ully. The coolant temperature
can increase if you drive on long inclines in a low
gear at high eng ine speeds. Reduce your speed
immediately if the LEDs in the top part of the d is-
play turn on .
For more information about indicator lights, re-
fer to . c:;,page 26.
A WARNING
-
Anyone not prope rly res t rained in a moving
ve hicle is at a much greater risk in an acci -
de nt. Never let anyon e ride in your car who is
not prope rly we aring t he rest ra ints provide d
by Audi.
Trailer towing
information
' Important to know
Your vehicle handles d ifferently when towing a
t railer becau se of t he ad d it iona l we igh t a nd d if-
ferent we igh t d ist ribu t ion. Safety, per forman ce
and eco nomy will g reatly d epend on how caref ul-
ly you load your trai ler and operate yo ur rig .
Befo re yo u ac t ually tow yo ur tra iler, pra ct ice
tu rning, st opping and backing up in an are a away
from t raffic. Keep pra ct icing unti l yo u have be-
come comp lete ly familiar w ith the way yo ur vehi-
cle-tra ile r combination behaves and responds .
Backing up is diff icul t a nd requ ires pra ctice.
Backing up w ith a trailer genera lly req uires steer -
ing action opposite to that when backing up your
vehicle witho ut a t railer .
 Tra iler towing

Maintain a greater d istance between your vehicle

and the one in front of you. You will need more
room to stop. To compensate fo r the tra iler, you
will need a larger than normal turn ing rad ius.

When pass ing, remember t hat you cannot accel -

erate as fast as you norma lly wou ld because of
the added load. Make sure you have eno ugh room
to pass. After passing , allow plenty of room fo r
your tra iler before changing lanes again.

Avoid jerky starts, sharp turns or rapid lane

changes .

(D Tips
- Do not tow a trailer during t he brea k-in per i-
od of your vehicle .
- If you t ow a trailer, your Audi may require
more frequent maintenance du e to the ex-
tra load ~ page 381.

Parking on a slope
Do not pork on o slope with o trailer . If it cannot
be avoided, do so only ofter doing the following:

When parking:
" Apply t he foot brake.
" Have someone p lace chocks under both t he ve-
hicle a nd the t ra ile r whee ls .
" Wit h chocks in place, slowly release t he b rakes
unti l the w hee l chocks absor b the load.
" Turn the wheels towa rds the curb.
" Apply the pa rking brake.
" Move the se lector lever to P.

When restarting after parking:

" Apply the foot brake.
" Start the engine .
" Move t he se lecto r lever to D/S.
" Release the pa rking brake and slowly pull out
and away from t he whee l chocks.
" Stop and have someone retrieve t he wheel
chocks .

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

101
A ss is tance s y s tems

Assistance systems al speed limit or if there is a spec ified maximum

speed for winter tires.
Electronic speed Limiter
Setting the warning threshold
Your ve hicle may be factory equipped with tires
Se lect in the Infotainment system: IM E N U I but-
that are rated for a maximum speed of 130 mph
ton > Vehicle > left co ntro l butt o n > Driver assis-
(210 km/h). This is less than the maximum sp eed
tance > Speed warning > Manu al.
of your vehicle . To reduce the risk of sudden tire
failure and loss of control if the vehicle is operat-
(D Tips
ed at excessive speeds, your vehicle also has an
electronic speed limiter . The electronic speed Regardless of the speed warning syst em, you
lim iter prevents your vehicle from going faster shou ld alw ays mo nitor your speed using the
speedometer and make sure yo u are fo llow ing
than the t ire speed rating. For mo re information
<=>
page 333. the lega l speed limit.

If the engine control unit receives faulty vehicle

Cruise control system
road speed s ignals , the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) ¢..ffi will illumina t e . If this occurs, Switching on
con t act t he nearest au t horized Aud i dealer for Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
assistance. The cruise control sys tem makes it possible to
drive at a constant speed starting at 15 mph
_& WARNING - (20kmlh) .
Always observe the posted speed limits and
adjust you r speed to suit prevailing road, traf-
fic and weather conditions. Never drive your 0
vehicle faster than the maximum speed rating
of the tires installed .
f
Speed
Introduction
warning system

Applies to: vehicles with speed warning system

The speed warning system helps you to stay be-
low a specified maximum speed that can be set,
changed or deleted in the Infotainment system.
The speed warning system warns you if you are
exceeding the maximum speed that you have set .
A wa rning tone will sound as soon as you r speed
exceeds the st ored value slight ly. The indicato r
light also turns on in the instrument cluster dis -
play ct] (USA models)/ [SJ(Canada models) and
a message . The indicator light (CJ / [SJand the
message turn off if the speed falls back be low
the stored maximum speed.
~0
Fig. 9 6 Operat ing lever : cru ise contro l sys tem
.,.To switch the system on , pu ll the lever into po-
sition (D <=>
fig. 96 .
.. Drive at the speed to be mai ntained.
.. To store the speed, press the button @ .
The stored speed and the ftji(l)~14
(USA models) I
l'I (Cana da models) indicator light appear in the
instrument cluster display. An additional indica-
tor appears in the head-up display *.
The speed is maintained by modifying engine
power or through an active brake intervention.

Set ting a threshold is recommended if you would

like to be reminded when yo u reach a certain
A WARNING
-

maximum speed. Situations where you may want - Always pay attention to the traffic around
to do so include driving in a country with a gene r- you when the cruise control system is in

102

operation. You are always responsib le for
your speed and the distance between your
vehicle and other vehicles.
- For safety reasons, cruise control should not
be used in the city, in stop-and-go traffic, on
winding roads and when road conditions are
poor (such as ice, fog, gravel, heavy rain and
hydroplaning), because th is increases the
risk of an accident.
- Switch the cruise control off temporar ily
when driving in turn ing lanes, highway exits
or in construction zones.
- Please note that unconsciously "resting"
your foot on the accelerator pedal prevents
the cruise control from braking. This is be-
cause pressing the acce le rat or peda l ove r-
rides the cruise contro l system.
- If a brake system ma lf unction such as over-
heating occurs when the cruise contro l sys-
tem is switched on, the braking function in
the system may be switched off . The rest of
the cruise control system functions remain
act ive as long as the @;\l)Mj(USA models) /
Bl (Canada models) indicator light is on.
Before driving downhill a long distance on a
steep hill, decrease your speed and select a
lower gear. This makes use of the eng ine
braking effect and relieves the brakes.
(D} Tips
The brake lights turn on when the brakes are
app lied a utomat ically.
Changing the speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
.,.To increase/decrease the speed in 1 mph (1
km/h) increments, br iefly tap the lever toward
0 10 ¢ page 102, fig. 96 to the first level.
.,.To increase/decrease the speed in 5 mph (10
km/h) increments, br iefly tap the lever toward
0 10 to t he second level.
u .,.To increase or decrease the speed quickly, hold
co
......
N the lever toward 0 10 to the first or second
r-...
N
...... level until the desired speed is reached .
0
0
:E:
'<t
A ss ista nc e sys t e m s
Overriding the speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
You can press the acce le rato r pedal to increase
you r speed, for exa mple if you want to pass
someone . The speed you set ear lier will resume
as soon as you release the acce lerator pedal.
However, if you are exceeding the stored speed
by a considerable amount fo r a long time, the
cruise contro l system will tempora rily switch off.
The 1Q;jl
)~ij(USA mode ls) 1111
(Canada mode ls) in-
dicator light in the instrument cluster turns off
and the stored speed is maintained.
Preselecting a speed
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
You can pre-select your desired speed when the
vehicle is stationary.
.,.Switch the ignit ion on.
.,. Pull the lever into position (D ¢ page 102,
fig. 96.
.,.To increase or decrease the speed, tap the lever
toward 0 10 .
This function makes it possible, fo r example, to
save the speed you want before driving on the
highway. Once you are on the expressway, acti-
vate the cruise control system by pulling the lev-
er into position (D.
Switching off
Applies to: vehicles with cruise control system
Deact ivating temporarily
.,. Press the brake pedal, or
.,. Press the lever toward @ (not locked into
place) ¢ page 102, fig . 96 .
Switching off completely
.,. Press the lever into position @ (clicked into
place), or
.,.Switch the ignit ion off .
The speed you stored will be maintained if the
cruise contro l has been switched off temporarily .
To resume the stored speed, release the brake
pedal and pull the lever to position (D. .,.
103
Assistance systems
Switching the ignition off will erase the stored
speed.
A WARNING
You should only resume the stored speed if it
is not too high for existing traffic cond itions.
Otherwise you can increase the risk of an acci-
dent.
Camera-based traffic
sign recognition
Description
Applies to: vehicles with camera·based t raffic sign recogn i·
tion
Fig. 97 Instrument cluste r : traff ic sign recogn ition
Fig. 98 Windsh ield: came ra window for t raffic sign recog-
nitio n
Traff ic sign recognition assists you when driving
by displaying detected speed limits or s igns pro-
hibiting passing in the instrument cluster display
c:;,fig . 97 . Within the limits of the system, the le-
gal speed lim its in school zones are detected and
disp layed .
General information
Traffic sign recognit ion can detect standard
speed limit signs that are within the camera's vis-
ual field . With ass istance from navigation data,
104
detected speed limits are evaluated and shown in
the display . The traffic sign for the current de-
tected speed lim it will blink in the display if you
exceed the warning thresho ld set in the Infotain-
ment system c;,page 105.
The traffic sign recognition is subject to certain
system limitations and may be unavai lable or on-
ly partially avai lable in the follow ing situations :
- when visibility is poor, such as in snow, rain,
fog or heavy spray
-when there is glare, for example from oncom-
ing traffic or the sun
- at high speeds
- if the camera's visual f ield ¢ fig. 98 is covered,
for examp le by dirt or st ickers. For info rmation
on cleaning, see ¢ page 354 .
- if the t raffic signs are completely or partially
covered, for examp le by trees, snow, dirt or
other vehicles
- if speed traffic signs do not conform to the
standards
- if traffic signs are damaged or bent
- if traffic signs are displayed on sign holders
with electronic signs
- if the traffic signs or the configuration of the
road have changed (navigation data is no lon-
ger up-to-date)
.&_WARNING
-
Pay attention to traffic and the area around
your vehicle when traffic sign recognition is
turned on . The traffic signs insta lled on the
road always take precedence over the display.
The driver is always responsible for assess ing
the traffic situation.
- Under some circumstances, traffic sign rec-
ognition may not detect traffic signs cor-
rectly or detect them at a ll. As a result, the
system may not display the correct speed
lim it or any speed limit .
- Traff ic sign recognit ion does not adapt your
veh icle's speed to match the speed limit!
- The display in the instrument cluster is
based on the units of measurement used for
speed in that country. As a result, the dis-
play SO in the instrument cluste r can mean
 Assistance systems

either km/h or mph, depending on the Messages

country. Applies to: veh icles with camera -based traff ic sign recog ni-
tion

Operation f!'A
Traffic sign recognition: currently unavaila-
Applies to: vehicles with camera -based t raffic s ign recogni - ble. Camera view restricted due to surroundings
tio n
Function currently unavailable . Camera view re-
stricted due to surroundings

This message appears if the camera's visual field

is covered c::>page 104, fig. 98 . The system will
switch itself off .

R Traffic sign recognition: currently restricted .

See owner's manual

This message appears if there is a malfunction in

the navigation system, for examp le. The speed
Fig. 99 Inst rum ent cluste r: addit ional disp lay
limit display is limited, which increases the risk
of an incorrect display.
Accessing traffic sign recognition

.. Select: the first tab> Traffic signs.

Setting a speed warning
You can set a warning threshold down to 10 mph
(15 km/h) . The traffic sign for the current detect-
ed speed limit will blink in the disp lay if you ex-
ceed the set threshold .
.. Select in the Infotainment system: ! MENUI but -
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
sistance> Speed warning > Traffic sign based
warning.
f!'A
Traffic sign based speed warning: currently
unavailable. See owner's manual
There is no warning when the set threshold is ex-
ceeded.
No traffic sign information available
There is no valid navigation data and do speed
lim its were detected . Or there is a recommended
speed but there is not a speed limit (for example
driv ing on and off the expressway).
Malfunction! See owner 's manual

Additional display The system cannot guarantee correct function

and is switched off . See an autho rized Audi deal-
If a view other than the traffic sign recognition is
er or authorized Audi Service Facility for assis-
selected in the instrument cluster display, the
tance .
speed limi t will be shown in another display
fig. 99. The current applicable speed limit will
c::> Function not available in this country
be shown there, if possible w ithin the limits of
The vehicle is in a country where the function is
the system .
not availab le.

(D Tips
Predictive efficiency
- An additional indicator appears in the head-
up display* .
assist
- Your speed warning settings are stored au- Description
tomatically and assigned to the remote con- Applies to : veh icles with predictive efficiency ass ist
u
(0
trol key in use.
...... General information
N
r--.
N
...... The predict ive efficiency assist helps the driver to
0
0
:E drive with anticipat ion and therefore helps to ..,_
<t

105
Assistance systems
save fuel. The system accesses predictive trip da-
ta (including speed limits, inclines and the radius
of curves) from the navigat ion system* . Informa-
tion from the camera-based traff ic sign recogn i-
tion* is also applied to recognize traffic signs
,:::;,page104 .
The messages displayed depend on the naviga -
tion data* being up-to-date and the correct iden-
tification by the traffic sign recognition*.
When adaptive cruise contro l* is switched off,
the predictive efficiency ass ist only provides noti-
f ications without controlled interventions. When
adapt ive cruise control* is switched on, the sys-
tem responds to upcoming situat ions automati-
cally .
Vehicles with adaptive cruise control*
Refer to predictive control c::;,page 113.
Indicator in the instrument cluster display
Predictive messages appear in the instrument
cluster display to show the driver the appropriate
time to coast when a situation ahead requires
you to drive at a lower speed.
The messages are only shown if the cruis e control
system* or adaptive cruise contro l* is switched
off.
An additional ind icat or appears in the head-up
display* .
Symbol Meaning
Remove you r foot from the acceler-
ator pedal to slow down, because
~ there is a situat ion ahead that re-
quires a lower speed.
If you see Driver assistance in the inst rument
cluster display, the following symbo ls will indi-
cate which situation the system is currently re-
acting to.
Symbol Meaning
USA models:
MPH
Speed limit
Canada models:
km/h
Speed limit
106
Symbol Meaning
_J!L Intersection
,ir
~
..Of
);
Traffic circle
If there are multiple situations, then these situa-
tions will appear in order in the display .
.8, WARNING -
Pay attention to traffic and the area around
your vehicle when the efficiency ass ist is
switched on. The driver is always respons ible
for assessing the traffic situation .
© Tips
- The wo rding of the message may vary de-
pending on the driving mode set in drive se-
lect* ¢page 134 and the current selector
lever position. No messages are disp layed
when in the S selector lever posit ion or in
Dynamic mode .
- When a route is planned using the naviga-
tion system*, then the message feed is
based on th is route. Without route guid-
ance, the system uses an assumed route for
the message feed.
- There will not be a message for every s itua-
t ion ahead, for example if there is not
enough distance remaining to react to the
situat ion .
- No messages are displayed when at speeds
under 20 mph (30 km/h) .
Settings in the Infotainment system
Appli es to: vehicles with predictive efficiency assist
.. In the Infotainment system, select: IMENU I
button > Vehicle > left control button > Driver
assistance > Efficiency assist.
Pred ictive messages are shown when this func-
tion is switched on.
(D Tips
No predictive messages are shown on vehicles
without a navigation system .
 Assistance systems

Audi adaptive cruise also start driving again automatically under cer-
tain conditions ¢page 110.
control
In traffic jams or stop-and-go traffic, traff ic jam
Description
ass ist can assist the driver¢ page 114.
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Which functions can be controlled?
When you switch adapt ive cruise control on, you
can set the current speed as the "contro l speed"
¢page 109, Switching on/off.
When driving, you can stop cruise control
¢ page 111 or change the speed <::;>page 110 at
any time.

You can also set the distance to the vehicle driv-

Fig. 100 Detect ion range ing ahead and set the driving mode of the adap-
tive cruise control¢ page 111.
The adaptive cruise control system is a combina-
tion of speed and distance regulation. It assists General information
the dr iver by both regulat ing the speed and Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
maintaining a distance to the vehicle driving
ahead, within the limits of the system . If the sys-
tem detects a vehicle driving ahead, the adaptive
cruise control can brake and accelerate your vehi-
cle. This makes dr iving more comfortable both
on long stretches of highway and in stop-and-go
traffic.

What can adaptive cruise control do?

The adaptive cruise control system uses video, ra-
dar, ultrasound and navigation data. Vehicles Fig. 101 Front of the vehicle : sensors and video camera

driving ahead can be recognized up to 650 feet

The areas with the radar and ultrasonic sensors
(200 m) away.
and the video camera i::>fig . 101 must not be cov-
Predictive funct ions offer the driver additional ered by stickers, depos its or any other objects,
comfort and contribute to the reduction in fuel because this can interfere with the adaptive
consumption and CO2 emissions ¢page 113. cruise control function. For informat ion on clean-
On open roads with no traffic, it functions like a page 354. The same applies for any
ing, see<::;>
cruise control system. The stored speed is main- modifications made in the front area.
tained. When approaching a vehicle driving In some driving situations, the adaptive cruise
ahead, the adaptive cruise control system auto- control function is restricted:
matically brakes to match that vehicle's speed
- Vehicles can only be detected when they are
and the n maintains the set distance. As soon as
page 107,
w ith in the sensor detection zones<::;>
the system does not detect a vehicle driving
fig . 100.
ahead, adaptive cruise control accelerates up to
- The system has a limited ability to detect
u the stored speed.
(0
......
vehicles that are a short distance ahead, off to
N
r--. In stop-and-go traffic, adaptive cru ise control ca n the side of your veh icle or moving into your
N
...... brake until the vehicle is stationary and then can
0 lane .
0
:E
<t

107
Assistance systems

- Objects that are difficult to detect such as mo- underbody. This can impair the adaptive
torcycles, vehicles with high ground clearance cruise control. Have an authorized Audi dealer
or an overhang ing load are detected late or not or authorized Audi Service Facility check their
detected at all. function.
- When driving through curves c:;,poge 108.
- When the vehicle is stationary r::;,page 108. (D Tips
For an explanation on conformity with the
_& WARNING FCCregulations in the United States and the
Always pay attention to the traffic around you Industry Canada regulations, see
when adaptive cruise control is switched on. c:;,page 384.
As the driver, you are still responsible for your
own speed and the distance to other vehicles. In curves
The adaptive cruise control is used to assist Appli es to : vehicles with Audi adapt ive cruise control
you . The driver must always take action to
avoid a collision. The driver is always responsi-
ble for braking at the correct time.
- For safety reasons , do not use adaptive
cruise control when the road surface is in
poor condition and/or in bad weather condi -
tions (such as ice, fog , gravel, heavy rain and
hydroplaning). Using the system under
these conditions increases the risk of an ac-
cident.
Fig. 102 Examp le: driving into a curve
- Switch adaptive cruise control off tempora-
rily when driving in turning lan es, on ex-
When driving into a curve r:;, fig. 102 and out of a
pressway exits (except if predictive control
curve, the adaptive cruise control may react to a
is switched on) or in construction zones.
vehicle in the neighboring lane and apply the
This prevents the vehicle from accelerating
brakes . You can prevent that by pressing the ac-
to the stored speed when in these situa-
celerator pedal briefly.
tions.
- The adaptive cruise control system will not
brake by itself if you put your foot on the ac- Stationary vehicles
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adapt ive cruise control
celerator pedal. Doing so can override the
speed and distance regulation .
- When approaching stationary obstacles
such as stopped traffic, adaptive cruise con-
trol will respond with limited function.
- Adaptive cruise control does not respond to
people, animals, or crossing or oncoming
)))
objects .
- The function of the radar sensors can be af-
fected by reflective objects such as guard
rails, the entrance to a tunnel, heavy rain or Fig. 103 Example: vehicle changing lanes and stat ionary
ice. vehicle

(D Note Within the limits of the system, adaptive cruise

control can react to stationary vehicles
The sensors can be displaced by impacts or
r::;,fig. 103, as long as you are driving slower than ..,
damage to the bumper, wheel housing and

108

30 mph (SO km/h) and the system classifies the
possibl e passing maneuver as low. For example,
if a vehicle that was already detected @ turns or
changes lanes, the adaptive cruise control react s
to the stationary vehicle ahead of it @ .
Switching on / off
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise contro l
Fig. 104 Operat ing lever: switching on and off
Fig. 105 I nstr ument clust er : adap t ive cruise cont rol
You can set any speed between 20 and 95 mph
(30 and 150 km/h).
Indicator lights and messages in the instrument
cluster display inform you about the current sit-
uation and setting .
An additional indicato r appears in the head-up
display* .
Switching adaptive cruise control on
.. Pull the lever toward you into position @
¢ fig. 104 .
Storing the speed and activating regulation
• To store the current speed, press the lSETlbut-
u
(0
...... ton ¢ fig. 104. The stored speed is shown in the
N
r--.
N
speedomete r in the LED line @ and appears
......
0 briefly in the status line @ ¢ fig. 105.
0
:E
<t
Assistance systems
• To activate the regulation while stationary, also
press the brake pedal.
Switching adaptive cruise control off
• Push the lever away from you into position @
until it clicks into place. The message ACC:off
appears.
@ Indicator lights
II- adaptive cruise control is switched on . No
vehicles are detected ahead . The stored speed is
maintained.
• - a veh icle dr iving ahead was detected . The
adaptive cruise control system regu lates the
speed and distance to the vehicle driving ahead
and accelerat es/b rakes automat ically.
• - adaptive cruise control is switched on . Ave -
hicle was detected ahead. Your vehicl e is station-
ary and w ill not start driving automat ically.
fai-adaptive cruise control is switched on. No
vehicles were detected ahead. Your vehicle is sta -
t iona ry and will not start driving automatically.
•- the automatic braking is not enough to
maintain a sufficient distance to a vehicle driving
ahead. You must intervene ¢ page 112, Driver
intervention request.
© Instrument cluster display
If the Driver assistance display is not shown in
the instrument cluster display, you can open it
using the multifunction steering wheel buttons
¢ page 12.
Based on the graphic disp lay, you can determine
if the system is maintain ing a distance to the ve-
hicle driving ahead and what that distance is.
No vehicle - no vehicle was detected driving
ahead .
Silver vehicle - a vehicle was detected driving
ahead.
Red vehicle - request for driver intervention
¢page 112.
The five distance bars on the gauge © represent
the set distance (refer to ¢ page 111 for info r-
mation on how to change the distance). If you .,.
109
A ss is tance s y s tems
fall below the se lected distance, the distance
bars become red from the bottom upward.
A WARNING
--:--~~
If you press the ISETIbutton when driving at
speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h), the vehicle
accelerates automat ica lly up to 20 mph (30
km/h), which is the m inimum speed that can
be set.
(D Tips
- If you switch the ignition or the adapt ive
cruise control system off, the set speed is
erased for safety reasons.
- The electronic stabilization control (ESC)
and the anti-slip-regulation (ASR) are auto-
matically sw itched on when the adaptive
cruise control is switched on .
Changing the speed
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise contro l
0 Fig. 107 Instrument cluster: safe start monitor
f The adaptive cru ise control system also assists
J0
Fig. 106 Operat ing lever: changing th e speed
" To increase/decrease the speed in 1 mph (1
km/ h) increments, br iefly tap the lever toward
0 10 ¢ fig . 106 to the first level.
• To increase/decrease the speed in S mph
(5 km/h or 10 km/h) increments, briefly tap
the leve r toward 0 10 to the second level.
" To increase or decrease the speed quickly, hold
the lever towards 0 10 up to the first or sec -
ond level until the red LED@ reaches the de -
sired speed ¢ page 109, fig. 105.
You can a lso prese lect the speed when adaptive
cruise control is not active by moving the lever in
l) This is not ava ilab le in some countries.
110
the desired direction G)!Q . Activate the previ-
ously selected speed by pulling the lever into po-
s ition (I) ¢ page 109, fig. 104 .
After each change, the new stored speed appears
briefly in the status line ¢ page 109, fig. 105 @ .
When adaptive cruise control is active, the B in-
dicator light turns on and when adapt ive cruise
contro l is not active, the ii
ind icator light turns
on. In the Aud i virtual cockp it*, the II
indicator
light turns on instead .
Driving in stop-and-go traffic
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adapt ive cruise control
you in stop-and-go traffic. If a vehicle driving
ahead stops, your vehicle will brake and stay at a
stop within the limits of the system.
" To resume driving with adaptive cruise contro l,
tap the accelerator pedal or
• Pull the lever toward you into position @
¢page 111, fig. 108.
Starting to drive with adaptive cruise
control 1)
As long as the message ACC:automati c go dis-
plays and the veh icle dr iving ahead starts to
move, your vehicle will start driving ¢ & . You can
activate ACC:automatic go again for a short
time by pulling the lever to position @ .
For safety reasons, your vehicle will only start to
drive automatically if:
- the drive r's safety belt is fastened
- all doors and the hood are closed
 Assistance systems

- your vehicle is not stationary for mo re than Overriding cruise control

three minutes
Safe start monitor
If an obstacle is detected when you start driving,
you will be alerted to the danger by the. ind i-
cator light and the image in the instrument clus-
fig. 107 <=>
ter disp lay <=> & . An audio signal will
also sound . Your vehicle will drive more slowly
when starting. This may also happen in some sit-
uations when there is no apparent obstacle.
- Press the brake pedal to slow your vehicle
down.
.&_WARNING
If the message ACC: automatic go 1> appears,
your vehicle will start driving even if there is
an obstacle between your vehicle and the ve-
hicle driv ing ahead . This increases the risk of
an acc ident.
.,.To accelerate manually, pull the lever toward
you into position @ and hold it there or press
the acce le rator pedal. The message ACC: over-
ride appears .
.,.To resume cruise control, release the lever or
take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Canceling cruise control while driving
.,. Move the lever into position @ . The message
ACC: standby appears . Or
.,. Press the brake pedal.
.,.To resume the stored speed, move the lever in-
to position @ .
Canceling cruise control when stopped
.,. Push the lever away from you into position @ .
The message ACC: standby appears.
.,.To resume cruise contro l, press the brake peda l
and pull the lever toward you into posit ion @ .

@ Tips
If adaptive cruise control is active and your
veh icle does not start driving even though the
message ACC: automatic go 1) appears, you
can start driving by tapping the accelerator
pedal.
Interrupting cruise control
Applies to : vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
.&_WARNING
-==
It is dangerous to activate cruise control and
resume the stored speed when the current
road, traffic or weather conditions do not per-
mit this . This increases the risk of an accident.
Setting the distance
Applies to: vehicles wit h Audi adaptive cruise contro l

,
0
Fig. 109 Operat ing lever : sett ing t he dist an ce

Fig. 108 Select or lever

.,.Tap the switch to display the current set d is-
Requirement: adaptive cruise control must be tance <=>fig. 109.
switched on . .,.To increase or reduce the d istance in incre-
u ments, tap the switch upward/downward
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
~ ll This is not ava ilable in some countr ies.

111
A ss is tance s y s tems

again. The distance between the two vehicles

will change in the instrument cluster disp lay.
A WARNING
When setting the distance, the driver is re-
When approach ing a veh icle driving ahead, the sponsible for adheri ng to any applicable legal
adaptive cruise control system brakes to match regulations.
that vehicle's speed and then adjusts to the set
distance. If the vehicle driving ahead accelerates, @ Tips
then the adaptive cruise control will also acceler-
- Depending on the selected driving mode in
ate up to the speed that you have set.
dr ive se lect* and the set distance, the driv-
The higher the speed, the greater the distance ing behav ior will vary from dynamic to com-
,&.. The Distan ce 3 setting is recommended .
c::> fortab le when accelerating c::,page 135.
That is equal to the general recommendation of - Distan ce 3 is set automatically each time
"half the speed shown on the speedometer". you switch the ignition on. If you would like
to set anothe r distance as the default set-
The distances provided are specified values . De-
t ing, you can have the adaptive cruise con-
pending on the driving situation and how the ve-
trol menu enabled by an autho rized Aud i
hicle ahead is driving, the actual distance may be
deale r or author ized Audi Service Facility.
more or less than these target distances.
- Your settings are automat ica lly stored and
If you change the time gaps, the new ly set value assigned to the remote cont rol key be ing
appears briefly in the instrument cluster display used .
Iii for Dist ance 3. This only occurs if the Driver
assista nce display is not currently shown in the
Driver intervention request
page 109, fig. 105 .
disp lay c::> Applies to : vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
Distance 1 : this setting corresponds to a d istance
of 92 feet (28 meters) when traveling at 62 mph
(100 km/h), or a time distance of 1 second.
Distance 2 : this setting corresponds to a d istance
of 118 feet (36 meters) when traveling at 62
mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 1.3 sec-
onds.
Distance 3 : this setting corresponds to a d istance
of 164 feet (SO meters) when traveling at 62
Fig. 110 Instr ument cluster: req uest for dr iver interven -
mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 1.8 sec-
t ion
onds.
Distance 4 : this setting corresponds to a d istance The request for driver intervention instructs you
of 219 feet (67 meters) when traveling at 62 to take over if the adaptive cruise control brak ing
mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 2.4 sec- funct ion is not ab le t o ma intain a suff icient d is-
onds. tance to the vehicle dr iving ahead c::,fig. 110.

Distance 5 : this setting corresponds to a d istance

of 328 feet (100 meters) when traveling at 62
mph (100 km/h), or a time distance of 3.6 sec-
onds.

112
 Assistance systems

Predictive control Indicator in the instrument cluster display

(efficiency assist) When switching on the adaptive cruise contro l

Description
for the first time, the message ACC: 11DB + ac-
tive in the instrument cluster indicates the avail·
App lies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise contro l an d pre·
dictive efficiency assist
ability of the predictive control.

The symbol appears when the system

is regulating the speed to match a speed limit . If
this is the case, the system is reg ulating a speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h). The speed is then taken
over by the adaptive cruise control. The speed in
the speedometer LEDring adjusts to the speed to
be maintained ¢ page 109, fig . 105. The ..
¢ fig . 111 symbo l appears when there is an adap -
tation to the route ahead .

Fig. 111 Instrument cluster: pred ictive control If you are in the Driver assistancedisplay in the
instrument cluster, then the following symbols
General information will indicate which occurrence the system is cur-
The predictive control 1l uses the map informa- rently responding to :
tion from the navigation system in order to react Symbol Meaning
proact ively when driving. Information from the
USA models:
camera-based traffic sign recognition* is also ap- MPH
Speed limit
plied to recognize traffic signs <:!)page104 .
When coming up to areas with speed limits or Canada models:
km/h
changes in the course of the road (such as curves, Speed limit
intersections or traffic circles), the system brakes
Curve
automatically and then accelerates back up to Ir
the set speed . _l!L Intersection
When adaptive cruise control is switched off, the 1i1
system only provides notifications without con-
trolled interventions ¢ page 105 . ~
):
Traffic circle

The driver can override the predictive control at

any time by pressing the accelerator or brake
A WARNING

pedal. If the system changes the vehicle speed to - Read the warnings on ¢ .&. in General infor-
adapt to speed limits, you can change the speed mation on page 108 and on¢ .&. in Descrip-
using the lever ¢ page 110, fig. 106 . tion on page 104 .
- Pay attent ion to traffic and the area around
Always switch off the predictive control in your veh icle when predictive control is
the following situations: switched on. The driver is always responsi-
- When increased attention is needed from the ble for assessing the traffic situat ion.
driver . - There is an increase in the risk of an acci-
- In poor weather conditions such as snow or dent, because the system does not consider
heavy rain. "right of way" rules and also does not re-
- When driving on roads in poor condition . spond to traffic lights. ._.
u
(0
.....
N
r--.
N
.....
0
0
:E ll This is not ava ilable in so m e countr ie s.
<t

113
A ss is tance s y s tems

- The system only considers traffic signs that - The system switches of f when outside of a
give a speed limit. road system that is recorded in the naviga-
- The permitted speed can be exceeded if the t ion system map data .
adaptation to a speed limit is incorrect. The
driver is responsible for adhering to the per- Setting predictive control
mitted speed. Applies to : vehicles with Audi adapt ive cru ise control and pre-
dictive efficiency ass ist
- The speed at which a curve is driven through
does not necessarily match your own dr iving .. Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! but -
sty le. Brake the vehicle yourself when need- ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
ed to reduce the risk of an accident. sistance > Audi adaptive cruise control > Pre·
dictive control.
(D Tips
Set speed limit - when t his function is switched
- If a speed limit is detected, the stored
on, the system adjusts to the speed limits. This
speed is also adjusted in the speedometer
can also be done with at to lerance, if desired. In
LED line when the adaptive cruise control is
th is scenario, you may fall below or exceed the
not act ive.
set speed in favor of increased efficiency .
- The adaptation by the system depends on
the driving mode set in drive select* . Adaptation to route ahead - when this function
- Switch ing off pred ictive control , for exam- is switched on, the system adapts to the route
ple when dr iving in low traffic zones, does ahead (such as reducing the speed in curves).
not cause the adaptive cruise control to
switc h off . Traffic jam assist
- After switching on the ignit ion, the system
Description
init ially adj usts to a speed of 80 mph
Applies to: vehicles with traffic jam assist
(130 km/h) when driving onto highways
without a speed limit . Then the system ad- Trofficjom assist supports the driver when driv-
ju sts to the last speed stored by the driver. ing in traffic jams or in heavy traffic.
- There is no adapt ation to speed limits when
driv ing through highway inte rchanges and
when driving on or off t he expressway.
- There is no predictive contr ol at speed limits
under 20 mph (30 km/h).
- If a speed limit is only detected by the cam-
era and t he actual speed is signific antly
higher, the n t he speed limit will bli nk in t he
dis play unti l you have reached the requi red
speed ¢ page 105 .
Fig. 11 2 Turn s ig na l lever : tra ffic ja m ass ist button
- Incorrect values from the camera -based
traffic sign recognition* or outdated naviga-
tion system map data can lead to incorrect
or implausible contro l.
- When route guidance is switched on, the
system adapts to the route provided by the
navigation system. Driving without route
guidance or leaving a route can result in im-
plaus ible control.

Fig. 1 13 Instrument cluste r: traff ic jam ass ist

114
 Assistance sys tems

In a speed range under 40 mph (65 km/h), traffic
jam assist can help to keep the vehicle within a
lane calc ulated by the system. With in the lim its
of the system, the system controls the steering
automatically when adapt ive cruise control is
switched on . Since traffic jam assist is only an as-
sist system, the dr iver must always keep his or
her hands on the steer ing whee l and be ready to
steer. The d river ca n override the control at any
time by actively steering.
The system is designed for driving on express-
ways and highways.
Switching traffic jam ass ist on and off
...Press the button to switch the system on and
off <=>fig. 112.
...To turn the system off completely, select in the
Infotainment system: IMENU ! button> Vehicle
> left contro l button > Driver as sistance > Traf-
fic jam ass ist .
If traff ic jam assist was deactivated through the
Infotainment system, you can cont inue operating
the act ive lane assist using the<=>fig. 112 button
<=>page 124 . The traffic jam ass ist functions are
no longer available.
Requirements for using traffic jam assist:
- Traffic jam assist must be switched on in the
Infota inment system .
- Adaptive cruise control must be switched on
and act ive c;, page 109 .
play using the mu ltifunction steering wheel but-
tons c;,page 12. To activate traffic jam assist, you
must press the <=>fig. 112 button and switch on
the adaptive cruise control c;, page 109.
Indicator lights
Ill and II-traff ic jam assist
is on. Vehicles driv-
ing ahead were detected. Your vehicle adapts
whi le driving c;,fig. 113.
•- traffic jam assist sw itches off if the driver
does not take over steer ing after multiple driver
intervention requests . The system brakes the ve-
hicle until it is stationary.
A
- WARNING
Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
so you can be ready to steer at any t ime. The
driver is always responsible for staying in a
lane and for assessing traffic s ituations . Read
and follow the warnings on <=> .& in General
information on page 108. Never use traffic
jam ass ist in the following situations or you
will increase the risk of an a cciden t .
- Driving offroad or on unpaved roads. Traffic
jam assist is only designed for use on paved
roads.
- In city dr iving o r in construction zones.
- On curv ing stretches of road.
- In narrow lanes.
- In unclear traff ic situat ions such as at inter-
sections or toll stat ions.

Always switch off traffic jam assist in the

following situations:
@ Tips
You are not necessarily guided to the center
- When increased attention is needed from the
of your lane.
driver .
- In poor weather condit ions such as snow or
heavy rain .
- When driving on roads in poor condition .
- In construction zones.
- In city driving .

Traffic jam assist availability:

When you are in the Driver assistance view in the
u
co
......
instr ument cluster d isp lay, t he indicator light
N
r-... turns on ¥ and the message Traffic jam assist
N
...... available appears if a traffic jam situation was
0
0
:E: detected. You can open the Driver assistance dis -
'<t

115
Assistance systems
Distance indicator and
distance warning
Description
Applies to: vehicles with Audi adapt ive cruise control
Fig. 114 Instru me nt clust er: dis t ance ind icat or/wa rnin g
At speeds above 4 0 mph (65 km/h), this funct ion
measures the time betwee n t he vehicle driv ing
ahead and s hows th is in t he instrument cluster
d isp lay¢ fig. 114 .
You can set a warning t hreshold between 0 .6 and
3.0 seconds . The . indicator light t urns on if
you fall be low the set d istance.
Switching the distance indicator/warning
and off
.. In t he Infotainment system, selec t : IMENU !
button > Vehicle > left contro l button > Driver
assistance > Distance warning.
A WARNING
- Read an d follow th e war nin gs on ¢ .&. in
General informa tion on page 108 .
- The driver is always respons ible for adh er ing
to th e regulations applicable in th at coun -
t ry.
{!) Tips
You may fall be low he warn ing t hreshold
briefly whe n pass ing or when quickly ap-
proac hing a s low veh icle . Ther e is no wa rning
in t his scen a rio. A wa rn ing is given only if you
fal l below th e war nin g thr eshold for an ex-
t en ded pe riod of t ime.
116
Messages
Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise control
ii ACCwith traffic jam assist: unavailable . See
owner's manual
The system can not gu ar an t ee t hat it will det ect
vehicle s cor rectly an d it has sw itched off . The ra-
dar sensors have shifted or are fau lty . Drive to an
aut horized Audi dea le r o r a ut horized Audi Service
Facility immed iate ly to have the malfunct ion cor -
rected .
ii ACCwith traffic jam assist: currently un-
available. See owner's manual
This mes sa ge a ppears if th e ada pt ive cruise con-
t rol canno t be activat ed, for example if t he hood
is ope n.
fl ACCwith traffic jam assist : currently un-
available. Sensor vision restricted due to sur-
roundings. See owner 's manual
This message ap pears if the radar se nsor view is
obstr ucted, for examp le by leaves, snow, heavy
s pray or dirt . Clean the se nso rs ¢ page 107 ,
fig. 101.
on
ill ACCwith traffic jam assist: currently un-
available. Grade too steep
The road exceeds the maxim um poss ible g rade
for saf e operation . The systems cannot be sw itch -
ed o n.
ill ACCwith traffic jam assist: only available in
D, Sor M
Se lect t he D/S or M selector lever position.
flJACCwith traffic jam assist: currently un·
available. Parking brake applied
The syst ems switch off if you set th e parking
bra ke. The syst ems are availab le again afte r you
rele ase th e parkin g brake .
ill ACCwith traffic jam assist: currently un-
available. Stabilization control (ESC) input
This message appears if the e lectron ic stabiliza-
t ion cont rol (ESC) is t aking act ion to stabiliz e the
vehicle . The systems switch off in this scena rio.
ill ACCwith traffic jam ass ist: manual control! .,.
 Assistance s ystems

This message appears if the veh icle rolls back
when starting on a slight incline , even though the
systems are active . Press the brake peda l to pre -
vent the vehicle from rolling or sta rting to move.
II ACCwith traffic jam assist: currently un-
available. Downhill assist activated
You cannot act ivat e the system w he n hill hold as-
sis t is active.
Gf:-$
ACCw ith traffic jam assist: manual control!
This message appea rs if the driver does not take
over steering after m ultiple dr iver intervent io n
reques t s a nd the syst em switches off . The vehicle
brakes unt il it is stat io na ry.
II Traffic jam assist: unavailable. See owner's
manual
The system can no longer ensure that t he vehicle
will stay in the lane and switches off. Have your
vehicle checked by an authorized Audi dea ler or
author ized Audi Service Facility if the ma lfu nc-
tion is continuous .
II Traffic jam assist: Please take over stee ring!
This message appears as soon as t he system
stops detecting steer ing activity when the system
limits are reached. Always keep your hands on
the steer ing wheel so you can be ready to stee r at
anytime.
itf Traffic jam assist : currently unavailable.
Please fasten seat belt
ized Audi dea ler or author ized Audi Se rvice Facili-
ty if the malfunction is continuous .
Distance warning: malfunction! Please contact
Service
The system canno t gua rantee t hat it will detect
vehicles cor rectl y and it has switc hed off. The ra-
dar sens ors have shifted or are faul ty . Drive to a n
auth orized Audi de al e r or au t hori zed Aud i Serv ice
Facility immed iate ly t o have t he ma lfunction cor-
rected.
Distance warning: currently unavailable. Sensor
view restricted due to surroundings . See own-
er's manual
Th is m essage appears if t he rada r se nso r view is
obst ruct ed, for examp le by le aves, snow, heavy
spray or dirt. Clean th e sensors ~ page 1 07 ,
fig . 101.
Distance warning: currently unavailable. See
owner's manual
Th is message appears if the system has a tempo-
ra ry fa ilure . If this occurs m ultip le ti mes, dr ive to
an auth o rized Audi de al e r o r a utho rized Audi
Service Facility immed iat e ly to have t he m alfu nc-
t io n corre ct ed .
ACC: Please fasten seat belt
The system is not completely ava ilable if the dr iv-
er 's seat belt is unfastened .
Stationary object ahead

The syst em swit ches off w hen th e d river's saf ety Th is m ess age a ppears if you wo uld like t o switc h
be lt is unfastened . t he sys t em on and there is a st at ionary objec t di-
rectly in front of your vehicle.
II ACC: efficiency assist not available in this
country Door open
The adaptation to s peed limits and routes ahead The system is not available whe n the doo r is
is not ava ilable in this country. open .

m'J
ACC:predictive control currently unavaila-
ble. See owner's manual Audi pre sense
The adaptation to speed limits and routes ahead Introduction
sw itches off at speed limits under 20 mph Applies to : vehicles wi th Aud i pre sense

u (30 km/h).
co Within the limits of the system, the pre sense
......
N
r-... The message can also ap pea r if t he ad aptat ion to funct ions can initiate measures in pa rtic ula rly
N
......
0
speed limits and routes ahead has a tempora ry dangerous situations to protect the vehicle pas-
0
:E: fa ilur e. Have your vehicle checked by an author- sengers a nd other road use rs. ..,.
'<t

117
A ss is tan ce sys tem s
- Due to the interlinking of various vehicle sys-
tems, critical driving situations can be detected
by pre se nse basic and measures for preventa-
tive occupant protection are can be initiated.
- The pre sen se front system uses the data from
the adapt ive cruise control* radar sensors and
the camera to calculate the probability of a col-
lision. Within the limits of the system, an im-
pending collision with vehicles can be detected
in both urban and rural speed ranges. In this
case, the system warns the driver visually,
acoustically and with a jerk on the brakes if nec-
essary. If needed, it can initiate a partial or full
deceleration to reduce the collision speed or to
avoid the collision under certain circumstances .
In conjunction with pre sense basic/rear, the
front safety belts are also reversibly tensioned
when needed. The pre sense front is also active
when adapt ive cruise control* is switched off.
- Pre se nse rear contains pre sense basic func-
tions. It uses the data from the side assist" ra-
dar sensors and calculates within the limits of
the system the probab ility of a rear end colli-
sion with the vehicle behind you. Pre sense rear
is also active when side assist* is switched off.
- Within the limits of the system, pre se nse city
uses the camera data and can detect an im-
pending collision with vehicles and pedest rians.
In t his case, t he system warns the driver visual-
ly, acoustically and with a jerk on the brakes if
necessary. If needed, it can initiate a fu ll decel-
eration to reduce the collision speed or to avoid
the collision under certain circumstances. In
conjunction with pre sense basic/rear, the front
safety belts are also reversibly tensioned when
needed .
.8. WARNING
Read the general informat ion in~ .& in Gen-
eral information on page 108, ~ .& in Gener-
al information on page 127.
- Certain pre sense functions switch off when
driving in reverse.
1> This is not availabl e in some countr ies.
118
- The pre sense funct ions may not be availa-
ble if there is a malfunction in the ESCsys-
tem or the airbag control module .
- Note that the reversible belt tensioner on
the front passenger's side deactivates when
the front passenger's airbag is deactivated.
- Switch the pre sense off when you are not
using public streets or when load ing the ve-
hicle onto a vehicle carrier, tra in, sh ip or
other type of transportat ion. This can pre-
vent an undesired intervention from the pre
sense system.
Audi pre sense basic
Description
Appli es t o : vehicles wi th Audi pre sense basic
The pre sense basic functions are activated at a
speed of approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) or
higher.
The following functions can be triggered under
certain conditions within the limits of the sys-
tem:
- Tensioning of the safety belts (for examp le,
during heavy braking): the front safety belts
have reversible be lt tensioners . If a collision
does not occur, the safety belts loosen slightly
and are ready to trigger aga in.
- Closing the windows and sunroof*.
-Activating the emergency flashers 1>.
The message Audi pre sen se . ~ page 119,
fig. 115 will warn you abou t the danger.
Audi drive select*: the tr igger times are adjusted
depending on the mode selected .
Audi pre sense front
Description
Appli es to: vehicles wi th Audi adapti ve crui se cont rol
Within the limits of the system, pre sense front
can warn you of impend ing collisions and initiate
the corresponding braking maneuvers or the sup-
porting measures when avoiding a collision. .,.
 Assistance systems

If detected in time, the system can rank the dan-
gerous situation as critical if a vehicle driving
ahead brakes sudden ly, if your own vehicle is ap-
proaching a significantly s lower vehicle at high
speed or when there is an oncoming vehicle dur-
ing a turning maneuver .
If detection is not possible, then pre sense front
does not react.
Warnings
App lies to: vehicles with Audi adaptive cruise contro l
increasing fo rce within the limits of the
system 1l. This reduces the vehicle speed in the
event of a collision. At low vehicle speeds, pre
sense front can initiate a complete deceleration
shortly before a collision with a veh icle driving
ahead l ). If pre sense front determines that you
are not braking strongly enough when a collis ion
is imminent, it can increase the braking force .
The following functions trigger in conjunc t ion
with pre sense basic/rear at corresponding vehi -
cle speeds :

- Reversible tensioning of the front safety belts.

- Closing the windows and sunroof*.
- Inflating the side bolsters* in the seat backrest
and seat surface.

Audi dr ive select*: the reversible belt tensioner,

the closing of the w indows and sunroof* as we ll
as the inflating of the side bolsters* on the seat
backrest and seat surface are not active depend-
ing on the mode selected.
Fig. 115 I nstrument clust er: approach warning
Evasive steering support
General information
Evasive steering support helps you to steer the
The system recognizes various dangerous situa- vehicle around an obstacle in a critical situation.
tions. The early warning occurs if: If you avoid an obstacle afte r the acute warning,
then the evasive steering support assists you by
- a vehicle driving ahead brakes suddenly,
applying slight steering adjustment to correct
- your own vehicle approaches a significantly
your steering wheel angle as long as you are ac-
slower vehicle or stationary vehicle in the direc-
t ively steer ing. Evasive steer ing support is availa-
tion of travel.
ble at speeds between approximately 20 mph
When th is warning occurs, it may only be poss i- (30 km/h) and 90 mph (150 km/h) .
ble to avoid a collision by swerv ing or braking
Turn assist
strong ly. The message Audi pre sense.
¢ fig. 115 and a warning tone will warn you When starting to drive and up to speeds of maxi-
about the danger. mum 6 mph (10 km/h), the turn assist uses a
braking intervention to prevent your vehicle from
If you do not react enough or not at all to a dan-
colliding w ith an oncoming vehicle when turning
ge rous situation that was detected by the sys-
left or right (ava ilab le in certa in countries). The
tem, pre sense front provides assistance by ap-
braking intervention causes your veh icle to stay
plying the brakes.
in its lane . ..,.
If a collis ion is imminent, the system w ill first
provide an acute warning by brak ing sharp ly. You
will also warned by an ind icator in the instrument
u
cluster display¢ fig. 115. If you do not react to
co
......
N
the acute warning, pre sense front can brake with
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E: l) This is not available in some countr ies.
'<t

119
A ss is tan ce sys tem s
& WARNING
- Pre sense front cannot overcome the laws of
physics . It is a system designed to assist and
it cannot prevent a collision in every circum-
stance. The driver must always intervene.
The driver is always responsib le for braking
at the correct time. Do not let the increased
safety provided tempt you into taking risks.
This cou ld increase your risk of a collision.
- The system can deploy incorrectly due to
system-specific limits.
- Please note that the sensors and the camera
do not always detect all objects or lane
markings. This increases the risk of an acci-
dent.
- Pre sense front does not react to people, an -
ima ls or objects that are crossing the vehi-
cle's path or that are diff icu lt to detect~ .&
in General information on page 108.
- Reflective objects suc h as guard rails or the
entrance to a tunnel, heavy rain and ice can
affect the function of the radar sensors and
the system's ability to detect a collis ion risk.
0 Note
The sensors can be displaced by impacts or
damage to the bumper, whee l housing and
underbody. Pre sense front can be impa ired
by this. Have an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility check their func-
tion.
@ Tips
- You can cancel the braking with increasing
fo rce that is init iated by the system by brak-
ing yourself, by accelerat ing noticeably or
by swerving.
- Keep in mind that pre sense front can brake
unexpectedly. Always sec ure any cargo or
objects t hat you a re t ransport ing to reduce
the risk of damage or injury.
- Specific pre sense front functions switch off
whe n the ESC is restricted o r switched off
~ page 149 or the hill hold assist is switch-
ed on ~page 150.
1> This is not available in some countries.
120
Audi pre sense rear
'
Description
Appli es t o: vehicles wi th Audi side assist
If the risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead is de-
tected, the fo llow ing funct ions can be trigge red:
- Reversible tens ioning of the front safety belts
at the corresponding speeds .
- Closing the windows and sunroof* .
- Inflating the side bolsters* in the seat backrest
and seat surface.
-Activat ing the emergency flashers with in-
creased frequency ll.
The message Audi pre sen se . ~ page 119,
fig . 115 will warn you about the danger.
Audi drive select* : the function is not act ive de -
pending on the mode selected .
& WARNING
- To reduce the risk of an accident, please
note that the s ide assist* radar sensors do
not a lways detect every object.
- Pre sense rear does not react to people, ani-
mals or objects that are crossing the vehi-
cle's path or that are d ifficult to detect.
- Reflective objects such as guard ra ils, heavy
rain and ice can impair the function of the
radar sensors and the ability to detect a col-
lision risk.
(D Note
The radar sensors can be displaced by impacts
or damage to the bumper, wheel housing and
underbody. Pre sense rear can be impa ired by
this. Have a n author ized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility check their func-
tion.
(D Tips
- The pre sense rear functions switch off
when tow ing a tra iler .
- The pre sense rear functions may also
switch off if there is a ma lfunction in the
side assist* system.

Audi pre sense city
Description
Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense city
With in the limits of the system, pre sense city
can warn you of impending coll isions w ith
vehicles and pedestrians and initiate the applica-
ble braking maneuver if needed. Pre sense city is
active at speeds of approximately 6 mph (10 km/
h) and higher.
A pedestrian warning can occur at speeds up to
50 mph (85 km/h), and vehicle warnings can oc-
cur at speeds up to 155 mph (250 km/h). A pre
sense city braking maneuver is possible at speeds
up to SO mph (85 km/h).
Warnings
Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense city
The system recognizes various dangerous situa-
tions . The early warning occurs if:
- a vehicle driving ahead brakes suddenly,
- your own vehicle approaches a significantly
slower vehicle or stationary vehicle in the direc-
tion of travel.
- a pedestrian is standing in the lane or is moving
into the lane.
When this warning occurs, it may only be possi-
ble to avoid a collision by swerving or braking
strong ly. The message Audi pre sense.
¢ page 119, fig. 115 and a warning tone will
warn you about the danger .
Additionally, a jerk on the brakes may occur as an
acute warning when there is an impending colli-
sion. If you do not react to the acute warning, pre
sense city can brake to the point of complete de-
celeration within the limits of the system. This
reduces the vehicle speed in the event of a colli-
sion. The message Audi pre sense. a lso ap-
pea rs .
The following functions are triggered in conjunc-
tion with pre sense basic/rear:
u
co - Revers ible tensioning of the front safety belts .
......
N
r-... - Closing the windows and sunroof*.
N
......
0 - Inflating the side bolste rs* in the seat backrest
0 sense city can be impaired by this. Have an
:E: and seat surface.
'<t
Assistance systems
Audi drive select*: the function is not active de-
pending on the mode selected .
A
- WARNING
- Pre sense city cannot overcome the laws of
physics. It is a system designed to assist and
it cannot prevent a collision in every circum-
stance . The dr iver must always intervene.
The driver is always responsible for braking
at the correct time. Do not let the increased
safety provided tempt you into taking risks.
This could increase your risk of a coll is ion.
- The system can dep loy incorrectly due to
system-specific limits.
- To reduce the risk of an accident, please
note that the camera does not always detect
eve ry object.
- Pre sense city does not rea ct to animals,
crossing or oncoming veh icles, objects such
as bars, ra ilings or railcars, and objects that
are difficult to detect¢ .&. in General infor-
mation on page 108.
- In trailer mode, the braking behavior of the
trai ler can be d ifferent than usual during au-
tomatic braking.
A_ WARNING
Pre sense city may be restricted or not availa-
ble in the following example situations:
- in heavy fog, rain, spray or snow
- when there are visua l obst ruct ions, such as
g la re, reflections or variations in light
- when it is dark
- if the camera window or the windshield is
dirty, iced over, damaged or covered
- when dr iving on snow, ice or loose ground
- in curves
- if the ESCwas restricted or switched off
- when towing a trailer
- when the driver's seat belt is unfastened
- up to ten seconds after switching on the ig-
nition
(D Note
Impacts or damage to the camera mount on
the winds hie ld can displace the sensor. Pre
121
Assistance systems
author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Serv ice Facility chec k their function.
@ Tips
- You can can cel t he syst em braking int erven-
tion if yo u accelerate considerably or swerve
away.
- Kee p in mind t hat pre sense city ca n brake
unexpected ly. Always sec ure any cargo or
objects t hat you a re t ransport ing to reduce
the risk of damage or injury.
- Specific pre sense city funct ions sw itch off
when the ESC is limited or switc hed off
c> page 149 or the hill descent assist is
switc hed on c>page 150.
- When there is a mal func t ion in the camera,
the pre sense city funct ions also switch off.
Settings in the
Infotainment system
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
" Select in the Infot ainm ent sys t em: IMENU I but -
t on > Vehicle > left contro l bu tt on > Driver as-
sistance > Audi pre sense.
Turn on/off Audi pre sense - the pre sense fu nc-
tions ca n be t ur ned on and off.
If the system is switched off, it switches on aga in
automatically once the ignition is sw itched on
again .
Early warning - the early warn ing can be sw itch-
ed off o r the pre sense city/front warning point
can be set (Early/ Medium / late ).
Set the warnin g time fo r the early warn ing to
Early at first. If th is causes undesired ea rly warn-
ings to appear, then set the wa rning time to Me-
dium . The late warning t ime sho uld on ly be set
in specia l circumstances, for example, whe n driv-
ing with a very dynam ic sty le.
@ Tips
Your sett ings a re automat ically stored and as-
signed to the remote control key be ing used .
122
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with Audi pre sense
[IIAudi pre sense: malfunction! Please contact
Service
This mess age a ppears w hen the pre sense func-
t ion is affec t ed. For exa mple, th is could be
caused by a faul ty se nsor. Drive to an a uthori zed
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility im-
med iate ly to have the ma lfunction corrected.
II Audi pre sense currently restricted. Restrict-
ed sensor vision due to surroundings. See own-
er's manual
This mess age a ppears if the ra da r se nso r a nd
ca mera view is obs t ruc t ed, for exa mple by leaves,
snow , heavy spray or dirt . If necessary, clean t he
senso rs and t he area around the camera
c>page 107, fig . 101 or c>page 127 , fig. 122 .
(ii Audi pre sense: currently restricted . Towing
mode
For vehicles with a t ra ile r hitch installed at t he
facto ry, the pre se nse rear func t ions switch off
whe n t he ele ct rical connec t or at t he socket is
plugged in. The re is no guaran t ee t he f unctions
will switc h off when using a ret rofitted trailer
hitch.
II Audi pre sense: currently restricted
This message ap pears if the ESC is rest ricted or
switch ed off, fo r example.
II Audi pre sense: currently restricted. See
owner's manual
This message appears w hen the re is a temporary
failure in a subsystem, such as the ESC. If t his
message appears repeatedly, d rive to an auth or-
ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service Facili-
ty t o have t he ma lfu nction corrected .
II]Audi pre sense: emergency braking system
off
This message appears if the pre sense functions
are switched off through the Infotai nment sys-
tem or if the system is not ready.
 A ss ista nc e sys t e m s

Audi active lane assist
Description
Applies to: vehicles wit h Audi act ive lane ass ist
Active lane ass ist (lane departure warning) de-
tects lane marker lines within the limits of the
system using a camera in the w indshield . If you
are approaching a detected lane marker line and
it appears likely that you will leave the lane, the
system wi ll warn you with corrective steering .
You can override this steering at any time . If you
pass over a line, the steering wheel will vibrate
lightly . In order for this warning vibration to oc-
cur, it must f irst be sw itched on in the Infotain-
ment system. Active lane assist is ready for oper-
ation when the lane marker line is detected on at
least one side of the vehicle.
The system is designed for driv ing on express-
ways and highways and therefore only activates
at speeds above approximately 40 mph (65 km/
h).
Applies to: vehicles with side assist: if you acti-
vate a turn signal when active lane assist is ready
and it classifies a lane change as critical because
of vehicles traveling alongside you or approach -
ing you, there w ill be not iceable cor rect ive steer-
ing short ly before you leave the lane . This will at-
tempt to keep your vehicle in the lane .
Applies to: vehicles without side assist: the ready
system does not warn yo u if you activate a tu rn
signal befo re crossing the lane marker line. In
this case, it assumes that you are changing lanes
intentiona lly.
Applies to: vehicles with adaptive cruise control:
there is no corrective steering or warnings if the
system recogn izes a distinct passing maneuver.
If the conditions are met, traffic jam assist
switches on at speeds under approximately
40 mph (65 km/h) ¢ page 114.
- The system can assist the driver in keeping
the vehicle in the lane, but it does not drive
by itself. Always keep your hands on the
steer ing wheel.
- Corrective steering may not occur in certain
situations, such as during heavy braking.
- There may be cases where the camera does
not recognize all lane marker lines. Correc-
tive steering can only take place on the s ide
of the vehicle where lane marker lines are
detected .
- Other road structures or objects could poss i-
bly be identified unintentionally as lane
marker lines. As a result, corrective steering
may be unexpected or may not occur.
- The camera view can be restricted, for ex-
ample by vehicles driving ahead or by ra in,
snow, heavy spray or light shining into the
camera. Th is can result in active lane ass ist
not detecting the lane marker lines or de -
tecting them incorrectly.
- In certain situations where visibility is low,
the vehicle may switch from an "early" to
"late" steering correction .
- Under certain conditions such as ruts in the
road, an inclined roadway or crosswinds, the
corrective steer ing alone may not be enough
to keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane.
- For safety reasons, active lane assist must
not be used when there are poor road and/
or weather conditions such as slippery
roads, fog, gravel, heavy rain, snow and the
potential for hydroplaning. Using active lane
assist under these condit ions may increase
the risk of a crash.

A WARNING
- The system warns the driver that the veh icle
u
is leav ing the lane using corrective steer ing.
co
...... The driver is always responsib le for keep ing
N
r-...
N the vehicle within the lane.
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

123
A ss is tance s y s tems

Switching on/ off If the system is switched on but is not ready to

Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist provide warnings, one of the following could be
the cause:

- There is no lane marker line.

Fig. 11 6 Turn signal lever: button for act ive lane assist
- The relevant lane marker lines a re not detected
(for examp le, ma rkings in a construction zone
or because they are obstructed by snow, dirt,
wate r or lighting).
- The vehi cle speed is below the activation speed
of approximately 40 mph (65 km/h).
- The lane is too nar row or too wide.
- The curve is too narrow.
- The driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel.

(0 Tips
- Make sure the camera window¢ fig. 117 is
not covered by stickers or other objects. For
information on cleaning, see~ page 354.
- In certa in markets: if the system is switched
on, it will switch on automatically each time
Fig. 11 7 W indshield: camera window fo r acti ve lane assist t he ignition is sw itched on.

• Press the button to switch the system on and Display in the instrument cluster
fig . 116 . The indicator light in the instru-
off <=:> Appli es to: vehicles wit h Aud i acti ve lane assist
ment cluster turns on or off .

Analog instru- Audi virtual Meaning on

ment cluster cockpit/head- the corre-
up display• sponding side
Gree n line(s) Green line(s) Active lane as-
(left/r ight) (left/right) sist is act ivat-
J \ J \ ed and ready
to provide
warnings .
Fig. 1 18 Instrument cluste r: active l ane assist is switched
- Red line Active lane as- on and ready to provide warnings
(left/ right) sist warns you
., \ before leaving You can open up the Driver assist ance disp lay for
a lane. In addi- the active lane assist using the multifunct ion
tion, the steer- steering wheel buttons ¢ page 12.
ing wheel vi-
An addi t ional indicator appears in t he head -up
brates lightly.
display *.
Yellow line(s) Gray line(s) Active lane as-
(left/r ig ht ) (left/right) sist is act ivat -
J \ ed, but is not
ready to give
warning

124
 Assistance s ystems

Driver assistance Meaning on the corre- rl1Audi active lane assist: Please take over
display in the in- sponding side steering!
strument cluster This message ap pears if you are not st eer ing by
Green line(s) Active lane assist is acti- yourself. Active lane assist is activat ed, but is not
(left or right) vated and ready to pro- ready to give warning
vide warnings .
Red line Active lane assist warns A WARNING
-
(left or right) you before leaving a lane . Note that messages may be de layed or not
In addition, the steering displayed on vehicles with accesso ries mount-
whee l vibrates lightly. ed on the stee ring wheel, such as a steer ing
Gray line(s) Act ive lane ass ist is acti- whee l spinne r knob. Always keep your hands
(left or right) vate d, but is not ready t o on the stee ring wheel.
give warning
Adjusting the steering time and vibration
Messages in the instrument cluster display
warning
If t he act ive lane assist switches off aut omat ical- Applies to: vehicles with Audi active lane assist
ly, the indicator light in the display turns off and
You can adjust individual active lane assist set -
one of the following messages appea rs:
tings in the Infotainment system .
rl1Audi active lane assist: malfunction! See
.,.Select in the Infotainment system: IM ENU ! but-
owner's manual
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
Drive to an autho rized Audi dea ler or authorized sistance > Audi active lane assist.
Audi Service Facility immediately to have t he
malfuncti on correcte d. Steering time
Early: in this setting, the corrective stee ring hap-
rl1Audi active lane assist: currently unavaila-
ble. Camera view restricted due to surround-
pens contin uously to help keep t he vehicle in the
ings. See owner's manual
center of the lane.
Late: in this setting, the system provides correc-
This message appea rs if the camera is unable to
detect t he lines. This could happen if: t ive steer ing just before a wheel goes over a de-
tected lane marker line.
-The came ra field of view c>page 124, fig. 117 is
dirty or covered in ice. Clean this area on t he Vibration warning
windshield c>page 354 . You can switch t he additiona l vibrat ion warn ing
- The came ra field of view is fogged over. Wait in the st eer ing whee l on or off.
unt il the fog has cleared before switching the
active lane assist on agai n. A WARNING
- The system has been unable to detect the lanes With the vibrat ion warning switched off,
for an extended period of time due to road con- the re will also be no visual warning in t he in-
ditions. Switch act ive lane assist back on when str ument cluster disp lay when cross ing a lane
t he lines are more visible. mar ker line.
rl1Audi active lane assist: currently unavaila-
ble. See owner's manual (I} Tips

There is a tempora ry malfunction that may pre - In certain ma rkets : your sett ings are stored
u automat ically and assigne d to the remote
~ vent the active lane assist from switching on. Try
N
~ switch ing the active lane assist on again later . control key in use.
....
0
0
:E:
'<t

125
Assistance systems

Audi side assist Warning stage

If the display in a mirror blinks brightly when you
Description
activate a turn signal, side assist is warning you
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
about detected vehicles that it has classified as
0 critical. If this happens, check traffic by glancing
9
in the exterior mirrors and over your shoulder
! c>.&.in General information on page 127.

Applies to: vehicles with active lane assist: the

display in the mirror can also blink if you have not
activated a turn signal: if you are approaching a
detected lane marker line and it appears you will
be leaving the lane, side assist will warn you
about detected vehicles that it has class ified as
Fig. 119 Sensor detectfo n range
critical.

(D Tips
You can adjust the br ightness on of the d is-
play on the rearview mirror c>page 128.

Fig. 120 Display on t he exterior mirro r

Side assist (lane change assist) helps you monitor

your blind spot and traffic behind your vehicle.
W ith in the limits of the system, it warns you
about vehicles that are coming close r or that are
traveling with you w ithi n sensor range (!)
c>fig. 119 . If a lane change is classified as criti-
cal, the disp lay @ in the exterior mirror turns on
c>fig. 120.

The display in the left exter ior mirror provides as-

sistance when making a lan e change to the left,
while the disp lay in the right exterior mirror pro-
vides assistance when making a lane change to
the right .

Information stage
As long as you do not activate the turn signal,
side assist informs you about ve hicles that are
detected and classified as critica l. The disp lay in
the mirror turns on, but is dim .

The display remains dim in the information stage

so that your view toward the front is not distur -
bed.

126
 Assistance systems

General information are ind icated by the time they ente r your "blind
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist spot", at the latest.

© Vehicles you are passing

® If you s low ly pass a vehi cle that side assist has
det ected (the difference in speed between the
vehicle and you r vehicle is less than approximate-
ly 9 mph (15 km/h)), the disp lay in the exterior
mirror turns on as soon as the vehicle enters your
blind spot.
@
The display w ill not turn on if you quickly pass a
vehicle that side assist has detected (the differ-
ence in speed is greater than approximate ly 9
mph (15 km/h)) .

Functional limitations
©
The radar sensors are designed to detect the left
and right adjacent lanes when the road lanes are
the normal width . In some situations, the display
in the exterior mirror may turn on even though
there is no veh icle located in the area that is criti-
Fig. 121 Driving s ituatio ns cal for a lane change. For example :
N
0 - If the lanes are narrow or if your are driving on
0
:i; the edge of your lane. If this is the case, the
"
al system may have detected a vehicle in another
lane that is not adjacent to your current lane .
- If you are driving through a curve . Side assist
AUDI may react to a vehicle that is in the same lane
or one lane over from the adjacent lane .
- If side assist reacts to other objects (such as
roadside structures like guard rails).
Fig. 122 Rear of the vehicle: position of the senso rs - In poor weather conditions. The side assist
functions are limited.
Side assist functions at speeds above app roxi-
Do not cover the radar sensors c:>fig. 122 wit h
mately 9 mph (15 km/h) .
stickers, deposits, bicycle wheels or other ob-
@ Vehicles that are approaching jects, because th is will impair the function . Do
not use s ide assist when towing a trai ler. For in-
In certain cases, a vehicle will be classified as
formation on cleaning, see c:>page 354.
critical for a lane change even if it is still some-
what far away. The faste r a veh icle approaches,
t he sooner the display in the exterio r mirror w ill
A
- WARNING
-
turn on. - Always pay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle . Side assist cannot
@ Vehicles traveling with you replace a driver's attention. The driver alone
u
(0 Veh icles traveli ng with you are ind icated in the is always responsible for lane changes and
......
N
exte rior mi rror if they are classified as critical for similar driving maneuvers . IJI,
r--.
N
...... a lane change. All vehicles detected by side assist
0
0
:E
<t

127
A ss is tan ce sys tem s
- In some situations, the system may not
function or its funct ion may be limited. For
example:
- If vehicles are approach ing or being left
behind very quickly. The display may not
turn on in time.
- In poor weather conditions such as heavy
rain, snow or heavy mist.
- On very wide lanes, in tight curves, or if
there is a rise in the road su rface. Vehicles
in t he adjacent lane may not be detec ted
because they are outside of the sensor
range.
@ Note
The sensors can be displaced by impacts o r
damage to t he bumper, whee l housing and
underbody. This can impair the system . Have
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility check their function.
(D Tips
- If the window g lass in the driver's doo r or
front passenger's door has been tinted, the
display in the exterior mirror may be incor-
rect.
- For an explanation on conformity with the
FCCregulations in the United States and the
Industry Canada regulations, see
c::>
page384.
Switching on/off
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
The system can be switched on/off in the Info-
tainment system.
If the system is activated, the displays in the ex-
ter ior mirrors will turn on briefly when the ign i-
tion is sw itched on .
.,.Se lect in the Infotainment system: IMENU I but -
ton > Vehicle > left contro l button > Driver as-
sistance > Audi side assist . Off switches the
system off.
128
(D Tips
When you switch side assist on or off, the exit
warning system activates or deact ivates
c::>
page 129.
Setting the display brightness
Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
The display brightness con be adjusted in the In-
fotainment system.
.,.Select in the Infotainment system : IMENU ! but -
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
sistance > Audi side assist.
The display br ightness adjusts au t omatically to
the brightness of the surroundings, both in the
information and in the warni ng stage. In very
dark or very bright surroundings, the automatic
adjustment will set the display to the minimum
or max imum level. In such cases, you may notice
no change when adj usting the br ightness, or the
change may only be noticeab le once the sur-
roundi ngs change.
Adjust the br ightness to a level where the display
in the information stage will not disrupt your
view ahead. If you change the br ightness, the dis-
play in the exterior mirror w ill briefly show the
br ightness leve l in t he info rmation stage . The
brightness of the warning st age is linked to t he
brightness in the information stage and is adjust -
ed a long with the information stage .
(D Tips
- Side ass ist is not active while you are mak-
ing t he adjustment.
- Your setti ngs are a utomat ica lly stored and
assigned to the remote control key being
used .
 Assistance systems

Exit warning ways responsible for opening the doors and

Applies to: vehicles with Audi side assist exiting the vehicle.
- The exit warning system can be available for
up to approximately three minutes after un-
locking the vehicle and opening the door as
well as after switching off the ignition . Then
the system switches off with a brief flashing
of the displays.
- The exit warning system cannot notify you
of every approaching object or person, such
as joggers or pedestrians .

Fig. 123 Example display

A WARNING
-
The exit warning system is subject to limita-
tions and cannot warn you before every im-
pending collision:
- If the vehicle is too wide for the parking
space and covered by the neighboring
vehicles.
- Approaching objects or people such as cy-
clists or skateboarders may not be detected
under certain circumstances.
Fig. 124 Door: warn ing str ip
- The system does not react to stationary ob-
jects.
When the veh icle is stationary, the exit warning
system warns the passengers of a possible colli- - The view of the radar sensors may be im-
sion when opening the door . Within the limits of paired by leaves, snow, heavy spray or dirt .
the system, the system monitors the areas be- Clean the area in front of the sensors
hind and next to the vehicle using the radar sen-
c:opage 127, fig. 122.
sors ~ page 127, fig. 122 . Moving objects that
are approaching from behind, such as cars, are (D Note
detected ~ fig. 123. Also read the information in r:o
© in General
information on page 128 .
When you open the door, the warning strip on
the affected door blinks ¢ fig. 124 if another
road user is detected and the situation is classi-
(D Tips

f ied as critical. The display in t he exterior mirror - The exit warning system is switched on and
on the affected s ide flashes at the same time . If off through the side assist~ page 128.
the door is a lready open and another road user is - The display brightness for the exit warning
detected and the s ituation is classified as critical, system cannot be adjusted.
then the corresponding displays turn on . - The system is not available when towing a
trailer.
A WARNING
-A lways pay attention to traffic and to the
area around your vehicle. The exit warning
u system does not replace the attention of the
(0
......
N
r--.
passengers. The vehicle passengers are al-
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

129
Assistance systems
Rear cross-traffic assist
Applies to: vehicles with rear cross-traff ic ass ist
Fig. 125 Example display
Fig. 126 Infotainment system: rear cross-traffic assist dis-
play
The rear cross-traffic assist can warn the driver of
a potential collision with approaching cross-traf-
fic when driving in reverse. Within its limits, the
system monitors the areas behind and next to
the vehicle using the radar sensors when leaving
a parking space r::!.>page127, fig. 122. Moving ob-
jects that are approaching, such as cars, are de-
tected r::!.>fig.125.
If the system detects critical cross traffic when
backing out of a parking space, it will react as fol-
lows:
- Visual indicator: an indicator appears in the In-
fotainment system display with a red arrow
symbol. The arrow points in the direction from
which the object is approaching r::!.>
fig. 126.
- Audible warning signal : a continuous tone may
sound as an additional indicator when driving in
reverse.
- Automatic brake activation : a brief activation
of the brakes may also warn you of a potential
collision with an approaching object.
130
Requirements for using the rear cross-traffic
assist:
- The parking aid must be switched on
c>page 138 .
- Reverse gear must be engaged.
- The speed must not be higher than approxi-
mately 9 mph (15 km/h).
A WARNING
- The rear cross-traffic assist is an assist sys-
tem and cannot prevent a collision by itself.
The driver must always intervene. The driver
is always responsible for braking at the cor-
rect time.
- Please note that the rear cross-traffic assist
may activate the brakes unexpectedly . Se-
cure any cargo that you are transporting to
reduce the risk of damage or injury.
- An additional brake activation may be trig-
gered within 20 seconds after an automatic
brake activation.
- If there is an acoustic warning signal from
the rear cross-traffic assist, then the park-
ing system may not warn you of detected
obstacles under certain circumstances.
- The view of the radar sensors may be im-
paired by leaves, snow, heavy spray or dirt.
Clean the area in front of the sensors
r::!.>page127, fig. 122.
A WARNING
The rear cross-traffic assist is subject to limi-
tations and cannot warn you before every im-
pending collision:
- If the vehicle is too wide for the parking
space and covered by the neighboring
vehicles.
- People, such as cyclists, joggers, in line skat-
ers and pedestrians, may not be detected
under certain circumstances.
- If you are in a parallel parking space or diag-
onal parking space.
(D Note
Also read the information in r::!.>
0 in General
information on page 128.

@ Tips
- You can cancel the automatic brake activa-
tion w ith increasing bra king fo rce if you ap-
ply the brakes yourse lf or accelerate consid-
erab ly.
- In some situations, rear cross-traffic assist
may warn yo u even if there is no cross traffic
in a critical area, for examp le w hen backing
into a parki ng space or ma neuvering .
- The rear cross-traffic assist also switches off
whe n you switch off the ESC.
- The rear cross traffic assist switches on and
off thro ugh the parking aid qpag e 138.
- The system is not available when towin g a
trailer.
Messages
Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi side assist
A message appears in t he inst rument cluste r dis -
play if t he side assist swit ches off autom at ically .
@jAudi side assist: malfunction! Please contact
Service
@jAudi side assist and exit warning : malfunc-
tion! Please contact Service
The system cannot guarant ee th at it w ill detec t
vehicl es correctly and it has switched off. The
sensors have been moved or are faulty . Have t he
system checked by an authorized Audi dealer or
author ized Audi Service Facility soon.
@jAudi side assist: currently unavailable. Sen-
sor vision restricted due to surroundings . See
owner 's manual
@jAudi side assist and exit warning : currently
unavailable. Sensor vision restricted due to sur-
roundings
The radar sensor vision is im paired. The area in
fr ont of th e sensors must not be covered by bike
racks, st ickers, leaves, snow or any other objects.
Clean the area in front of the sensors, if necessa-
ry ¢ page 127, fig. 122.
~ @jAudi side assist: currently unavailable. See
......
~ owner 's manual
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Assistance s ystems
@jAudi side assist and exit warning: currently
unavailable. See owner's manual
Side assist cannot be sw it ched on at t his t ime be-
cause t here is a malfu nct ion (f or example, t he
batte ry charge level may be to o low) .
@jAudi side assist: unavailable in towing mode
@jAudi side assist and exit warning: currently
unavailable. Towing mode
Side assist switches off automatically when the
electrical connecto r in t he factory-installed trail-
er hitch is connected . There is no guarantee the
system will switch off w hen using a ret rofi tted
t rail er hitch . Do not use side assist and t he exit
warni ng w hen tow ing a tra iler.
[II Rear parking aid : obstacle detection restrict-
ed
The rear cross-traffic assist is not available. Ei-
t her the ESCis switched off, or the radar sensors
may be covered by a bike rack, stic kers, leaves,
snow or other objects . Swit ch the ESCon, or
clean the area in fron t of t he sensors if necessary
~ page 12 7, fig. 122. If thi s message cont inues
to be displayed, dr ive im me diat ely to an author-
ized Audi dealer or aut hor ized Audi Service Facili-
ty t o have the ma lf unction repaired.
Night vision assist
Description
Appli es to : vehicles wit h night vision assist
The night vision assist can detect, highlight and,
if necessary, warn about pedestrians and large
wild animals .
Night vision assist helps you when it is dark by
using an infra red camera to monit or the area in
front of your vehicle, w ith in the limits of the sys-
tem . It can display object s up t o a dist ance of ap-
prox imat ely 1000 feet (300 m) . The thermal im-
age dete cted by t he came ra is show n in t he in-
stru me nt cluste r di splay. Warm areas appear
lig ht er and cold areas appear dar ker.
131
A ss is tance s y s tems
Highlighting detected pedestrians and wild
animals
Applies to: vehicles with night vision ass ist
Fig. 127 Instrument cluster: yellow highl ighted pedes -
trians
Fig. 128 Instrument cluster: symbol when the infrared im-
age is not visible
W ith in the limits of the system, the night vision
assist can detect pedes t ria ns and wild an imals
that are between approximately 32 feet (10 m)
and 295 feet (90 m) in front of the vehicle and
within the detection zone. Within the lim its of
the system r:::;,page 133, a pedestrian or wild ani-
mal detected when the low beams are switched
on is highlighted in yellow i=> fig. 127. Animal rec-
ognition is not act ive within highly developed
areas . The system only detects large wild animals
such as deer .
@ Tips
If another display (such as navigation) repla-
ces the image from the night vision ass ist, the
fig. 128 . You can
symbol appears in a tab ~ i\. r:::;,
access night vision assist using the multifunc-
tion steering wheel buttons r:::;, page 12.
132
Pedestrian and wild animal warning
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
Fig. 12 9 Instrument clus te r: @ pedest rian warning, @
wild anim al warn ing
Fig. 130 Instr um ent clus ter: @ pedest rian warning/ @
wild animal warning, when the night vision ass ist image is
not se lected in the instru ment cluste r display
Image in the instrument cluster / head-up
display*
If there are pedes t rians or w ild an imals in an
area in front of your vehicle that is classified as
critical, the system will direct your attention to
th is:
- Pedestrians or wild anima ls are highlighted in
red in the instrument cluster and the corre-
sponding symbol . or . turns on r:::;, fig . 129 .
- There is also an audible signal.
The area classified as critical is based on the veh i-
cle speed and the steeri ng wheel angle . Pedes-
trian and wild animal warning enco urages you to
pay more attention.
If the night vision assist image is rep laced by an-
othe r d isplay (such as the on-board compute r),
the red . or . indicator light r:::;,fig. 130 will
appear if there is a pedestrian or wild anima l
warning.

If the head-up display* is switched on and the
night vision assist content is activated,. or.
will appear in the head-up display*.
Marking light*
To direct the driver's attention to a pedestrian,
the headlights can flash on the pedestrian three
times in a row when there is a pedestrian warn -
ing.
This occurs at speeds above approximately
35 mph (60 km/h) if you are outside of illum inat-
ed areas and no detected vehicles are shown. The
high beam assistant* controls the marking
light* c:>page 49 .
The marking light is not used for wild animals.
General information
Applies t o: vehicles with nigh t visio n assist
Fig. 131 Front of the vehicle: night vision assist camera
The following situations may affect the function
of the night vision assist system:
- Poor visibility such as snow, ra in, fog or heavy
spray
- Dirty lens on the night vision assist camera
Make sure the night vision camera c::>fig. 131 is
not covered by stickers, deposits or any other ob-
structions because this can impair the night vi-
sion assist function . For informati on on cleaning,
page 354 .
see c::>
The pedestrian and wild animal recognit ion de-
pends on the temperature difference between
the person/wild an ima l and the background . Pea -
~
,..... ple/wild animals may not be detected if the dif-
~ ference is too small. The pedestrian/wild animal
N
8 marking and the marking light* deactivate at
0
:E
<t
Assistance systems
temperatures above approximately 77 °F (25 °C)
and during daylight. If the night vision assist im-
age is selected in the instrument cluster display,
then the II symbol appears at the top on the
right side .
A
- WARNING
-
Pay attention to traffic and the area around
your vehicle when night vision assist is switch-
ed on. The driver is always responsible for as-
sessing the traffic situation.
- Night vision assist can only warn about peo-
ple and wild animals located within the visu-
al range of the infrared camera. The visual
range corresponds to the image in the in-
strument cluster display.
- Night vision assist may not detect people or
wild animals and mark them if
- they are not in an upright position, for ex-
ample if they are sitting or lying down
and/or
- the silhouette in the display appears in-
complete or interrupted, for example be-
cause the person is partially covered by a
parked vehicle or an animal is covered by
tall grass. This could increase the risk of
an accident.
- Never try to swerve around animals if doing
so will endanger you or other road users, be-
cause this increases the risk of an accident.
(I) Tips
- Even though the system evaluates the
shape and heat given off by all detected ob-
jects, there are limits to the system . There
may be false warnings.
- For technical reasons, the image pauses in
split second intervals.
133
A ss is tance s y s tems
Switching on/off
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
Fig. 1 32 Area around th e l ight switch: night vision assist
butto n
Requirement: sw itch the ignition on and turn the
light switch to the AUTO position.
• Press the [g button 9 fig. 132 . The heat image
from the nig ht vision camera appears in the in-
str ume nt cluster d isplay.
• Press the (g button again to switch the night
vision assist off .
If cond it io ns are bright enough, night vision as-
sis t can be sw itched on withou t mov ing the light
switch to the AUTO position. Pedestrian and wild
an imal highlighting and warnings are only active
when it is da rk outs ide and the headlights are
sw itched on .
Adjusting the contrast
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
• Select in the Infotainment system: IM E NU I but-
ton > Vehicle > left control button > Driver as-
sistance > Nig ht vision assist contra st .
When the night vision assist is switched on and
the image is visible in the instrument cluster d is-
p lay, you can adjust the contrast in the image
from Min to Max .
Messages
Applies to: vehicles with night vision assist
• Night vision assist: malfunction! Please con·
tact Service
The system cannot guarantee correct function
and is switched off. See a n author ized Audi deal-
134
er or authorized Audi Service Facility for assis-
tance .
• Night vision assist : currently unavailable .
See owner's manual
The system cannot guarantee correct funct ion at
this time and is switched off .
• Night vision assist: currently unavail able.
Please turn on lights
Night vision assist only works when it is dark out-
side and the headlights are on.
• Night vision assist: pedestr ian highlighting
current ly unavailable . See owner's manual
The pedestr ian and wild animal marki ng was
switched off by the system.
Audi drive select
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
Drive select makes it possib le to exper ience dif-
ferent types of vehicle sett ings in one veh icle .
You can select the d riving modes Offroad * or
Lift / Offroad *, Allroad* , Comfort , Auto and Dy·
namic in the Infotainment system, for example
to switch from a sporty to a comfo rtable driving
mode. In the Individual mode, the sett ings can
be adjusted to your personal preferences. This
makes it possible to combine sett ings such as a
sporty engine setting with light steer ing .
Description
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
The following systems, among other th ings, are
influenced by dr ive select:
Eng ine and aut omatic tr a nsmi ssion
Depend ing on the mode, the engine and auto-
ma t ic tr a nsmission respond more quickly or in a
more balanced manner to accelerator pedal
movements . In the sporty Dynam ic mode, the
transm iss ion shifts at higher speed ranges.
 Assistance systems

Air suspension* responds to the driving behavior of the vehicle

The air suspension* is an electronically-control- ahead in a more conservative or sporty manner.
led air suspens ion and damping syst em . The ad- Engine sound*
justment depends on the driving mode selected,
steer ing movements, the driver's braking and ac- The eng ine sound adapts to the current mode
celeration, and as the road surface, vehicle speed and can be subtle to sporty .
and load. The vehicle ground clearance depends
on the mode selected and the speed .
(D Note
Applies to: vehicles with air suspensio n
The ground clearance increases s ignificantly
- Make sure there is enough clearance above
when the vehicle is in the Allroad mode . At
and below the vehicle when parking. The
speeds from approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) to
height of the vehicle (gro un d clearance) can
75 mph (120 km/h), the ground clearance re-
change once it is parked due to temperature
duces in stages. When the speed decreases, the
fluctuations, changes to the load conditions
ground clearance increases again automat ically .
and changes to the dr iving modes.
The ground clearance is the lowest in Dynamic
- When transporting the vehicle on a car car-
mode.
rier, train, ship or by other means, only tie
Steering the vehicle down at the running surface of
the tires, which is the outer circumference.
The power steering adapts. Ind irect steer ing that
Securing the vehicle at the axle compo-
moves easily as in Comfort mode is especially
nents, suspension struts or towing eyes is
suited to long drives on highways. The Dynamic
not permitted because the pressure in the
mode provides sporty, direct steering.
air suspens ion struts can change during
All-wheel steering* transport. The vehicle may not be secured
sufficiently if this happens.
All-wheel steer ing increases driving comfort by
providing addit ional steering ability at the rear
@ Tips
axle . Steer ing in the opposite d irection at low
speeds decreases the turning rad ius. Steering in The S selecto r lever position automatically en-
gages when the Dynamic mode is selected .
the same d irect io n at high speeds improves the
response time while increas ing driving stability at
the same time . Selecting the driving mode
Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select
Sport differential*
As a component of the all wheel drive system ~
~- --- - - - -
(quattro) ~ page 152, the sport diffe rential dis-
tributes t he dr iving power to the rear axle de-
pending on the situation. The distribution of
power varies depending on the selected mode
from moderate (Comfort ) to sporty (Dynamic ).
The goal is a high level of agility and ability to ac-
celerate on curves . The vehicle is very responsive
to steering.
Fig. 133 Center console: cont rols for drive select
Adaptive cruise control (ACC)*
.,. Press the left or right arrow key~ fig . 133 until
u The behavior when accelerating can be adjusted
(0
...... the desired mode appears in the instr ument
N from comfortab le to sporty, depending on the
r--.
N
cluste r/Infotainment system disp lay. Or II>-
......
0
drive select mode. Adaptive cruise control also
0
:E
<t

135
Assistance systems

"' Select in the Infot ainment sys t em: I MENU I but - Allroad * - on ly for air suspension *: the vehicle
ton > Vehicle > Audi drive select. lifts to maintain highe r g round clearance for d if-
"' Se lect and confirm the desired setting . ficult st retc hes of roa d.

You can cha nge t he d riving mode when t he vehi -
cle is stat ionary or whi le d riving. If traffic per-
mits, after changing modes, briefly take you r
foot off the accele rator peda l so that the recent ly
selected mode is a lso activated for the eng ine.
Offroad * or Lift/ Offroad* - activates offroad
functions to support dr iving o n roug h terra in.
The engine, transmission and steering adjust and
the Start/Stop system* switches off. Applies to
a ir suspe nsion*: t he vehicle also lifts for passing
over obstacles to maintain maximum ground
clearance.
Comfort - prov ides a comfor t -or ient ed vehicle
setu p a nd is suit ed fo r long drives on hig hways.
Auto - prov ides a n overa ll comfortab le yet dy-
namic dr iving feel a nd is suited for everyd ay use.
Dynamic - gives t he driver a sporty driving fee l
and is suited t o a spo rt y d riving style .
Individual - c::;,page 136 .
A WARNING
-
Pay attention to traffic whe n ope rating t he
d rive select to reduce th e ris k of an accide nt .

Adjusting the Individual mode

Applies to: vehicles with Audi drive select

You can adjust the vehicle settings to your personal preferences.

"' Se lect in the Infotainment system: IME N U I but - The equi pment in you r vehi cle will determine
ton > Vehicle > Audi drive select> Individual > which sett ings you can adjust . The fo llow ing ta-
rig ht contro l button. ble gives a n overview of the characte ristics .

After you have close d the settings, you will a uto -

mat ica lly dr ive in the Individual mode .

Systems comfort auto dynamic

Engine/ transmission ba lance d ba la nced sporty
Air suspension* comfortab le ba la nced sporty
Steering comforta ble ba la nced sporty
All-wheel steering * comfortab le ba la nced sporty
Sport differential * mode rate ba lanced sporty
Engine sound* sub t le sub t le/sportyal sporty
ACC* comforta ble ba lance d sporty
al Subtl e in t he selecto r lever posit ion D and sporty in S.

instrument cluster/I nfota inment system dis -

(D Tips
play. Or
Your sett ings a re automa t ically saved in Indi- "' Select in t he Infotainment system : IMENU ! but-
vidual mode. ton > Vehicle > Audi drive select.
"' Select and confirm the des ired se tti ng.
Raising/lowering the vehicle
Applies to: vehicles with air suspension

"' Press t he left or right ar row key c::;,page 135,

fig. 133 unti l the desired mode app ea rs in the

136
 A ss is ta n c e syst em s

CDNote
The lift / Off road mode switches to Allroad
mode when dr iving above approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) and the veh icle automati-
cally lowers again. These modes may only be
used on a temporary bas is and are not intend-
ed for con t inuous driving.
(!) Tips
- The filled-in boxes in the Infotainment sys-
tem represent the current vehicle level. If
the box is wh ite or the boxes are blinkin9,
the veh icle is lift ing or lowering. If on ly the
bottom box is filled in, the vehicle is at the
lowest level (least amount of g round clear -
ance) . If all the segments are f illed in, then
the vehicle is at the highest level (highest
ground clearance) .
- The target level is hig hlighted with a red
frame while the vehicle is lifting or lower-
ing. The frame is then hidden when the ve-
hicle reaches the target level.
- The vehicle lifts up to the highest level
when you se lect Lift / Off road . Select an -
other mode to lower the vehicle again.
Rear lowering
Applies to: vehicles with air sus pens ion
.,. Press the upper section of the butto n (D. The
rear of the vehicle raises again.
The rear lower ing automat ically deactivates
when you select another mode or when the vehi-
cle speed exceeds approximately 2 mph (2 km/
h).
The LEDin the button t urns on while the vehicle
is lowering. When the loading level has been
reached, the LEDstays on as long as the rear of
the vehicle is lowered. The LEDturns off when
the vehicle returns to the original level.
CDNote
Before the rear lowering ends, make sure
there is enough clearance above the vehicle
and the luggage compartment lid, if it is
open.
(D Tips
- The vehicle will not lower if one of the vehi-
cle doors is open or when the ignition is
switched off and the compressed air reser-
voir is empty. The button LEDblinks three
times.
- If the compressed air reservoir is empty, it
is refilled wh ile driving at speeds above
25 mph (40 km/h).

The rear of the vehicle con be Lowered to make Messages

Loading and unloading easier. Applies to : vehicles wit h air suspensio n

II Air suspension: vehicle currentl y too high.

Level control in progre ss

II Air suspension: vehicle currently too low.

Level control in progr ess

The message turns off when the leve l control

process is complete.

Fig. 13 4 Sect ion of luggage compa rt ment: rear lower ing

button

Requirement: all vehicle doors must be closed .

u
(0
;::j .,. Open the luggage compar t ment lid.
~
~
.,.Press the lower section of the button
~ ¢ fig . 134 @ . The rear of the veh icle lowers .
<t

137
Parking systems
Parking systems
General information
Appl ies to: vehicles with a rea r parking syste m/pa rking sys -
tem plus/rearv iew camera/peripheral ca m eras
Depending on your vehicle's equipment , various
parking aids will help you when parking and ma-
neuvering.
The rear parking system is an audible parking aid
that warns you of obstacles behind the vehicle
¢ page 139.
The parking system plus assists you when park -
ing by audibly and visually indicating objects de-
tected in front of and behind the veh icle
¢ page 139.
The rearview camera shows the area behind the
vehicle in the Infotainment system display . The
lines in the rearview camera image help you to
park or maneuver ¢ page 140. The parking sys-
tem plus functions are also available
¢ page 139.
The peripheral cameras give various views to
help you when parking or maneuvering
¢ page 143. The parking system plus functions
are also available ¢ page 139.
A
i-==
WARNING
- cleaning vehicles
- Always look for traffic and check the area
around your vehicle by looking at it directly
as well. The parking system cannot replace
the driver's attention. The driver is always
responsible when entering or leaving a park-
ing space and during similar maneuvers.
- Please note that some surfaces , such as
clothing, are not detected by the system .
- Sensors and cameras have blind spots in
which people and objects cannot be detect-
ed . Be especially cautious of small children
and animals .
- Always keep your eyes on the vehicle's sur -
roundings, using the rearview mirror as
well.
- The sensors can be displaced by impacts or
damage to the radiator grille, bumper,
wheel housing and the underbody. The park-
ing system may be impa ired as a result.
138
Have an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility check their func-
tion.
(D Note
- Some objects are not detected or displayed
by the system under certain circumstances:
- objects such as barrier chains, trailer draw
bars, vertical poles or fences
- objects above the sensors such as wall ex-
tensions
- objects with certain surfaces or structures
such as chain link fences or powder snow
- If you continue driving closer to a low ob-
ject, it may disappear from the sensor
range. Note that you will no longer be
warned about this obstacle.
- Keep enough distance from the curb to re -
duce the risk of damage to the rims.
{i) Tips
- The system may provide a warning even
though there are no obstacles in the cover -
age area in some situations, such as:
- certain road surfaces or when there is tall
grass
- external ultrasonic sources such as from
- in heavy rain, snow, or thick vehicle ex-
haust
- We recommend that you practice parking in
a traffic-free location or parking lot to be-
come familiar with the system . When doing
this, there should be good light and weath-
er conditions.
- You can change the volume of the signals
and the display ¢ page 146 .
- Please refer to the instructions for towing a
trailer located in ¢ page 147.
- What appears in the infotainment display is
somewhat time-delayed.
- The sensors must be kept clean and free of
snow and ice for the parking aid to operate .
 Parking syst ems

Rear parking system Parking aid plus

Description Description
App lies to: vehicles with rear parking aid Applies to: veh icles with park ing system plus

The rear parking system is an audible parking Parking system plus provides audio and visual
aid . signals when parking.

Descripti on
There is a sensor in the rear bumper cover. If
these detect an obstacle, audible signals warn
you .
Make sure the sensors are not covered by stick-
ers, deposits or any other obstructions as it may
impair the function of the system . For informa-
tion on cleaning, see c::;,page354 .
The range at which the sensors begin to measure Fig. 1 35 Illust rat ion:

is approximately:
Sensors are located in the front and rear bump-
side 3 ft (0 .90 m) ers. If these detect an obstacle, audib le and visu-
rear
center 5.2 ft (1.60 m) al signals warn you .

The closer you get to the obstacle, the shorter
the interval between the audible signals . A con-
tinuous tone sounds when the obstacle is less
than approximately 1 foot (0.30 meters) away.
&. in General infor-
Do not continue backing up c::;,
ma t ion on page 138, c::;,
(D in General information
on page 138!
Make s ure the sensors a re not covered by st ick-
ers, deposits or any other obst ructions as it may
impa ir t he function of the system. For informa -
tion on cleaning, see c::;,
page 354.
The displ ay field beg ins approx imately at:
® 4 ft (1.20 m)

If the distance to an obstacle remains constant, ® 3 ft (0 .90 m)

the volume of the distance warning gradually © 5 .2 ft (1.60 m)
lowers after a few seconds until it is muted (this @ 3 ft (0 .90 m)
is not apply in the continuous tone range). If the
The close r you get to the obstacle , the shorter
obstacle becomes closer than it was before the
t he interval betwee n the audible signa ls . A con-
sound was muted, the tone will sound again . If
t inuous t one sounds when the obs t acle is less
the obs t a cle is father away tha n it was before the
than approxim ately 1 foot (0.30 meters) away .
sound was muted, no tone will so und . Pay atten-
Do not continue dr iving forward or in reverse
tion to the vehicle's surroundings when you start
&. in General information
c::;, on page 138, c::;,
(i) in
to drive.
General information on page 138!
Activating
If t he distance to an obstacle remains cons t ant ,
The rear parking assist activates automat ica lly the volume of the distance warn ing gradua lly
when the reverse gear is engaged. A br ief conf ir- lowers after a few seconds until it is muted (this
mat io n tone will sound. is not apply in the continuous tone range). If the
obstacle becomes closer than it was before the
u sound was muted , the tone will sound aga in . If
(0
......
N
r--. the obstacle is father away than it was before the .,_
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

139
Parking systems

sound was muted, no tone will sound. Pay atten -
tion to the vehicle's surroundings when you start
to drive.
Switching on/ off
App lies to: vehicles with pa rking system plus
- The vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
- The ign ition is switched off and back on again.
- The parking brake is set and then released .
- The selector lever must be in the P posit ion .
Segments in the visual display

~ - -- - --=--
--~------
- -
--------- --
§
:,j;
~
The segments in front of and behind the vehicle
¢ fig. 137 help you to determine the distance be-
tween your vehicle and an obstacle . The red
lines* mark the expected direction of travel ac-
cording to the steering angle . A white segment
,c
.,r~."'.::. ..::
r~ " indicates an identified obstacle that is outside of
the vehicl e's path. Red segments show identi fied
- - - ~l ~ i~~

obstacles that are in your veh icle's path. As you r

Fig. 136 Center console: parking aid button
vehicle comes closer to the obstacle, the seg-
ments move closer to the vehicle. The collision
area has been reached when the next to last seg-
ment is displayed. Obstacles in the collision area,
including those outs ide of the vehicle's path, are
shown in red. Do not continue driving forward or
in reverse ¢ & in General information on
page 138, ¢ (1)in General information on
page 138!

Rearview camera
Fig. 137 Infotainment system: visual d istance display

Int roduction
Switching on Applies to : vehicles with rearv iew camera
...Shift into reverse, or 0,

"'
" Press the P'"A button in the center console ~co
¢ fig . 136 . A short conf irmation tone sounds a,

and the LED in the button turns on .

Switching off
" Drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), or
" Press the Pw.6.button , or
" Switch the ign ition off.

Activating automatically Fig. 138 Diagram : lines to aid in pa rking

The parking aid is activated automatically at

The rearview camera helps you to park or maneu-
speeds less than 6 mph (10 km/h) and when ap-
ver using the orientation lines .
proaching an obstacle from approximately
3.1 feet (95 cm) away. There are audible signals
when approximately 1.6 feet (SO cm) away from
the obstacle. If you press the P,,1 A button to switch
the park ing aid off, it can on ly be reactivated au-
tomatically when one of the following conditions
is met :

140

General information
Applies to: vehicles wit h rearv iew camera
Fig. 139 Area covered (D and area not covered @ by the
rearv iew camera.
Fig. 140 Luggage compartment lid: locat ion of the rear -
view cam era
The rearview camera is located above the rear li-
cense plate bracket. Make sure that the len s for
the rearview camera ¢ fig. 140 is not covered by
deposits or any other obstructions because this
can impair the function of the rearview camera.
For information on cleaning, see<=>page 354.
The rearview camera coverage area include s (D
¢ fig. 139 . Only this area is shown in the Info-
tainment display. Objects that are in area @ ,
which is not covered, are not displayed.
A WARNING
- Always read and follow the applicable warn-
ings <=>A in General information on
page 138.
- If the position and the installation angle of
the rearview camera was changed, for ex-
ample after a collision, do not continue to
use the system for safety reasons. Have it
u
(0
......
N
checked by an authorized Audi dealer or au-
r--.
N
......
thorized Audi Service Facility.
0 "' Shift into reverse, or
0
:E
<t
Parking systems
- Only use the rearview camera to assist you if
it shows a good, clear picture. For example,
the image may be affected by the sun shin-
ing into the lens, dirt on the lens, or if there
is a malfunction.
- Use the rearview camera only if the luggage
compartment lid is completely closed. Make
sure any objects you may have mounted on
the luggage compartment lid do not block
the rearview camera.
- The camera lens enlarges and distorts the
field of vision. The object appears both al-
tered and inaccurate on the screen.
- In certain situations, people or objects in
the display appear closer or farther away:
- For objects that do not touch the ground,
such as the bumper of a parked vehicle, a
trailer hitch or the rear of a truck. Do not
use the orientation lines in this case.
- If driven from a level surface onto an in-
cline, or a downward slope .
- If driven toward protruding objects.
- If the vehicle is carrying too much load in
the rear.
- Applies to: vehicles with air suspension: the
accuracy of the orientation lines and blue
surfaces decreases when the vehicle is
raised/lowered¢ page 134.
(D Note
-Always read and follow the applicable warn-
ings¢ (!) in General information on
page 138.
- The orange-colored orientation lines in the
Infotainment display show the vehicle path
based on the steering wheel angle. The
front of the vehicle swings out more than
the rear of the vehicle . Maintain plenty of
distance so that an exterior mirror or a cor-
ner of the vehicle does not collide with any
obstacles.
Switching on/off
Applies to: vehicles with rearv iew camera
Switching on
141
Parking systems

.,. Press the Pw~button in the center console
¢ page 140, fig. 136. A short confirmation
tone sounds and the LEDin the button turns
on.
Switching off
.,.Drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), or
.,.Press the p,q~button, or
.,.Switch the ignition off.
@ Tips
- The visual display in the right part of the
display should help you detect the critical
vehicle area.
- You can change the volume of the signals
and the display ¢page 146.
Perpendicular parking
Applies to : vehicles with rearview ca mera
cle. Each marking represents approximate ly 3
ft (1 m). The blue area represents an extension
of the vehicle's outline by approximate ly 16 ft
(5 meters) to the rear.
.,.While driving in reverse gear, adju st the steer-
ing wheel angle to fit the parking space using
the orange orientat ion lines for assistance
¢ .&, in General information on page 141, ¢ (D
in General information on page 141 . ® repre-
sents the rear bumper. At the very latest, stop
the vehicle when the red orientation line @
borders an object.
Trailer view
Applies to : vehicles wit h rearv iew camera/peripheral ca meras
and trailer hitch
This view assists you in positioning the vehicle in
front of a trailer.

This view may be used when parking in a garage

or in a parking space.

Fig. 143 Infota inment system : tra iler view

Requirement : Trailer view must be selected

~ page 146.
Fig. 141 Infotainme nt system: aiming at a park ing space
.,. Now you can position your vehicle in front of
the trailer ¢ .&, in General information on
page 143, ¢ (Din General information on
page 143. The orange orientation line indi-
cates the expected path toward the trailer
hitch . Use the blue lines to help you estimate
the distance to the trailer hitch.

Fig. 142 Infotainment syste m: alig ning the vehicle

.,.Turn the Infota inment system on and shift into

reverse gear .
.,.The orange orientation lines (!) show the vehi-
cle's direction of travel. Turn the steering wheel
until the orange orientat ion lines appear in the
parking space ¢ fig. 141. Use the markings @
to help you estimate the distance to an obsta-

142

Peripheral cameras
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
With this equipment, the parking system plus*
page 139 is supplemented wit h various pe riph-
c::>
eral cameras. The four cameras give you the fol-
lowing views: area around the vehicle, front cor-
ner view and rear corner view, view in front of the
vehicle and behind the vehicle .
General information
Applies to: vehicles wit h peripheral cameras
Fig. 14 4 Location of periphera l cameras
The fo ur per ipheral cameras are located in the ra-
diator grille, in the luggage compartment lid and
on both exterior mirrors c::>fig. 144 . Make sure
that the lenses are not covered by deposits or any
other obstructions as this may impair the system.
For information on cleaning, see c::>page 354.
Black corners are shown in the vehicle s ilhouette
when in Area mode. Objects in these areas are
outside of the camera's field of view and are not
detected.
The accuracy of the orientation lines and blue
surfaces decreases if the air suspension* is faulty,
if the vehicle is lifted, if the luggage compart-
ment lid lowering function is active or if the Dy-
namic, Allr oad* or Lift / Offroad * mode is act i-
vated c::;,page 134 .
A WARNING
- Always read and fo llow the applicable warn-
u
(0
...... ings c::>.& in General informa tion on
N
r--.
N
page 138.
......
0
0
:E
<t
Parking syst ems
- If the position or the installation angle of a
camera was changed, for example after a
collis ion, do not cont inue to use the system
for safety reasons. Have it checked by an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
- Keep in mind that the image in the display is
incorrect if the exterior mirror housing has
been moved out of place.
- Use the Rear mode and the Corner view
(rear) mode only when the luggage com-
partment lid is comp letely closed. Other-
wise the image in the disp lay will be incor-
re ct.
- The vehicle surround ings are shown using
the camer a images. The vehi cle image is
shown by the system. Objects and obst acles
above the camera are not disp layed .
- Camera lenses enl arge and distort t he field
of vision. The objects appear both altered
and inaccurate on the screen.
(D Note
- Always read and fo llow the applicable wa rn-
ings c::>(i) in General information on
page 138 .
- The Infotainmen t display shows the direc-
t ion in which the rear of the vehicle is travel-
ing based on the steering wheel ang le . The
front of the vehicle swings out more than
the rear of the vehicle. Maintain plenty of
distance so that an exterior mirror or a cor-
ner of the vehicle does not collide with any
obstacles.
(D Tips
If the 8/<E;fl/,;::::::::,
symbol appears in the dis-
play and the respective disp lay area is grayed
out, then the power exter ior mirrors were
fo lded in or the dr iver's door/front passe ng-
er's door/luggage compa rt ment lid was
opened .
143
Parking sy stem s

Switching on/off Corner view (front)/corner view (rear)

Applies to: vehicles with per ipheral cameras Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
· - - -- --=-
•=L--:-:---

Fig. 147 Infota inment system: Corner view (front)

Fig. 14 5 Center console: Pw

.!.butto n

Fig. 148 Infot ainm ent syst em : Corner view (rear)

Fig. 146 Infot ainme nt system : select t he mode

This view can assist you for example , when you
are exiting from an area with poor visib ility . The
Switching on
area at the front and rear sides of the veh icles is
• Shift into reverse, or displayed .
• Press the P"IAbutton in t he center console
• To show t he side view toward the front, select
¢ fig. 145 . A short confirmation tone sounds
the symbol @ ¢ fig. 147 with the control knob
and the LED in the bu tton turns on .
and press the control knob .
Selecting the mode • To show the side view toward the rear , se lect
the symbol © ¢ fig. 148 with the con tr ol knob
• Turn the cont rol knob to the symbol fo r the de-
and press the cont rol knob .
sired mode @ t hrough © ¢ fig. 146 and press
the con t rol knob.
Front
Switching off Applies to : vehicles with peripheral camer as
• Drive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h) , or
• Press the P"1Abutton, or
• Swit ch the ignition off .

You may select from the following modes:

@ - Corner view (front) ¢ page 144
@ - Front ¢ page 144
© - Area ¢ page 145 Fig. 14 9 Infot ainme nt syst em: fron t mode

@ -Rear ¢ page 145 This view assists you for example , in using the
© - Corner view (rear) ¢ page 144 full maneuvering range in front of the vehicle.
The area in front of the vehicle is displayed. The
You can a lso switc h to trailer view ¢ page 142.
vehicle surround ings are shown in the right area IJJI,

144
 Parking systems

of the display. You can switch between the opti- Perpendicular parking
cal display and camera image q page 146. Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras

• Se lect the symbol @ with the con t rol knob. The This view may be used when parking in a garage
orange-colored orientation lines denote the or in a parking space.
projected direction of travel. Stop the vehicle
when the red orientation line* borders an ob-
ject q A in General information on page 143.

Area
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras

Fig. 152 Infotainment system: a iming at a park ing space

Fig. 150 Infotainment system: Area mode

This view is ideal for maneuvering . The vehicle

surroundings are shown using the camera im- Fig. 153 Infota inme nt system: aligning the vehicle
ages. The vehicle image is shown by the system.
• Turn the Infotainment system on and shift into
• Select the symbol © with the control knob and
reverse gear.
press the control knob.
• The orange orientation lines (D show the vehi-
cle's direction of travel. Turn the steering wheel
Rear until the orange orientation lines appear in the
Applies to: vehicles with peripheral cameras
parking space ¢ fig. 152. Use the markings @
to help you estimate the distance to an obsta-
cle . Each mark ing represents approximately 3
ft (1 m). The blue area represen ts an extension
of the vehi cle's outline by approximately 16 ft
(S meters) to the rear.
• While driving in reverse gear, adjust the steer -
ing wheel angle to fit the park ing space using
the orange orientat ion lines for assistance
Fig. 151 Infotainment syste m: rear mo de ¢ A in General information on page 143, ¢ (D
in General information on page 143 . @ repre-
This view assists you for example, in using the sents the rear bumper. You should stop revers-
full mane uveri ng range beh ind t he vehi cle. The ing at the latest when the red orientation line
area behind the vehicle is displayed. The vehicle © borders a n object¢ ,& in General informa-
surroundings are shown in the right area of the tion on page 141.
display . You can switch between the optical dis-
play and camera image c::>page 146.
u
(0
......
N
r--.
• Select the symbol @ with the control knob.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

145
Parking s y s tem s
Adjusting the parking aid
Applies to: vehicles with a rear parking system/parking sys-
tem plus/rearview camera/peripheral cameras
The functions are adjusted in the Infotainment
system .
.. Select in the Info t ainment system: IMENU I but-
ton > Vehicle > left contro l button > Driver as-
sista nce > Parking aid. Or
.. When the parking aid is active, se lect in the In -
fota inme nt system: right contro l button *.
End system * - stop the parking aid
Activate automatically * - sw itch automatic acti-
vation on/off
Front volume * - volume for the front area
Rear volume - volume for the rear area
Entertainment fader - the vol ume of the aud io/
video source is lowered when the parking system
is turned on
The new ly selected leve l is demons t rated briefly
by t he sound generator.
View* - switch betwee n an optical d isplay
(Graphic) and camera image (Camera) in the
right section of the display.
Trail er view* - show trailer view
*Auto. front / rear camera change* - the view be-
hind the veh icle (Rear mode) is displayed auto-
mat ically when you shift into reverse gear. The
view in front of the vehicle (Front mode) is d is-
played automatically when you shift into the for-
ward gea rs. When first activat ing in a forward
gea r with the P"IA bu t ton, t he front side view is
d isp layed (Corner view (front) mode).
If you do not set the../, the view behind the vehi-
cle (Rear mode) is a lways d isplayed and it does
not swi t ch to the Front mode when a forward
gea r is selec t ed .
(D Tips
- Seve ral menus can be accessed with the
right contro l button only when the park ing
a id is act ive.
- The settings for volume and automatic act i-
vation* are au t oma t ically st ored and as-
146
signed to the remote con t rol key be ing
used.
Error messages
Applies to: vehicles with a rear parking system/parking sys-
tem plus/rearview camera/peripheral cameras
IllRear park assist : malfunction! Obstacle s
cannot be detected
IllFront park assist: malfun ct ion! Obst acles
cannot be detect ed
mlPark assist: malfunction! Obstacles cannot
be detected
When one of these messages appears, there is a
system malfunction. The LED in the P'#~button al-
so blinks when sw itching it on. The relevant mes-
sage on ly appears again w hen you manually acti-
vate the park ing aid with the button.
Ill Rear parking aid: obstacle detection restri ct-
ed
The rear cross -traffic assist* ¢ page 130, Rear
cross-traffic assist is not available. Either the ESC
is switched off, or the radar sensorsmay be cov-
ered by a bike rack, stickers, leaves, snow or oth-
er objects. Switch the ESCon , or clean the area in
front of the sensors if necessary ¢ page 12 7,
fig. 122 . If this message cont inues to be d is-
played, drive immed iate ly to an authorized Audi
dealer or au t hor ized Audi Service Facility t o have
the mal funct ion rep a ired.
Parking system plus *
If a sensor or speaker is faulty, the J¼ symbo l
will appear in front of/behind the vehicle in the
Infotai nment system d isplay. If a rear sensor is
faulty, only obs t acles that are in areas @ and @
are show n ¢ page 139, fig. 135 . If a fron t senso r
is fa ulty, only obs t acles t ha t a re in a reas © and
@ are shown.
Peripheral cameras*
There is a system malfunction if t he % symbo l
appe a rs and the corresponding area of t he dis-
play is shown in black . The camera is not wo rking
in th is area.
 Parking sy stem s

Drive to an authorized Audi dealer or authorized

Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunct ion corrected.

Trailer hitch
Applies to: vehicles with a rear parking system/parking sys-
tem plus/ rearview camera/peripheral cameras and trailer
hitch

When the tra iler socket is in use, the parking sys-

tem rear sensors are not activated when you shift
into reverse gear or w hen you press the PwAbut-
ton. This results in t he following restr ictions .

Rear parking system *

There is no distance warning.

Parking system plus*

There is no distance warning fo r the rear. The
front sensors remain activated . The visual display
switches to tra iler mode.

Rearview camera* / peripheral cameras*

There is no distance warn ing fo r the rear. The
front sensors remain act ivated . The visual display
switches to trai ler mode. The rearview camera
image will not show the orientation lines and the
blue surfaces.

(D Tips
Trailer hitches that are not installed at the
factory may cause the parking system to ma l-
function or they may restrict its function.

u
co
....
N
r-...
....
N
0
0
:E:
'<t

147
Inte l ligent Technology
Intelligent Technology
Electronic stabilization
control (ESC)
Description
Elect ronic stabilization control (ESC) supports
driver safety. It red uces the risk of slipping and
improves driving stability. ESC detects crit ica l sit-
uations such as when the vehicle is oversteering
and understeering or the wheels are spinning.
The vehicle is stabilized by applying the brakes or
reducing eng ine torq ue . When the ESC engages,
the DJ ind icator light blinks in the instrument
cluste r.
The fo llow ing systems are integrated in the ESC:
Ant i-lock braking system (ABS)
ABS prevents the whee ls from locking when brak-
ing. The vehicle can sti ll be steered even during
hard brak ing. Apply steady pressure to the brake
pedal. Do not pump the pedal. A puls ing in the
brake pedal indicates that the system is acting to
stabilize the vehicle .
Brake assist system
The brake assist system can decrease brak ing dis-
tance . It increases braking power when the driver
presses the brake pedal quick ly in emergency sit-
uations . You must press and hold the brake pedal
until the dangerous situat io n is over . In veh icles
with adapt ive cr uise control*, the bra ke assist
sys t em is more sensitive if the d ista nce detec t ed
t o the vehicle dr iving ahead is too small.
On ve hicles w ith act ivated and funct ioning night
vision assist*, the brake ass ist system ca n re-
spond more sens it ively if t here is a warning.
Anti-Slip Regulation (ASR)
ASR reduces eng ine power when the drive wheels
begin spinning a nd adap t s the force to the road
conditions . This makes it easie r to start, acceler-
ate and dr ive up hills .
Electronic differential lock (EDL)
EDLapplies the brakes to a wheel that starts
spinning and transfers the drive power to the
148
other driving whee ls. This function is not avai la-
ble at higher speeds.
In extreme cases , EDL a utomat ica lly swit ches off
to keep t he brake on the braked wheel from over -
heating. The veh icle is still working correct ly. EDL
will switch on again automatically when condi-
tions have returned to normal.
Steering recommendat ion
The ESC he lps t o stabilize t he vehicle by chang ing
t he st eer ing torque.
Select ive wheel torque control
Selective wheel to rque cont rol is used when d riv-
ing on curves. Braking is targeted toward the
whee ls on the inside of the curve as needed . This
allows mo re precise dr iving in curves .
Automatic post-collision braking system
The "automat ic post -collis ion braking system"
can help to reduce the risk of sliding and of addi-
tiona l collisions after an acc ident. If the a irbag
contro l modu le detects a collision, the veh icle is
braked by the ESC.
The veh icle does not brake automatically if:
- the driver presses the accelerator pedal, or
- the ESC, the brake system or the veh icle elect ri-
cal system are not functioning.
A WARNING
- The ESC and its integrated systems cannot
overcome the lim its imposed by natura l
phys ical laws . This is espec ially important
on s lippery or wet roads . If the systems be-
gi n ac t ing to stabilize your vehicle, you
should immediately a lter your speed to
match t he road and traffic conditions. Do
not let the increased safety provided tempt
you into taking risks. This could increase
your risk of a coll ision.
- Please note the risk of a collision increases
when driving fast, especially through curves
and on slippery or wet roads, and when dr iv-
ing too close to objects ahead. The ESC and
its integrated systems cannot always pre-
vent collisions - there is st ill a risk of acci-
dents!
 Intelligent Technology

- Press t he accele rato r pedal ca refu lly when
accel er ating on smooth, slippery sur fac es
s uch as ice and snow. The dr ive wheels can
spin even when these con tr ol systems are
inst alled a nd th is can affec t drivi ng stabili t y
and incr eas e the ris k of a coll is io n.
(D Tips
- The ABS and ASR only function co rrectly
whe n all fo ur whee ls have a s imilar wear
co ndit ion. Differe nt t ire sizes can lead t o a
re d uction in en gi ne power.
- You may hear noises when t he sy stems de -
sc ribe d a re worki ng.
- Wh e n insta lling roof rack sy st e ms on th e
roof ra il, t he ESC uses se nsors to ada pt it-
s elf to a d ifferent center of gravity .

Switching on and off

ESC turns on automatically when you start the engine .

~ ~- ---- --=- The following examp les are unusua l situations
~--------
--__
whe re it may make sense to switch off road mode
--- -
~· ~
~,-,.-
""' :'llt.) ... 'P [l)A
, on to a llow the whee ls to spin:

- Rocking t he vehi cle t o free it when it is stuck

- Driving in deep snow or o n loose g round
- Driving with snow chains
- Driving on ro ugh te rra in when m uch of t he car 's
we ight is lift ed off t he wheels (axle articula-
tion)
Fig. 154 Cente r conso le wit h t he t,.OF,butto n
- Driving down hill w hile braking on loose g round
The ESC is des igned t o fu nction in levels. Depe nd- For yo ur safety, switch the offroad mode off in
ing on t he leve l selec t ed , the ESC sta bi lizati on advance.
f unction is limite d or swi t ched off . The amount of
st abili zation control w ill differ depe nding on the
leve l.

ESC levels

Offroad mode on ESC/ASRoff Offroad mode off or

ESC/ ASRon
Behavior The ESC and ASR stabiliza- The stabilization f unction is The full sta bilization func-
tion f unct io ns are limited not available ~ A . ESC a nd tion of the ESC and ASR is
q _,&_ ASR are switched off. avai lab le aga in.
Operation Press t he !B'-"•
Ibu tt on brief- Press a nd ho ld t he !B'-"'
Ibut - Press t he IEmlbut t on again.
Ly. ton longer t han t hr ee sec-
on d s.
Ind icator II turns on . II and l:f.'tl
•)Hturn on . II turns off or II a nd
lights !:(.'iit•)H
turn off .
Messages Stabilization control ( ESC) : Stabilization control ( ESC): Stabilization control (ESC):
u offroad . Warning! Reduced off . Warning! Restricted on
(0
......
N
r--.
stability stability
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

149
Intelligent Technology
_&.WARNING
You should only switch offroad mode on or
switch ESC/ASR off if your driving abilities
and the traff ic conditions perm it. There is a
risk of slid ing.
- The stabilization function is limited when
offroad mode is switched on. The driving
wheels could sp in and the vehicle could
swerve , especially on slick or slippery road
surfaces.
- The re is no vehicle stab ilizat ion when ESC/
ASR are swi tch ed off .
Hill descent assist
Hill descent assist makes it possible to drive
down a hill at a constant speed.
Fig. 155 Center console: hill descent ass ist button
.. To switch hill descent assist on, press the 1-<p
l - Hill descent ass ist may not be able to hold
button. The LEDin the button turns on.
.. Press the button again to switch it off. The LED
in the button turns off.
Hill descent assist brakes all four wheels auto-
matically in order to limit speed when driving ei-
ther forward or reverse on hills with a grade from
approximately 6 to 60%. The wheels w ill not lock
up because the ABS remains activated.
When hill descent assist is on, the speed your ve-
hicle was traveling when it entered the hill is
maintained. The assist begins shortly after you
start driving and continues up to approximately
19 mph (30 km/h). The driver can increase or de-
crease the vehicle speed w ith in these limits by
pressing the accelerato r or brake pedal.
However, there must be enough traction. Hill de-
scent assist cannot function as expected, if for
150
example the hill is icy or if the surface is loose
~& .
Active regulat ion of a speed up to approximately
19 mph (30 km/h) is signaled in the instrument
cluster by an indicator light • . The indicator
light turns on when in the ready mode. II .
The system does not work at speeds above ap-
proximately 19 mph (30 km/h). The system is
then in ready-mode . This is indicated by the LED
in the button turning on.
Hill descent assist is automatically activa t ed un-
der t he following conditions:
- the LEDin the button turns on
- the vehicle speed is lower than 19 mph (30 km/
h)
- the hill angle is at least approximately 6%
_&.WARNING -
- Always adapt your speed to the weather,
road and traffic conditions. Do not let the
increased safety provided tempt you into
taking risks, because this increases the risk
of an accident.
- The hill descent assist system cannot over-
come t he laws of phys ics. Your driving style
must always be adapted to the current road
and traffic cond itions .
your vehicle at a constant speed under all
conditions while driving on a hill (for exam-
ple if ground under the vehicle is loose).
Brakes
New brake pads
New brake pads do not achieve their full braking
effect during the first 250 mi (400 km). They
must be "broken in" first. However, you can com-
pensate for the slightly reduced braking force by
pressing firmly on the brake pedal. Avoid heavy
braking during the break-in period.
Wear
Brake pad wear depends lar ge ly on the way the
vehicle is driven and on operating conditions .
This is especially true if you are driving frequent ly IJ,,
 Intellig e nt Technology

in the city and on curves or with a sporty driving
style.
Operating noise
Noises may occur when bra king depend ing o n t he
speed, braking force and ou t side cond itions su ch
as tempe rature and humidity.
W et conditions or road salt
Low brake fluid level
When t he bra ke fluid level is low, malfu nctions in
the brake system may occur . The brake fluid level
is e lectronically monitored .
Brake booster
The brake booster ampl ifies t he press ure you ap-
ply to the brake pedal.

In certain situat ions, for example after dr iving

through water, in heavy ra in or afte r washing
your car, t he bra king effect may be reduced due
to moisture or ice on t he brake rot ors a nd bra ke
pads . The bra kes mus t be "dried" firs t with a few
careful brake applications .
At highe r speeds and with the windsh ie ld wipers
turned o n, t he brake pads press against t he brake
rotors for a short amoun t of time . This action,
which is not felt by the driver, happens at regular
intervals and ens ures a better reaction time for
the brakes in wet weather.
The braking effe ct can also be reduced if you are
d riving on salted roads and you do not apply t he
brakes for long periods of time . The layer of salt
on the bra ke rotors and pads must be worn off
f irst when the brakes are app lied.
Corrosion
Leaving the vehicle par ked for long pe riods of
time, low mi leage and avoiding heavy braking
can cont ribute to corrosion on the brake rotors
and to dirty brake pads.
A WARNING
-
- Only ap ply t he bra kes for t he purpose of
cleaning the brake sys t em when road and
traffic conditions permit. You must not en-
danger other roa d users . This increases the
risk of an accident.
- Never let the vehicle roll while the engine is
stopped because this increases the risk of an
accident.
(D Note
- Never let the brakes "rub" by pressing the
peda l lightly when braking is not actually
necessary. This causes the brakes to over-
heat and increases braking distance and
causes wear.
- Before driving downhill a long distance on a
steep hill, decrease your speed and select a
lower gear . This makes use of the engi ne
bra king effec t and relieves the brakes. If
you need to bra ke ad dit io na lly, bra ke in in-
t erva ls and not continuously.

If you usually avo id heavy braking or if there is

(D Tips

corrosion present, occasional heavy braking at - If the brake boos t er is not work ing , you
high speeds is recommended to clean the brake must press t he brake peda l w ith much m ore
rotors and pads ¢ A . force than normal.
- If you retrofit your vehicle with a front s po il-
Brake system malfunct ion er, wheel covers or sim ila r items, make su re
If you not ice th at t he brake peda l t ravel has sud- t hat the air flow t o the fro nt wheels is not
denly increased, then a brake circuit in t he dual- int er rup t ed. Otherwise t he bra ke system
circuit brake system may have malfunctioned. can become too hot .
Drive to an aut horized Audi dea le r or a ut horized
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
u
problem corrected. On the way there, drive with
co
...... reduced speed and keep in mi nd that you w ill
N
r-...
N need a longer dista nce to stop and you w ill need
......
0
0 to press the brake pedal harde r.
:E:
'<t

151
Inte l ligent Technology
Electromechanical
steering, all-wheel
steering
The electromechanical steering supports the
driver's steering movements .
Power steering adapts electronically based on
the vehicle speed.
Indicator lights and messages
• Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle
If th is ind icator light turns on and stays on and
this message appears, the power steer ing may
have fa iled.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as pos-
sib le. Do not continue driving. See an author ized
Audi dealer or authori zed Audi Service Facility for
assistance.
• Steering: malfunction! Please stop vehicle.
Pay attention to distan ce at side
If th is ind icator light turns on and stays on and
this message appears, the all- wheel steering*
may have failed . The side of the vehicle may need
more space on the road.
Reduce your speed and stop the veh icle in a safe
locat ion wit h enough space on the sides as soon
as possible. Do not continue driving . See an au-
thor ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility for assistance.
'T@
Steering : malfunction! You may continue
driving
If t he indicator lig ht t ur ns on and the message
appears, the steering wheel may be more diff i-
cult to move or mo re sensitive tha n usual. The
steering whee l may also be at an angle when
driving straight.
Drive slow ly to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thor ized Audi Service Facility to have the ma l-
function corrected.
'T@
Steering: malfunction! Adapt driving style .
Larger turning radius
If the indicator lig ht tu rns on and th is message
appears, the all -wheel steering* may have failed .
152
Please note that the vehicle has a larger t urning
radi us and the stabi lity w hen turning a corner is
lik e that of a vehicle without all-whee l steer ing.
The steering wheel may also be at an angle when
driv ing straight.
Drive slowly to an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility to have t he mal-
funct ion corrected.
(D Tips
- If the . or 'T-ij indicato r light only stays on
for a sho rt time, you may cont inue driving .
- For add itiona l information on all-wheel
steering *, see ¢ page 134 .
All-wheel drive (quattro)
General informat ion
I n all whee l drive, the dr iving power is dist rib ut-
ed between all four whee ls when needed. This
happens automatically depending on your driving
behavior as we ll as the current road cond it ions.
Also see ¢ page 148, Electronic stabili zation
control (ESC).
The all-whee l drive system distributes the driving
power variably to the front and rear axle. It works
together with selective wheel torq ue control,
which act ivates when dr iving through curves
¢ page 148 . W ith the sport different ial*, power
dist ribution to the rear wheels is variable and can
be adjusted using the drive select ¢ page 134 .
The all wheel drive concept is designed for high
engine power . Your vehicle is except ionally pow-
erfu l and has excellent driving charact eristics
bot h unde r normal driving conditions and on
snow and ice. Always read and follow safety pre -
.&,.
caut ions c:::>
Winter tires
By using all wheel dr ive, your vehicle has good
forward motion w ith standard tires in win t er con-
dit ions. However, using w int er or all season t ires
on all four wheels in the w inte r is recomme nded,
because th is w ill imp rove t he braking effe ct. IJII>-

Snow chains
If there are snow cha in laws, snow chains must
a lso be used on vehicles with a ll wheel drive
¢ page 349, Snow chains .
Replacing tires
For vehicles with all wheel dr ive, only whee ls with
the same ro lling circumference shou ld be used .
Avoid using tires w ith different t read depths
¢ page 340, New tires or wheels .
.&_WARNING
- Also, in vehicles with all wheel drive, adapt
yo ur dr iving style to the current road and
traff ic conditions. Do not let the increased
safety provided tempt you into tak ing risks,
because th is increases the risk of an acci-
dent .
- The braking ability of your veh icle is limited
to the tract ion of the wheels . In this way, it
is not diffe rent from a two wheel dr ive vehi-
cle. Do not be tempted to accelerate to a
high speed when the road is slippe ry, be-
cause this increases t he risk of an accident.
- Note that on wet streets, the front wheels
can "hyd roplane" if d riving at speeds that
are too high . Unlike front whee l drive
vehicles, the engine does not rev higher sud-
denly when the vehicle begins hyd roplaning .
For this reason, adapt your speed to the
road conditions to reduce the risk of an acc i-
dent .
Energy management
The starting ability is optimized
The energy management system manages the
electrical energy distribution and optimizes the
availability of electrical energy for starting the
engine.
When a ve hicle with a convent ional energy sys-
tem is not driven for a long t ime, the vehicle bat -
t ery is dra ined by equipment (fo r example, t he
u immobilizer). In certain circumstances, there
co
......
N could may not be enoug h energy to start the en-
r-...
N
...... gine .
0
0
:E:
'<t
Intellig e nt Technology
Your vehicle is equipped with an intell igent ener-
gy management system for dist ributing electrici -
ty . This sign ificantly improves the start ing ability
and increases the vehicle battery life.
The ene rgy management system Is made up of
battery diagnosis, idling current management ,
and dynamic energy management .
Battery diagnosis
The battery diagnos is determines t he vehicle bat-
te ry charge level. The sensors determine t he bat-
te ry voltage, the batte ry current, and the battery
temperat ure. The cur rent charge level and the
performa nee of the vehicle battery a re deter -
mined based on this.
Idling current management
The idling cur rent management decreases the
energy used while parked . With the engine
switched off, it ma nages the energy distribution
to the d ifferent e lectr ica l components . Data from
the battery d iagnosis is taken into account for
th is.
Depending on the vehicle battery charge level,
electrical equ ipment is switched off one item af-
ter the other to prevent the vehicle battery from
dra ining and to ma intain the starting ab ility .
Dynamic energy manag ement
While driving, dynamic energy management dis -
t ributes the appropr iate amo unt of energy to the
electrical eq uipment. It contro ls the battery
charge level so that the amount of energy is not
greater than the amount being generated in or-
der to maintain an optimal vehicle battery charge
level.
(0 Tips
- Energy management cannot overcome the
laws of physics . Note t hat the charge level
and length of the veh icle bat t ery life are
limited.
- Whe n the sta rt ing ability is endangered, the
i•) indicator light t urns on r=vpage 27.
153
Inte l ligent Technology
What you should know
Maintaining the starting ability is the highest
priority .
A lot of stress is placed on the vehicle battery
when dr iving short d istances, dur ing city dr iving,
and at cold times of the year . A lot of energy is
used but little is gene rated . It is also critical
when the engine is not ru nning but e lectr ica l
eq uipment is swi t ched o n. In this case , energy is
used bu t none is generated.
In s ituations like this, energy management will
actively regu late the d istribution of ene rgy.
Long periods without use
If you do not drive your vehicle for several days or
weeks, e lectrical equipment is gradually scaled
back or switched off . This reduces energy use and
ensu res t he veh icle w ill be able to sta rt afte r long
pe riods of time. Some convenience functions ,
such as inte rior lighting or powe r seat adjust-
men t , may not be available under ce rta in circum-
st ances. These convenience functions will be
ava ilable aga in once you switch the ign ition on
and start the engine .
With the engine switched off
The vehicle battery will d rain if yo u use Infota in-
ment functions such as listening to the rad io
while the engine is switched off .
If t he ve hicle's ability to st art may be impaired by
the energy use, a message will appear in the In-
fotainmen t system disp lay . The message indi-
ca t es that the system will switch off automatica l-
ly soon. If you would like to continue using the
functions, yo u m ust start the eng ine.
With the engine running
Alt hough elect rical energy is generated whi le
d riving, t he vehicle battery can d rain. This can
happen if little energy is generated but much is
used, and the charge level of the veh icle battery
is not optima l.
To restore the balance of energy, components
that require large amounts of energy are tempo-
rarily sca led back or switched off . Heating sys-
tems in part icu lar require a great deal of energy .
154
If you notice, for example, that the seat heating*
or rear window defogger is not working, then it
has been temporarily reduced or switched off.
These systems are availab le again as soon as the
energy supply has been restored.
In addition, you may notice that the idle speed
has slight ly increased . That is normal and no
cause for concern. By increasing the idling speed,
the addit ional required energy will be generated
and the vehicle battery w ill be charged .
Notice about data
recorded by the Event
Data Recorder and
vehicle control modules
Event Data Recorder
This vehicle is equ ipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an airbag deployment or hitt ing a
road obstacle, data that will ass ist in understand-
ing how a vehi cle's systems pe rformed. The EDR
is des igned to record data related to vehicle dy-
nam ics and safe ty systems for a short per iod of
time, typica lly 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
- How va rious systems in yo ur vehicle were ope r-
at ing;
- Whethe r or not the d river and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened;
- How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the
acceler ator and/or bra ke pedal; a nd,
- How fast the vehicle was traveling .
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in wh ich crashes a nd in-
juries occur . NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your
vehicle on ly if a non-tr ivial crash situation occurs;
no data are re corded by the EDR unde r no rma l
driv ing cond itions and no persona l da t a (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash location) are re-
corded. However, other parties, such as law en-
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the
type of persona lly identifying data rout inely ac-
quired during a crash investigation . ..,.
 Intellig e nt Technology

To read data recorded by an EDR,specia l equip - downloaded with specia l equipment that is di-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or the rectly connected to the vehicle.
EDRis needed. In add it ion to the vehicle man u-
facturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, (D Tips
that have the specia l equipment, can read the in- Your vehicle may be equipped with Audi con-
formation if they have access to the vehicle or the nect. Your use of cert ain Audi connect fea -
EDR. tures requires wireless services that are pro-
Some state laws restrict the retr ieval or down- vided by a third party wireless telecomm uni-
loading of data stored by EDRs insta lled in a vehi- cations provider. For details regarding how in-
cle for the express purpose of retrieving data af- formation obtained throug h Audi connect is
ter an accident or crash event without the own- collected, processed, transmitted, used, and
er's consent. shared, please see your contract with the
wireless t elecommun ications provider and t he
Audi will not access the EDRand/or similar data "About Audi conne ct" tab in your vehicle's In-
or give it to others - fota inment syst em: IM ENU Ibut ton> Audi
- unless the vehicle owner (or lessee if t he vehi- connect > right control button > About Audi
cle has been leased) agrees; or connect .
- upon the official request by the police; or
- upon the order of a court of law or a govern-
ment agency; or
- for the defense of a lawsuit t hroug h the judicial
discovery process.
- Audi may also use t he data for researc h abou t
vehicle operation and safety performa nce or
provide the data to a third party for research
purposes without identifying the specific vehi-
cle or information about the identity of its own-
er or lessee and only after the recorded vehicle
data has been accessed.

Vehicle contr ol modules

Your vehicle is also equipped with a number of
electronic contro l modules for various vehicle
systems, such as eng ine management, emission
control, airbags, and safety belts.
These electronic control modules record data
during normal vehicle ope ration that may be
needed by trained technicians for diagnostic and
repair purposes. The recording capability of these
modules is limited to data (no sound is record-
ed). Only a small amoun t of data is act ually re-
corded over a very limited per iod of t ime, or stor-
ed when a system fault is detected by a control
module. Some of t he dat a stored may relate to
~
,..... vehicle spee d, direct ion, or braking, as well as re-
~ stra int system use and performance in the event
N
8 of a crash. Store d data can also only be read and
0
:E:
'<t

155
Multi Med ia Interface

Multi Media Interface

Traffic safety
information
Audi recommends performing certain Infotain-
ment system functions, such as entering a desti-
nation, only when the vehicle is stationary . Al-
ways be prepared to stop operat ing the Infotain-
ment system in the interest of your safety and
Fig. 157 MMI cont rol panel w ithou t MMI touch
the safety of other road users.
MMI control panel overview
_& WARNING (D Control knob with joystick function *
Only use the Infotainment system when traf- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 , 162
fic cond itions permit and always in a way that @ Control knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
allows you to maintain complete control over
your vehicle.
® Left control button ............ 159
@ Right control button . . . . . . . . . . . 159
@ Tips ® Buttons for opening menus
directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Certain funct ions are not available wh ile driv-
@ IMENU I button ................ 158
ing .
(J) IBACK I button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Introduction @ Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

® MMI touch contro l pad* . . . . . . . . 160
The Multi Media Interface, or MMI for short,
combines various systems for communication,
navigation* and entertainment in your Audi . You
MMI On/Off knob with
can operate the MMI using the MMI control pan- joystick function
el, the multifunction steering wheel or the voice Operating
recognition system* .

Fig. 158 MMI On/Off knob with j oystick fun ct ion

Fig. 156 MMI contro l panel with MMI touch

Switching the MMI on/off : the MMI can be

switched on/off manually .
- Switching on manually: press the On/Off knob
fig. 158 briefly. Or : press the I MENU I but -
(i) <=>
ton @ c:!)page 156, fig. 156 or c;,page 156,
fig. 157, or one of the buttons to open the me-
nus directly ® · IJJI,

156
 Multi M e dia I n terfac e

- Switching off manually: press and hold the

On/Off knob CD ¢ fig. 158 until the MMI
(D Tips

switches off. If the MMI has been sw itched off - If the vehicle has a cell phone prep*, the In-
manually, it does not switch on again automati- fotainment system display will automat ica l-
ca lly the next time the ignition is switched on . ly extend whenever there is an incoming
phone call.
Addition al functions : - There may be delays when extending or re -
- Adj usting th e volume: turn the On/Off knob CD tracting the display.
<=>
fig . 158 .
- Muting : press the On/Off knob CD c> fig . 158
Information on display images
briefly .
- Selecting the previous/ next fun ct ion (for ex- The display version depends on vehicle equip-
amp le, a radio stat ion/ tra ck): press the On/Off ment.
knob CD <=>
fig . 158 brief ly toward the left l<l<1or
rig ht t>r>I
.
- Fast forwardi ng/ rewinding (for example
87 6 MHz f
88.7 MHz
songs): press and hold the On/Off knob CD 900 MHz
¢ fig. 158 toward the left l<l<1
or right t>r>I
. J 90.5 MHz
91 5 MHz
.,& WARNING ·--------·----
96 6 MHz

Adjust the volume of the audio system so that

signa ls from outside the vehicle, such as po- Fig. 1 59 Display version A

lice and fire sirens, can be heard eas ily at all

times.

@ Tips
The MMI switches off au tomatically if t he en-
gi ne is not running and the vehicle battery is
low.

Fig. 1 60 Display version B

Infotainment system
display Additional content (such as album cover and map
ma t er ial) is shown on display ve rsion B, if appli -
Extending /r etrac ti ng
cable CD <=>
fig . 160. Because the other conten t
The Infotainment system d isplay automatically shown on the disp lays is nearly identical between
extends and retracts when you switch the MMI the two versions, this manua l will primari ly de -
on and off. scribe display version A.

- Manually extending / retracting : press the C:I

button @ c>page 8, fig. 2.

When the MMI is switched on and the display is

retracted, you can use certa in functio ns with the
On/Off knob and the MMI joystick funct ion
¢ page 156.
u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

157
Multi Med ia Interface

MMI operation Opening the main menu

.,.Press the IMENUI button @ qpage 156,
Selecting and confirming a function
fig. 156 or q page 156, fig . 157. The MMI me-
nus (such as Radio) are displayed q fig. 162 .
Then you can select and confirm a function us-
ing the control knob .

Opening a menu directly

.,.Press t he applicable button t o di rectl y open t he
menu ® q page 156, fig. 156 or q page 156,
fig. 157 in the direction of the desired menu
(such as I RADIO ll. Then you can select and con-
firm a function using the control knob .

Fig. 16 1 Ope rat ing the cont rol knob

Selecting and confirming a function in a

menu / list
.,.Selecting a function : tu rn t he cont rol knob (D
¢ fig. 161 t o the desired functio n (such as se-

lecting a frequency) .
.,.Confirming a selection: press the control knob
@ ¢ fig . 161 . Or: press on the MMI touch con-
trol pad ® ¢ page 156, fig . 156.

Returning to functions at higher levels

..,Press the IBACK ! button 0 ¢ page 156,
fig . 156 or ¢ page 156 , fig. 157 .

Opening the main menu/menu

Fig. 162 Diag ram : main me nu

158
 Multi M e dia I n terfac e

Opening the selection menu/options menu Selection menu : t hrough the se lection menu,
with the control buttons you can open additional functions within a menu
item (such as Radio) .

Requirement: the se lection menu symbo l must

be displayed in the Infotainment system disp lay
¢ fig. 163 .
Opening/ closing the selecti on menu : press the
left control button ¢ fig. 163. Then you can se-
lect and confirm a function using the control
knob.

Options menu : us ing the options menu, you can

select and confirm context-dependent func t ions
as well as settings within a menu item (such as
Radio) .

Requirement: the options menu symbo l El must

be displayed in the Info t ainmen t system disp lay
r=>fig. 163 . Then you can select and confirm a
function using the control knob .

Opening/ closing the option s menu : press the

right cont rol but t on ¢ fig. 163 . Then you can se-
Fig. 163 Contro l bu tt ons for MMI contro l panel with MMI
to uch lect and confirm a function using the control
knob .

Information about paths

This guide shows you at a glance the paths for
opening a desired menu and its settings and
functions.

Example of a path
.. Select: !RADIO Ibutton> lef t control knob> FM.

Following the path

.. Press the IRADIO Ibutton .
.. Press the left control button .
.. Turn the control knob to the FM menu item to
select it .
.. Press the contro l knob to confirm the selected
FMmenu item .
.. The se lected and confirmed function is exec ut-
ed . In this example, the FMfrequency band is
Applies to: MMl control panel with separate control but- set.
tons on the MMIcontrol panel
Fig. 164 Control buttons on the MMI control pa nel
u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

159
Multi Med ia Interface
MMI touch
MMI touch control pad
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
You can enter data using handwriting recogni-
tion on the MMI touch control pad .
Fig. 165 Example: entering a navigatio n desti nat ion using
t he MMItouc h
The MMI touch contro l pad is locat ed between
the co nt rol buttons r=;,fig. 165 .
Entering numbers, letters, and symbols
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
The MMI tou ch allo ws you to enter data on the
MMI touch control pad using handwriting recog -
nition .
Fig. 166 Display when MMI touch is act ive
160
Requirement: it must be possible to ente r text or
numbe rs and the symbo l CD r=;,fig. 166 m ust ap-
pear in the Infota inment system d isplay .
- Initial entry : wr ite an individu al upper case or
lower case lette r or number/symbol on the
MMI touch control pad using your f inger. A
symbo l that is recognized clea rly by the system
is displayed in the Infotainment system disp lay
CD r=;,page 160, fig. 165, confirmed with an au-
dib le signa l if necessary, and transferred to the
input field .
- Entering spaces: move your finger across t he
MMI touch control pad from left to right .
- Delet ing characters: move your finger across
the MMI touch contro l pad from right to left.
- Selecting the input suggestion: press the con-
trol knob.
- Switching directly to the results list : turn the
control knob to the right
- Opening the speller: select the right control
button> Open speller. Text or numbers are en-
tered in using the speller r=;,page 164.
- MMI touch volume : press the right cont rol but-
ton. See r=;,page 254.
Moving the crosshairs
Appli es t o: vehicles wit h MMI to uch
Fig. 16 7 Moving the crosshairs
 Multi Media Interface

Requirement: a map must be disp layed
¢ page 215.
- Showing/hiding the crosshairs : press the con-
trol knob to show the crossha irs © ¢ fig. 167 .
Or: press on the MMI touch control pad. To
hide the cross hairs again, press the IBACKI but-
ton (j) ¢ page 156, fig. 156 or ¢ page 156,
fig. 157 .
- Moving the map quickly : when the crosshairs
are visible, pu ll two fingers across the MMI
touc h control pad quickly in the desired direc-
tion. The map will come to a stop after several
seconds .
Zooming in/out on the map
Applies to : vehicles with MM! touch

- Moving the crosshairs on a map : move the

crosshairs shown in the desired direction using X

your finger on the MMI touch control pad

¢ fig . 167.

Moving the map

App lies to: vehicles with MMI touch

Fig. 169 Zoom in/Zoom out

Requirement: a map must be displayed

¢ page 215.
- Zooming in/ out on the map : press the control
knob to show the crossha irs . Touch the MMI
t ouch control pad with two fingers and pull
your fingers apart or together ¢ fig. 169 .

Press the I BACK Ibutton (j) to hide the crosshairs

¢page 156, fig . 156.

Adjusting the sound focus

Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch

Requirement: the Balance/fader function must

be se lected ¢ page 2 53.

- Moving the crosshairs for sound focus : move

Fig. 168 Moving the map
your finger in the desired direct io n on the MMI
Requirement: a map must be displayed touch control pad.
¢ page 215 . - Storing the crosshairs location : press the con-
trol knob tw ice. Or: press the I BACKI button (j)
- Showing / hiding the crosshairs : press the con- ¢ page 156, fig. 156.
trol knob to show the crosshairs © ¢ fig. 168 .
Or: press on the MMI touch control pad . To
Using the DVD main menu
hide the crosshairs again, press the i BACKI but-
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch
ton (j) ¢ page 156, fig. 156 or ¢ page 156,
u fig. 157 . Requirement: a DVDm ust be playing
(0
...... ¢ page 237. The DVDmain menu is shown .
N
r--. - Moving the map : when the crosshairs are visi-
N
......
0 ble, pull two fingers in the desired direction
0
:E
<t
across the MMI touch control pad ¢ page 217 .

161
Multi Media Interface

- Selecting a menu item : move your finger up/ Additional functions

down or left/right on the MMI touch contro l
pad.
- Confirming a selection: press the control knob.
Or: press on the MMI touch control pad .
(D Tips
The volume of the voice guidance prompts for
the MMI touch* can be adjusted separately
c:>page254.
Applies to: vehicles with joystick function
Displaying the input field/switching to
speller input
Push the control knob up c:>page 162, fig . 170 to
reach the beginning of a list in the central area or
the input field . If the input field is already open,
switch directly to the speller in the input field by
pushing the control knob up again c:>page 164 ,
Letter/number speller.

Control knob with On the map

joystick function Requireme nt: a map must be displayed
c:>page 215.
Operation
- Displaying the input field : push the control
knob up.
- Displaying route guidance: when route guid-
ance is active, you can also d ispla y the route
guidance by push ing the control knob up
r:!>
page 210, fig. 191 .
- Zooming in/out on the map (zoom) : turn the
control knob to the right/left to zoom in/out on
the map.
- Additional options on the map: see
Fig. 170 Ope rat ing concept fo r the control knob with joy·
r:!>
page 216
stick function

Using the DVD main menu

You can push the control knob up or down @
c:>fig. 170 or to the right or left @ . Requirement: a DVD must be playing
r:!>
page 237. The DVD main menu is shown.

Opening the entertainment sliding menu - Selecting a menu item: move the control knob
Applies to: vehicles with MMI touch w ith joystick function up or down or to the left
or right.
Opening the entertainment sliding menu: push
- Confirming a selection: press the control knob .
the control knob down to open the entertain-
ment sliding menu @ c:>page 166, fig. 174.
Then you can select and confirm a funct ion.

Closing the entertainment sliding menu : push

the control knob up to close the entertainment
sliding menu . Or: press the IBACK I button 0
c:>page 156, fig. 156 .

162
 Multi Media Interface

Opening the selection/options
the control knob
App lies to: vehicles with joystick function
menu with Opening/closing the options menu : push the
fig. 171 to open the
contro l knob to the right c::>
options menu . Then you can select and confirm a
funct ion using the control knob .
Press the I BACK I button (J) c::>
page 156 , fig. 156
to return to the function one level up.

Shortcut keys
Frequently used radio stations can be stored on
the shortcut keys.

The shortcut keys are on the MMI control panel

@ c::>page 156, fig . 156 or c::>page 156, fig. 157 .
Storing radio stations: turn the control knob to
the desired radio station in a list (for examp le, a
radio station in the FM station list). Press and
hold the desired shortcut key for several seconds .
The active radio station will be stored on the
shortcut key.
Accessinga radio station : press the shortcut key.

Displaying a radio station: sw ipe you r finger over

Fig. 171 Opening the se lect ion/options menu wit h the
control knob the shortcut keys.
Deleting a stored radio station: reset the Short-
Requirement: the selection menu symbol 3 must
cut keys to the factory default sett ing
be disp layed in the Infota inment system display
<=:>p
age 250.
<=:>fig.171.

Opening/ closing the selection menu : push the (0 Tips

control knob to the left c::>fig. 171 to open the se- It is not possible to enter numbers using the
lection menu . Then you can se lect and confirm a shortcut keys. Use the number speller
f unction using the contro l knob. page 164 or MMI touch* <=>
<=:> page 160to en-
Press the IBACKI button (J) c::>
page 156, fig. 156 ter numbers.
to return to the function one level up .
Requirement: the options menu symbol El must
be disp layed in the Infotainment system display
<=:>fig.171.

u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

163
Multi Med ia Interface
Letter/number speller
Fig. 172 Diagram : letter/ num be r spe ller
You can enter letters, numbers and symbo ls in
t he MMI using the letter/number speller. This
option is ava ilable when the input field @ is ac-
tive ¢ fig . 172.
- Opening / closing the letter / numbe r speller :
move the control knob up/down when the input
field is active . Or: select the right control but -
ton > Open speller / Close speller .
- Ent ering characters : turn the control knob with
the character selection @ c:>fig . 1 72 to the de -
s ired symbol. Press the control knob to conf irm
the characte r. Your input is displayed in t he in-
put fie ld @ . When you have entered all of t he
cha ract ers, sele ct and confirm t he I LIS T I button
@ ¢ fig . 172 . Or: push the cont rol knob down .
- Entering accented character s (such as a, ,;, fi,
o)* : turn t he con t rol knob wit h t he char act er
selection @ ¢ fig . 172 to a character. To open
the selected accented characters, press and
ho ld the contro l knob . Turn the control knob
with the character selection @ ¢ fig. 172 to an
accented character . Press the control knob to
insert the accented character . To close the ac-
cented characters without selecting a charac-
ter, press and hold the cont rol knob again. Or:
select and confirm laou I0 ¢ fig. 172. Select
and co nfirm an accented character.
- Delet ing characters: select and confirm<81@
¢ fig . 172 . To delete all characters in the input
164
fie ld, press and hold the control knob on <81un-
til all characters in the input field are deleted.
- Entering special characte rs: se lect and con-
firm I!&?I® i::>fig. 172 or I1 2 3 I@. Select and
confirm the desired special character (for ex-
ample , a hyp hen or period) with the numbe r
speller.
- Input assistance: in some cases s uch as in navi-
gation*, there is a word suggest ion * @
r=;,
fig . 172 based on ava ilable e ntries while you
are ente ring data . You can select this sugges-
tion by pus hing the con t rol knob upwar d .
- Result s list: in some cases , such as in the direc-
to ry, t he syst em switches automat ically t o the
res ults list based on ava ilable en tr ies @
¢ fig. 172 . Se lect and conf irm a suggestion
from the list .
Requireme nt: the inpu t field @ ¢ fig . 172 must
be active.
- Switch ing between spelle r and MMI touch* :
the handwriting recognitio n for the MMI touch
cont rol pad* is activated automatically. Simp ly
start wr iting .
Overview of symb ols in the speller
The symbo ls in the letter/number sp eller are ex-
plained in the follow ing tab le: IJ,-
 Multi Media Interfac e

Symbol / Description Description

CD ILIST lorB Switches to the iresults list.

@ Input field Displays the cur rent input.
Displays a list with suggestions based on the letters already en-
® Results list
tered.

@
+ Switches from lowe r case to upper case letters or from upper case
to lower case letters .
Open additional speller options, for example Close spell er and Clear
® E input fi eld

® 11& 7 1 Character sets and specia l characters

0 laou l Displays accented characters (suc h as a,~,fi, i::i).

Switches from letter to number input or from number to letter in-
® 1123!/ !ABC!
put.

® .......... Adds a space in the input field .

@ Characte r se lection Highlig hts the selected character.

@
... Inserts the suggested word* when you push the control knob up .

<&] Deletes the character to the left of the cursor.

Opening free text search

(D Tips
.. Select: ! MENU! button> desired menu item
Accented characters are not available for ev-
(such as Telephone).
ery letter.
.,. Keep tu rning the cont rol knob to the left until
t he free t ext search inp ut fie ld CD
~ fig. 173
Free text search appears. Or : push the control knob up to open
Applies to: vehicles with free text search
the input field CD -
Using the free text search, you can select the or-
The handwrit ing recognition fo r the MMI touch
der that the search terms are entered in the in-
contro l pad* is automatically activated. Simply
put field.
sta rt writing.

Free text search for an entry

.,. Enter one or more search terms in any order in-
to the input field. The ind ividual sea rch te rms
must be separated by spaces when e nte ring.

An input suggest ion to complete the entry* @

r:>fig. 173 is shown depending on the input. Ad-
Fig. 173 Diagram: free text search on telep hone ditional e ntries that conta in the entered search
te rms are listed In the results list @ r:>fig. 173.
Free text search is ava ilab le in the Vehicle*, Ra-
If the desired term is still not displayed, enter
u dio*, Media*, Telephone* , Navigation * and Audi
co additional letters until it is displayed.
...... connect * menus .
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

165
Multi Med ia Interface

It is often enough just to enter the first letters of
the search term in order for it to display in the re-
sults list . For example, in the Telephone* menu,
write the initials of the contact being searched
separated by a space.
.,.Speller input : push the control knob up.
Selecting an entry from the results list
Requirement: at least one entry must be dis-
played in the results list @ ¢ fig. 173.

Selecting the input suggestion to complete
the entry
Requirement: an input suggestion to complete
the entry* ® r:>fig. 173 must be displayed.
.,.MMI touch input* : press the control knob. Or:
press on the MMI touch control pad *.
.,.MMI touch input*: turn the control knob to the
right. Select and confirm an entry from the list .
.,.Speller input : select and confirm ILIST !@
c:>page 164, fig. 172 . Or: push the cont rol knob
down. Select and confirm an ent ry from the
list .

Menus and Symbols

Fig. 1 74 Diag ram : menus and symbols

Symbol/ Description Description

@ Selected text Selected function
@ TMC Receiving TMC/online traffic information page
c:::> 220
Displays informat ion about the media source that is current ly se-
lected or a situation (such as an incom ing call) . Depending on veh i-
Entertainment sliding
® cle equipment, operation m ight also be possible using the open en-
menu
tertainment sliding menu (such as selecting a radio station or ac-
cepting a call) ¢ page 162.
Jukebox* impo rt ing proc-
© ess
Importing audio/video files to the Jukebox r:>page 230

® Repeat track The track currently playing is repeated <=:>

page 241
All files on the playlist are played in random order c:>page 241,
® Shuffle
Shuffle
Access information by pressing the control knob when the selected
(J) Arrow
text is act ive
Telephone signal
® strength bars
Telephone s ignal strength

166
 Multi Media Interfac e

Symbol / Description Description

Exclamation point on the
® telephone
Indicates missed calls

Signa l strength for t he active data co nnect io n, or

Data connect ion signa l
@ PIN: ente r the PI N (SIM)
strength bars*
@ 2G/3G/LTE*
@ Mute
@ Roaming
@) Importing process
@ Options menu*
@ Bluetooth*
@ Scroll bars
@ Input field
@ MMI touch*
@ Knob
@ Che ck boxes
@ Selection list
PUK: enter the PUK
Network coverage for the act ive data connection ~ page 196
2G : GSM networ k
3G : UMTS netwo rk
LTE* : LTE network
The audio source is muted q page 253
Outside the the mo bile netwo rk fo r the connec t ed ce ll phone or t he
inserted SIM caird
Import/update the contacts in the directo ry or the call lists
Select and confirm context -dependent func t ions as we ll as settings
within a menu item
Bluetoo t h device connected~ page 231 or ~ page 176
Name of a long list
Move within lists using the control knob
Informat io n that can be cha nged using t he let t er/num be r speller
qpage 164 or the MMI t ouch* ~page 160.
Poss ible to operate using the MMI touch control pad*
Setting fo r the selected fu nct ion by tu rn ing the control knob
You can sw itch certain functions on~ or offO by pressing t he con-
trol knob.
Settings for the selected f unction that a re accessed by pressing the
control knob

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

167
Voice recognition system

• Telephone • Favorites
• Audi connect • Call (XV)
• Navigation • Enter number
• Directory • Redial
• Radio • Read new text message
• Media • Navigate to (XY)
• Sound • Enter address/destination
• Help • Online destinations
• Help Speech dialog system • Cancel route guidance
• Help Telephone • Map
• Help Audi connect • Line (XV)
• Help Navigation • Next page/ previous page
• Help Map • Cancel
• Help Radio • No. I meant (XV)
• Help Media • Correction

TE, EPflON~
• Enter number • Call list
• Delete number/ correction • Redial
• Directory • Call mailbox
• Call (XV) • Telephone favorites
· business/ private/ land tine I mobile

• Navigate to (XV) • Block route for (XV) miles I Block

• Start I cancel route guidance the next section
• Directory • Route list
• Last destinations • Calculate alternative routes
• Navigation favorites • Online destinations
• Drive home • Special destination
• Enter address
• Enter country I town I street/ state
• Exclude route/ Exclude route for (XV) km/ m

• Map
• Day map/ Night map
• 2D driving position map/ 20 north position map/ 3D map/ Destination map/ Overview map

~UJDICONNECT
• Audi connect • Flight Information
• Travel Information/ Parking Information • City events
• Fuel prices • Online news
• Weather • Twitter

RADIO MEDIA
• Radio presets • Jukebox
CDI DVD
• FM
• FM /AM/ SIRIUS XM • •
• SD card l / SD card 2
• Station (XY) / Frequency (XV) • Audi music Interface/ IPod/ USB / Bluetooth /
• Traffic announcement on I off WI-Fl/ Medium (XV)
• Media favorites / Artists / Albums / Genres /
Tracks/ Playllsts / Videos
• Folder up
• Random playback on/ off

Fig. 175 Command overview

168

Voice recognition system
Operating
Appl ies to: vehicles wit h voice recognitio n system
You con operate many Infotainment functions
conveniently by speaking .
Requirements: the ign ition and the MMI must be
switched on ~ page 156, the re must not be any
phone call in progress and the park ing system
must not be active .
~ Switching on: briefly press the ~ button @
~ page 14, fig. 11 on the m ultifunction steer-
ing whee l and say the desired command after
the Beep.
~ Switching off : press and ho ld the~ button .
Or: press the [2] butto n .
~ Pause: say the command Pause. To resume,
press the~ button .
~ Correcting : say the command Correction. Or:
simply say a new command during an an -
nouncement c::> page 249.
Input assistance
The system gu ides you throug h the input with
visua l and audio feedbac k.
- Visual input assistance: after switching on
voice recogn it io n, a display w ith a selection of
poss ible commands appears. This command
display can be sw itched on or off . Se lect:
IMENU I button> Sett ings> left cont rol button
> MMI setting s > Speech dialog system .
- Audio input assistance : to have the poss ible
commands read, tu rn the voice recognition sys -
tem on and say Help.
For the system to understand you:
Speak clearly and dist inctly at a normal volume .
Speak louder when d riving faste r.
Emphasize the words in the commands even ly
and do not leave long pauses .
Close the doors, the windows and the sunroof* to
reduce background noise . Make sure that passen-
u
co
gers are not speaking when you are giving a voice
......
N command .
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Voice recognition system
Do not direct the air vents toward the hands-free
microphone, which is on the roof headliner near
t he front inte rior lights .
Only use the system from t he dr iver's seat be-
cause the hands -free microphone is directed to-
ward that seat .
Additional settings
page 249, Speech dialog system .
See c::>
A WARNING
- Direct your full attention to dr iving. As the
driver, you have complete responsibility for
safety in traffic . Only use the functions in
such a way that you a lways maintain com-
plete contro l over your vehicle in all traffic
situations.
- Do not use the voice recognition system in
emergencies beca use your voice may change
in stressful situations. It may take longer to
d ial the number or the system may not be
able to dial it at all. Dial the emergency
number manually.
@ Tips
- The d ialog pauses when there is an incom-
ing phone call and will continue if you ig-
nore the call. The d ialog ends if you answer
the ca ll.
- You can select an item in the list using ei-
ther the voice recognit ion system or the
cont rol knob.
Command overview
information
Appl ies to: vehicl es w ith voice recognit ion system
The following overv iews des cribe the comma nds
t hat can be used to operate the MMI using the
voice recognition system.
Alte rnative commands a re separate d using a"/ ",
for example say: Telephone / (or) Navigation /
(or) Radio.
Sequences of commands used to perfo rm an ac-
t ion are iden t ified w it h a"> ", fo r exa mple say:
Enter address > (t hen) Enter country/s tat e. ..,.
169
Voice recognition system

The major ity shown are main commands . This es . For a Business addre ss, you can also say busi-
system also recognizes synonyms in certain cas- ness, work , office or at the office .

Commands
Global commands
Applies to: vehicles with voice recogn ition system

You can a lways use t he global commands, re-

gar dless of t he me nu selec t ed.

Function Say:
Ope ning a menu Telephone / Directory / Navigation / Radio / Media / Audi con-
nect* / Car / Tone
Having the possible commands Help / Help Speech dialog system / Help Telephone /
read a loud Help Navigation / Help Map / Help Radio / Help Media / Help
Audi connect*
Te lephone functions Call (XV), for example Call "John Smith" /
Enter number / Redial / Directory / Read out new text mes-
sage I Read out new e- mail
Navigat ion funct io ns* Drive me to (XY) or Navigate to (XV), fo r example Navigate to
"John Smith" /
Enter address / Cancel route guidance / Map / Online destina-
tions* / Online destination (XV)*
Access ing favorites Favorites > follow the system prompts
Selecting a n entry from a list Line (XV)
Scro lling thro ugh a list Next page / Previous page
Correcting the command given Correction
Swit ching the voice recog nition sys- Cancel
t ern off

Telephone
Applies to: vehicles with voice recogn ition system and telephone

Requ iremen t : a cell phone must be connected to Depend ing on t he vehicle equipmen t and these-
the MMI ¢ page 176 and the Telephone menu lected men u item, you can say the following com-
m ust be open ¢ table on page 170. mands:

Function Say:
Call contact from directory Call (XV) , fo r example Call "John Smith"
Selecting a specific contac t nu mbe r Call (XV) at work / Private / Landline / Cell phone,
fo r exam ple, Call "John Smith" private
Selecting a phone number w ith an Call / Call work / Call private / Call land line / Call cell phone
address card open work
Calling a con tac t fr om your fa vor - Telephone favorites > a~er being prompted, say the desired
ites list contact > Dial
Displaying t he call list Call list

170
 Voice recognition system

Function Say:
Calling the last number dialed Redial
Dialing a phone numbe r Enter number > After being prompted, say the telephone num-
ber in groups of individual numbers, fo r example. 888 555
1212 > Dial
Correcting the phone number that Correction I Delete numb er
was entered
Showing contact information Directory > After being prompted, say the desired contact,
suc h as John Smith
Listen ing to messages Call voicemail
Entering the PIN (SIM) Enter PIN > when prompted, say the PIN in individual numbers
> Store
Corre cting the PIN entry Correction / Delete PIN
Correcting data input No I meant (XV)
Closing the full-sc reen command Close
list

- Please note t hat comm ands can only be giv-

@ Tips
- Contacts in the directory can sele cted us ing
the fu ll name ("first name last name" and
"last name, first name") as well as with only
the f irst or last name. This applies to cell
phones that transmit names separated into
first and last names.
en for t he primary phone * ~ page 176 .
- For more informat ion on supported cell
phones, visit www .audiusa.com/ bluetooth
or contact an a uthorized Audi dea ler or au -
thorized Audi Service Facility.

Audi connect (Infotainment)

Appl ies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi conn ect (Infotainment)

Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect

(Infotainment) m ust be met ¢ page 189 .

Function
Access ing Audi connect Infotain -
me nt serv ices
Audi connect Infotainment
Search areas for Audi connect Info-
tainment serv ices
Correcting data input
Say:
Audi connect > follow the system prompts
serv ices Weather / Online news/ Fuel prices/ Parking information /
Travel info rm ation / Twitte r/ Online t raffic information / City
events / Flight informat ion
Near destin ation / Nearby/ In a new city
No I meant (XV)

(D Tips
~ Always read the chapter ¢ page 196, Audi
C:::
r-...
connect (Infotainment) general information.
....
N
0
0
:E:
'<t

171
Voice recognition system

Messages (Audi connect (Infotainment))

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and Audi connect (Infotainment)

Requirement : a ce ll phone w ith a n active MAP

(Message Access Profi le) mus t be connected to
t he MMI ¢page 181 .

Function Say:
Text ed iti ng commands Read out / Addi / Delete / Record everything again / Replace
with (XV)/ Add recipient / Send
Reading out a new message Read out new te xt message / Read out new e-mail
Reading a message Read out text me ssage / Read out e-mail
Replying to the open text message Reply
Forwarding the open text message Forward > Add recipient / Insert template / Send
Correcti ng data inp ut No I meant (XV)

- Always read the chapter¢ page 196 , Audi

@ Tips
connect (Infotainment) general informa-
- For more information on suppo rted cell tion.
phones, vis it www .audiusa.com/bluetooth
or contact an author ized Audi dealer or au-
thori zed Audi Service Facility.

Navigation
Applies to : vehicles with voice recognition system and navigation system

Req uiremen t : the Navigation men u m ust be Depend ing on t he vehicle equipmen t an d these-
open ¢ table on page 170 . lected menu item, you can say the following com -
mands to enter a destination:

Function Say:
Open ing the list of previous naviga - Last destinati ons
tio n destinations
Access ing favo rites Navigation favorites
Selecting the home add ress Home addre ss or Drive home
Ente ring a n add ress wit h guidance Enter address > follow the system prompts
from the system
Individua l comma nds for entering a Enter country / Enter city I Enter ZIP code / Enter street / En-
destination ter house number
Making a co rrection wh ile entering a Correction
destination
Naviga t ing to a contact Drive me to (XY) or Navigate to contact, for examp le Drive me
to "John Smit h"
Navigating to a specific address for Navigate to (contact ) business / Private,
a contact for examp le, "Nav igate to John Smith"
Naviga t ing t o favorite s Navigation favorites > Line (XV) / Line contents> Start route
guidan ce when promp ted

172
 Voice recognition system

Function
Start ing route guidance with an ad-
dress card open
Ente ring a new desti nat ion/stop-
over when route gu idance is act ive
Start ing route guidance after enter-
ing a dest ination
Canceling current route guidance
Calculat ing alternative routes
Entering a point of interest by se-
lecting a search area with guidance
from the system
Destinat ion input cat egor ies
Search areas for entering points of
interest
Entering an online destination*
Correcting data inp ut
Closing the full-screen command
list
Say:
Navigate / Navigate to private addre ss / Navigate to business
address
Enter addre ss > enter the desired address when prompted>
confirm the new des tination/stopover if prompted
Start route guidance
Cancel route guidance
Calculate alternative route s
POI > Change search area > category or subcategory when
prompted, for examp le "restaurant"
Audi Service / Train station / Airport / Hotel / Hospita l / Park-
ing / Rest area / Restaurant / Gas station etc.
Nearby/ Along the route I Near destination / Near stopover /
In a new city / In a new stat e/ country
Online dest i nat ion (XV), for examp le "Online destination
"Lakeview Hotel" "
No I meant (XV)
Close

Requirement: you must be in the Navigation or lowing commands for additional settings in navi-
Map menu. Depending on the veh icle equipment gation:
and the selected menu item, you can say the fol-

Function Say:
General map options Map / Day map / Night map / Automat ically change map color
Map type 2D heading up map / 2D north up map / 3D map / Destination
map / Overview map / Standard map* / Google Earth map*
Showing the route list Route list
Showing the remaining distance/ Destination information
time when route guidance is active
Speed limit prompt How fa st can I drive here?
Setting voice guidance for active Voice guidance on I Voice guidance off I Voice guidance short-
route guidance ened I Voice guidance complete I Voice guidance traffic
Blocking a certain section on the Block route for (XV) mete rs/ kilometers / yards/ mil es/ Block
route next rout e I Avoid next section of route

- Always read the chapter pag e 196, Audi

(D Tips
¢

connect (Infotainment) general informa-

- Destinations may have to be spel led when tion.
u
entered, depending on which region you are
co
...... in and which men u lang uage you have se-
N
r-...
N lected.
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

173
Voice recognition system

Radio
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

Req uirement: the Radio mus t a lready be open. Depend ing o n the vehicle equipment and these-
lected frequency band, you ca n say the fo llow ing
commands :

Function Say:
Selecting the frequency band FM*/ SiriusXM * / FM / AM
Selecting a station from the station Channel (XV) / !Frequency (XV)
list
Selecting a station from favorites/ Radio presets > Line (XV)
presets
Setting the frequency Frequency (XV) / Frequency (XV) HD 1
Correcting data inp ut No I meant (XV)
Clos ing the full-sc reen command Close
list

Media
Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system

Requirement: you must be in the Med ia menu. Depending on the vehicle equipment and the ac-
tive media, you can say the following commands :

Function
Selecting a source directly
Selecting aud io/video files* from
the Jukebox*
Selecting aud io files on an iPod
(source: Audi music interface*)
Naviga t ing within a folder struc -
tu re/ list
Selecting shuffle
Correcting data inp ut
Clos ing the full-sc reen command
list
Say:
Jukebox*/ CO / DVD / SO card 1 / SO card 2 / Audi music inte r-
face* I iPhone* / USB* / Bluetooth* / Wi-Fi * / Medium (XV) , for
example "John 's player"
Media favor ites / Arti sts / Album s/ Genres / Tracks / Playlist s /
Videos
Art ists / Albu mis / Genres I Tracks / Playlists / Composers I
Podcast s / Audio books
Folder up / Line (XV)
Shuffl e on I Shuffle off
No I meant (XV)
Close

CJ)Note External voice operation

Applies to: vehicles with voice recognition system and exter-
Always follow the info rmation found in ~CDin nal voice operation
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
Requirement:

The ignition and the MMI must be switched on.

No phone call is in progress.

174
 Voice recognition system

The parking aid as well as the Audi voice recogni-

tion system must not be active.

A cell phone must be connected to the MMI w ith

the Handsfree profile ~ page 176.

The cell phone being connected must have voice

control that can be controlled externally .

.. Switching on: press and hold the 5l button on

the multifunction steering wheel* and say the
desired command after the external speech di-
alog begins .
.. Continuing/resuming the dialog: the system
remains ready to use for a short time after end-
ing the dialog . You can start a new external dia-
log during this time. Press the 5l button if
needed, and say a new command. Or : select
and confirm Resume on the MMI control panel.
.. Switching off: press and hold the 5] button .
Or: select and confirm Cancel on the MMI con-
trol panel.

(1) Tips
- There are no voice guidance* prompts when
a dialog is active.
- This function depends on the cell phone
used. You can obtain more information
from your cell phone service provider or
from your cell phone user guide .
-AUDI AGsimply provides access to control
your cell phone with voice operation and
does not take any responsibility for the con-
tents and commands within the external
voice control.

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

175
Telephone

Telephone (D Note

Introduction Always fo llow the information found in Q @ in

Applies to: vehicles with telephone Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
To make phone coils in your vehicle using the
/11/111,
connect your cell phone to the /11/111
via
@ Tips

Bluetooth. - The Bluetooth connect ion range is limited

to inside the vehicle. It can also be affected
Hand sfree by local condit ions and interference with
Afte r you have connected you r ce ll phone to the other devices.
MMI via Bluetooth , you can use the handsfree - To learn which Bluetooth connections and
system and operate telephone functions through wh ich of the funct ions in your cell phone are
your MMI. You can make calls using the antenna supported, check with your cell phone serv-
on your cell phone. ice provider or the database for mob ile devi-
ces at www .audiusa.com/ bluetooth .
A WARNING
-
- Med ical experts warn that cell phones can Setup
interfere w ith the funct ion of pacemakers .
Connecting a cell phone using Bluetooth
Always mainta in a m inimum d istance of 20
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
cent imeters between the cell phone anten-
na and the pacemaker.
- Do not carry the cell phone in a pocket di-
rectly over the pacemaker when the phone
is switched on.
- Switch the cell phone off immediately if
you suspect it may be interfering w ith the
pacemaker.
- Do not use the voice recognit ion system* Fig. 1 7 6 Displaying t he PIN for enter ing in the cell phone
Q page 169 in emergencies because your

voice may change in stressful situations . It Requirem ent

may take longer to dial the number or the
The vehicle must be stationary and the ignition
system may not be able to dial it at all. Dial
must be switched on.
the emergency numbe r manua lly.
- Switch your cell phone off in areas where The Bluetooth funct ion and visib ility of the MMI
there is a risk of an exp losion . These loca- Q page 251 and cell phone must be switched on.

tions are not always clearly mar ked. This

may include gas stations, fuel and chemical
storage facilities or transport vehicles, or lo-
cations where fue l vapors (such as propane
or gaso line vapor in vehicles or bui ldings),
chemicals or large quantities of dust parti-
cles (such as flour, sawdust or metal) may
be present in the air. This also applies to all
other locations where you would normally
turn your vehicle engine off .
- The demands of traffic requ ire your full at-
tent ion . Always read the chapter
Q page 156, Traffic safety information.
The cell phone to be connected must not be con-
nected to any other Bluetooth device.
The MMI must not be connected to a cell phone .
Connecting a cell phone
...Select: ! MENU I button> Telephone> Connect
mobile device > Find new devices > Next. The
available Bluetooth devices are shown in the In-
fotainment system display . Or select: ! M E NUI
button > Setting s> left control butto n > MMI
setting s> Connection manager Q page 250 . ..,_

176

~ Select and confirm the desired cell phone from
the list of displayed Bluetooth devices.
~ The MMIgenerates a PIN for the connection
setup ¢ fig. 176 .
~ Select and confirm Yes.
~ Enter the PIN for connecting on your cell
phone. Or: when the PIN is displayed on your
cell phone, confirm the PIN on your cell phone
and in the MMI.The time allowed for entering
the PIN is limited to approximately 30 seconds.
~ Pay attention to any additional system prompts
displayed on your cell phone, for example if the
system should connect automatically in the fu-
ture . Depending on the cell phone, you may
have to confirm downloading the directory sep-
arately .
After connecting successfully
After connecting successfully, information about
the connected profiles will appear. You can also
change the profiles later. Select: ! MENUI button>
Settings> left control button > MMI settings>
Connection manager ¢ page 250 .
In addition, the cell phone contacts are automat-
ically loaded in the MMIdirectory. This process
can take several minutes, depending on the num-
ber of contacts .
You can also make your connected cell phone the
default phone by selecting Set as default tele-
phone in the Connection manager ¢ page 251.
@ Note
Always follow the information found in ~ CDin
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
(D Tips
- Making phone calls through the MMI is only
possible using the Handsfree Bluetooth pro-
file.
- You can apply additional settings to con-
nected mobile devices using the Connection
manager ¢ page 250.
- You can also search for the MMI in your cell
u phone using the Bluetooth device search.
co
......
N - You only have to pair your device one time.
r-...
N
...... Bluetooth devices that are already paired
0
0
:E:
automatically connect to the MMIwhen the
'<t
Telephone
Bluetooth function is switched on, they are
within range and the ignition is switched on.
The last connected cell phone is given first
priority.
- Authorizing the MMIconnection in your cell
phone will make automatic connection pos-
sible .
- Pay attention to any system prompts dis-
played on your cell phone, for example if
the system should connect automatically in
the future . Depending on the cell phone,
you may also need to download the directo-
ry and confirm access to your text messages
separately.
- When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth
connection to the cell phone will automati-
cally disconnect . Depending on your cell
phone, phone calls in progress may be auto-
matically redirected from the MMIto your
cell phone and you can continue the call on
your phone.
- You can obtain more information from your
cell phone service provider or from your cell
phone user guide. For information on using
the telephone, visit www.audiusa.com/
bluetooth or contact an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
- Applies to: vehicles without secondary
phone: Several cell phones can be paired to
the MMI,but only one cell phone can be ac-
tively connected to the MMI.
- Applies to : vehicles without seconda ry
phone : If a Bluetooth device is already con-
nected to the MMI, it will be disconnected
when another device connects to the MMI.
Operating two telephones through the
MMI
'
You can connect two cell phones to the MMI, for
example your business cell phone as the primary
phone and your private cell phone as the secon-
dary phone. You can be reached in your vehicle
through both cell phones.
The first connected cell phone is displayed as the
primary phone in the MMI.The second cell phone
is connected as the secondary phone. .,.
177
Tele p hone

The directory from the connected primary phone
will always be displayed . If you wou ld like to use
the directory from the secondary phone, you
must switch the primary and secondary phone
¢page 178.
Connect ing a cell phone as the prima ry
phone
Connect your cell phone to the MMI via Blue-
tooth. The f irst connected cell phone is displayed
as the Main phone in the MMI.
See page 176, Connecting a cell phone using
¢
Bluetooth.
Connect ing a cell phone as th e secondary
phone
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to
the MMI as the primary phone.
Select: ! MENU ! button> Telephone > right con-
trol button > Connect addition al t elepho ne.
- If the primary phone does not connect auto -
matically to the MMI when the ignition is
switched on, for example because it is out
of the vehicle range or the Bluetooth func-
tion is switched off, then a previously paired
secondary phone is automatically connected
as the primary phone.
- You can send and receive messages on your
pr imary phone as well as on your secondary
phone ¢page 178, fig. 177. You do not
need to switch your primary phone and sec-
ondary phone fo r th is.
- You can also make your connected cell
phone the default phone by se lecting Set as
def ault telephone in the Connection man-
ager ¢ page 251.
Using the telephone
Opening the telephone
Applies to: vehicles wit h te lepho ne

See page 176, Connecting a cell phone using

¢

Bluetooth.
Example: you have connected your business ce ll
phone to the MMI as the prima ry phone and your
private cell phone as the secondary phone. To be
ab le to call contacts from you r private cell phone
d irectory, you must switch the primary and sec -
ondary phone, since the directory from the pri-
Fig. 177 Example: te lephone funct ions in selection menu
mary phone is always displayed.

Swit ching the primary and secondary phone

Requirement: a primary phone and a seconda ry
phone must be connected.

Swit ch main and addit ional phone: select:

IMENU ! button > Telephone > right control but-
ton > Swit ch ma in and addition al phone.
Fig. 17 8 Examp le: addit ional te lephone functions in selec-
Q) Tips t ion menu

- Please note that only the d irectory from the

Requirement: a ce ll phone must be connected to
primary phone is always displayed.
the MMI ¢ page 176 .
- You can see if a cell phone is connected as
the primary phone or secondary phone in .. Select: ! MENUI button> Telephone > left con-
the Connection manager ¢ page 250. Or: trol button .
the dev ice name of the connected primary
The following phone functions are availab le
phone is shown in the Telephon e menu
¢ fig. 177/ 9 fig. 178:
(such as MyPhone).

178
 Teleph o ne

CDRecent calls . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 179 ® Accepted calls

@ Favorites . . ... . ... . .... . ... . . .
@ Direct ory . . . . . . ... . ........
© Enter number . . . . . .... . . . . . . . .
® Text message (MyPhone)*/text
message (secondary phone)* ....
@ E-mail (MyPhone)*/e -mail (secon-
dary phone)* . . . . . .... . . . . . . . .
The device name for your cell phone is displayed
in the Telephone men u, for example text mes-
sage (MyPhone) <=:>
fig . 178.
Dialing a phone number
Applies to: vehicles with telep hone
181 Select: a contact from the list> right cont rol but -
... 184 ton.
179 - Call: call the selected contact .
- Connect additional telephone */ Swit ch main
181 and additional phone* : see <=:>
page 178 .
- Edit phone numbe r before calling : edit a
183 phone number before dialing it. Select and con-
firm OK to edit . Or: press the left control but-
ton to return without editing.
- Send text message: write a text message to
the selected contact.
- Delete call list : select and confirm if you would
like to Delete this entry or Delete all entries .
- Store as favorite : store the se lected contact as
a favor ite .
- Show contact details : see <=:> page 185.
- Connection manager : see<=:> page 250 .
- Bluetooth setting s: see <=:> page 2 51.
- Online settin gs: see <=:>page 252.
- Wi -Fi sett ings: see<=:>page 195, Wi-Fi hotspot.
- Telephone settings : see q page 186.

Fig. 17 9 Num be r speller Favorites

Requirement: a phone number or contac t must

be stored as a favorite <=:>
page 181.

Select and confirm a favorit e in the favor ites list.

Directory

Requirement: you must have at least one contact

stored in your cell phone .
Fig. 180 Dialing a phone number from the ca ll list
Select and confirm a phone number from the di-
• Select : IMENU Ibutton > Telephone> left con- rectory <=:>
page 184.
trol button. Enter number

Call list - Entering a phone number as a sequence of

numbers : enter the number using the numbe r
Requirement: the call list must conta in a phone
number. speller <=:>
fig . 179 .
- Entering the phone number as a sequence of
Turn the contro l knob to display the call list. letter s: se lect and confirm IABC
Iabove the
Select and confirm the desired telephone num- number speller . Enter a sequence of letters us-
ber from the recent calls list . ing the letter spe ller, for example AUDISER-
VJCE.
u
(0
Call list symbols <=:>
fig. 180: - Dialing a phone number : select and confirm 6"'.
......
N
r--.
N
CDMissed calls Or: push the control knob down. Select and
......
0 @ Dialed numbers confirm OK.
0
:E
<t

179
Telephone
- De let ing individual charact e rs: se lect and con-
firm <RI.
- De let ing all characte rs entered at once : tu rn
the control knob with the character selection to
<RIand press and ho ld the contro l knob . Or: se-
lect the right contro l button > Clear input field .
Accepting/ending a call
Applies to: veh icles with telephone
- Accepting a call : select and confirm Answer.
- Declining a call : select and confirm Decline .
- Muting the act ive call : select and confirm
Mute .
- Ending a phone call / cancel dialing: select and
confirm End call.
Calle r information : t he name, phone number or
Unkno w n appears in the Infotainment system
disp lay depending on if the caller has been stored
in the directory and if the phone number has
been transmitted . A picture may also be dis -
played, depending on whether you have assigned
a picture to a contact in your d irectory and if it
was transferred to your MMI. You can find out if
your cell phone supports this function from your
cell phone network provider, your ce ll phone
owner's manual or at www.audiu sa.co m/ blue -
to oth .
(D Tips
- The rad io or media playback is muted during
a phone call.
- Missed ca lls are displayed with a symbo l in
the stat us line of the Infotainment system
display @ ¢ page 166, fig. 174.
During a phone call
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Requirement: the re mus t be a call in progress .
.,.End call : you can end a phone cal l.
i- Send tone se que nce : you can enter t one se-
quences (DTMF) direc t ly using the number
speller and send to the othe r person on the
call.
.,.Other call options : press the right control but-
ton.
180
The following options a re possib le du ring a call
depending on the cell phone being used and the
type of connect ion:
- Answering an addit ional call: if t here is an in-
coming call while another call is active, you can
select Answer to put the existing ca ll on hold
and answer the incoming call . If you select De·
cline , the incoming call will be declined .
- Accepting an incoming call when there is an ac-
tive call and a call on ho ld: select Replace . The
active call is replaced with the incoming call.
- Muting the incoming call: select and conf irm
Mute .
- Additional call : select: Find contac t > Call list /
Dire cto ry/Favorites > an entry from the list.
Mute : if you select and confirm this function, the
other person on the phone cannot hear you. You
can hear the other person. To turn the micro-
phone back on, select and confirm Unmute .
Hold call / Resume he ld call : you can place the ex-
isting call on hold and resume it again . To re-
sume t he call, se lect and confirm the call you
would like to resume.
Transfer call to mobile device *: select and con-
firm Transfer call to mobile device to transfer
the existing ca ll from the MMI to your cell phone .
Switch t o hand s-free mode *: Requiremen t : you
must have a p hone call in progress on your cell
phone. Se lect and confirm Sw itch to hands-free
mode to transfer the call from your cell phone
back to the MMI.
Swap call : alternate between two phone calls
while one of the calls is on hold. Se lecting End
call will end the active phone call. A phone call on
ho ld can be resumed using the right cont ro l but-
ton> Resume .
Connection manage r: see ¢ page 250 .
Tele phone setting s: see ¢ page 186 .
(D Tips
- To be notified of a n incom ing call dur ing a
phone call, the call waiting funct ion in your
cell phone m ust be switched on when using
the Handsfree profi le. IJll-

- You can o bta in more information from your
ce ll phone service prov ider or from your cell
phone user guide .
- When leaving the vehicle, the Bluetooth
connection to the ce ll phone w ill automati -
ca lly disconnect . Depending on you r cell
phone, phone calls in progress may be auto-
matically redirected from the MMI to your
cell phone and you ca n cont inue the call o n
you r phone.
- The display of an incoming phone call in the
Infotainment system d is play may still be
visible fo r a few se conds after a call is an -
swered/ig nored depending on th e cell
pho ne in use .
Making an emergency call
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
.,.Se lect: IMENU Ibut t on > Telephone > left con -
t rol button > Enter number > Enter emergency
call number (for example, 911) > OK.
_&.WARNING
- Beca use your p hone wo rks with radio s ig-
nals, a connection cannot be guara nteed un-
der all circumstances. Do not rely on only
yo ur phone w hen it comes to essent ial com -
mu nication (suc h as a med ica l em er gency).
-Always follow the instructions g iven by t he
eme rge ncy perso nnel d uring an emergency
call and only end t he call whe n t hey inst ruct
you t o do so .
(j) Tips
Eme rge ncy nu m bers are not the same every-
where. Find ou t which eme rge ncy nu mb er is
used in your cur rent locati on .
Favorites
Applies to: vehicles with telep ho ne
Up to 50 contacts, in addition to the voicemail
num ber, can be stored in any order in the fav or-
ites list.
u
co
......
N .,.Select: IM ENU Ibutto n > Telephone > left con-
r-...
N
...... t rol bu tt on .
0
0 sired templa t e from t he list .
:E:
'<t
Telephone
Storing an existing phone number as a
favorite:
- Select an d confirm Call list/ Directory.
- Select a contact or phone numbe r from t he list.
- Sele ct: righ t contro l but t on > Store as favorite .
- Ent er a name for the favor ite or select a sug-
gestion .
- Select and confirm Store.
Renaming stored favorites
- Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list.
- Select the right cont rol button> Rename fa-
vorite .
Moving stored favorites
- Select: Favorites > a favori te from the list .
- Sele ct t he right cont rol butt on> Move favorite .
- Select an d confirm t he loca t ion of t he selected
favorite .
Deleting a stored favorite
- Select: Favorites > a favorite from the list .
- Select the rig ht cont rol button > Delete favor-
ite > Delete this favorite or Delete all favor-
ites.
Messages
' Text messages
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message Access Profile
(MAP)
Depending an the cell phone being used and the
cell phone network contract, you can receive and
send text messages using the MMI.
Requirement
A cell phone must be connected to the MMI via
Bluetoot h MAP (Message Access Profi le)
c>page 176.
.,.Sele ct: ! ME N UI button> Telephone > left con -
trol button > Text message (MyPhone)/ Text
message (secondary phone)* .
Write new text message
Select a nd con fir m Write new text message.
- Using a template : select and confirm the de -
181
Telephone

- Writing your own text *: select and confirm Do
not use template. Enter text using the MMI
touch contro l pad* or the letter speller.
- Enter one or mo re recipients.
- Se lect and confirm Send.
lnbox
Displays all received text messages.
Se nt
Displays all sent text messages .
Outbox
Displays all text messages to be sent .
Storing a text me ss age as a template
Ten text message temp lates are st o red in the
MMI. You can save up t o ten additiona l tem-
plates .
- Create a text message.
- Select and confirm Store as template.
Resume last te xt mes sage
The last ed ited text message can be resumed.
Reply*
A reply can be sent for the se lected message in
t he Inbox.

Drafts Forward

Displays all text messages that have not yet been The selected text message ca n be forwarded to a
sent and stored text messages. diffe rent recipient.

Send again*
(D Tips
The selected text message can be resent.
- Please note that you may have to act ivate
the receiving and sending of text messages Delete th is te xt me ss age *
in your cell phone depend ing on the SIM
The selected text message can be deleted.
card being used (for example, when using a
Multi-SIM). You can obtain mo re informa- Read out 1 )
tion from your cell phone service provider or
You can have the MMI read an open text mes-
from your cell phone user g uide.
sage .
- For more information on suppo rt ed cell
phones, vis it www .audiusa. com/ bluetooth Text messaging settings*
or contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
To display when a new text message is received,
thorized Audi Service Facility .
activate the Text message not ifications. New
- You need a cell phone with Message Access
text messages a re ind icated with an enve lope 121
Profile that also supports the sending func-
in the Infotainment system display status line .
tion to be able to send text messages
through the MMI. Connection manager
See¢ page 250.
Message options
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message Access Profile Wi-Fi setting s
(MAP)
See ¢ page 195 .
.,.Se lect: ITELIbutton > left control button > text
Telephone settings
message (MyPhone)/ text message (secondary
phone)* > Inbox/S ent/ Outbox > right control See ¢ page 186.
button.

The fo llow ing options may be availab le depend -

ing on the se lected menu .

1> Not availa ble in a ll language s .

182
 Telephone

@ Tips {!) Tips

Messages that are deleted in the MMI are also
de leted in the ce ll phone automatica lly.
E-mail*
Applies to: ce ll pho nes w it h Bluetooth Message Access Profile
(MAP)
Depending on the type of cell phone being used,
you con receive and send e-mails t hrough the
MMI.
Req uirement: a cell phone mus t be connected to
the MMI via Bluetoot h MAP (Message Access Pro-
page 176 . You can find ou t in your cell
file) <=:>
phone owner's manua l if yo ur ce ll phone sup-
ports this funct ion .
• Se lect : I MENU I button > Telephone > left con-
t rol bu tt on > E-mail (MyPhone)/ E-mail (se con-
dary phone )*.
Write new e-mail
Selec t a nd confi rm Write new e-mail.
- Using a template : select and confi rm the de-
sired template from the list.
- Writing your own te xt*: select and confirm Do
not use template . Enter text using the MMI
touch co ntro l pad* or the letter speller .
- Enter one or more recipients.
- Se lect and confirm Send .
Inbox
All receive d e-m ai ls a re d isplayed .
Sent
All sen t e-ma ils are d isplayed .
Outbox
- For more informat ion on sup ported cell
phones, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth
or contact an a uthorized Audi dea ler or au-
thorized Aud i Service Facility .
- To ensure that you r sent e-ma ils are re-
ceived, connect your cell phone to the Wi-Fi
hotspot * in the vehicle so that the e-ma il
app on you r ce ll phone conti nu es to have In-
ter ne t access. If you are st ill not receiving e-
m ail s even t ho ugh yo u have a successf ul
co nnec tio n, t he n cont act your e-mail se rvice
prov ider or yo ur cell phone serv ice provider.
Message options
Applies to: cell phones with Bluetooth Message Access Profile
(MAP)
• Select: ! ME N UI button> Telephone > left con-
t rol button > E-mail (MyPhone)/ E-mail (secon-
dary phone)* > Inbox/ Sent / Outbox > righ t
control button.
The following op ti ons m ay be ava ilable d epen d -
ing on the selected m enu.
Store as template
Ten e-ma il temp lates are stored in the MMI. You
can save up t o t en additional templa t es .
- Create an e-mail.
- Select an d confirm Store as template .
Resume last edited e-mail
The last e-ma il in prog ress can be resumed.
Reply*
A reply can be sent for the se lected e-ma il in the
lnbo x.

All e-mails that will be sent are di splayed . Reply to all*

Drafts A reply can be sent for the se lected e-ma il in the

In box and it will be sent to all of the entered re-
All saved e-m ails th at have no t been sent ye t a re
cipients.
d ispla yed.
Forward
u
co
(D Note
The sele cted e -mail can be forwarded to a diffe r-
......
N
r-... Always follow t he info rma ti o n fou nd in r:=:>
0 in ent rec ipient . IJ,,
N
...... Wi-Fi hotsp ot on page 195 .
0
0
:E:
'<t

183
Telephone

Delete this message* - The voicemail number depends on the cell

phone service provider.
The se lected e-mail can be deleted.

Read out 1) Directory

You can have the MMI read an open e-ma il.
Opening the directory
E-mail settings* Applies to : vehicles wit h te lepho ne

To disp lay when a new e-mail is received, activate Af ter connecting the cell phone, the contacts in
the E-mail notifications . New e-mails are indicat- it are automatically imported into the MMI.
ed w ith an enve lope 121in the Infotainment sys-
tem display status line. __________ 1_e_1.e
_p_ h_o_n_e_· _D_,_
·e_c_t_o_r,_·_________ ,

Connection manager ~ m f
See ~page 250.
J• Voicemai l
• Sm ,th. John
• Muster. Manfred
Wi-Fi settings • Schmidt. Ralf

See !=)page 195.

Telephone settings
See !=)page 186.
(D Tips
- Messages that are deleted in the MMI are
also automaticallydeleted in the connected
cell phone.
- You cannot read any messages while driv-
ing.
Listening to voicemail
App lies to: vehicles with tele ph one
~ Se lect: IMENU Ibutton >Telephone> left con-
trol button. Select and confirm Call list/ Direc-
tory/ Favorites > Voicemail.
- Entering the voicemail number : enter the de-
s ired number. Select and confirm OK.
- Dialing the voicemail number: select and con-
firm Voicemail.
@ Tips
- This service must be set up and activated in
advance by the cell phone service provider.
You can obta in more information from your
cell phone service prov ider.
Fig. 181 Directory
Requirement: you must have at least one contact
stored in your cell phone.
~ Select: ! MENUI button> Telephone> left con-
trol button > Directory.
- Calling a contact: se lect and confirm a contact
from the directory. The phone numbers for the
selected contact are displayed. To make the
call, select and confirm a phone number.
- Free text search for a contact: see Q page 165.
Contacts are displayed in alphabetical order and
can be sorted by first or last name Q page 187,
Sort order.
The directory can be opened through the Tele·
phone menu as well as th rough the Navigation*
menu .
@ Tips
- Additional informatio n on free text searches
can be found under Q page 165.
- Check fo r a possible request to synchronize
on you r cell phone . Requests to synchronize
the directory must be confirmed so that
your cell phone contacts can be loaded into
the MMI.

1> Not availab le in a ll languages.

184
 Telephone

- The contact display in the MMI depends on Showing contact details*

the cell phone used. For more information Applies to : vehicles with te lepho ne
on supported cell phones, visit
You can show contact details depending on the
www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or contact an
vehicle equipment.
authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
- Please note that only the directory from the
primary phone* is always d isplayed.
- The contacts from the cell phone may not
be transferred in alphabet ica l order. If there
are too many entries, contacts with differ-
ent first letters may be missing in the MMI.
- The contacts in the local MMI memory are
Fig. 182 Showing contact deta ils
always visible and can be accessed by other
users .
~ Select: ! MENUI button> Telephone> left con-
trol button .
Free text search for a contact ~ Select and confirm Directory > a contact from
Applies to: vehicles with telep hone the directory.
~ Select : I MENU I button > Telephone > left con- ~ Select: righ t control button > Show contact de-
t rol button > Directory. tails .
~ To limit the search, enter the initials of the con-
- Calling : select and confirm the desired tele-
tact being searched with each initial sepa rated
phone number.
by a space in the input field . Enter additional
- Navigating : to start navigat ion, select and con-
letters if necessary.
firm the desired address. Select and confirm
~ Se lect and confirm a contact from the directo-
Start route guidance.
ry. The phone numbers for the selected contact
are displayed . Press the right control button to open add it ional
~ To make the call, select and confirm a phone options for the contact details.
number .
Add destination
To start navigat ion, select and confirm the de-
s ired address. Select and confirm Start route
- You can scroll through long lists quickly by
guidance.
turning the contro l knob quickly. The scroll-
ing speed depends on the number of list en- Store as favorite
tries.
See ¢ page 181, Favorites.
- Additional informat ion on free text searches
can be found under ¢ page 165. Send text message*
You can send a text message ¢ page 181 to the
selected contact.

Delete contact
The selected contact can be deleted .

u
co
(D Tips
......
N
r-... - Contacts edited in the MMI directory cannot
N
...... be automatically updated in the connected ..,.
0
0
:E:
'<t

185
Telephone
ce ll phone. Audi recommends editing cell
phone contacts d irect ly in the ce ll phone .
- Only the co ntacts in the loca l MMI memory
ca n be ed ite d or de leted .
Importing and exporting contacts
App lies to: vehicles with tele ph one
Con tacts in vCard forma t (. vcf) can be impor t ed
into the directory or exported .
Requi remen t : a n SD car d must be inse rt ed in one
of the SD ca rd readers* r=;,page 22 9 or a USB
st orage dev ice m ust be connected to the Audi
m usic interface * r=;,page23 4 o r the require -
ments for Audi connect Infotainment se rvices *
m ust be met r=;,page 189.
~ Se lect: IMENU Ibut t on > Telephone > left con-
tro l button > Directory.
~ Se lect: rig ht contro l butto n > Directory set-
tings .
- Importing contacts from a storage device : se -
lect and confirm Import contacts > SD card 1/
SD card 2 or USB device 1/ USB device 2 > de-
sired contacts > Start import .
- Exporting contacts to a storage device : select
and confirm Export contacts > SD card 1/ SD
card 2 or USB device 1/ USB device 2 > desired
contacts > Start export .
- Selecting all contacts at once to import / ex-
port : select and confi rm Import contacts / Ex-
port contacts > SD card 1/ SD card 2 or USB de-
vice 1/ USB device 2 > All > Start import / Start
export .
(D Tips
page 196, Audi
- Always read the chap t er r=;,
connect (Infotainm ent) general informa -
tion.
- For additional informa ti o n on t he myAudi
account, vis it www .audiusa.com/myaud i.
- The imported contacts are stored in the lo-
ca l m e mory of the directory .
1> Depend s on th e conne cted cell phone.
186
- A max imum of 1,0 00 contacts can be im-
ported . You can check t he directory memory
page 187 .
capacity at any t ime r=;,
- Never save impo rtant data on memory ca rds
or USB storage devices . Aud i is not responsi-
ble fo r damaged or lost files an d media.
- Contacts t hat were dow nloaded from a ce ll
phone cannot be exported .
- There sho uld be no ot her files or fo lde rs on
t he storage m edium containing the contacts
to be impo rted.
Additional settings
Telephone settings
Applies to : vehicles with te lepho ne
~ Sele ct: ! ME N UI bu tton> Telephone > righ t co n-
t rol bu tton > Telephone settings .
Call options*
Call forwarding : you can swi t ch the forwarding
of incom ing ca lls to yo ur vo icemai l o r to another
phone numbe r on and off. You can che ck if th e
funct ion is activated or deactivated w it h Check
status .
Call waiting : yo u a re alerted t o an incom ing ca ll
dur ing a pho ne call when t he fun ct ion is swit ched
o n~ - You can che ck if t he func t ion is act ivate d
o r d ea ct ivat ed with Check status .
Send own telephone number : se nding your
phone numbe r with an o utgo ing call can be ac t i-
vate d a nd d ea ct ivate d. Wit h t he Network-de-
pendent setting, t he setti ng list ed in t he con -
tract w it h t he ce ll phone serv ice provider is used.
The sett ings on ly apply to the Telephone men u in
the MMI. Please note that the settings o n your
ce ll phone wi ll apply after disconnect ing the
Bluetoot h connection. You can check if the func-
tion is activated or deactivated with Check sta-
tus .
Ringtone and volume settings 1l
Using the Mute telephone function, you can
switch the ringtone playback through the MMI
speaker on and off. You can play the ringtones
 Telephone

using the Ringtone function . Select and confirm Memory capacity

an entry from the list. For the Ringtone volume/
Shows the Memory capacity fo r the directory.
Messagevolume sett ings, refer to ¢ page 254 .
The Microphone input level can be adjusted dur- You can manage up to 17,000 contacts with the
ing a phone call using the control knob. directory. You can load up to 4,000 contacts
from your cell phone into each directory. You can
also impo rt up to 1,000 contacts from a storage
device.
- Several cell phones can be paired to the
MMI, but only two* cell phones can be ac- Sort order
tive ly connected.
You can sort the contacts in your d irectory alpha-
- To delete all paired Bluetooth devices, the
betically according to Last name or First name.
Bluetooth function can be reset to the fac-
tory default sett ings¢ page 250. Import contacts/Export contacts
See¢ page 186.
Additional options
Download directory
.,.Select: IMENU Ibutton> Telephone > right con-
To update the contacts in the MMI, you can man-
trol button.
ually download your cell phone contacts . De-
Connection manager pending on the cell phone, the Bluetooth connec-
See ¢ page 250. t ion may need to be disconnected and reconnect-
ed to upda te the contacts.
Bluetooth settings*
Hide contacts without phone number
See C) page 251.
When this function is switched on~, contacts
Online settings* that do not have any numbers assigned to them
See C)page252. will be grayed out in the directory.

Wi-Fi settings*
See q page 195, Wi-Fi hotspot.

Directory settings
Appl ies to: vehicles with tele ph one

.. Select : IMENU Ibutton > Telephone > left con-

trol button > Directory > right control button>
Directory settings.

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

187
Telephone

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with telephone

Problem Solution
Pairing the cell phone to the MMI Check if the requirements for pairing a ce ll phone have been met
failed. ¢ page 176 .
Or: check if you accidentally declined the connection setup PIN on
your cell phone . If necessary, repeat the pairing process
¢ page 176 .
After pairing, not all cont acts/ no Avoid using sped.al characters in names .
contacts are loaded in the MMI. Avoid using contact groups on your cell phone .
Certain te le phone funct ions are The te lephone funct ions depend on the cell phone service provider
grayed out or not availab le. and the cell phone you are using. You can obtain more info rma-
tion from your cell phone se rvice provider, in your cell phone user
gu ide or in the database for mob ile dev ices at www .aud iusa. com/
bluetoo t h.
Some te lephone functi o ns are On corporate phones, some Bluetooth settings may not be com-
switched off o r not available, even patib le or the ce ll phone Bluetooth funct ion may be deactivated.
though the cell phone is support- You can obtain more informat io n from you r system admin istrato r.
ed .

188
 Audi connect (Infotainment)

Audi connect - Read this chapter before operating

~ page 196, Audi connect (Infotainment)
(Infotainment)
general information.
Introduction
Appl ies to vehicles wi t h Aud i connect (I nfotainment) Configuration through
With Audi connect Infotainment services, on line myAudi
information is transmitted directly to the vehicle
Audi connect (Infotainment) configuration
and then integrated .
Appl ies to vehicles w it h Audi connect (I nfo t ainm ent)

A WARNING
-
To reduce the risk of an accident, only use
Audi connect Infotainment services when
road and traffic conditions permit. Always
read and follow the notes in~ page 156,
Traffic safety information.
Setup
Requirements for Audi connect
(Infotainment)
Appl ies to vehicles with Aud i connect (Infotainmen t )
The data connection for Audi connect Infota in-
ment se rvices is made through an embedded SIM
card (eSIM card) that is equipped in the veh icle.
Some Audi connect Infotainment services must
be configured through your personal myAud i ac-
count before using them for the first time.
- If you do not have a personal myAudi account
yet, you can register on line at
www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
- Add your vehicle to your myAudi account.
- Activate/config ur e the Aud i connect (Infotain-
ment) services you would like for your veh icle in
your myAudi account.
- For some Audi connect Infotainment services,
you may also have to enter your myAudi user
data or your myAudi PIN when accessing serv-
ices in the MMI to connect your veh icle to
myAudi .

The fol low ing requirements must be met to use For detailed information on configuration, visit
the embedded SIM card: www.audiusa.com/myaudi.

- You have already reg istered at

www.audiusa.com/ myaudi and ass igned ave- Logging into myAudi in the vehicle
hicle. Appli es to vehicles w it h Audi connect (I nfota inm ent)

- You have also already logged in to your myAudi
account under Audi connect plan for the em-
bedded SIM card and accepted the terms of use
given there. For add itiona l information, contact
an authorized Aud i dea ler or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
To use some Audi connect Infotainment services
(such as Twitter*), you must first connect your
vehicle to myAudi to transfer your personal set-
tings from your myAudi account.

Then your Audi connect Infota inment serv ices are

activated and can be used in your veh icle.

(D Tips
- After the free subscription has ended or the
data volume has been used up, data packets
Fig. 183 Logg ing into myAudi
can be purchased for the use of Audi con-
u
co
nect Infotainment services. You can find ad-
...... .,. Select: ! MENUI button> Audi connect> right
N ditional information about fees and pur-
r-... control button > Log in.
N
...... chasing at www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
0
0
:E:
'<t

189
Audi connect (Infotainment)
~ Enter your myAudi user data. Or : enter your
eight-digit myAudi PIN.
~ Confirm your entry with OK.
Then you can open your persona l settings from
your myAudi account in your vehicle.
(D Tips
You can receive your myAudi PIN if you have
set up a myAudi account. For additional infor -
mation, see www.audiusa .com/myaudi .
Opening Audi connect
(Infotainment)
App lies to veh icles with Audi conn ect (Infotainment)
Fig. 184 Audi connect (Infotainmen t ) ho me page
~ Select: the IMENU ! button> Audi connect.
~ If necessary, confirm the note displayed with
Accept.
A list of all of the available Audi connect Infotain-
ment services is shown in the Infotainment sys-
tem display ~ fig. 184.
You can also filter the Audi connect Infotainment
services by category:
~ Select: I M ENU I button > Audi connect > left
contro l button> for example, Navigation for
the Aud i connect Infotainment services in the
navigation menu ¢ page 193.
Audi connect
Infotainment services
Basic functions
Applies to veh icles with Audi conn ect (Infotainment)
If available, funct ions specific to certain services
are in the selection menu of that particular Audi
l) Not available in all languages.
190
connect Infotainment service ¢ page 159. The
basic functions are in the corresponding options
menu:
~ Select: ! MENUI button>
Audi connect> desired
Audi connect Infotainment service> right con-
trol button .
Depending on the Audi connect Infota inment
service selected, the following basic functions are
available :
Save as preview*
You can save every Audi connect Infotainment
service as a preview and display it on the Audi
connect (Infotainment) home screen (D
¢ page 190, fig. 184 .
Show on map
You can show selected contents on the map and
use them for route gu idance.
Log in
See¢ page 189, Logging into myAudi in the vehi-
cle .
Read out 1 >
You can allow the MMI to read out the selected
contents .
Calling*
If a phone number was assigned to an entry, you
can call the number, for examp le to reserve tick-
ets.
Start route guidance
If a city was added to an entry, such as for City
events, you can use it as a nav igation destination.
Route guidance starts immediately.
Change search area
The set search area can be changed at any time.
Additional information on search areas can be
fo und under ¢ page 208 . ..,.
 Audi connect (Infotainment)

Closing Audi connect Infotainment services Traffic light information

Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infota inment)
Regard less of the function selected, you can
close an Audi connect Infotainment service at any
time and return to the home screen r=:>page190,
fig. 184.

Parking information
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)

Information o n parking locations and fees in the

selected search area (for example Nearby).

~ Select and confirm Parking information . Fig. 185 Examp le : display of a speed recommendat ion

You can use t he right control button to sort t he

parking locations By distance or By availability.

Travel information
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)

Information on attractions in the selected search

area.
~ Select and confirm Travel information .
~ Select and confirm an attract ion to display the
details .
Fuel prices
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
Information on gas stations with the lowest fuel
prices fo r your vehicle in the selected search area.
~ Select and confirm Fuel prices.
You can use t he right control button to sort the
fuel prices By price or By distance.
Fig. 186 Example: display of an estimated wa it t ime
The traffic light information ll gives you a speed
recommendation, at which to drive through the
next green traffic light (D r=:>
fig. 185 or informs
you of the wait time at the next red light @ . The
traffic light information can be displayed in the
driver information system, in t he status line of
the Audi virt ual cockpit* or in the head -up dis-
play*.
General information
The traffic light information is subject to certain
system limitat ions and may be unavailable or on-
ly partially available in the following situations:

- when the perm itted speed lim it is exceeded

- if the next traffic light is less than 100 ft (30
m) away
- if the est imated wait t ime at a red light is less
than four seconds
- if there is no traffic light data available
- if the data connection was interrupted
u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
g 1l Service in prepara tion at the t ime of pr inting. Can add lat-
~ e r or is only available in certa in regio ns.

191
Audi conn e ct ( Infotainm e nt )
- when the camera-based traffic sign recogn i-
tion* is malfunctioning ¢ page 104
- when there a re warnings from the camera-
based traffic sign recognition*
Switch ing traffic light information on and
off
- Select: IMENU Ibutton > Audi connect > Traffi c
light informati on > On (~) or Off (0 ).
A WARNING
-
- When traffic light information is shown, a l-
so always pay attention to the traffic situa-
t ion, the distance to other vehicles and the
area around the vehicle. The driver is always
responsible for assessing the traff ic situa -
t ion .
- Always adapt your speed to the current
weather, road and traff ic conditions. The
displayed information must never cause you
to ignore lega l traffic regulations and pose a
safety risk.
- Regardless of the traffic light informat ion,
you should always monitor your speed using
the speedometer and make sure you are ad-
hering to the legal speed limit .
- The traffic light information does not adjust
yo ur vehicle's speed t o the speed recom-
mendation shown in the display.
{D) Tips
- Traffic light information is not yet ava ilable
in a ll cities and is not nationwide .
- Units of measurement and language set-
tings are displayed based on how they were
set in the MMI system settings
¢ page 249 .
- Always read the chap t er¢ page 196, Audi
connect (Infotainment) general informa-
tion .
Weather
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
Information on current weather conditions as
well as weather forecasts for the selected search
area .
192
.. Select and confirm Weath er.
You can also display the current weather condi-
tions on the map , fo r example.
.. Select: left control button > on entry .
Flight information
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
Information on flights and current arrival/depar-
ture times in the selected search area .
.. Select and confirm Flight information .
City events
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
Information on events in various categories in
the desired search area.
.. Sele ct City Events > left cont rol button > cate-
gory.
Online news
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
Youcan checkthe current headlines of your fa-
vorite publications in the MMI.
Requirement: your myAud i acco unt must be sub-
scribed to newsfeeds and your vehicle must be
connected to myAudi ~ page 189 .
.. Sele ct: ! ME N UI button> Audi connect > Online
news> desired new sfeed > a headline .
(D Tips
If yo u have not subs cribed to any pe rsonal
newsfeeds in your myAudi account, pre-con-
figured newsfeeds will be displayed.
'Twitter
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
You can access the most important functions in
your Twitter accoun t through your MMI.
Requireme nt:
You must have connected your myAudi account
with Twitter. You can find additional information
fo r this on line at www .audiusa.com/ myaudi.

You must have connected your vehicle with
myAudi r=>
page 189.
.,.Select: IMENU I button> Audi connect > Twitter
> left contro l button > desired function (for ex-
amp le, Trends).
The follow ing categories can be selected in the
Twitter menu:
- My tweets : News Feed and the Tweets you have
posted are listed.
- Home: the Tweets for everyone you follow are
displayed.
- Trends: topics on Twitter that are currently
popular w ith in a country .
Different functions are available depending on
the Twitter category you have selected:
- New tweet : you can post a new tweet using
pre-made templates or using myAudi tem-
plates that you have created yourself.
- Refresh: the selected Twitter function is re-
freshed.
- Favorite: mark a Tweet as favorite to show you
li ked it.
- Retweet: you can quote a Tweet to share it with
others.
@ Tips
- Other settings such as account, language,
Tweet security and location settings cannot
be changed in the MMI. These changes must
be made on the Twitter website.
- You can only connect one Twitter account
with your myAudi account.
- Audi connect (Infotainment) makes it possi-
ble to access Twitter . Permanent avai lability
cannot be guaranteed, because that de-
pends on Twitter.
Travel (travel guide)
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
You can use the Audi MMI connect opp to store
points of interest on your mobile device (such as
u a smartphone) and then use them for route
co
...... guidance in the MMI.
N ...Select: ! MENUI button> Audi connect > left
r-...
N
......
0
0
Requirement:
:E:
'<t
Audi connect (Infotainment)
The Audi MMI connect app must be installed and
open on your mobile device .
You must be logged into your myAudi account in
the Audi MMI connect app and you must have se-
lected your vehicle.
The Wi-Fi function on your mob ile device and on
the MMI must be switched on.
The MMI must be connected to the network.
... Press: ! MENU ! button> Audi connect > left con-
trol button > Information category> Travel.
After opening the trave l guide, trave l tips in your
area will be displayed including current ratings as
well as the corresponding category.
... Press the left control button to change the cat-
egory (such as bars nearby).
_& WARNING
'--- -
- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mo-
bile dev ices and other simi lar devices when
the vehicle is stationary because, like all
loose objects, they could be thrown around
the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause
serio us injuries. Store these types of devices
securely while driving.
- Do not use any wireless devices on the front
seats within range of the airbags while driv-
ing. Also read the warnings in the chapter
r::>page 277, Front airbags.
(D Note
(i) in
Always follow the information found in r=>
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
(D Tips
Units of measurement, language se tting s and
time are shown in the Infotainment system
display based on how they were set in the
MMI system settings r=>page 249.
Audi connect (Infotainment) in navigation
Applies to : vehicles wit h a navigat ion syste m and Audi con·
nect (Infota inm ent)
control button > Navigation .
193
Audi connect (Infotainment)
The fo llow ing Audi connect In fota inment serv ices
are curre nt ly availab le:
- Naviga t ion wit h online map view a nd Street
View ¢ page 217 .
- Point of Interest (POI) online search with
voice recognition (such as res taur a nt s): plan
rou t e g uida nce using t he MMI con t rol panel
¢ page 209 and the voice recognition system
¢ page 169 .
- Set up dest ina t ions in you r MMI using yo ur
myAudi account or onl ine map view
¢ page 217 .
- Online traffic information : receive up-to-the -
minute t raffic info rmation about accidents,
road construction and other incidents
¢ page 221 .
- Map update : import nav igat ion map up dates
directly to yo ur vehicle using a n SD ca rd or as
an on line update¢ page 219.
@ Tips
- For the map update Aud i connect Infotain-
ment se rvice via SD car d, check the current
software vers ion in your vehicle and then
check www.audiusa.com/myaudi to see if a
newe r ve rsion is ava ilable. You can a lso have
th e ne w naviga t ion da ta insta lled by an Audi
d eale r, w hich can be done for an addition a l
char ge.
- You can also fin d ad d it io na l informat ion
a bout th e map update on line at
www.audiusa.com / myaudi .
Audi connect (Infotainment) on the phone
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
~ Se lect: IM ENU Ibut t on > Audi connect > left
contro l button > Communication .
The fo llow ing Audi con nect Info tai nment services
a re curre nt ly availab le:
- Stor ing contacts on yo ur compute r us ing yo ur
myAudi Account and loadi ng the contacts int o
t he MMI d irect o ry ¢ page 186.
194
Audi connect (Infotainment) in Media
menu
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
~ Sele ct: ! ME NU I button> Audi connect > righ t
control button > Entertainment.
- Online media and Internet radio : offer s access
t o diff eren t on line me dia services as well as In -
ternet radio and ope ration th rough t he MMI us -
ing the Audi MMI connect app ¢ page 233 .
Applies to: vehicles with Wi·Fi audio player
- Wi-F i audio player : you can access t he med ia
center t hroug h a Wi-Fi connecte d media player
(su ch as a sm a rtphone) ¢ page 232.
.8, WARNING
It is o nly saf e t o use ta ble t s, lapt ops, mo bile
devices a nd ot her simi la r devices whe n the ve-
hicle is sta t ionary beca use , like a ll loose ob -
jects, they co uld be thrown aroun d the inside
of the vehicle in a cras h and cause serious in-
ju ries. Store these types of devices sec ur ely
while driv ing.
(D Note
Always fo llow the information fo un d in ¢ 0 in
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
@ Tips
- Also see t he cha pter¢ page 196, Audi con-
nect (Infotainment) general information .
- For more informat ion on t he Wi-Fi a udi o
player and su pp o rted devices, contact an
authorized Audi dealer or aut horized Audi
Service Facility.
Additional options
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment)
~ Select: ! ME N UI button> Audi connect > right
cont rol button.
The following options are available in the Aud i
connect Infota inment serv ices overview :
Log in*
See page
c:::> 189, Logging into myAudi in the vehi-
de . ~

Connection man ager
See ¢ page 250.
License subscript ion
The val idity and expirat ion date of your licenses
are displayed . When the function is switched on
~, the message Warning before subscription
expires will display to warn you that your license
is about to expire.
Refre sh
The content of the selected Audi connect Info-
tainment service o r the entire Audi connect (Info-
tainment) list is updated.
Wi-Fi hotspot
Appl ies to: vehicles with Wi -Fi hotspot
You can use the MMI as a Wi-Fi hotspot to con-
nect up to eight Wi-Fi devices to the Internet.
While driving, restricted use of unsecured, light,
small wireless devices is only possible from the
rear of the vehicle.
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on.
.,.Se lect : IMENU Ibutton > Telephone> right con-
trol button > Wi -Fi settin gs.
The follow ing settings can be selected:
Wi-F i
The MMI Wi-Fi hotspot is deactivated at the fac-
tory. Switch the Wi-Fi hotspot to Hot spot before
establishing a connection between your vehicle
and your Wi-Fi dev ice.
- On: the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot is active and visib le
to other devices . You can connect your Wi-Fi
device to the MMI and use the Internet connec-
tion if necessary .
- Off: the MMI Wi-Fi hotspot is deactivated. An
Internet connection for Wi-Fi devices is not
poss ible.
A WARNING
-
- To reduce the risk of an accident, use the
u
co
...... Audi connect Infotainment serv ices w ith a
N
r-... Wi-Fi hotspot on ly in the rea r seat when the
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Audi co nn e ct ( Inf ota inm e nt )
vehicle is in motion, or only when the vehi-
cle is stat ionary.
- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mo-
bile devices and other similar devices when
the vehicle is stationary because, like all
loose objects, they could be thrown around
the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause
serio us injuries . Store these types of devices
securely while driving.
- Do not use any wireless dev ices on the front
seats within range of the airbags while dr iv-
ing. Also read the warnings in the chapte r
¢ page 2 77, Front airbags.
- As the driver, do not allow usage of the Wi-
Fi hotspot to distract you from driving, as
this cou ld increase the risk of an accident.
(D Note
- Under some conditions, certain mobile devi-
ces and ope rating systems may automati-
cally sw itch from your vehicle's Wi-Fi hot-
spot to the device's mobi le da t a connection.
In that event, standard text and data usage
rates would apply whi le the device's mobile
data connection is in use . Please refer to
documentation provided by your mobile de-
vice's manufacture and your data carrier for
details , related terms and privacy state-
ment.
- You are responsib le for all precautions tak-
en for data protect ion, anti-virus protection
and protection against loss of data on mo-
bile devices that are used to access the In-
ternet through the Wi-Fi hotspot.
(D Tips
- In vehicles without Audi connect (Infota in-
ment)*, the use of the Wi-Fi hotspot is only
possible fo r the Wi-Fi aud io player*. A data
connect io n to the Inte rnet cannot be es t ab-
lished.
- For add itiona l information about t he Audi
connect Info t ainment services, visit
www .audiusa.com/ myaudi.
195
Audi connect (Infotainment)
Configuring the data
connection
App lies to vehicles with Audi conn ect (Infotainment)
The data connection for Audi connect Infotain-
ment services is pre-configured at the factory .
However, if a configuration should be necessary,
you can adjust the following settings.
.,. Select : IMENU Ibutton> right control button>
Connection manager.
.,. Select : right control button > Online settings>
Data connection settings.
Using the Data connection settings menu, you
can set when an Internet connection should be
made . The Internet connection disconnects auto-
matica lly once the requested Audi connect Info-
tainment service no longer requires any data.
The fo llow ing settings can be selected:
Aud i connect (MMI)
With the Audi connect (MMI) func t ion, you can
Allow or Deny the use of Audi connect Infotain -
ment servicesif the connectionis set to No re-
quest or With request.
Wi-Fi devices*
Using the Wi-Fi devices function, you can Allow
or Deny a connection to the Internet.
A WARNING
- As the driver, do not allow usage of the Wi-
Fi hotspot to distract you from driving, as
this could increase the risk of an accident .
- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mo-
bile devices and other similar devices when
the vehicle is stationary because , like all
loose objects, they could be thrown around
the ins ide of the vehicle in a crash and cause
serious injuries . Store these types of devices
securely whi le driving.
- Do not use any wireless devices on the front
seats within range of the airbags while driv-
ing. Also read the warnings in the chapter
page
<=> 2 77, Front airbags.
196
(D Note
Always follow the information found in ¢ (!) in
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
Audi connect
(Infotainment) general
information
Audi connect Infotainment services
App lies to vehicles w it h Aud i connect (I nfotainment)
(D Tips
- You can only use services supported by Aud i
connect (Infotainment) if you have the op-
tional MMI Navigation plus equipment w ith
MMI touch* and Audi connect (Infotain-
ment).
- Use of the LTE* mobile network standard is
not available in every country. Contact an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility or your cell phone service
provider for additiona l information.
- Usage of Audi connect Infotainment serv-
ices depends on the avai lability of services
through third party providers.
- Audi connect Infotainment services are on ly
available within the cell phone network cov-
erage from your cell phone service provider.
- Audi connect Infotainment services are
available in the USA. Audi connect Infotain-
ment services are currently not availab le in
Canada or in Mexico.
- Also read the information in the chapter
q page 176, Telephone.
- Availability, scope, providers, screen display
and costs of services may vary depending on
the country, model, model year, end device
and rates . For additional information, vis it
www.audiusa.com .
- An initial registration/activation on the
myAudi platform at www.audiusa.com/
myaudi is required to use individual serv-
ices. You can contact an authorized Audi
dealer or Aud i connect (Infotainment) cus-
tomer serv ice at (877) SOS-AUDI (2834) to
 Audi co nn e ct ( Inf ota inm e nt )

receive information on options for expand-
ing your usage and any costs that may re-
su lt.
- The Audi connect Infotainment services are
a Wi-Fi/Internet-based system. If the sys-
tem does not function correctly even
though all of the requirements are met,
please try again later or contact Audi con-
nect customer service at 877-505-AUDI
(2834).
- For detailed information on Audi connect
(Infotainment) and the Terms of Use, refer
to www. audiu sa. com .
Data protection
Appl ies to vehicles wit h Aud i connect (Infota inment)
@ Tips
- You can find add itiona l information in your
MMI in the options menu for the selected
Audi connect Infotainment service and also
on line at www. aud iusa. com .
- Your privacy is important to us.
= AUDIAGcollects, processes, shares and
transmits your persona l information in ac-
cordance with legal regulations in order to
ensure proper function and availability of
the individual Audi connect Infotainment
services. You can view the complete, current
and valid Audi connect data protection poli-
cy in your MMI.The myAudi platform is
available for to you to activate additional
Audi connect Infotainment services and to
transfer data to your vehicle, among other
se rvices. A one-time registration is required
to establish a connection to your vehicle.
For this purpose, AUDIAGcollects, process-
es, transmits and uses your required per-
sona l information as required for you to use
the services provided by AUDIAG.Your in-
formation is not distributed to third parties.
Using your cell phone with your myAudi
platform allows you to transmit data for
your Audi connect Infotainment services
functions to your vehicle and you can allow
specific vehicle data to be transmitted from
your vehicle.
- Byactivating special information services
that are part of your Audi connect portfol io,
you can use these functions directly in your
vehicle by entering data to confirm your
identity (to use social networks, for exam-
ple). To do this, the identification informa-
tion you provided is forwarded with the re-
quest to the respect ive se rvice provider.
Then you can access your persona l content
using a secure connection . This content is
displayed in the vehicle for your use . Your
personal content is not stored with in Audi
AG.The necessary connection information is
processed and used for providing serv ices
and the proper funct ion of the services in
accordance with applicab le legal guidelines.
- You can find additional information in your
MMI in the options menu for the selected
Audi connect Infotainment service and also
online at www .audiusa. com .
- Byproviding Audi connect Infotainment
services, Audi of America is authorized to
collect, process, transmi t and transfer infor-
mation about you and your vehicle. Addi-
tional information can also be found in your
MMI in the options menu for the selected
Audi connect Infotainment service.
- Informat ion on our data protection meas -
ures in conjunction with the mobile Audi
connect (Infotainment) app lication can be
found in the applicat ion's privacy policy. For
add itiona l information about the
www .audiusa .com / myau di webs ite or oth-
er applications, websites or on line services
connected to Audi, visit www .audiusa.com /
privacy.

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

197
Audi connect (Infotainment)

Troubleshooting
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect (Infota inment)

Problem
Audi connect Infotainment serv·
ices: individual Audi connect Info-
tainment services are grayed out or
not available.
Wi-Fi hotspot: it is not possible to
connect through Wi-Fi.
Solution
Some Audi conn,ect Infotainment services must be activated/con-
figured through your personal myAudi account before using
them for the first time. You can find detailed information on line
at www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
Delete all existing Wi-Fi connections on your mobi le device and
restart it .

198
 Audi connect vehicle control

Audi connect vehicle Setup

control Applies to vehicles w it h Audi connec t vehicle cont rol

To use Audi connect vehicle control services 1l,

Introduction
please note the following:
Appl ies to veh icles wit h Aud i conn ect vehicle cont rol

With the Audi connect vehicle control services l) ,
you can access various information or use individ-
ual functions in the Audi MMI connect app or in
myAudi .
Audi connect vehicle control includes the follow-
ing services:
- Remote locking and unlocking ¢ page 200.
- Vehicle status report ¢ page 200.
- Parking location ¢ page 200 .
- Geofencing Alert ¢ page 201.
- Speed Alert ¢ page 201.
- Valet Alert¢ page 201 .
- Stolen Vehicle Locator ¢ page 201.
- Online Audi service request ¢ page 201.
(D Tips
- Accessing specific data or controlling func-
tions remote ly depends on the charge level
of the vehicle battery. Therefore, these
functions only have limited availability after
switching off the ignition.
- The services are provided through a SIM
card installed in the vehicle . The cost of the
call and data connections is included in the
price for the services . Services are provided
assuming that the cell phone network re-
quired for the installed SIM card is funct ion-
ing and ready to ope rat e . The available serv-
ices set by Aud i AG are only available within
the cell phone network coverage area for
the cell phone service provider selected by
Audi AG.
- You can also find more information on Audi
connect on line at www.audiusa.com.
Creating and verifying a user account
"' Create an account at www.audiusa.com/myaudi
and verify it.
Setting a key user in the vehicle
Requirements: the ignition must be switched on .
Another key user must not be set in the vehicle .
If necessary, reset the key user ¢ page 200.
"' Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU ! but-
ton > Audi connect > if necessary, Display
available functions > right control button>
Audi connect user management > Key user >
Set key user.
"' Enter the us er name for your ve rified account
and enter the 10-digit veh icle code. You can rub
the key tag for your remote control key to re-
veal the vehicle code ¢ page 35.
"' Select and confirm Log in.
You can now use the vehicle control services
through the Audi MMI connect app or thro ug h
www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
Using vehicle control services in the Audi
MMI connect app
Requirement: your mobile devices must be com-
patible.
"' Install and sta rt the Audi MMI connect app on
your mobi le device .
"' Log in to the Audi MMI connect app using your
user name and Audi online password and select
your vehicle.
(D Tips
- Store the vehicle code in a secure place. It
may be necessary to re-enter the vehicle
code.

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
...... l) In pre parat ion at t he t ime of pri nt ing. The ava ilab ility of
0 the services offe red depends o n th e country an d ma y
0
:E: chang e over tim e .
'<t

199
Audi connect vehicle control

- Pay attention to upper- and lower-case let - - The ignition must be switched off.
ters when entering the vehicle code.
- If you do not have the 10-digit veh icle code, Vehicle status report
contact an authorized Audi dealer or author- Applies to vehicles w ith Audi connect vehicle control
ized Audi Service Facility.
The Driver Information System collects data un-
der certain conditions and sends it to a server.
Additional options
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control When data is stored, yo u can access va lues such
as these using the se rvice:
License subscription
- Remaining range
The validity and expirat ion date of you r subscrip-
- Fue l tank level
tions are displayed. When Warning before sub-
- Oil level
scription expires is activated, a message wi ll be
d isp layed warning you that your license is about - Vehicle doors are open/closed or locked/un-
to expire. locked
- Mileage
Select: !MENU ! button> Audi connect > Display - Next oil change
available functions > right control button> Li-
- Next inspection
cense subscription.
- Warning messages
Resetting the primary user - Side marker lights/parking lights on/off

For examp le, you ca n reset the key user whe n For additional information on the Driver Informa-
selling your vehicle in order to deactivate these tion System, refer to c:>page 15, Driver informa-
services . tion system.

Requirement: the ign ition must be switched on.

A WARNING
Select : !MENU ! button> Audi connect > right Do not ignore messages and warning or ind i-
control button > Audi connect user management cator lights that turn on in the vehicle be-
> Key user> Reset key user. cause of the information in the status report .
This could lead to break downs in on the road,
Warning levels
accidents and serious injuries.
Requirement: the primary user must have set one
or more warning levels. Secondary users can only
see if a warning level is act ive or not .
Parking location
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
Select: !MENU ! button> Audi connect > right
The vehicle collects data under certain cond it ions
control button > Alerts.
and sends it to a serve r.

Remote locking and When data is stored, you can access values such
as these using the service :
unlocking
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control - Vehicle location display,
- Display of one's own location,
You can lock and unlock your veh icle using this
service. - Route to you r vehicle .

If your mobile dev ice also has a navigation func-

Requirement
tion, yo u ca n navigate to your last kno wn parking
- This requires the 4-dig it PIN that you specified loca t ion .
during the verification on www.audiusa.com/
myaudi.
- The vehicle must be stationary.

200
 Audi connect vehicle control

Deactivating and activating parking position

{!) Tips
- Select : IMENUI > Audi connect> Car Finder
You can set on myAud i if you would like to be
parking position.
notif ied via push notifications and/or e-mail.
If you do not set./, no location informat ion will
be sent to the server. Valet Alert
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
(D Tips
If you give your vehicle over to a parking service,
- The new parking location cannot be deter-
you can set a zone and a speed limit using the
mined with this service if the vehicle is
Aud i MMI connect app . If the vehicle leaves the
moved after shutt ing the vehicle off and
zone or the exceeds the speed limit, you will be
without switching the ign it ion on and off
notified by a push notification and/or e-mail.
again, for example when being towed or if
the veh icle is stolen. Requirement
- If the vehicle is moved and shut off again
- You must be verified as the primary user of your
using the second key, for example, the new
vehicle on myAud i.
parking location is transmitted to the server
after switching the ignition off. (D Tips
You can set on myAudi if you would like to be
Geofencing Alert notified via push notifications and/or e-mail.
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control

You can set approved and forbidden zones for Stolen Vehicle Locator
your vehicle using this service. If your vehicle Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
leavesan approved:zoneor enters a forbidden
This service helps you to track your vehicle if it is
zone, you will be notified by a push notification
stolen.
and/or an e-mail. You can set up to five zones
and also assign time limits . Proceed as follows if there is a theft:

Requirement .,.Contact the police. You receive a Case ID .

.,.Call the service hotline and give your Case ID .
- You must be verified as the primary user of your
vehicle on myAudi. The service hotline will forward the established
data to the police .

You can set on myAudi if you would like to be @ Tips

notified via push notifications and/or e-mail. You receive the Audi Service hotline number
when you purchase your vehicle.
Speed Alert
Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control Online Audi service
You can set up to two speed limits for your vehi- request
cle using this service. If your vehicle exceeds a set Applies to vehicles with Audi connect vehicle control
speed limit, you will be notified by a push notifi-
Requirement: to be able to use on line Audi serv-
cation and/or e-mail.
ice request, you must activate the service at
Requirement www .audiusa.com/myaudi and select an author-
u
co
...... ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi service facili-
- You must be verified as the primary user of your
N
r-...
N
...... vehicle on myAudi.
~- ~
0
0
:E:
'<t

201
Audi connect vehicle control

Onli ne Audi service request t ransmits service-rel -

evant data to your selecte d author ized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi service facility. They will
contact you before your next service appo int-
ment.

(D Tips
You can deactivate t he on li ne Audi service re-
quest at www.audiusa.com/myaudi.

202
 Emergen cy call

Emergency call Making an emergency call

Introduction
The following functions may be available depend-
ing on the vehicle and the market.
Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function
The emergency coll con be mode two different
ways.

- Emergency call ¢ page 203.

- Online roads ide assistance ¢ page 204 .

@ Tips
- The services are provided through a SIM
card installed in the vehicle . The cost of the
call and data connections is included in the
price for the services. Services are provided
assuming that the cell phone network re- Fig. 187 Front head liner : cover for the em ergency call but-
quired for the installed SI M card is function- ton

ing and ready to operate. The available serv-

ices set by Audi AG are only available within
the cell phone network coverage area for
the cell phone service provider selected by
Audi AG.
- You can find what data will be transferred
at www.aud iusa.com.
- These services cannot be deactivated using
the settings in the Infotainment system.
Emergency call
Description
Applies to : vehicles with emergency call function
You can request help when in an emergency or
dangerous situation using the emergency call
function l) _ An emergency call is a combination
of data transmission and a phone call. The data
transmission from your vehicle forwards impor-
tant information, such as the vehicle and position
data, to the emergency call center.
Requirement: the LED @ must be green when
the service is available . The service is not availa-
ble when the LED is red.
Manual emergency call
Requirement: the ignition must be switched on .
.. Tap the cover (D ¢ fig . 187 to open it .
.. Press the emergency call button. The LED@
blinks green and the emergency call is started.
.. If you press the emergency call button by m is-
take, then press it again immed iately. The
emergency call is canceled.
Automatic emergency call
The vehicle electrical system initiates an auto -
matic emergency call under certa in circumstan-
ces, for example if an airbag deploys. The LED in
the emergency call button @ blinks green . The
emergency call is made . This cannot be canceled.
(D Tips
If the emergency call is canceled due to a
poor connection, then the system automati-
cally tries to connect again.

u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0 1l The availabilit y of the services offe red depend s on t he
0
:E count ry and may chang e over t ime .
<t

203
Emergency call

Messages · Calling online roadside ass istance

Applies to: vehicles with emergency call function Applies to: vehicles with on line roadside assistance

1!/1
Emergency call function : malfunction! Re- The roadside assistance call can be made two
stricted functionality . Please conta ct Service differ ent ways.

If the indicator light t urns on and the message

-
....
0

appears, you can only make an emergency call
with rest ricted funct ion. For examp le, you cannot
call the emergen cy call cente r, but dat a may st ill
be t ransmitt ed under certa in circumst ances/
Drive to an authorized Audi dea ler or aut horized
Audi Service Facility immediately to have the
malfunct ion corrected.
II Emergency call function : malfunction!
tion unavailable. Please contact Service
If t he indicator light t urns on and the message
ap pears, you can not make an eme rge ncy call.
Drive to an aut horized Audi dealer or aut horized
Audi Service Facility immedia t ely to have t he
malfunct ion corrected .
Online roadside
assistance
Description
Applies to: vehicles with online roadside assistance
You can request help if you are in an accident or
breakdow n situation using on line roadside ass is-
tance 1>. A roads ide assistance call is a comb ina-
tion of data transmission and a phone call. The
data transmission from your vehicle forwards im-
portant information to the Audi service cente r,
such as the vehicle and pos it ion data.
0
I
Func-
Fig. 188 Front headliner: roadside assista nce button
Calling roadside assistance manually
.,.Press t he button @ ~ fig. 188. The LEDin t he
but t on turns red. Road side ass istance is called.
.,.If you press the button @ by mista ke, then
press it again. Or
.,.Select and confirm Cancel or End call in the In-
fotainment system.
Automat ic roadside assistance (Audi incident
assistance)
A minor accident is detected by the vehicle elec-
trical system. You have the option of select ing
betwee n Call online roadside assistance or Make
emergency call .
.,.Select one of the options and confirm it by
press ing the control knob.
@ Tips
If t he roadside assistance call is canceled due
to a poor connection, then the call must be
made again .

l) The availab ilit y of t he services offe red depends on t he

country and may change over time.

204
 Navigation

Navigation A
- WARNING
Opening navigation - The demands of traffic require your full at-
Applies to: veh icles with navigation system tention. Always read the chapter
q page 156, Traffic safety information.
The navigation system directs you to your desti-
- Obey all traffic laws when driving.
nation, around traffic incidents and on alterna-
tive routes, if desired. - The route calculated by the navigation sys-
tem is a recommendation for reaching your
destination. Obey traffic lights, stopp ing re-
strictions, one-way streets, lane change re-
strictions, etc.

Fig. 189 Diagram : Ente r dest ina tio n menu
.. Press the I NAV/MAPI button.
The Enter destination menu is displayed after
opening navigation. The following information
can be displayed in the Infotainment system dis-
play:
(D Input field for free text search
@ Home address ................
@ Last destinations ..............
@ Stored favorites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
As soon as you select an entry from the list (de-
pending on the vehicle equipment), the corre-
sponding destination d isplays as a map preview*
@ r::!>
fig . 189.
If you have connec t ed a ce ll phone to the MMI,
your di rectory contacts will also be listed if they
have navigation data assigned to them.
(D Note
- If the driving directions conflict with traffic
laws, obey the traffic laws .
- To reduce the risk of an accident, adjust the
volume of the navigation system so that sig-
nals from outside the veh icle, such as police
and f ire s irens, can be heard easily at all
times .
(i) Tips
- Snow and obstruct ions on the GPS antenna
206 or interference caused by trees and large
207 buildings can impair satell ite recept ion and
206 affect the system's ability to determine the
veh icle position. Several deactivated or mal-
207
functioning satell ites can also interrupt GPS
reception and affect the system's ability to
determine the vehicle position.
- Because street names sometimes change,
the names stored in the MMI may in rare
cases differ from the actual street name.

The Favorites @ ¢ fig. 189 menu item as well as

the directory/contacts are only shown in the En-
ter destination menu if you have ente red one or
more characters using the input field.

Switching between destination entry and the

map :

- Press the I NAV /MAPI button repeated ly until

the map is displayed . Or: select the left control
u
~ button > Switch to map .
N
r--.
N
~
0
0
:E
<t

205
Na v ig a t ion
Entering a destination
Free text search for destinations
Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system
With the free text search, you can enter the navi-
gation destination data all at once in any order
using the MMI touch control pad* or the letter/
num ber speller (for example, 20 Main St., Los
Angeles). Likewise, you can search for points of
interest, contacts, previous destinations or fa -
vorites to navigate to the desired address.
Press the ! NAV/MAP ! button
repeatedly unt il the
Enter destination menu is d isplayed ¢ page 205,
fig. 189 .
.,.Push the cont rol knob up . The input field is d is-
played @ ¢ page 205, fig. 189.
- Ente r one or more search terms into the input
field .
- If avai lab le, confirm the input suggestion * to
complete the entry or a word suggestion *. See
¢ page 164, Letter/number speller .
- Turn the control knob to t he right to change
t he results list .
- Select and confirm a destination from the re -
su lts list .
- Se lect and confirm Start route guidance.
The route displays as an ove rview in the map .
Route guidance is a lready act ive ..
Narrowing the search area
All countr ies/s t ates ar e se lected at t he fac t ory
for the free text search .
- Select t he right control bu tton > Country/ state
selection in the input field (D ¢ page 2 05,
fig. 189 .
- Select t he coun t ry or st ate( . ) t hat shou ld be
searched for in t he free text se arch in orde r to
nar row t he nu mbe r of res ults and increase t he
search speed . The se lect ed entry in the coun -
try/state se lection is stored . Or: select All
countries/ states .
@ Tips
- The MMI input su ggest io ns de pend on the
last navigated destinations.
206
- Up to 50 ent ries can be stored in the last
destinations list.
- Additional informa t ion on free tex t se ar ches
can be fo und under¢ page 165.
Loading the last destination
Appl ies to: vehicles with navigation system
Your last destinations are automatically stored
and can be loaded directly as a destination .
Requirement: a d est inati on was a lready navig at-
ed to .
.,. Press t he INAV/MAP! button repeatedly unti l
t he Enter destination me nu is displayed
¢ page 2 05, fig. 189 .
Your last dest ination is listed d irectly in the Enter
destination menu unde r t he home address and
identifie d with the symbo l @ ¢ page 20 5,
fig. 189 .
- Select and confirm one of the last des t inations
from t he list.
- Select and confirm Start route guidance.
Deleting last dest inat ions
- Select one of the last destinations from the list .
- Select: right con t rol button> Delete destina-
tion > Delete this last destination or Delete all
last destinations.
The sele cte d desti nat io n or all last d est inati ons
is/are de leted and no longer d isp layed in the En-
ter destination menu .
· Entering an address
Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system
As an alternative to free text search, you can al-
so enter an address in stages .
.,. Press t he INAV/MAP! butt on repeatedly unti l
t he Enter destination me nu is displayed
¢ page 205, fig. 189.
.,.Select: left control button > Enter address.
- Entering a destin ation using a country/state :
sele ct and confi rm Country/ State. Select and
confirm a country/state direct ly from the list . ..,_
 Na vi gation

Or: search for a country/state using the input
field.
- Entering a destinati on using the City/ ZIP
code: se lect and confirm City/ ZIP . Ente r a city
or a ZIP code . Or: select and confirm a city from
the list.
- Select and confirm additional detai ls about the
destination such as Street , House number or
Downtow n.
- Destinati on ent ry using a st reet inter section* :
Requi rement: you must ente r a street . Se lect
and confirm Inte rsection. Select and confirm a
street d irectly from the list. Or : search for a
street using the input field.
- Se lect and confirm Start route guidance.
Setting a destination from the map
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
A point on the mop con be used as the destina-
tion.
Setting a home address/favorite as the
destination
Applies to: vehicles wi th navigat ion system
You con quickly and easily start route guidance
to your home address using the home address
function. Favorites allow easier access to fre-
quently used destinations.
~ Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeatedly until
t he Enter dest ination men u is displayed
r::o
page205, fig. 189 .
Setting a home address as the destination
Requirement: a home address must be stored
¢ page 213.
Your Home address is shown directly in the Enter
destination menu @ r::o
page 205 , fig. 189 .
- Select: Home address > Start route guidance.
Sett ing a favo rite as the destination

Requirement: a favorite must be st ored as a des-

~ Press the I NAV / MAPI button repeated ly until
th e map is displayed.
- Adjusting the scale: turn the contro l knob to
the left or right.
- Activating crosshairs: press the cont rol knob.
The crosshairs are shown on the map .
- Moving the crosshairs: move the crosshairs to
the dest ination using the MMI touch contro l
pad* ¢ page 161.
- Hiding the crosshairs: press the IBACKI button.
- Setting as dest inat ion: press the control knob
when the crosshairs are shown . If necessary,
select and confirm Add as stopover and then
Start route guidance.
t ination r:opage 213.
- Enter at least the first three letters of the de-
sired favo rit e in the free text sea rch input field.
The favo rites fo und are shown in the Infotain-
ment system disp lay @ ¢ page 205, fig. 189 .
- Select and confirm the des ired entry.
- Select and confirm Start route guidance.
(D Tips
-Add itiona l settings for the home address
can be fo und under r:opage 213 .
- Add itiona l settings for the favorites can be
found under ¢ page 213.

Additional informati on about th e locati on of

the crosshairs: when you select map content us -
ing the crosshairs, a display of available informa-
tion appea rs (such as street name, address or
points of interest) @ ¢ poge 215, fig. 196 .

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

207
Na v ig a t ion
Transferring a destination from the
directory
Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system
You can navigate directly to destinations in the
directory.
Fig. 190 Possible di rectory /c ontacts
Requirement: an address with navigation data or
a nav igat ion destination must a lready be as-
sig ned to a con t act ¢ page 213 .
.,.Press t he IN AV/MAPI button repeated ly until
the Enter destination menu is d isplayed
"*page 205, fig. 189.
.,.Se lect : left cont rol button > Directory > a con-
tact.
The d irectory/contacts a re shown in alphabetical
order and are marked wit h symbo ls to ind icate
the storage location :
(D Business address
@ Private address
@ Business destination
© Private dest inat io n
- Select and confirm a n address or a destinat ion.
When you have se lected a dest ination , the
rou t e g uidance can be started direct ly.
- Check the address input again when select ing
an address.
- Then select and confirm Start route guidan ce .
Addit ional directory functions in the navigation
system can be found under¢page213.
(D Tips
- Addresses that have been imported from
your cell phone into the MMI can a lso be
used as a dest ination.
208
- If a contact is g rayed out in the directory,
this contact has neither a destination nor an
address assigned to them.
Point of interest search
Appli es to: vehicles with navigat ion system
.,. Press the INAV/MAP I button repeatedly until
the Enter desti nat ion me nu is displayed
¢ page 205, fig. 189 .
.,.Select: left control button > Points of intere st.
- Changing the search area : select and confirm
Search area and then a search area from the
list.
The following search categor ies are available:
Nearby : poin t s of interest can be se lected from
different categories. The points of interest are
listed starting from the immed iate vicin ity of the
vehicle up to a radius of app roximately 124
miles (200 km).
Along the route : points of interest along the
route can only be se lected dur ing active route
guidan ce. The points of interest are located di-
rectly along or in the immediate vicinity of the
calculated route . The points of interest can like-
wise be selected from various catego ries . For ex-
amp le, you can searc h for a hotel or pa rking lot
at t he dest ina t ion.
Near destination / Near stopover : points of inter -
est near a destination or a stopover can only be
selected dur ing act ive route guidance. The po ints
of interes t can likewise be sele ct ed from var ious
catego ries . Fo r example , you can sea rch for a ho-
te l or par king lot at the d est inat ion .
In new city: select a cou ntry/state or sea rch in a
new city. Ent er t he name of t he des ired city.
Points of inte rest ca n be selec t ed from vario us
catego ries. This funct ion a llows you to se arc h for
po ints of interest in any city regard less of the ac-
tive route guidance or the vehicle position.
- Search for a point of intere st name in the se-
lected search area: enter the na me of the point
of interest. ..,_
 Na vi gation

- Searching fo r a point of interest in a specific Find wh ich search areas are avai lab le under
categor y: select Select category. Select and r::}
page 208, Point of interest search .
confirm a category such as Restaurant s.
You can search for online destinations using the
voice recogni ti on sys t em c>table on page 172.
(D Tips
- Distances to points of interest are displayed (D Tips
as a straight-line distance from your current
- Always read the chapter c>page 196, Audi
location. The actua l distance from your cur-
conne ct (Info tainment) general informa-
rent location to the point of interest is up-
tion.
dated automat ically. The list of found
- For add ition al information, visit
po ints of interest is not resorted when th is
www .audiusa .com.
happens.
- There may be entries in the list that cannot
be displayed completely due to their length. Accessing destinations from myAudi
account
Se lect the corresponding entry from the
Applies to: vehicles with a navigat ion system and Audi con·
list . Se lect: right contro l butto n > Show des- nect (Infota inm ent)
ti nation details . Detail ed info rmation for
the selec t ed entry in the list is t hen dis-
Import individual destinations from your myAudi
played. account into the MMI.

Requirement:
Online point of interest search (on line
The requirements for Audi connect (Infota in-
search)
App lies to: vehicl es with a navigatio n system and Audi con·
ment) must be met c>page 189.
nect (Infotainment)
You m ust have a registered myAudi acco unt at
You can search for points of interest on the In- www.audiu sa.com/ myaudi. You must have ave-
ternet. hicle assigned to your myAud i acco unt and you
must have stored one or more destinations.
Requirement: the requirements fo r Audi connect
(Info t ainment) m ust be me t r::}
page 189. .. Press the ! NAV/MAPI button repeatedly unti l
the Enter destination men u is disp layed
.,. Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeated ly until
c>page 205, fig. 189 .
the Enter destination menu is displayed
.. Select: left control button > myAudi contacts.
r::}
page 205, fig . 189. .. If necessary, enter your myAudi use r data or
.,. Select : left cont rol button > Online search. The
your myAudi PIN c:;,page 189. The contacts
search area last set is displayed in the input
stored in myAud i a re displayed .
field .
- Select and confirm a contact.
- Changing the search area: se lect: right control
- Select and confirm a private or business dest i-
but ton > Select search area .
nation.
- Searching for online destinations in these-
- Select and confirm Start route guidance .
lected search area : enter a new city/state if
necessary. Enter a sea rch te rm, such as "Hot el ", {I) Tips
and press t he con t ro l knob. Selec t and confi rm
an on line destination from the list . - You only need to enter the myAudi user data
one time.
- Searching for online destination s in a specific
- You can rece ive your myAudi PIN if yo u have
category: selec t and confi rm Select category .
u set up a myAudi account .
co
.... Se lect and confirm a category such as Restau-
N
r-... - For add ition al information, vis it
rants .
....
N
0 www .audiu sa.com.
0
:E:
'<t

209
Na v ig a t ion
Entering a destination using geo
coordinates
Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system
~ Press the INAV/MAPI button repeated ly until
the Enter destin at ion menu is displayed
¢ page 205, fig.189 .
~ Se lect: left control button > Geo coordinate s.
- Select Latitude / Longitude.
- Press the control knob to set the individua l val -
ues .
- Turn the cont rol knob to t he left/r ight to
change the se lected value.
- Select and confirm Start route guidance.
Adding a stopover
Applies to : vehicles with navigat ion system
You can enter an additional destination when
route guidance is active.
N.-tviy,ltion . Fnh.•r
l~ Bear Valley Rd
==O
'"'-. HC'sp-cna , CA, 92345
J Cance l route guidance
JI, Elias Thomas Snack Bar
' 1 11 N H1ll St , Loo;Ange l~!.. CA
Delete stopover ====~ lfJ
Fig. 191 Exam ple: active route gui dance w ith stopover
Requ irement: a destination must a lready be en-
tered.
~ Press the INAV/MAPI button repeatedly until
the Enter destination menu is displayed
¢ page 205, fig . 189.
Entering a destin ation as a stopo ver
- Enter a destination in the input line
¢ page 206.
- Se lect and confirm a destination from the re-
su lts list .
- Se lect and confirm Add as stopover.
Deleting a stopover
- Push the cont rol knob up . Free text search and
active route guidan ce are displayed.
- Select and confirm Delete stopover @
¢ fig. 191.
210
- The stopover is deleted.
Cancel route guidance
Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system
Requirement: route guidance must be active.
~ Press t he I NAV/MAPI button repeatedly unti l
the Enter destination menu is displayed
r=;,
page 205, fig . 189 .
~ Turn the control knob to the left unti l the active
route guidance is shown r:::> page 210, fig. 191.
~ Select and confirm Cancel route guidance @
r=;,page210, fig. 191 . The destination is de let-
ed . Or: select the right control butto n > Cancel
route guidance.
Additional options when entering a
destination
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
~ Press the right contr ol but t on.
d1_•\tin,,tion
I Depend ing on the selected fu nction, the follow-
79 .9mi
F ing opt ions may be avai lab le when entering a
7,12 AM
dest ina t ion:
250 yd
6 005 AM Cancel route guidance: Requ irement: route guid-
C· an ce must be act ive. Route guida nce is canceled.
For addi t ional information, see r=;,page 210.
Country information : you can display t he appli-
cable urban and ru ral speed limits for any coun-
t ry/sta t e . If t his f unction is activated, t he infor-
ma t ion will be au tomat ically shown to you in the
route informat ion 0 ¢ page 2 15, fig. 196 when
the speed limit is exceeded r=;,page 217 .
Country/ state selection : see ¢ page 206, Nar-
rowing the search area.
Route criteria: see r=;,page 214, Route criteria .
Show location on map : Requirement: you must
have selected a destination from the results list.
The destination entered is displayed on the map .
Parking at th is location*: Requirement: you
must have selected a dest inat ion from the re-
su lts list. All park ing options near the selected
location are displayed in the Infotainment sys -
tem.
 Navigation

Delete : the se lected entry is deleted. You can de-

lete individual entries or all entries (for example,
favorites or last destinat ions).

Audi connect at thi s location *: Requirement: you

must have selected a destination from the re-
sults list. Allows you to search for items in the vi-
cinity of the selected location, such as Travel in-
formation. Fig. 1 93 Informat ion on perso nal route

Online traffic data* : the on line traffic informa-

tion ¢ page 221 can be switched on or off .
Add destination to contact : Requirement : a cell
phone must be connected to the MMI
¢ page 176. See q page 213.
"' Press the ! NAV/MAPI button repeatedly until
the Enter destination menu is displayed
¢ page 205, fig . 189 .
.,.Select: right control button > Navigation set-
tings > Personal route assistance.

Store as favorite : see q page 213 . When the function is switched on~, the MMI re-
Voice guidance: see c>page 214 . cords the frequently-driven routes regardless of
whether a destination was entered and reached
Navigation settings: see ¢ page 213. or not.

(Di Tips As long as route guidance is not active, your per -

sonal routes are listed in the Enter destination
Information on online traffic data* can also
menu under the home address and indicated with
be found online at www.audiusa.com.
the symbol CD c>fig. 192. When personal route
ass istance is switched on, this symbol is dis-
Personal route played in the Navigation menu and in the Info-
assistance ta inment system display status line at the same
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system and perso na l t ime .
route ass istance
The distance to the dest inat ion and the calculat-
Your MMI can learn your frequently driven routes
ed arrival time a re also displayed for your person-
and, depending on the current vehicle position,
al routes. Without starting route guidance, your
suggest route guidance (for example, your daily
MMI monitors the traffic conditions for your per-
commute to work and back) .
sonal routes and shows possible traffic incidents
for the possible routes to be driven in the Info-
tainment system display @ ¢ fig. 192.
A message will be displayed if there is a large
traffic incident (more than 12 minute delay) re-
gardless of which men u is selected q fig. 193 .
Select and confirm one of the following options:
- Start route guidance: the MMI starts the route
Fig. 192 Example: display of personal routes in the "Enter
guidan ce fo r the personal route disp layed and
desti natio n" men u
searches for a faster route if available.
- Ignore this route and this message: the dis-
played destination with all applicable personal
u
(0
......
routes is no longer factored into the cur rent
N
r--. trip . No more messages are shown for the d is-
N
...... played destination. The disp layed destination ..,.
0
0
:E
<t

211
Navigation
with all applicab le personal routes will be fac-
tored into the trip aga in only after stopping the
vehicle and switching the ignition on again .
- Ignore all messages: all personal routes are no
longer factored into the current trip. No more
messages are disp layed. Messages for personal
route s when there is increased traffic will ap-
pear again after the vehicle is stopped and t he
ignition is sw itched on again .
As soon as you switch off personal route assis-
tance, the symbol in the status line turns off and
your trips are no longer recorded. Trips that were
already stored remain stored .
Deleting personal routes:
- Select the desired personal route in the Enter
destination menu q fig. 192.
- Select : right control button > Delete destina-
tion.
Deleting all personal routes:
- Select : IMENU Ibutton >Se ttings > left control
button > MMI settings > Factory settings .
- Select : Navigation and on line memory > Re·
store factory settings q page 250.
(D Tips
- Personal routes are learned based on the ve-
hicle position. The route is prioritized ac-
cording to how frequently you drive to a
destination .
- A maximum of three personal routes are
displayed in the Enter destination menu .
Based on the current vehicle position, t he
traffic situation for the route that is most
likely to be dr iven out of the three routes
will always be monitored.
- Please note that pe rsonal routes that have
already been stored will remain stored after
the ignition is switch ed off and they must
be deleted manually.
212
Alternative routes
Appl ies to: vehicles with navigation system
Fig. 194 Diagram : disp lay of alt ernat ive routes in t he over-
view map
Requirement: a destination must be entered and
the route guidance must be started .
.,. Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeatedly until
the Enter destination menu is displayed
q page 205, fig . 189 .
.,.Sele ct: right control button> Navigation set·
ting s > Show alternative routes .
Three routes are displayed in the overview map
after you enter a destination .
Up to th ree route suggestions and their proper-
ties are displayed on the overview map when the
funct ion is switched on~ q fig . 194 .
If availab le, the follow ing information will ap-
pear on the route suggestions :
- Route type (fast (D, fast alternative @ , eco-
nomic route @ )
- Distance to the desti nation and the calcu lated
arr ival time
- Traffic congestion a long the route including
time delays
The route that was calc ulated according to the
route criteria you selected is shown on the over-
view map. The specia l properties of the route are
also displayed @ Q fig. 194 and given as a spo-
ken message .
Using the control knob, you can select the possi-
ble routing for the alternative routes and show
them on map Se lect and confirm the desired
route that you would like to use for route guid-
ance.
 Navigation

Additional settings - Deleting a favorite : sele ct a favorite from the

list> righ t cont rol button > Delete favorite >
Home address Delete this favorite or Delete all favorites.
App lies to: vehicles with navigat ion system

• Press t he INAV/MAP I button repeated ly un t il Directory contacts

t he Enter destination me n u is displayed Applies to : vehicles with navigat ion system
<=:>page 205, fig. 189. Two addresses (private/business) can be as-
Storing a home address signed as destinations for each contact in the di -
rectory.
- Select and confirm Home address @
pag e 205, fig . 189. Afte r opening t he home
c::> • Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeatedly unti l
address for the firs t ti me, you will be asked to the Enter destination men u is disp layed
creat e a ho me address. page 205 , fig . 189.
c::>
- Se lect and confirm Create now .
Storing a destination as a contact in the
- Enter a desti nati on or select a des ti na t ion from directory
t he list. Or :
- Select and confirm a destination > right control Requirement: a ce ll phone must be connected to
but ton > Store as home addre ss. t he MMI <=:>page
176.

- Sele ct: a destin at ion > right con t rol butt o n >
Editing the home address
Add destination to contact.
- Select t he Home address @ <=:> page 205 , - Ent er t he first letters of t he d esired cont act in
fig. 189. t he free text sear ch input fie ld c::>page 205,
- Se lect the right control button > Edit home ad- fig. 189 an d t he n select a contact from the list .
dress . = Select and confirm Add business destination or
- Se lect and confirm a new d est inat ion as t he Add private destination.
home address.

The se le cted des t ination is sto red as t he new Navigation settings

home address . Appl ies to : vehicles with navigation system

• Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeatedly unti l

Favorites the Enter destination men u is disp layed
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system <=:>page205, fig.189.
• Press t he I N A V/MAPI button repeated ly until • Select: right control button > Navigation set -
the Enter destination menu is displayed tings .

page 205, fig. 189.

c::> Depen ding on the selecte d function, the follow-
ing setti ngs can be selected :
- Storing a destination as a favorite : searc h for
the d es ired destination using the input f ie ld. Show alternative routes
Or : se lect a destinat ion from the list. Select:
Up to three s ug ges t ed rout es are shown on the
rig ht cont rol button > Store as favorite .
map when t his fu nction is switche d on ~
- Renaming a favorite : select : left contro l button
page 2 12 .
c::>
> Favorites > a favorite from the list> right
contro l button > Rename favorite . Low fuel warning
- Move favorite : se lect a favorite from the list>
A message is displayed if the fue l ga uge goe s be -
u right cont rol button> Move favorite . Select
co low t he rese rve mar king when th is fu nct ion is
...... and confirm the locat ion of t he selected favor-
N
r-...
switc hed on~- Confirmin g t his mess age disp lays..,.
N
......
ite .
0
0
:E:
'<t

213
Na v ig a t ion
a list of gas stations in the area. When a gas sta-
tion is selected, route guidance from the current
veh icle position is calc ulated.
Trail er mode *
Trailer mode is sw itched off at the factory.
When the function is switched on~' the maxi-
m um permitted speed for vehicles with trailers is
incorpo rat ed into the rou t e g uidance and t he cal-
culated arrival time is adjusted according ly. Trail-
e r mode is disp layed using symbols -"' in the side
menu on the map .
Personal route assistance *
Personal route assistance is sw itched off at the
factory.
Your trips are recorded and destinations are sug -
gested by the MMI when this funct ion is switched
on~ ¢ page 211 .
The personal route ass istance is indicated by the
~ symbol in the status line of the Infotainment
system display.
Notification when nearby*
The notification when nearby is switched off at
t he factory .
The MMI notifies you when you are approaching
selected po ints of int erest whe n this function is
sw itched on~- You can a lso have a Notification
tone .
Presentation mode
The Presentation mode helps you to effect ively
plan a trip and follow the planned route without
moving the vehicle . You can Select starting point
when, for example , you would like to calculate a
route star t ing from a locat ion other than the ve-
hicle pos it io n. Start Presentation mode to simu-
late route gu idance .
1> High occupancy vehicle
214
' Route criteria
Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system
J(
Fig. 195 Possible route cri ter ia
.. Press the I NAV / MAP I button repeatedly until
the Enter desti nat ion menu is displayed
¢page 205, fig. 189 .
.. Select: right control button> Route criteria .
(D HOV lanes 1>: with the Avoid function, HOV
lanes are excluded when calculating routes. With
Allow , the MMI will route you through HOV lanes
and show them .
@ Highways / @ Toll roads/ @ Ferries: if the nav-
igation system should not include highways, toll
roads or ferries - if poss ible - when calculat ing
routes, you can select the Avoid function.
Voice guidance
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
.. Press t he I NAV / MAPI button repeatedly unti l
the Ent er destination me nu is displayed
¢ page 205, fig. 189 .
.. Select: right con t rol button> Voice guidance.
Voice guidance: voice guidance can be complete
or shortened . With the Traffic func t ion , spoken
cues are on ly given when there are traffic inci-
dents on your route. When Off is se lected, no
voice guidance is given .
Voice guidance during phone call : voice guid-
ance d uring a phone call can be swit ched on or
off.
page 254 .
Entertainment fader : see c::>
 Navigation

Voice guidance volume : you can adjust the vol- When the crosshairs are switched off c::>fig. 196:
ume during voice guidance using the On/Off knob
(D Direction . For additional informa ti on, see
page 156 You can also f ind additional inf orma-
c::>
c::>page21 7.
page 254.
tion under c::>
@ The distance to the destinat ion includes the
calculated arrival time .
Map
@ When t he trailer mode func t ion is switched
Operating the map on~, the cor respond ing symbol is displayed
Appl ies to: vehicles with naviga t ion system next t o t he arrival time.
@ Scale: t urn the control knob to the left or
right to decrease or increase the scale. When
the Automatic zoom function is switched on
~, an "A" for "A ut omat ic" is displayed in the
magn ifying glass.
® Altitude
@ Vehicle position
0 Route info rmation: var ious informa t ion will
Fig. 19 6 Exam ple: 30 map with th e cross hair s switched off
be displayed dur ing rout e guidance (f or ex-
amp le, t he upcoming maneuver includin g
H4M calculated distance and street names or haz-

~ S FIQUtra• St
ard info rmation*) . The display also provi des
traff ic information or points of interest on
the current route .
@ Road curre nt ly being driven on
fig. 197:
When the crosshairs are switched on <=>
Fig. 197 Exampl e : st andard ma p with t he cros s ha irs
switched on
® The crosshairs: move the crosshairs in the de-
sired direct ion and set a point on the map us-
.. Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeated ly until ing the MMI touc h control pad* or the con-
the map is displayed <=>
fig. 196. trol knob . When the crosshairs are tur ned
off, the road being curren tl y driven on is
Zoom ing in/ out on the map shown .
- Turn the cont rol knob t o t he left or t o t he right. @ Speed li mit display 1>: dis play of the maxi-
Alte rnatively , you can also zoom in/out on the mum perm itted speed on t he expressways
map using the MMI touch contro l pad* and highways.
<=>page 161, if the crosshairs are switched on . @ Entertain ment slidi ng menu*: only available
Or: turn the left thumbwheel on the mu ltifunc- when media is active. More info rmat ion can
page 13.
t ion steer ing whee l*<=> be fo und under c::>
page 162.

Turning the crosshairs on/off

@ Additional information on the crosshairs po-
sit ion: if you move the crosshairs to a loca-
- Switching th e crosshairs on: press t he control t ion on the map, available information fo r
knob in t he ma p view c::>fig. 19 6 . the current crosshairs position is displayed.
- Switching the crosshairs off : press the IBACKI Press the control knob to open desti nat ion
button. det ails or to start rou t e guidance.
u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0 1l Only a pplies to vehicles wit hou t camer a-based speed limit
0
:E disp lay.
<t

215
Na v ig a t ion
@ Map contents (points of interest, favorites).
When there are multip le points of interest in
the immediate vicinity, the symbo ls are
shown stacked on the map.
@ Better route re: if a better route is availab le
for the curren t route gu idance , it will be indi-
cated on the map includ ing the time t hat
wou ld be saved . More information can be
found under c>page 221.
Map functions
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
~ Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeated ly until
the map is d isp layed c>page 215, fig. 196.
~ Press the left control button.
The fo llowing map functions can be selected:
Sw itch to destination input
The free text search in the Navigation menu is
d isp layed c>page 205, fig. 189.
Traffic mes sages
Curre nt traffic information is displayed in the In-
fotainment system disp lay. You can also find ad-
d itiona l information under c>page 220 .
Route list
The route list can only be displayed when route
gu idance is active and contains information re-
garding the route, the names of the streets and
the length of the route sections. Whe n trave ling
on hig hways, possib le pa rking lots and rest a reas
a re shown, wh ich you can select as a stopover.
POis along the route
Requirement: route guidance must be active .
Searching for points of interest along your cur-
rent route For addit iona l information, see
c>page208 .
Additional options on the map
Applies to: vehicles with navigation system
~ Press the I N AV/MAPI button repeatedly until
the map is d isp layed r:::>
page 215, fig . 196.
~ Press the right contro l button.
216
Depend ing on the function selected, the follow-
ing options can also be selected under the Map
menu:
Cancel route guidance: see c>page 210 .
Map setting s: see c>page 216 .
Route criteria : see c>page 214.
Voice guidance: see c>page 214.
Navigation settings : see r:::>
page 213.
Show alternati ve routes: see c>page 212.
Parking along the route*: parking options near
the ve hicle are d isplayed .
Save current position : you can save your current
vehicle position as a favorite c>page 213 or save
it as a contact in the directory c>page 213.
Audi connect at thi s location* : a llows you to
search for Travel info rmation at the entered lo-
cation (events, weather at the destinat ion, etc.).
Online traffic data *: you can switc h the online
traffic da t a and, depending on the equipment,
the hazard information* on or off(~) .
Country information : see c>page 210.
Avoid route*: when route guidance is active, the
calculated route will avoid the area you have
spec ified (maximum: 12 mi (20 km)), if possib le.
The nav igat ion syst em calcu lates an alte rna t ive
route . The route to be avo ided that you have en-
te red applies only to the cur rent route and must
be set again, if needed. The areas you have se-
lected to avoid w ill appear with red and white
shading on the map .
Move rout e*: move your finger over the MMI
touch contro l pad* or use the contro l knob to ad-
just the route on the overview map .
Map settings
Applies to : vehicles with navigat ion system
~ Press the I NAV/MAP I button repeatedly until
the map is displayed .
~ Select: right cont rol button> Map settings .
Depend ing on the selected function, the follow-
ing settings can be selected: ...,
 Navigation

Map colors when there are upcoming maneuvers so that you

Day/ Night : t he map is displayed with a light/
dark background.
Automatic : the map display adapts to the light-
ing conditions (fo r example, changing from Day
to Night when driving thro ug h a tunne l).
Map display
Standard : see c:>page 215, fig. 197 .
can see the street or turn better.
Off : the map scale you have chosen is main·
tained .
MMI map contents
Map contents, such as weather, points of inter·
est, traffic information or favorites, can be d is·
played or hidden.

The weather forecast is displayed on a 3 m i (5

Online map view : see c:>page 217, fig. 198.
km) scale on the map .
Map orientation
Instrument cluster map contents
Destination : the map indicates the dest inat ion
and is oriented to the north. You can also set which map content disp lays in
the instrument cluster c:>page 19.
2D heading up map/2 D north up map : the cur-
rent veh icle position is d isplayed. The map is o ri·
Online map display
ented in the direction of travel or to the north.
Applies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con·
nect (Infotainment)
3D map*: the current vehicle pos ition is shown
on a th ree-dimensional map and is a ligned to the With the on line map view, you can display the
d irection of travel. At a scale of 62 mi (100 km) map with satellite images.
and larger, the map or ientation is to the north.

Overview: the entire route from the vehicle posi·

tion to the destination or the next stopover is dis·
played on the map. The map scale depends on
the length of the route and adapts a ut omatica lly.
The map is oriented to the north.

Route information

The display of route information, such as the cur· Fig. 198 Example: on line map view

rent street be ing driven on or po ints of int erest

along t he current route c;,page 215, fig. 196, can
be switched on/off or can be m inim ized on the
display of upcoming maneuvers .

Automatic zoom

On: the map scale is adapted automat ically de·

pending on the type of road being traveled (ex·
pressway, hig hway, other roads) so that you al- Fig. 199 Example: map view with online St reet View

ways have an optimal overview of the road ahead.

The sca le is also automatica lly adapted when Requirement: the requirements for Aud i connect
(Infotainment) must be met c:>page 189 .
there are upcoming maneuvers to provide a bet·
ter detai led view. .,. Press the ! NAV/MAPI button repeatedly until
u the map is displayed.
(0
...... Intersection : when route guidance is active, the
N
map temporarily zooms in to a detailed scale .,.Select: right control button > Map settings >
r--.
N
...... Map display > Google Earth .
0
0
:E
<t

217
Na v ig a t ion

The map disp lay is based on data received from
the Internet in the form of satellite images,
which are then combined with the roadways from
the Stand ard map view . There are two g igabytes
of memory space in the MMI memory that can be
used to temporar ily store the map or navigation
data that was received . This is roughly the
amount required for the map/navigation data for
a 2,485 mile (4,000 km) route . As long as the
satellite images loaded fo r route g uidance are
stored, you can use them without having an ac-
tive data connection.
- When the online map view is switched on
using the 3D map orientation, the MMI dis-
play automat ica lly switches to the 2D map
orientation when driving through tunnels.
- For safety reasons, the Street View func-
t ions can only be used when the vehicle is
stationary .
- Always read the chapter ¢ page 196, Audi
connect (Infotainment) general informa-
tion.
- For add itiona l information, vis it
www .audiusa.com .

Street View
Map update
With St reet View, you can exp lore many places in
the world through the eyes of a pedest rian. Introduction
St reet View is available whe n the symbol © Appli es t o: vehicles wi th navigat ion syst em
¢ fig . 198 is d isp layed in the crosshai rs mode.
The re are mu lt iple opt ions avai la ble for updat ing
Activating str eet view : turn the cont rol knob to a you r map material:
scale less than 32 yards (30 m).
- Map updates through the online map update*
The fo llow ing funct ions are the n ava ilable: ¢ page 219 .
- Import map updates from the SD card* to your
- Exploring an area step-by-step: press the con-
MMI. You can find add it io na l info rmation on-
trol knob when the symbol @ ¢ fig. 199 is d is-
line at www .audiusa.com/ myaudi.
played .
- Map update at an aut ho rized Aud i dea le r or a u-
- Zooming in or out on the current view in four
thori zed Audi Service Fac ility. This can resul t in
stages: tur n the control knob to the left or to
ad d it ion al costs .
the right ® ¢ fig. 199 .
- Navigating in street view : move your finger in
the des ired direction on the MMI touc h control
pad* .

Additional informat ion

Showing additional information in the Infotain -

ment system disp lay can be switched on in the
Map content menu ¢ page 217. To disp lay any
applicable addit ional information, move t he
crossha irs onto an item on the map and press the
control knob.

(D Tips
- The stored online map view data can be de-
leted in Factory settings > Navigation and
online memory¢ page 250 .
- The online map view is an Audi connect In-
fotainment service and is regularly updated
when t he function is opened . The process
may ta ke several seconds.

218

Online map update
Appl ies to: vehicles with a navigatio n system an d Audi con -
nect (Infotainment)
Using the online mop updote, you con update
the mop material in your navigation system di-
rectly from your vehicle.
Fig. 200 Example: display of a new onl ine map update
Fig. 201 Example : select ion of a count ry package
Requirement:
The requirements for Audi connect Infotainment
services must be met Q poge 189 .
You must have a myAudiaccount and have as-
signed your vehicle to it.
Using your vehicle position, the MMI identifies
regions which you are frequently in. Based on
this, the MMIsuggests update packages for
these regions, if they are available.
• Select and confirm (!) Start download
Q fig . 200 if the message for a new map update
appears in the Infotainment system display.
Or:
• Select IMENU I button> Settings> left control
button > System maintenance > System up-
date > Online update .
A selection with the available update packages
u
(0
appears in the Infotainment system display
;::j Qfig.201 .
r--.
N
~
0
0
:E
<t
Navigation
Selecting the online map update
- Select an update package from the list (~) @
q fig. 201.
- Confirm your select ion with the IBACKI
button
and go back to the select ion.
- The number and amount of data for the select-
ed update package are now displayed in the In-
fotainment system .
Starting the download
- Select and confirm Start download .
- Confirm the security prompt by selecting Start
download aga in.
The update packages begin to download and the
status of the download progress is shown in the
Infotainment system display.
Installat ion of online map updates
The downloaded map material installs after you
stop your vehicle. The new update packages in-
stall only after you switch off the ignition. After
restarting the MMI,the Infotainment system dis-
play indicates if the updates installed successful-
ly.
- Confirm the successful update with OK.
The new map material can now be used for navi-
gation.
(D Tips
- Always read the chapter q page 189.
- The amount of available online map up-
dates in the vehicle is limited. To update
more regions, use the map update via SD
card at www.audiusa.com/myaudi.
- Always read the chapter ¢page 196, Audi
connect (Infotainment) general informa -
tion.
219
Navigation

Traffic information Traffic information display on the map/Map

preview*
Introduction
Color -coded markings along the route ind icate
Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system
the traffic flow:

Green: tr affic is flowing freely

Orange: st op-and-go tr affic

Red: congestion

Shaded markings indicate the length of t he area

with congest ion.

Colored warning symbols: a n impen di ng t raff ic

Fig. 202 Examp le: t raffic info rmatio n overview
incident direct ly ahead on you r ro ute .
,.. Pres s t he I N AV/MAPI bu tto n repe ated ly unt il All tr aff ic inciden t s w ill displ ay in co lor w hen
the map is d is played qpage 21 5, fig. 196 . ro ute g uid ance is ina ct ive.
,.. Select: left control button > Traffic messages.
Grayed out warning symbols: traffic incide nts
Dependi ng on vehicle equipment, t he following that are not o n your rout e .
info rma t ion m ay be show n in t he t raff ic info rm a-
Warning symbols with..::>: avo ided traffic inci-
tion ove rview q fig . 20 2:
dents.
(!) A m essage will appear if t he MMI ca lcula t es a
The disp lay of colore d ma rkings, warning sym -
bet t er route for t he cur rent rou te gui da nce.
bo ls, etc. can be set in t he Map content menu
Mo re infor m ation ca n be found und e r
q page 217.
q page 221.
@ When route gu idance is active, traff ic inci- @ Tips
dents on your route a re displayed in the up -
Partic ularl y critica l traffic informat io n, such
pe r section of the list a nd a re sor t ed by dis-
as wa rni ngs a bout wrong-way drivers, is auto-
t ance .
matically disp layed. To hide the t raff ic info r-
@ The traff ic messages are sorted by street
mation, press the IBA CK ! button or the con-
name . If there are multiple traffic messages
tro l knob.
for the same street, an arrow is d isp layed in
front of the street name( ~). Select and con-
f irm the corresponding line to display all of Traffic information (TMC)
Applies to : vehicles wit h navigation system
t he tr aff ic info rmation .
@ The cu rren t sele ct ed tra ff ic mess age is also Receiving t raffic info rm ation t hrough TMC is
shown as a m a p preview * in t he Inf ot ainmen t switch e d on at t he fa ctory.
system displ ay.
,.. Press the I NAV/MAPI button repeatedly u ntil
® The status line in the In fota inme nt display th e map is displayed .
a lso always indicates the rece pt io n of t raff ic ,.. Sele ct: left control but ton > Traffic messages.
info rmatio n dTMC I or IONLI N E D.
An ove rview of all the traffic messages is dis-
Showing traffic messages on the map : select:
played in the Info t ainment system .
one traffic message> right cont ro l button>
Show on map . - Opening a detailed view of traffic information :
select and confirm t he traffic information from
Displaying the next traffic message on the map :
the list. .,..
press the cont rol knob.

220
 Na vi gation

.. Switching online traffic information on and

@ Tips
- TMCtraffic reports are not avai lable in Can-
ada. For more information, please contact
Sirius Canada.
- Critical traffic information, such as warn-
ings about wrong-way drivers, is automati-
cally displayed. To hide the traffic informa-
tion, press the I BACK I button or the control
knob.
off : se lect INAV/MAPI button> right control
button > Online t raffic data on (~) or off (0) .
.. Press the !NAV/MAPI button repeatedly until
the map is displayed.
.. Select: left control button > Traffic messages.
The online traffic information will also be dis-
played in the on line map view ¢ page 217 or on
the standard map¢ page 215, fig. 196 .

If !ONLINEI traffic information cannot be re-

Better route
App lies to: vehicles with navigation system
By receiving traffic information through TMC,
your MMI calculates a better route - if available -
and the possible time saved for the current route
guidance . You can decide yourself which route
you would like to use.
.,.Press the INAV/MAPI button repeatedly until
the map is d isplayed.
Requirement: route gu idance must be active .
If your MMI has calculated a better route than
the current route guidance, the message A better
route is available. appears for severa l seconds
a long w ith the t ime that may be saved. A better
route is indicated in the map view by the symbol
ta ¢ page 215, fig . 197.
A message also appears in the traff ic information
overview (I) ¢ page 220 , fig. 202.
Apply better route
- Press the right contro l button .
- Select and confirm the better route.
- The better route is used for the route guida nce
and the route is recalculated.
ceived, then traffic information will automatical-
ly be rece ived through !TMCI ¢ page 220.
(D Tips
- Online traffic information is not avai lab le in
Canada.
- Always read the chapter¢ page 196, Audi
connect (Infotainment) general informa-
tion.
- Having the Online traffic data function
switched on provides the most accurate re-
ports of traffic situations as well as traff ic
forecasting. Your vehicle transmits and
processes its anonymous, encrypted posi-
tion informat ion at regular intervals to the
traffic data prov ider. If you do not want to
use this, you can sw itch off the online traf-
fic information function at any time.
- The online traffic information network is
currently not available in a ll countries, and
t he coverage is not nationwide . For addi-
tional information, visit www.audiusa.com.

Online traffic information

Appl ies to: vehicles with a navigation system and Audi con-
nect (Infotainment)

The MMI can receive real-time on/ine traffic in-

formation about congestion, accidents, road
construction and other incidents .
u
co
...... Requirement: the requirements for Audi connect
N
r-...
N
...... (Infotainment) must be met ¢ page 189.
0
0
:E:
'<t

221
Navigation

Troubleshooting
Applies to: vehicles with navigat ion system

Problem Solution
Free text search: the desired des- The dest inat ion might not be entered in the navigation database.
ti nation cannot be found. Or: check the spelling of the term that was searched. Check if the
desired country/state was selected for the free text search using
the Country/state selection c>page 206 or the option All coun-
tries/states .

222
 Radio

Radio (D Presets
The st at ion is stored as a preset. The symbo l
Opening the radio
shows the st ored location in the prese t s list (fo r
The radio supports the FM, AM and SiriusXM * example, 21) .
(satellite radio) bands. Using the HO Radio re-
@ Radio text (shortened display )
ceiver also allows you to receive radio stations
on the FM and AM bands in digital format. If avai lab le, program info rmation about the set
station is d isplayed in a ll of the stat io n lists.

@ Frequency
@ Station name
® Stat io n w ith HD Radio t echnolog y ava ilable
tQ)

® Channel number
Fig. 203 FM stat ion l ist (HO Radio t echnol ogy FM) If there is a loss of radio s ignal (SiriusXM*), the
fo llowing system informat ion is displayed in the

~ 000
. . 001
--- =0---
Radio ID
Preview
R.td10: SiriusXM

, NoS19nal
NoS19nal
I
.
station list:

NoSignal : the t uner is current ly not receiving a

J 002 Hi ts 1 sate llite s ignal (j).
~
f) 003 20 on 20 NoS19nal The system informa t ion turns off when the radio
004 40s on 4 NoS19nal st ations are rece ived again.

Fig. 204 Siri usXM station list (D Tips

- Cont act t he SiriusXM" provide r if you would
.. Press th e IRAD I O Ibutton .
like to receive sat el lite programming .
Afte r opening t he rad io, t he last opened station - Building s, tu nnels, bridges, ope n area s, oth-
list is disp laye d . er veh icles or objects on t he veh icle roof can
Selecting a station : se lect and conf irm a stat io n affect reception.
from the station list . FM/ AM stations t hat can be - Satel lite ra d io is not availab le in Alaska and
received by digital rad io are ma rked w ith t he HD Hawaii.
Radio technology symbol tQ)® ¢ fig. 203 . If re-
ception quality de clines, t he radi o aut omatically
switches t o the analog FM/AM station depe nding
on availability . Digit al HD Radio st at ions * may
contain multiple additional stations* . The ava ila-
ble add itiona l stations* a re listed under the radio
station. If you lose reception, the add it iona l sta-
tions* are muted s ince they can no longer be re-
ceived.

Setting the frequency band : press the IRADIO I

button repeated ly until the desired frequency
u band is set.
(0
.-I
N
r--. The follow ing information is displayed in the sta-
N
.-I
0
0
tion list ¢ fig. 203/ ¢ fig . 204:
:E
<t

223
Radio

Radio functions - Scan: all stations are played for severa l seconds
each.
Free text search page 226.
- Radio settin gs: see c::>
Applies to: vehicles with free text search

Using the free text search, you can select the or-
der that the search terms are entered in the in-
put field. Search in all frequency bands for a sta-
tion name or program type such as News).
Radio text
.,.Select: IRADIO Ibutton > left control button > a
frequency band (such as FM) > a station.
.,.Select: right control button> Radio text .

Information that accompanies the program (such

as artist, composer, t rack) is displayed .

Browsing through radio text entrie s: tu rn the

contro l knob to t he left or right.

Requirement: a rad io text entry must be dis-

Fig. 20 5 Input field and results list fo r free tex t sea rch
- Opening the free text search: when in a st at ion
list, keep turning the contro l knob to the left
unt il the free text search inp ut fie ld is dis -
played .
- Using the free text search : see c::> page 165,
Free text search.
You can a lso search for frequencies .
Stat ions from the presets @ are disp layed in the
results list (D c::>fig. 205. The symbo l @ indicates
which station list you sw itched to based on the
station selection.
Additional options
played and the station must be broadcast ing a
phone number, a navigation dest inat ion or a text
message number as Radio Text Plus information .
If a location, a phone number or a text message
numbe r is included with a radio text entry, the
rad io text will be shown wit h a colored borde r.
You have the following opt ions:
Call*/S tart route guidance*/ Write t ext mes-
sage*:
- Sel ect a radio text entry with Radio Text Plus in-
formation and press the control knob.
- Select and confirm Call*/ Start route guid-
ance*/ W rite text message* . Or: press the
IBACK I button to cancel.
(!') Tips

.,.Select : IRADIO I button > right contro l button. The availability of radio text and Radio Text
Plus depends on the radio station.
The follow ing options are ava ilable depending on
the frequency band:

- Sound settings : see c::>

page 253.
page 226 , Presets .
- Store as f avorite : see c::>

page 225, Sir-

- Manage SiriusXM alert s: see c::>
iusXM alerts.
- Receive alert s for thi s arti st / Receive alerts f or
page 225, SiriusXM alerts.
thi s tr ack: see c::>
- Manu al tuning : the frequency ba rs a re dis-
played . Se lect and confirm the desired frequen-
cy.
- Seek: the radio tunes to t he prev ious or next re-
ceivable station .

224
 Radio

SiriusXM alerts Playing tracks/artists from Sirius XM alerts

Appl ies to: vehicles with SiriusXM
You can display an overview of your favorite ar-
tists or tracks that are currently being played on
a SiriusXM channel .
Yll,IIMl1&1
Requireme nt : a SiriusXM alert must be stored for
a track/artist and it must be current ly playing on
a SiriusXM channe l.
- Select: left control button > SiriusXM alerts >
an entry from the list . The selected track/artist
is played .

Playing tracks/artists from the

Fig. 206 SiriusXM alert not if ication
• Select : IRADIO I button > left control button >
SiriusXM.
entertainment sliding menu
Requirement: the SiriusXM alert notifications
function must be switched on . You must be in the
Radio and Navigation menu. A SiriusXM alert no-
tification is d isplayed in the enterta inment slid-
ing menu CD<=:>
fig. 206.
- Push the control knob down .
- Select and confirm the desired track/artist .

After you have stored a SiriusXM alert for your fa-
vor ite tracks or artists, you can display an over-
view of your favorite tracks or artists currently
be ing received in the SiriusXM alerts menu and
play t hem immed iat e ly. You ca n also receive a
SiriusXM alert notification CD
fo r these tracks or
artists in the enter tainment sliding menu
<=:>
fig . 206.
Storing a SiriusXM alert
Requirement: your favorite track or artist must
be playing on a SiriusXM channel.
- Se lect : right contro l button > Receivealerts for
this track or Receivealerts for this artist .
Managing SiriusXM alerts
- Select: right con t rol button > Manage SiriusXM
alerts .
- Switching SiriusXM alerts on/off : when the
fu nction is switched on~ ' you are notified
when th is track or artist is being played on a
SiriusXM channel.
- Deleting Sirius XM alerts : select an entry from
the list> right control button > Delete from
alerts > Delete this entry or Delete all entries.
View: additional station information

Switching SiriusXM alert notifications on

and off

- Se lect: right contro l button > SiriusXM alert

notifications.

When the function is switched on ~ ' a SiriusXM

Alert notification CDfig. 206 is disp layed for
c::>
Fig. 207 Radio view: addit ional st ati on info rmati on
several seconds in the entertainment sliding
menu for the Radio and Navigation menus. Requirement: yo u must be tuned to a radio sta-
tion . The Show "Now Playing" screen option
must be switched on c::>page 22 7.

u Symbols in the "Now playing " screen c::>fig. 207:

(0
......
N
r--.
N
CDRadio text availability ..,.
......
0
0
:E
<t

225
Radio
Radio text is availab le for the selected stat ion.
page 224.
See c::>
@ FM HD Radio technolo gy
The station is received through FM HD Radio
technology .
@ Screen view
Display Cover art or Station logo. See
page 22 7, Prefer red picture view *.
c::>
Displaying the station list:
Tur n t he control knob. Or: press the !BACK ! but -
ton .
Radio menu
Fig. 2 0 8 Example : Radio menu
.,. Select: IRADIO Ibutton > left cont rol but t on .
Setting the frequen cy band: select and confi rm
the desired freq uency band in the radio menu
fig. 208 . Or: press the IRADIO ! button repeat-
c::>
ed ly until the desired frequency band is set. The
station list is displayed .
© Presets
page 226, Pre-
The presets list is d isplayed c::>
sets.
@ SiriusXM alerts
Appl ies to: vehicles with SiriusXM alerts
After you have stored a SiriusXM alert for your fa -
vor ite tracks or artists c::>
page 225 , an overview
of your favor ite tracks or artists current ly being
received on SiriusXM is displayed.
@ Siriu sXM
Appl ies to: vehicles with SiriusXM alerts
The SiriusXM* station list is displayed.
226
Additional frequency bands
Depend ing o n t he vehicle equipment, you may al-
so be able to select additiona l frequency bands
@ l @ c::>
fig. 208 in the selection men u.
Presets
You can store your favorite stations from every
frequency band in the presets list.
.. Select: the IRADIO Ibutton > left control button
> Preset s.
Requirement: the presets list must be disp layed.
- Storing presets: se lect and confirm a free pre-
set space. Follow the system instructions.
- Select and confirm a station from the list if
necessary.
Requirement: a station list must be d isplayed .
- Sto ring presets: se lect: an entry from the list>
right cont rol button > Store as preset. Or:
press and ho ld the contro l knob for severa l sec -
onds .
The shortcut keys are aut omatically assig ned to
the prese t s 1 to 8. You ca n select the stat ions di-
rectly using the preset buttons c::>page 163 .
- Displaying the preset s list : se lect: IRADIO! but-
ton > Preset s.
Requirement: the favorites list must be d is-
played .
- Listening to presets : select and confirm a pre -
set from the list.
- Move preset : select a preset from the list >
right control button > Move preset . Or: press
and hold the control knob for several seconds .
Select and confirm the location of the selected
favorite.
- Deleti ng preset s: select a preset from the list >
right control button > Delete preset > Delete
th is preset or Delete all presets.
Additional settings
Radio settings
.. Select: IRADIO Ibutton > rig ht control button >
Radio setting s. Ill>

The following settings can be selected, depend-
ing on the band that is selected:
Station names (FM )
Variabl e: scroll ing text transmitted by the FM
stations is shown in the Infotainment system d is-
play.
Fixed: scro lling text transm itted by the FM sta-
tions is no t shown in the Infotainment system
d isp lay. Only t he current sect ion of the scro lling
text is displayed .
FM/ AM HD Radio*
You can switc h HD Radio recept ion on or off .
Station sorting (SiriusXM* )
You can set the station so rt ing for SiriusXM sta-
tion lists* by:
- Channel number : the stations are sorted in as -
cending order according to their cha nnel num-
ber.
- Channel name: the stations are listed in a lpha-
betica l order.
- First category, then channel number : the sta -
tions are sorted by their category and then by
their channe l numbers.
- First category, then channel name : the sta-
t ions are sorted by their category and then by
their channe l names.
Cat egory filter (Siriu sXM* )
The stations shown in the st ati on list can be fil-
tered by your personal prefe re nces and by pro-
gram type. The program categories that you can
select depend on what is offered by your provid -
er. Select the All categories option to deactivate
all filter opt ions and disp lay all available stations
in the sate llite station list .
Troubleshooting
Problem
A station with poo r reception is no longer
displayed in the station list once you
u
co
...... switch to a d ifferen t sta t ion.
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
-<t
Radi o
Show "Now Playing" screen
When t he funct ion is switched on@' and t he sta-
t ions or presets list is open, the disp lay w ill
switch to the Show "Now Playing" screen view
after approximate ly five seconds ¢ page 225 . De-
pending on availab ility, information about the
set station (such as station name, artist and sta-
t ion logo) is displayed in this view .
Prefe rred picture view*
You can set your preferred screen view for the
Show "Now Playing" screen ¢ page 225 .
- Stati on logo: the station logo is displayed, de -
pending on availability .
- Cover art: t he album cover is di splayed if availa-
b le.
Gracenote online database*
Requirement: the MMI must be connected to t he
Internet . The Cover art opt ion m ust be selected
¢ page 22 7, Preferred picture view*.
When the funct io n is switched on@', the album
cove r or genre cover for the song that is playing
is loaded from the Gracenote online database,
depe nd ing on availabil ity.
Subscription status (SiriusXM )*
This opt io n is available when your subscription is
about to expire or has already expired . The expi -
ration date fo r your license is displayed .
Call to SiriusXM*: the contact info rmat ion for
your sate llite rad io prov ider is displayed . To call
your satellite rad io prov ider using the MMI, press
Call to SiriusXM*.
Solution
Store the stat ion as a preset in advance . Access t he pre-
se t s usi ng the presets list ¢ page 226 .
227
Media
Media
Introduction
There are various media drives and connections
avai lab le in the MMI. For example, you can play
aud io/video* files from the Ju kebox* or connect
your mob ile dev ice to the Aud i m usic interface *
and operate it through the MMI.
Notes
General information
Media and format restrictions : t he MMI (includ-
ing the SD card reade r and the USB storage de-
vice co nnect ion *) was tested with a var iety of
products and media on the market. However,
there may be cases where ind ividual devices or
media and audio/video files" may not be recog-
nized, may play o nly w ith restr ictions, or may not
play at a ll.
Digital Rights Management : please note that
t he audio/v ideo" files are subject to copyright
protection .
The media drives do not play files that a re pro -
tected by ORM and that are ident ified with the
symbo l !'.TI
.
Data security : never store im portant data on SD
cards, the Ju kebox *, CDs/DVDs or mobile devices.
Aud i AG is not responsib le for damaged or lost
files and media .
Loading times : t he mo re files/fo lde rs/ play lists
that are on a sto rage medium, the longer it will
take to load the audio/video* files . Audi recom-
mends us ing storage media t ha t on ly conta in au-
d io/video files* . To decrease the t ime it takes to
load audio/v ideo files*, crea t e subfo lders (for ex-
a m ple , fo r t he a rt ist or album). The loading t ime
will a lso increa se whe n importing fi les.
Additional information : when playing, aud io
files are automatically displayed with any add i-
tional informa ti on that is st ored (such as t he ar-
tis t, t rack and al bum cover). If t his informa t ion is
no t available o n the storage m ediu m, t he MMI
will check the Grace no t e met adata database .
228
Howeve r, in some cases, the additional informa -
tion may not be d isplayed.
Restricted functionality : reset t he Media set-
tings t o t he fa cto ry de fa ul t se tt ings if func ti onal -
ity is res t rict ed ¢ page 250 .
If functionality is restr icte d, reset t he Jukebox*
t o t he fa ctory defa ult set t ings ¢ page 2 50.
For informa ti on abo ut t he pr opert ies of support -
ed med ia and file formats, see ¢ page 243 .
W Note
(D in
Always fo llow the information fo und in c::>
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195 .
CD/DVD operation
CD/ DVD and format restrictions : t he funct iona li-
ty of indivi du a l sto rage media m ay be limi t ed due
to t he var iety of blank CDs/ DVDs ava ila ble a nd
t he var ious cap acities. Audio CDs or video DVDs
with copy protection, CDs/DVDs that do not con-
form to the standard and mult isess ion CDs may
hav e limit ed playback or may not play at all. Audi
recommends finali zing the recording process
whe n creat ing mult isess ion CDs. Mult isess ion is
not supported for DVDs.
Using CDs/DVDs, the CD drive or the DVD drive:
to ensure correct, hig h-q uality playback and to
prevent damage to the dr ive or disc read ing er -
rors, always store CDs/DVDs in a protec t ive
sleeve and do no t expose them to direct sunlight .
Do not use:
- Damaged, dirty or sc ratched CDs/DVDs
- Single CDs/DVDs with 3 in (8 cm) d iameter
- CD/DVDs that a re not roun d
- CDs/DVDs w ith labe ls
- Protec t ive rings
- Clean ing CDs
Thermal protection switch : CD/DVD playback
may be temporarily unavailable if outside tem -
peratures a re extremely hot or co ld . A t hermal
pro t ect io n sw itch is insta lled t o protect the CD/
DVD and t he la ser.
Laser devices: las er devices a re divide d into safe -
ty classes 1 to 4 in accordance with DIN IEC 76 .,..

(CO) 6/VDE 0837. The various types of audio
equipment installed conform to safety class 1.
The laser uses so little power or is sh ielded so
there is no danger when it is used correctly .
Media drives
SD card reader
Fig. 209 Inse rting the SD card
Depending on the vehicle equipment, there is ei-
ther one or two SD card readers in the glove com-
partment @ ¢ page 8, fig. 2 .
- Inserting the SD card: the angled corner of the
SD card must face toward the right front. Slide
the SD card into the card reader slot @
<=:>
fig . 209 until the SD card clicks into place .
- Automatic playback : playback will start auto-
matically if the inserted SO card contains sup-
ported audio/video files* ¢ page 243.
- Removing the SD card: press briefly on the SD
card.
The SO card reader is accessed and operated
through the MMI @ ¢ page 237 , fig . 215 .
(D Note
Only use one-piece SO cards. If adapter cards
(SO cards with more than one piece) are used,
the card could fall out of the adapter when
driving because of vibrations . Individual
pieces could then become stuck in the drive
and impair the functionality.
(r} Tips
~ The SIM card reader then does not function .
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t
Media
DVD drive
Applies to: vehicles with a DVD drive
Fig. 210 CDdrive
The DVDdrive is located in the glove compart-
page 8, fig . 2.
ment @ <=:>
- Loading a CD/DVD: the CO/DVD is pulled in au-
tomatically. Slide the CD/DVD straight into the
DVDslot @ with the label facing up c::> fig. 210.
- Automatic playback: playback wi ll start auto-
matically if the inserted CD/DVD contains sup-
ported aud io/video* files <=:>
page 243 .
- Ejecting a CD/DVD : press the button (D
fig. 210 .
c::>
The CD/DVD is pulled in again automatically if it
is not removed from the DVD slot within approxi-
mately ten seconds after ejecting it.
The DVDdrive is accessed and operated through
the MMI @ c::>
poge237, fig. 215 .
(D Note
- Never force a CD/DVD into the drive. The
CO/DVD is pulled in automatically.
- Do not insert CDs/DVDs with labels into the
dr ive. Labe ls can come loose from the CO/
DVD and damage the drive.
(D Tips
- The CO/DVD playback is not ensured with
audio files that have a high data rate .
- The SIM ca rd reader then does not function.
229
Media
CD drive
Applies to: vehi cles with a CD drive
Fig. 2 1 1 CO dri ve
The CD drive is located in the glove compartment
@ <=>
page 8, fig. 2.
- Loading a CD: the CD is pulled in automatically .
Slide the CD straight into the CD slot @
fig . 211 w ith the label facing up.
<=>
- Automatic playbac k: playback will start auto-
matically if the inserted CD conta ins supported
audio files c:>page 244, CD drive .
- Ejecting a CD: press the button (!) <=>
fig. 211 .
The CDis pulled in again automatically if it is not
removed from the slot with in ten seconds of
ejecting it.
The CD d rive is accessed and operated thro ugh
the MMI <=> page 237, Playing media .
(D Note
- Neve r force a CD into the drive . The CD is
pulled in automatically .
- Do not inse rt CDs with labels into the drive.
Labe ls can come loose from t he CD a nd
damage the dr ive.
@ Tips
CD playback ca nnot be guaranteed with audio
files that have a hig h data rate.
230
· Jukebox
App li es to: vehicles wit h Jukebox
After you have filled the Jukebox with music and/
or videos, for example from your SD card , you
can play these files directly from the Jukebox .
The Jukebox memory capacity is approximately
10 GB.
.,. Press the IME DIA ! button . Press the left control
button unti l the sources overv iew c:>page 23 7
is displayed. Select and co nfirm Jukebox.
Adding files to the Jukebox
- Press the IM E DIA ! button . Press the left control
button until the sources overv iew c:>page 23 7
is displayed . Select one of the following sou rces
to copy to the Jukebox: SD card*, CD-ROM*,
DVD-ROM*,USB storage devi ce* .
Requirement: the media center (for example,
tracks, albums) must be open .
- Select ing an entr y: selec t an entry from the
media cente r. Se lect : right contro l button >
Copy to Jukebox > This ent ry or Entire list .
Requirement: the playlist mus t be ope n. See
<=>
page 240 .
- Selecti ng a track : select the track t hat is cur-
rently playing . Select : right control button>
Copy to juk ebox> This tra ck or Entir e album
or This arti st.
Requirement: a video file must be playing.
- Sele ct: right cont rol button> Copy to Jukebox.
The copying process begins. The status of the
copy ing process is shown in the MMI.
- Hiding the importing process: se lect and con -
firm Continue copying in background . The im-
porting process is hidden .
- Canceling the impo rt ing process: select and
confirm Cancel copying : Or: remove the source
that is being imported . Files already copied re-
ma in.
Requirement: the copying process m ust be active
in the background.
- Showing the copying process: se lect: right
cont rol button > Copying in progre ss.

When importing, the audio files are automatical-
ly sorted into the media center categories based
on the stored additional information
c:>page 238. The copied video files are stored in
the media ce nter under the Videos category.
Playing the Jukebox
Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/
video files c:>page 230, Adding files to the Juke-
box.
The Jukebox is accessed and operated through
the MMI (D c:>page237, fig. 215.
Displaying Jukebox memory capacity
Select: right control button > Jukebox memory
capacity. Information about the Jukebox memory
capacity and the number of stored tracks is dis-
played.
Deleting tracks from the Jukebox 1)
Requirement: the Jukebox must contain audio/
video files.
- Deleting an entry : select an entry from the
Jukebox media center. Select: right control but-
ton > Delete from jukebox> This entry or En-
tire list .
- The status of the deleting process is shown in
the MMI. Jukebox playback stops during the de-
leting process and starts again automatically
once the deletion is complete.
(D Note
Do not import audio/video files when the en-
gine is turned off because this will drain the
vehicle battery.
(D Tips
- Tracks from audio CDs cannot be imported
to the Jukebox for legal reasons .
- Files that have already been imported are
automatically recognized and cannot be
copied to the Jukebox again.
- It is not possible to play audio/video* files
u in the CD/DVD* drive while importing them.
co
......
N
r--...
N
......
0
0
:E: l) Not in t he Playback view.
'<t
Media
- The Jukebox does not provide an export
function due to legal reasons.
- Files or tracks without additional stored in-
formation are listed as Unknown. Audi rec-
ommends adding additional information
(such as ID3 tags) to audio files.
- Reset the Jukebox to the factory default
settings when selling your vehicle
<=:>page250.
Bluetooth audio player
Appl ies to: vehicles with Bluetooth audio player
With the Bluetooth audio player, you con ploy
music wirelessly from your Bluetooth-capoble
device (such as a cell phone) through the MMI.
Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary and
the Bluetooth function on your Bluetooth device
and the Bluetooth audio player c:>page 251 in
the MMI must both be switched on.
- Connecting a Bluetooth device: press the
!MEDIAi button. Press the left control button
until the sources overview is displayed. Select
and confirm Bluetooth audio player ®
<=:>page 237, fig. 216 .
- If necessary, select and confirm, Not connected
> Connect Bluetooth audio player . The Blue-
tooth device search starts. Follow the instruc -
tions in the MMI.
- Select and confirm the desired Bluetooth de-
vice from the list. The MMI generates a PIN for
the connection.
- Select and confirm Yes.
- Enter the PIN for connecting on your Bluetooth
device. Or: if the PIN is already displayed on
your Bluetooth device, confirm it in the Blue-
tooth device and in the MMI. The time allowed
for entering the PIN is limited to approximately
30 seconds.
The media is started and operated through the
mobile device or the MMI, depending on the de-
vice being used. ..,.
231
Media
(D Tips
- Check for any connection requests on your
Bluetooth device.
- Multiple Bluetooth audio players can be
connected to the MMI, but only one mobile
device can be active.
- Bluetooth protocols AVRCP(1.0/1.3/1.4)
and A2DP are supported.
- Note the volume setting on your Bluetooth
device. Audi recommends setting your mo-
bile device to the maximum volume when
using it as a Bluetooth audio player.
- The supported media functions (such as
shuffle) depend on the Bluetooth device be-
ing used.
- For more information on the supported de-
vices, visit www.audiusa.com/bluetooth or
contact an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility.
Wi-Fi audio player
Appl ies to: vehicles with Wi-F i audio player
Using the Wi-Fi audio player media source on the
MMI, you can connect and operate your Wi-Fi-ca-
pable media player (such as a smartphone) to
wirelessly play music from your media player li-
brary. The media player is connected through the
vehicle's Wi-Fi hotspot. A UPnPServer opp or an
integrated UPnPIDLNAserver on your media
player is required to access your media player li-
brary.
Requirement: the Wi-Fi function on your media
player must be switched on. The Audi MMI con-
nect app or a UPnP server app must be installed
on your media player. Or: you must be using a
media player with an integrated UPnP/DLNA
server.
- Connecting a media player: press the IMEDIA !
button. Press the left control button until the
sources overview ¢ page 237 is displayed . Se-
lect and confirm Wi-Fi audio player 0
¢ page 237, fig . 216 .
- If necessary, select and confirm Wi-Fi off>
Turn on Wi-Fi to activate Wi-Fi in the MMI. Se-
lect Wi-Fi settings, if necessary. Select the
232
same settings on the wireless media player
that are used for the Wi-Fi hotspot.
- Starting the Wi-Fi audio player: start the Audi
MMI connect app or a UPnP server app, or set
media permissions on your media player.
Operating the media player: the media player is
operated through the MMI.
- Press the left control button repeatedly until
the Folders menu item appears. Select and con-
firm Folders.
- Playing music from the media player: select
and confirm Media center .
A WARNING
-As the driver, do not allow usage of the Wi-
Fi hotspot to distract you from driving, as
this could increase the risk of an accident.
- It is only safe to use tablets, laptops, mo-
bile devices and other similar devices when
the vehicle is stationary because, like all
loose objects, they could be thrown around
the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause
serious injuries. Store these types of devices
securely while driving.
- Do not use any wireless devices on the front
seats within range of the airbags while driv-
ing. Also read and follow the warnings in
¢ page 2 77, Front airbags.
(D Note
Always follow the information found in ¢ (Din
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
(D Tips
- Always read the chapter¢ page 196, Audi
connect (Infotainment) general informa-
tion.
- Please note that a Wi-Fi connection does
not automatically make it possible to use
the Internet. For additional information,
see ¢ page 189.
- To avoid interruptions during playback, de-
activate the power saving function on the
media player or connect it to a charger.
- The loading times for the audio data depend
on the media player used and the number of
files that it contains . II>-

- A maxim um of 2,000 entr ies per directory
are displayed in the MMI.
- Songs dow nload ed fo r offline use using m u-
sic st reaming services are stored on you r
mobile device (suc h as a smartphone) an d
may be ORM protected. The Wi-Fi audio
player w ill not play ORM protected files.
- Contact an a uthorized Audi dea le r or a u-
thorized Audi Service Facility for additional
informat ion on the Wi-Fi audio p layer.
Online media and
Internet radio
App lies to : veh icles with Audi connect
You can playba ck and oper at e various online me -
dia services and In ternet radio using the MMI.
Fig. 212 Onlin e med ia
• Press th e IM EDIA i button . Press the left contr ol
bu tt on until the so urces ove rview ¢ fig. 21 2 is
displayed.
Applies to: using onl ine media and Inte rn et rad io
Requirement :
- The Audi MMI connect app m ust be installed
and open on your mo bile device.
- You m ust be logged into your myAudi account
in the Audi MMI connect app a nd you must
hav e selected your ve hicle.
- The Wi-Fi function on the mobi le device and on
t he MMI m ust be switched on .
- If necessary, check in the connection manager
¢ page 250 if t he mobi le device you connected
is se lect ed under the MMI connect app (~) .
- The MMI must be con nected to the ne twor k.
- The symbo l for the Online media source @
u ¢ fig . 212 is shown in the MMI.
(0
......
N serio us injur ies. Store these types of devices
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t
Media
Applies to : using onli ne media
Additional requ irement :
- A sup ported online me di a se rvice mus t be avail-
ab le in your cou nt ry.
- You mus t have a n acco unt with a suppor t ed on-
line me di a se rvice .
- Depending on t he on line m ed ia se rvice, you
m ust ins t all a nd open a n app on yo ur mobile
dev ice.
Starting Online media
- Press t he IMEDIA i button. Press t he lef t control
button unt il the sources overv iew ¢ page 237
is displayed.
- Select an d confirm an o nline media serv ice.
Starting Internet radio
- Press the IMEDIA i button. Press the left cont rol
button unti l the sources overv iew ¢ page 237
is displayed.
- Select and confirm Internet radio. The Internet
radio browser or the last stat ion that was play-
ing is shown.
- Selecting the station : if necessary, se lect and
confirm a category in the Inte rnet radio Brows-
er > a station.
Online media and Internet radio: additional op-
tions
- Press the right cont rol button.
The following options may be available, depend-
ing on the information shown (such as the sta-
t ion/t rack that is curre ntly playing):
- Sound settings : see¢ page 253 .
- Wi-Fi settings : see ¢ page 195 , Wi-Fi hot spo t .
- Connection manager : see ¢ page 250 .
- Additio na l options may be available, depend ing
on t he active online med ia service or Int ernet
radio.
_& WARNING
- It is o nly safe t o use t able t s, lap t ops, mo-
bile dev ices and ot her sim ila r devices whe n
t he vehicle is st ati ona ry becau se, like all
loose objec t s, they could be thrown around
the inside of the vehicle in a crash and cause
securely w hile d riving. ~
233
Medi a

- Do not use any wireless devices on the fro nt Multimedia connections

seats within range of the airba gs w hile driv-
USB adapter for Audi music interface
ing. Also read and follow the warnings in
c:>page 2 77, Front airbags. You can connect your mobile devices (such as a
smartphone or MP3 player) to the Audi music in-
CDNote terface and charge them using a special USB
- Always f ollow the information found in c>0 adapter .
in Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195 .
- Please note that there generally are addi-
tiona l costs when using an online media
service account, especially when it is used
internationally.

{!) Tips
- Depending on the Internet connection and
network traff ic, a connection loss can occur
during playback of on li ne media services.
- Online media and Internet radio usage de-
pends on the service availability of the third
party provider.
- Audi AG simply makes the accessto on line
media services possible t hrough the MMI
and does not take any respons ibility for the
contents of the onli ne med ia services.
- Always read the chapter c:>page 196, Audi
connect (Infotainment) general informa-
tion.
- Depending on the mobile device used, the re
may be interr uptions du ring media playback
and when using the Audi MMI connect app.
To avoid inter ruption s when using a mob ile
device, do not lock t he screen on your mo-
bile device and keep the Audi MMI connect
app in the foreground .
- Contact an autho rized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for additional
informat ion about on line media .
®-
Fig. 213 Audi USB adapters
You can purchase the USBadapter c>fig . 213
from an author ized Audi dealer or at specialty
stores:
Q) USB adapter for devices with a micro USBcon-
nect ion
@ USB adapter for devices with an Apple Light-
ning connect ion
@ USB adapte r for devices with an Apple Dock
connector
You can conne ct your mob ile devices throug h t he
Audi music interface to t he MMI using the USB
adapter and charge the battery at the same time.
Applies to: vehicles wit h Audi music interface
- Audi music interface : see c>page 235.
CDNote
Handle the USB adapter carefully. Do not al-
low it to be pinched .

234

Audi music interface
Appl ies to: vehicles with Audi music interface
Connect your mobile devices to the Audi music
interface in order to operate them through the
MMI and charge the battery.
Fig. 214 Connecting mobil e devices
The Audi music interface is located under the
center armrest in the center console (§ r::;,page 8,
fig. 2.
- Connecting a mobile device using a USB
adapte r: connect the applicable USB adapter @
fig.
r:::;, 214 to the port on the Audi music inter-
face @ and then connect the adapter to the
mobile device @ (such as an iPhone).
- Charging a mobile device using a USB adapter:
when you connect a mobile device to the Audi
music interface @ using the app licable USB
adapter @ ¢ fig . 214, the battery will auto-
matically charge .
- Disconnecting a mobile device from the Audi
music interface : remove the USB adapter @
fig . 214 from the Audi music int erface .
r:::;,
- Disconnecting mobile devices with an Apple
Dock connector : remove the Apple Dock con-
necto r from the Apple device with the release
tabs pressed in @ ,:;;,page 234, fig. 213 .
The med ia are started and operated through the
mobile device or the MMI,depending on the de-
vice being used r:::;,page237 .
Connecting two mobile devices: if two mob ile
dev ices (for example iPhone and smartphone) are
connected at the same time, then both devices
u can be used as playback sources .
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t
Media
You can connect mobi le devices using the analog
AUX port.
- Connecting a mobile device to the AUX input :
fig . 214 to the AUXin-
connect the cable ® r::;,
put @ on the Audi music interface and then to
t he mobile device @) (such as an MP3 player or
sma rtp hone) .
- Disconnecting a mobile device from the AUX
fig. 214 from the
input : remove the cable ® r::;,
AUXinput @ r::;, fig. 214.
- Operation: select and confirm the External au-
dio player so urce ® ¢ page 237, fig. 215. The
media are sta rt ed and operated through the
mobile device @) ¢ fig. 214.
A WARNING
Driving requires your complete and undivided
attention. As the driver, you have complete
responsibility for safety in traffic. Never oper-
ate mob ile dev ices wh ile driving, because this
increases the risk of an acc ident.
(D Note
- Remove the connector from the Audi music
interface carefully so it is not damaged.
- Use a USB extens ion cable to connect dev i-
ces that have an integrated USB connector
(such as a USB stick) to prevent damage to
your USB device and the Audi music inter-
face.
- Extremely high or low temperatures that
can occur inside vehicles can damage mobile
dev ices and/or impair their performance.
Never leave mob ile devices in the vehicle in
extreme ly high or low temperatures.
© Tips
- When you switch the ign it ion off, the USB
ports are st ill supplied w it h power until the
ene rgy management intervenes.
- Do not use a n addit ional adapte r or USB ex-
tension cable to connect mobile devices to
the Audi music int e rface that already have a
cable or that must be connected w ith a USB
adapter (r::;,page 234). They may impair the
functionality . .,.
235
Media

- You can purchase the AUX connector cable
from an authorized Audi dealer or at spe-
cialty stores.
- Functionality is not guaranteed for mobile
devices that do not conform to the USB 2.0
specification.
- USB hubs are not supported.
- Some versions of the iPod such as the iPod
shuffle cannot be connected to the USB
adapter for devices with Apple Dock connec-
tor. Connect these devices using a AUX con-
nector cable.
- Changed content on a mobile device l) that
is connected to the Audi music interface
may not be displayed in the media center.
In this case, reset the Media settings back
to Factory settings Q page 250.
- Video playback through the Audi music in-
terface is only supported if the connected
device is recognized as a USB storage device
(for example a USB stick) . Apple devices and
MTP devices (such as smartphones) are not
recognized as USB storage devices.
- iPod/iPhone malfunctions also affect the
operation of the MMI. Reset your iPod/
iPhone if this happens.
- Audi recommends updating the iPod/iPhone
software to the latest version. For impor-
tant information on operating your iPod/
iPhone, refer to the user guide for the de-
vice.
- The USB adapter on the Audi music inter-
face will support iPod touch/iPhone from
the 5th generation or later with the light-
ning connector.
- For more information about the Audi music
interface and supported devices, check the
Audi database for mobile devices at
www.audiusa.com/mp3 or contact an au-
thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility .
· Rear Seat Entertainment preparation
App li es to: vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment preparat ion
The Rear Seat Entertainment preparation in-
cludes cables and a mount for Audi Entertain-
ment mobile in the driver's and front passenger's
seat backrests.
The suitable Audi Entertainment mobile Rear
Seat Entertainment package is available through
Audi Genuine Accessories.
Using Audi Genuine Accessories is recommended.
Audi has established their reliability, safety and
suitability.
We cannot evaluate or endorse other produ cts in
this way, even if t he product is approved by acer-
tified testing agency or government agency .
~ Note
Only use devices that are approved for the
Rear Seat Entertainment preparation . Unap-
proved devices may cause damage to the vehi-
cle electronics.
(D Tips
- Contact an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for additional
information about Audi Entertainment mo-
bile.
- Always read the chapter ~ page 383.
- The Rear Seat Entertainment preparation is
not intended to charge external electronic
devices.

1 > App lies o nly t o MTP devices. Does not apply to Appl e devi-

ces and USB m ass storage devices.

236
 Media

Playing media 0 Wi-Fi audio player* . . . . ...... . 232

® Online media* and Internet radio* 233
Accessing media
- Playing audio/ video files : select a source in the
You can start and operate various media Media menu > Category (such as artists > al -
th rough the MMI control panel. bum > track).
- Moving one level up in the folder structure :
press the ! BACKI button . Or: se lect and confirm
Folder up.
- Selecting the previous or next track/ chapte r*
1l: press the On/Off knob on the MMI control
panel briefly to the left t<l<lor right l>t>L
- Fast-forw arding and rewinding audio/video*
files : press and hold the On/Off knob on the
Fig. 2 1 5 Diagram: possible sources in the Media menu MMI control pa nel to the left t<l<lor right t>t>Ifor
a longer t ime .
- Pausing or resuming playback: press the On/
Off knob on the MMI cont rol panel brief ly.

(D Tips
- You can scroll through long lists quickly by
turning the control knob quickly . The scroll-
ing speed depends o n the numbe r of list en -
Fig. 2 16 Diagram : possible sources in the Media menu
tries .
- For safety reasons, t he video image is on ly
Requirement: a media sou rce mu st con t ain au-
displaye d when the vehicle is stationary. On-
dio/video* fi les ¢ page 229.
ly the so und from th e video plays whil e dr iv-
~ Press t he IM EDIA i button. Press the left control ing.
bu tton until the so urces ove rview is disp laye d .
~ Se le ct and confirm the desi red sou rce. Or:
press the IMEDIAi button repeated ly until the
desired source is se lecte d.

Depen ding on t he veh icle eq uipment, the fo llow-

ing sources may be disp layed in the Media menu:

(D Jukebox* . . . . . ... .... . . ... . . . 230

@ DVD/ CD drive* . . . .... . . . . . . . . 229,230
® SD card reader 229
© Audi music interface * ......... . 235
such as an iPhone, USBstick
® External audio player . . . . . . . . . . 235
such as an MP3 playe r con nected t o
the AUXinput
© Bluetooth audio player* ....... 231
u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0 1l Depending on the DVD, t his may not be possible during
0
:E playback.
<t

237
Media
Media center
Various categories for selecting audio/video*
files ore available in the media center .
Fig. 217 Example: USBst ick categories
Fig. 218 Example: USBst ick cat egories
~ Press the IMEDIAi but t on. Press the left control
button until the sources overview is displayed .
Se lect and confirm the desired source.
(D Active source
The active source is highlighted . The active
source symbol (!) may change depending on the
connected device, the online media service* or
Internet radio* . The device name may be dis-
played (for example: MyPhone). As an example, a
USB stick is shown Q fig . 217 connected to the
Audi mus ic interface*.
Depending on the active source, you can select
aud io/video files * from the following categor ies
and add them to the playlist :
@ Favorites
The Favorites category appea rs if at least one en-
try is stored in the favorites list . See Q poge 240,
Favorites.
@ Artists
All available artists are displayed . Select and con-
firm an artist , an album and then a track .
238
@ Albums
All available albums are displayed . Select and
conf irm an album and then a track.
® Genres
All available genres are displayed . Select and
confirm a gen re (s uch as Pop) , an artist, an al-
bum and t hen a song.
@ Tracks
All availab le tracks are displayed . Select and con-
firm a track .
0 Folders
The folder structure or track/chapter list is dis-
played. Se lect a folder , if necessary. Select and
conf irm a track .
@ Playlists
All available playlists from the source and the
smart playlists are displayed . Select and confirm
a playlist and then a track .
Smart playlists :
- Last played tracks : the last tracks played in the
selected source are displayed .
- Most played : the most played songs in these-
lected source are displayed.
- S stars to 1 star: tracks from the selected
source are disp layed according to their rating.
- Not rated: all files from the selected source
w ithout rating information (for example, in the
103 tag) are displayed.
@ Videos*
All availab le video files are displayed. Select and
conf irm a video file .
(D Note
Applies to: vehicles with Audi connect (Infotainment) and
use of the radio category w ith iPod/iP hone
Always follow th e information found in q (i) in
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195. .,.
 Media

@ Tips Free text search

- Only the categories supported by the medi-
um are available. For example, CD/DVD-
ROM tracks cannot be selected with catego-
ries such as Artists, Albums or Genres.
With an iPod/iPhone (source: Audi music in-
terface¢ page 234), the Podcasts, Audio
books and Composers categories are also
available .
- For safety reasons, the video image is only
displayed when the vehicle is stationary. On-
ly the sound from the video plays while driv-
ing .
- When synchronizing a portable device with
"Cloud" services, playlists may display incor-
rectly in the MMI. Use the media center in
the device.
- With an iPod/iPhone (media source: Audi
music interface ¢ page 234), the Podcasts,
Audio books and Composers categories are
also available.
(D Tips
Applies to: iPod/lPhone on Audi music Interface
- An Internet connection is required to use
the additional Radio category, an on line
media service. Also see the chapter
¢ page 195, Wi-Fi hotspot. Also read the in-
formation on the Audi music interface and
the supported devices ¢ page 234.
- Depending on the Internet connection and
network traffic, a connection loss can occur
during playback of on line media services.
- The use of online media services depends on
the service availability of the third party
provider.
- Audi AG simply makes the access to on line
media services possible through the MMI
and does not take any responsibility for the
contents of the online media services.
Applies to: vehicles with free text search
You can search in the active source by tracks and
video files*, for example
Fig. 219 Input field and results list for free text search
You can open the free text search depending on
the selected source .
Requirement: the playlist ¢ page 240 or media
center¢ page 238 must be displayed.
Opening free text search
.. Keep turning the control knob to the left until
the free text search input field (!) ¢ fig. 219
appears. Or: push the control knob up.
Using the free text search: see ¢ page 165, Free
text search.
Entries that contain the entered search term are
listed in the results list @ ¢ fig . 219. You can
search for artists @ ¢ fig. 219, albums @ or
tracks @) as well as genres and videos.
@ Tips
- It will then search through the files in the
active source.
- If you open free text search in the Folder
category 0 c;>page 238, fig. 218 or
theComposers, Podcasts and Audio books
categories, it will only search through the
files in that folder.

u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

239
Media

Playlist and confirm the location of the se lected favor -

ite.
- Deleting a favorit e: select a favorite from the
list> right control button> Delete favorite >
Delete thi s favorite or Delete all favorite s.

Additional settings
' Options menu

Fig. 2 20 Example: play list Context-spec ific functions and settings a re avail-
able depend ing on the sele cted source.
The track, artist, album and album cover, if appli-
cable, will appear in the playlist ¢ fig. 220 . " Press the right control button .

Option s menu Sound settings

See ¢ page 240, Additional settings . See page
c:::> 253.

Favorites
Up to 50 entries for every media source can be
stored in any order in the favorites list.
Input level
Requirement: a mobile device mus t be connec t ed
to the AUXconnection cab le or to a USB adapter
page 234, f\1ultimedia connections .
c:::>

The volume of the mob ile dev ice is adapted to

Requirement: the playlist or media center must
t he MMI. Aud i recommends adj usting the volume
be open.
on the mobi le device to 70% of the maximum
- Select the des ired entry from the play list or
volume output.
med ia center.
- Select: right control button > Store as favorit e. Bluetooth settings
Or: press and hold the cont rol knob for several
See page
c:::> 2 51.
seco nds.

When you store a track as a favorite, the assoc i- Wi-Fi settings*

ated album will appear in the favorites list as an See ¢ page 195, Wi-Fi hotspot.
entry.
Connection manager
Requirement: at least one entry must be stored
See page
c:::> 250.
in the favorites list.

Displaying the favorite s list : press the !MEDIA !
button. Press the left contro l button until the
sources overview c=>page 23 7 is displayed. Select
the source that conta ins the categories
¢ page 238 (for example, SD card). Select the Fa-
vorit es category .
Requirement: the favorites list must be dis-
played.
- Listening to a favorite : se lect and confirm a fa-
vorite from the list.
- Move favorite : se lect a favorite from the list>
right cont rol button > Move favorite . Select
Additional track information
With the fu nction switched on~ and a playlist
open, various informat io n about t he cur rent t rack
(such as artist, a lbum and alb um cove r*) as well
as the playing t ime and the remain ing playing
time are displayed .
Jukebox memory capacity*
Information on the Jukebox memory capac ity and
the number of stored t racks in the Jukebox is dis-
played. ""'

240
 Media

Change playing position
Turn t he contro l knob to t he left or rig ht. Or :
move your finger on the MMI t ouch con t rol pad*
from the left to the right .
Shuffle 1)
W ith the function switc hed on~. a ll files in the
play list a re played and show n in random orde r.
Repeat track 1l
The selec t ed trac k w ill be used as the ringtone
for incoming calls .
Gracenote online database*
Requireme nt: t he MMI m ust be conne ct ed t o t he
Interne t .
Depend ing on ava ilabi lity, var ious information
will load abou t the t rack cu rrent ly playing wh en
t his fu nction is sw itched on ~ -

When t he function is switched o n~ . the cur rent Favorites

track repeats. See c:>page 240.

Repeat* Additional options

Req uirement: an iPod/iPhone* must be selected
as the media so urce in t he Audi music interface
c:>page 237 , Accessing media.
- Track: the current t rack will be repeated.
- Folder: t he t racks in t he cur rent folder a re
played contin uous ly in a loop.
- Off : t he fu ncti o n is switc hed off .
Back to 'Playback'
The o ptions men u is closed . The track currently
play ing appears in t he playlist.
Play similar music*
The track cur rently play ing is q uickly analyzed
(such as a rtists, genres, mood, beat) and a smart
play list with s imilar tracks is shown.
Play more ...
A sma rt playlist is show n based on the track cur-
rently play ing. You can se lect between a playlist
with mo re t racks by this artist , from this album
or of this genre.
Copy to jukebo x*
Requirement: the vehi cle must be stationa ry and
a video fi le* or a DVD*must be playing .
Parental control*
Playba ck of video DVDs can be res t ricted using
parent al con tr ol.
Ente r t he passwo rd for paren t al con t rol. Pass-
wor d set at th e fa ctory: 1234. You have t he fol-
lowing opti o ns:
- Protection level: select and co nfirm the protec-
t ion level (for examp le, Level 5) . Eigh t differen t
conten t rat ing levels can be set for par ental
con tr ol. If yo u se t the pa ren t al con t rol level at
Level 5, all DVDs fr om leve l 1-5 can be playe d .
Video DVDs with a h igher level will not play . Se -
lect No restriction to remove all of the restr ic-
tions .
- Change password: edit t he cur rent passwo rd.
Switch to full screen
The video image is disp layed . Tur n t he contro l
kn ob to di splay the pl aylist . Or: p ress the ! BACKI
butt on.

See c:>page 230, Adding files to the Jukebox. Replay video l )

Set as ringtone* 2) W hen this funct io n is swi t ched on~, t he curre nt

video will rep lay . ..,.
Req uireme nt: a cell phone must be connec t ed to
the MMI. The tra ck cu rrent ly playing mu st be in
t he Ju ke box* c:>page 230.
u
co
......
N
r-...
N l) The fun ct ion automa ti cally switches off whe n the sou rce
......
0 is chan ged .
0
:E: 2> This fun ction is not availab le for all cell pho ne s.
'<t

241
Media

Show DVD menu Picture for- Description

The DVD main menu opens in the Info t ainmen t mat
sys t em display. Cinema-
scope
- Selecting a menu item : select and co nfirm a
menu it em. Or: move yo ur finger on the MMI
t ouch contro l pa d* and press the contro l kno b .
Original
Audio track ll
You can manually set the a udio track (language
and aud io format). The language and aud io for-
mat op t ions depend on t he video DVD.
4 :3
Subtitles 1l
You can set subt itles for playback manua lly. The
languages available depend on t he DVD.
16:9
Aspect
Aud i recommends the Automatic setting for the
picture format. You can set the pict ur e format
depending on the active fi le or so ur ce (for exam-
ple video file*, DVD*). (D
Use this setting for films in cinema
format 21:9. Black bars w ill appear
on the upper/ lower edge in the In-
fota inment system display .
The image is disp layed in the rat io
of the so urce format . Select this
opt ion if the image is disto rted or a
section of the image is cut off
when Auto is selected.
The image is f ixed in the 4 :3 pie-
tu re format . Black bars are s hown
on the sides of the In fota inment
system d isplay.
The image is fixed in the 16 :9 pie-
t ure format. Black bars a re shown
in t he upper and lower edges of t he
Infotai nment system di splay .
Tips

Picture for- Description
mat
Automatic The MMI detects the picture for-
mat of the source and d isp lays the
image in the optim um ratio. Black
ba rs may appea r on the sides of
the disp lay, depe nding on the
source forma t a nd the Infotain -
ment sys t em disp lay t ha t is instal-
led .
Zoom The image is enlarged to fill the
e nti re Infotai nment system d is-
play. Switch the function off if t he
image is d istorte d .
- Not all video DVDs have parenta l cont rol.
- The secur ity leve ls fo r th e Parental control
are based on t he US standar d s from the Mo-
t ion Picture Associat ion of Ame rica (MPAA).
Note that the age levels fo r video DVDs in
European countries may differ.
- Password ent ry fo r Parental control will be
locked for approximately one m inute if you
enter the inco rrect password three t imes in
a row. The passwo rd can on ly be reset by an
authorized Audi dealer.

l) Depending on the DVD, thi s may not be possib le during

playback.

242
 Media

Supported media and file formats

Overview

The Jukebox *, SD card reader and th e USBstorage device* connection support th e follo wing audio/vid-
eo file prop erti es:

Audio files Video files*

Supported SD/SDHC / SDXC/MMC memory cards: wi t h a capacity up to 12 8 GB
media DVD drive : audio CDs (up to 80 min.) w ith CD t ext (art ist, album, song)*, CD-ROMsw ith
a capacity up to 700 MB; DVD±R/RW; DVD video; DVD audio wit h audio t racks that are
compatib le w it h a DVD video player
Audi music interfa ce: mobile devi ces~ page 234 such as iPhones, MTP players, and
USBstorage devices in " USB Device Subclass 1 and 6" tha t conform to USB 2.0: USB
sticks, USB MP3 players (Plug-and-Play capable), externa l USBflash drives and hard
drives
File system Memory cards: exFAT, FAT, FAT32, NTFS
USB storag e devices: FAT, FAT32, NTFS
USB mass storage device partitions (primary / logical*) : two per USB connect ion
CD/DVD file systems : I S0 9660, Joliet, UDF
Metadat a Album cover: GIF, JPG, PNG with max.
800x800 px. The album cover from the
med ium or from Gracenote* is disp layed,
depending on availability.
Format MPEG Windows MPEG FLAC MPEG 1/2 MPEG4AVC Windows Media
1/2 Media 2/4 (H.264) Video 9
Layer-3 Audio 9
and 10
File exten- .mp3 .wma .m4a; .flac .mpg; .mp4; .wmv;
sion .m4b; .mpeg .m4v; .asf
.aac .mov;
.avi
Playlist s .M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
Characteris- up to maximum 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz up to maximum 2,000 kbit/s and
ti cs 48 kHz sampling frequencies sampling 720x576 px. at maximum 2Sfps
frequen-
cy
Number of DVD drive*: max. 1,000 files per medium
files Jukebox*: approximately 10 GB storage space; max. 3,000 f iles can be imported
USB storage devices and memory cards: max. 10,000 files per med ium; max. 1,000
files per playlist/directory

display showing the remain ing play time

{O)Tips may differ for MP3 files with variable bit
- The media drives do not support the W in- rate.
u
co
.... dows Media Audio 9 Voice format. - Special characters (such as those in 103 tag
N
r-... - To compress MP3 f iles, a bit rate of at least information) display differently depend ing ..,.
....
N
0 160 kbit/s is recommended by Audi. The
0
:E:
'<t

243
Media

on the system language and cannot always
be guaranteed .
- The man ufa ctu rer of the storage device can
provide information about its "U SB Device
Subclass" .
- Some MTP player f unctions are not support -
ed, such as rating music tracks and video
playback.

CD drive
Applies to: vehicles with a CD drive

The following audio file proper t ies are supported by the CDdrive:

Audio files
Supported Aud io CDs (up t o 80 min) wi t h CD text (artist, album, t rack)*, CD-ROMs wi t h a capaci-
media ty of up to 700 MB
File system CD file system : IS09660, Joliet, UDF
Metadata Album cover : GIF, JPG, PNG wit h max. 800x800 px. The album cover from the medi-
um may be displayed, depend ing on availabili ty.
Format MPEG 1/ 2 Windows Media Au- MPEG 2/ 4 FLAC
Layer-3 dio 9 and 10
File extension .mp3 .wma .m4a; .flac
.m4b ;
.aac
Playlists .M3U; .PLS; .WPL; .M3U8; .ASX
Characteristics up to maxim um 320 kbit/s and 48 kHz sampli ng frequenc ies 48 kHz sampling
frequency
Number of Maxim um 1,000 f iles per medium
files

- Special characters (such as t hose in 1D3 tag

(D} Tips
- To comp ress MP3 f iles, a bit rate of at least
160 kbit/s is recommended. The display
showing t he remaining play t ime may differ
fo r MP3 files w ith variable bit rate .
information) display differently depending
on the system language and cannot always
be guaranteed .

Troubleshooting
Problem Solution
Audi music interface / Bluetooth Read the inst ructions in the chapter ~ page 234, Multimedia con-
audio player *: mob ile device is nectionsl ~ page 231, 8/uetooth audio player . You can lear n
not supporte d . about support ed mobi le devices in t he Audi dat abase fo r mobile
devices at www.audiu s a.com/bluetooth .
Audi music interface: the volume Adju st the volume of the mobile device to approximate ly 70% of
is too high/too low when start ing the maximum output ¢ page 240, Input leve l. ...
playback thro ugh t he AUX inp ut .

244

Problem
Audi music interface : the porta-
ble device is not recogni zed as a
source.
Audi music interface : malfunc-
tions during audio playback
through an iPod/ iPhone.
Audi music interface : contents
that are changed on a mob ile de-
vice connected to the Audi music
interface al are not displayed in
the media center.
AUX input: there is stat ic when
connecting and disconnecting the
AUX connection cable .
Bluetooth audio player* / Wi-Fi
audio player* : aud io playback in-
terference.
Jukebox*: tracks on the imported
playlist are grayed out.
Jukebox*: imported tracks cannot
be played or found.
Online media *: connection failed
between the MMI and the Audi
MMI connect app .
Audi music interface: contents
that are changed on a mobile de-
vice connected to the Audi music
interface are not displayed in the
med ia center .
Bluetooth audio player*: interfer-
ence with track d isplay and audio
playback.
u
co
.....
N
r--...
N
.....
0
0
:E:
'<t
Media
Solution
For many ce ll phones or mobile devices, playback is not possible
when the battery level is too low (less than 5% of its capacity).
The mobile de-vice will only be recognized as a source in the MMI
after connecting if the battery charge is sufficient .
The Bluetooth audio player function is switched on. Switch this
function off c:>page 2 51 when you a re not using the Bluetooth
audio player.
Reset the Media settings to the facto ry defau lt settings
c:>page250.
When connecting a nd disconnecting, the External audio player
source is already selected. Before connecting or disconnecting the
mobile device, eithe r mute the device (see c:>page 253) or switch
to a different audio source (fo r example c:>page 223, Opening the
radio) .
Only one interface should be act ively used at a time to ensure
problem-free playback .
When importing playlists, a ll of the fi les themselves must be im-
ported.
If yo u cannot find impor ted tracks in the media center, th ey may
not be supported. Only copy supported files c:>page 243 to the
Jukebox.
To establish a connection to the MMI, the MMI connection sw itch
must be switched on in the Audi MMI connect app status screen .
Reset the Media settings to the factory default settings
c:>page 250.
Playback interference can occur when using the Bluetooth audio
player if a music player app from a th ird party provider is open.
Aud i recommends using the integrated media player on your Blue-
tooth dev ice (such as a smartphone) .
245
Media

Problem Solution
Wi -Fi hotspot* : your Wi-Fi device Make sure the network optimization functions are switched off in
is disconnected from the W i-Fi the Wi-Fi settings or in the network settings for your W i-Fi device.
hotspot. For addit ional information refer to the user guide for your Wi-Fi
device.
Audi music interface: audio play- Make sure the USB mode MTP is selected in the settings on your
back through the connected mo- mobile device.
bile device is not possib le.
a> Applies only to MTP dev ices. Does not apply to Apple dev ices and USB ma ss sto rage dev ices.

246

Audi smartphone
interface
Setup
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartpho ne interface
You can connect your smartphone to the MMI us-
ing the Audi smartphone interface . Certain con-
tent on your smartphone is adapted to the Info-
tainment system display while driving and can
be operated through the MMI control panel.
Requirement
The vehicle must be stat ionary and the ignition
must be switched on.
iPhone generation 5 or higher with Lightning
connector and iOS 7.1.2 operating system or
higher. Or:
Smartphone with Android Auto app and Android
5.0 Lollipop operating system or higher.
.,.Connect your smar t phone to t he Audi music in-
te rface c:>
page 235 using a USBadapter
c:>page 234, fig. 213 .
.. Select and confirm Acti vate Apple CarPlay or
Activate And roid Auto now.
.. Follow the system instruct ions.
.,.Pay attention to any add itional system prompts
on your smartphone if applicable.
If you chose not to use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto when connecting your smartphone for the
first time, you can start the Audi smartphone in-
terface later on using the Connection m anager .
.. Select: IMENU Ibutton > Audi smartphone in·
terfa ce > Change to connecti on manager .
.. Connect your smar t phone t o t he Audi music in-
terface using a USBadapter c:>page 234,
fig . 213.
.. Select and confirm Audi smartphone in the
Connection manager c:>page 250. You can se-
lect your smartphone in the list of devices that
are already paired c:>page 251.
.,.Follow the system instruct ions.
u me nu bar, push the control knob down.
co
......
N
r-...
Always follow the informat ion found in c:>(D in
N
...... Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195 .
0
0
:E:
'<t
Aud i s martphon e int e rfac e
{!) Tips
- The functions that can be used depend on
the following factors, among others:
- the brand of your smartphone
- the vers ion of the operating system in
your smartphone
- the software version of the app used
- the USBadapter cable and correct connec-
tion
- your cell phone se rvice provider
- the customized settings on your smart -
phone
- One of the factors above or a combinat ion
of any of them could cause your smartphone
to be incompatib le wit h the Audi smart-
phone interface. Compatibility cannot be
guaranteed for all types of smartphones.
For more informat ion and assistance, refe r
to the use r guide and the manufactu rer of
your smartphone .
- If the connected smartphone has voice con-
tr ol, you can operate your smartpho ne using
t he external voice recognition system
c:>page174.
- The menu language shown in t he MMI is
based on t he settings in your smartphone .
- The time displayed in the MMIis based on
t he settings in your smartphone.
- Several MMIfunctions are not availab le
when Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is ac-
tive.
- You cannot connect any mob ile devices via
Bluetooth when an Apple CarPlay connec-
tion is active.
Operating
Applies to: vehicles wit h Audi smartp hone interface
Opening a menu
App le CarPlay : you can go back to the Apple Car-
Play main menu regardless of the se lect ed menu
item by pressing and holding the IBACKI button .
Android Auto : to go back to the Android Auto
247
Audi smartphone interface

Opening a menu item

Select and confi rm a menu it em using t he MMI

contr ol panel.

Troubleshooting
App lies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface

Problem Solution
Audi smartphone Check the charge level of your sma rtphone battery.
interface cannot be Check t he USB cable and use a d ifferent one if necessary.
opened. Check if Andro id Auto or Apple CarPlay is available in your country .
Android Auto : check if t he Andr oid Aut o app is inst all ed on your smart phone .
Connecting the Check if yo u are using the correct USB adapter and if the USB adapter is connect-
smartphone to the ed correctly to your smartphone and the Audi music interface ¢ page 234.
MMI failed . Apple CarPlay: check if App le CarPlay is act ivated on your smart phone .
Android Auto: check in the And roid Auto app if And roid Auto permits new
veh icles.
The smartphone is Check if you are using the correct USB adapter and if the USB adapter is connect-
not automatically ed correctly to your smartp hone and the Audi music interface ¢ page 234 .
detected. Check if the requirements needed to connect a smartphone have been met.

248
 System settings

System settings Date format

If you se lect DD.MM .YYYY, the date display will
Setting the date and show, for example, 31.08.2018. If you select
time MM/DD/YYYY , the date display will show, for ex-
You can set the clock time manually or using the ample, 08/31/2018. If you select YYYY-MM-
CPS*. DD, the date display will show, for example,
2018-08-31 .
.,.Select : I MENU I button> Settings> left control
button > MMI settings> Date & t ime .
MMI settings
.,.Or: select : IMENUI button> Vehicle > left con-
trol button > Vehicle settings> Date & time . .,.Select: ! MENUI button> Settings> left control
button > MMI settings .
Automatic setting
When this function is switched on~. the time Language
and date are automatically set. You can change the display language as well as
the language for the voice guidance* and voice
Time
recognition system*.
Requirement: the Automatic setting must be
The number of languages avai la ble depends on
switched off .
the market.
Press the control knob. You can set the Time
manually by turning and pressing the control Measurement units
knob. The following measurement un its can be set de-
pending on availab ility: Speed, Distance, Tem-
Date
perature, Fuel consumption, Volume, Pressure.
Requirement: the Automatic setting must be
switched off. Tool tips
When this function is switched on~' your MMI
Press the control knob . You can set the Date
shows you tips for input . The frequency of how
manually by turning and press ing the cont rol
often it displays decreases with time.
knob.
Speech dialog system
Time zone
Applies to : vehicles wit h voice recognition system
When selecting the appropriate time zone, a
Depending on vehicle equipment, the following
sampling of countr ies in this zone will be listed .
functions may be available:
Automatic time zone* Command display : when this function is switch-
When this function is switched on~. the time ed on ~ , the MMI w ill show you the possible
will automatically adjust to the corresponding commands for voice input in the respective
time zone. menu.

Automatic daylight saving time* Short dialog : when this function is switched on
~. a shorter form of the prompts is used .
When th is function is switched on~. the time
will automatically switch to daylight saving time . Command during voice output*: this function is
switched on at the factory . When this function is
Time format switched on~. you can say new commands dur-
u ing announcements. You do not need to wait for
co
......
If you select 24h, the clock will d isp lay, for ex-
N
r-... ample , 13 :00 . If you se lect AM/PM , the clock the signal tone (beep) during an announcement.
N
......
0 will disp lay, for example, 1:00 PM . When the funct ion is switched off 0, you need to .,,.
0
:E:
'<t

249
System settings

wait for the signal tone (beep) to say a new Connection manager
command. '
Introduction
Volume: you can adjust the volume of the
prompts by turning the control knob. The connection manager gives you an overview
of your connected devices and their network sta -
Individual speech training (only when the vehi-
tus.
cle is stat ionary): you can adapt the voice recog-
nit ion system to your voice or pronunciation in
order to improve t he system's ability t o recognize ====-
Settings

~•_P_n_m_•~~-h~o_n~e_:
________
Conne ·ction manager

_____ M
_y~Phone
.. ·
~
I
your speech . Individua l training is comprised of , MyPhone @

20 speech entries that consist of commands and • Secondary phone: Not connected
• Data connection : Not connected
sequences of numbers. You can delete the pro -
• MMI connect App: Not connected
grammed voice tra ining w ith the Reset individu- " Audi smartphone: Not connected
al speech training function.

Display brightness Fig. 221 Connect ion manager

You can adjust the brightness of the Infotain-

" Select : ! M E NUI button> Settings > left control
m ent system disp lay by turning the contro l knob.
button > MMI settings> Connection manager .
Factory settings " Select and confirm a menu item.

The following funct ions can be reset to the facto- If a mobile device was already connected and you
ry default settings : select and confirm the corresponding menu item,
the dev ice name and conn ect ion mode are dis-
- Sound settings
played under the menu item c:!;>fig. 221.
- Radio
- Media settings You can individually Connect(~ or Disconnect
- Jukebox* (0) a pa ired device .
- Directory
-Telephone ' Primary phone
- Bluetooth and Wi-Fi* Applies to: vehicles with telephone

- Navigation settings*
- Connect new device: search for and connect a
- Navigation and online memory * cell phone.
- Voice recognition system* - List of devices already paired : se lect you r cell
- Shortcut keys phone from the list of all the dev ices that a re
- Message settings* already paired.
-Apps*
-Tool tips
Secondary phone
- Audi connect* Applies to: vehicles with tele pho ne
- Audi smartphone interface *
- Connect new device: search for and con nect a
You can se lect the desired functions individually cell phone .
or all at once with the option Select all entries .
- list of devices already paired : se lect your cell
Select and confirm Restore factory settings . phone from the list of all the devices th at are
already paired.
(D Tips
Make sure that not only the settings were de-
leted but also the stored data, if applicable .

250
 S ys t e m set ting s

Data connection (D Note

App lies to vehicles with Aud i connect (Infota inment )
- The data connect ion is made using t he embed-
ded SIM card l) ¢page 189. You do not need to
adjust any addit ional se t t ings.
(D Note
Always follow the info rmat ion found in ~ CD
in
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
MMI connect app
Applies t o vehicles wit h Audi connect (Infota inment )
Req uirement: the Audi MMI connect app m ust
be installed and open on your mobile device .
- Connect new device: search for and connec t a
mobile device (s uch as a smartphone).
- List of devices already paired : select your mo-
bile device from the list of a ll the devices that
are already paired.
Audio player
Ap plies to vehicles with Bluetoot h or Wi -Fi audio player
Always fo llow the information found in ~ 0 in
Wi-Fi hotspot on page 195.
Directory
Applies to : vehicles w it h te lephone
Display contacts from a cell phone (or an addi-
tional cell phone).
Requirement: no cell phones can be connec t ed to
the MMI using the Handsfree prof ile .
- Connect new device: search fo r and connect a
new ce ll phone .
- List of devices already paired : select yo ur ce ll
pho ne from the list of all the cell phones that
are a lready pai red .
Audi smartphone
Applies to : vehicles w ith Audi smartp hone interface
- Connect your ce ll phone to the Audi music in-
terface ~ page 235 using a USB adapter
¢ page 234, fig . 213 .

- Select your cell phone from the list of cell

Bluetooth play er*
phones that have a lready been connected.
Requirement: the Bluetooth funct ion and vis ibili-
ty must be switched on in the MMI ¢ page 251
Additional options
and on the ce ll phone.
Depend ing on the selected function, you can use
- Connect new device: press the contro l knob.
the right control button to access the availab le
Se lect Bluetoot h audio player. Search for and
additional options in the connection manager .
connect a mobile device.
- List of devices alrea dy paired: se lect a Blue- Delete Bluetooth device*
too t h device from the list of a ll the devices that
The selected cell phone/mobile device is discon-
are already paired .
nected from the MMI and is removed from the
Wi - Fi audio pla yer* list of all devices that are already paired .

Requirement: the W i-Fi hotspot on the MMI Show Bluetooth profiles *

~ page 195 and on you r ce ll phone must be
You can Connect or Disconnect the Handsfree,
sw itched on.
Messages*, Directory/ contact s and Bluetooth
- Connect new device: press the control knob . audio player profiles separate ly.
Search for and connect a Wi-Fi capable device .
Bluetooth settings *
- Disconnect Wi-Fi audio player: deactivate the
Wi-Fi on your W i-Fi capab le device. The dev ice - Bluetooth : select and confi rm a setting for the
u
~ will be automatically removed from the list. Bluetooth connection visib ility . Se lect Visible ...,
N
r-...
N
.....
0
0
~ l) SIM card installe d in t he vehicle at th e factory.

25 1
System settings
for the MMI to be visib le to other devices . Se-
lect Invisible for the MMI to not be visible to
other devices. However, it is still possib le to es-
tab lish a Bluetooth connection with paired de -
vices when the vis ibility is switched off. Select
Off to turn visibility off . Then a Bluetooth con-
nect ion is not possible .
- Bluetooth audio player: when this function is
switched on~. the Bluetooth aud io player is
available as a sou rce in the Media menu .
- Bluetooth name : the MMI Bluetooth name (for
example .,AUDI MMI 2016") is displayed and
can be changed .
Online settings*
- Data usage counter: the amount of data pack-
ets that are sent and received through the MMI
is d isplayed . You can reset the data usage infor -
mation to zero using the Reset data counter
option.
- Network status: the mob ile network provider
for data service as well as the network status
are displayed.
Wi-Fi settings*
See c>page 195, Wi-Fi hotspot.
Storing as a default telephone
Applies to: vehicles with telephone
Requirement: a cell phone must be connected to
the MMI c>page 176 .
As soon as the cell phone is in range and the
Bluetooth function on th e cell phone and in t he
MMI is switched on, this cell phone is given prior -
ity over the other Bluetooth devices and is con -
nected directly to the MMI. The connected cell
phone is displayed first in the device list.
Network settings*
- Login: you can chose an automatic login to
your ce ll phone service provider's network, or
you can choose a manual login from the list of
available networks.
- Network selection: available networ ks in the
present location can be se lected under network
selection. This function is only available for the
Manual login setting.
252
Apple CarPlay sound settings/ Android Auto
sound settings
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
See ¢ page 253.
About Apple CarPlay/ About Android Auto
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Here you w ill find lega l informa t ion regarding
the use of Apple CarPlay or Andro id Auto and in-
formation about device -specific data exchange.
Delete CarPlay device/Delete Android Auto
device
Applies to: vehicles with Audi smartphone interface
Requirement: your cell phone must not be con-
nected to the Aud i m usic interface with a USB
adapter .
Select: Audi smartphone > a device from the list
> righ t control button.
To remove your cell phone from the list, select
and confirm Delete CarPlay device or Delete An-
droid Auto device.
System update
.,,.Select : ! ME N UI button> Settings > left control
button > System maintenance.
- System update : slide the storage device with
the update data into the appropriate drive
¢ page 229. Se lect and confi rm the dr ive>
Start update. The length of the process de-
pends on the size of the updat e .
- Reset driver installation: the selected media
driver package is reset to the settings at the
time of delivery.
- Version information : info rmation on the MMI
sof t ware version and the navigation database*
soft ware version is disp layed. The Software in-
formation function also prov ides information
on the software contained in the MMI and the
licensing agreement.
 System settings

Sound settings Select and confirm a 30 effect * setting (surro und

sound):
The sound distribution and volume of the MMI
- Off : the 30 effect is switched off .
can be adjusted individually. The settings depend
- Low: the 3D effect is optimized, for example
on vehicle equipment.
for aud io books.
- Medium : the 3D effect is optimi zed for all sour-
ces.
- High: the 3D effect is at the maximum.

Subwoofer*

Turn the cont rol knob to adj ust the subwoofer.

Speed-dependent volume control

Fig. 222 Adjust ing the balance/fade r
...Select : IMENU Ibutton> Sound > left contro l
button > Entertainment .
Turn the cont rol knob to adj ust the playback vol-
ume to the no ise inside the veh icle .
AudioPilot*

Treble / Bass When this funct ion is switched on~. the play-
back volume is automat ically adjusted to the lev-
You can adjust the Treble and Bass settings by
el of noise inside the vehicle (dynamic road noise
turning the control knob . The changed settings
compensation) .
only apply for the a udio source that is act ive at
the t ime. This allows you to adj ust the sound set-
tings for each audio source separately . Volume settings
Balance/ fader (Sound focu s) Adjusting the volume

- Adjusting the sound distribution to the left or
right : press t he control knob . Turn the control
knob to the left or right to the desired position.
- Adjusting the sound distribution to the front
or rear: press the contro l knob again. Turn t he
contro l knob to the left or right to the desired
pos itio n.
- Adjusting the sound distribution using the
MMI touch* : move your finger on the MMI
touch control panel in the desired d irection .
Sound effects
Select and confirm a Focussetting:
- All: a ll speakers in the vehicle are active (sym-
metr ica l sound distribution) .
- Front: only the speakers in the front of the ve-
The volume of an audio source or a sys tem mes -
sage (for example, from the voice recognition
system*) can be adjusted directly while the
sound is playing using the On/Off knob.
- Increasing or decreasing the volume : turn the
On/Off knob (!) ¢ page 156, fig. 158 t o the
right or left.
- Muting or pausing: press the On/ Off knob
briefly . Or: turn the On/Off knob to the left un-
til the symbol @ ¢ page 166 appea rs. An ac-
tive audio/v ideo source is stopped.
- Unmuting or resuming : press the On/Off kno b
briefly. Or: turn the On/Off knob to the right .
'-
A WARNING
-

To reduce the risk of an accident, adju st the

hicle are active .
volume of the audio system so that audible
- Rear*: only the speakers in the rear of the veh i-
signals from outside the vehicle, such as po-
cle are active.
u lice and fire s irens, can be heard easily at all
~ - Movie*: the speakers in the center of the vehi-
times.
~ cle are active.
....
N
0
0
:E:
'<t

253
System settings

Volume : see ¢ page 249.

@ Tips
Volumes that are too high or too low are au- Individual speech training: see ¢ page 249.
tomatically adju sted to a set level when the Parking aid*
MMI is switched on.
You can adjust the volume of the signal tone by
turning the control knob.
Adjusting the system volume
- Adjusting the Front volume : select and con-
.,. Select: IMENU Ibutton> Sound> left contro l firm High , Medium or Low.
button.
- Adjusting the Rear volume : se lect and confirm
Telephone High , Medium or Low.
App lies to: vehicles with telep hone
MMI touch volume*
Mute telephone : messages and ringtones are set
You can adjust the vol ume of the prompts fo r the
to mute.
MMI touch* by turning the control knob.
Ringtone : see ¢ page 186, Ringtone and volume
settings . Restarting the MMI
Ringtone volume: you can adjust the volume of
the selected ringtone by turning th e control
knob.

Message volume: you ca n adjust the volume of

the notification for an incom ing text message by
turning the control knob.

Microphone input level : you can adjust the call

volume during a phone call by turning the control
knob.
Navigation
App lies to: vehicles with navigation system
Voice guidance: see ¢ page 214.
Voice guidance during phone call: see
c:>page214 .
Voice guidance volume: you can adjust the voice
guidance volume by turning the control knob. Or:
you can adjust the voice guidance volume during
active route guidance by turning the On/Off
knob.
Entertainment fader : the volume of audio play -
back can be temporarily lowered when the park-
ing system or voice guidance is active.
Fig. 223 Button combina tion to res tar t the system
.,. Briefly press the control knob and both buttons
at the same time to immediate ly open t he
menu upward c:>fig. 223.
Software license
information
Information on the software contained in the
MMI and the license agreement.
- Sele ct : ! MENUI button> Settings > left contr ol
but ton > System maintenance > Version infor-
mation.
- Or: online at www .audiusa.com/softwareinfo .

Voice recognition system Information on the software contained in the

App lies to: vehicles with voice recogni t ion syste m
Command display : see c;, page 249 .
Short dialog : see c;, page 249 .
head-up display and the license agreement.
- Requirement: the vehicle must be stationary.
- Press t he control knob to close the information.
Or: start driving.

254
 System settings

Information on the software contained in the

inst rument cluster and the license agreement .
Press the reset bu t ton 10.01l l twi ce wi t hin five
seconds of sw itch ing t he igni ti on on .

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
::E
'<t
l) Not avai lable in all ve hicles.

255
Dr iv ing s a fe ty
Driving safety
Basics
Safe driving habits
Please remember - safe ty first!
The individual safety features of your vehicle can
work together as a system to help protect you
and your passengers in a wide range of accidents.
These features cannot work as a system if they
are not always correctly adjusted and correctly
used .
This chapter contains important informat ion,
tips, instruct ions and warn ings that you need to
read and observe for your own safety, the safety
of your passengers and others . We have summar-
ized here what you need to know about safety
belts , airbags, child restra ints as well as child
safety. Your safety is for us priority number 1. Al-
ways observe the information and warnings in
this section - for your own safety as well as that
of your passengers.
The informa t ion in this section applies to all
model versions of your vehicle. Some of the fea-
tures described in th is sections may be standard
equipment on some models, or may be optional
equ ipment on others. If you are not sure, ask
your author ized Audi dealer.
A WARNING
- Always make sure that you follow the in-
structio ns and heed the WARNINGSin th is
manual. It is in your inte rest and in the in-
te rest of your passengers .
- Always keep all of the Owner's Lite rature
ma nuals in your Audi when you lend or sell
your vehicle so t hat t his importa nt informa-
t ion will always be available t o t he driver
and passenge rs.
- Always keep t he Owner's Lite ratu re handy
so t hat you can find it easi ly if you have
questions .
256
· Important things to do before driving
Safety is everybody 's job! Vehicle and occupant
safety always depends on the informed and care-
ful driver.
For your safety and the safety of your passen-
gers, before driving always:
.. Make sure that all lights and signals are operat-
ing correctly .
.. Make sure tha t the t ire pressure is correct .
.. Make sure that all windows are clean and afford
good visibility to the outs ide .
.. Secure all luggage and othe r items carefully
¢ page 261 .
.. Make sure t hat noth ing can interfere with the
pedals .
.. Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrors
correctly for your height.
.. Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-
st raints according to their height.
.. Make sure to use the right child restraint cor-
rectly to protect children ~ page 295 , Child
safety .
.. Sit proper ly in your seat and make sure t hat
your passengers do the same ¢ page 59, Front
seats .
.. Fasten your safety belt and wear it properly. Al-
so instruct your passenge rs to fasten their safe-
ty belts prope rly¢ page 265 .
What impairs driving safety?
Safe driving is directly related to the condition of
the vehicle, the driver as well as the driver's abili-
ty to concentrate on the road without being dis-
tracted.
The driver is responsible for the safety of the ve-
hicle and all of its occupants. If your ability to
drive is impa ired, safety risks for everybody in the
vehicle increase and you also become a hazard to
everyone else on the road ¢ ,&.. Therefore:
.. Do not let yourse lf be distracted by passenge rs
or by using a cellular telephone .
.. NEVERdrive when your driving ability is im-
pa ired (by med ications, alcohol, drugs, etc .) .
.. Observe all traffic laws, rules of the road and
speed limits and plain common sense . .,.

.. ALWAYSadjust your speed to road, traffic and
weather conditions .
.. Take frequent breaks on long trips. Do not drive
for more than two hours at a stretch.
.. Do NOTdrive when you are tired, under pres-
sure or when you are stressed .
A WARNING
Impaired dr iving safety increases the risk of
ser ious personal injury and death whenever a
vehicle is being used .
Correct passenger
seating positions
Proper seating position for the driver
The proper driver seating position is important
for safe, relaxed driving .
Fig. 2 24 Correct seating pos ition
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of in-
jury in the event of an accident, we recommend
that you adjust the driver 's seat to the following
position:
.. Adjust the dr iver's seat so that you can easily
push the pedals all the way to the f loor wh ile
keeping your knee(s) s lightly bent ~ _A.
.. Adjust the ang le of the seatback so that it is in
an upright position so that your back comes in
full contact with it when you drive.
.. Adjust the steering wheel so that there is a dis-
tance of at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the
steering wheel and you r breast bone ~ fig. 224 .
If not possib le, see your autho rized Audi dea le r
u
(0
...... abo ut adapt ive eq uipment.
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t
Dr ivi ng sa fe ty
.. Adjust the steering wheel so that the steering
wheel and airbag cover points at your chest and
not at your face.
.. Grasp the top of the steering wheel with your
elbow(s) slightly bent .
.,.Adjust the head restra int so the upper edge is
as even as possible with the top of your head . If
that is not possible, t ry to adjust the head re-
straint so that it is as close to this posit ion as
possible .
.. Fasten and wear safety belts correctly
~page 268 .
.. Always keep both feet in the footwell so that
you are in control of the veh icle at a ll t imes.
For detailed information on how to adj ust the
driver's seat, see ~page 59 .
A
- WARNING .,
Drivers who are unbelted, out of position or
too close to the airbag can be seriously in-
jured by an airbag as it unfolds. To help re-
d uce the risk of serious personal injury:
- Always adj ust the driver's seat and the
steer ing wheel so that there are at least
10 inches (25 cm) between you r breastbone
and the steering wheel.
- Always hold the steering wheel on the out-
side of the steering wheel rim with your
hands at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-
tions to help reduce the risk of personal in-
jury if the driver's air bag inflates.
- Never ho ld t he stee ring wheel at the
12 o'clock position o r with yo ur hands at
ot her posi t ions ins ide the st eer ing whee l
rim or on the steering wheel hub. Holding
the steering wheel the wrong way can cause
serio us injuries to the hands, arms and head
if the dr iver's airbag dep loys .
- Pointing the steering wheel toward your
face decreases the ability of the supplemen-
tal driver's airbag to protect you in a colli-
sion.
- Always sit in an upright position and never
lean aga inst or place any part of your body
too close to the area where the airbags are
located .
257
Driving safety
- Before driving, always adjust the front seats
and head restraints properly and make sure
that all passengers are properly restrained.
- Never adjust the seats while the vehicle is
moving. Your seat may move unexpectedly
and you could lose control of the vehicle.
- Never drive with the backrest reclined or
tilted far back! The farther the backrests are
tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due
to incorrect positioning of the safety belt
and improper seating position .
- Children must always ride in child safety
seats¢ page 295 . Special precautions ap-
ply when installing a child safety seat on the
front passenger seat¢ page 2 73.
Proper seating position for the front
passenger
The proper front passenger seating position is
important for safe, relaxed driving.
For your own safety and to reduce the risk of in-
jury in the event of an accident, we recommend
that you adjust the seat for the front passenger
to the following position:
.,.Adjust the angle of the seatback so that it is in
an upright position and your back comes in full
contact with it whenever the vehicle is moving .
.,.Adjust the head restraint so the upper edge is
as even as possible with the top of your head. If
that is not possible, try to adjust the head re-
straint so that it is as close to this position as
possible ¢page 63.
.,.Keep both feet flat on the floor in front of the
front passenger seat .
.,.Fasten and wear safety belts correct-
ly¢ page 268.
For detailed information on how to adjust the
front passenger's seat, see ¢ page 59 .
A WARNING
Front seat passengers who are unbelted, out
of position or too close to the airbag can be
seriously injured or killed by the airbag as it
unfolds. To help reduce the risk of serious
personal injury:
258
- Passengers must always sit in an upright po-
sition and never lean against or place any
part of their body too close to the area
where the airbags are located.
- Passengers who are unbelted, out of posi-
tion or too close to the airbag can be seri-
ously injured by an airbag as it unfolds with
great force in the blink of an eye.
- Always make sure that there are at least
10 inches (25 cm) between the front pas-
senger's breastbone and the instrument
panel.
- Each passenger must always sit on a seat of
their own and properly fasten and wear the
safety belt belonging to that seat .
- Before driving, always adjust the front pas-
senger seat and head restraint properly.
-Always keep your feet on the floor in front
of the seat. Never rest them on the seat, in-
strument panel, out of the window, etc. The
airbag system and safety belt will not be
able to protect you properly and can even in-
crease the risk of injury in a crash.
- Never drive with the backrest reclined or
tilted far back! The farther the backrests are
tilted back, the greater the risk of injury due
to incorrect positioning of the safety belt
and improper seating position.
- Children must always ride in child safety
seats ¢ page 295. Special precautions ap-
ply when installing a child safety seat on the
front passenger seat ¢ page 2 73.
Proper seating positions for passengers in
rear seats
Rear seat passengers must sit upright with both
feet on the floor consistent with their physical
size and be properly restrained whenever the ve-
hicle is in use.
To reduce the risk of injury caused by an incorrect
seating position in the event of a sudden braking
maneuver or an accident, your passengers on the
rear bench seat must always observe the follow-
ing :
.,.If there are passengers on the outer rear seats,
adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is ..,.
 Dr ivi ng sa fe ty

as even as possible with the top of your head . If Proper adjustment of head restraints
that is not possible, try to adjust the head re-
Correctly adjusted head restraints ore an impor-
straint so that it is as close to this position as
possible. If there is a passenger in the center
tant part of your vehicle's occupant restraint sys-
rear seat, slide the head restraint upward
tem and can help to reduce the risk of injuries in
i=>page 63 . accident situations.
• Make sure that the seatback is secu rely latched
in the upright pos ition c:>page 68 .
• Keep both feet flat in the footwell in front of
the rear seat .
• Fasten and wear safety be lts properly
c:>page 268 .
• Make sure that children are always properly re-
strained in a child restraint that is appropriate
for their size and age c:>page 295 .

A WARNING
Fig. 22S Head restra int: viewed from t he front

Passengers who are improperly seated on the
rear seat can be seriously injured in a crash.
- Each passenger must always sit on a seat of
their own and properly fasten and wear the
safety belt belonging to that seat .
- Safety belts only offer max imum p rotection
when the seatback is securely latched in the
upr ight position and the safety be lts a re
prope rly pos itioned on the body. By not sit -
t ing upright, a rea r seat passenger increases
the risk of personal inj ury from improperly
posit ioned safety belts !
- Always adjust the head rest raint prope rly so
that it can g ive maximum protection.
u
(0
......
N rest raint so that it is as close to this position
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t
The head rest raints must be correctly adjusted to
achieve the best protection.
• Adjust the head restraints so the upper edge is
as even as possib le with the top of your head. If
that is not possible, try to adjust the head re-
straint so that it is as close to this posit ion as
possible . Position* the head restraint as close
as possible to the back of your head .
• If there are passengers in rear seat, fold the
head restraints up on the occupied seats .
Adj usting head restraints c:>page 63.
A
- WARNING
All seats are equipped with head restraints .
Driving without head restraints or with head
rest raints that are not prope rly adj usted in-
creases the risk of se rious or fata l neck injury
dr amat ical ly. To help reduce the risk of injury:
- Always d rive with the head restra ints in
p lace and properly adjusted .
- Every person in the veh icle must have a
properly adjusted head restraint .
- Always make sure each person in the veh icle
prope rly adjusts the ir head restraint. Adju st
the hea d restraints so the upper edge is as
even as possible wit h the top of your hea d .
If that is not poss ible, try to adjust the head
as poss ible. ~

259
Dr iv ing s a fe ty
- Never attempt to adjust head restraint
wh ile driving. If you have dr iven off and
must adjust the driver headrest for any rea-
son, first stop the vehicle safely before at-
tempting to adjust the head restra int.
- Children must always be properly restrained
in a child restraint that is appropriate for
their age and size ¢ page 295.
Examples of improper seating positions
The occupant restraint system can only reduce
the risk of injury if vehicle occupants are properly
seated .
Improper seating positions can cause serious in-
jury or deat h. Safety belts can only work when
they are properly positioned on the body . Im-
proper seating positions reduce the effect iveness
of safety belts and will even increase the risk of
injury and dea t h by moving the safety be lt to crit-
ical areas of the body. Impro per sea ti ng posit ions
a lso increase the risk of ser ious injury and dea t h
when an airbag deploys and strikes an occupant
who is not in the proper seat ing position. A driver
is responsib le for the safety of all vehicle occu-
pants and especially for children. Therefore :
~ Never allow anyone to assume an incorrect
seat ing pos ition when the vehicle is being used
c>.&,.
The fo llowing bulletins list only some sample po -
sitions that will increase the risk of serio us injury
and death. Our hope is that these examp les will
make you more aware of seating posit ions that
are dangerous.
Therefore, when ever th e vehicle is moving:
- never stand up in the vehicle
- never st and on the seats
- never knee l on the seats
- never ride with the seatback reclined
- never lie down on t he seats
- never lean up against the instrument pane l
- never sit on the edge of the seat
- never sit sideways
- never lean out t he window
- never put yo ur feet out the window
260
- never put your feet on the instrument panel
- neve r rest your feet on the seat cushion or back
of the seat
- neve r ride in the footwell
- neve r ride in the cargo area
A WARNING
Imp roper seating positions increase the risk
of ser iou s personal inju ry and de at h whenever
a veh icle is being used.
- Always make sure that all veh icle occupants
st ay in a proper sea t ing posit ion a nd are
pro perly restrained whenever the vehicle is
be ing used .
Driver's and front
passenger's footwell
Important safety instructions
A WARNING
Always make sure that the knee airbag can in-
flate without interference. Objects between
yourself and the airbag can increase the risk
of injury in an accident by interfering with the
way the ai rbag dep loys o r by being pushed in-
to you as the airbag dep loys.
- No persons (ch ild ren) or animals should ride
in t he footwell in front of the passenger
seat . If t he airbag deploys, t his can res ult in
serio us or fat al injuries.
- No objects of any kind should be carried in
the footwell area in front of t he dr iver's or
passenger's seat. Bulky objects (shopping
bags, for examp le) can hamper or prevent
proper dep loyment of the airbag . Sma ll ob-
jects can be thrown thro ugh the vehicle if
the airbag deploys and injure you or your
passengers.
 Dr ivi ng sa fe ty

Pedal area
Pedals
The pedals must always be free to move and
must never be interfered with by a floor mat or
any other object.
Make sure that all pedals move freely without in-
terference and that noth ing prevents them from
returning to their original positions .
Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area free
and can be secured with floor mat fasteners.
If a brake circuit fails, increased brake pedal trav-
e l is required to bring the vehicle to a full stop.
A WARNING
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss
of vehicle control and increase the risk of seri-
ous injury.
- Never place any objects in the driver's foot-
well. An object could get into the pedal area
and interfere with pedal function. In case of
sudden braking or an accident, you would
not be ab le to brake or accelerate!
-Always make sure that nothing can fall or
move into the dr iver's footwe ll.
tions that could interfere with the pedals or im-
pair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
A WARNING
-Pedals that cannot move freely can res ult in a
loss of vehicle control and increase the risk of
serious personal injury.
-Always make sure that floor mats are prop-
erly secured.
- Never place or install floor mats or other
f loor coverings in the vehicle that cannot be
proper ly secured in place to prevent them
from slipping and interfer ing with the ped-
als o r the ab ility to control the vehicle.
- Never place or install floor mats or other
f loor cove rings on top of already installed
floor mats . Additional floor mats and other
cover ings will reduce t he size of the pedal
a rea and int erfere with t he pedals.
- Always properly re insta ll and secure floor
mats that have been take n out fo r clean ing .
- Always make sure that objects cannot fall
into the d river footwell whi le the vehicle is
mov ing. Objec t s can become t rapped under
the brake pedal and accelerator pedal caus-
ing a loss of vehicle control.

Storing cargo correctly

Floor mats on the driver side
Loading the luggage compartment
Always use floor mats that can be securely at-
tached to the floor mat fasteners and do not in- All luggage and other objects must be properly
terfere with the free movement of the pedals . stowed and secured in the luggage compart-
ment.
...Make sure that the floor mats are properly se-
cured and cannot move and interfere with the
pedals Q .&_.

Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area un-
obstructed and that are firmly secured so that
they cannot slip out of pos it ion . You can obtain
suitable floor mats from your authorized Audi
dealer.
Floor mat fasteners are installed in your Audi.
Fig. 226 Safe load positio ning : place heavy objects as low
Floor mats used in your vehicle must be attached and as far forward as poss ible. IJI,-
u
(0
,...., to these fasteners. Properly securing the floor
N
r--.
N
mats will prevent them from sliding into posi-
,....,
0
0
:E
<t

261
Dr iv ing sa fe ty
Loose items in the luggage compartment can
shift sudden ly, changing vehicle handling charac-
ter istics . Loose items can also increase the risk of
serious personal inj ury in a sudden vehicle ma-
neuver or in a coll is ion.
.,.Distribute the load evenly in the luggage com-
partment .
.,.Always place and properly secure heavy items in
the luggage compartment as low and as far for-
ward as possible c>fig . 226 .
.,.Secure luggage us ing the tie-downs provided
¢ page 69 .
.,.Make su re that the rea r seatbac k is securely
latched in place .
A WARNING
Improperly stored luggage or othe r items can
fly through the vehicle causing serious per-
sonal injury in the event of hard braking or an
accident . To help reduce the risk of serious
personal injury :
- Always put objects, for example, luggage or
other heavy items in the luggage compart-
ment.
- Always sec ure objects in the luggage com-
partment using the tie-down eyelets and
s uitable straps.
A WARNING
Heavy loads will influence the way your vehi-
cle handles . To he lp reduce the risk of a loss
of contro l leading to serious pe rsonal injury:
- Always keep in mind when transporting
heavy objects, that a change in the center of
grav ity can also cause changes in vehicle
hand ling:
- Always distr ibute the load as even ly as
possible.
- Place heavy objects as far forward in the
luggage compartment as poss ible.
- Never exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
or the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified
on the safety compliance sticker on the driv-
er's side B-pillar. Exceeding permiss ible
weight standards can cause the vehicle to
s lide and handle differently .
262
- Please observe info rmation on safe driving
¢page 256 .
A WARNING
To he lp prevent po isonous exhaust gas from
being drawn into the vehicle, always keep the
rear lid closed while driving.
- Never transport objects larger than those
fitting completely into the luggage area be-
cause the rear lid cannot be fully closed .
- If you absolutely must dr ive with the rear lid
open, observe the following notes to reduce
the risk of poisoning :
- Close all windows,
- Close t he s unroof*,
- Open all a ir outlets in the instrument pan-
el,
- Switc h off the air reci rculat ion,
- Set the fresh air fan to the highest speed .
A WARNING
-
Always make sure that the doo rs, all win-
dows, the sunroof * a nd the rear lid are se-
curely closed and locked to red uce the risk of
injury when the veh icle is not being used.
- After closing the rear lid, always make sure
that it is properly closed and locked .
- Never leave your ve hicle unattended espe -
cially with the rear lid left open. A child
could crawl into the vehicle th rough the lug-
gage com partment an d close t he rea r lid be-
comi ng tr a pped and unab le t o ge t out . Be-
ing trapped in a vehicle can lead to ser ious
pe rsonal injury.
- Never let child ren p lay in or around t he vehi-
cle.
- Never let passengers ride in the luggage
compa rt ment. Vehicle occupants mus t a l-
ways be p roperly restrained in one of the ve-
hicle's seat ing pos itions.
(D Tips
- Air circul ation helps to reduce window fog-
ging . Stale ai r escapes to the outs ide
t hroug h vents in the trim panel. Be sure to
keep these slots free and open.
 Driving safety

- The tire pressure must correspond to the - Never attach a child safety seat tether strap
load. The tire pressure label lists the recom- to a tie-down.
mended cold tire inflation pressures for the
vehicle at its maximum capacity weight and
the tires that were on your vehicle at the
Reporting Safety Defects
time it was manufactured. For recommend-
Applicable to U.S.A.
ed tire pressures for normal load condi-
tions, please see chapter c:>page 344 . If you believe that your vehicle
has a defect which could cause a
Tie-downs
crash or could cause injury or
The luggage compartment is equipped with four
tie-downs to secure luggage and other items . death, you should immediately in-
Use the tie-downs to secure your cargo properly form the National Highway Traffic
c:>page 261, Loading the luggage compartment. Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
In a collision, the laws of physics mean that even addition to notifying Audi of
smaller items that are loose in the vehicle will
become heavy missiles that can cause serious in-
America, Inc.
jury. Items in the vehicle possess energy which
If NHTSA receives similar com-
vary with vehicle speed and the weight of the
item . Vehicle speed is the most significant factor . plaints, it may open an investiga-
For example, in a frontal collision at a speed of tion, and if it finds that a safety
30 mph (48 km/h), the forces acting on a 10 -lb
defects exists in a group of
(4 .5 kg) object are about 20 times the normal
weight of the item . This means that the weight vehicles, it may order a recall and
of the item would suddenly be about remedy campaign. However,
200 lbs . (90 kg). You can imagine the injuries
that a 200 lbs. (90 kg) item flying free ly through NHTSA cannot become involved in
the passenger compartment could cause in a col- individual problems between you,
lision like this .
your dealer, or Audi of America,
A WARNING
-
Inc.
Weak, damaged or improper straps used to
secure items to tie-downs can fail during hard To contact the N HTSA, you may
braking or in a collision and cause serious per- either call:
sonal injury.
- Always use suitable mounting straps and Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
properly secure items to the tie-downs in
the luggage compartment to help prevent
1-800-424-9153) or
items from shifting or flying forward as dan- 1-800- 424 -9393
gerous missiles .
- When the rear seat backrest is folded down, or you may write to:
always use suitable mounting straps and
u properly secure items to the tie-downs in
co
...... the luggage compartment to help prevent
N
r-...
N
...... items from flying forward as dangerous
0
0 missiles into the passenger compartment .
:E:
'<t

263
Driving safety

NHTSA Transport Canada

U.S. Department of Transporta- Motor Vehicle Safety Investiga-
tion tions Laboratory
1200 New Jersey Ave., S.E. 80 Noel Street
West Building Gatineau, QC
Washington, DC 20590 J8Z 0Al
You can also obtain other infor- For additional road safety infor-
mation about motor vehicle safe- mation, please visit the Road
ty from : Safety website at:
http:/ /www.safercar.gov http:/ /www.tc.gc.ca/eng/
roadsafety/men u.htm
Applicable to Canada
If you live in Canada and you be-
lieve that your vehicle has a de-
fect that could cause a crash, in-
jury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls.
You should also notify Audi Cana-
da .
Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety-related defect to
Transport Canada, Defect Investi-
gations and Recalls, may either
call Transport Canada toll-free at:
Tel.: 1-800-333-0510 or
Tel. : 1-819-994-3328 (Ottawa re-
gion and from other countries)
TTYfor hearing impaired:
1-888-67 5-6863
or contact Transport Canada by
mail at:

264

Safety belts
General information
Always wear safety belts!
Wearing safety belts correctly saves lives!
This chapter explains why safety belts are neces-
sary, how they work and how to adjust and wear
them correctly.
~ Read all the information that follows and heed
all of the instructions and WARNINGS.
A WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them im-
properly increases the risk of serious personal
injury and death.
- Safety belts are the single most effective
means available to reduce the risk of serious
injury and death in automobile accidents.
For your protection and that of your passen-
gers, always correctly wear safety belts
when the veh icle is moving.
- Pregnant women, injured, or physically im-
paired persons must also use safety belts.
Like all vehicle occupants, they are more
likely to be serio usly injured if they do not
wear safety belts. The best way to protect a
fetus is to protect the mother - throughout
the entire pregnancy.
Number of seats
Applies to: Vehicles with five seats: Your vehicle
has two front seats and three rear seats. Each
seating position has a safety belt.
Applies to: Vehicles with seven seats: Your
vehicles has two front seats, three seats in the
second row and two seats in the third row. Each
seating position has a safety belt.
A WARNING
Not wea ring safety belts or wearing them im-
properly increases the risk of serious personal
u
co injury and death.
......
N
r-...
N - Never strap more than one person, includ-
......
0
0
ing small children, into any belt. It is espe-
:E:
'<t
Safety belts
cially dangerous to place a safety be lt over a
child sitting on your lap.
- Never let more peop le ride in the vehicle
than there are safety belts available .
- Be sure everyone riding in the vehicle is
proper ly restrained with a separate safety
belt or ch ild restraint .
Safety belt warning light
Your vehicle hos a warning system for the driver
and front seat passenger to remind you about
the importance of buckling-up.
<D
N
"'
0
,:.
~
Fig. 227 Safety belt warn ing ligh t in the instrument clus -
ter - enlarged
Before driving off, always:
~ Fasten your safety belt and make sure you are
wearing it properly.
~ Make sure that your passengers also buckle up
and properly wear their safety belts.
~ Protect children with a child restraint system
appropr iate for the size and age .
The warning light . in the instrument cluster
lights up when the ignition is switched on as a re-
minder to fasten the safety belts. In addition,
you will hear a warn ing tone for a certain period
of time.
Fasten your safety belt and make sure that your
passengers also properly put on their safety
belts .
A
,.____
WARNING
-
- Safety belts are the single most effective
means available to reduce the risk of serious
injury and death in automobile accidents.
For your protection and that of your
265
Sa f e ty belts
passenge rs, a lways correct ly wear safety
belts when the vehicle is moving.
- Failure to pay attention to the warning light
that comes on could lead to personal injury.
Why use safety belts?
Frontal collisions and the law of physics
Frontal crashes create very strong forces for peo-
ple riding in vehicles .
Fig. 2 2 8 Unbe lted occupants in a vehicle heading for a wall
Fig. 229 The ve hicle crashes into the wall
The physical principles are simple . Both the vehi-
cle and the passengers possess energy which var-
ies with vehicle speed and body weight . Engi-
neers call this energy "kinetic energy."
The higher the speed of the vehicle and the
g reater the vehicle's weight, the more energy
that has to be "absorbed" in the crash.
Vehicle speed is the most signific a nt fac t or . If
the speed doubles from 15 to 30 mph (25 t o 50
km/h) , the energy increases 4 t imes!
Because the passengers of th is veh icle are not us-
ing safety belts ~ fig. 228, they will keep moving
at the same speed the vehicle was moving just
266
before the crash, until something stops them -
here, the wall ¢ fig. 229 .
The same principles apply to people s itting in a
vehicle that is involved in a frontal collision . Even
at city speeds of 20 to 30 mph (30 to 50 km/h),
the forces acting on the body can reach one ton
(2,000 lbs . or 1,000 kg) o r more. At g reater
speeds, these forces are even higher.
People who do not use safety belts are a lso not
attached to their vehicle. In a frontal collision
they will also keep moving forward at the speed
their vehicle was travelling just before the crash.
Of course, the laws of physics don 't just apply to
frontal collisions , they determine what happens
in a ll kinds of accide nts and collisions .
What happens to occupants not wearing
safety belts?
In crashes unbelted occupants cannot stop
themselves from flying forward and being in-
jured or killed . Always wear your safety belts!
Fig . 23 0 A drive r not wea ring a safety belt is violent ly
throw n fo rward
Fig. 231 A rea r passe nge r not wearin g a sa fety be lt will fly
forwa rd an d str ike the driver
Unbelted occupants a re not ab le t o res ist the tre-
mendous forces of impac t by holding tig ht or Ill-

bracing themselves. Without the benefit of safe -
ty restraint systems, the unrestrained occupant
will slam violently into the steer ing wheel, in-
strument panel, windshield , or whatever else is
in the way¢ fig. 230. This impact with the vehi-
cle interior has all the energy they had just be -
fore the cras h.
Never rely on airbags alone for protection. Even
when they deploy, airbags provide only additional
protection . Airbags are not supposed to dep loy in
all kinds of accidents . Although your Audi is
eq uipped with airbags, all vehicle occupants, in-
cluding the dr iver, mus t wear safety belts cor-
rect ly in order to minimize the risk of severe in-
jury or death in a crash .
Remember too, that airbags will deploy only
once and that your safety belts are always there
to offer protec t ion in those accidents in which
airbags are not supposed to deploy or when they
have a lready deployed. Unbelted occupants can
also be thrown out of the vehicle where even
more severe or fatal injur ies can occur.
It is also impo rtant for the rear passengers to
wear safety belts correctly. Unbelted passengers
in the rear seats endanger not on ly themse lves
but also the driver and other passengers
¢ fig. 231 . In a frontal collision they will be
thrown forward violently, where they can hit and
injure the driver and/or front seat passenger .
Safety belts protect
People think it's possible to use the hands to
brace the body in a minor collision . It 's simply
not true!
u
(0
......
N Fig. 232 Driver is corr ectly restrained i n a sudden braking
r--.
N
...... maneuve r
0
0
:E
<t
Safet y bel ts
Safety be lts used properly can make a big differ -
ence. Safety belts help to keep passengers in
their seats, gradually reduce energy levels ap-
plied to the body in an accident, and help prevent
the uncontrolled movement that can cause ser i-
ous injuries . In addition, safety belts reduce the
danger of be ing thrown out of the vehicle .
Safety be lts attach passengers to the car and g ive
them the benefit of being slowed down more
gently or "soft ly" through the "give" in the safety
belts, crush zones and other safety features eng i-
neered into today's vehicles . By "absorbing" the
kinetic ene rgy over a longer period of t ime, the
safety belts make the fo rces on t he body more
"tolerab le" and less likely to cause inj ury.
Although these examples are based on a frontal
collision, safety be lts can also substantia lly re-
duce the risk of injury in other kinds of crashes.
So, whethe r you're on a long trip or just go ing to
the corner store, a lways buckle up and make sure
others do, too. Accident statistics show that vehi-
cle occupants proper ly wearing safety belts have
a lower risk of being injured and a much better
chance of surviving an accident. Properly using
safety belts also great ly increases the ability of
t he supplemental a irbags to do their job in a col-
lision. For this reason, wea ring a safety belt is le-
gally required in most countries including much
of the Unit ed States and Canad a .
Although your Audi is equipped with a irbags, you
still have to wear the safety be lts provided. Front
airbags, for example, are activated only in some
frontal collisions. The front airbags ar e not act i-
vated in a ll frontal collisions, in side and rear col-
lisions, in rollovers or in cases where there is not
enough deceleration throug h impact to the front
of the vehicle . The same goes for the other a irbag
systems in your Aud i. So, always wear your safety
belt and make sure everybody in your vehicle is
properly restrai ned!
267
Safety belts
Important safety instructions about safety
belts
Safety belts must always be correctly positioned
across the strongest bones of your body.
• Always wear safety belts as illustrated and de-
scribed in this chapter .
• Make sure that your safety belts are always
ready for use and are not damaged .
~ WARNING
Not wearing safety belts or wearing them im-
properly increases the risk of serious personal
injury and death. Safety belts can work only
when used correctly.
- Always fasten your safety belts correctly be-
fore driving off and make sure all passen-
gers are correctly restrained.
- For maximum protection, safety belts must
always be positioned properly on the body.
- Never strap more than one person, includ-
ing small children, into any belt.
- Never place a safety belt over a child sitting
on your lap.
-Always keep feet in the footwell in front of
the seat while the vehicle is being driven .
- Never let any person ride with their feet on
the instrument panel or sticking out the
window or on the seat.
- Never remove a safety belt while the vehicle
is mov ing. Doing so will increase your risk of
being injured or killed.
- Never wear belts twisted.
- Never wear belts over rigid or breakable ob-
jects in or on your clothing, such as eye
glasses, pens, keys, etc., as these may cause
injury.
- Never allow safety belts to become dam-
aged by being caught in door or seat hard-
ware.
- Do not wear the shoulder part of the belt
under your arm or otherwise out of position.
- Several layers of heavy clothing may inter-
fere with correct positioning of belts and re-
duce the overall effectiveness of the system.
268
- Always keep belt buckles free of anything
that may prevent the buckle from latching
securely.
- Never use comfort clips or devices that cre-
ate slack in the shoulder belt. However, spe-
cial clips may be required for the proper use
of some child restraint systems.
- Torn or frayed safety belts can tear, and
damaged belt hardware can break in an acci-
dent. Inspect belts regularly. If webbing,
bindings, buckles, or retractors are dam-
aged, have belts replaced by an authorized
Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
- Safety belts that have been worn and loaded
in an accident must be replaced with the
correct replacement safety belt by an au-
thorized Audi dealer. Replacement may be
necessary even if damage cannot be clearly
seen. Anchorages that were loaded must al-
so be inspected.
- Never remove, modify, disassemble, or try
to repair the safety belts yourself.
-Always keep the belts clean. Dirty belts may
not work properly and can impair the func-
tion of the inertia reel c::>table Interior
cleaning on page 356.
Safety belts
Fastening safety belts
Safety first - everybody buckle up!
Fig. 233 Belt buckle and to ngue on the driver's seat
To provide maximum protection, safety belts
must always be positioned correctly on the wear-
er's body.
• Adjust the front seat and head restraint proper-
page 59, Front seats.
ly c::> .,.

.. Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench
is in an upright position and securely latched in
place before using the belt ¢ .&_.
.. Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest and
pelvis ¢ fig. 233, ¢ .&_.
.. Insert the tongue into the correct buckle of
your seat until you hear it latch securely.
.. Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely
latched in the buckle.
Automatic safety belt retractors
Every safety belt is equipped with an automatic
belt retractor on the shoulder belt. This feature
locks the belt when the belt is pulled out fast,
during hard braking and in an accident . The belt
may also lock when you drive up or down a steep
hill or through a sharp curve. During normal driv-
ing the belt lets you move freely.
Safety belt pretensioners
The safety belts are equipped with a belt preten-
sioner that helps to tighten the safety belt and
remove slack when the pretensioner is activated
¢ page 2 71 . The function of the pretensioner is
monitored by a warning light q page 29.
Convertible locking retractor
Every safety belt except the one on the driver
seat is equipped with a convertible locking retrac-
tor that must be used when the safety belt is
used to attach a child safety seat. Be sure to read
the important information about this feature
¢ page 306.
.&._WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause
serious injury in an accident q page 269,
Safety belt position.
- Safety belts offer optimum protection only
when the seatback is upright and belts are
properly positioned on the body.
-Always make sure that the rear seat back-
rest to which the center rear safety belt is
attached is securely latched whenever the
rear center safety belt is being used . If the
u
(0
...... backrest is not securely latched, the passen-
N
r--. ger will move forward with the backrest dur-
N
......
0
0
:E
<t
Safety belts
ing sudden braking, in a sudden maneuver
and especially in a crash.
- Never attach the safety belt to the buckle
for another seat. Attaching the belt to the
wrong buckle will reduce safety belt effec-
tiveness and can cause serious personal in-
jury .
- A passenger who is not properly restrained
can be seriously injured by the safety belt it-
self when it moves from the stronger parts
of the body into critical areas like the abdo-
men .
- Always lock the convertible locking retractor
when you are securing a child safety seat in
the vehicle ¢ page 308.
Safety belt position
Correct belt position is the key to getting maxi -
mum protection from safety belts .
Fig. 234 Safety belt posi tion
Standard features on your vehicle help you adjust
the position of the safety belt to match your body
size .
- belt height adjustment for the front seats,
- height-adjustable front seats.
.&_WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause
serious personal injury in an accident.
- The shoulder belt should lie as close to the
center of the collar bone as possible and
should fit well on the body. Hold the belt
above the latch tongue and pull it evenly
across the chest so that it sits as low as pos-
sible on the pelvis and there is no pressure ~
269
Safety belts
on the abdomen. The belt should always fit
snugly c>fig. 234. Pull on the belt to tighten
if necessary.
- The lap belt portion of the safety belt must
be positioned as low as possible across pel-
vis and never over the abdomen. Make sure
the belt lies flat and snug c>fig. 234. Pull on
the belt to tighten if necessary.
- A loose-fitting safety belt can cause serious
injuries by shifting its position on your body
from the strong bones to more vulnerable,
soft tissue and cause serious injury.
-Always read and heed all WARNINGS and
other important information c>page 268.
Pregnant women must also be correctly
restrained
The best way to protect the fetus is to make sure
that expectant mothers always wear safety belts
correctly - throughout the pregnancy.
Fig. 235 Safety belt pos ition during pregna ncy
To prov ide maximum protection, safety belts
must always be positioned correctly on the wear-
er's body c>page 269 .
.,.Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor-
rectly c>page 59, Front seats .
.,. Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench
is in an upright position and securely latched in
place before using the belt .
.,. Pull the safety belt evenly across the chest so
that it sits as low as possible on the pelvis and
there is no pressure on the abdomen
c:>fig. 235, ¢ ,&..
.,. Insert the tong ue into the correct buckle of
your seat until you hear it latch securely.
270
.,.Pull on the belt to make sure that it is securely
latched in the buckle.
A WARNING
Improperly positioned safety belts can cause
serious personal injury in an accident.
- Expectant mothers must always wear the
lap portion of the safety belt as low as pos-
sible across the pelvis and below the round-
ing of the abdomen.
- Always read and heed all WARNINGS and
other important inform at ion c>.&.in Fasten-
ing safety belts on page 269 .
Unfastening safety belts
Unbuckle the safety belt with the red release
button only after the vehicle has stopped.
Fig. 236 Releasing the to ngue from the buckle
.,. Push the red release button on the buckle
¢ fig. 236. The belt tongue will spring out of
the buckle ¢ ,&..
.,. Let the belt wind up on the retractor as you
guide the belt tongue to its stowed position.
A WARNING
Never unfasten safety belt while the vehicle is
moving. Doing so will increase your risk of be-
ing injured or killed.
 Safet y bel ts

Adjusting safety belt height
With the aid of the safety belt height adjust-
ment, the three point safety belt strap routing
can be fitted to the shoulder area, according to
body size.
risk of inj ury and death by moving the safety be lt
to critical areas of the body . Improper seating
pos itions also increase the risk of serious injury
and death when an airbag dep loys and strikes an
occupant who is not in the correct seating posi-
t ion . A driver is responsible for the safety of all
vehicle occupants and especially for ch ild ren.
The refore:

• Never perm it anyone to assume an incorrect

sitt ing position in the vehicle while traveling
¢ ,&..

.8, WARNING
Imp roperly wo rn safe ty belts increase the risk
of ser ious personal injur y and death whe never
Fig. 237 Safety bel t height adju stment - loop -around fit -
t ings
a veh icle is being used .
- Always make sure that all vehicle occupants
The shou lder belt should lie as close to the center are cor rect ly rest rained and stay in a corre ct
of the collar bone as poss ible and should fit well seating posi t ion whenever t he vehicle is be-
on the body ¢ &. in Safety belt position on ing used .
page 269. - Always read and heed all WARNINGS and
ot her impor t ant informat ion ¢ page 268.
• Push the loop-around fitt ings up ¢ fig. 237 @ ,
or
• squeeze together the (!) button, and push the Belt tensioners
loop-arou nd fittings down @ . How safety belt pretensioners work
• Pull the belt to make sure that the upper at-
tachment is proper ly engaged . Revers ible safety belt pretensioners
The following functions are available when safety
A WARNING belts with reversible safety belt tensione rs are
Always read and heed all WARNINGS and oth- fastened:
er important informat ion¢ page 268.
- Automatic tensioners : at the start of a drive,
the safety belts automatically adjust to the
@ Tips
passenger after a certain time period or veh icle
With the front seats, the height adjustment speed . To switch the automatic tensioners off,
of the seat can also be used to adjust the po- select the following in t he Infotainment sys-
sition of the safety belts . tem: ! M E N UI button> Car > left cont rol button
> Vehicle setting s > Seat s > Driver' s seat or
Improperly worn safety belts Passenger' s seat > Automati c belt ten sioner .
- In ce rta in driv ing s ituations, the safety bel ts
Incorrectly positioned saf ety belts can cause se-
may tighten wit h a reversib le t ensioning func-
vere injuries.
tion ¢ page 117.
Wearing safety belts improperly can cause seri - - The safety be lts may also tighten with this re-
u ous injury or death. Safety belts can on ly work vers ible te ns ion ing funct ion in m inor collisions . .,.
(0
...... when they are correctly pos itioned on the body .
N
r--.
N
...... Improper seating positions reduce the effective-
0
0 ness of safety belts and will even increase the
:E
<t

271
S a fety belt s
Pyrot echnic saf ety belt pret ensioners
,_
Seat belts with pyrotechnic safety belt preten-
sioners are tensioned automatica lly in severe col-
lisions , depending on the circumstances. This
helps to reduce the forward motion of the occu-
pants.
A WARNING
- It is possible for the pretensioners to deploy
incorrectly .
- Any work on the tensioner system or remov-
al and installation of system components
for other repairs must be performed by a
qualified workshop .
- The pyrotechnic system can only prov ide
protect ion for one collision. If the pyrotech-
nic pretensioners deploy, the pretens ion ing
system must be replaced .
(D Tips
- A fine dust is released when the pyrotechnic
safety belt pretens ioners deploy . This is nor-
mal and is not caused by a fire in the vehi-
cle.
- The relevant safety requ irements must be
observed when the veh icle or components
of the system are scrapped. A qualified
dealersh ip is familiar with these regu lations
and will be pleased to pass on the informa-
tion to you.
Service and disposal of safety belt preten-
sioner
The safety belt pretens ioners are parts of the
safety belts on your Audi. Installing, removing,
servicing or repa iring of belt pretensioners can
damage the safety belt system and prevent it
from working cor rectly in a collision .
There are some important th ings you have to
know to make sure that the effectiveness of the
system w ill not be impaired and that discarded
components do not cause injury or pollute the
e nvironment.
272
A
WARNING
-
Improper care, servicing and repair proce-
dures can increase the risk of personal injury
and death by preventing a safety belt preten-
sioner from activating when needed or act i-
vating it unexpected ly:
- The pyrotechnic safety belt pretens ioners
can only be activated once. If pyrotechnic
safety belt pretensioners have been activat-
ed, the system must be replaced.
- Never repair, adjust, or change any parts of
the safety belt system.
- Safety belt systems including safety belt
pretensioners cannot be repai red. Spec ial
procedures are required for remova l, instal-
lation and disposal of this system .
- For any wo rk on the safety be lt system, we
strong ly recommend that you see your au-
thorized Audi dealer or qualified technician
who has an Audi approved repair manua l,
training and special equipment necessary.
(® For the sake of the environment
Undeployed airbag modules and pret ension-
ers might be classified as Perchlorate Materi-
a l -special handling may apply, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlo-
rate. When the vehicle or parts of the re-
straint system including airbag modules safe-
ty belts with pretensioners are scrapped, all
applicable laws and regulations must be ob-
served. Your authorized Audi dealer is familiar
wit h these requirements and we recommend
that you have your dealer perfo rm this service
for you .

A irbag system
Important information
Importance of wearing safety belts and
sitting properly
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. For
airbags to do their job, occupants must always
properly wear their safety belts and be in a prop-
er seating position.
For your safety and the safety of your passen-
gers, before driving off, always :
.,.Adjust the driver's seat and steering wheel
properly 9 page 257,
.,.Adjust the front passenger's seat properly
¢page 258,
.,.Wear safety belts properly ¢ page 268,
.,.Always properly use the proper child restraint
to protect children ¢ page 295.
In a collision, airbags must inflate within the
blink of an eye and with considerable force. The
supplemental airbags can cause injuries if the
driveror the front seat passenger is not seated
properly. Therefore in order to help the airbag to
do its job, it is important, both as a driver and as
a passenger to sit properly at all times.
By keeping room between your body and the
steering wheel and the front of the passenger
compartment, the airbag can inflate fully and
completely and provide supplemental protection
in certain frontal collisions ¢ page 257, Correct
passenger seating positions . For details on the
operation of the seat adjustment controls
¢page 59.
It's especially important that children are proper-
ly restrained ¢ page 295.
There is a lot that the driver and the passengers
can and must do to help the individual safety fea-
tures installed in your Audi work together as a
system.
Proper seating position is important so that the
u front airbag on the driver side can do its job. If
co
...... you have a physical impairment or condition that
N
r-...
N
...... prevents you from sitting properly on the driver
0
0 seat with the safety belt properly fastened and
:E:
'<t
Airbag system
reaching the pedals, or if you have concerns with
regard to the function or operation of the Ad-
vanced Airbag System, please contact your au-
thori zed Audi dealer or qualified workshop, or
call Audi Customer Relations at 1-800-822-2834
for possible modifications to your vehicle.
When the airbag system deploys, a gas generator
will fill the airbags, break open the padded cov-
ers, and inflate between the steering wheel and
the driver and between the instrument panel and
the front passenger. The airbags will deflate im-
mediately after deployment so that the front oc-
cupants can see through the windshield again
without interruption.
All of this takes place in the blink of an eye, so
fast that many people don't even realize that the
airbags have deployed. The airbags also inflate
with a great deal of force and nothing should be
in their way when they deploy. Front airbags in
combination with properly worn safety belts slow
down and limit the occupant's forward move-
ment . Together they help to prevent the driver
and front seat passenger from hitting parts of
the inside of the vehicle while reducing the forces
acting on the occupant during the crash . In this
way they help to reduce the risk of injury to the
head and upper body in the crash. Airbags do not
protect the arms or the lower parts of the body.
Both front airbags will not inflate in all frontal
collisions . The triggering of the airbag system de-
pends on the vehicle deceleration rate caused by
the collision and registered by the electronic con-
trol unit . If this rate is below the reference value
programmed into the control unit, the airbags
will not be triggered, even though the car may be
badly damaged as a result of the collision. Vehi-
cle damage, repair costs or even the lack of vehi-
cle damage is not necessarily an indication of
whether an airbag should inflate or not.
Since the circumstances will vary considerably
between one collision and another, it is not possi-
ble to define a range of vehicle speeds that will
cover every possible kind and angle of impact
that will always trigger the airbags . Important
factors include, for example, the nature (hard or
soft) of the object which the car hits, the angle of
impact, vehicle speed , etc. The front airbags will II>
273
Airb a g syste m
also not inflate in side or rear collisions, or in
rollovers.
Alwa ys rememb er: Airbags will deploy only once,
and on ly in ce rtain kinds of coll isions. Your safety
be lts are always there to offer protection in those
situations in which airbags are not supposed to
dep loy, or when they have already deployed; for
examp le, when your vehicle str ikes or is struck by
another vehicle after the first coll is ion.
This is just one of the reasons why an airbag is a
supp lementary restraint and is not a substitute
for a safety belt. The a irbag system works most
effect ively when used with the safety belts.
Therefore, always properly wear your safety belts
c::>page265.
A WARNING
-
Sitting too close to the steering wheel or in-
st rument panel will decrease the effective-
ness of the airbags and will increase the risk
of personal injury in a collision.
- Never sit closer than 10 inches (25 cm) to
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
- If you cannot sit mo re than 10 inches
(25 cm) from the steering wheel, invest i-
gate whether adaptive equipment may be
available to help you reach the pedals and
increase your seating distance from the
steering wheel.
- All vehicle occupants and especially children
must be restrained properly whenever riding
in a vehicle. An unrestrained or improperly
restra ined child could be injured by striking
the interior or by being ejected from the ve-
hicle during a sudden maneuver or impact.
An unrestrained or imp roperly restrained
child is also at greate r risk of inju ry or death
through contact with an inflating airbag.
- If you are unrestrained, leaning fo rwa rd, sit-
t ing s ideways or out of pos ition in any way,
your risk of inj ury is much higher.
- You will also receive serious injuries and
could even be killed if you are up aga inst the
airbag or t oo close to it when it inflates -
even with an Advanced Airbag.
274
- To reduce the risk of injury when an a irbag
inflates, always wear safety belts properly
page 268, Safety belts.
c::>
- Always make certa in that children age 12 or
younger always ride in the rear seat. If chil-
dren are not properly restrained, they may
be severely injured or killed when an airbag
inflates.
- Never let ch ildren ride unrestra ined or im-
properly restrained in the vehicle. Adj ust the
front seats properly.
- Never ride with the backrest recl ined .
- Always sit as far as possible from the steer-
ing wheel or the instrument panel
page 257.
c::>
- Always sit upright w ith your back against
the backrest of your seat .
- Never place your feet on the instrument
panel or on the seat. Always keep both feet
on the floor in front of the seat to help pre-
vent serious injur ies to the legs and hips if
the airbag inflates.
- Never recl ine the front passenger's seat to
transport objects. Items can also move into
the area of the side a irbag or the front air-
bag du ring brak ing or in a sudden maneu-
ver. Obje cts nea r the airbags can become
proj ecti les and cause injury when an airbag
inflates.
A WARNING
Airbags that have deployed in a crash must be
replaced.
- Use on ly original equipment airbags ap-
proved by Audi and installed by a trained
technician who has the necessary tools and
diagnostic equipment to properly replace
any airbag in your vehicle and assure system
effectiveness in a crash.
- Never perm it salvaged or recycled airbags to
be installed in your vehicle.
Child restraints on the front seat - some
important things to know
.,. Be sure to read the impo rt ant info rmat ion and
heed the WARNINGS for impor t ant deta ils .,..

about children and Advanced Airbags
¢ page 295 .
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Ad-
vanced Airbag System, make certain that all chil-
dren, especially those 12 years and younger, a l-
ways ride in the back seat properly restrained for
their age and size. The airbag on the passenger
side makes the front seat a potentially dangerous
place for a child to ride. The front seat is not the
safest place for a child in a forward-facing child
safety seat . It can be a very dangerous place for
a n infant or a child in a rearward-fac ing seat.
The Advanced Airbag System in your veh icle has
been certified to comply with the requirements
of United States Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standa rd (FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor
Vehicle Safety Standa rd (CMVSS) 208 as applica-
ble at the t ime your veh icle was m a nufact ured.
Accord ing to requirements, the front Advanced
Airbag System on the passenger side has been
certified for "suppression" for infants of about
12 month old and younger and for "low risk de-
ployment" for children aged 3 to 6 years old (as
defined in the standard) .
The PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF ~ ; light in the
headliner tells you when the front Advanced Air-
bag on the passenger side has been turned off by
the electronic control unit.
Each time yo u turn on the ignition, the PASSEN-
GERAIR BAGOFF~; ON @ light will come on
for a few seconds and:
- PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~ ; will come on if
the front passenger seat is not occupied
- PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~ ; will come on if
the e lectrica l capacitance measured by the ca-
pacitive passenger detection system for the
front passenger seat equa ls the comb ined ca-
pacitance of an infant up to about one year of
age and one of the rearward-facing or forward -
facing child restra ints listed in Federa l Moto r
Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 with
wh ich the Advanced Airbag System in your veh i-
u cle was certified . Fo r a listing of the child re -
co
...... straints that were used to ce rt ify you r vehicle 's
N
r-...
N
...... compliance with the Safety Standard
0
0 ¢ page 297 .
:E:
'<t
Airb a g sys tem
- PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~; will come on if
there is a small chi ld or child restraint on the
front passenger seat
- PASSENGERAIR BAGON @ will come on if the
front passenger seat is occupied by an ad ult as
registered by the capacit ive passenger detec-
tion system ¢ page 285, Monitoring the Ad-
vanced Airbag System .
The PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~; light comes on
when e lectrical capacitance registered on the
front passenger seat is equal to or less than the
combined capacitance of a typical 1 year-old in-
fant and one of the rearward-facing or forward -
facing child restrai nts listed in Federal Motor Ve-
hicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 208 with wh ich
the Advan ced Airbag System in your vehicle was
cert ified.
If the total electr ical capacitance reg istered on
t he front passenger seat is mo re than that of a
typ ica l 1 year -old ch ild but less than the weight
of a sm all adult, t he front air bag on t he passen-
ger side can deploy (the PASSENGERAIR BAG
OFF~ ; light does not come on) .
If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~ ; light does
not come on, the front airbag on the passenger
side has not been tu rned off by t he electronic
contro l unit and can deploy if the contro l unit
senses an impact that meets the conditions stor-
ed in its memory.
For example , the airbag may deploy if:
- a small child that is heav ier than a typ ica l 1
year -old child is on the front passenger se at
(regardless of whethe r the child is in one of the
child safety seats listed ¢ page 29 7), or
- a child who has outgrown child rest raints is on
t he front passenge r seat .
If the front passenge r airbag is t urned off, the
PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~ ; light comes on in
t he headliner a nd stays o n.
If the front passenger a irbag deploys, the Feder-
al Standard requi res the airbag to meet the "low
risk" dep loymen t criteria to redu ce the risk of in-
jury through interaction w it h t he airbag. "Low
risk" deployment occurs in those crashes that
take place at lowe r decelerations as defined in Ill>
275
Airb a g syste m

the electronic control unit¢ page 285, PASSEN-
GERAIR BAG OFF~; ON@ light.
Always remember, a child safety seat or infant
carrier installed on the front seat may be struck
and knocked out of position by the rapid ly inflat-
ing passenger's airbag in a fronta l collision. The
airbag cou ld greatly reduce the effect iveness of
the child restraint and even seriously injure the
child during inflation.
For this reason, and because the back seat is the
safest place for ch ildren - when properly restra in-
ed according to the ir age and size - we strong ly
recommend that children always sit in the back
seat ¢ page 295, Child safety.
ufacturer for use on a front seat with a pas-
senger front and side airbag.
- Never put the forward-facing child restraint
up against or very near the instrument pan-
el.
- Always move the front passenger seat to
the highest posit ion in the up and down ad-
justment range and move it back to the
rearmost posit ion in the seat's fore and aft
adj ustment range, as far away from the a ir-
bag as poss ible, before installing the for-
ward-facing chi ld restraint.
- Always make sure that the safety be lt upper
anchorage is behind the ch ild rest raint and
not next to o r in front of the child rest raint

A WARNING
so th at the safety be lt will be properly posi-
tioned.
A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat - Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
installed on the front passenger seat w ill be OFF ~; light comes on and stays on all the
ser iously injured and can be killed if the fron t time wheneve r the ign it ion is switched on .
airbag infla t es - even with an Advanced Airbag
System.
- The inflating a irbag will hit the child safety
A WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure
seat or infant carrier with great force and
that the PASSENGER
AIRBAGOFF~; light
will smash the chi ld safety seat and child
will be disp layed whenever a ch ild restraint is
against the backrest, center armrest, door
installed on the front passenger seat and the
or roof.
ignit ion is switched on.
- Always install rear -facing child safety seats
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; light
on the rear seat .
does not stay on, perform the checks descri-
- If you must install a rearward facing ch ild
bed ¢ page 285, Monitoring the Advanced
safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
Airbag System.
cause of exceptiona l circumstances and the
- Take the child restra int off the front passen-
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; light does not
ger seat and install it properly at one of the
come on and stay on, immed iately install
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
the rear-fac ing child safety seat in a rear
BAG OFF ~ light does not stay on .
seat ing pos ition and have the airbag system
- Have the airbag system inspected by your
inspected by your authorized Audi dea ler.
author ized Audi dealer immed iate ly.
- Forward-facing ch ild safety seats installed
- Always carefully follow instructions from
on the front passenger's seat may interfere
child restraint manufacturers when instal-
with the deployment of the airbag and
ling child restra ints.
cause serio us pe rsonal injury to t he child.

A WARNING
A WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you must in-
If, in except ional circumstances, you must in-
stall a forward or rearward-fac ing child re-
stall a forward -facing chi ld res t rain t on t he
stra int on the fron t passenger's seat: ..,.
front passenger's seat:
- Always make sure the forward-facing seat
has been designed a nd ce rt ified by its man-

276
 Airb a g sys tem

- Improper installation of child restraints can

reduce their effect iveness or even prevent
them from providing any protection.
- An improper ly installed ch ild restraint can
interfere with the airbag as it deploys and
seriously injure or even kill the child - even
with an Advanced Airbag System .
- Always carefu lly follow the manufacturer's
instructions provided with the child safety
seat or carrier. Fig. 239 Location of front passenger's airbag: in the in·
st rument pane l
- Always make sure that there is nothing on
the front passenger seat that will cause the
Your vehicle is equipped with an "Advanced Air-
capacit ive passenger detection system in
bag System" in compliance with United States
the seat to signa l to the Airbag System that
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
the seat is occupied by a person when it is
(FMVSS) 208, as well as Canada Motor Veh icle
not, or to signa l tha t it is occ upied by some -
Safety Standard (CMVSS)208 as applicable at
one who is heavier than the person actua lly
the time your veh icle was manufactured.
sitting on the seat. The presence of addi -
t ional objects could cause the passenge r The airbag for the driver is in the steering wheel
front airbag to be turned on when it shou ld hub ¢ fig. 238 and the airbag for the front pas-
be off, or could cause the airbag to work in a senger is in the instrument panel ~ fig. 239. The
way that is different from the way it would general locat ion of the airbags is marked ''AIR·
have worked without the object on the seat . BAG".

There is a lot you need to know about the airbags

Front airbags in your vehicle. We urge you to read the deta iled
information abo ut airbags, safety belts and child
Description of front airbags
safe t y in this and the othe r chapte rs that make
The airbag system can provide supplemental up the owner's lit erature . Please be sure to heed
protection to properly restrained front seat occu- the WARNINGS - they are ext remely important
pants. for your safety and the safety of your passengers,
especially infants and small children.

A WARNING
-
Never rely on ai rbags alone for protection .
- Even w hen they deploy, airbags provide only
supp lemental protection .
- Airbag wor k most effec t ively when used
with proper ly worn safety be lts.
- Therefo re, always wea r you r safety be lts and
make sure that everybody in your vehicle is
Fig. 238 Location of driver airbag: in stee ring whee l
p roper ly restrained.
- Always hold the steering wheel with both
hands on the outside of the steering wheel
rim at the 9:00 o'clock and 3:00 o'clock po-
u
....
(0 sitions to help reduce the risk of personal in-
N
r--. jury if the driver's a irbag inflates. ~
....
N
0
0
:E
<t

277
Airbag system
- Never hold the steering wheel at the 12
o'clock position or with your hands any-
where inside the steering wheel or on the
steering wheel hub. Holding the steering
wheel the wrong way increases the risk of
severe injury to the arms, hands, and head if
the driver airbag deploys.
,& WARNING
-
Objects between you and the airbag will in-
crease the risk of injury in a crash by interfer-
ing with the way the airbag unfolds and/or by
being pushed into you as the airbag inflates.
- Always make sure nothing is in the front air-
bag deployment zone that could be struck
by the airbag when it inflates.
- Objects in the zone of a deploying airbag
can become projectiles when the airbag de-
ploys and cause serious personal injury.
- Never hold things in your hands or on your
lap when the vehicle is in use.
- Never place accessories or other objects
(such as cup holders, telephone brackets,
note pads, navigation systems, or things
that are large, heavy, or bulky) on the doors;
never attach then to the doors or the wind-
shield; never place them over or near or at-
tach them to the area marked ,,AIRBAG"on
the steering wheel, instrument panel or the
seat backrests; never place them between
these areas and you or any other person in
the vehicle.
- Never attach objects to the windshield
above the passenger front airbag, such as
accessory GPS navigation units or music
players. Such objects could cause serious in-
jury in a collision, especially when the air-
bags inflate.
- Never recline the front passenger seat to
transport objects. Items can also move into
the deployment area of the side airbags or
the front airbag during breaking or in a sud-
den maneuver. Objects near the airbags can
fly dangerously through the passenger com-
partment and cause injury, particularly
when the seat is reclined and the airbags in-
flate.
278
,&
,-
WARNING
-
A person on the front passenger seat, espe-
cially infants and small children, will receive
serious injuries and can even be killed by be-
ing too close to the airbag when it inflates .
- Although the Advanced Airbag System in
your vehicle is designed to turn off the front
passenger airbag if an infant or a small child
is on the front passenger seat, nobody can
absolutely guarantee that deployment un-
der these special conditions is impossible in
all conceivable situations that may happen
during the useful life of your vehicle.
- The Advanced Airbag System can deploy in
accordance with the ,.low risk" option for 3-
and 6-year-old children under the U.S. Fed-
eral Standard if a child with electrical capac-
itance greater than the combined capac i-
tance of a typical one-year old infant re-
strained in one of the forward facing or rear-
ward-facing child seats with which your ve-
hicle was certified is on the front passenger
seat and the other conditions for airbag de-
ployment are met.
- Accident statistics have shown that children
are generally safer in the rear seat area than
in the front seating position.
- For their own safety, all children, especially
12 years and younger, should always ride in
the back properly restrained for their age
and size.
Advanced front airbag system
Your vehicle is equipped with a front Advanced
Airbag System in compliance with United States
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time
your vehicle was manufactured .
The front Advanced Airbag System supplements
the safety belts to provide additional protection
for the driver's and front passenger's heads and
upper bodies in frontal crashes. The airbags in-
flate only in frontal impacts when the vehicle de-
celeration is high enough. ll>
 Airb a g sys tem

The front Advanced Airbag System for the front airbag on the passenger side may or may not
seat occupants is not a substitute for your safety dep loy.
belts. Rather, it is part of the overa ll occupant re-
The PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~; light comes on
straint system in your vehicle. Always remember
whe n the ele ct ronic cont rol unit detects a tota l
that the airbag system can on ly help to protect
electrical capacitance on the front passenger seat
you, if you are sitting upr ight, wear ing your safe -
that requires the front airbag to be turned off. If
ty belt and wear ing it properly. This is why you
the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~; light does not
and your passengers must always be properly re-
come on, the front airbag on the passenger side
stra ined, not just because the law requ ires you to
has not been turned off by the contro l unit and
be.
can deploy if the contro l unit senses an impact
The Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle has that meets t he cond itions stored in its memory.
been certified to meet the "low risk" require-
If the total electr ical capacitance reg istered on
ments for 3 and 6 yea r-old children on the pas-
the front passenger seat is more than that of a
senger side and very sma ll adults on the drive r
typ ical 1 year-old, but less than the weight of a
side . The low risk dep loymen t criteria are intend-
small ad ult, the front airbag on the passenger
ed to help reduce the risk of injury through inter-
side may dep loy (the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF
action with the front airbag that can occur, for
~; light does not come on).
examp le, by being too close to the steering wheel
and instrument pane l when the airbag inflates . For example, th e airbag may deploy if:

In addition, the system has been certified to
comp ly with the "supp ression" requirements of
the Safety Standard, to turn off the front airbag
for infants 12 months old and younger who are
restrained on the front passenger seat in child re-
stra ints that are listed in the Standard
page 297, Child restraints
c::> and Advanced Air-
bags.
"Suppress ion" requ ires the front airbag on the
passenger side to be turned off if:
- a child up to about one year of age is restrained
on the front passenger seat in one of the rear-
facing or forward-fac ing infant restra ints listed
in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208
with wh ich the Advanced Airbag System in your
vehicle was cert ified. For a listi ng of the child
restra ints t hat were used t o certify your veh i-
cle's compl iance wit h the US Safety Standard
page 297,
c::>
- When a person is dete cted on t he front passen-
ger seat that has an electrical capacitance that
is mo re than t he tota l electrical capac itance of
a child that is about 1 year old restrained in one
- a small child that is heavier than a typ ical 1
year-o ld child is on the front passenger seat
(regardless of whether the child is in one of the
child safety seats listed c:>page 297),
- a child who has outgrown child restraints is on
the front passenger seat.
If the front passenger airbag is t urned off, the
PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~ ; light in the head -
liner will come on and stay on.
If the front passenge r airbag deploys, the Feder-
al Standard requ ires the airbag to meet the "low
risk" deployment criteria to help reduce the ris k
of injury through interaction with the airbag.
"Low risk" deployment occurs in those crashes
that take place at lower decelerations as defined
in the electronic control unit . c::>
page 285
Always remember: Even though your vehicle is
equipped with Advanced Airbags, the safest place
for childre n is properly restrained on the back
seat. Please be sure to read the impor t ant infor-
mation in the sec t ions that fo llow and be sure to
heed all of the WARNINGS.

u
of the rear-facing or forward-facing infant re- _& WARNING
co straints (listed in Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
...... To redu ce the risk of injury when an air bag in-
N
r-... Standard 208 with which the Advanced Airbag
N
...... f lates, always wear sa fety belts properly. llill-
0
System in your veh icle was certified), the front
0
:E:
'<t

279
Airb a g syste m
- If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sideways or out of position in any way,
your risk of injury is much higher.
- You will also receive serious injuries and
could even be killed if you are up aga inst the
airbag or too close to it when it inflates -
even with an Advanced Airbag ¢page 273.
A WARNING
A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat
installed on the front passenger seat w ill be
ser iously injured and can be killed if the front
airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag
System.
- Although the Advanced Airbag System in
yo ur vehicle is designed to turn off the front
airbag when a rearward-facing child re-
straint has been insta lled on the front pas-
senger seat, nobody can absolutely guaran-
tee that deployment is impossible in all con-
ceivable s ituations that may happen during
the useful life of your vehicle.
- The inf lating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and
will smash the chi ld safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door,
or roof.
- Always install rearward-facing ch ild re-
straints on the rear seat.
- If you must install a rearward fac ing ch ild
safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
cause of exceptiona l circumstances and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; light does not
come on and stay on, immed iate ly install
the rear-fac ing child safety seat in a rear
seating position and have the airbag system
inspected by your authorized Audi dea ler.
A WARNING
If, in exceptional circumstances, you must in-
stall a forward-facing chi ld restraint on the
front passenger's seat:
- Always make sure the forward-facing seat
has been designed and certified by its man-
ufacturer for use on a front seat with a pas-
senger front and side a irbag.
280
- Never put the forward-facing child restraint
up against or very near the instrument pan-
el.
- Always move the front passenger seat to
the highest posit ion in the up and down ad-
justment range and move it back to the
rearmost posit ion in the seat's fore and aft
adj ustment range, as far away from the a ir-
bag as poss ible, before install ing the for-
ward-facing chi ld restraint.
- Always make sure that the safety be lt upper
anchorage is behind the ch ild rest raint and
not next to or in fron t of the child rest raint
so that the safety be lt will be properly posi-
tioned.
- Always make sure th at there is noth ing on
the front passenger seat that will cause the
capacitive passenger detection system in
the seat to signal to the Airbag System that
the seat is occup ied by a person when it is
not, or to signal that it is occupied by some-
one who is heavier than the person actually
sitt ing on the seat. The presence of addi-
tional objects could cause the passenger
front airbag to be turned on when it should
be off, or could cause the airbag t o work in a
way that is d ifferent from the way it wou ld
have worked withou t the objec t on the seat .
- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF "1; light comes on and stays on all the
time wheneve r the ignit ion is switched on .
' Advanced Airbag System components
The front passenger seat in your vehicle has a lot
of very important parts of the Advanced Airbag
System in it. These parts include the capacitive
passenger detection system, wir ing, brackets,
and more. The control unit monitors the system
on the front passenger seat when the ignit ion is
switched on and turns the airbag indicato r light
o n when a malfunction in the one of the system
components is detec t ed ¢ page 285. Because
t he fron t passenger seat contains impo rt ant
parts of the Advanced Airbag System, you must
take care to prevent it from being damaged .
Damage to the seat may prevent the Advanced .,.

Airbag System for the front passenger seat from
doing its job in a crash.
The front Advanced Airbag System con sists
of t he follo wing :
- Crash sensors in the front of the vehicle that
measure vehicle acceleration/deceleration to
provide information to the Advanced Airbag
System about the severity of the crash.
- An electronic control un it, with integrated
crash sensors for front and side impacts. The
control unit "decides" whether to fire the front
airbags based on the information received from
the crash sensors. The control unit also "de -
cides" whether the safety belt pretens ioners
shou ld be activated .
- An Advanced Airbag with gas generator and
contro l valve for the driver ins ide the steer ing
wheel hub.
- An Advanced Airbag with gas generator and
contro l valve inside the instrument pane l for
the front passenger.
- A capac itive passenger detect io n system unde r-
neath the front passenger seat cover. This sys-
tem measures the elect rical capac ita nce of the
person in the seat. The information registe red
is sent continuously to the electron ic control
unit to regulate deployment of the front Ad-
vanced Airbag on the passenger side.
- An airbag monitoring system and indicator
lightmin the instrument cluster .
- A sensor in each front seat reg isters the dis-
tance between the respective seat and the
steering wheel or instrument panel. The infor-
mation reg istered is sent continuously to the
electronic control unit to regulate deployment
of the front Advanced Airbags .
- The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; ON @ light
comes on in the headliner ¢ page 285,
fig. 241 and tells you the status of the Ad-
vanced Airbag on the passenge r s ide .
- A sensor in the safety belt latch for the dr iver
and for the front seat passenger that senses
whether that safety belt is latched or not and
transm its this info rmat ion to the elect ronic
u
co
...... contro l unit.
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Airb a g sys tem
_& WARNING
Damage to the front passenger seat can pre-
vent the front airbag from working properly.
- Improper repair or disassembly of the front
passenger and driver seat will prevent the
Advanced Airbag System from funct ion ing
properly .
- Repairs to the front passenger seat must be
performed by qualified and properly trained
workshop personne l.
- Never remove the front passenger or driver
seat from the vehicle .
- Never remove the upholstery from the front
passenger seat .
- Never disassemble or remove parts from the
seat or disconnect wires from it.
- Never carry sharp objects in your pockets or
put them on the seat . The capacit ive pas-
senger detect ion mat in the front passenger
seat will not function properly if it is punc-
tured.
- Never carry things on your lap or carry ob-
jects on the front passenger seat. Such ob-
jects can influence the capacitance reg is-
tered by the capacitive passenger detection
system, so that incorrect informa t ion is pro-
vided to the airbag control unit.
- Never store it ems unde r the front passenger
seat . Parts of the Advanced Airbag System
under the passenger seat could be dam-
aged, preventing them and the airbag sys-
tem from working proper ly.
- Never place seat covers or replacement up-
holstery that have not been specifically ap-
proved by Audi on the front seats.
- Seat covers can prevent the Advanced Air-
bag System from recognizing chi ld re-
stra ints or occupants on the front passenger
seat and prevent the side airbag in the seat
backrest from deploying properly.
- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or oth-
erwise added to the front passenger seat,
never install any child restra int system on
this seat.
- Never use cushions, pillows, blankets, or
similar items on the front passenge r seat .
281
Airb a g syste m
The ad ditio na l layers prevent the capacitive
passenger detection system from accurately
measuring the capac itance of the ch ild safe-
ty seat and/or the person on the seat and
thus keep the Advanced Airbag System from
working properly.
- Never place or use any electrical device
(such as a laptop, CD player, elect ronic
games dev ice, power inverte r or seat heater
for child seats) on the front passenger seat
if the device is connected to the 12-vol t
socket or the cigarette lighter socket . Such
devices can influence the capacitance regis-
tered by the capacitive passenger detection
system, so that incorrect information is pro-
vided to the airbag control unit.
- If you must use a child restraint on the front
passenger seat and the child restraint man-
ufacturer's instructions require the use of a
towel, foam cushion or something else to
prope rly position the ch ild restraint, make
certain that the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF
~; light comes on and stays on whenever
the child restraint is installed on the front
passenge r seat .
- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~; light
does not come on and st ay on , immediate ly
inst all child restra int in a rea r seating posi-
tion and have the airbag system inspected
by you r Audi dealer.
_& WARNING
If the front passenger seat gets wet, dry it im-
mediately.
- If liquid soaks into the front passenger seat,
this can keep the a irbag system from work -
ing prope rly and may, for instance, deact i-
vate the passenger frontal airbag. If this
happens, the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~;
light will come on and stay on togethe r with
the a irbag indicator lightE,I in t he inst ru-
men t cluster.
- If liquid is poo led on the seat, but has not
soa ked in, this may also keep the airbag sys-
tem from wo rking properly and cause the
passenge r frontal a irbag to be enabled
(tu rned on), even though there is a properly
282
installed child rest raint system on the seat .
Wet towels or other wet things on the seat
cushion can have the same effect. If the
front passenger fronta l airbag is turned on,
t he PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~; light light
will go out.
How the Advanced Airbag System
components work together
The front Advanced Airbag System and the side
airbags supp lement the protection offered by the
front three-point safety be lts and the adjustable
head restraints to he lp reduce the risk of injury in
a wide range of accident and crash situat ions. Be
sure to read the important informat ion about
safety and heed the WARNINGS in t his chapter .
Deployment of the Advanced Airbag System and
the activation of the safety belt pretensioners de-
pend on the dece leration measured by the crash
sensors and registered by the elec t ronic contro l
unit . Crash severity depends on speed and decel-
eration as well as t he mass and stiffness of the
vehicle or object involved in the cras h.
On the passenger side, regard less of safety be lt
use, the front passenge r frontal airbag will be
turned off if t he e lectr ica l capaci t ance measured
by the capaci t ive passenge r detection system o n
t he fron t passenger sea t is less th an the amou nt
programmed in t he e lect ronic cont rol unit. The
front passenger frontal airbag will also be turned
off if the capacitance measured by the system for
the front passenger seat equals that of an infant
of about one year of age in one of the child seats
that was used to certify the Advanced Airbag Sys-
tem under Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
208. The PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~; light
comes on and stays on to tell you whe n t he front
Advanced Airbag System on the passenge r side
has been tu rned off~ page 285.
_& WARNING
To reduce the risk of injury when an airbag in-
flates, always wea r safety belts prope rly.
- If you are un res t rained, leaning forward, sit-
ting sideways or out of position in any way,
your risk of injury is much higher.

- You will also receive serious injuries and
could even be killed if you are up aga inst the
airbag or too close to it when it inflates -
even with an Advanced Airbag 9page 273.
More important things to know about front
airbags
0 - if the ignition is switched off when a crash oc-
-
0
M
.a
;z
Fig. 240 Inflated front airbags
Safety belts are impo rt ant to help keep front
seat occupants in the proper seated position so
that airbags can unfold properly and provide sup-
plemental protection in a frontal collision.
The front airbags are designed to provide addi-
tional protect ion for the chest and face of the
driver and the front seat passenger when:
- safety belts are worn properly
- the seats have been positioned so that the oc-
cupant is properly seated as far as possible
from the airbag
- and the head restraints have been properly ad-
justed
Because airbags inflate in the blink of an eye with
great force, things you have on your lap or have
placed on the seat could become dangerous pro-
jectiles, and be pushed into you if the airbag in-
flates .
When an airbag deploys, fine dust is released.
This is normal and is not caused by a fire in the
veh icle. This dust is made up mostly of a powder
used to lubricate the airbags as they deploy . It
could irritate skin .
u It is important to remember that while the sup -
(0
......
N
plemental airbag system is designed to reduce
r--.
N
......
the likelihood of ser ious injuries, other injuries,
0
0 for example swelling, bruising and minor abra -
:E
<t
Airb a g sys tem
sions, can also happen when airbags inflate. Air-
bags do not protect the arms or the lower parts
of the body. Front airbags supp lement the three-
point safety belts only in some frontal collisions
in which the vehicle dece leration is high enough
to deploy the airbags .
Front airbag s will not depl oy:
curs
- in side collisions
- in rear-end coll isions
- in rollovers
- when the crash deceleration measured by the
airbag system is less than the m inimum thresh-
old needed for airbag dep loyment as registe red
by the electronic control un it
The front pass enge r airbag also will not
deploy:
- when the fron t passenger seat is not occupied,
- when the e lectr ical capacitance measured by
t he capacit ive passenger detection system for
the front passenge r seat ind icates that t he pas-
senger side frontal airbag must be switched off
by the electronic control unit (the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF "1; light 9 page 285 comes on
and stays on).
_& WARNING
Sitting in the wrong position can increase the
risk of ser ious injury in crashes.
- To reduce the risk of injury when the a irbags
inflate, the driver and passengers must al-
ways sit in an upright posit ion, must not
lean aga inst or place any part of their body
too close to the area where the airbags are
located.
- Occupants who are unbelted, out of posit ion
or too close t o the airbag can be serio us ly
injured by an airbag as it unfolds wit h g reat
for ce in t he blink of an eye r:!>page2 74.
_& WARNING
A child in a rearward-fa cing child safety seat
insta lled on t he front passenger sea t will be
serious ly inj ured and can be killed if the front Iii-
283
Airbag system
airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Airbag
System.
- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and
will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
or roof .
- Always install rear-facing child safety seats
on the rear seat .
- If you must install a rearward-facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
cause of exceptional circumstances and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF~; light does not
come on and stay on, immediately install
the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear
seating position and have the airbag system
inspected by your authorized Audi dealer.
A WARNING
-
Objects between you and the airbag will in-
crease the risk of injury in a crash by interfer-
ing with the way the airbag unfolds or by be-
ing pushed into you as the airbag inflates.
- Never hold things in your hands or on your
lap when the vehicle is in use.
- Never transport items on or in the area of
the front passenger seat. Objects could
move into the area of the front airbags dur-
ing braking or other sudden maneuvers and
become dangerous projectiles that can
cause serious personal injury if the airbags
inflate .
- Never place or attach accessories or other
objects (such as cupholders, telephone
brackets, large, heavy or bulky objects) on
the doors, over or near the area marked
"AIRBAG''on the steering wheel, instru-
ment panel, seat backrests or between
those areas and yourself. These objects
could cause injury in a crash, especially
when the airbags inflate.
- Never recline the front passenger's seat to
transport objects. Items can also move into
the area of the side airbag or the front air-
bag during braking or in a sudden maneu-
ver. Objects near the airbags can become
284
projectiles and cause injury, particularly
when the seat is reclined .
- Never place or transport objects on the
front passenger seat. Objects on the front
passenger seat could cause the capacitive
sensor in the seat to signal to airbag system
that the seat is occupied by a person when it
in fact is not, or that the person on the seat
is heavier than he or she actually is. The
change in electric capacitance because of
such objects can cause the passenger front
airbag to be turned on when it should be
off, or can cause the airbag to work in a way
that is different from the way it would have
worked without objects on the seat.
- Always make sure that there is nothing on
the front passenger seat that will cause the
capacitive passenger detection system in
the seat to signal to the Airbag System that
the seat is occupied by a person when it is
not , or to signal that it is occupied by some-
one who is heavier than the person actually
sitting on the seat. The presence of an ob-
ject could cause the passenger front airbag
to be turned on when it should be off, or
could cause the airbag to work in a way that
is different from the way it would have
worked without the object on the seat.
A WARNING
The fine dust created when airbags deploy can
cause breathing problems for people with a
history of asthma or other breathing condi-
tions .
- To reduce the risk of breathing problems,
those with asthma or other respiratory con-
ditions should get fresh air right away by
getting out of the vehicle or opening win-
dows or doors.
- If you are in a collision in which airbags de-
ploy, wash your hands and face with mild
soap and water before eating.
- Be careful not to get the dust into your eyes,
or into any cuts or scratches.
- If the residue should get into your eyes,
flush them with water .
 Airbag system

Monitoring the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF '1;ON @ light

Advanced Airbag System
Airbag monitoring indicator light

Two separate indicators monitor the fun ction of

the Advanced Airbag System: the El
ligh t and
t he PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; ON @ Light.

The Advanced Airbag System as we ll as the side

a irbags and side curta in airbags with ejec tio n
m it iga t ion fea tur es (includi ng the e lectro nic con-
tro l uni t , sensors and sys t em wiring) are a ll
monitored conti nuously to ma ke sure that they
are funct ioning properly whenever the ignition is
on. Every t ime you turn on the ignition, the air-
bag system ind icator lightE,l will come on for a
few seconds (function check).
The system must be inspected when the
indicato r light E,I:
- does not come on when the ignit ion is switched
on
- does not go out a few seconds after you have
switched on the ign ition, or
- comes on w hile driving
If an airbag sys t em malf unct ion is det ected, the
indicator light w ill come on to serve as a constant
remi nder to have the system inspected immedi-
ately .
If a mal function occurs t hat turns the front air-
bag on the passenger side off, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF ~ . light w ill come o n an d stay on
whenever the ignit ion is on.
A WARNING
An airbag system that is not funct io ning prop-
erly cannot provide supplemental protection
in a frontal crash .
- If the airbag indicato r light¢ page 29
comes whe n the vehicle is be ing used, have
th e sys t em inspect ed immed iate ly by yo ur
au t ho rized Audi d eale r. It is possible th at
th e air bag will infl ate w hen it is not su p-
posed t o, o r will not infla t e whe n it s hou ld.
u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t
Fig. 241 Sect ion from the headli ner: PASSENGE
R AIR BAG
OFF~ ; ON @ light
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; ON @ light is
located in t he headliner ¢ fig. 241.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; ligh t will come
on and stay on to tell you w hen t he fro nt Ad-
van ced Airbag o n t he passenge r s ide has been
tu rned off by t he e lect ron ic control unit. If t he
bulb fo r the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~; ON @
light burns o ut, t he a irbag ind icator light El will
come on to signal a ma lfunction in the Advanced
Airbag System. Altho ugh the burned-out bul b
will not change the way the front passenger's
frontal a irbag works, it w ill no longer be possible
to use the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~; ON @
ligh t to make s ure that the airbag on/off st atus is
cor rect fo r t he occu pan t on t he front passenge r
sea t . Have the airb ag system inspec t ed immedi-
ate ly by your au th orized Aud i d ealer .
The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~; ON @ light
will blink for about S seconds when:
- the capacit ive passenger detection system,
which switc hes the front sea t passe nger's fron -
tal Advanced Airbag o n and off, detects a
change in the st atus of the front pa sse nger
se at.
As soon as the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; ON
@ light st ops blin king, a lways m ake sure that t he
air bag st at us (on or off) as shown by the ligh t is
prope r f or the age, size and e lect rica l capa citance
of t he perso n occupying t he front passenger
seat . Always ma ke sure that the safety be lt fo r
t he front passenger seat is proper ly fastened .
The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~; / PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON @ light will show the statu s of the ..,.

285
Airb a g syste m
front seat passenger's frontal Advanced Airbag.
The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~; light:
- will come on if the front pa ssenger seat is not
occupied;
- will come on if the e lectr ica l capacitance meas-
ured by t he ca pac itive passenger detec t ion sys -
tem for the front passenger seat equals the
combined capacitance of an infant up to about
one year of age and one of the rearward-facing
or forward-facing child rest raints listed in Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with
which the Advanced Airbag System in your veh i-
cle was certif ied; For a listing of the child re-
straints that were used to cert ify your vehicle's
compliance with the U.S. Safety Standard
¢ page 297.
- will go out if the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by an adult as reg istered by the capacitive
passenger detection system.
- The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; light must
come on and stay o n if the ignition is on and ...
- a car bed has been insta lled on the front pas-
senger seat, o r
- a rearward-facing child restraint has been in-
stalled on the front passenger seat , or
- a forward-facing child restra int has bee n instal -
led on the front passenger seat,
- and if the e lectrical capacitance registered on
the front passenger seat is equa l to or less than
the comb ined capac itance of a typical 1 year-
o ld infant and one of the rearward-fac ing or
fo rward -facing chi ld restrain t s list ed in Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208 with which
the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle was
certified .
If t he fron t passe nger seat is no t occ upied, the
front airbag w ill not dep loy, and t he PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF ~ ; light will stay on.
Never install a rearward-facing child rest raint on
t he front passenge r sea t , t he safes t place for a
chi ld in any kind of child restraint is at one of the
seating positions on the rea r seat ¢ page 274,
Child restraints on the front seot - some impor-
tant things to know and ¢ page 295, Child safe -
ty .
286
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~ ; light
com es on ...
If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~ ; light comes
on when one of the condit ions listed above is
met, be sure to check the light regularly to make
certain t hat the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~;
light stays on cont inuously whenever the ign ition
is on . If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~ ; light
does not appear on and does not stay on all the
time, stop as soon as it is safe to do so a nd
- reactivate the system by tur ning the ignit ion
off for more than 4 seconds and then tur ning it
on again;
- remove and re install the ch ild restraint. Make
sure that the child restra int is prope rly insta l-
led and that the safety belt for the front pas-
senge r sea t has bee n corre ct ly rou t ed th rough
t he child restraint as desc ribed in t he ch ild re-
straint man ufact urer's inst ruct ions;
- ma ke sure that the convert ible locking retr ac-
to r on the safety belt for t he front passenge r
seat has been activated and that the safety belt
has been pulled tight .
- ma ke sure that no e lectrica l device (s uch as a
laptop , CD player , e lectronic games device,
power inverte r or seat heater for chi ld seats) is
placed or used on the front passenger seat if
the device is connected to the 12-volt socket or
the cigarette lighter socket;
- make sure that no seat heater has been retro-
fitted or otherw ise added to the front passen-
ger seat;
- make sure that noth ing can interfere with the
safety belt buckles and that they are not ob-
struc t ed;
- make sure that there are no wet objects (such
as a wet towe l) and no water or other liquids on
the front passenger seat cushion .
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; light still
does not come on ...
If the PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~; light st ill
does not come on and does not stay on cont inu-
ous ly (when the ign ition is switched o n),
- take the child restra int off the front passenger
seat and install it properly at one of the rear ll-
 Airb a g sys tem

seat positions. Have the airbag system inspect-
ed by your Audi dealer immediately .
- move the chi ld to a rear seat position and make
sure that the child is properly restrained in a
child restraint that is appropriate for its size
and age.
seat after taking the steps described above,
make sure the adu lt is properly seated and
restrained at one of the rear seating posi-
tions . Have the a irbag system inspected by
your author ized Audi dealer before trans-
port ing anyone on the front passenger seat.

The PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF ~ ; light

should NOT come on .. . f-
A WARNING
An a irbag system that is not functioning prop-
The PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF ~ ; light should
e rly cannot prov ide supplemental protect io n
NOT come on when the ignition is on and an
in a front al crash.
adult is sitting in a proper seating position on the
- If the ai rbag ind icator light~ page 29
front passenger seat . If the PASSENGERAIR
comes when the veh icle is being used, have
BAGOFF ~; light comes on and stays on while
the system inspected immedia t ely by your
driving, under these circumstances, make sure
authorized Audi dealer . It is possib le that
that :
the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
- the adult on the front passenger seat is proper- posed to, or will not inflate when it should.
ly seated on the center of the seat cushion with
his or he r back up aga inst the backrest and the A WARNING
back rest is not reclined,
If the front airbag inflates, a child without a
- the adult is not tak ing weight off the seat by
chi ld restraint, or in a rearward-facing child
ho lding on to the passenger assist handle
safety seat, or in a forward-fac ing child re-
above t he front passenger door or supporting
stra int that has not been properly insta lled
their we ight on the a.rm rest ,
will be seriously injured and can be killed.
- the safety belt is be ing properly worn and that
- Even though your vehicle is equipped with
there is not a lot of slack in the safety belt web-
an Advanced Airbag System, make certain
bing,
that all children , espec ially 12 years and
- there are no aftermarket seat covers or cush -
younge r, always ride on the back seat prop-
ions or other things (such as blankets) on the
erly rest rained for the ir age and size .
front passenger seat that migh t ca use t he ca-
- Always install fo rwa rd or rear-facing child
pacitive passenger detection system to miscal-
safety seats on the rear seat - even with an
culate electrical capacitance .
Advan ced Airbag System.
- If you must install a rea rwa rd-facing child
Important safety instructions on safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
monitoring the Advanced Airbag System
cause of excep t ional circums tances and the
PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF,;, light does not
A WARNING
-
appear and stay on, immediate ly install the
- If the status of the Adva need Airbag System rear-facing chi ld safety seat in a rear seat ing
has changed while the vehicle is moving, the position and have the a irbag system in-
PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF,; ; ON@ light spected by your authori zed Aud i dea ler.
blinks for about 5 seconds to catch the driv- - If, in exceptional circumstances, you must
er's attention . If this happens, always stop install a forward-facing child restraint on
as soon as it is safe to do so and check the the front passenger seat, always move the
steps described above . seat into its rearmost position in the seat's
u
co
......
- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF,;; light fore and aft adj ustment range, as far away
N
r-... does not go off when an adult who is not from the a irbag as poss ible . The back rest
N
......
0 very small is s itting on the front passenger must be adjusted to an upr ight position .
0
:E:
'<t

287
Airb a g syste m
Make sure that the PASSENGERAIR BAG
OFF11;;light comes on and stays on all t he
t ime whenever the ignition is switched on.
A WARNING
-
- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF11;; light
does not go out when an adult is sit ting on
the fr ont passe nger seat after ta king the
steps described above, make sure the adult
is properly seated and restrained at one of
the rear seating positions.
- Have the airbag system inspected by your
authorized Audi dealer before transporting
anyone on the front passenger seat.
@ Tips
If the capacitive passenger detection system
determines t hat the front passenger seat is
empty, the frontal airbag on the passenge r
side w ill be tu rned off, and the PASSENGER
AIR BAGOFF11;;light will stay on.
Repair , care and disposal of the airbags
Parts of the a irbag system are installed at many
different places on your Audi. Installing, remov-
ing, servic ing or repa iring a part in an area of the
ve hicle can damage a part of an airbag system
and prevent that system from working properly
in a collision .
There are some important things you have to
know to make sure that the effectiveness of the
system w ill not be impaired and that discarded
components do not cause injury or pollute the
env ironment.
A WARNING
-
Improper care, serv icing and repai r proce-
dures can increase the ris k of personal injury
and death by preventing an airbag from de-
ploying when needed or dep loying an airbag
unexpectedly:
- Never cover, obstruct, or change the stee r-
ing wheel horn pad or airbag cover or the in-
strument pane l or modify them in any way.
288
- Never attach any objects s uch as cupholders
or telephone mountings to the surfaces cov-
ering the a irbag un its.
- For cleaning the horn pad or instrument
panel, use only a soft, dry cloth or one mois-
tened w ith plain water. Solvents or cleaners
could damage the airbag cover or change
the st iffness or strength of the material so
that the airbag canno t deploy and protect
properly.
- Never repair, adjust , or change any parts of
the airbag system.
- All work on the steering wheel, inst rument
panel, front seats or e lectr ica l system (in-
cluding t he installation of a udio eq uipment,
cellular telephones and CB radios, etc.)
m ust be perfo rmed by a qualified techn ician
who has the training and specia l equipment
necessary.
- For any work on the airbag system, we
strong ly recommend that you see your au-
thorized Audi dealer or qualified workshop.
- Never modify the front bumper or parts of
the vehicle body.
- Always make sure that the side a irbag can
inflate w ithout interference:
- Never install seat covers or replacement
upholstery over the front seatbacks that
have not been specifically approved by
Audi.
- Never use additional seat cushions that
cover the areas where the side airbags in-
flate.
- Damage to the orig inal seat cove rs or to
the seam in the area of the s ide airbag
module mus t a lways be repaired immedi-
ate ly by an autho rized Audi dealer.
- The a irbag system can deploy on ly once. Af-
ter a n airbag has been deployed, it m ust be
repla ced with new replacement parts de-
signed and approved espec ia lly for your
Audi model version . Replacement of com-
plete airbag systems or airbag components
must be perfo rmed by qua lified workshops
only. Make su re that any airbag service ac-
tion is entered in your Audi Warranty &
Maintenance boo klet under AIRBAG RE-
PLACEMENT RECORD. ~
 Airb a g sys tem

- For safety reasons in severe accidents, the

alternator and starter are separated from
A
,-
WARNING
Changing the vehicle's suspension including
the vehicle battery with a pyrotechn ic circuit
use of unapproved tire-rim combinations can
interrupter.
change Advanced Airbag performance and in-
- Work on the pyrotechnic circuit interrupt -
crease the risk of serious personal injury in a
er must only be performed by a qualified
crash.
technicians who have the experience, in-
- Never install suspension components that
formation and special tools necessary to
do not have the same pe rformance charac-
perform the work safely.
teristics as the components o rigina lly ins tal-
- If the vehicle or the circuit interrupter is
led on your vehicle.
scrapped, all app licab le safety precautions
- Never use tire-rim combinations t hat have
must be followed .
not been approved by Audi.

® For the sake of the environment

Side airbags
Undep loyed airbag modu les and pretension -
ers might be classified as Perch lorate Materi- Description of side airbags
al - special handling may apply, see
The airbag system can provide supplemental
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlo-
protection to properly restrained occupants.
rate. When the vehicle or parts of the re-
straint system including airbag modules and
safety belts with pretensioners are scrapped,
all applicable laws and regulations must be
observed. Your authorized Audi dealer is fa-
m iliar with these requi rements and we recom-
mend t hat you have you r dealer perform this
service for you.

Other things that can affect Advanced

Airbag performance Fig. 24 2 Side airbag location in t he driver's seat

Changing the vehicle's suspension system can

The side airbags are located in the s ides of the
change the way that the Advanced Airbag System
front seat backrests ¢ fig . 242 and the rear back-
performs in a crash . For example, using tire-r im
res t * facing the doo rs.
comb inat ions not approved by Audi, lowering the
vehicle, chang ing t he st iffness of the suspens io n, The side airbags installed for the front seating
includ ing the spr ings, suspens ion str uts, shock pos itions have bee n des igned and certified to
absor bers et c. can change the forces that are help reduce the risk of inj ury that can be caused
measured by the airbag sensors and sent to the by a irbags when they inflate, pa rti cularly when
e lectronic contro l unit. Some suspension changes the occupant s itting next to it is not seated prop -
can, for example, increase the force levels meas- erly . The side airbag for the fron t passenger seat
ured by the sensors and make the airbag system can be used wit h properly installed chi ld re-
deploy in crashes in wh ich it would not deploy if straints . Please be sure to read t he important in-
the changes had not been made. Other kinds of formation and warnings whenever using a child
changes may reduce t he fo rce levels meas ured by page 265,
restra int in a vehicle: Safety belts c::>
u the sensors and prevent the airbag from deploy- Airbag system c::> page 273, Child safety
(0
...... ing when it should . c>page295 .
N
r--.
N
......
0
The side airbag system bas ically consi st s of: II>
0
:E
<t

289
Airb a g syste m

- the e lectronic contro l modu le and external side duce the likelihood of ser ious injuries, other inju-
impact sensors ries, for example, swelling, bruising, friction
- the two side airbags located in the sides of the burns and m inor abras ions can also be assoc iated
front backrests with deployed side airbags. Remember too, side
- two rear side airbags* airbags will dep loy only once and only in certa in
- the a irbag warning light in the instrument clus- kinds of acc idents - your safety belts are always
ter . there to offer protection .

The airbag system is monitored electronically to Vehicle damage, repair costs or even the lack of
make certa in that it is functioning properly at all vehicle damage are not necessar ily an ind ication
times. Each time you turn on the ignit ion, the air- of over -sens itive or fa iled airbag activat ion. In
bag system ind icator light will come on for a few some collisions, both front and side airbags may
seconds (self diagnostics). inflate . Remember too, that a irbags w ill dep loy
o nly once and on ly in certain kinds of collisions -
The side a irbag system supplements the safety
you r safety be lts are always t here to offer protec-
be lts and can help to reduce the risk of injury to
tion in those accidents in which airbags are not
the dr iver's, front and rear* passenger 's upper
supposed to deploy or when they have already
torso on the side of the vehicle that is struck in a
deployed.
side collision . The airbag dep loys only in side im-
pacts and on ly wh en the vehicle acceleration reg - The side airbag system will not deploy:
iste red by the control unit is high enough . If this
- when the ignit io n is tu rned off
rate is below the reference value programmed in-
- in side collisions when the acceleration meas-
t o the control unit, the side airbags w ill not be
ured by the sensor is too low
tr iggered , even though the car may be badly
- in front-end coll is ions
damaged as a result of the collision . It is not pos-
- in rear-end collisions
sib le to define an airbag tr igger ing range that
- in rollovers .
w ill cover every possib le ang le of impact , since
the circumstances will vary cons iderably between In some types of accidents the front ai rbags, side
one collision and another . Important factors in- curtain airbags and side airbags may be triggered
clude, for example, the nature (hard or soft) of together .
the impacting object, the angle of impact, vehicle
speed, etc. c::>page 291 , Important safety in- A WARNING
s tructions on the side airbag sys tem. - Safety belts and the airbag system will only
Aside from their normal safety function, safety provide protect ion when occupants are in
be lts work to help kee p the driver or front pas- the proper seating pos ition c::> page 291 .
senger in position in the event of a side collision page 29
- If the airbag ind icator light c::>
so that the side a irbags can provide protection . comes when the veh icle is being used, have
the system inspected immediately by your
The airbag system is not a substitute for your
author ized Audi dealer . It is possible that
safety belt . Rather , it is part of the overa ll occu -
the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
pant restraint system in your vehicle . Always re-
posed t o, or will not inflate when it should.
member that the s ide airbag system can only
help to protect you if you are wearing your safety
belt and wea ring it properly . This is another rea -
son why you should always wear your safety
be lts, not just because the law requ ires you to do
so ¢ page 265 , General information .

It is important to remember that while the sup -

plemental side a irbag system is des igned to re-

290

How supplemental side airbags work
Side airbags deploy instantly and can help re-
duce the risk of upper torso injuries for occu-
pants who are properly restrained.
Fig. 243 Inflated side airbags on left side of vehicle , rear
side airbag optiona l equipment
When the system is triggered, the airbag is filled
with propellant gas and breaks through a seam in
the seat surface area. It expands between the
side trim panel and the passenger. In order to
help provide this additional protection, the side
airbag must inflate within a fraction of a second
at very high speed and with great force. The sup-
pleme ntal side airbag could injure you if your
seating position is not proper or upright or if
items are located in the area where the supple-
mental side airbag expands. This applies espe-
cially to children~ page 295, Child safety. Sup-
plemental side airbags inflate between the occu-
pant and the door panel on the side of the vehicle
that is struck in certain side collision ~fig. 243.
Although they are not a soft pillow, they can
"cushion" the impact and in this way they can
help to reduce the risk of injury to the upper part
of the body.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys.
This is normal and does not mean there is a fire
in the vehicle .
u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
......
0
0
:E
<t
Airbag system
Important safety instructions on the side
airbag system
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always
properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper
seating position .
There is a lot that you and your passengers must
know and act accordingly to help the safety belts
and airbags do the ir job to provide supplemental
protection.
A WARNING
-
An inflating side airbag can cause serious or
fatal injury. Improperly wearing safety belts
and improper seating positions increase the
risk of ser ious personal injury and death
whenever a vehicle is being used.
- In order to reduce the risk of injury when
the supplemental side airbag inflates:
- Always sit in an upright position and never
lean against the area where the supple-
mental side airbag is located.
- Never let a child or anyone else rest their
head against the side trim panel in the
area where the supplemental side airbag
inflates.
- Always make sure that safety belts are
worn correctly,
- Do not let anyone sitting in the front seat
put their hand or any other parts of their
body out of the window.
- Always make sure that the side airbag can
inflate without interference.
- Never install seat covers or replacement
upholstery over the front seatbacks that
have not been specifically approved by
Audi.
- Never use additional seat cushions that
cover the areas where the side airbags de-
ploy.
- Damage to the original seat covers or to
the seam in the area of the side airbag
module must always be repaired immedi-
ately by an authorized Audi dealer.
- Objects between you and the airbag can in-
crease the risk of injury in an accident by in-
terfering with the way the airbag unfolds or _,.
291
Airb a g syste m

by being pushed into you as the airbag in- - Never drive when loudspeakers in the
flates. doors have been removed unless the
- Never place or attach accessories or other speaker holes have been properly closed.
objects (such as cupho lders, te lephone - Always make certain that openings are
brackets, or even large, bulky objects) on covered or filled if additional speakers or
the doors, over or near the area marked other equipment is installed in the inside
"AIRBAG"on the seat backrests. door panels.
- Such objects and accessories can become - Always have work on the doors done by an
dangerous projectiles and cause inj ury authorized Audi dealer or q ualified work-
when the supplemental side airbag de- shop.
ploys.
- Never carry any objects or pets in the de- Side curtain airbags
ployment space between them and the
airbags or allow children or other passen- Description of side curtain airbags
gers to travel in this posit ion. The side curtain airbags can provide supplemen-
- Always use the built-in coat hooks* only for tal protection to properly restrained occupants.
lightweight clothing. Never leave any heavy
or sharp-edged objects in the pockets that
may interfere w it h side airbag deployment
and can cause personal injury in an accident.
- Always prevent the side airbags from being
damaged by heavy objects knocking against
or hitting the sides of the seatbacks.
- The airbag system can only be triggered
once. If the airbag has been triggered, the
system must be replaced by an author ized
Audi dealership. Fig. 244 Side curta in airbags, driver 's side : locatio n

- Damage (cracks, deep scratches etc.) to the

orig inal seat covers or to the seam in the
area of the side a irbag mod ule m ust always
be repa ired immed iate ly by an authorized
Audi dealer .
- If children are sea t ed improperly, t heir ris k
of injury increases in t he case of an acciden t
¢ page 295, Child safety .
- Never attempt to modify any components of
the a irbag syst em in any way.
- In a side collision, side a irbags will not fu nc-
t ion properly if sensors cannot correct ly
measure increasi ng air pressure ins ide the
doo rs when air escapes through larger, un-
closed openings in the door panel.
- Never drive with inter io r door tr im panels
removed .
- Never drive when parts have been re-
moved from the inside doo r panel and the
open ings they leave have not been proper-
ly closed.
The side curtain airbags are located on both sides
of the inter ior above the front and rear side win-
dows ¢ fig. 244.
The side curtain airbags contain features that
provide ejection mitigation to help prevent vehi-
cle occupants or parts of the ir bodies from be ing
completely or part ially ejected from the vehicle
interior in certa in side impacts and vehicle roll-
ove rs.
The side curtain airbag system supplements the
safety belts and can help to reduce the risk of in-
jury for occupants' heads and upper torso in a
side collision . The s ide curtain a irbag inflates in
s ide impacts and on ly when the veh icle accelera-
tion registered by the control unit is high
eno ugh . If this rat e is be low the refere nce va lue
programmed into the contro l unit, the side cur -
tain airbag will not be triggered, even though the
car may be badly damaged as a resu lt of the ..,_

292
 Airb a g sys tem

collision . It is not possible to define an airbag The side curta in airbag is not activated:
triggering range that will cover every possible an-
- if the ignition is turned off
g le of impact, s ince the circumstances will vary
- in side collisions whe n t he acceleration meas-
considerably between one collision and another.
ured by the sensor is too low
Important factors include, for example, the na-
- in rear-end col lis ions .
ture (hard or soft) of the impacting object, the
angle of impact, vehicle speed, etc. ¢ page 293, _&.WARNING
How side curtain airbags work .
- Safety bel t s and the airbag system will only
Aside from their normal safety function, safety provide pro t ect ion when occupants are in
be lts work to he lp keep the driver or front pas- the proper seating position ¢ page 59,
senger in pos it ion in the event of a collision so Front seats.
that the side curtain airbags can provide protec- - If the airbag ind icator light q page 29
tion . comes when the veh icle is being used, have
The airbag system is not a substitute for your the system inspected immediately by your
safety belt . Rather, it is part of the overall occu- authorized Audi dealer. It is possib le that
pant restraint system in your veh icle . Always re- the airbag will inflate when it is not sup-
member that the airbag system can only help to posed to, or w ill not inf late when it should.
protect you if you are wearing your safety bel t
and wearing it properly . This is another reason How side curtain airbags work
why you should always wear your safety belts,
Side curtain airbags con work together with side
not just because the law requires you to do so
airbags to help reduce the risk of head and upper
¢ page 265, General information.
torso injuries for occupants who are properly re-
It is important to remember that whi le the s ide strained .
curtain airbag system is designed to he lp reduce
the likelihood of serious injuries, other injuries,
for example, swelling, bruising, friction burns
and minor abrasions can also be associated with
these airbags upon deployment . Remember too,
these airbags will deploy only o nce and only in
certa in kinds of acc idents -your safety belts are
always there to offer protection .

The side curtain airbag system basically

consists of:
Fig. 24 5 Illustration of principle: Inflated side curta in air-
- The electronic control module and external side bags on the left side
impact senso rs
The side curtain airbags inflate between the oc-
- The side curtain airbags above the w indows of
cupant and the windows in a side collis ion
the outer seating positions with ejection miti-
c>fig . 245 .
gation feat ures
- The airbag indicator light in the instrument When the system is triggered, the side curtain
panel airbag is filled with propellant gas and breaks
through a seam above the front and rear side
The airbag system is monitored electronically to
windows identified by the AIRBAGlabel. In order
make certain it is funct ion ing properly at all
to help provide this additional protect ion, the
~ times . Each time you turn on the ignit ion, the air-
.... side curtain a irbag must inf late w ithi n the blink
~ bag system ind icator light will come on for a few
8
0
seconds (self d iagnost ics) .
of a n eye at very high speed and with g reat fo rce .
The side curtain airbag could injure you if your Ill>
:E
<t

293
Airb a g syste m

seating position is not proper or upright or if
items are located in the area where the supp le-
mental side curtain airbag inflates. This applies
especially to children ¢ page 295.
Although they are not a soft pillow, side curtain
airbags can "cushion" the impact and in this way
they can help to reduce the risk of inj ury to the
head and the upper part of the body.
A fine dust may develop when the airbag deploys.
This is quite normal and does not mean there is a
f ire in the veh icle .
loose and cause serious injury if the side cu r-
tain airbag inflates.
- A deploying airbag inflates in a fraction of a
second and with great force.
- Never attach objects to the cover or in the
deployment zone of a side curtain airbag .
- The a irbag deployment zones must be kept
clear at all times. Make sure there are no
objects, pets, or other persons in the space
between any vehicle occupant and any air-
bag at any time.
- Do not attach any accessories to the doors.

Important safety instructions on the side

curtain airbag system
A WARNING
- The a irbag system can deploy on ly once. If
Airbags are only supplemental restraints. Always the airbag has been triggered, the system
properly wear safety belts and ride in a proper must be rep laced by an authorized Audi
seating position. dealer or qualified workshop .
- Always have work involving the side curtain
There is a lot that you and your passengers must
airbag system, remova l and installat ion of
know and do to help the safety be lts and airbags
the airbag components, or other repairs
do their job to provide supplemental protect ion.
pe rformed by a q ualified dealership. Other-
A WARNING wise the airbag system may not work cor-
rectly.
Improperly wearing safety belts and improper
- Never attempt to mod ify any componen t s of
seating posit ions increase the risk of serious
the airbag system in any way.
personal injury and death whenever a vehicle
is being used.
- Never let occupants place any parts of the ir
bodies in the area from which the side cur-
ta in a irbag inflate.
- Always make sure that the side curtain air-
bags can inflate witho ut interferen ce.
- Use the built- in coat hooks on ly for light-
weight cloth ing. Never leave any heavy or
sharp-edged obje cts in t he pockets that may
int erfere w ith airbag deployment and can
cause personal injury in a collision.
- Never use hangers to hang clothes on the
hoo ks.
- Only use factory-installed s un shades or, if
shades installed after the veh icle leaves the
factory, use only genuine Aud i sun shades.
- Never swing the sun viso rs ove r to t he side
windows if things such as pens, ga rage door
openers, hands-free speakers, etc . are at-
tached to the sun visors. They could come

294

Child safety
Important information
Introduction
The rear seat is generally the safest place in a
collision.
The physical principles of what happens when
your vehicle is in a crash apply also to children
c:>page 266, What happens to occupants not
wearing safety belts? . But unlike adults and
teenagers, their muscles and bones are not fully
developed. In many respects children are at
greater risk of serious injury in crashes than
adults .
Because children's bodies are not fu lly devel-
oped, they requ ire restraint systems especially
designed for their size, we ight , and body struc-
ture. Many countr ies and all states of the United
States and provinces of Canada have laws requir-
ing the use of approved child restraint systems
for infants and small children .
In a frontal crash at a speed of 20 - 35 mph (30 -
56 km/h) the forces acting on a 13-pound (6 kg)
infant will be more than 20 times the weight of
the child . This means the weight of the child
would suddenly be more than 260 pounds
(120 kg). Under these conditions, only an appro-
priate child restraint properly used can reduce
the risk of serious injury. Child restra ints, like
adult safety belts, must be used properly to be
effect ive. Used improperly, they can increase the
risk of serious injury in an accident .
All children, especially those 12 years and young-
er must always ride in the back seat proper ly re-
strained for their age and size. If you must install
a child restraint on the front passenger seat in
exceptional circumstances, be sure to read and
heed the important information and warnings
c:>page 274. Infants and other children who are
properly restrained in an appropriate child re-
straint that is for their size and age can benefit
from the protection that supplemental side air-
~ bags provide in some kinds of crashes.
......
N
r-...
N
...... For more information please see information
8 provided by the:
:E:
'<t
Child safety
- National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA),currently at: http :/ /www.safe -
rcar.gov (for the USA)
- Transport Canada Information Centre, current-
ly at: http://www.tc .gc.ca (for Canada)
Consult the child safety seat manufacturer's in-
structions in order to be sure the seat is right for
your child's size c:>page 299 , Important safety
instructions for using child safety seats . Please
be sure to read and heed all of the important in-
formation and WARNINGSabout child safety,
Advanced Airbags, and the installation of child
restra ints in this chapter .
There is a lot you need to know about the Ad-
vanced Airbags in your vehicle and how they work
when infants and children in child restraints are
on the front passenger seat . Because of the large
amount of important informat ion, we cannot re-
peat it all here. We urge you to read the detailed
information in this owner's manual about airbags
and the Advanced Airbag System in your vehicle
and the very important information about trans-
porting children on the front passenger seat.
Please be sure to heed the WARNINGS- they are
extremely important for your safety and the safe-
ty of your passengers, especially infants and
small children .
A
- WARNING
- Accident statistics have shown that children
are generally safer in the rear seat area than
in the front seat ing pos ition . Always restrain
any child age 12 and under in the rear.
- All vehicle occupants and especially children
must be restrained properly whenever riding
in a vehicle. An unrestrained or imp roperly
rest rained child could be injured by striking
the interior or by being ejected from the ve-
hicle during a sudden maneuver or impact.
An unrestrained or improperly restrained
child is also at greater risk of injury or death
through contact with an inflating airbag.
- A suitable child restraint properly installed
and used at one of the rear seating positions
provides the highest degree of protect ion
for infants and small children in most acci-
dent situat ions .
295
Ch ild s afet y
A WARNING
Children on the front seat of any car even with
Advanced Airbags can be seriously injured or
even killed when an airbag inflates. A child in
a rearward-facing child safety seat installed
on the front passenger seat will be serious ly
injured and can be killed if the front a irbag in-
flates .
- The inflating a irbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and
will smash the chi ld safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, or
doo r.
- Always install rear-facing child safety seats
on the rear seat.
- If you must install a rearward fac ing ch ild
safety seat on the front passenger seat in
exceptional circumstances and the PASSEN-
GERAIR BAGOFF~; light does not come
on and stay on, immediately install the rear -
facing child safety seat in a rear seating po-
sition and have the airbag system inspected
immediately by your Audi dealer.
A WARNING
- Forward-facing chi ld seats installed on the
front passenger seat may interfere with the
deployment of the a irbag and cause serious
personal injury to the child .
- If except ional circumstances require the use
of a forward -facing child restraint on the
front passenger's seat , the child's safety
and well-being require the following special
precautions to be taken:
- Always make sure that the forward-facing
seat has been designed and certified by its
manufacturer for use on a front passenger
seat with a front and s ide a irbag.
-Always carefully follow the manufacturer's
instructions provided with the child seat
or infant carrier.
- Never install a child restraint without a
properly attached top tether strap if the
child restraint manufacturer 's instructions
require the top tether strap to be used.
296
- Never put the forward-fac ing child re-
straint up against or very near the instru-
ment panel.
- Always set the safety belt upper anchor-
age to the adjustment position that per-
mits proper installation in accordance
with the child restraint manufacturer's in-
structions .
- Always move the front passenger seat to
the highest position in the up and down
adjustment range and move it back to the
rearmos t position in the seat's fore and
aft adj ustmen t range, as far away from
the airbag as possible, before installing
the forward-facing child restraint .
- Always make sure that the safety belt up-
per anchorage is behind the chi ld restraint
and not next to or in front of the child re-
straint so that the safety belt will be prop-
erly pos itioned.
- Always make sure that nothing prevents
the front passenger's seat from being
moved to the rearmost position in its fore
and aft adjustment range.
- Never place objects on the seat (such as a
laptop, CD player, electronic games de-
vice, power inverter or seat heater for
ch ild seats) . These may influence the elec -
trical capacitance measured by the capaci-
tive passenger detection system and can
also fly a round in an accident and cause
serious personal injury.
- Never place or use any elect rical device
(such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heat-
er for child seats) on the front passenger
seat if the device is connected to the 12-
volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket .
- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or
otherwise added to the front passenger
seat, never install any child restraint sys-
tem on this seat.
- Make sure that there are no wet objects
(such as a wet towel) and no water or oth-
er liquids on the front passenger seat
cush ion .
- Always make sure that the PASSENGER
AIR BAGOFF~; light comes on and stays

on all the time whenever the ignition is
switched on.
- If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF~. light
does not come on and stay on, immediate-
ly install the forward-facing child seat in a
rear seating position and have the airbag
system inspected by your authorized Aud i
dealer.
- Always buckle the child seat firmly in
p lace even if a ch ild is not sitt ing in it. A
loose child seat can fly around during a
sudden stop o r in a collision.
-Always read and heed all WARNINGS
whenever us ing a child restraint in a vehi-
cle ~ page 265, Safety belts, ~ page 2 73,
Airbag system and ~ page 295, Impor-
tant information .
@ Tips
Always replace ch ild restraints that were in-
stalled in a vehicle dur ing a crash. Damage to
a child restraint that is not visib le could cause
it to fail in anothe r collision situation .
Advanced front airbag system and children
Your vehicle is equipped with an "Advanced Air-
bag System" in compliance with United States
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS)
208, as well as Canada Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (CMVSS) 208 as applicable at the time
your veh icle was manufactured.
The Advanced Airbag system in your vehicle has
been certified to meet the "low-risk" require-
ments for 3- and 6-year old children on the pas-
senger side and small adults on the driver side.
The low risk deployment crite ria are intended to
reduce the risk of injury through inte raction with
the airbag that can occur, for examp le, by being
too close to the steering whee l and instrument
panel when the airbag inflates . In addition, the
system has been certified to comply with the
"suppression" req uirements of the Safety Stand-
ard, to turn off the front airbag for infants up to
u
co 12 months who are restra ined on the front pas-
......
N
r-... senger seat in child restraints that are listed in
N
...... the Standard .
0
0
:E:
'<t
Ch ild safety
Even though your vehicle is equipped with an Ad-
vanced Airbag system, all chi ldren, especially
those 12 years and younger, should always ride
in the back seat properly restrained for their age
and size. The airbag on the passenger side makes
the front seat a potentia lly dangerous place for a
child to ride . The front seat is not the safest place
for a ch ild in a forward-fac ing ch ild safety seat . It
can be a very dangerous place fo r an infant or a
la rger ch ild in a rea rwa rd-facing seat .
The veh icle 's Advanced Airbag System has a ca-
pacit ive passenger detection system in the front
passenge r seat cushion that can detect the pres-
ence of a baby or a ch ild in a child restra int sys-
tem on this seat .
The capacitive passenger detection system reg is-
te rs the changes that result in an electrical field
when a child, a ch ild restraint, and a baby blan ket
are on the front passenger seat. The change in
the measured capacitance due to the presence of
a chi ld, a child restraint, and a baby blanket on
the front passenger seat is related to the child
restra int system resting on the seat. The meas-
ured capacitance of a child restraint system var-
ies depend ing on the type of system and specific
make and model.
The electrical capac itance of the various types,
makes, and models of child restraints specif ied
by the U.S.National Highway Traff ic Safety Ad-
min istrat ion (NHTSA) in the relevant safety
standard are stored in the Advanced Airbag Sys-
tem contro l unit together with the capacitances
typ ica l of infants and a 1-year old child. When a
child restraint is used on the front passenger
seat with a typical 1 year-old infant, the Ad-
vanced Airbag System compares the capacitance
measured by the capacitive passenger detection
system with the data stored in the electronic con-
trol unit .
Child restraints and Advanced Airbags
Regardless of the ch ild restraint that you use,
make sure that it has been certified to meet Safe-
ty Standards and has been ce rt ified by its manu-
fact ur er for use w ith an airbag . Always be su re
that the child restraint is properly installed at llo-
297
Ch ild s afet y

one of the rear seating posit ions . If in exception - Subpart B - Rear-facing child rest raints
al circumstances you must use it on the front
Model Manufactured on or
passenger seat, carefully read all of the informa-
after
tion on child safety and Advanced Airbags and
heed a ll of the app licab le WARNINGS. Make cer- Century SmartFit 4543 December 1, 1999
tain that the child and child restraint are correct- Cosco Arriva September 25, 2007
ly recogn ized by the capacit ive passenger detec- 22-013PAW and base
tion system in the front passenge r seat, that the 22-999WHO
fron t passenger airbag is turned off, and that the Evenflo Discovery Ad- December 1, 1999
a irbag status is always cor rectly sig naled by the just Right 212
PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF~; light. Evenflo First Choice December 1, 1999
Many types and models of child rest raints have 204
been available ove r the yea rs, new models are in- Graco Infant 8457 December 1, 1999
troduced regularly incorporat ing new and im- Graco Snugr ide September 25, 2007
proved designs and older mode ls are taken out of
Peg Perego Primo Viag- September 25, 2007
product ion . Child restraints a re not standardized .
g io SIP IMUNOOUS
Child rest raints of the same type typica lly have
d ifferent weights and sizes and d ifferent "foot- Subpart C - Forward-facing and convertible
prints", the s ize and shape of the bottom of the child restraints
chi ld restraint that s its on the seat, when they
Model Manufactured on or
are installed on a vehicle seat . These differences
after
make it virtually impossible to certify compliance
with the requ irements fo r advanced airbags with Britax Roundabout September 25, 2007
each and eve ry ch ild rest raint t hat has ever been E9L02xx
sold in the past or will be sold ove r the course of Cosco Touriva 025 19 December 1, 1999
the useful life of your vehicle. Cosco Summit Deluxe September 25, 2007
For this reason, the United States National High- High Back Booster
way Traffi c Safety Administ ration has published a 22-262
list of specific type, makes a nd models of child Cosco High Back Boos - September 25, 2007
restraints that must be used to cert ify comp li- ter 22 -209
ance of the Advanced Airbag System in your vehi- Evenflo Tribute V September 25, 2007
cle with the suppression requirements of Federal 379xxxx
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. These child
Evenflo Meda llion 254 December 1, 1999
restraints are:
Evenflo Generat ions September 25, 200 7
Subpart A - Car bed child restraints 35 2xxxx
Graco ComfortSport September 25, 2007
Model Manufactured on or
after Graco Todd le r Safety September 25, 200 7
Ange l Guard Angel September 25, 2007 Seat Step 2
Ride AA2403FOF Graco Plat inum Cargo September 25, 2007

A WARNING
To redu ce t he ris k of serious injury, ma ke sure
that the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF,;; light
comes on and stays on whenever a child re-
straint is installed on the front passenger seat
and the ignition is switched on . ~

298

- Take the child restraint off the front passen-
ger seat and install it properly at one of the
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF~; light does not stay on .
- Have the airbag system inspected by your
authorized Audi dealer immediately .
The child seats listed in categories A to C have
been statically tested by Audi only for the Ad-
vanced Airbag function.
Important safety instructions for using
child safety seats
Correct use of child safety sea ts substan tially re-
duces the risk of injury in an accident!
As the driver, you are responsible for the safety
of everybody in the vehicle, especially children:
~ Always use the right child safety seat for each
child and a lways use it properly ~ page 301.
~ Always carefully follow the child safety seat
manufacturer 's instructions on how to route
the safety belt properly through the child safe-
ty seat .
~ When using the vehicle safety be lt to install a
child safety seat , you must first activate the
convertible locking retractor on the safety be lt
to prevent the child safety seat from moving
¢ page 306.
~ Push the child safety seat down with your fu ll
weight to get the safety be lt really tight so that
the seat cannot move forward or sideways
more t han one inch (2.5 cm).
~ Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat
¢ page 301 .
Always remember: Even though your vehicle is
equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all
children, especially those 12 years and younger,
should always ride in the back seat properly re-
stra ined fo r their age and size.
_& WARNING
~ Not using a ch ild safety seat, using the wrong
~ child safety seat or improper ly installing a
....
N
0
0
:E:
'<t
Ch ild safety
child restraint increases the risk of serious
personal injury and death.
- All vehicle occupants and especially children
must be restrained properly whenever riding
in a vehicle. An unrestra ined or improperly
restrained child could be injured by striking
the inter ior or by being ejected from the ve-
hicle dur ing a sudden maneuve r or impact .
An unrest rained or improperly restrained
child is a lso at greater ris k of injury or death
through contact with an inflating a irbag.
- Commerc ially availab le child safe ty seats
are requi red to comply with U.S. Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 213
(in Canada CMVSS213).
- When buying a child restra int, select one
that fits your ch ild and the vehicle .
- Only use child restraint systems that fully
contact the flat portion of the seat cush-
ion. The ch ild restraint must not t ip or
lean to either side . Audi does not recom-
mend using child safety seats that rest on
legs or tube-like frames. They do not pro-
vide adequate contact with the seat.
- Always heed all lega l requirements per-
ta ining to the insta llation and use of child
safety seats and carefu lly follow the in-
structions provided by the manufacturer
of the seat you are using .
- Never a llow children under 57 inches
(1.45 mete rs) to wear a normal safety be lt.
They must a lways be restrained by a proper
child restraint system. Otherwise, they
could sustain injuries to the abdomen and
neck areas during sudden braking maneu-
vers or accidents .
- Never let more than one child occupy a child
safety seat.
- Never let babies or older children ride in a
vehicle while sitting on the lap of another
passenger .
- Holding a child in your arms is never a sub-
stitute for a chi ld restrain t system .
- The strongest person cou ld not ho ld the
child with the forces that exist in an acci-
dent. The child will strike the interior of
the vehicle and can also be struck by the
passenger.
299
Child safety
- The child and the passenger can also in-
jure each other in an accident.
- Never install rear-facing child safety seats
or infant carriers on the front passenger
seat. A child will be seriously injured and
can be killed when the passenger airbag in-
flates - even with an Advanced Airbag Sys-
tem.
- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and
will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
or roof.
- Always install rear-facing child safety seats
or infant carriers on the rear seat.
- Make sure there is enough space in front of
the child in the child seat. If necessary, ad-
just the angle and position of the seat in
front of the child seat.
- Forward-facing child safety seats installed
on the front passenger's seat can interfere
with the airbag when it inflates and cause
serious injury to the child. Always install for-
ward-facing child safety seats on the rear
seat.
- If exceptional circumstances require the use
of a forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger's seat, the child's safety
and well-being require that the following
special precautions be taken:
- Make sure the forward-facing seat has
been designed and certified by its manu-
facturer for use on a front seat with a pas-
senger front and side airbag.
- Always carefully follow the manufacturer's
instructions provided with the child safety
seat or carrier.
- Always move the front passenger seat to
the highest position in the up and down
adjustment range and move it back to the
rearmost position in the seat's fore and
aft adjustment range, as far away from
the airbag as possible, before installing
the forward-facing child restraint .
- Always make sure that the safety belt up-
per anchorage is behind the child restraint
and not next to or in front of the child re-
300
straint so that the safety belt will be prop-
erly positioned.
- Always make sure that nothing prevents
the front passenger's seat from being
moved to the rearmost position in its fore
and aft adjustment range.
-Always make sure that the backrest is in
the upright position.
- Never place or use any electrical device
(such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heat-
er for child seats) on the front passenger
seat if the device is connected to the 12-
volt socket or the cigarette lighter socket.
- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or
otherwise added to the front passenger
seat, never install any child restraint sys-
tem on this seat.
- Make sure that there are no wet objects
(such as a wet towel) and no water or oth-
er liquids on the front passenger seat
cushion.
- Never place objects on the seat (such as a
laptop, CD player, electronic games de-
vice, power inverter or seat heater for
child seats). These may influence the elec-
trical capacitance measured by the capaci-
tive passenger detection system and can
also fly around in an accident and cause
serious personal injury.
- Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in
place even if a child is not sitting in it. A
loose child safety seat can fly around during
a sudden stop or in a collision .
- Always read and heed all WARNINGS when-
ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
being used <::;>page 265, Safety belts,
r:::;,page273, Airbag system and
r:::;,
page 295, Child safety.
.8. WARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury, make sure
that the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 11,;; light
comes on and stays on whenever a child re-
straint is installed on the front passenger seat
and the ign ition is switched on. .,_

- Take the child restraint off the front passen-
ger seat and install it properly at one of the
rear seat positions if the PASSENGERAIR
BAG OFF ~; light does not stay on .
- Have the airbag system inspected by your
authorized Audi dealer immediately.
Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat
Fig. 246 Schema tic overview: keep unuse d s-afety belts
away from children in child safety seats . @ · oute r rear
sa fety belt, @ - cen te r rea r safety bel t
If a child safety seat is used on the rear bench,
especia lly with LATCH universal lower anchorag-
es, the unused safety belts must be secured so
that the child in the child restraint cannot reach
them c::>,& .
- Guide the safety belt webbings @ and @ be-
hind the head restra int of the seat where the
child restraint is installed c::>fig. 246 . When do-
ing so, do not engage the convertible lock ing
retractor! You should not hear a "clicking"
sound when winding up the safety belt.
- Let the belt retractor wind up the safety belt
webbing .
A WARNING
A child in a child safety seat installed with the
LATCHlower anchorages or with the standard
safety belt or a child in a booste r seat on the
rear seat could play with unused rear seat
safety belts and become entangled. This
cou ld cause the child serious personal injury
and even death.
u - Always secure unused rear seat safety belts
(0
...... out of reach of childr en in child seats such
N
r--.
N
...... as by proper ly routing them aro und the
0
0
:E
<t
Child safety
head restraint of the seat where the child
restraint is installed .
- Never activate the convertible locking re-
tractor when routing the safety belts around
the head restraints.
- Never let anyone s it at the center rear seat-
ing position if the center rear safety belt has
been routed around a rear head restraint.
Child safety seats
Infant seats
Babies and infants up to about one year old and
20 lbs. or 9 kg need special rearward-facing
child restraints that support the back, neck and
head in a crash.
Fig. 247 Sche matic overview: rearw a rd-facing infan t seat ,
proper ly installed on the rear seat
., When using the vehicle safety belt to install a
child safety seat, you must first activate the
convertib le locking retractor on the safety belt
to prevent the child safety seat from moving
page 306 or install the seat using the LATCH
c::>
attachments .
.. Push the child safety seat down with your full
weight to get the safe t y belt really tight so that
the seat cannot move forward or sideways
more than one inch (2 .5 cm) .
., Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat
c::>
page301.
Infants up to about one year (20 lbs . or 9 kg) are
best protected in special infant carriers and child
safety seats designed for the ir age group. Many
expe rt s be lieve that infants and small children
shou ld ride only in special res t ra ints in wh ich the
child faces the back of the vehicle. These infant ..,.
301
Child safety

seats support the baby's back, neck and head in a - If a seat heater has been retrofitted or oth-
crash ¢ fig. 247 . erwise added to the front passenger seat,
The airbag on the passenger side makes the front never install any child restraint system on
seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to this seat .
ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a - Make sure that there are no wet objects
child in a forward-facing child seat. It is a very (such as a wet towel) and no water or other
dangerous place for an infant or a larger child in liquids on the front passenger seat cushion.
a rearward-facing seat . - Never place objects on the seat (such as a
laptop, CD player, electronic games device,
A WARNING power inverter or seat heater for child
seats) . These may influence the electrical
Not using a child safety seat, using the wrong
capacitance measured by the capacitive pas-
child safety seat or improperly installing a
senger detection system and can also fly
child restraint increases the risk of serious
around in an accident and cause serious per-
personal injury and death in a crash.
sonal injury.
- Never install rear -facing child safety seats
- Always read and heed all WARNINGS when-
or infant carriers on the front passenger
ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
seat - even with an Advanced Airbag Sys-
being used ¢ page 265, Safety belts,
tem . A child will be seriously injured and can
¢ page 2 73, Airbag system and
be killed when the inflating airbag hits the
c>page 295, Important information.
child safety seat or infant carrier with great
force and smashes the child safety seat and
child against the backrest, center armrest,
door or roof <=>page 2 74, Child restraints on
the front seat - some important things to
know .
- Always install rear-facing child safety seats
or infant carriers on the rear seat.
- Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the forward-facing direction. Such restraints
are designed for the special needs of infants
and very small children and cannot protect
them properly if the seat is forward-facing .
- If you must install a rearward facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
cause of exceptional circumstances and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF~; light does not
come on and stay on, immediately install
the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear
seating position and have the airbag system
inspected by your Audi dealer.
- Never place or use any electrical device
(such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heater
for child seats) on the front passenger seat
if the device is connected to the 12-volt
socket or the cigarette lighter socket.

302

Convertible child safety seats
Properly used convertible child safety seats can
help protect toddlers and children over age one
who weigh between 20 and 40 lbs. (9 and 18 kg)
in a crash.
Fig. 248 Schemat ic overview: installatio n of the attac h-
ments app licable to a LATCH seat
Fig. 249 Schematic overview: installat ion of t he seat using
the vehicle's safe ty belt syste m
.. When using the vehicle safety belt to install a
child safety seat, you must first activate the
convertible locking retractor on the safety belt
to prevent the child safety seat from moving
Q page 306 or install the seat us ing the LATC
attachments .
.. Push the child safety seat down with your fu ll
weight to get the safety be lt really tight so that
the seat cannot move forward o r sideways
more than one inch (2.5 cm) Q page 306.
.. If the child safety seat is equipped with a tether
strap, attach it to the tether anchors
Q page 312.
.. Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat
Q page 301 .
~ A toddler or child is usually too large for an in-
~ fant restraint if it is more than one year old and
8
0
weighs more than 20 lbs . (9 kg).
:E
<t
Child safety
Toddlers and children who are older than one
year up to about 4 years old and weigh more than
20 lbs. (9 kg) up to 40 lbs . (18 kg) must always
be properly restrained in a child safety seat certi -
fied for their size and weight Q fig . 248 and
q fig . 249.
The airbag on the passenger side makes the front
seat a potentially dangerous place for a child to
ride. The front seat is not the safest place for a
child in a forward -facing child safety seat. It is a
very dangerous place for an infant or a larger
child in a rearward-facing seat .
_&.WARNING
Not using a child safety seat, us ing the wrong
child safety seat or imprope rly instal ling a
child restraint increases the risk of serious
personal injury and death in a collision or oth -
er emergency situation.
- Children on the front seat of any car, even
with Advanced Airbags, can be seriously in-
jured or even killed when an airbag inflates.
A child in a rearward-facing ch ild safety seat
installed on the front passenger seat will be
seriously injured and can be killed if the
front airbag inflates - even with an Ad-
vanced Airbag System .
- The inflating airbag will hit the ch ild safety
seat or infant carr ier with great force and
will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
or roof.
-Al ways install rear-fa cing child safety seats
H
on the rear seat .
- If you must insta ll a rearward facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
cause of excep t ional circumstances and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF '-I; light does not
come on and stay on, immediately insta ll
the rear-facing child safety seat in a rear
seating position and have the a irbag system
inspected by your Audi dealer .
- The rear side of the ch ild safety seat shou ld
be positioned as close as possible to the
backrest on the veh icle seat. Adjust or re-
move the rear seat head rest raint if it is dif-
f icult to install the ch ild seat with the head ~
303
Child safety
restraint in place ~ page 63. Install the
head restraint again immediately once the
child seat is removed. Driving without head
restraints or with head restraints that are
not properly adjusted increases the risk of
serious or fatal neck injury dramatically .
- Always read and heed all WARNINGS when -
ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
being used ~ page 265, Safety belts,
~ page 2 73, Airbag system and
~ page 295, Important information.
_& WARNING
If exceptional circumstances require the use
of a forward-facing child restraint on the
front passenger's seat , the child's safety and
well-being require that the following special
precautions be taken:
- Make sure the forward-facing seat has been
designed and certified by its manufacturer
for use on a front seat with a passenger
front and side airbag.
- Always follow the manufacturer 's instruc-
tions provided with the child safety seat or
infant carrier.
- Always move the front passenger seat to
the highest position in the up and down ad-
justment range and move it back to the
rearmost position in the seat's fore and aft
adjustment range, as far away from the air-
bag as possible, before installing the for-
ward-facing child restraint.
- Always make sure that the safety belt upper
anchorage is behind the child restraint and
not next to or in front of the child restraint
so that the safety belt will be properly posi-
tioned.
- Always make sure that nothing prevents the
front passenger's seat from being moved to
the rearmost position in its fore and aft ad-
justment range.
- Always make sure the backrest is in an up-
right position.
- Never place or use any electrical device
(such as a laptop, CD player, electronic
games device, power inverter or seat heater
for child seats) on the front passenger seat
304
if the device is connected to the 12-volt
socket or the cigarette lighter socket.
- If a seat heater has been retrofitted or oth-
erwise added to the front passenger seat,
never install any child restraint system on
this seat.
- Make sure that there are no wet objects
(such as a wet towel) and no water or other
liquids on the front passenger seat cushion .
- Never place objects on the seat (such as a
laptop, CD player, electronic games device,
power inverter or seat heater for child
seats) . These may influence the electrical
capacitance measured by the capacitive pas-
senger detect ion system and can also fly
around in an accident and cause serious per-
sonal injury.
- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF 11,;;light comes on and stays on all the
time whenever the ignition is switched on.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF 11,;; light
does not come on and stay on, immediately
install the forward-facing child seat at a
seating position on the rear seat and have
the airbag system inspected by your author-
ized Audi dealer.
- Take the child restraint off the front passen-
ger seat and install it properly at one of the
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF 11,;; light does not stay on whenever
the ignition is switched on .

Booster seats and safety belts
Properly used booster seats can help protect
children weighing between about 40 lbs. and
80 lbs . (18 kg and 36 kg) who are less than 4 ft.
9 in . (57 inches/1.45 meters) tall.
Fig. 250 Rear seat; child proper ly restrained in a booster
seat
The vehicle's safety belts alone will not fit most
children until they are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 in-
ches/1.45 meters) tall and weigh about 80 lbs.
(36 kg). Booster seats raise these ch ildren up so
that the safety belt will pass properly over the
stronger parts of their bodies and the safety belt
can help protect them in a crash.
.,.Do not use the convertible locking retractor
when using the vehicle's safety belt to restrain
a child on a booster seat .
.. The shoulder belt must lie as close to the cen-
ter of the child's collar bone as possible and
must lie fla t and snug on the upper body. It
must never lie across the throat or neck . The
lap belt must lie across the pelvis and never
across the stomach or abdomen . Make sure the
belt lies flat and snug. Pull on th e belt to tight-
en if necessary .
.,.If you must transport an older child in a boos-
ter seat on the front passenger seat , you can
use the safety belt height adjustment to help
adjust the shoulder portion properly .
.. Secure unused safety belts on the rear seat
r:=>
page 301.
Children up to at least 8 years old (over 40 lbs. or
18 kg) are best protected in child safety seats de-
u poss ible. By keeping room between the child's
~ signed for their age and we ight. Experts say t hat
N
~ the skeletal structure , part icularly the pelvis , of
g these children is not fully developed, and they
:E
<t
Child safety
must not use the vehicle safety belts without a
suitable child restraint .
It is usually best to put these children in appro-
priate booster seats. Be su re the booster seat
meets all applicab le safety standards .
Booster seats raise the seating position of the
child and reposition both th e lap and shoulder
parts of the safety belt so that they pass across
the child's body in the right places. The routing of
the belt over the child's body is very important
for the ch ild's protection, whether or not a boos-
ter seat is used . Children age 12 and under must
always ride in the rear seat.
Childr e n who are at least 4 ft. 9 in. (57 inches/
1.45 meters) tall can generally use the vehicle 's
three point lap and shoulder belts . Never use the
lap belt portion of the vehicle 's safety belt alone
to restrain any ch ild, regard less of how big the
child is. Always remember that ch ildren do not
have the pronounced pelvic str ucture required for
the proper function of lap be lt portion of the ve-
hicle's three point lap and shoulde r belts . The
child's safety absolutely requires that a lap belt
portion of the safety belt be fastened snugly and
as low as possible around the pe lvis. Never let
the lap belt portion of the safety belt pass over
the child 's stomach or abdomen .
In a crash, airbags must inflate within a blink of
an eye and with considerab le force. In order to do
its job, the airbag needs room to inflate so that it
will be there to protect t he occupant as the occu-
pan t moves forward into t he airbag .
A vehicle occup ant who is out of position and too
close to the a irbag gets in the way of an inflating
airbag. When an occupant is too close , he or she
will be struck violently and will receive serious or
possibly even fata l injury.
In order for the airbag to offer protection, it is
important that all vehicle occupants, especially
any children, who must be in the front seat be-
cause of exceptiona l circumstances, be properly
restrained and as far away from the airbag as
..,.
305
Child safety
body and the front of the passenger compart-
ment, the airbag can inflate completely and pro-
vide supplemental protection in certain frontal
collisions.
.,&.WARNING
Not using a booster seat, using the booster
seat improperly, incorrectly installing a boos-
ter seat or using the vehicle safety belt im-
properly increases the risk of serious personal
injury and death in a collision or other emer-
gency situation. To help reduce the risk of se-
rious personal injury and/or death:
- The shoulder belt must lie as close to the
center of the child's collar bone as possible
and must lie flat and snug on the upper
body. It must never lie across the throat or
neck. The lap belt must lie across the pelvis
and never across the stomach or abdomen .
Make sure the belt lies flat and snug. Pull on
the belt to tighten if necessary .
- Failure to properly route safety belts over a
child's body will cause severe injuries in an
accident or other emergency situation
¢ page 265.
- The rear side of the child safety seat should
be positioned as close as possible to the
backrest on the vehicle seat . Adjust or re-
move the rear seat head restraint if it is dif-
ficult to install the child seat with the head
restraint in place ¢page 63. Install the
head restraint again immediately once the
child seat is removed. Driving without head
restraints or with head restraints that are
not properly adjusted increases the risk of
serious or fatal neck injury dramatically.
- Never let a child put the shoulder belt under
the arm or behind the back, because it could
cause severe injuries in a crash.
- Children on the front seat of any car, even
with Advanced Airbags, can be seriously in-
jured or even killed when an airbag inflates .
- Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat,
for example the front seat.
- Never let a child ride in the cargo area of
your vehicle.
- Always remember that a child leaning for-
ward, sitting sideways or out of position in
306
any way during an accident can be struck by
a deploying airbag. This will result in serious
personal injury or death .
- If you must install a booster seat on the
front passenger seat because of exceptional
circumstances the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF fj,;;light must come on and stay on,
whenever the ignition is switched on.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF fj,;;light
does not come on and stay on, perform the
checks described ¢ page 285, Monitoring
the Advanced Airbag System.
- Take the child restraint off the front passen-
ger seat and install it properly at one of the
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF~; light does not stay on whenever
the ignition is switched on.
- Always read and heed all WARNINGSwhen-
ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
being used ¢ page 265, Safety belts,
¢ page 273, Airbag system and
¢ page 295, Important information.
Securing child safety
seats
Securing a child safety seat using a safety
belt
Safety belts for the rear seats and the front pas-
senger can be locked with the convertible locking
retractor to properly secure child safety seats.
The safety belts for the rear seats and for the
front passenger's seat have a convertible locking
retractor for child safety seats. The safety belt
must be locked so that belt webbing cannot un-
reel. The retractor can be activated to lock the
safety belt and prevent the safety belt webbing
from loosening up during normal driving . A child
safety seat can only be properly installed when
the safety belt is locked so that the child and
child safety seat will stay in place.
Always remember : Even though your vehicle is
equipped with an Advanced Airbag system, all
children, especially those 12 years and younger,
should always ride in the back seat properly re-
strained for their age and size. ll-

A WARNING
-
Improperly installed chi ld safety seats in-
crease the risk of serious personal injury and
death in a collision.
- Always make sure that the safety belt re-
tractor is locked when installing a child
safety seat. An unlocked safety belt retrac-
tor cannot hold the child safety seat in place
during normal driving or in a crash.
-Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in
place even if a child is not sitting in it. A
loose child safety seat can fly around during
a sudden stop or in a collision .
- Always make sure that the rear seat back-
rest to which the center rear safety belt* is
attached is securely latched whenever the
rear center safety belt is being used to se-
cure a ch ild restraint .
- If the backrest is not securely latched, the
child and the child restraint will be thrown
forward together w ith the backrest and will
strike parts of the vehicle interior. The ch ild
can be se riously injured or killed .
- Never ins t all rear-facing child safety seats
or infant carriers on the front passenger
seat . A child will be serious ly injured and
can be killed when the passenger airbag in-
flates.
- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and
will smash the ch ild safety seat and chi ld
against the backrest, center armrest, door
or roof .
- Always install rear-facing child safety seats
or infant carriers on the rear seat.
- Forward-fac ing ch ild safety seats or infant
carriers installed on the front passenger's
seat may interfere with the deployment of
the a irbag and cause serious injury to the
child .
- It is safer to install a forward -fac ing ch ild
safety seat on the rear seat .
- Always read and heed all WARNINGS when-
ever using a child restrained in a veh icle is
u
co being used ~ page 295 . Spec ia l precaut ions
......
N
r-...
N
apply when installing a child safety seat on
......
0
0
the front passenger seat ~ page 2 74, Child
:E:
'<t
Ch ild safety
restraints an the front seat - some impor-
tant things to know.
A
- WARNING
Always take special precautions if you must
install a forward or rearward-facing child re-
-
stra int on the front passenger's seat in excep -
tional situations:
- Whenever a forward or rearward-fac ing
child restraint is installed on the front pas -
senger seat, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
~; light must come on and stay on whenev-
er the ign ition is switched o n .
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; light
does not come on and stay on, perform the
checks desc ribed ~ page 285, Monitoring
the Advanced Airbag System.
- Take the child restra int off the front passen-
ge r seat and install it prope rly at one of the
rear seat positions if the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF ~ ; light does not stay on whenever
the ignition is switched on .
- Improper installat ion of child res t ra ints can
reducetheir effectivenessor evenprevent
them f rom providing any protect ion .
- An improperly installed child restraint can
interfere with the airbag as it deploys and
serious ly injure or even kill the chi ld.
- Always carefully follow the manufacturer's
instr uctions provided with the child safety
seat or carr ier .
- After checking to make sure that the child
restraint is properly installed, make certain
that the child restraint is correctly recog-
nized by the capacitive passenger detection
system in the front passenger seat and that
the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ~; light sig-
na ls the cor rect front passenger fronta l air-
bag status.
A WARNING
Forwa rd-facing child restra ints:
- Always make sure the forward-facing seat
has bee n des igned and certified by its man-
ufa cture r for use on a fron t sea t with a pas-
senger front and side airbag.
307
Child safety
- Never put the forward-facing child restraint
up, against or very near the instrument pan-
el.
- Always move the front passenger seat to
the highest position in the up and down ad-
justment range and move it back to the
rearmost position in the seat's fore and aft
adjustment range, as far away from the air-
bag as possible, before installing the for-
ward-facing child restraint.
- Always make sure that the safety belt upper
anchorage is behind the child restraint and
not next to or in front of the child restraint
so that the safety belt will be properly posi-
tioned.
- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF~ ; light comes on and stays on all the
time whenever the ignition is switched on.
A WARNING
Rearward-facing child restraints:
- A child in a rearward-facing child safety seat
installed on the front passenger seat will be
seriously injured and can be killed if the
front airbag inflates - even with an Ad-
vanced Airbag System.
- The inflating airbag will hit the child safety
seat or infant carrier with great force and
will smash the child safety seat and child
against the backrest, center armrest, door
or roof .
- Always be especially careful if you must in-
stall a rearward facing child safety seat on
the front passenger seat in exceptional cir-
cumstances .
- Make sure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG
OFF~; light comes on and stays on all the
time whenever the ignition is switched on.
- If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF~; light
does not come on and stay on, immediately
install the rear-facing child safety seat in a
rear seating position and have the airbag
system inspected by your Audi dealer .
308
· Activating the convertible locking retractor
Use the convertible locking retractor to secure a
child restraint.
Always heed the child safety seat manufacturer 's
instructions when installing a child restrain t in
your vehicle . To activate the convertible locking
retractor:
.. Place the child restraint on a seat, preferably
on the rear seat .
.. Slowly pull the belt all the way out .
.. Route it around or through the child restraint
belt path ~ ,&..
.. Push the child safety seat down with your full
weight to get the safety belt really tight.
.. Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that
seating position.
.. Guide the safety belt back into the retractor un-
til the belt lies flat and snug on the child safety
seat.
.. You should hear a "clicking" noise as the belt
winds back into the inertia reel. Test the con -
vertible locking retractor by pulling on the belt.
You should no longer be able to putt the belt
out of the retractor . The convertible locking re-
tractor is now activated .
.. Make sure that the red release button is facing
away from the child restraint so that it can be
unbuckled quickly.
.. Pull on the belt to make sure the safety belt is
properly tight and fastened so that the seat
cannot move forward or sideways more than
one inch (2 .5 cm) .
A WARNING
Using the wrong child restraint or an improp-
erly installed child restraint can cause serious
personal injury or death in a crash.
- Always make sure that the safety belt re-
tractor is locked when installing a child
safety seat. An unlocked safety belt retrac-
tor cannot hold the child safety seat in place
during normal driving or in a crash.
- Always buckle the child safety seat firmly in
place even if a child is not sitting in it. A
loose child safety seat can fly around during
a sudden stop or in a crash.

- Always make sure the seat backrest to which
the child restraint is installed is in an up-
right position and securely latched into
place and cannot fold forward. Otherwise,
the seatback with the ch ild safety seat at-
tached to it could f ly forward in the event of
an accident or other emergency situation.
- Always read and heed all WARNINGS when-
ever using a child restrained in a veh icle is
being used c::>page 295. Spec ia l precaut ions
apply when installing a child safety seat on
the front passenger seat c::> page 2 74, Child
restraints on the front seat - some impor-
tant things to know.
Deactivating the convertible locking
retractor
The convertible locking retractor for child re-
straints will be deactivated automatically when
the belt is wound all the way back into the re-
tractor .
~ Press the red button on the safety belt buckle.
The belt tongue will pop out of the buckle.
~ Guide the safety belt all the way back into its
stowed position .
Always let the safety belt retract completely into
its stowed position. The safety belt can now be
used as an ordinary safety belt without the con-
vertible locking retractor for child restraints.
If the convertible locking retractor should be ac-
tivated inadvertently, the safety belt must be un-
fastened and guided completely back into its
stowed position to deact ivate this feature. If the
convert ible locking retractor is not deactivated,
the safety belt will gradually become tighter and
uncomfortable to wear.
_& WARNING - tethe r without one can seriously impair the per-
Improperly installed chi ld safety seats in-
crease the risk of serious personal injury and
death in a collision.
- Never unfasten the safety belt to deactivate
u the convertible locking retractor for child re-
co
......
N
r-... straints while the vehicle is moving . You
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Child safety
wou ld not be restrained and could be seri-
ously injured in an accident.
- Always read and heed all WARNINGS when-
ever using a child restrained in a vehicle is
page 295. Special precautions
be ing used c::>
apply when install ing a child safety seat on
the front passenger seat c::>page 274, Child
restraints on the front seat - some impor-
tant things to know.
LATCH system (lower
anchorages and tethers
for children)
Child Restraint System anchors and how
are they related to child safety
To provide a simpler and more practicab le way to
attach the child restraint on the vehicle seat,
Federal regulations require special lower ancho-
rages in vehicles and devices on new child re-
straints to attach to the vehicle anchorages .
In the United States, the combination of the
tether anchorages and the lower anchorages is
now generally called the LATCHsystem for
"Lower Anchorages and Tethers for Children" . In
Canada, the terms "top tether" with "lower uni-
versa l anchorages" (or "lower universal anchor-
age bars") are used to descr ibe the system .
In other countries the term "ISOFIX" is used to
describe the lower anchorages .
Forward-facing child restraints manufactured af-
ter September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. fed-
eral regulations to comply with new child head
movement performance req uirements. These
new performance requirements make a tether
necessary on most new ch ild seats.
Installing a child restraint that requires a top
formance of the child restraint and its ab ility to
pro t ect the child in a collision. Installing a child
restra int that requi res a t op tether without the
top tether may be a violation of state law.
Child restraint manufacturers offer LATCHlower
anchorages on their child seats with hook-on or ..,.
309
Child safety

push -on connectors attached to adjustable Description

straps.
The lower anchorage positions are marked for
In addition to the LATCHlower anchorages, these quick locating .
chi ld restraint systems usually require the use of
tether straps to he lp keep the child restraint
firm ly in place.

A WARNING
Improper installation of child restraints will
increase the risk of injury and death in a
crash.
- Always follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the child restraint you
Fig. 25 2 Second row of seats: locator buttons for lower an-
intend to install in your veh icle.
chorages
- Never install a child restraint without a
properly attached top tether strap if the
child restraint manufacturer's instruct ions
requ ire the top tether strap to be used.
- Improper use of child restra int LATCHlower
anchorage points can lead to injury in a colli-
s ion . The LATCHlower anchorage points a re
designed to withstand on ly those loads im-
posed by cor rect ly fitted child restraints .
- Never mount two child restraint systems on
one LATCHlower anchorage point. Fig. 253 Third row of seats: lowe r anchorage covers

- Never secure or attach any luggage or other

Attachment locato r markers fo r low er
item to the LATCHlower anchorages.
anchorages
Circular locator buttons on the padding between
Location
the seat cus hion and back rest in the second row
of seats indicate the lower ancho rage locations
¢ fig. 252. The lower anchorage locati ons in t he

third row of seats are indicated by the attach-

ment locator markers of the lower ancho rage
brackets¢ fig. 253. Remove the padding or the
covers to access the lower anchorage brackets.

Lower anchorages
The lower anchorage attachment poin t s are lo-
Fig. 251 Schematic overview : LATCH anchorage point loca- cated between the rear seatback and rear seat
t ions cush ion r=:>fig
. 252, ¢ fig. 253.

Lower anchorages secure the child restra int in

The illustration shows the seating locatio ns in
the seat without using the vehicle's safety belts.
your veh icle which are equipped with the lower
Anchorages prov ide a secure and easy -to-use at -
anchorages system.
tachment and minimize the possibility of improp-
er child restraint installation . ..,.

310

All child restraints manufactured after Septem-
ber 1, 2002, must have lower anchorage attach-
ments for the LATCH system .
Remember that the lower anchorage points a re
on ly intended for installation and attachment of
child restraints specifica lly certified for use with
LATCH lower anchorages. Child restraints that
are not equipped with the lower anchorage at -
tachments can still be installed in compliance
with the child restraint manufacturer's instruc -
tions on using veh icle safety belts.
A WARNING
Improper use of LATCHlower anchorages can
cause se rious personal injury in an accident.
- Always carefu lly follow the child restra ints
man ufactu rer's inst ruct ions for proper in-
sta llation of the child restra int and proper
use of the lower anchorages or safety be lts
in yo ur vehicle.
- Never secure or attach any lugg age or other
items to the LATCH lower anchorages .
- Always read and heed the important infor-
mation about child restraints in this chapter
and WARNINGS ¢ page 295, Child safety .
Installing a child restraint with LATCH
lower anchorages
Whenever you install a child restraint always fol-
low the child restraint manufacturer's instruc-
tions.
Fig. 25 4 Lower anchorages: p roper mount ing
Mounting
u
co
......
N
~ Make sure the seatback of the rear seat bench
r-...
N
...... is in the upr ight position and securely latched
0
0 in place.
:E:
'<t
Ch ild safety
~ Remove the padding or the covers to access the
lower anchorage brackets.
~ Attach both hook -on connectors with the spr ing
catch release on the child safety seat onto the
LATCHlower anchorage so th at the con necta rs
lock into place ¢ fig. 254 .
~ Pull on the connector attachments to make
sure they are properly attached to the LATCH
lower ancho rage.
~ Pull straps tight following the ch ild restraint
manufacturer 's instructions .
Releasing
~ Loosen the tension on the straps fo llow ing the
child restra int manufacture r's instructions .
~ Depress the spr ing catches to release the an -
chor age hooks from t he lower anchorages.
Remember: Use tether straps to help keep the
child rest raint firmly in place.
A WARNING
-
Imp roper use of the LATCH system can in-
crease the risk of serious persona l injury and
death in an accident.
- These anchors were developed only for child
safety seats using the "LATCH"system .
- Never attach othe r ch ild safety sea t s, be lts
or other objec t s to these anchors.
- Always make su re that you hear a click when
lat ching the seat in place . If you do not hear
a click the seat is not se cure and could fly
forward and hit the interior of the vehicle,
or be ejected from the vehicle.
A
~
WARNING
-
Improper installation of child restraints will
increase the risk of injury in an accident.
- Always follow the ch ild restraint system
manufacturer's instructions for proper in-
stallat ion of the chi ld restraint system and
proper use of tether straps as well as the
lower anchorages or safety belts in your ve-
hicle .
- Always read and heed the important infor-
mat ion and WARNINGS about ch ild safety
and the installat io n of child restrai nt sys-
tems ¢ page 295, Child safety .
311
Child safety

Tether anchors and tether straps
Fig. 255 Tether anchors for second row of seats: attach·
ment hook locat ions
-Always follow the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the child restraint you
intend to install in your Audi.
- Improper use of child restraint anchors (in-
cluding tether anchors) can lead to injury in
a collision. The anchors are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by cor-
rectly fitted ch ild restraints.
- Never mount two child restraint systems on
one LATCH lowe r anchor point.
- Never attach two child restraint systems to
one tether st rap or tether anchorage.
- Never attach a tether strap to a tie-down
hook in the luggage compartment.
- Never use child restraint tether anchorages
to secure safety belts or other kinds of occu-
pant restraints.
- Never secure or attach any luggage or other
items to the LATCHlower anchorages or to
the tether anchors.

Installing the upper tether strap on the

Fig. 256 Tether anc hors for third row of seats: attachment
hook locat ions anchorage

The tether anchors for the rear seating positions

are located on the backside of the rear seatbacks.
A tether is a straight or V-shaped strap that at -
taches the top part of a child restra int to specia l
anchorage points in the vehicle.
The purpose of the tether is to reduce the for-
ward movement of the child restraint in a crash,
in order to help reduce the risk of head injury
Fig. 257 Tether strap : proper routin g and mount ing
that could be caused by striking the vehicle inte-
rior .
Forward facing child restraints manufactured af-
ter September 1, 1999, are required by U.S. fed-
eral regulations to comply with new child head
movement performance requirements. These
new performance requirements make a tether
necessary on most new child safe ty seats.

_& WARNING
Fig. 258 Tether strap: prope r rout ing and mount ing
Improper installation of child restraints will
increase the risk of injury and death in a
crash.

312

In st all ing th e t eth er str ap
"' Release or deploy the tether st rap on the child
restraint acco rding to the child restraint manu-
facturer's instructions .
"' Guide the upper tether strap under the rear
head restraint and into the rear cargo area
(raise the head restraint if necessary). For child
restra ints with V-tether straps, always make
sure that the head restraint guide rods do not
interfere with any part of the top tether strap .
"' Slide the tether st rap hook over the anchor
bracket.
"' Pull on the te t her strap hook so tha t the spring
catch of the hook engages.
"' Tighten the tether strap firmly fo llowing the
child restraint manufacturer's instructions .
Releasing the tet her strap
"' Loosen the tens ion following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions .
"' Depress the spring catch on the hook and re -
lease it from the anchorage.
@ Note
If you leave the chi ld restraint wit h the tether
strap firmly installed fo r several days, this
could leave a mark on the upholstery on the
seat cushion and backrest in the area where
the tether strap was installed. The upholstery
would also be permanently stretched around
the tether strap . This applies especially to
leather seats .
Using tether straps on rearward-facing
child restraints
Current ly, few rear-facing chi ld restraint systems
come with a tether. Please read and heed the
child restraint system manufacturer's instruc-
tions carefully to determine how to properly in-
stall the tether.
A WARNING
A child in a rearward-facing chi ld safety seat
u installed on the front passenge r seat will be
co
,....,
N ser iously injured and can be killed if the front
r-...
N
,...., airbag inflates - even with an Advanced Air-
0
0
:E: bag System .
'<t
Ch ild safety
- The inflating airbag will hit the chi ld safety
seat or infant carr ier with great force and
will smash the child safety seat and child
aga inst the backrest, center armrest, or
door.
- If you must install a rearward facing child
safety seat on the front passenger seat be-
cause of exceptional circumstances and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ',,;; light does not
come on and stay on, immedia t ely insta ll
the rea r-facing child safety seat in a rear
seating position and have the a irbag system
inspected by your Audi dealer .
Additional information
Sources of information about child
restraints and their use
The re are a number of sources of additional in-
format ion about ch ild rest raint selection, instal -
lation and use :
NHTSA advises that the best ch ild safety seat is
the one that fits your child and fits in your veh i-
cle, and tha t you will use correct ly and consis -
tent ly.
Try befo re you buy!
U.S National Highway Traffic Saf ety Admini stra -
tion
Tel.: 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-91S3)
http:/ /www.nhtsa.gov
http:/ /www.saferca r.gov
National SAFE KID S Campaign
Tel.: (202) 662-0600
http://www.safekids.org
Safet y Belt Saf e U.S.A
Tel.: (800) 745 -SAFE (English)
Tel.: (800) 747-SANO (Spanish)
http://www.carseat.o rg
Transport Canada Information Centre
Tel.: 1-800-333-0371 or call 1-613 -998 -8616 if
you are in the Ottawa area
http://www.tc.gc.ca/ eng/ roadsafety/menu. htm
Audi Custom er Relations
Tel.: (800) 822 -2834
313
Ch e ck ing and Filling
Checking and Filling
Gasoline
Fuel supply
Applies to: vehicles with gasoline engine
Using the right fuel helps keep the environment
clean and prevents engine damage.
Fue l re commend ati on
The fuel recommended for your vehicle is unle ad-
ed pre mium grade gasoline . Audi recommends
using TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline with a mini-
mum octane rating of 91 AKI(95 RON). For more
information on TOPTIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the official website
(www.toptiergas .com).
The recommended gasoline octane rating for
your engine can also be found on a label located
on the inside of the fuel filler flap . This rating
may be specified as AKI or RON.
Your veh icle may also be operated using unlead-
ed regular gasoline with a minimum octane rat -
ing of 87 AKl/91 RON. However, using 87 AKI/91
RONoctane fuel will slightly reduce engine per-
forma nce.
Use unleaded gasoline only. Unleaded gasoline
is availab le throughout the USA, Canada, and in
most European countries . We recommend that
you do not ta ke your vehicle to areas or count ries
where unleaded gaso line may not be availab le.
For more information on refueling your vehicle,
see ¢page 316 .
Octan e rating
Octane rating indicates a gasoline's ability to re-
sist engine damaging "knock" caused by prema-
ture ignit ion and detonation . Therefore, buying
the correct grade of gasoline is very important to
help prevent poss ible engine damage and a loss
of eng ine performance.
Gasoline most commonly used in the United
States and Canada has the following octane rat-
ings that can usually be found on the filler pump:
- Premium Grade: 91 - 96 AKI
314
- Regular Grade: 87 - 90 AKI
Explanation of the abbreviations:
AKI= Anti Knock I ndex = (R+M)/2 = (RON+MON)/
2
RON= Research Octane Number
MON= Motor Octane Number.
{[) Note
- Do not use any fue l with octane ratings low-
er than 87 AKIor 91 RONothe rwise expen-
sive engine damage will occur.
- Do not use leaded gasoline. The use of lead-
ed gasoline will severely damage your vehi-
cle's catalyt ic converter and its ability to
control exhaust emissions .
Blended gasoline
Applies to: vehicles with gasoline engine
Use of gaso line conta ining alcoho l or MTBE
(meth yl tertia ry butyl ether )
You may use unleaded gasoline blended with al-
cohol or MTBE (commonly referred to as oxygen-
ates) if the blended mixture meets the follow ing
criteria:
Blend of gasoline methanol (wood alcohol or
met hyl alcoho l)
- Anti-knock index must be 87 AKIor higher.
- Blend must contain no more than 3% metha-
nol.
- Blend must contain more than 2% co-solvents.
Blend of ga so line and ethanol (grain alcohol or
ethyl alcohol )
- Anti-knock index must be 87 AKIor higher .
- Blend must not conta in more than 15% etha-
nol.
Blend of gas oline and MTBE
- Anti-knock index must be 87 AKI or higher .
- Blend must contain not more than 1S% MTBE.
Seasonall y adjust ed gasoline
Many gasoline grades are blended to perform es-
pecially well for winter or summer driving . Dur-
ing seasonal change-over, we suggest that you .,..

fill up at busy gas stations where the seasona l
adjustment is more likely to be made in time .
(D Note
- Methanol fuels which do not mee t these re-
quirements may ca use corrosion and dam-
age to plastic and rubber components in the
fuel system.
- Do not use fuels that fai l to meet the speci-
fied criteria in this chapter.
- If you are unable to determine whether or
not a particular fuel blend meets the speci-
fications, ask your service station or its fuel
supplier.
- Do not use fuel for which the contents can-
not be identif ied.
- Fuel system damage and performance prob-
lems resulting from the use of fue ls differ-
ent from those specified are not the respon-
s ibility of Audi and are not covered under
the New Vehicle or the Emiss ion Control
System Wa rrant ies.
- If you experience a loss of fue l economy or
driveability and performance problems due
to the use of one of these fuel blends, we
recommend that you switch to unblended
fuel.
Gasoline additives
Applies to: vehicles with gasoline engine
A majo r concern among many auto manufactur -
ers is carbon deposit build-up caused by the type
of gasoline you use.
Although gasoline grades d iffer from one manu-
facturer to another, t hey have cer t ain t hings in
common . All gasoline grades contain substances
that can cause deposits to collect on vita l engine
parts, such as fue l injectors and intake valves . Al-
though most gasoline brands include additives to
keep engine and fuel systems clean, they are not
equally effective.
Audi recommends using TOP TIER Detergent Gas-
oline. For more informat ion on TOP TIER Deter-
u
co
...... gent Gasoline, please go to the official website
N
r-...
N
(www.toptiergas .com) .
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Ch e c k ing an d Filling
After an extended period of using inadeq uate
fuels, bui lt-up carbon deposits can rob your en-
gine of peak performance.
(D Note
- Damage or malfunction d ue to poor fuel
quality is no t covered by the Audi New Veh i-
cle Limited Warranty .
- Do not add aft ermarket fuel addi t ive prod-
ucts t o your fue l tank.
Diesel fuel
Applies to: vehicles with diesel engine
Always use ULSD (Ultra Low Sulfur Diesel) No. 2.
The ULSDNo. 2 meets the ASTM 0975.
Diesel fuel w ith concentrations of biod iesel high-
er than 5 % such as Bl 1, B20 or B100 are st rict ly
prohib ited.
Service station fuel pumps are labeled with the
cor rect fuel information for easy recogn ition by
the user. If the d iesel fue l pump is not labeled
as k t he station operator wha t fuel is being dis-
pensed before fill ing up your vehi cle.
ULSD No. 2 may not be ava ilable outside the USA
and Canada. Be su re to check befo re t raveling to
othe r countr ies.
ULSDNo. 2 can become thicker in very cold tem-
peratures, and th is can impa ir the engine's start-
ing and runn ing . Depend ing o n the season, gas
stations provide ULSD No. 2 that flows be tte r in
cold te m pe rat ures so t hat you can conti nue ope r-
at ing your vehicle as usual.
(D Note
- Your vehicle's diese l eng ine was designed
so ley for use w ith ULSD No. 2. Therefo re,
never use gasoline, heating oil, other fuels
or flow improvers. These contain substances
that will severely damage the fuel system
and the engine. Such damage will not be
covered by your New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty.
- If you put any amount of incorrect fuel in
the fuel tank, do not start the engine under ..,_
315
Che ck ing and Filling

any circ umstances. Immediately contact the
nearest author ized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance .
These fuels contain substances that can se-
verely damage the fue l system and the en-
gine if the engine is started .
fuel can cause misfiring. Gasoline could ente r
the exhaust system and damage the catalytic
converter.
Fueling procedure

Refueling
Fuel filler neck

The fuel fille r neck is located on the right rear

side pan e l behind the fu e l filler flap .

If the power locking system should fail, you can

still open the flap manua lly - for detai led instruc-
page 318.
tions see c::> Fig. 259 Righ t rea r side of th e vehicle: op enin g the fue l
filler door
You can find the fuel tank capac ity of you r vehicle
page 3 79 .
in c::>

The label on the inside of the fuel filler flap tells

you the correct fue l for your vehicle . For more in-
formation about fue l specifications , see
page 314 .
c::>

Your veh icle fuel tank has an onboard refuelling

vapor recovery system . This feature he lps t o pre-
ve nt fuel vapors from escap ing from the tank and
pollut ing the e nvironment while you re fuel your Fig. 26 0 Fuel filler doo r wit h attached fu el cap
veh icle . In order to fi ll the tank properly while
protecting the environment, please fo llow this The fuel filler doo r is unlocked or locked by the
refu e ling procedure carefu lly. cent ral locking system .

& WARNING
Opening the fuel cap

Under normal operating conditions, never car-
ry additiona l fuel containers in yo ur car. Gas
canisters and other conta iners used to trans-
port fuel can be dangerous . Such containers,
full or empty , may lea k and could cause a fire
in a collision. If you m ust t ransport fue l to
use for your lawn mower, snow blower, etc.,
be very careful and a lways obse rve loca l and
state laws regard ing the use, t ransportation
and sto rage of such fue l conta iners. Make cer-
tain the container meets industry standards
(ANSI/ASTM F852 - 86).
.. Press the left side of the fuel f iller doo r to open
it c::>fig. 259 -arrow-.
.. Unscrew the tank cap counterclockwise .
.,..Place the cap from above on the open fuel filler
door c::>fig . 260 .
Closing the fuel cap
.. Turn the fuel cap to the right until it stops.
.. Close the fuel filler door until it latches.
Once the pump noz zle sw itches off, the fuel tank
is "full ". Do not fill the tank more . Otherwise the
expans ion space in the tank w ill be filled.

(D Note The correct fuel type fo r your vehicle can be

fo und on a label located on the inside of the fuel IJJ,
Never drive yo ur vehicle unt il t he fuel tan k is
comp letely empty . The irregular supply of

316
 Ch e c k ing an d Filling

filler door. For additional information on fuel,
see ~ page 314.
The fuel tank capacity of your vehicle is listed in
the Technical Data section ~ page 3 79.
To avoid fuel spill ing or evaporating from the fuel
tank always close fuel cap properly and com-
pletely . An improperly closed fue l filler cap may
a lso cause the MIL lamp ~ page 21 t o come on.
- Always hold the fue l nozzle completely in
the fuel container when filling.
- If the fuel container is made of metal, the
fuel nozzle must always be in contact with
the container when filling it with fuel. This
prevents stat ic electricity from discharg-
ing .
- Never spill fuel in the vehicle or the lug-
gage compartment. Evaporated fuel is ex-

A WARNING -
plosive and increases the risk of serious in-
jury or death .
Not paying attention when fueling or han - - Follow lega l requirements when using,
dling fue l incorrectly can lead to fires, exp lo- stor ing and transporti ng fuel conta iners .
sions or serious inj uries. - Make sure the fuel container conforms to
- Fuel ignites easily and can cause serious industry standards (ANSI/ASTM F8S2-86).
burns and other injuries.
- If you do not switch the engine off when fu - @ Note
eling and/or do not insert the fuel nozz le
- Remove spilled fuel from vehicle pa int im-
completely into the tank opening, fue l can
mediately, because it can damage paint.
leak out or run over. Leaked fuel can ignite
- Never drive unti l the fuel tank is complete ly
and start a fire.
empty. The irregular supply of fue l that re-
- Do not use the telephone whi le fueling. The
sults from that can cause eng ine misfires.
electromagnetic rays can cause sparks,
Uncombusted fuel will enter the exhaust
wh ich can ignite fuel vapors and start a fire.
system and increasethe risk of damage to
- Do not sit in your vehicle while fueling. If
t he catalytic converte r.
you must make an except ion and enter your
- If the fue l tank runs complete ly empty in a
vehicle again wh ile fue ling, close the door
vehicle with a diesel eng ine, the ignition
and touch meta l to discharge static electric-
must remain swit ched on fo r at least 30
ity befo re touch ing the fue l nozzle . Static
se conds afte r ref ueling before starti ng t he
elect ricity can create spar ks, wh ich can ig-
eng ine. It may take longer t han usual fo r
nit e vapo rs when fue ling.
t he engine t o st art, even up to a minu t e.
- Do not smoke or have an open flame in the
This is because the air must first b leed out
area when fueling your veh icle or filling a
of the fue l system when starting the eng ine.
fuel contai ner because th is increases the
risk of an explos ion .
@ For the sake of the environment
- For your safety , carrying fuel containers in
Do not overfill the fuel tank, otherwise fuel
your vehicle is no t recommended. Whethe r
can leak out when the veh icle is warming up.
full or empty, the conta iner can leak a nd
cause a fire in the event of an accident .
- If you must make an exception and trans-
(D Tips

port a fuel container, note the following : Diesel ve hicles are eq uipped w ith a diesel mis-
fueling guard . It allows the vehi cle to be fu-
- Never fill the fuel container with fuel
eled on ly with a diesel fuel pump nozzle. A
while it is in or on the vehicle. Stat ic elec-
worn or damaged nozzle or a nozzle that is
tr icity is d ischa rged when filling wh ich can
too small may not be able to open the diese l
u cause the fuel vapors to ignite and in-
co misfueling guard. If this is the case, try turn-
...... creases the risk of an explos ion.
N
r-...
N
ing the nozzle before inserting it in the fue l
...... - Always place a fuel containe r on the
0 filler neck, use a different fuel pump, o r see
0
:E:
g round before filling.
'<t

317
Che ck ing and Filling

an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Selective catalytic

Service Facility for assistance .
Fuel filler door emergency release
If the central locking system is faulty, the fuel
filler door can be unlocked manually.
II
Fig. 261 Luggage compartment: removing the light cover
II
reduction (AdBlue/DEF)
General information
Applies to: vehicles wit h selective catalytic reduct ion
In vehicles with selective catalytic reduction, a
urea solution (AdBlue/DEF) is injected into the
exhaust system in front of a nitrogen oxide cata-
lytic converter to reduce nitrogen em issions. The
urea solution is known as AdBlue or DEF(Diesel
Exhaust Fluid). The informat ion that follows will
use the name AdBlue.
The AdBlue is carried in a separate tank in the ve-
hicle. The AdBlue usage accounts for approxi-
mately 1.0% to 4.0% of the diesel fuel that is
used .
When a message about refilling the AdBlue ap-
pears in the instrument cluster display, you must
refill the AdBlue yourse lf or have it refilled by an
authorized Audi dea ler or authorized Audi Service
Facility c::;,page 319.

Fig. 262 Luggage compartment: fuel fille r doo r emergency
rele ase
The emergency release mechanism is locat ed be-
hind the right light cover in the luggage compart-
ment .
"' Use a screwdriver to remove the light cover
¢ fig. 261 .
(0 Tips
- The disp lay indicates the distance rema ining
that can be driven c::;,page 318. If the AdBl-
ue tank is comple t ely empty, the eng ine will
not st art again after the ignition is switched
off .
- AdBlue is required by law to ope rate th is ve-
hicle.
Messages in the instrument cluster display
Applies to: vehicles with selective catalyt ic reduct ion

"' Loosen the loop c::;,fig. 262 from the retainer
and then pull on the loop carefully c::;,(i), The
filler door is released .
"' Press on the left side of the fuel filier door to
open it c::;,
page 316, fig. 259 .
(D Note
Only pull on the loop until you feel resistance .
You will not hear it release. Otherwise you
could damage the emergency release mecha-
nism.
The display indicat es if the Ad Blue level is low or
if there is a system malfun ction.
AdBlue level low
You will be informed in the instrument cluster
display if the AdBlue in the tank drops below a
certain level. Add at a minimum t he amount of
AdBlue shown in the message:
II Refill with at lea st x qt (l) AdBlue. Range
x mi ( km)

318
 Checking and Filling

This message appears when there is only eno ugh Preparation

AdBlue left to drive the distance indicated in the Applies to: vehicles with selective cata lytic reduction
instr ument cluster . Fill the AdBlue .

• Refill with at least x qt (l) AdBlue. No en·

gine start in x mi (km) . See owner 's manual

This message appears when there is only eno ugh

AdBlue left to d rive t he distance indicated in the
instr ument cluster. Fill the AdBlue. Ot herwise
the engine will not start again if you stop it once
the distance indicated has been driven .

• Refill with at least x qt (l) AdBlue. Engine Fig. 263 Right rear side of the vehicle: removing t he AdBl-
start not possibl e. See owner 's manual ue cap

This message appea rs when the Ad Blue tank is

The Ad Blue tank ope ning is located near the d ie-
empty. Fill the AdBlue. Otherwise you will not be
se l t ank opening. Add at least the amount of
ab le t o st art the engine aga in once yo u st op it.
AdBlue shown in the instrument cluster display.
The AdBlue must be refilled when the amount in This is the minimum amount required to ensure
the tank has reached the minimum level the system detects the refilling and to start the
¢ page 319, Preparation. engine. You can add a maximum of 6.3 gallons
(24 L).
Incorrect filling / system ma lfunction
Requirement: the request to add Ad Blue must
A message appears if the Ad Blue tank was filled
appear in the instrument cluster display.
with a fluid other than AdBlue and the system
has detected that the tank was f illed incor rectly, .. Switch t he ignit ion off .
or if there is a system malfunction . .. Open the tank filler doo r ¢ page 316 .
.. Turn the ta nk filler neck cap to the left to re-
II AdBlue: malfunct ion ! No engine start in move ¢fig . 263 .
x mi (km) . Se e owner's manual
.. Refill Ad Blue us ing a pump noz zle ¢ page 320,
This message appears when it is only possible to a canister ¢ page 320 or a bott le ¢ page 320 .
drive the d istance ind icated in the instrument
cluster . Drive to the nearest author ized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Serv ice Facility to have
A
,~ WARNING
-
AdBlue can irritate the s kin, eyes and respira-
the malfunction corrected . Otherwise the engine
tory syst em. If th ere is contact with t he flu id,
will not start again if you stop it once the d is-
flus h immed iate ly with plenty of wat er. Con-
tance indicated has been dr iven .
su lt a phys icia n if necessary .
• Ad Blue: malfunction! No engine start poss i-
ble . See owner' s manual (D Note
This message appears if the system has detected - Only use AdBlue that conforms to the
that the tank was filled incorrectly or that there standard ISO 22241-1. Do not mix any addi-
is a malfunction. Drive immediately to the near - tives with the AdBlue and do not dilut e it
est autho rized Aud i dea ler or authorized Aud i w ith wate r.
Service Facility to have the malfunction correct- - Do not add AdBlue to the d iesel t ank or add
ed. Othe rwise you will not be able to start t he en- diese l fuel to t he Ad Blue t ank. Do not st art
u
(0
...... g ine again once you stop it . t he engine un de r any circumst ances if t he
N
r--. wrong fuel is filled in the tan k. There is a
N
......
0
0
:E
<t

319
Checking and Filling

risk of damaging the fuel tank system and Refilling AdBlue using a canister
the engine. See an authorized Audi dealer or Applies to: vehicles with selective catalytic reduction
authorized Audi Service Facility for assis-
tance.
- AdBlue attacks surfaces such as painted ve-
hicle components, plastic and carpet. Re-
®
move the fluid as quickly as possible with a
damp cloth and plenty of cold water. If the
AdBlue has already crystallized, use warm
water and a sponge . AdBlue residue that is
not removed will crystallize and can damage +®
the affected surface.
Fig. 264 Caniste r with attachable hose
- Do not store refill bottles or canisters per-
manently in the vehicle. If the container
leaks, the escaping AdBlue could damage
.,. Remove the cover from the refill canis t er¢ A
in Preparation on page 319, ¢ (Din Prepara -
the vehicle interior.
tion on page 319 .
- Do not allow AdBlue to come into contact
.,.Secure the end of the hose (D on the opening in
with clothing. If there is contact with the
the canister @ by turning the hose to the right .
fluid, flush immediately with plenty of wa-
.,. Remove the cap @ from the other end of the
ter.
hose @ .
.,. Position the end of the hose @ on the filler
(D Tips
neck in the vehicle and turn the hose to the
Follow the AdBlue manufacturer 's instruc- right to tighten it .
tions for use and storage. .,.Lift th@canist er up and then tip it. Continu e
holding the canister in a tipped position until it
Refilling AdBlue using a pump is empty or until no more fluid flows into the
Applies to: veh icles with selective catalyt ic reduction tank .
.,. Remove the canister and close the filler tube
.,.Open the tank filler door ¢ page 316, fig. 259.
¢ page 321, Completing AdBlue refill .
.,.Turn the tank filler neck cap to the left to re-
move ¢ page 319, fig . 263.
.,.Refill AdBlue until the pump noz zle switches
(D Note
off for the first time ¢ (D . Only use refill canisters that are approved for
.,.Close the filler tube ¢ page 321, Completing your vehicle. Using other systems can cause
AdBlue refill AdBlue to leak .

(fl Note (D Tips

- The pump nozzle handle must be pointing
downward when filling. Otherwise the
pump nozzle will not switch off automati-
cally ¢ Q) in Preparation on page 319.
- Do not continue filling once the pump noz-
zle automatically switches off for the first
time. The AdBlue tank system could be
overfilled and leak AdBlue ¢ (D in Prepara-
tion on page 319.
-An authorized Audi dealer or authorized
Audi repair facility can tell you which refill
canisters are approved for your vehicle .
- A permitted refill canister contains approxi-
mately 1.3 gallons (5 liters) of Ad Blue.
Refilling AdBlue using a bottle
Applies to: vehicles with selective catalytic reduction
.,. Remove the cap from the refill bottle ¢ A in
Preparation on page 319, ¢ (Din Preparation
an page 319. ..,.

320
 Ch e c k ing an d Filling

• Position the bottle on the filler tube and tu rn level. The message t urns off as soon as the
the bottle clockwise unti l it stops turning. tank thaws out again .
• Press lightly against the bottom of the bottle
to empty it. Continue pressing the bottom of Emissions control
the bottle until it is empty or until f luid stops
systems
flowing into the tank .
• Remove the bottle and seal the filler neck Catalytic con ve rter
~ page 321, Completing AdBlue refill . Applies to : vehicles with gasoline engines

The vehicle may only be driven with un leaded

(D Note gasoline, otherwise the catalytic converter will be
Only use refill bottles that are approved for destroyed.
your veh icle. Using other systems can cause Never drive until the tank is compl ete ly empty .
Ad Blue to leak. The irregu lar supply of fuel that resu lts from that
can cause eng ine misfires. Uncombusted fuel will
enter the exhaust system, which can cause over-
- You can obta in refill bottles from an author- heating and damage to the catalytic converter .
ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Service
Facility. Diesel particulate filt er
Applies to: vehicles with diesel engines
- A perm itted refill bottle contains approxi-
mately 0.5 gallon (1. 9 liters) of AdBlue. The diese l particu late filter filters near ly all of
the soot particles out of the exhaust. The filter
Completing AdBlue refill cleans itself automatically under norma l driving
Applies to: vehicles with selective catalytic reduc t ion condit ions. If the filter cannot clean itself (for ex-
ample, becauseyou are only driving short distan-
Closing th e filler neck ces), the filter becomes clogged with soot and
• Turn the AdBlue cap to the right on the filler the 1\1 indicato r light for the diese l part iculate
tube until the cap clicks into place c;>.&.in filte r tu rns on c;>page 30.
Preparation on page 319, c;>(D in Preparation
on page 319 .. _& WARNING
• Then press on the left side of the tank door un - The tempera tu re of the exhaus t sys t em is
ti l it latches. high, bot h when driving and after stoppi ng
the engine.
After filling
- Never tou ch the exhaust tail pipes once they
The vehicle must be driven so that the system have become hot. This cou ld res ult in burns .
recognizes t hat the Ad Blue was refilled. This can - Do not par k your veh icle over flamm ab le
take severa l min utes . materia ls such as grass or leaves because
• If there was no AdBlue left in the tank and a the high temperature of the emissions con-
range of O mi (0 km) was shown in the display , trol system (catalytic converter or diesel
switch the ign ition on for about 30 seconds be- particu late filter) cou ld start a fire.
fore star t ing the engine . - Do not app ly underbody protectant in the
exhaust system area, beca use this increases
(D Tips the risk of f ire.

AdBlue in the tank can free ze at very low tem-

u pe rat ures. If this happens, t he system will
co
....
N not detect t hat the Ad Blue was refilled and it
r-...
....
N will continue to inform you of the low Ad Blue
0
0
:E:
'<t

321
Ch e ck ing and Filling
Engine compartment
Working in the engine compartment
Special care is required if you are working in the
engine compartment
For work in the engine compartm ent, such as
checking and filli ng flu ids, th ere is a risk of in-
j ury, scalding, accidents, and burns. For th is
reason, foll ow all the warning s and general
saf et y precautions provided in t he f ollowing in·
f ormat ion. The engine compartmen t is a dan-
gerous area. ¢ ,& .
_& WARNING
- Turn the engine off.
- Switch the ign ition off .
- Set the parking brake .
- Select the P selector lever position .
- let the engine cool down.
- Never open the hood when there is steam or
coolant escaping from the engine compart-
ment, because there is a risk that you could
be burned . Wait until no steam or coolant is
escaping.
- Keep children away from the engine com-
partment .
- Never spill flu ids on a hot engine. These flu-
ids (such as the anti -freezing agent con-
ta ined in the coolant) can ignite .
- Avoid short circu its in the electrical system .
- When working in the engine compartment,
remember that the radiator fan can switch
on even if the ignition is switched off, which
increases the risk of inj ury.
- Never open the cap on the coolant expan-
sion tank when the engine is warm . The
cooling system is under pressure.
- To protect your face, hands, and arms from
hot steam or coolant, cover the cap with a
large cloth when opening.
- Do not remove the engine cover under any
circumstances . This increases the risk of
burns.
- If tests need to be performed w ith the en-
gine running, there is additional danger due
to moving components (such as the ribbed
322
belt, alternator and radiator fan) and from
the high-voltage ignition system.
- Do not under any circumstances activate the
throttle inadvertently (for example, by hand
from the engine compartment) if the vehi-
cle is stat ionary but the engine is running
and a gear is engaged . Otherwise, the vehi-
cle will start to move immediately and this
could result in an accident .
- Pay attent ion to the following warnings
when work on the fue l system is required:
- Do not smoke .
- Never work near open flames .
- Always have a working fire extinguisher
nearby
- All work on the battery or elect rical system
in your vehicle can result in injuries, chemi-
cal burns, accidents or burns . Because of
this, all work must be performed only by an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility.
- To reduce the risk of electric shock and in-
jury, never touch the following components
when the engine is running or is being start •
ed:
- Ign ition cable
- Other components in the electronic high -
voltage ign ition system
- If you must check or perform work on the
engine while it is running:
- Set the parking brake firs t and then select
the P selector lever position.
- Always proceed w ith extreme caution so
that clothing, jewelry or long hair do not
become caught in the radiator fan, fan
belt or other moving components or do
not come into contact with hot compo-
nents. Tie back long hair before beginn ing
work and do not wear clothing that can
hang down into the engine .
- Limit your exposure to exhaust and chemi-
cals to as short a time as possible ¢ .&..
A WARNING
California Proposition 65 Warning:
 Checking and Filling

- Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,

and certain vehicle components contain or
emit chemicals known to the State of Cali-
fornia to cause cancer and birth defects and
reproductive harm . In addition, certain flu-
ids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. Fig. 266 Unlocked hood : lever
- Battery posts , terminals and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds, Make sure the wiper arms are not raised up from
chemicals known to the State of California the windshield. Otherwise the paint could be
to cause cancer and reproductive harms. damaged .
Wash hands after handling.
Opening the hood

(D Note
When filling fluids, be sure not to mix the flu-
ids up. Otherwise severe ma lfunctions and en-
gine damage w ill occur.
@ For the sake of the environment
You shou ld regularly check the ground under
your vehicle in order to detect leaks quickly . If
there are visible spots from oil or other fluids,
bring your vehicle to an authorized Audi deal-
er or author ized Audi Service Facility to be
checked.
" With the driver's doo r open, pull the lever be -
low the instrument panel in the direction of the
arrow q fig . 265 .
" Raise the hood slightly ¢ .&_.
" Press the lever q fig. 266 in the direct ion of the
arrow. This releases the hooks .
"O pen the hood .
Closing the hood
" Push the hood down until you override the
force of the struts.
" Let the hood fall lightly int o the lat ch . Do not
press it in. ¢ .&_.

Opening and closing the hood A

,..___ WARNING
The hood is released from inside the vehicle. - Never open the hood when there is steam or
coo lant escaping from the engine compart -
ment, because there is a risk that you could
be burned. Wait until no steam or coolant is
escaping .
- For safety reasons, the hood must always be
closed securely while driving . Because of
this, always check the hood after closing it
to make sure it is latched correctly . The
hood is latched if the front corners cannot
be lifted.
Fig. 265 Driver footwe ll: release lever - If you notice that the hood is not latched
while you are driving, stop immediately and
u close it, because driving when the hood is
....
(0

N
not latched increases the risk of an accident . .._
r--.
....
N
0
0
:E
<t

323
Che ck ing and Filling

- If the hood is not latched completely, it

could fly up while you are driving and ob-
struct your vision.

Engine compartment overview

The most important check points.

Fig. 267 Typical location of the reservoir and the engine oil filler open ing

@ Jump start point(+) under a cover,(-) with

hex head screw c;, page 331 qpage 372
8,_ WARNING
Read and follow all WARNINGS befo re check-
@ Coolant expansion tank (-L) ~ page 328
ing anything in the engine compartment
@ Engine oil label * with VW standard
c;, page 322.
,=;,
page 324
© Eng ine oil filler opening (9:::r.) c;, page 326
® Brake fluid reservoir ((0)) c;, page 329
Engine oil
® Washer fluid reservoir (W) c;, page 331 Engine oil specifications

The coolant expansion tank and the engine oil
filling opening c;, fig . 267 (items @ and @ ) may
be located in different places depending on the
engine design.
The engine oil used must conform to exact speci-
fications.
The serv ice interval d isplay in t he instrumen t
clus t er of your vehicle will inform you when it is
time for an o il change . We recommend that you
have your oi l changed by an author ized Audi Serv-
ice Advisor. ..,_

324

If you must add oil between oil changes, use an
oil that matches the Audi oil quality standard
listed on the st icker. The sticker is located at the
front of the engine compartment c>page 324,
fig. 267.
Audi recomm ends
O castrot/[g/j;t{E'g Frtw.::<..
·-:dr,,JA.L
Audi recommends Longlife high perform ance
engine oil from Audi Genuine Parts
Using the proper engine oil is important for the
functionality and service life of the eng ine. Your
engine was factory -filled with a high-quality oil
which can usua lly be used throughout the entire
yea r.
Note
Your Limited New Vehicle Warranty does not
cover damage or malfunctions due to failure
to follow recommended maintenance and use
requirements as set fo rth in the Audi Owner's
Manual and Warranty & Maintenance booklet.
- Use only a high qual ity eng ine oil that ex-
pressly complies with the Audi oil quality
standard specified for your vehicle's engine .
Using any other oil can cause serious engine
damage .
- Do not mix any lubricants or other additives
into the engine oil. Doing so can cause en-
gine damage.
(D Tips
If you need to add oil and there is none availa -
ble that meets the Audi oil quality standard
your eng ine requires, you may add a total of
no more than 0.5 qt (0.5 l) of a high-quality
"synthet ic" oil that meets the following speci-
fications .
- Vehicles with gasoline eng ine: ACEAA3 or
API SM with a viscosity grade of SAE OW-30,
SAE 5W-30 or SAE 5W-40 .
- Vehicles with diesel eng ine : ACEAC3 or
API CFwith a viscosity grade of SAE OW-30
or SAE 5W-30 .
u
co
......
- For more information about engine oil that
N
r-... has been approved for your vehicle, please
N
......
0 contact either you r authorized Audi dea ler
0
:E:
'<t
or Audi Custome r Relat ions at
Ch e c k ing an d Filling
1 (800) 822 -2834 or visit our web site at
www.audiusa .com or www.audicanada .ca.
Engine oil consumption
The engin e in your vehicle depends on an ad e-
quat e amount of oil to lubricate and cool all of
its moving parts.
In order to provide effect ive lub rication and cool-
ing of inte rnal engine components, all inte rnal
combustion engines consume a certain amount
of oil. Oil consumption varies from eng ine to en-
gine and may change significantly over the life of
the engine. Typically, engines with a specified
break -in period (see c>page 79) consume more
oil dur ing the break-in per iod than they consume
after oil consumption has stabilized .
Under normal cond itions, the rate of oil con-
sumption depends on the qua lity and viscos ity of
the oil, the RPM (revolutions per minute) at
which the engine is operated, the amb ient tem-
perature and road conditions. Further facto rs are
the amo unt of oil dilution from water condensa-
tion or fue l resid ue and the oxidation level of the
oil. As any engine is subject to wear as mileage
builds up, the oil consumption may increase over
time unt il replacement of worn components may
become necessary.
With all these variab les coming into play, no
standard rate of oil consumption can be estab-
lished or spec ified . There is no alternative to reg-
ular and frequent checking of the oil level, see
Note .
If the yellow engine oil level warning symbo l Bl
in the inst rument cluster lights up, you should
check the oil level as soon as possible
c>page 326. Top off the oil at your earliest con-
venience c>page 326 .
A
-- WARNING
Before you check anyth ing in the eng ine com-
partment, always read and heed all WARN-
INGS c>.&.in Working in the engine compart-
ment on page 322. Ill>
325
Ch e ck ing and Filling
CJ) Note
Driving with an insufficient oil level is likely to
cause severe damage to the engine .
@ Tips
- The oil press ure warning display. is not
an indicato r of the oil level. Do not rely on
it. Instead , check th e oil level in your e n-
gi ne at regul ar intervals, prefe rably each
t ime you refuel , and always befo re go ing
on a long trip.
- If you have the impression your engine con-
sumes excessive amounts of oil, we recom-
mend that you consult an authorized Audi
dealer to have the cause of your concern
properly d iagnosed . Keep in mind that the
accurate measurement of oil consumpt ion
requi res great care and may take some
time. An authorized Audi dealer has instruc-
tions about how to measure oil consump-
tion accurately.
Checking the engine oil level and adding
engine oil
The engine oil level can be checked in the Info-
t ainmen t sys tem
0 out onto the ho t engine and exhaust system
-><
N
N when the engine is running, beca use this is
(X)
IX)
Fig. 268 Engine com partme nt: engine oil fille r ope ning
cove r
Che cking th e e ng ine oil leve l
- Park t he vehicle on a leve l surface .
- Shut the engine off when it is warm.
- Switc h only the ignition back on. Wa it approxi-
mately two minutes so that the engine oil can
flow back into the oil pan.
326
- Select in the Infotainment system: the ! MENUI
button > Ve hicle > left control button > Service
& chec ks > Oil level.
- Check the oil level in the Infotainment system
disp lay. Add engine oi l if the bar in the oil level
indicator is just before "m in".
Adding engine oil
Follow the safety precautions ~ .&. in Working in
the engine compartment on page 322.
- Stop the engine and open the hood
~ page 323 .
- Unscrew the cap 9=;,1 on the engine oi l filling
open ing ~ fig. 268, ~ page 324.
- Carefully add 0.5 quart (0.5 liter) of the correct
oil ~ page 324 .
- Close the eng ine oil filler opening cap.
- Close the hood, restart the ignit ion after two
m inutes and read the current oil level in the In -
fotainment system.
&_ WARNING
- When adding oil, do not let oil dr ip onto hot
engine components. This increases the risk
of afire.
- You must secure the cap on the oil filler
open ing correctly so that oil does not leak
a fire hazard .
- Always clean skin thoroughly if it comes into
contact with engine oil.
(D Note
- The engine oil level must not be under the
"min" marking, because this incre ases t he
risk of engine damage.
- If the message II Please reduce oil leve l
appears, there is too much oil in the eng ine
and t here is a risk of damaging the cata lytic
converter and engine. Do not start the en-
gine . Contact an authorized Audi dealer or
authorized Audi Service Facility to have ex-
cess engine o il extracted if necessary .
- Do not mix any addit iona l lubricants into
the engine oil. Damage caused by such add i-
t ives is not covered by the warranty. ...

@ For the sake of the environment
- Oil should never enter the sewer system or
come into contact with the ground.
- Pay attention to legal requirements when
disposing of empty oil containers.
(D Tips
- The oil level indicator in the display is only
an informational disp lay. If the oil level is
too low, a minimum oil warning appears in
the instrument cluster. Add oil and close
the hood. The current oil level is displayed
in the instrument cluster the next time the
ignition is switched on .
- The engine oil consumption may be up to
0.5 quart/600 miles (0.5 liter/1,000 km),
depend ing on driving style and operating
cond itions. Consumption may be higher
during the first 3,000 miles (5,000 km). Be-
cause of th is, the engine oil level must be
checked regularly. It would be best to check
each time you ref uel your vehicle and before
long drives.
Changing the engine oil
We recommend that hove your oil changed by an
authorized Audi dealer or a qualified service sta-
tion.
Before you check anyth ing in the engine compart-
ment, alw ays read and heed all WARNINGS ~ &
in Working in the engine compartment on
page 322.
The engine oil must be changed according to the
intervals specified in your Warranty & Mainte-
nance booklet . This is very important because the
lubricating properties of oil diminish gradually
during normal vehicle use.
Under some circumstances the engine oil should
be changed more frequently. Change oil more of-
ten if yo u drive mostly short distances, operate
the vehicle in dusty areas or under predominant ly
u
stop-and-go traffic condit ions, or have your vehi-
co
...... cle where temperatures remain below freezing
N
r-...
N for extended periods .
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Ch e c k ing an d Filling
Detergent additives in the oi l will make fresh oil
look dark after the engine has been running for a
short time . This is normal and is not a reason to
change the oi l more often than recommended.
Because of the problem of proper disposal, along
with the special tools and necessary expertise re-
quired, we strongly recommend that you have
your oil changed by an authorized Audi de aler or
a qual ified service stat ion.
If yo u choo se to change your oil yo urself , please
note the following important information:
A
"--
WARNING
-
To reduce the risk of persona l injury if you
must change the engine oil in your vehicle
yourself:
- Wear eye protection.
- To reduce the risk of burns from hot engine
oil, let the engine cool down to the touch.
- When removing the oil drain plug w ith your
f ingers, stay as far away as possible. Always
keep your forearm parallel to the ground to
help prevent hot oil from running down your
arm.
- Drain the oil into a container designed for
this purpose, one large enough to hold at
least the tota l amount of oil in your engine.
- Engine oil is poisonous. Keep it well out of
the reach of children.
- Continuous contact with used engine oil is
harmful to your skin. Always protect your
skin by washing oil off thoroughly with soap
and water .
«I) Note
Never mix oil additives with your engine oil.
These additives can damage your engine and
adversely affect your Audi limited New Vehi-
cle Warranty .
@ For the sake of the environment
- Before changing your oil, first make sure
you know where you can properly dispose of
the used oil.
- Always dispose of used engine oil properly .
Do not dump it on garden soil, wooded
327
Che ck ing and Filling

areas, into open streams or down sewage
drains.
- Recycle used engine oil by taking it to a used
engine oil collection facility in your area, or
contact a service station .
Cooling system
Coolant
The engine coo ling system is filled with a mixture
of pur ified water a nd coolant addit ive at t he fa c-
tory. This coolant must not be not changed.
The coolant leve l is monitored through the . in-
d icator light ~ page 26. Howeve r, we do recom-
Adding coolant
mend occasionally check ing the coo la nt level
manually.
vehicle matches the per cent age appropriate
for the climate . This is especially important
when driving in colder climates.
- If the appro priate coo la nt additive is not
availab le in an eme rgency, do not add any
ot her additive. You could damage the en-
gine. If this happens, only use water and re-
store the correct mixture ratio with the
specified coolant add itive as soo n as poss i-
ble.
- Only ref ill w ith new coolant.
- Radiator sealant must not be mixed with
the coolant.

If you must add coolant, use a m ixt ure of water

a nd coolant addit ive. Mixing t he coolant additive
with d istilled water is recommended .

Coolant additive
The coolant addit ive is made of anti-freez ing and
corros ion protection agents. Only use the fo llow-
ing coolant add it ives. These additives may be
mixed w ith each other. Fig. 2 69 Engine com partment: release button on coolant
expansion tank
Coolant additive Specification
Observe the safety precautions ~ .&, in Working
G13 TL 774)
in the engine comportmen t on page 322.
G12++ TL 774 G
Checking the engine coolant level
The amount of coo lant additive that needs to be
mixed with water depends on the climate where .. Park the vehicle on a level sur face .
the vehicle will be operated. If the coolant addi - .,.Switch the ignit io n off.
tive percentage is too low, the coolant can freeze .,. Read the coolant level on the coolant expansion
and damage the eng ine. tank ~ fig. 269.
.,.The coolan t level must be between t he MIN and
Coolant Freeze protec- MAXmarki ngs when the engine in co ld. When
additive tion the engi ne is warm it can be sligh t ly above the
Warm min . 40% m in. -13 °F MAXmarking .
reg ions max. 45% (-25 °()
Adding coolant
Cold min. 50% max. -40 °F
reg ions max. 55% (-40 °C) Requirement: there must be a residua l amount of
coolan t in the expansion t ank ~CD
-
.. Let the engi ne cool down .
- Befo re the start of winter, have an author- .,.Place a clot h over the coolant expansion tank
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Se rvice cap .
Facility check if the coolant additive in your

328
 Checking and Filling

.. Push the release button ¢ fig. 269 and careful- Brake fluid
ly unscrew the cap to the left until you feel re-
sistance ¢ ,&. .
.. Push the release button again and remove the
cap completely .
.. Add coolant mixed in the correct ratio
¢ page 328 up to the MAXmarking .
.. Make sure that the fluid level remains stable .
Add more coolant if necessary .
.,.Turn the cap to the right to secure it until you
feel resistance a second time.
Fig. 270 Engine compartment: cap on brake fluid reservo ir
Coolant loss usually indicates there is a leak . Im-
mediately drive your vehicle to an authorized Observe the safety precautions ¢ A in Working
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility in the engine compartment on page 322 .
and have the cooling system inspected. If the
cooling system is not leaking, a loss can come Checking the brake fluid level
from the coolant boiling through overheating .. Read the brake fluid level on the brake fluid
and being pushed out of the cooling system. reservoir ¢ page 324, fig . 267. The brake fluid
level must be between the MIN and MAXmark-
A WARNING ings ¢ ,& .
- The cooling system is under pressure. Do
The brake fluid level is monitored automatically.
not open the coolant expansion tank cap
when the eng ine is hot. This increases the Changing the brake fluid
risk of burns .
Have the brake fluid changed regularly by an au-
- The coolant additive and the coolant can be thorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
dangerous to your health. For this reason, Facility.
keep the coolant in the original container
and away from children. There is a risk of
poisoning.
A WARNING
- If the brake flu id level is below the MIN
- When working in the engine compartment,
marking, it can impair the braking effect
remember that the radiator fan can switch
and driving safety, wh ich increase the risk of
on even if the ign ition is switched off, which
an accident. Do not continue dr iving. See an
increases the risk of injury.
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

CDNote Service Facility for assistance.

- If the brake fluid is old, bubbles may form
Do not add coolant if the expansion tank is in the brake system dur ing heavy bra king.
empty. There may be air in the cooling sys- This would impair braking performance and
tem, wh ich increases the risk of engine dam- driving safety, which increases the risk of an
age . If this is the case, do not continue driv- accident.
ing . See an authorized Audi dealer or author- - To ensure the brake system functions cor-
ized Audi Service Facility for assistance. rectly, only use brake fluids that comp ly
with VW standard 501 14 or
FMVSS-116 DOT4.
u
(0
......
N
r--.
N
CDNote
...... - If the brake flu id level is above the MAX
0
0
:E marking, brake fluid may leak out over the
<t

329
Ch e ck ing and Filling
edge of the reservoir and result in damage
to the vehicle .
- Do not get any bra ke fluid on the ve hicle
paint, beca use it will cor rode t he pa int .
Battery
General warnings about batteries
Because of the complex power supply, a ll wor k
on batte ries such as disconnecting, rep laci ng,
etc. s hou ld only be per formed by an au t hor ized
Aud i dea ler or autho rized Aud i Serv ice Facility
c;>.&..
The te rm "vehicle battery " refers to the 12 Volt
bat tery in your veh icle .
Detailed warnings for the vehicle battery:
Wear eye protection .
® time
Battery acid is high ly corrosive. Wear pro-
A tective gloves and eye protection.
Fire, sp a rks, open flame and smo king a re
@ forbidden.
A highly explosive mixtu re of gases can
A form when charging ba t te ries.
Keep children away from battery acid and
® batteries.
A WARNING
All work on t he batte ry or electrical system in
your vehicle can result in injuries, chemical
burns, accide nts or burns. Because of this, a ll
wor k mu st be perf or med only by an au thor -
ized Aud i de al e r o r a uthorized Aud i Se rvice
Facility .
A WARNING
California Proposit ion 65 Warning:
- Battery posts, termin al s and re late d acces-
so ries contai n lead and lead compounds,
chem ica ls known to the State of California
to cause cance r and rep roduct ive problems.
Wash hands after handling.
330
(D Note
Protect the vehicle battery aga inst freezing if
the ve hicle wi ll be par ked for long periods of
time so t hat it is not destroyed by "freezing"
c;>page 331.
@ For the sake of the environment
'8 Batteries conta in polluting s ubstances such
as sulfur ic acid and lead. Contact an aut hor-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility for more informat io n.
· Vehicle battery
The term "vehicle battery" refers to the 12 Volt
battery in your vehicle.
Not running the vehicle for long periods of
If you do not d rive your vehicle for severa l days or
weeks, electrical equ ipment is gradually sca led
back or sw itched off . This reduces energy use and
ensures t he vehicle will be ab le to st art after long
per iods of t ime 9 page 153. Some co nvenience
funct ions, such as interio r ligh t ing or power seat
adjus t ment, may not be avail a ble un de r cer t ain
circumstances. These convenience functions will
be available again once you switch the ignition on
and sta rt the engine .
Even when ele ctr ical eq uipment is switc hed off,
t he eq uipment can still dra in the vehicle ba tte ry
if the ve hicle is not driven for long periods of
time. Deep drai ning results in a chemica l reaction
that destroys the ins ide of the vehicle batte ry.
The vehicle battery must be cha rged every month
to reduce the risk of this happening c;>page 331.
Contact an authorized Aud i dea ler or authorized
Audi Se rvice Facility for more information.
Winter operation
Cold weather places higher demands on the vehi-
cle battery. This resu lts in reduced starting abili-
ty. Have the vehicle battery chec ked by an au-
thorized Aud i dea ler or authorized Audi Service
Facility befo re t he cold ti m e of year.
 Checking and Filling

Charging the vehicle battery authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi

Service Facility for more information.
- Do not connect or disconnect the charging
cable while charging because this increases
the risk of an explosion.

@ Tips
- Only charge the vehicle battery through the
connections in the engine compartment.
- Read all of the manufacturer's instructions
Fig. 271 Engine compar tment : connec tors for a charg er
for the charger before charging the vehicle
and jump s tart cables battery.

Requirement : only use chargers with a maximum Windshield washer

charging voltage of 30 amps/14.8 Volts. The
vehicle battery cables remain connected .
system
.,.Read the warn ings ¢ & in General warnings
about batteries on page 330 and ¢ ,& .
.,.Switch off the ignition and all electrical equip-
ment .
.,.Open the hood ¢ page 32 3 .
.,.Open the red cover on the positive terminal
¢ fig . 271 .
.,.Clamp the charger terminal clamps to the jump
start pins according to the instructions . (pin
under the red cover = "positive", pin with hex- Fig. 272 Engine compar tment: was her fluid reservoir cap

agonal head= "negative ") .

.,.Insert the power cable for the charging device
into the socket and switch the device on .
.,.At the end of the charging process, sw itch the
charger off and pull the power cable out of the
socket .
.,.Remove the charger terminal clamps.
.,. Close the red cover on the pos itive terminal.
.,.Close the hood ¢ page 323 .
A WARNING
-A highly explosive mixture of gases can form
when charging batteries. Only charge the
vehicle battery in well-vent ilated areas .
-A drained vehicle battery can freeze at tem-
peratures around 32 QF(0 QC).A frozen or
thawed veh icle battery must not be charged
u and must not be used anymore. The battery
(0
...... housing can crack and battery acid can leak
N
r--.
N
......
out if ice forms, which increases the risk of
0
0 an explosion and chemical burns. Contact an
:E
<t
The windshi eld washer fluid reservoir O contains
th e cleaning solution for t he windshield and the
he adlight washer system* ¢ page 324, fig. 26 7 .
The reservo ir capacity can be found in
¢ page 379.
To reduce th e risk of lime scal e d eposits on t he
spray no zzles, use clean water with low amounts
of calcium. Always add window cleane r to the wa-
ter . When the outside temperatures are cold, an
anti -freezing agent should be added to the water
so that it does not freeze.
(D Note
- The concentration of ant i-freezing agent
must be adjusted to the vehicle operating
conditions in the respective climate . A con-
centration that is too high can lead to vehi-
cle damage.
- Never add radiator anti-freeze or other addi-
tives to the washer fluid. .,..

331
Ch e ck ing and Filling

- Do not use a glass cleaner that contains the mileage on the vehicle is low, do not ex -
paint solvents, because this could damage ceed the time for the next service .
the pa int .

Service interval display

The service interval display detects when your ve-
hicle is due for service.

Checking service int erval s

You can check the remaining distance or time un -
til the next oil change or next inspection in the
Infotainment system .

.. Se lect in the Infotainment system: the IMENUI

button > Vehicle > left contro l button > Service
& checks > Service inte rval s.

Resetting the indicator

An author ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi
Serv ice Facility will rese t the serv ice interval d is-
p lay after performing serv ice .

If you have changed the oil yourself, you must re-

set the oil change interva l.

.. Select in the Infotainment system: the !MENUI

button > Vehicle > left contro l button > Service
& checks > Service interval s > Reset oil change
interval.

If an oil change or inspection is due, you can ac-

cess it in the Infotainment system. The display
wo rks in two stages:

- Service reminde r: after a certain distance is

driven, a message appears in the inst rument
cluster d isp lay every time the ign ition is switch-
ed on. The rema ining distance and t ime is d is-
played br iefly.
- Service due : if your veh icle has reached a serv-
ice interval, a message appears briefly after
switc hing the igni t ion on.

(D Note
- Only reset the oil change indicato r if the oil
was changed.
- Follow ing the service intervals is critical to
maintain ing the service life a nd va lue of
you r vehicle, especia lly t he engine. Even if

332
 Wheels

Wheels and braking ability. If summer

Wheels and Tires
General information
.,.Check your tires regularly for
damage (punctures, cuts, cracks
and bulges). Remove foreign ob-
jects from the tire tread.
.,.If driving over curbs or similar
obstacles, drive slowly and ap-
proach the curb at an angle.
.,.Have faulty tires or rims re-
placed immediately.
"'Protect your tires from oil,
grease and fuel.
.,.Mark tires before remov ing
them so that the same running
direction can be maintained if
they are reinstalled.
"'Lay tires flat when storing and
store them in a cool, dry location
with as little exposure to light as
possible.
tires are used in very cold
temperatures, cracks can form
on the tread bars, resulting in
permanent tire damage that
can cause loud driving noise
and unbalanced tires.
-Burnished, polished or
chromed rims must not be
used in winter driving condi-
tions. The surface of the rims
does not have sufficient corro-
sion protection for this and
could be permanently dam-
aged by road salt or similar
substances.
Tire designations

(D Note

-Please note that summer and

winter tires are designed for
the conditions that are typical
in those seasons. Audi recom-
mends using winter tires dur-
ing the winter months. Low
temperatures significantly de-
-"....
ua,
N
crease the elasticity of summ- Fig. 273 Tire designations on the side-
N
wall Ill>
er tires, which affects traction
..
0
0
l:

333
Wheels
(D Tires for passenger vehicles
(if applicable)
P indicates a tire for a passenger
vehicle. T indicates a tire desig-
nated for temporary use.
@ Nominal width
Nominal width of the tire be-
tween the sidewalls in millime-
ters. In general: the larger the
number, the wider the tire.
@ Aspect ratio
Height/width ratio expressed as a
percentage.
@ Tire construction
R indicates a radial tire.
® Rim diameter
Size of the rim diameter in inches.
@ Load index and speed rating
The load index indicates the tire's
load-carrying capacity.
The speed rating indicates the
maximum permitted speed ¢ & in
Winter tires on page 348.
"EXTRA LOAD", "xl" or "RF" indi-
cates that the tire is reinforced or
is an Extra Load tire.
Speed rat- Maximum permitted speed
ing
p up to 93 mph (150 km/h)
Q up to 99 mph (160 km/h)
334
Speed rat- Maximum permitted speed
Ing
R up t o 106 mph (170 km/h)
s up to 110 mph (180 km/h)
T up t o 118 mph (190 km/h)
u up to 124 mph (200 km/h)
H up t o 130 mph (210 km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)al
z above 149 mph (240 km/h)al
w up to 168 mph (270 km/h) al
y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)al
a) For tires above 149 mph (240 km/h),
tire manufacturers sometimes use the
code "ZR".
(j) US DOT number (TIN) and
manufacture date
The manufacture date is listed on
the tire sidewall (it may only ap-
pear on the inner side of the tire):
DOT ... 2216 ...
means, for example, that the tire
was produced in the 22nd week of
the year 2016.
@ Audi Original Tires
Audi Original equipment tires
with the designation "AO" have
been specially matched to your
Audi. When used correctly, these
tires meet the highest standards
for safety and handling. An au-
thorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility will be
able to provide you with more in-
formation.

® Mud and snow capability
"M/5" or "M+S" indicates the tire
has properties making it suitable
to drive in mud or snow. ~ indi-
cates a winter tire .
@ Composition of the tire cord
and materials
The number of plies indicates the
number of rubber ized fabric lay-
ers in the t ire. In general : the
more layers, the more weight a
tire can carry . Tire manufacturers
must also specify the materials
used in the ti re . These incl ude
stee l, nylon, polyester and other
materials .
@ Maximum permitted load
This number indicates the maxi-
mum load in kilograms and
pounds that the tire can carry .
@ Uniform tire quality grade
standards for treadwear,
traction and temperature
resistance
Treadwear , traction and tempera-
ture ranges¢ page 350 .
@ Running direction
The arrows indicate the running
u
direction of un idirectional t ires .
.... You must always follow the speci-
"'
N
"....
N
0
0
...
l'.
Wheels
fied running direction
¢ page 365.
€3)Maximum permitted
inflation pressure
This number ind icates the max i-
mum pressure to which a tire can
be inflated unde r normal operat-
ing conditions.
Glossary of tire and loading
terminology
Accessoryweight
means the combined we igh t (in
excess of those standard items
wh ich may be replaced) of auto-
matic transmission, power steer-
ing, power brakes, power win-
dows, power seats, radio, and
heater, to the extent that these
items are availab le as factory-in -
stalled equipment (whether in-
stalled or not).
Aspect ratio
means the ratio of the height to
the w idth of the tire in percent .
Numbers of 55 or lower indicate a
low s idewall for improved steer-
ing response and better overall
handling on dry pavement .
33 5
Wheels
Bead
means the part of the tire that is
made of steel wires, wrapped or
reinforced by ply cords and that is
shaped to fit the rim.
Bead separation
means a breakdown of the bond
between components in the bead.
Cord
means the strands forming the
plies in the tire .
Cold tire inflation pressure
means the ti re pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufac-
turer for a t ire of a des ignated
size that has not been driven for
more t han a couple of miles (kilo-
meters) at low speeds in the
three hour period before the tire
pressure is measured or adjusted.
Curb weight
means the weight of a motor ve-
hicle with standard equipment in-
cluding the maximum capacity of
fuel, oil, and coolant, air condi-
tioning and additiona l weight of
opt ional equipment.
Extra load tire
means a tire des igned to operate
at higher loads and at higher in-
33 6
flation pressures than t he corre-
spond ing standa rd tire. Extra load
tires may be identified as "XL",
"xl", "EXTRALOAD", or "RF" on
the sidewall.
Gross Axle Weight Rating
("GAWR ")
means the load-carrying capacity
of a single axle system , measured
at the ti re-gro und interfaces.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
("GVWR")
means the max imum total loaded
weight of the vehicle .
Groove
means the space between two ad-
jacent tread ribs .
Load rating (code)
means the max imum load tha t a
tire is rated t o carry for a given in-
flation pressure. You may not find
this informat ion on all ti res be-
cause it is not required by law.
Maximum load rating
means the load rating for a t ire at
the maximum permissible infla-
tion pressure for that ti re.
Maximum loaded vehicle
weight
means the sum of:
 Wheels

(a) Curb weight Ply

(b) Accessory weight means a layer of rubber-coated
(c) Vehicle capacity weigh t , and parallel cords .
(d) Production options we ight
Production options weight
Maximum (permissible)
means the combined weight of
inflation pressure
those installed regular production
means the maximum cold infla- options weighing over 5 lbs. (2.3
tion pressure to which a t ire may kg) in excess of those standard
be inflated. Also called "maxi - items which they replace, not pre-
mum inflation pressure." viously considered in curb weight
Normal occupant weight or accessory weight, including
heavy duty brakes, ride levelers,
means 150 lbs. (68 kilograms)
roof rack, heavy duty battery, and
times the number of occupants
special trim .
seated in the veh icle up to the to-
tal seating capacity of your vehi- Radial ply tire
cle. means a pneumatic tire in which
Occupant distribution the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at substantially 90
means distribution of occupants
degrees to the centerline of the
in a vehicle.
tread.
Outer diameter
Recommended inflation
means the overall diameter of an pressure
inflated new tire.
see ~ page 336, Cold tire infla-
Overall width tion pressure .
means the linear distance be- Reinforced tire
tween the exteriors of the side-
means a tire designed to operate
walls of an inflated tire, including
at higher loads and at higher in-
elevations due to labeling, deco-
flation pressures than the corre-
rations, or protective bands or
u sponding standard tire. Rein-
~
N
ribs .
"....
N
forced tires may be identified as .,.
0
0

...
l'.

337
Wheels
"XL" "xl" "EXTRALOAD" or "RF"
I I I
on the sidewall.
Rim
means a metal support for a tire
or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Rim diameter
means nominal diameter of the
bead seat . If you change your
wheel size, you will have to pur-
chase new tires to match the new
rim diameter .
Rim size designation
means rim diameter and width.
Rim width
means nomina l distance between
rim flanges.
Sidewall
means that portion of a tire be-
tween the tread and bead .
Speed rating (letter code)
means the speed at which a tire is
designed to be driven for extend -
ed periods of time. The rat ings
range from 93 mph (150 km/h)
to 186 mph (298 km/h) ¢ table
on page 334. You may not find
this information on all tires be -
cause it is not requ ired by law.
33 8
The speed rating letter code,
where applicable, is molded on
the tire sidewall and ind icates the
maximum permissible road
speeds ¢ .&.in Winter tires on
page 348.
Tire pressure monitoring
system
means a system that detects
when one or mo re of a vehicle's
tires are underinflated and illum i-
nat es a low tire pressure warning
telltale .
Tread
means that portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road .
Tread separation
means pulling away of the tread
from the t ire carcass .
Treadwear indicators (TWI)
means the projections within the
principal grooves designed to give
a visua l indication of the deg rees
of wear of the t read. See
¢ page 342, Treadwear indicator
for mo re information on measur-
ing tire wear. .,.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
is a tire information system devel-
oped by the United States Nation-
al Highway Traffic Safety Admin-
istration (NHTSA) that is designed
to help buyers make relat ive com-
parisons among tires . The UTQG
is not a safety rating and not a
guarantee that a tire will last for
a prescribed number of mi les
(kilometers) or perform in acer-
tain way. It simply gives t ire buy -
e rs add itional informa t ion to
combine with other considera -
tions, such as price, brand loya lty
and dealer recommendations . Un-
der UTQG,t ires are graded by t he
tire manufacturers in th ree areas:
treadwear, tr action, and tempera -
ture res istance. The UTQG infor-
mation on the tires, molded into
the s idewalls .
U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number (TIN)
This is the tire's "serial number".
It beg ins with the le t ters "DOT"
and indicates that the tire meets
all federal standards . The nex t
two numbers or letters indicate
the plant where it was manufac -
~
.... tu red , and the last fo ur numbers
~
.... represent the week and yea r of
~ manufacture. For examp le,
...
Wheels
DOT ... 2216 ...
means that t he tire was produced
in the 2 2nd week of 2016 . The
other numbers are marketing co-
des that may or may not be used
by the t ire manufact ur er. This in-
formation is used to contact con-
sumers if a tire defec t req uires a
reca ll.
Vehicle capacity weight
means the rated cargo a nd lug-
gage load plus l S0 lbs . (68 kilo-
grams) t imes the vehicle's desig -
na t ed seating capacity.
Vehicle maximum load on the
tire
means that load on an ind ividual
tire tha t is determined by dist rib-
ut ing to eac h ax le its share of the
maximum loaded vehic le weight
and dividing by two.
Vehicle normal load on the tire
means that load on a n individual
tire that is determined by dist rib-
uting to each ax le its share of the
curb weight , accessory weight ,
and normal occupant weigh t (dis-
tributed in accordance wit h c:::>ta-
ble on page 345) and dividing by
two. .,.
339
Wh e el s
Occupant loading and distri-
bution for vehicle normal load
for various designated seat ing
capacit ies
Refer to the tire inflation pres-
sure label ¢ page 343, fig . 276
for the number of seating posi-
tions . Refer to the table¢ table
on page 345 for the number of
people that correspond to the ve-
hicle normal load .
New tires or wheels
Audi recommends having all work
on tires or wheels performed by
an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility .
These facilities have the proper
knowledge and are equipped with
the required tools and replace-
ment parts.
.,.New tires do not yet have the
optimum gripping properties.
Drive carefully and at moderate
speeds for the first 350 miles
(500 km) with new tires .
.,.Use tires of the same construc-
tion, size (rolling circumference)
and as close to the same tread
pattern as poss ible on all four
wheels .
340
.,.Do not replace tires individually .
At least replace both tires on the
same axle at the same time.
.,.Audi recommends that you use
Audi Original Tires. If you would
like to use different tires, please
note that the tires may perform
differently even if they are the
same size ¢ ,&..
.,.If you would like to equip your
vehicle with a tire/rim combina -
tion that is different from what
was installed at the factory, con-
sult with an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service
Facility before making a pur-
chase ¢ &,.
If the spare t ire is different from
the regular tires installed on the
vehicle - for example, if winter
tires or wide tires are installed -
then only use the spare tire tem-
porarily in case of emergency and
drive carefully while it is in use. It
should be replaced with a regular
tire as soon as possible.
On all wheel drive vehicles, all
four wheels must be equipped
with tires that are the same brand
and have the same construction
and tread pattern so tha t the
drive system is not damaged by .,.
 Wheels

different tire speeds. For this rea-
son, in case of emergency, only
use a spare tire that has the same
circumference as the regular
tires.
&,_WARNING
-Do not use steel rims that are
17 inches or larger. Other-
wise, damage to the vehicle
and an accident could result.
-For technical reasons, it is not
possible to use tires from oth-
er vehicles - in some cases,
you cannot even use tires from
the same vehicle model.
-Make sure that the tires you
select have enough clearance
to the vehicle. Replacement
tires should not be chosen
simply based on the nominal
size, because tires with a dif-
ferent construction can differ
greatly even if they are the
same size. If there is not
enough clearance, the tires or
the vehicle can be damaged
and this can reduce driving
safety and increase the risk of
an accident.
-Only use tires that are more
than six years old when abso-
-"....
ua,
N
N
lutely necessary and drive
carefully when doing so.
-Run-flat tires* may only be
used on vehicles that were
equipped with them at the
factory ¢ page 3 52.
-If you install wheel covers on
the vehicle, make sure they al-
low enough air circulation to
cool the brake system. If they
do not, this could increase the
risk of an accident.
Tire wear/damage
Fig. 274 Tire profile: treadwear indica-
tor
Tire wear
Check the tires regularly for wear.
-Inflation pressure that is too low
or high can increase tire wear
considerably.
-Driving quickly through curves,
rapid acceleration and heavy
braking increase tire wear.

..
0
0
l:

341
Wheels
-Have an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty check the wheel alignment if
there is unusual wear .
-Have the wheels rebalanced if an
imbalance is causing noticeable
vibration in the steering wheel.
If you do not, the tires and other
vehicle components could wear
more quickly.
Treadwear indicator
Original equipment tires contain
treadwear ind icators in the tread
pattern, which are bars that are
1/16 in (1.6 mm) high and are
spaced evenly around the tire per-
pendicular to the running direc-
tion¢ fig . 2 74 . The letters "TWI"
or triangles on the tire sidewall
indicate the location of the tread-
wear indicators .
The tires have reached the mini-
mum tread depth l) when they
have worn down to the treadwear
indicators. Replace the tires with
new ones ¢ ..&..
Tire rotation
Rotating the tires regularly is rec-
ommended to ensure the tires
1> Obey any applicable regulations in your
country.
342
wear evenly. To rotate the tires,
install the tires from the rear axle
on the front axle and vice versa .
This will allow the tires to have
approximately the same length of
service life.
For unidirectional tires, make
sure the tires are installed accord-
ing to the running direction indi-
cated on the tire sidewall
¢page 365.
Hidden damage
Damage to tires and rims can of-
ten occur in locations that are
hidden . Unusual vibrations in the
vehicle or pulling to one side may
indicate that there is tire damage.
Reduce your speed immediately.
Check the tires for damage. If no
damage is visible from the out-
side, drive slowly and caref ully to
the nearest authorized Audi deal-
er or authorized Audi Service Fa-
cility to have the vehicle inspect-
ed .
.&_WARNING
Tread that has worn too low or
different tread depths on the
tires can reduce driving safety. ,..

This can increase the risk of an
accident because it has a nega-
tive effect on handling, driving
through curves, and braking,
and because it increases the
risk of hydroplaning when driv-
ing through deep puddles.
Tire pressure
0
I4
Fig. 275 Driver's side B-pillar: tire pres-
sure label
Fig. 276 Tire pressure label
The correct tire pressure for tires
installed at the factory is listed on
a label¢ fig. 2 75. The label is the
front side of the door pillar (driv-
er's side) ¢ fig. 2 76.
~ Use the t ire pressure specified for
N ty precautions in¢ page 346,
:::;
.... a normal vehicle load when the
0
0
~
<t
Wheels
vehicle is partially loaded ¢ table
on page 345. If driving the vehi-
cle when fully loaded, you must
increase the tire pressure to the
maximum specified pressure ¢ &,.
Checking/correcting tire
pressure
.,.Check the tire pressure at least
once per month and also check it
before every long drive.
.,.Always check the tire pressure
when the tires are cold. Do not
reduce the pressure if it increas -
es when the tires are warm .
.,.Check the label ¢ fig. 2 76 for
the correct tire pressure based
on vehicle load.
.,.Corre ct the tire pressure if nec-
essary .
.,.Store the new tire pressure in
the Infotainment system
¢ page 352.
A WARNING
Always adapt the tire pressure
to your driving style and vehicle
load.
-Overloading can lead to loss of
vehicle control and increase
the risk of an accident. Read
and follow the important safe-
Tires and vehicle load limits .
343
Wheels

-The tire must flex more if the (i} For the sake of the environment

tire pressure is too low or if -Tire pressure that is too low

the vehicle speed or load are
too high . This heats the tire up
too much. This increases the
risk of an accident because it
can cause the tire to burst and
result in loss of vehicle con-
(D
trol.
-Incorrect tire pressure in-
creases tire wear and has a
negative effect on driving and
braking behavior, which in-
creases the risk of an accident.
(D Note
increases fuel consumption.
-Fuel consumption may also in-
crease when driving with the
comfort tire pressure is se-
lected .
Tips
Audi recommends using the
tire pressure specified for a
normal load ¢ table on
page 345 or for a full load
when the vehicle is partially
loaded.

Replace lost valve caps to re-

duce the risk of damage to the
tire valves.

Tire pressure table

Please note that the information
contained in the following table
was correct at the time of print-
ing, and the information is sub-
ject to change. If there are differ-
ences between this information
and the tire pressures specified
on the label on the driver's side 8-
pillar, always follow the specifica-
tion on the 8-pillar label
¢ page 343, fig. 275.
Make sure that the tire designa-
tion on your tire matches the des-
ignation on the tire pressure label
and the tire pressure table.
The following table lists recom-
mended tire pressures in cold
tires according to the load and
the size of the tires installed.

344
 Wheels

Model/ Tire designation Tire pressure

Engine Normal load Maximum load
(up to 3 people)
front rear front rear
PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA PSI kPA
255 / 60 Rl8 108H
32 220 32 220 32 220 35 240
All Season
255 / 55 Rl9 lllH
32 220 32 220 32 220 35 24 0
All Season
Q7:
285/45 R20 112H
2.0L 32 220 32 220 32 220 35 24 0
All Season
4 cylinders
285 / 45 R20 112V
Gasoline 32 220 32 220 32 220 35 240
High Performance
engine
285 / 40 R21109Y
32 220 32 220 32 220 35 24 0
High Performance
285/35 R22 106V
32 220 32 220 35 240 38 260
High Performance
255 / 60 Rl8 108H
32 220 32 220 32 220 35 240
All Season
2 55 / 55 Rl9 lllH
32 220 32 220 33 230 36 250
All Season
Q7:
285 / 45 R20 112H
3.0L 32 220 32 220 32 220 35 240
All Season
6 cylinders
285 / 45 R20 11 2V
Gasoline 32 22 0 32 220 32 220 35 240
High Performance
engine
285/40 R21109Y
32 220 32 220 32 220 35 24 0
High Performance
285 / 35 R22 106V
32 220 32 220 38 260 41 280
High Performance
255/60 Rl8 108H
32 220 32 220 33 230 36 2 50
All Season
255/55 Rl9 lllH
32 220 32 220 35 240 38 260
All Season
Q7:
285 / 45 R20 112H
3.0L 32 220 32 220 33 230 36 250
All Season
6 cylinders
285/45 R20 112V
Diesel en- 32 22 0 32 220 33 230 36 250
High Performance
gine
285 / 40 R21109Y
32 220 32 220 33 230 36 250
High Performance
285 / 35 R22 106V
32 220 32 220 39 270 42 290
u High Performance
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

345
Wheels
&_ WARNING
Please note the important safe -
ty precautions regarding tire
pressure¢ page 343 and load
limits¢ page 346.
Tires and vehicle load limits
There are limits to the amount of
load or weight that any vehicle
and any tire can carry. A vehicle
that is overloaded will not handle
well and is more difficult to stop .
Overloading can not only lead to
loss of vehicle control, but can al-
so damage important parts of the
vehicle and can lead to sudden
tire failure, including a blowout
and sudden deflat ion that can
cause the vehicle to crash.
Your safety and that of your pas-
sengers also depends on making
sure that load limits are not ex-
ceeded. Vehicle load includes ev-
erybody and everything in and on
the vehicle . These load limits are
technically referred to as the vehi-
cle's Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing ("GVWR").
The "GVWR"includes the weight
of the basic vehicle, all factory in-
stalled accessories, a full tan k of
fuel, oil, coolant and other fluids
346
plus maximum load. The maxi-
mum load includes the number of
passengers that the veh icle is in-
tended to carry ("seating capaci-
ty") with an assumed weight of
150 lbs (68 kg) for each passen-
ger at a designated seat ing pos i-
tion and the total weight of any
luggage in the vehicle. If you tow
a trailer, t he weight of the trailer
hitch and the tongue we ight of
the loaded trailer must be includ-
ed as part of the vehicle load.
The Gross Axle Weight Rating
("GAWR")is the maximum load
that can be applied at each of the
vehicle's two axles .
The fact that there is an upper
limit to your vehicle's Gross Vehi-
cle Weight Rating means that the
total weight of whatever is being
carried in the vehicle (including
the weight of a trailer hitch and
the tongue weight of the loaded
trailer) is limited . The more pas-
sengers in the vehicle or passen-
gers who are heavier than the
standard weights assumed mean
that less weight can be carried as
luggage .
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
and the Gross Axle Weight Rating .,.

are listed on the safety compli-
ance sticker label located on the
driver's side 8-pillar.
.&_WARNING
Overloading a vehicle can cause
loss of vehicle control, a crash
or other accident, serious per-
sonal injury, and even death.
-Carrying more weight than
your vehicle was designed to
carry will prevent the vehicle
from handling properly and
increase the risk of the loss of
vehicle control.
-The brakes on a vehicle that
has been overloaded may not
be able to stop the vehicle
within a safe distance.
-Tires on a vehicle that has
been overloaded can fail sud-
denly, including a blowout and
sudden deflation, causing loss
of control and a crash.
-Always make sure that the to-
tal load being transported -
including the weight of a trail-
er hitch and the tongue
weight of a loaded trailer -
does not make the vehicle
heavier than the vehicle's
u Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
...
"'
N
"...
N equals 1400 lbs. and there will .,,.
0
~
...
Wheels
Determining correct load
limit
Use the example below to calcu-
late the total weight of the pas-
sengers and luggage or other
things that you plan to transport
so that you can make sure that
your vehicle will not be overload-
ed.
Steps for Determining Correct
Load Limit
1. Locate the statement "THE
COMBINEDWEIGHTOF OCCU-
PANTSANDCARGOSHOULD
NEVEREXCEEDXXXKGOR XXX
LBS" on your vehicle's placard
(tire inflation pressure label)
¢ page 343, fig. 2 76.
2. Determine the combined
weight of the driver and pas-
sengers that will be riding in
your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight
of the driver and passengers
from "XXX"kilograms or "XXX"
pounds shown on the stick-
er¢ page 343, fig. 2 76.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For ex-
ample, if the "XXX"amount
347
Wh e els
be five 1 SO lbs. passe ngers in
your vehicle, th e amou nt of
available carg o and lugga ge
load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400- 7 50 (5 X 150) = 650
lbs.)
5. Determin e t he combined
weight of luggag e and cargo
being loade d on the vehicle.
That weight may not safely ex-
ceed t he available car go and
lugg age loa d capacity calculat-
ed in Step 4 .
6 . If your vehicle will be towing a
tr ailer, load from your tr ailer
will be tran sferred to your ve-
hicle. Consult t his manual t o
det ermin e how th is reduces
th e available car go and lug-
gage load capa city of your vehi-
cle.
~c heck th e tire sidewall
(¢ pa ge 333, fig. 2 73) t o de te r-
mine the de signated load rating
for a spe cific tire.
Wheel bolts and rims
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/t ighten
easi ly.
Rims
Rims with a bolted rim ring* or with bolted whee l
covers* consist of mu ltiple pieces . These compo-
nents were bolted together using special bolts
348
and a spec ial proced ure. You must not repair or
disassemb le them c:::>.&..
A WARNING
Wheel bolts that are tightened or repaired in-
correct ly can become loose and resu lt in loss
of vehicle contro l, which increases the risk of
an accident. For the correct tighten ing spec ifi-
cation, see c:::>page 365, Finishing.
- Always keep the wheel bolts and the
threads in the wheel hub clean and free of
grease .
- Only use wheel bolts that fit the rim.
- Always have damaged rims repaired by an
author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility. Never repa ir or disassemb le
rims yourself, because this increases the risk
of an accident.
Winter tires
Winter ti res significant ly improve the vehicle's
hand ling when driving in winter conditions. Be-
cause of their construct ion (width, compound,
tread pattern), summer tires provide less t rac-
tion on ice and snow .
.,.Use wint er t ires on all four wheels.
.,.Only use winter tires that are approved for your
vehicle.
.,.Please note that the maximum permitted
speed may be lower with winter tires c::>&_. An
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
ice Facility can inform you about the maximum
permitted speed for your tires .
.,.Check the tire pressure after installing wheels
page 343 .
c::>
The effectiveness of winter tires is reduced great-
ly when the tread is worn down to a depth of
0.16 in (4 mm). The cha racteristics of winte r
t ires also decrease greatly as the t ire ages , re-
gard less of the rema ining t read.
.&_WARNING -
- Never drive fas t er than the maximum pe r-
mitted speed for your tires . This could cause
the tires to heat up too much. This increases ~
 Wh e el s

t he risk of an accident because it can cause

the tire t o burst.
A WARNING
Using incorrect snow chains or install ing snow
- Always adapt your drivi ng to the road and
chains incorrectly can result in loss of veh icle
traff ic conditions. Drive carefully and red uce
control, which increases the risk of an acci-
your speed on icy or slippery roads. Even
dent.
winter tires can lose traction on black ice.

@ For the sake of the environment

(D Note
- Snow chains can damage the rims/wheel
Reinstall summer ti res at the appropriate
covers* if the chains come into direct con-
time, because they provide better handling
tact with t hem . Remove the wheel covers*
when roads are free of snow and ice. Summer
first . Use coat ed snow chains.
tires cause less road noise, t ire wear and fuel
- Do not install and use snow chains if the re is
consumption.
a malfu nction in the air suspension*, be-
(D Tips cause the vehicl e height w ill be very low . If
you dr ive w ith snow chains anyway, the
You can also use all season tires instead of
w heel housings and ot her vehicl e compo-
w inter tires . Please note that in some coun-
nents can be severely damaged.
tries where w inter t ires are required, only
w inter t ires with the die.
symbol may be per- (0 Tips
m itted.
When using snow chains, it may be usefu l t o
swi tc h the offroad mode on q page 149 .
Snow chains

Snow chains not only imp rove the driving in wi n· Low-profiletires

t er road cond itions, but also the brak ing. Applies to: vehicles with low- profile tires

" Only insta ll snow chains on the front wheels .
" Check and cor rect the seat ing of the snow
chains after dr iving a few feet, if necessary. Fol-
low the inst ruct ions from the ma nufa cturer .
" Note the maximum permit t ed speed w hen driv -
ing with snow chains . Do not exceed 30 mph
(SO km/h).
Use of snow chains is only perm itted with certain
rim/ti re combinations due to tec hnical reasons.
Check with an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facili ty to see if yo u may use
snow chains.
Use fine-mesh snow chains. They must not add
mo re t han 0.53 in (13 .5 mm) in height , including
the chain lock .
You must remove t he snow chains on roads with -
out snow . Otherw ise, you could impair dr iving
u abi lity and damage the tir es.
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Your vehicle is equipped with low -profi le tires* at
the factory . Compared to other tire/rim combina-
tions, low-prof ile tires offer a w ider tread surface
and a larger rim diameter with shorter t ire side-
walls. This results in an agile dr iving style. How-
ever, it may reduce the level of comfort and in-
crease road noise when driving on roads in poor
condit ion.
Low-profile t ires can become damaged more
quickly than standard tires when dr iving over
large bumps, potholes , manhole covers, speed
bumps and curbs. Therefo re, it is particularly im-
port ant to mainta in the correct ti re pressure
q poge 343.
To reduce the risk of damage to the tires and
rims, drive very caref ull y on poor roads.
Check your wheels regu larly every 2,000 mi
(3,000 km) for damage . For example, check for
bulges/cracks on the tires or deformations/
cracks on the rims . .,..

349
Wheels
After a heavy impact or damage, have the tires
and rims inspected or replaced immediately by
an authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility .
Low-profile tires can wear out faster than stand-
ard tires.
Summer tires are not suitable for cold weather ,
snow or black ice. If you are driving in these con-
ditions, use winter or all season tires
¢ page 348.
Uniform tire quality grading
- Tread wear
- Traction AA A B C
- Temperature ABC
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire side wall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width ¢ page 333, fig. 273.
For example: Tread wear 200 , Traction AA, Tem-
perature A.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course .
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one
and one half (1 1/2) times as well on the govern-
ment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, Band C. Those grades represent the tire 's
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured un-
der controlled conditions on specified govern-
ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete . A tire
350
marked C may have poor traction performance
¢ _&.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the mate-
rial of the tire to degenerate and reduce ti re life,
and excessive temperature can lead to sudden
tire failure ¢ & .
The grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
ance which all passenger car tires must meet un-
der the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels
of performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law .
A WARNING
-
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight -ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning or peak traction charac-
teristics.
A WARNING
.
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla -
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup and
possible tire failure.
A WARNING
-
Temperature grades apply to tires that are
properly inflated and not over or underinflat-
ed.

Tire pressure monitoring
system
UJGeneral notes
Each tire, including t he spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and inflat-
ed to the inflation pressure recommended by the
veh icle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or
tire inflat ion pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the veh icle placard or t ire inflation pressure la-
be l, you shou ld determine the prope r ti re infla-
tion pressure fo r those t ires) .
As an added safety feature , your veh icle has been
equ ipped w ith a t ire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire press ure te ll-
tale whe n one or more of your t ires is significant-
ly under- infla t ed . Accordingly, when t he low tire
pressure tellta le illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper press ure. Driving on a signifi -
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to t ire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,
and may affect the veh icle's handling and stop-
ping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's re-
sponsib ility to ma inta in correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached t he leve l
to tr igger illum inat ion of t he TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your veh icle has also been equ ipped w ith a TPMS
malfunct ion ind icator to indicate when the sys-
tem is not operat ing properly. The TPMS ma l-
function indicator is combined w ith t he low tire
pressure t ellta le. Whe n t he system de t ects a
mal function, the te lltale will flash fo r approxi -
mate ly one min ute and then remain continuo usly
illum inated. This sequence will continue upon
subseq uent veh icle start-ups as long as the ma l-
function exists .
u When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
co
...... the system may not be ab le to detect or signa l
N
r-...
N
...... low tire press ure as intended. TPMS ma lfunctions
0
0 may occur for a var iety of reasons, including the
:E:
'<t
Wh e el s
insta llation of replacement or alternate tires or
whee ls on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning proper ly. Always check the
TPMS ma lfunction te lltale after replac ing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the rep lacement or a lternate tires a nd
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to fu nction
prope rly.
If the tire pressure monitoring indicator
appears
The tire pressure indicator in the instrument
cluster informs you if the tire pressure is too low
or if there is a system mo/function .
Using the ABS se nsors, the t ire pressu re moni t or-
ing system compares t he tire tread circumfer -
en ce and vibration character ist ics of the ind ividu-
al tires . If the press ure changes in one o r more
t ires , th is is indicated in the instrument cluster
display with an indicato r light [I] and a message.
If only one tire is affected, the location of that
t ire will be indicated.
The tire pressures must be stored in the Infotain -
ment system again each time the pressures
change (switching between partial and full load
pressure) or after changing or replac ing a tire on
your vehicle c:>page 352. The tire pressure mon i-
tor ing system on ly mon itors the tire pressure you
have stored . Refer t o the t ire pressu re label fo r
the recommended t ire pressu re fo r yo ur vehicle
c:>page 343, fig. 2 76.
Tire tread circumference and vibra t ion characte r-
ist ics can change and cause a tire press ure wa rn-
ing if :
- the t ire pressure in one or more tires is too low
- the t ires have structural damage
- the t ire was rep laced or the t ire pressu re was
changed and it was not stored c:>page 352
- tires that a re on ly pa rtially used are replaced
w ith new tires
Indicator lights
[I]- Loss of pressu re in at leas t one t ire c:>,&..
Check the tires and replace or repair if necessary .
Check/correct the pressures of all four tires and .,.
351
Wh e els
store the pressure again in the I nfotainment
system ¢ page 352.
mm (Tire Pressure Monito ring System) Tire
pressure: malfunction ! See owner' s manual. If
mm appears after switch ing the ignit ion on or
while driving and the [I] indicator light in the in-
strument cluster blinks fo r approximately one
minute and then stays on, there is system mal-
function. Try to store the correct tire pressures
¢ page 352 . In some cases, you must drive for
several minutes after storing the pressures until
the ind icator light turns off . If the indicator light
does t urn off or tu rns on again afte r a short peri-
od of time , drive to an aut horized Audi dealer or
author ized Audi Service Facility immed iate ly to
have the ma lfunction corrected .
A WARNING
- If the t ire pressu re indicator appears in the
display, reduce your speed immediate ly and
avoid any hard steer ing or braking maneu-
vers. Stop as soon as possib le and check the
t ires and their pressu re.
- The driver is responsib le for maintaining the
correct tire pressure. You must check the
t ire pressure regu larly.
- Under certain conditions (such as a sporty
dr iving style, winter cond itions or unpaved
roads), the tire pressure mon itoring system
indicator may be delayed.
@ Tips
- The t ire pressure monitoring system can al-
so stop work ing when there is an ESCmal-
funct ion.
- Using snow chains may result in a system
malfunction.
- The t ire pressure monitoring system in your
Audi was calibrated with "A udi Orig inal
Tires" ¢ page 340. Using t hese ti res is rec-
ommended .
352
' Storing tire pressures
If the tire pressure changes or a tire is replaced,
it must be confirmed in the Infotainment sys-
tem .
" Make sure before stor ing that the t ire pressures
of all four tires meet the specified values and
are adapted to the load ¢ page 343 .
" Switch t he ignit ion on.
" Select in the Infotainment system: IMENU Jbut -
ton > Vehicle > Service & checks > Tire pres-
sure monitor > Store tire pressure > Yes, store
now .
(D Tips
Do not store the tire pressures if snow chains
are installed .
Run-flat tires
'
Introduction
Applies to: vehicles with run-flat tires
A run-flat tire helps to maintain vehicle mobility
when there is a loss of pressure.
Run-flat tires have reinforced sidewalls that pro-
tect the tire if there is a loss of pressure.
If the ti re pressure monitoring system indicates a
loss of pressure in one or several ti res, you can
continue driving on run-flat tires fo r at least 20
miles (30 km). Drive to an authorized Audi dealer
or authorized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the problem corrected.
Continuing to d rive on run-flat tire s is no
longe r possible if
- there is visible damage to the tires, such as
cracks in the sidewalls .
- strong vibrat ions are felt wh ile driving, or the
tire begins to smoke due to a strong build-up of
heat .
- the t ire was heavily damaged, for example in an
accident There is a risk that parts of the tire
tread will detach and damage important veh i-
cle components .
- the Electron ic Stabilization Contro l (ESC)is not
working or is cont inuously running .
 Wh e el s

- the tire pressure monitoring system is not

working .
If it is no longer possible t o continue dr iving de-
spite having run-flat tires, see an authori zed Audi
dealer or autho rized Aud i Service Facility for as-
sistance.
(D Tips
- Audi Original run-flat tires can be ident ified
by the "AOE" labeli ng on the t ire sidewall.
- You can use the tire mobility kit
~ page 360 on run-flat tires.

A WARNING
Run-flat tires may only be used on vehicles
that were equipped with them at the factory.
- The vehicle must have suspension designed
for run-f lat tires and a factory- installed tire
pressure monitoring system.
- Incorrect use of run-flat tires can lead to ve-
hicle damage or accidents . Contact an au-
thorized Aud i dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility to learn if run-flat tires may
be used on your vehicle and if so, which
ones.
- If run-flat tires are used, they must be in-
stalled on all four wheels. Mixing tire types
is not permi t ted.
- If you have to dr ive when the tire pressure is
too low or there is no t ire pressure, note the
following:
- Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/
h) because this increases the risk of an ac-
cident. Observe any laws specific to the
country where you are driv ing.
- Avoid full-throttle acceleration, heavy
braking, and fast cornering, because this
increases the risk of an accident.
- The vehicle may become more difficult to
control.
- See an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facili ty for assistance if
the t ire is too heavily damaged.
- Have the faulty tires replaced and the rims
checked for damage by an author ized Audi
dealer or author ized Audi Service Facility.
- The driver is responsib le for the vehicle, for
correcting the t ire pressure and for replac-
ing faulty parts . Therefore, always adjust
yo ur dr iving to the given situation .
u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

353
Care and cleaning
Care and cleaning
General information
Regular, proper care helps to maintain your vehi-
cle's value. It can also be a requirement when
submitting warranty claims for corrosion damage
and paint defects on the body.
The required cleaning and care products can be
obtained from an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Service Facility. Read and follow the in-
structions for use on the packaging .
A WARNING
- Using cleaning and care products incorrectly
can be dangerous to your health .
- Always store cleaning and care products out
of reach of children to reduce the risk of poi-
soning .
@ For the sake of the environment
- Preferably purchase environmentally-friend-
ly cleaning products.
- Do not disposeof leftover cleaning and care
products with household trash.
Car washes
The longer that deposits such as insects, bird
droppings, tree sap or road salt remain on the ve-
hicle, the more the surface can be damaged. High
temperatures such as those caused by sunlight
increase the damaging effect .
Before washing, rinse off heavy deposits with
plenty of water.
Stubborn deposits such as bird droppings or tree
sap are best removed with plenty of water and a
microfiber cloth.
Also, wash the underside of your vehicle once
road salt stops being used for the season.
Pressure washers
When washing your veh icle w ith a pressure wash-
er, always follow the operating instructions pro-
vided with the pressure washer. This is especially
important in regard to the pressure and spraying
distance. Do not aim the spray directly at the
354
seals on the side windows, doors, lids or the sun-
roof* or at tires, rubber hoses, insulating materi-
al, sensors* or camera lenses* . Keep a distance of
at least 16 in (40 cm).
Do not remove snow and ice with a pressure
washer.
Never use cone nozzles or high pressure nozzles.
The water temperature must not be above 140 °F
(60 °() .
Automatic car washes
Spray off the vehicle before washing.
Make sure that the windows and roof* are closed
and the windshield wipers are off . Follow instruc-
tions from the car wash operator, especially if
there are accessories attached to your vehicle.
If possible, use car washes that do not have
brushes.
Washing by hand
Clean the vehicle starting from the top and work -
ing down using a soft sponge or cleaning brush.
Use solvent-free cleaning products.
Washing vehicles with matte finish paint by
hand
To avoid damaging the paint when washing, first
remove dust and large particles from your vehi-
cle. Insects, grease spots and fingerprints are
best removed with a special cleaner for matte
finish paint .
Apply the product using a microfiber cloth. To
avoid damaging the paint surface, do not use too
much pressure.
Rinse the veh icle thoroughly with water. Then
clean using a neutral shampoo and a soft micro-
fiber cloth .
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly again and let it air
dry. Remove any water residue using a chamois .
A WARNING
-
- Only wash the vehicle when the ignition is
off and follow the instructions from the car
 Ca r e and c leaning

wash operator to reduce the risk of acci-
dents.
- To reduce the risk of cuts, protect yourself
from sharp metal components when wash-
ing the underbody or the inside of the wheel
housings .
- After washing the vehicle, the brak ing effect
may be delayed due to mo isture on the
brake rotors or ice in the w inter . This in-
creases the risk of an acc ident. The brakes
must be d ried first with a few careful brake
applications.
(D Note
- If you wash t he vehicle in an automatic car
wash, you m ust fold the exte rior m irrors in
to reduce the risk of damage to t he mirrors.
Power folding exte rior m irrors* must on ly
be fo lded in a nd out us ing t he power folding
fu nct ion.
height and width of the inside of the car
was h.
- To red uce t he risk of pa int damage, do not
was h the vehicle in d irect sun light .
- To red uce t he risk of da mage t o t he surface,
do not use insect removing sponges, kitche n
sponges or similar items .
- Mat t e finish painted veh icle components:
- To reduce the risk of damage to the sur-
face, do not use polishing agents or hard
wax .
- Never use protective wax. It can destroy
the matte finish effect .
- Do not place any stickers or magnetic
signs on vehicle parts painted with matte
finish paint . The paint cou ld be damaged
when t he stickers or magne t s are re-
moved .
@ For the sake of the environment

- To reduce the risk of damage to t he rims
and tir es, compare t he width between the
whee ls on your vehi cle w it h t he dist an ce be-
tween the g uide rails in the car wash.
- To reduce t he risk of damage, compare the
height and width of you r vehicle wit h the
Only wash t he vehicle in facilities s pecially de-
s ign ed for that pu rpose . This will reduce t he
risk of dirty wate r contaminated with oil from
ente ring the sewe r sys t em.

Cleaning and care information

When cleani ng and caring for individua l vehicle t hat are not liste d, consult an autho rized Audi
components, refer t o t he follow ing tables . The dealer or authorized Audi Se rvice Facility . Also
information contained there is simp ly recom- fo llow the information fo und in ¢ .&..
mendations. For quest ions or for components

Exterior cleaning
Component Situation Solut ion
Windshield wiper Deposits c:>page 56, Cleaning the wiper blades
blades
Headlights / Deposi t s Soft spo ng e wit h a mild so a p sol ution 3 >
tail lights
Sensors/ Deposits Sensors: soft clot h wit h solvent-free cleaning solut ion
camera lenses Camera le nses: soft clot h w ith alcohol-free cleaning solu-
tion
Snow/ice Hand br ush/solvent-free de-icing spray
u
co
......
N
Wheels Road salt Wate r
r--...
N
...... Brake dust Acid-free special clean ing solution
0
0
:E:
'<t

355
Care and cleaning

Component Situation Solution

Exhaust tail pipe s Road salt Water, cleaning solution suitab le for stainless steel, if nee-
essary
Deco rat ive parts/ Deposits Mild soap so lution a), a cleaning so lution suit able fo r stain-
trim less stee l, if necessary
Paint Paint damage Refer to t h e paint number on the vehicle data label, repair
with touch up pa int ~ page 378
Spilled fuel Rinse with water immediately
Surface rust Rust remover, then protect w ith hard wax; for questions,
consult an author ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Serv-
ice Facility.
Corros ion Have it removed by an authorized Aud i dea ler or author-
ized Audi Service Facility.
Water no longer Protect wit h hard wax (at least tw ice per year)
beads on the sur face
of clean paint
No shine even though Treat wit h su itable polish; then apply paint protectant if
paint has been pro- the polish that was used does not conta in a ny protectant
tected/pa int looks
poor
Deposits such as in- Dampen w ith water immediately and remove w it h a micro-
sects, bird dropp ings, f iber cloth
tree sap and road salt
Grease-based con- Remove immediately with a mild soap so lution a) and a
taminants such as soft cloth
cosmetics or sunblock
Carbon parts Deposi t s Inter ior: clean t he same way as plastic parts
Exterior : clean the same way as painted pa rt s
Decorat ive de cals Deposits Soft sponge with a m ild soap solutiona l
a) Mild soap solution: maxim um two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quar t Cl liter) of water

Interior cle aning

Component Situation Solution
Window gla ss Deposi t s Glass cleaner, then wipe dry
Decorat ive parts / Deposits Mild soap solutiona>
Trim
Plastic parts Deposits Damp cloth
Heavier deposits Mild soap solution al, detergent-free plastic clean ing solu-
tion, if necessary
Displays/ instru- Deposits Soft cloth with LCD cleaner; dust in the lower area of the
ment cluste r instr ument cluster can be removed using a soft brush .
Controls Deposits Soft brush, then a soft cloth with a m ild soap so lutiona >
Safety belts Deposits Mild soap so lution al, allow to dry before letting them re-
tract

356
 Ca r e and c leaning

Component Situation Solution

Textil es Deposits adhering to
artificial leat her, the surface
Alcantara Water-based deposits
such as coffee, tea,
b lood, etc.
Oil-based deposits
such as oil, make-up,
etc.
Special deposits such
as ink, nail polish, la-
tex paint, shoe pol-
ish, etc.
Natural leath er Fresh stains
Water-based deposits
such as coffee, tea,
b lood , etc.
Oi[-based deposits
such as oil, make-up,
etc.
Special deposits such
as ink, nail polish, la-
tex paint, shoe po l-
ish, etc.
Care
Carbon parts Deposits
a) Mild soap solution: maximu m two tablespoons of neutral soap in 1 quart (1 liter) of water
Vacuum cleaner
Absorbent cloth and mild soap solutiona>
Apply a m ild soap solution a), blot away the dissolved o il or
dye, treat afterward with water, if necessary
Special stain remover, blot with absorbent material, treat
afterward with mild soap solution, if necessary a)
Wool cloth with a mild soap so lution a)
Fresh sta ins: absorbent cloth
dried stains: stain remover suitable for leather
Fresh sta ins: absorbent cloth and stain remover suitable
for leather
dried stains: oil cleaning spray
Spot remove r suitab le for leather
Regularly apply cond it ion ing cream that protects from
light and penet rates into the material. Use specia lly-col-
ored conditioning cream, if necessary .
clean the same way as plast ic parts

.8, WARNING -
- Never use any pa int polish or other abra-
sive materials .
The windshield may not be trea t ed with wa- - Damage to the protect ive layer on the
ter-repelling windshield coating agents. Un- rims such as stone chips or scratches must
favorable cond itions such as wetness, dark- be repaired immediately .
ness, or low sun can result in increased glare .
- Sensors/ cam era le nses
Wiper blade chatter is also possible.
- Never use warm or hot water to remove
snow or ice from the camera lens . This
@ Note
could cause the lens to crack .
- Headlight s/ tail lights - Never use ab rasive cleaning materials or
- Never clean headlights or tail lights with a a lcohol to clean the camera lens. This
dry cloth or sponge. could cause scratches and cracks .
- Do not use any cleaning product that con- - Door window s
u
co
...... tains alcohol, because they could cause - Remove snow and ice on windows and ex-
N
r-... cracks to form.
N
...... terior mirrors with a plast ic scraper . To
0
0 - Wheels
:E:
'<t

357
Care and cleaning
avoid scratches, move the scraper only in
one direction and not back and forth.
- Never remove snow or ice from door win-
dows and mirrors using warm or hot water
because this could cause cracks to form.
- To avoid damage to the rear window de-
fogger, do not apply any stickers on the
heating wires on the inside of the window.
- Decorative parts/trim
- Never use chrome care or cleaning prod-
ucts.
- Paint
- To reduce the risk of scratches, the vehicle
must be free of dirt and dust before pol-
ishing or waxing.
- To prevent paint damage, do not polish or
wax the vehicle in direct sunlight.
- To reduce the risk of paint damage, do not
polish away rust spots.
- Remove cosmetics and sunscreen immedi-
ately - these could damage the paint.
- Displays/instrument cluster
- Make sure that the instrument cluster is
switched off and has cooled off before
cleaning it.
- Displays, the instrument cluster and the
trim surrounding it must not be cleaned
with dry cleaning methods because they
could become scratched.
- Make sure no fluids enter the spaces be-
tween the instrument cluster and the
trim, because that could cause damage.
- Controls
- Make sure that no fluids enter the con-
trols, because this could cause damage.
- Safety belts
- Do not remove the safety belts to clean
them.
- Never clean safety belts or their compo-
nents chemically or with corrosive fluids
or solvents and never allow sharp objects
to come into contact with the safety belts.
This could cause damage to the belt web-
bing.
- If there is damage to the webbing, the
connections, the retractors or the buckles,
358
have them replaced by an authorized Audi
dealer or authorized Audi Service Facility.
- Textiles/artificial leather/ Alcantara
- Never treat artificial leather/ Alcantara
with leather care products, solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remove or similar
products .
- Have a specialist remove stubborn stains
to prevent damage .
- Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning .
- Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the
seat .
- Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
- Open hook and loop fasteners, for exam-
ple on clothing, can damage seat covers .
Make sure hook and loop fasteners are
closed.
- Natural leather
- Never treat leather with solvents, floor
polish, shoe polish, spot remover or simi-
lar products.
- Objects with sharp edges, such as zippers
or rivets on clothing or belts, can cause
damage to the surface.
- Never use steam cleaners, brushes, hard
sponges, etc. when cleaning.
- Do not turn on the seat heating* to dry the
seat.
- To help prevent the leather from fading,
do not leave the vehicle in direct sunlight
for long periods of time. If leaving the ve-
hicle parked for long periods of time, you
should cover the leather to protect it from
direct sunlight.
{D Tips
- Insects are easier to remove from paint that
has been freshly waxed.
- Regular waxing can prevent rust spots from
forming.
 Ca r e and c leaning

Placing your vehicle out

of service
If you would like to take your vehicle out of serv-
ice for a longer period of time, contact an author-
ized Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty . They w ill advise you of important measures,
such as corros ion protection, service and storage
procedures. Also follow the info rmation about
the vehicle ba tte ry¢ page 330 .

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

359
Emergency assistance

Emergency assistance neath the vehicle; otherwise, there is a po-

tential risk for injury.
General information - Never use the jack supplied with your Audi
...Park the vehicle as far as possible from moving on another vehicle, particularly on a heavier
traffic in the event of a breakdown. In the event one. The jack is only suitab le for use on the
of a flat tire, park the vehicle on a level surface . veh icle it came with.
It you are on a steep hill, be especially careful.
.,. Set the parking brake . {!) Tips
.,. Switch the emergency flashers on . The vehicle jack in your vehicle is mainte-
... Have the passengers exit the vehicle . They nance-free.
should move to a safe place, for example be-
hind a guard rail. Tire mobility kit
_& WARNING Preparation

Follow the steps given above . This is for your .,. Read and follow the important safety precau-
protection and the for the safety of other driv- tions ~ page 360 .
ers. .,.Set the parking brake.
...Select the P selector lever position .
Equipment ...Check if a repair with the tire mobility kit is pos-
sible ~ page 360.
Vehicle tool kit/tire mobility kit/vehicle
jack
Using the tire mobility kit
App lies to: veh icles with the vehicle tool kit, tire mobility kit
an d vehicle jack
..
,...
U)

The vehicle tool kit, vehicle jack, tire mobility kit

and compressor are stored in the luggage com-
"
00
m

partment under the cargo floor cover . Lift the

cargo f loor using the handle.

_& WARNING
Improper use of the vehicle jack can cause se-
rious personal injuries.
Fig. 277 Tire: tire damage that ca nnot be repaired
- Never use the screw driver hex head to
t ighten whee l bolts, since the bolts cannot
The tire repair is on ly meant for temporary use.
attain the necessary tightening torque if you
Change the spare tire as soon as possible ~ &. .
use the hex head, potentially causing an ac-
cident. If the tire is pierced by an object such as a nail,
- The factory-supplied jack is intended only do not remove the object from the tire .
for your vehicle model. Under no circum-
The tire mobility kit may be used at temperatu res
stances should it be used to lift heavy as low as -4°F (-20°C).
vehicles or other loads; you risk injuring
yourself. The tire mobility kit may not be used:
- Never start the eng ine when the vehicle is - if the tire has cuts or punctures that are larger
raised, which could cause an accident . than 0.16 in (4 mm) (D ~ fig. 277
- Support the veh icle securely with appropri- - if the rim is damaged @
ate stands if work is to be performed under- - if you drove with very low tire pressure or with-
out air in the tire ® ..,.

360
 Em er gen cy a ss istanc e

See an autho rized Audi dea ler or aut hori zed Audi
Service Facility for assistance in these situations.

A WARNING
- Please note t hat the tire mob ility kit cannot
be used in all situations, and that it may on-
ly be used temporarily.
- The tire sealant must not come in contact
with skin, eyes, or clothes.
- If tire sealant gets in your eyes or on your Fig. 279 Tire mobil ity kit connect ion

sk in, thoroughly rinse the affected area im-

med iately with clean water.
- Do not inhale the fumes.
- If you swallow any of the t ire sealant, thor-
oughly rinse your mouth immediately and
drink a lot of water. Do not induce vomiting .
Seek medical attention immediately.
- Change your clothes immed iate ly if they get
t ire sealant on them.
- If an allergic reaction occurs , seek immedi -
ate medical attention.
- Keep the tire sea lant away from children .
@ Tips
- If sealant lea ks, allow it to dry in place. You
ca n the n pee l it off like a sticker.
- Note the expiration date on the sealant bot-
t le . Replace the tire sea lant at a n author-
ized Audi dealer or author ized Audi Se rvice
Facility.
- Radio reception can be interrupted when
operating the compressor.
- Obey all laws.
Repairing tires
Requirement: the tire mobility kit must be laid
out and ready fo r use ¢ page 360 .
Installing the tire mobility kit
.,.Open the cover @ on the compressor
¢ fig . 2 78 .
.,. Remove the connector © and pressure hose ®
with pressure gauge from the housing.
.,.Insta ll the compressor press ure hose ® ont o
t he flange @ on t he t ire sealan t bot t le (!) .
.,.Insert the sea lant bottle with t he flange at the
bottom into the opening ® on t he compressor
cover .
.. Remove the valve cap from the faulty t ire.
.. Install the filler hose @ on the valve 0
¢ fig. 279.
.,.Connect the plug © ¢ fig . 2 78 to a n outlet in
the vehicle.
.,.Switch the ignit ion on .
Inf lating a tire
.. Move the switch @ ¢ fig. 2 79 on the compres-
sor into position I.
.,.Inflate the tires to between 29 psi (200 kPA)
and 36 ps i (250 kPA) and read the pressure on
the gauge .
.,.If th is t ire press ure is not reached, remove the
filler hose. Drive slowly appro ximately 33 feet
(10 m) forward or in reverse so that the sea lant
can be distr ibuted in the tire. Pump up the tire
aga in ¢ ,& .

A
- WARNING

u
- Read and follow the manufacturer's safety
(0
...... precautions on the compressor and in the
N
r--. Fig. 278 Components of t he t ire mobility kit
N instr uctions on the bottle of sealant .
......
0
0
:E
<t

361
Emergency assistance
- If a tire pressure of 29 psi (200 kPA) cannot
reached after inflating for 6 minutes, then
the tire is too severely damaged. Do not
continue driving.
- If the tire cannot be repaired with the tire
sealant, see an authorized Audi dealer or au-
thorized Audi Service Facility for ass istance.
(D} Tips
Do not operate the compressor for more than
six minutes continuously, or it can overheat.
Once the compressor has cooled, you can con-
tinue to use it .
Completing
"' Adhere the sticke r that says "max . SO mph
(max. 80 km/h)" that is provided with the t ire
mobility kit within the driver's fie ld of vision.
"'S top the vehicle after driving for about 10 mi-
nutes and check the tire pressure .
"' If the tire pressure is lower than 19 psi (130
kPA), then the tire is too severely damaged. Do
not continue driving.
A WARNING
Pay attention to the following after repairing
the tire :
- Do not drive faster than SO mph (80 km/h).
- Avoid hard acceleration, braking sharply,
and fast cornering.
- The vehicle may become more difficult to
control.
- If the tire is too severely damaged, see an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility for assistance .
@ For the sake of the environment
You can give the used tire sealant bottle to an
authorized Audi dealer or authorized Audi
Service Facility for disposal.
@ Tips
Remember to obtain a new bottle of sea lant
from an authorized Audi dea ler or authorized
Audi Service Facility after repairing a tire.
362
Replacing a wheel
'
Preparation
You must complete the preparation before
changing a tire .
"' Read and follow the important safety precau-
tions¢ page 360.
"' Set the park ing brake.
"' Select the P selector lever posit ion.
"' When towing a trailer : disconnect the trailer
from your vehicle.
"' Lay out the vehicle tool kit ¢ page 360 and the
spare tire.
"' Switch on wheel change mode* in the Infotain-
ment system: ! MENUI button> Vehicle> left
control button > Service & checks > Air suspen-
sion: wheel change .
"' Switch the ignition off.
The vehicle jack mode* switches off automatical-
ly at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
A WARNING
When using the ve hicle jack* on a road with a
steep hill or offroad, you must take extra pre-
cautions to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
Use suitable objects to block the front and
back of the wheel that is diagonal from the
wheel with the flat tire.
A WARNING
You or your passengers could be injured while
changing a whee l if you do not follow these
safety precautions:
- If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance
off the road. Turn off the engine, turn the
emergency f lashers on and use other warn-
ing devices to alert other motorists.
- Make sure that passengers wait in a safe
place away from the vehicle and well away
from the road and traffic.
- To help prevent the vehicle from moving
suddenly and possibly slipping off the jack*,
always fully set the parking brake and block
the front and back of the wheel diagonally
opposite the wheel being changed. When
one front wheel is lifted off the ground, ~
 Em er gen cy a ss istanc e

placing the Automatic Transm ission in P
(Park) will not prevent the vehicle from
moving.
- Before you change a wheel , be sure the
ground is level and firm. If necessary, use a
sturdy board under the jack*.
-Always store the veh icle tool kit, the jack*
and the replaced tire in the luggage com-
partment c::>page 261 .
"' Slide the wheel wrench (from the vehicle tool
kit) a ll the way onto the wheel bolt.
"' Turn the whee l bolt approximately one turn to
the left -arrow- . To reach the required to rque,
hold the end of the wheel wrench . If t he wheel
bolt will not loosen, press carefully on the
wheel wrench with your foot . Hold onto the ve-
hicle secu rely whi le during th is and make sure
your stance is stable .

(D Tips _& WARNING

- Obey all laws . To reduce the ris k of an acciden t , only loosen
- Before changing the wheel, you must acti- the wheel bolts gently (one t urn) before rais -
vate the jacking mode*, so that the a uto - ing the vehicle with the vehicle jack*.
matic controls for the air suspension * do
not make it more diff icu lt to lift the vehicle Raising the vehicle
page 363 .
with the jack* c::>

Removing the caps

Fig. 282 Sill panels : ma rkings

Fig. 280 Whee l: whee l bo lts with caps

"' Slide the plastic clip (from the vehicle tool kit)
onto the cap until it engages c::>fig. 280 .
"' Remove the cap with the plastic clip .

Loosening the wheel bolts

Fig. 283 Sill: po sitioning the ve hicle jack

"' Place the veh icle jack* (vehicle tool kit) on a

firm surface. Use a flat, stab le support if neces-
sary . On a slipp e ry surface such as ti le, you
should use a non -slip pad (such as a rubber
mat) ¢ ,& .
"' Find the marking on t he sill that is closest to
u the tire that will be changed c::>fig. 282 . Behind
(0
......
N
r--. the mark ing, there is a lifting point on the side
N
...... Fig. 28 1 Whee l: loose ning t he whee l bolt
0
sill for the veh icle jack* . .,.
0
:E
<t

363
Em e rg e n cy assis t a n ce

• Using the hex socket wrench © (from the vehi-
cle tool kit), turn the vehicle jack* under the
lift ing point on the side sill unt il it is high
enough that the arm @ ¢ fig. 283 is under the
designated plastic mount.
• Al ign the vehicle jack* so the arm @ engages in
the designated lift ing point in the door sill and
the base @ lies f lat on the ground . The base @
must be directly unde r the lifting point @ .
• To lift the vehicle , place the ratchet @ (from
the vehicle too l kit) with the correct side on the
hex socket wrench © -
• Move t he ratchet @ clockwise back and forth
unt il the wheel lifts up slightly from the
ground.
- Make sure jack position is correct, adjust
as necessary and then continue to raise
the jack*.
- If work has to be done under the vehicle,
ensure that it is safely supported on suita-
ble stands - risk of injury!
- Never start the engine when the vehicle is
on the jack* - risk of accident!
(D Note
Do not lift the vehicle by the sill. Position the
vehicle jack* only at the designated mounting
points on the side sill. Otherw ise, your vehicle
will be damaged.

@ Tips
A WARNING
The vehicle jack mode* switches off automati-
- Make sure the vehicle jack* is stable. There
cally at speeds above 6 mph (10 km/h).
is a risk of injury when the ground is slick or
soft, because the vehicle jack* could slide or
sink. Removing and installing a wheel
- Only raise your vehicle with the vehicle jack*
provided by the facto ry. If you use a vehicle
jack designed for anot her vehicle, yo ur vehi-
cle can slide and cause injur y.
- Position the vehicle jack* on ly at the desig-
nated mounting points on the side sil l and
align the jac k. Ot herwise, the vehicle jack *
could slip and cause an inj ury if it does not
have sufficient hold on the vehicle.
- Vehicles with air suspension*: changes in Fig. 284 Whee l: interna l hex socke t t o turn th e whee l
temperature or load can affect the height of bolts
the stopped vehicle.
- To reduce the risk of an accident, never start
the engine when the vehicle is raised.
- To reduce the risk of injury, support the ve-
hicle securely with suitab le stands if work is
to be performed underneath the vehicle.
- To help prevent injury to you rself and yo ur
passengers:
- Do not raise the vehicle unt il you are sure
the jack* is securely engaged. Fig. 285 Whee l: a lignme nt pin in t he top hole
- Passengers must not remain in the vehicle
when it is jacked up . Removing a wheel
- Make sure that passengers wait in a safe
• Remove the top wheel bolt completely using
place away from the vehicle and well away
the hex socket in the screwdriver handle (in the .,,_
from the road and traff ic.

364

vehicle tool kit) c:>fig. 284 and place it on a
clean surface .
.,.Install the alignment pin (from the vehicle tool
kit) by hand into the empty hole c:>fig . 285.
.,.Remove the rest of the wheel bolt s.
""Remove the wheel c:>(D . The alignment pin re-
mains in the hole while do ing this .
In stall a w heel
Read the directions on c:>page 365 when instal-
ling unidirectional tires .
.,.Slide the wheel on over the alignment pin c:>(D.
.,.Install the wheel bolts and tighten gent ly using
the hex socket.
.,.Remove the alignment pin and also tighten the
remaining wheel bolt .
.,.Carefully lower the vehicle using the vehicle
jack*.
.,.Tighten the wheel bolts in a diagona l pattern
using t he wheel wrench .
The wheel bolts must be clean and loosen/tight-
en easi ly. Check the contact surfaces for the
wheel and hub . Contaminants on these surfaces
must be removed before installing the wheel.
& WARNING
-
Never use the hex socket in the screwdr iver
handle or the hex socket wrench with the
ratchet to loosen or tighten the whee l bolts.
You will not attain the req uired tightening
specification, which will increase the risk of an
accident .
When removing or installing the whee l, the
rim could hit the brake rotor and damage the
rotor. Work carefu lly and have a second per-
son help you.
(D} Tips
- When mounting tires with unidirectional
t read design make sure the tread pattern is
pointed the right way c:>page 365.
u - The wheel bolts should be clean and easy to
co
......
N
r-... turn . Check for dirt and corrosion on the
N
...... mating surfaces of both the wheel and the
0
0 ferent from the tires on your vehicle.
:E:
'<t
Em er g e nc y a ss is tanc e
hub. Remove all dirt from these surfaces be-
fore remounting the whee l.
Unidirectional tires
A unidire ctional tire profile is identified by arrows
that point in the running direct ion on the tire
sidewall. You must always adhere to the spec i-
fied running direction . This is necessary ensure
the tire 's opt imum performance in regard to ad-
hesion , running noise, frict ion and hydroplaning.
To benefit fully from the advantages of the uni-
directional t ire design, you should replace faulty
t ires as soon as possible and restore the correct
run ning direction on all of the t ires .
Finishing
.,.Reinstall the caps on the wheel bolts if neces-
sary.
.,.St ore the vehicle too l kit in its designated
place.
.,.Store the replaced tire securely in the luggage
compartment i=>page 261.
.,.Check the tire pressure on the installed wheel
as soon as possible .
.,.Correct the t ire pressure and store it in the In-
fotainment system i=>page 352 .
.,.The whee l bolt t ight ening specification must be
120 ft lbs (160 Nm). Check it as soon as possi-
ble with a torque wren ch. Drive carefu lly unti l
then.
.,.Have the fau lty whee l replaced as quickly as
possible .
(D Tips
- If you notice that the wheel bolts are cor-
roded and difficult to turn while changing a
tire, they shou ld be replaced before you
check the tightening torque.
- Drive at reduced speed unti l you have the
tightening torques checked.
Notes on wheel changing
Please read the information c:>page 340 if you
are going to use a replacemen t tire which is dif-
.,,.
365
Emergency a s sistance

After you change a t ire:

- Check the tire pressure on the replacement
tire immediately after installation.
- Have the wheel bolt tightening torque
checked with a torque wrench as soon as pos-
sible by your authorized Audi dealer or quali-
fied workshop.
- With steel and alloy wheel rims, the wheel
bolts are correctly tightened at a torque of
120 ft lbs (160 Nm) .
- If you notice that the wheel bolt s are corroded
and difficult to turn while changing a tire,
they s hould be replaced before you check the
tightening torque.
- Replace the flat tire with a new one and have
it installed on your vehicle as soon as possi-
ble . Remount the wheel cover.
Until then , drive with extra care and at reduced
speeds .

A WARNING
-
- If you are going to equ ip your vehicle with
t ires or rims which differ from those which
were factory installed, then be sure to read
the informat ion¢ page 340.
- Always make sure the damaged whee l or
even a flat tire and the jack* and tool kit are
prope rly secured in the luggage compart-
ment and are not loose in the passenge r
compartmen t .
- In an accident or sudden mane uver t hey
could fly forward , injuring anyone in the ve-
hicle.
- Always store damaged wheel, jack* and
tools securely in the luggage compa rt me nt .
Otherwise, in an accident or sudd en man eu-
ver t hey could fly forward, causing injury t o
passenge rs in t he vehicle.

366
 Fuses and bulbs

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses
Replacing fuses

A fuse that has blown will have metal strips tha t

have burned through .

Fig. 287 © Driver's side of the cockpit (left- hand drive ve-
hicle/r ight -hand drive vehicle): cover, @ Left side of lug·
gage compartment: cover

The fuses are located in the footwell under the

foot rest (left-hand drive vehicle) @ ¢ fig. 286 or
behind the cover (right-hand drive vehicle) @ .
Additional fuses are located on the front side of
Fig. 286 @ Driver footwell (left -hand drive vehicle): foot - the cockpit (driver's side) © ¢ fig. 287 and under
rest, @ Front passe nger footwell (right -hand drive vehicle): the left cover in the luggage compartment @ .
cover
.. Switch the ignition and all electrical equipment
off .
.. Check the following table to see wh ich fuse be·
longs to the equipment.
"' Remove the screwdriver and the reversible Torx
bit from the vehicle tool kit ¢ page 360 .
.. Remove the foot rest or the corresponding cov-
er .
.,. Remove the colored plastic clip from the fuse
panel, if necessary ¢ page 368, fig. 288. You
can dispose of the plast ic clip .
.. Remove the clamp from the rear side of the
cover @ .
.. Remove the fuse using the clamp .
"' Replace the blown fuse only with an identical
new one .
u "' Reattach the footrest or the cover .
(0
.....
N
r--.
N
.....
0
0
:E
<t

367
Fuses and bulbs

Fuse color identification Fuse assignment - driver's/front

passenger's footwell
Color Current rating
in amps
Black 1
Purple 3
Light brown 5
Brown 7 .5
Red 10
Blue 15
Yellow 20
White or transparent 25
Green 30
Orange 40

A WARNING
Do not repair fuses and never replace a blown
fuse with one that has a higher amp rating.
This can cause damage to the electrical sys-
tem and increases the risk of fire.
Fig. 288 Driver's footwell (left -hand drive vehicle): fuse

(D Note
panel with plastic clip

If a new fuse burns out again shortly after you

have installed it, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized
Audi dealer or authorized Audi Service Facili-
ty.

Q) Tips
- The following table does not list fuse loca-
tions that are not used.
- Some of the equipment listed in the follow-
ing tab les applies only to certain model ver-
sions or certain optional equipment.

Fig. 289 Front passe nger 's footwell (right -han d drive vehi-
cle): fuse panel with plastic clip Ill>

368
 Fuses and bulbs

Fuse panel @ (brown) Fuse panel © (black)

No. Equipment Windshie ld washer system/headlight
10
Mass airflow sensor, camshaft adjust- washer system
2
ment, charge air cooler pump 11 Left rear doo r contro l module
3 Exhaust doors, fuel injectors, radiator inlet
Fuse panel @ (brown)
Vacuum pump, hot water pump, particu-
4 No. Equipment
late sensor, biodiesel sensor
Seat ventilation, seat heating, rearview
5 Brake light sensor
1 mirror, climate control system, rear cli-
6 Engine va lves, camshaft adjustment mate control system controls
Heated oxygen sensor, mass airflow sen- 2 Gateway, climate control system
7
sor
3 Sound actuator/exhaust sound tuning
Water pump, high pressure pump, high
8 4 Transmission heating valve
pressure regulator va lve
9 Hot water pump
s Engine start
8 Night vision assist, HomeLink
Oil pressure sensor, oil temperature sen-
10 9 Adaptive cruise contro l
sor
11 Clutch pedal position sensor 11 Video camera

12 Engine valves 12 Matrix LED headlight/right LED head light

13 Radiator fan 13 Matrix LED headlight/left LEDheadlight

14 Fuel injectors 14 Rear w indow wipe r

15 Ignition coils Fuse panel © (red)

16 Fuel pump No. Equipment

Fuse panel @ (red) 1 Anti-theft alarm system

No. Equipment 2 Engine control module

1 Ignition coils 3 Lumbar support

2 Eng ine va lves Automatic transmission selector mecha-

4
nism
5 Engine mount
7 Instrument pane l
s Horn
6 Electromechanical parking brake
8 Climate control system (blower)
7 Gateway control module
Fuse panel © (black) 8 Inter ior headliner lights
No. Equipment 10 Airbag control module
1 Front seat heating 11 Electronic Stabilization Control (ESC)
2 Windshield wipers 12 Diagnostic connector, light/ra in sensor
3 Left headlight electronics 13 Climate control system
4 Panorama glass roof 14 Right front door control module
5 Left front door control module 15 A/C compressor
6 Sockets
u 7 Right rear door contro l module
co
......
N
r-... 9 Right headlight electronics
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

369
Fuses and bulbs

Fuse assignment - Driver's side of the Fuse assignment - Left side of the luggage
cockpit compartment

Fig. 290 Driver side cockpit: fuse panel wit h plastic bracket

Fuse panel
No. Equipment
2 Telep hone
4 Head-up display
5 Audi mus ic interface, USB charging port
6 Front climate contro l system contro ls
7 Steering column lock
Fig. 291 Left side of the luggage compartment: fuse panel
8 Infotainment system display with plastic clip
9 Instrument cluster
10 Infotainment unit Fuse panel @ (black)

11 Light switch No. Equipment

12 Steer ing column electronics 5 Air suspension

14 Infotainment system 6 Automat ic t ransmiss ion
lS Powe r steering column adjustme nt 8 Rear seat heating
16 St eer ing wheel heating 9 Tail lights
10 Left safety belt tensioner
11 Central locking system
12 Electric lug gage compartment lid

Fuse panel @ (red)

No. Equipment
1 Rear blower control
2 Sound -a mplifier
3 AdBlue heating
4 Rear climate contro l system control panel
5 Tra ile r hitch (right light)
7 Tra iler hitch
8 Traile r hitch (left light)
9 Tra iler hitch (socket)
10 Sport differential

370
 Fuses and bulbs

Fuse panel @ (red) Due to the high e lectrica l voltage, have the bulbs
rep laced by a qualified technician. Headlights
11 AdBlue heating
with Xenon light are identified by the high volt-
12 Third row seats
age sticker.
Fuse panel © (brown) LED headlights*
No. Equipment
LED headlights require no maintenance. Please
2 Telephone contact your authorized Audi dea ler if a bulb
3 Lumbar support needs to be replaced.
4 Audi side assist
8 Sma rt module (tank)
&
~
WARNING
-
Changing Xenon lamps without the necessary
9 CD /DVD player
equipment can cause serious personal injury.
12 Homelink
- Bulbs are pressurized and can explode when
13 Rearview camera, peripheral cameras being changed . Potential risk of injury!
14 Right tail lights - On veh icles equipped with gas discharge
16 Right safety belt tensioner bu lbs (Xenon light) life-threatening injuries
can resu lt from improper handling of the
Fuse panel @ (red) high-vo ltage portions of such lamps!
No. I Equipment - Only your authorized Audi dealer or quali-
fied workshop shou ld change the bulbs in
Bulbs gas discharge lamps. The re are parts with
sharp edges on the openings and on the
Replacing light bulbs bulb holders that can cause serious cuts. If
Foryour safety, we recommend that you have you are uncerta in about what to do, have
your authorized Audi dealer replace any bulbs for the work performed by an authorized Audi
you. deale r or qualified workshop. Ser ious per-
sonal injury may result from improperly per -
It is becoming increasingly more and more diffi- formed work.
cult to replace vehicle light bulbs since in many
cases, other parts of the car must first be re- (D Tips
moved before you are able to get to the bulb.
- If you st ill prefer to replace the light bulbs
This applies especially to the light bulbs in the yourself, be awa re that the engine compa rt-
front of your car wh ich you can only reach ment is a hazardous area to work in~ .&..in
through the eng ine compartment. Working in the engine compartment on
Sheet metal and bulb ho lders can have sharp page 322.
edges that can cause serious cuts, parts must be - It is best to ask your authorized Audi dealer
correctly taken apart and then properly put back whenever you want to change a bulb.
together to help prevent breakage of parts and
long term damage from water that can enter
housings that have not been properly resea led.

For your safety, we recommend that you have

your author ized Audi dealer replace any bulbs for
you, s ince your dealer has the proper tools, the
u
co correct bulbs and the expert ise.
....
N
r-...
....
N
0
Gas discharge lamps (Xenon lights):
0
:E:
'<t

371
Emergency situations
Emergency situations
General
This chapter is intended for trained emergency
crews and working personnel who have the nec-
essary tools and equipment to perform these
operations.
Starting by pushing or
towing
(D Note
Vehicles with an automatic transmission
cannot be started by pushing or towing.
Starting with jumper
cables
If necessary, the engine con be started by con-
necting it to the battery of another vehicle.
If the engine should fail to start because of a dis-
charged or weak battery, the battery can be con-
nected to the battery of another vehicle, using a
pair of jumper cables to start the engine.
Jumper cables
Use only jumper cables of sufficiently large cross
section to carry the starter current safely. Refer
to the manufacturer's specifications.
Use only jumper cables with insulated terminal
clamps which are distinctly marked :
plus(+) cable in most cases colored red
minus(-) cable in most cases colored black .
A WARNING
Batteries contain electricity, acid, and gas.
Any of these can cause very serious or fatal in-
jury. Follow the instructions below for safe
handling of your vehicle's battery.
-Always shield your eyes and avoid leaning
over the battery whenever possible.
-A dead battery can freeze at temperatures
around 32 °F (0 °C). If the vehicle battery is
frozen, you must thaw it before connecting
the jump start cables. If you do not, this in-
372
creases the risk of an explosion and chemi-
cal burns. After jump starting the vehicle,
drive to an authorized Audi dealer or author-
ized Audi Service Facility immediately to
have the vehicle battery checked.
- Do not allow battery acid to contact eyes or
skin . Flush any contacted area with water
immediately.
- Improper use of a booster battery to start a
vehicle may cause an explosion .
- Vehicle batteries generate explosive gases.
Keep sparks, flame and lighted cigarettes
away from batteries.
- Do not try to jump start any vehicle with a
low acid level in the battery.
- The voltage of the booster battery must also
have a 12-Volt rating. The capacity (Ah) of
the booster battery should not be lower
than that of the discharged battery. Use of
batteries of different voltage or substantial-
ly different "Ah" rating may cause an explo-
sion and personal injury.
- Never charge a frozen battery. Gas trapped
in the ice may cause an explosion.
- Never charge or use a battery that has been
frozen. The battery case may have be weak-
ened.
- Use of batteries of different voltage or sub-
stantially different capacity (Ah) rating may
cause an explosion and injury. The capacity
(Ah) of the booster battery should not be
lower than that of the discharged battery.
- Before you check anything in the engine
compartment, always read and heed all
WARNINGS r=:> poge 322.
([) Note
- Applying a higher voltage booster battery
will cause expensive damage to sensitive
electronic components, such as control
units, relays, radio, etc.
- There must be no electrical contact between
the vehicles as otherwise current could al-
ready start to flow as soon as the positive
(+) terminals are connected.

@ Tips
The discharged battery must be properly con-
nected to the vehicle's electrical system .
When jump starting or charg ing the battery,
never connect the negative ground cable to
the battery negative post because the battery
manager system must be able to detect the
battery's state of charge. Always connect the
negative ground cable to the negative g round
post of the battery manager control unit.
Using the jump start
cable
Both jump start cables must be connected in the
correct order!
Fig. 292 Engine compartment: connect ors for jump start
cables and a charger
Fig. 293 Jump starting using a battery in another vehicle:
@ - providing current, @ - drained
The procedure described below for connecting
jumper cables is intended to prov ide a jump start
for your vehicle .
Vehicle with discharged battery
u doubt, call for road service.
(0
...... • Turnoff lights and accessories, move automatic
N
r--.
transmission lever to N (Neutral) or P (Park)
N
......
0
0 and set parking brake.
:E
<t
Emergency situations
Connecting the positive cable (red) to the
positive terminal
• Open the red cover on the positive termina l
r=>
fig. 292 .
1. Secure one end of the positive cable (red) to
the jump start pin r=>fig. 293 (D (pin under
the red cover = "posit ive") on the vehicle that
needs to be started @ .
2. Secure the other end of t he positive cable
(red) to the positive termina l @ on the bat-
tery provid ing the current @ .
Connecting the negative cable (black) to the
negative terminal
3. Secure one end of the negative cable (black)
to the nega t ive term inal @ on the battery
that is providing the cur rent @ .
4. Secure the other end of the negative cable
(black) to the jump start pin @ (hex head pin
= "negative") on the vehicle that needs to be
started @ .
Starting the engine
• Start the engine on the vehicle providing the
jump start @ and let it run at idle.
• Now start the engine on the vehicle with the
drained battery @ .
• If the engine does not start, stop the starting
procedure after 10 seconds and then repeat it
after approx imately 30 seconds.
• Remove the cables when the engines are run-
ning. Remove them in reverse order from the
way they were installed.
• Close the red cover on the pos itive terminal.
The battery is vented to the outside to prevent
gases from enter ing the vehicle interior . Make
sure that the jumper clamps are wel l connected
with their metal parts in full contact with the
battery terminals.
_& WARNING
To avoid serious personal injury and damage
-
to the vehicle, heed all warnings and instruc -
tions of the jumper cable manufacturer. If in
- Jumper cables must be long enough so that
the vehicles do not touch . ..,_
373
Emergency situations

- When connecting jumper cables, make sure - Never wrap the safety chains or winch cables
that they cannot get caught in any moving around the brake lines .
parts in the engine compartment. - To prevent unnecessary damage, your Audi
- Do not bend over the batteries - danger of must be transported with a flat bed truck.
chemical burns! - To load the vehicle on to the flat bed, use the
- The battery cell locking screws must be towing loop found in the vehicle tools and at-
tightened securely. tach to the front or rear anchorage
- Before you check anything in the engine i=>page 374 and i=>page 375 .
compartment, always read and heed all
WARNINGS i=>page 322. A WARNING
A vehicle being towed is not safe for passen-
(D Note gers. Never allow anyone to ride in a vehicle
Improper hook -up of jumper cables can ruin being towed, for any reason .
the generator.
- Always connect POSITIVE(+) to POSITIVE Front towing loop
(+), and NEGATIVE(-) to NEGATIVE(-)
Only install the front towing loop when it is
ground post of the battery manager contro l
needed.
unit.
- Check that all screw p lugs on the battery
cells are screwed in firmly. If not, tighten
plugs prior to connect ing clamp on negative
battery terminal.
- Please note that the procedure for connect -
ing a jumper cable as described above ap-
plies specifically to the case of your vehicle
being jump started . When you are giving a
ju mp start to another vehicle, do not con-
nect the negative (-) cab le to the negative Fig. 29 4 Front bumper (cover) : installing the tow ing loop
(-) terminal on the discharged batte ry @
c>fig. 293. Instead, securely connect the
negative( -) cab le to either a solid metal
component that is firm ly bolted to the en-
gine block or to the engine block itself. If
the battery that is being charged does not
vent to the outside, escap ing battery gas
could ignite and explode!

Towing with a tow truck Fig. 29S Front bumper (trim): install ing t he towing loo p

General hint s
The threaded opening for the towing loop is lo-
Your Audi requires special handling for towing. cated on the right side of the front bumper.

The follow ing information is to be used by com-
mercial tow truck operators who know how to op-
erate the ir equipment safely.
- Never tow your Audi, towing will cause dam-
age to the engine and transmission.
"' Remove the towing loop from the vehicle tool
kit i=>page 360.
"' Press the cap inward wit h brief, forceful pres-
sure c>fig. 294. The cap will loosen from the
bumper. ""

374
 Emergency situations

.. Or: pull sharply on the trim in the direction of
the arrow to remove c:>fig. 295.
.. Insert the towing loop all the way into the
threaded opening and tighten it with a wheel
wrench .
.. After using, place the towing loop back in the
vehicle tool kit.
Vehicles with a trailer hitch*
.. Attach the towing bar or the t owing cable to
the trailer hitch.
Vehicles with a facto ry-installed trailer hitch* are
not equipped with towing loop threads at the
rear.

_& WARNING _& WARNING

- If the towing loop is not tightened until it
If the towing loop is not tightened unti l it
stops when installing, the threads may be stops when installing, the threads may be
pulled out when towing the vehicle and that pulled out when towing the vehicle and that
cou ld cause an acc ident . could cause an accident.

_& WARNING
(D Note
The trim is attached to the bumper with sev-
- Applies to: vehicles with trailer hitch

eral hooks. To reduce the risk of damage, do
no t use any force when remov ing and instal -
ling .
Rear towing loop
- Only use a spec ial towing bar to prevent
damaging the ball hitch. These towing bars
have been specially designed for t railer tow-
ing hitches.
- Only use special towing cables.

Loading the vehicle onto a flat bed truck

Fig. 296 Rear bumper: installi ng the tow ing loop

Vehicles with a towing loop Fig. 297 Vehicle on flat bed t ruck

On vehicles w ithout a factory-installed trailer

Front hook up
hitch*, the towing loop threads a re located on
the right rear side of the bumper. .. Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car
carrier ramp .
.,.Remove the tow ing loop from the veh icle tool
.,.Attach the winch hook to the front towline eye
kit c:>page 360 .
previously installed .
.. Press the cap inward wit h brief, forcef ul pres-
sure c:>fig.296. The cap will loosen from the Rear hook up
bumper.
.. Align the vehicle with the centerline of the car
.. Inse rt the towing loop all the way into the
carrier ramp.
u
threaded opening and tighten it with a wheel
(0
.. Attach the winch hook to the rear towline eye
...... wrench .
N
r--.
previously installed . .,.
N .. After using, place the towing loop back in the
......
0
0 vehicle tool kit.
:E
<t

375
Emergency situations
@ Tips
Check carefully to make sure the hook-up is
secure before moving the ca r up the flatbed
truck ramp.
Raising the vehicle
Lifting with workshop hoist and with floor
jack
The vehicle may only be li~ed at the lifting
poin ts illustrated .
Fig. 298 Front lift ing point
Fig. 299 Rear lifti ng point
• Read and heed WARNING c::>.&_.
• Locate lifting po ints c::>fig . 298 and ¢ fig. 299.
• Adjus t lifting arms of workshop ho ist or floo r
ja ck t o match veh icle lift ing poin t s.
• Inse rt a rubber pa d between t he f loor jack/
workshop hoist and the lifting poin ts .
If you must lift your vehicle with a floor jack to
work underneath , be sure the vehicle is safely
supported on stands intended for this purpose.
Front lifting point
The lift ing po int is located on the floor pan re in-
forcement about at the same level as the jack
376
fig . 2 98 . Do not lift the vehi-
moun t ing poin t c::>
cle at the vertical sill reinfo rcement.
Rear lifting point
The lifting poin t is located on t he verti cal rein-
fo rcemen t of t he lower sill for t he onboard jack
¢fig. 2 99 .
Lifting with vehicle jack
page 363.
Refer to c::>
A WARNING
- To redu ce th e risk of ser ious injury an d vehi-
cle da mage.
- Always lift the vehicle o nly at the special
workshop hoist and f loor jack lift points il-
lustrated c::>fig. 298 and c::>fig. 299.
- Failure to lift the ve hicle at these points
could cause the vehicle to tilt or fall from
a lift if there is a change in vehicle weight
dist ribution and balance . This might hap-
pen, fo r example, whe n heavy compo -
nen t s su ch as t he eng ine block o r trans-
miss ion are removed.
- Whe n removing heavy com ponen t s like
these, anchor vehicle to hois t or add corre-
spondin g weights to maintai n the cent er of
g ravity. Oth erwise, t he vehicle mig ht ti lt or
slip off th e hoist, ca using serio us pe rsona l
injur y.
(D Note
- Be aware of t he f ollow ing poi nt s bef or e lift -
ing t he vehicle:
- The vehicle should never be lifted or
jacked up from underneath the engine oil
pan, the transmission housing, the front
or rear axle or the body side members.
This could lead to serious damage .
- To avoid damage to the underbody or
chassisframe, a rubber pad must be in-
serted between the floor jack and the lift
points.
- Before driving over a workshop hoist,
check that the vehicle weight does not
exceed the permissible lifting capacity of
the hoist. ..,.
 Emergency situations

- Before driving over a workshop hoist, en-

sure that there is sufficient clearance be-
tween the hoist and low parts of the ve-
hicle.

Vehicle transport
Appl ies to : vehicles with air suspension

The following contains information you should

know about transporting your vehicle.

Wh en transporting the vehicle on a car carri-

er, tra in, ship or by ot her means , only t ie the
vehicle down at t he runnin g surface of the
tires, w hich is t he outer circumference. Secur-
ing the vehicle at the axle components, sus-
pension st ruts or tow ing eyes is not perm itted
because t he pressure in the air suspension
str ut s can change dur ing t ransport. The vehi-
cle may not be secured suff icientl y if th is hap-
pens.

u
co
......
N
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t

377
Technical data

Technical data Vehicle identification label

fig. 301 is locat -
The vehicle identification label <=:>
Vehicle specifications ed in the luggage compartment under the cargo
floor cover.

The information of the vehicle identification label

can also be found in your Warranty & Mainte-
nance booklet.

The st icker contains the fo llow ing vehicle data:

(D Vehicle Iden tifica t ion Number (VIN)

@ Vehicle type, eng ine output, transmission
® Engin e and transmission cod es
Fig. 300 Windsh ield (fro nt left) : Vehicl e I denti fic at ion
Num ber (VIN)
@ Paint and interior codes
® Optional equipment numbers

XXXXX
XX- X- XXXX
XXX XX Safety compliance sticker
@-+~J:~t::1
::: xxxxxxxx
xxx xxxxxxxx The safety compliance sticker is your assurance
IYPlf'VPE XXXXXX that your new veh icle complies with all applicable
Federal Motor Veh icle Safety Standards which
XX XXXXXXXXX XX XX were in effect at the time the vehicle was manu-
XXX KW XXX
15\_L
\YT I IM:
xxxx XXXXXX
MOIOlll<B
./CUR.
kB.
.COll/fAANS
,COOE
factured. You can find this sticker on the driver's
sid e B-pillar . It shows the month and year of pro-
@-+~~:tr:~i XXXXI XXXXXXXI XX
1

II.- AUSST
. / OPTIONS
duction and the vehicl e identification number of
your vehicle (perfo ration) as well as the Gross Ve-
E0A 7D5 4UB 6XM SSG SRW
2EH JOZ lLB lAS 1BA hicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle
3FC SMU 7Xl
F0A 9G3 0G7 0YH OJF Weight Rating (GAWR).
T L6 3 KA 8EH UlA X9B 027
lX W 803 908 8Z4 020 High voltage warning label
7T6 CV7 7KO 4X3 2K2

.__ __ 3L4
lS A
4KC 3Y0 413
7GB 01A
502
4G0 The high voltage warn ing label is located in the
e ngine compartment next to the engine hood re-
XX X XX X XX X XXXX lease. The spark ignit ion system complies with
the Canadian st and a rd ICES-002.

Fig. 301 Vehicle identificat ion lab el

Notes about technical
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) in the data
Infotainment system
The values may vary based on special equipment
~ Select in the Infotainment system : the IMENU I
as well as market-specific equipment and meas-
button > Vehicle > left contro l button > Service
uring methods.
& checks> Vehicle information .
Please note that the specifications listed in the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) vehicle documentation a lways take precedence .
The VIN can be found in the Infotainment sys -
tem, on the vehicle data label, and under the (D Tips
windshield on the front left side* <=:>fig . 300 . The Missing technical data was not available at
VIN is also in the right side of the luggage com- the time of printing .
partment (the fende r) under a cover.

378
 Techn ical data

Weights
Gross Vehicle We ight Rating
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for front
and rear are listed on a sticker on the driver's side
B-pillar.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating includes the
weight of the basic vehicle plus full fuel tank, oi l
and coolant, plus maximum load, which includes
passenger weight (150 lbs/68 kg per designated
seating position) and luggage we ight c:>A .
Gross Axle Weight Rating
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum
load t hat can be applied at each axle of the vehi-
cle c:>&, .
(D Note
- The vehicle capacity weig ht figures apply
when the load is distributed evenly in the
vehicle (passengers and luggage) . When
transport ing a heavy load in the luggage
compartment, carry the load as near to the
rear axle as possible so that the vehicle's
hand li ng is not impa ired.
- Do not exceed the maximum perm issible
axle loads or the maximum gross vehicle
we ight . Always remember that the vehi cle's
hand li ng will be affected by the extra load.
Therefore, adjust your speed accordingly.
- Always observe local regulations.

Vehicle capacity weight

The vehicle capacity we ight (max . load) is listed
on the drive r's side 8-p ill ar.

& WARNING
-
- The act ual Gross Axle Weight Rating at the
front and rear axles should not exceed the
permissible weights, and their combination
must not exceed the Gross Vehicle We ight
Rating.
- Exceeding perm issible weight ratings can
result in vehicle damage, accidents and per-
sonal injury .

Dimensions
Length (in (mm)) Width (in (mm )) Width acrossthe Height at curb
mirrors (in (mm)) weight (in (mm))
Q7 199 .6 (5069) 77 .5 (1968) 87.1 (2212) 68.5 (1740)

Capacities
Approximate capaci-
ties
Fuel ta nk 22.5 gal (85 L)
u
co
Windsh ield and headlight washer system* 7.4 qt (7 L)
,....,
N
r-...
N
,....,
0
0
:E:
'<t

379
Te c h nical data

Gasoline engines
Q7 2.0, 6 cylinder

Maximum output SAE net hp@ rpm 252 @ 5000 - 6000

Maxim um torq ue SAE net lb-ft@ rpm 272@ 1600 - 4500
Displacement CID (cm 3) 121 (1984)
Engine oil with filter change 1>
Fuel ¢ page 314, Gasoline

Q7 3.0, 6 cylinder

Maximum output SAE net hp@ rpm 333@ 5500 - 6500

Maximum torque SAE net lb-ft@ rpm 325@ 2900 - 5300
Displacement CID (cm 3) 183 (2995)
Engine oil with fi lter change 1)
Fuel ¢ page 314, Gasoline

Diesel engines
Q7 3.0 TOI, 6 cylinder

Maximum output SAE net hp@ rpm 258@ 3250 - 4250

Maximum torq ue SAE net lb-ft@ rpm 443@ 1500 - 3000
Displacement CI D (cm 3) 181.1 (296 7)
Engine oil with f ilter change 1)
Fuel ULSD No. 2 ¢ page 315, Diesel fuel

l) For specific engine oil capacities, please see

the most cur rent informa t ion fo r the USA at
http ://www. audi usa.com/he l p/ma int enance or
for Canada at ht t p://www.aud i.ca/ca/brand/ en/
your _aud i/ aud i_services_a nd/Ca re_and_M a i nte-
nance/ schedule.htm l or call 800-822 -2834.

380

Consumer Information
Warranty coverages
Your Audi is covered by the following war ran-
tie s:
- New Vehicle Limited Warranty
- Limited Warranty Against Corrosion Perfora-
tion
- Emissions Control System Warranty
- Emissions Performance Warranty
- California Emissions Control Warranty (USA
vehicles only)
- California Emissions Performance Warranty
(USA vehicles only)
Detailed information regard ing your warranties
can be found in yo ur W arranty & Mainten ance
booklet .
Operating your vehicle
outside the U.S.A. or
Canada
Government reg ulations in the United States and
Canada require that automobiles meet specific
emission regulations and safety standards.
Therefore, vehicles built for the U.S.A. and Cana-
da d iffer from vehicles sold in other countries.
If you p lan to take your vehicle outside the conti-
nenta l limits of the United States or Canada,
there is the poss ibility that:
- unleaded fue ls for vehicles with cata lytic con-
verter may not be available;
- fuel may have a considerably lower octane rat-
ing . Imprope r fuel may ca use engine damage;
- service may be inadequate due to lack of proper
service facilities, tools or testing eq uipment;
- rep lacement parts may not be readily ava ilable.
- Navigat ion systems for veh icles built for the
U.S.A. and Canada will not necessa rily work in
Europe, and may not wo rk in other countries
outside of North Amer ica.
u
co
......
N The increasing use of electronics, sophisticated
r-...
N
......
0
0
:E:
'<t
Consumer Inf o rmation
(D Note
Audi cannot be respons ible for mechanical
damage that could resu lt from inadequate
fuel, service or parts ava ilability.
Audi Service Repair
Manuals and Literature
Audi Official Factory Service Manuals and Litera -
ture are published as soon as poss ible after mod-
el introduction. Service Manua ls and literature
are avai lab le to order from the Audi Tec hnical Lit -
erature Orde ring Center at :
www.audi .t echliteratur e.com
Maintenance
General
Your vehicle has been designed to he lp keep
maintenance requirements to a min imum. How-
ever, a certain amount of regular maintenance is
still necessary to assure your veh icle's safety,
economy and reliab ility . For detailed vehicle
maintenance consult your Wa rranty & Mainte-
nance boo klet .
Under diff icult operating condition s, for exam-
ple at extremely low outside temperatures, in
very dusty regions, when towing a trai le r very fre-
quently, etc., some se rvice work shou ld be pe r-
fo rmed between t he int erval s specified. This ap -
plies particularly to:
- oil changes , and
- cleaning or replac ing the a ir filter .
(® For the sake of the environment
By regularly maintain ing your vehicle, you
help make sure that emiss ion standards are
maintai ned, thus min imizing adverse effects
on the environment .
Important considerations for you and your
vehicle
fuel injection and emission control systems, and
the genera lly increas ing techn ica l complexity of ""'
381
Con s umer Info r mation
today's a utomo biles, have steadily reduced the
scope of maintenance and repairs which can be
carried out by veh icle owners. Also, safet y and
environmental concerns place very strict limits
on the nature of repairs and adjustmen t s to en-
g ine and transmission parts wh ich an owner can
perform .
Maintenance, adjustments and repairs usually re-
qu ire special tools, testing devices and other
equ ipment available to specially trained work -
shop personnel in order to assure proper per-
forma nce, re liability and safety of the veh icle and
its many systems .
Improper maintenance, adjustments and repairs
can impair the operation and reliab ility of your
ve hicle and eve n void your vehicle warranty .
Therefo re, proof of se rvicing in accordance w ith
the m ai ntenance sched ule may be a condition for
up ho ld ing a possible wa rranty claim made within
the wa rranty pe riod.
Above all , ope rational safety can be adversely af-
fected, cre ating unne cessa ry risks fo r you and
your passengers.
If in doubt about any servicing, have it done by
your author ized Audi dealer or any other properly
eq uipped and qualified workshop . We strongly
urge you t o g ive your author ized Audi dealer t he
opportunity to perform a ll scheduled mainte -
nance and necessa ry repairs. Your dealer has the
facilities, origina l parts and tra ined specialists to
keep your veh icle runn ing prope rly.
Performing limited maintenance yourself
The follow ing pages describe a limited number of
procedures whic h can be performed on your vehi-
cle with ordinary tools, should the need arise and
tra ined personnel be unava ilable. Before per-
forming any of these procedures, always thor-
ough ly read all of the app licab le text and carefu l-
ly follow the instructions g iven . Always rigorously
observe the WARNINGS prov ided .
Before you check anything in the engine com-
partment, always read and heed all WARNINGS
& and c::>& in Working in the engine compart-
c::>
ment on page 322 .
382
-
A WARNING
- Ser ious personal inj ury may occur as a result
of imp roperly performed maintenance, ad-
justments or repairs .
- Always be extreme ly careful when work ing
on the vehicle . Always follow commonly ac-
cepted safety practices and general com-
mon sense. Never risk personal injur y.
- Do not attempt any of t he mainte nance,
checks or repairs described on the following
pages if you are no t fu lly fam iliar with these
or other proce d ures with respect to the ve-
hicle, o r are uncert a in how to proceed.
- Do not do any work wit hout the prope r tools
a nd equi pmen t . Have the necess ary wo rk
done by your authorized Aud i dealer or an -
other properly equipped and qualified work-
shop.
- The engine compartment of any motor veh i-
cle is a potentially hazardous area . Never
reach into the a rea around or touch the radi-
ator fan. It is temperature controlled and
can switch on suddenly - even when the en-
gine is off and the ignition key has been re-
moved. The rad iator fan switches on auto-
mat ica lly when the coolant reaches a certain
temperature and will con t inue to ru n until
the coolant temperat ure drops.
- Always remove the igni t ion key before any-
one gets under t he vehicle.
- Always support your vehicle with safety
stands if it is necessary to work underneath
the vehicle. The ja ck* supplied w ith t he vehi-
cle is no t ad equate fo r t his pu rpose and
could collapse causing se rious personal in-
jury .
- If you must wor k underne ath the vehicle
with the wheels on t he ground, always make
sure the vehicle is on level ground, that the
wheels a re always sec urely blocked and that
the engine cannot be started.
- Always make sure the transmission se lector
lever (automatic t ransm iss ion) is in P (Park
position) and the park brake is applied.

@ For the sake of the environment
- Changing the engine settings wi ll adversely
affect emission levels. This is detrimental to
the environment and increases fuel con-
sumption.
- Always observe environmental regu lations
when disposing of old engine oil, used brake
flu id, dirty engine coolant, spent batteries
or worn out tires .
- Undeployed airbag modules and pretension-
ers might be classified as Perchlorate Mate-
rial -special handling may apply, see
www .dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlo-
rat e. When the vehicle or parts of the re-
straint system including airbag modu les
safety belt s with pretens ioners are scrap-
ped, all applicab le laws and regulations
must be observed. Your authorized Audi
dealer is familiar with these requirements
and we recommend that you have your deal-
er perform this service for you.
Accessories and
technical changes
Additional accessoriesand parts
replacement
Always consult on authori zed Audi dealer before
purchasing accessories.
Audi vehicles that are constructed w ith advanced
materials like Steel/Aluminum (Hybrid construc-
tion), Aluminum (Audi Space Frame), and/or Alu-
minum/Carbon Fiber (Ultra Advanced Light
We ight Materials) are as unique as the ir drivers .
Therefore, the availability of certain parts needed
for repair , restoration , or reconstruction wi l l be
restricted , or parts will be unavaila ble, if t he ve-
hicle is not repaired at an authorized Audi colli-
sion repair facility. This includes but is not limit-
ed to structura l parts which require specialized
training and equipment to restore their crash-
worthiness back to the original NHTSA and IIHS
performance.
u - The manufacturer cannot be held liable for
co
...... Your vehicle incorporates the latest safety design
N
r-...
N features ensuring a high standard of active and
......
0
0 passive safety.
:E:
'<t
Consumer Inf o rmation
This saf ety could be compromised by non-ap -
proved changes to the vehicle. For this reason, if
parts have to be rep laced, please observe the fol-
lowing points when install ing additional accesso-
ries:
Approved Audi accessories and genuine Audi
parts are available from authorized Aud i dealers.
These dealers also have the necessary facilities,
tools and trained specialists to install the parts
and accessories properly .
A
- WARNING
Using the wrong spare parts or using non-ap-
proved accessories can cause damage to the
vehicle and serious personal injury.
- Use on ly accessories expressly approved by
Aud i and genuine Audi spare parts
- These parts and accessories have been spe-
cially designed to be used on your vehicle.
- Do not use license plate brackets in the
front area that are different from the one
installed at the factory, or add additional li-
cense plate brackets.
- Never install accessories such as telephone
cradles or beverage holders on airbag covers
or w ith in the airbag deployment zones. Do-
ing so will increase the risk of injury if air-
bags are triggered in an accident!
- Before you check anyth ing in the engine
compartment, always read and heed all
WARNINGS 9poge 322 .
(D Note
- If items other than genu ine Audi spare
parts, add-on equipment and accessory
items are used or if repair work is not per-
formed according to specified methods, this
can result in severe damage to your vehi-
cle's engine and body (such as corrosion)
and adversely affect your vehicl e's warranty.
- If emergency repairs must be performed
elsewhere, have the vehicle exam ined by an
authorized Audi dealer as soon as possib le.
damage which occurs due to failure to com-
ply with these stipulations .
383
Con s umer Info r mation

Technical Modifications Devices

Our guidelines must be complied with when tech- The following devices each comply wit h FCC Part
nical modifications are made . 15.19, FCC Part 15. 21 and RSS-Gen Issue 1 :

- Audi adapt ive cru ise cont rol*

Always consult an authorized Audi dealer before
- Audi side assist*
starting work on any modificat ions.
- Cell phone package*
This will he lp ensure that vehicle function, per- - Conven ience key*
formance and safety are not impaired 9 & . - Electronic immobilize r
Attempting to work on electronic components - Garage door opener (Homelink)*
and the software used with them can cause mal- - Remote cont rol key
functions. Because of the way electronic compo-
FCC Part 15.19
nents are interconnected with each other, such
malfunctions can also have an adverse affect on This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
other systems that are not directly involved. This Rules . Ope ration is subject to the follow ing two
means that you risk both a substantial reduction cond it ions:
in the operational safety of your veh icle and an (1) This dev ice may not cause harmful interfer-
increased wea r of ve hicle parts 9 ,&.. ence, and
Author ized Audi dealers w ill perform this work in (2) this device must accept any interference re -
a profess ional and competent manner or, in spe- ce ived, includ ing interference that may cause un-
cial cases, refer you to a professional company desired operation.
that spec ial izes in such modifications.
FCC Part 15.21
_& WARNING CAUTION:
Improper repairs and modifications can
Changes or modificat io ns not express ly approved
change the way veh icle systems work and
by the pa rty responsible fo r compliance cou ld
cause damage to the veh icle and ser ious per -
vo id the user's a uthority to operate the equ ip-
sonal injury.
ment.

([) Note RSS-Gen Issue 1

If emergency repa irs mus t be pe rformed else- Operat ion is subject to the following two cond i-
where, have t he vehicle examined by an a u- tions:
t horized Audi dealer as soon as possib le .
(1) this device may not cause interference, and

Declaration of (2) this device must accept any interference, in-

Compliance, Telecom- clud ing interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
munications and
Electronic Systems
Radio Frequency Devices and Radiocommunica-
tion Equipment User Manual Notice .

The manufacturer is not respons ible for any radio

or TV interference caused by unauthorized modi-
fications to this equipment .

384
 Index

288
A Repairs
Safety instr uctions . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . 287
A/C MAX (button) 72, 76 When m ust t he system be inspected? . . . 285
A/C (button) . . . . . ...... .. . . . ... . . . . 72, 75
Air pressu re
ABS .. . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . . . . . . 14 8 Tires ..... . ... . . . . . .............. . . 343
Accessories 66 , 383 Air suspension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Active lane assist Trailer mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Cleaning the camera area ... . ..... . . . . 355 Alignment pin (changing the wheel) . . . . . . 360
also refer to Audi active lane assist . . . . . 123
All -wheel steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 152
Adapt ive air suspension
All season tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
refer to Air suspension ...... . . . . . ... . 134
All weat her lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Adapt ive cruise control . .... . . . . . . . . ... . 10 7
All wheel drive
Cleaning the sensor . . .... . . . . . . . . ... . 355
refer to quattro 152
Distance indicator and distance warning . 116
AMI
Messages . . . . . ............ . . . . . ... . 116
refer to Audi music interface . . . . . . . 234, 235
Predictive contro l ............. . . . .... 113
Traff ic jam assist ............. . . . ... . 114 Android Auto
refer to Audi smartphone interface 247
Ad Blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . ... . 318
Messages . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . ... . 3 18 Anti- free ze
Windsh ield washer syst em . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Addit ional accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
Anti -lock braking system
Adj usting air distribution (automat ic climate
refer to ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76
Anti-Slip Regulation
Adj usting the rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
refer to ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Adju st ing the sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 53
Apple CarPlay
Adj usting the tempe rature (automatic climate
refer to Audi smartphone interface . . . . . 247
control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76
Asht ray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Adju sting the vol ume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
ASR · · · · · · · . ... . . . . . .............. .. 148
Advanced key
Audi active lane assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
refer to Convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Audi connect emergency call and service . . 203
Airbag system . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 273,29 1
Online roads ide assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Advanced Airbag System components . . . 280
Audi connect vehicle contro l . . . . .. .. .. .. 199
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Parking locat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 200
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Remote locking and unlock ing . .. .. .. .. 200
Child restraints 297
Vehicle status report . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 200
Components (front airbags) . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Audi connect (Infota inment) . . . . . . . . 189, 196
Danger of fitt ing a child safety seat on t he
front passenger seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 74
Data protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
D.1sposa l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Services overview . . . . ... . . .... . . . . . . . 190
288
Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 Start ing ..... . . . . . ................ . 190
How do the fro nt airbags work? . . . . . . . . 283 Audi drive select . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . 134
How many airbags does my vehicle have? 280 Audi Ente rtainment mob ile ........... .. 236
How the Advanced Airbag System compo- Audi music interface . . . .............. .. 234
nents work together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 Audi music stream
u
co
...... Indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 refer to W i-Fi . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . 232
N
r-...
N
Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 Audio files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 7
......
0
0
PASSENGERAIR BAG light . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
:E:
'<t

385
Index

Audio player Belt tens ioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

Bluetooth audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 1 Blended gasol ine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
W i-Fi audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Blower (automat ic climate contro l) . . . . . 73, 76
Audio t rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 0 Bluetoot h
Audi pre sense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Audio player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Connecting a cell phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Set t ings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Audi Service Repair Manuals and Literature 381 Boost er seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Audi side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 Brake flu id
Audi smartphone interface ......... 247, 251 Checking the brake fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 329
Audi virtua l cockpit Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 150
refer to Instr ument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Brake assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 148
AUTO Brake fl uid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 329
Autom atic headlig hts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Electromechanical parking brake . .. .... . 87
Auto Lock (central locki ng system) . . . . . . . . 34 Emergency braking function . . . . . .. .... . 87
Automatic belt ret ractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 New brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 150
Wo rn brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... . 29
Automatic climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 75 Breaking in
New brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Automatic climate control system
New engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Audi drive select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
New tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 77
Browser
Automatic transm ission . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 91
Emergency program . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 95
refer to Media center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Hill descent control . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 94 Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Kick-down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 95 Buttons
Manual shift ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 94 Control panel (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Parking lock emergency release . .. .. .. .. 96 Mult ifunct ion st eering whee l 12
Selecto r lever positions . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. 91
Automatic wipe/wash system . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 C
Auto Safety Hotline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Cable (USB adapter/AUX connector cable) 234
AUTO (button) California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . 322
Autom atic cli mat e control. . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76 Battery specif ic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Auxiliary heater (automatic climate Call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 4, 77
Call options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
AUX inp ut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 5
Capacities
Average consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 AdBl ue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . 318
Average speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Fuel tank...... . . . . . . . ............ . . 379
Washer fluid reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
B Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

BACK button 156 Cargo area

Balance (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 refer to Loading t he luggage compa rt-
ment ..... . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . 261
Bass (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Cargo floor ........................... 69
Battery
Catalytic converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
also refer to Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . 330 CD drive (med ia drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Before dr iving 256

386

Cell phone
refer to Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Center armrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Convenience key. .......... . ..... . . . .. 37
Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Certificat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Changing the scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Charging the bat tery (mobile devices) . . . . 235
Child restraints
Danger of using child restraints in the front
seat.. . . ... . . ............... . . . ... . 274
Where can I get additional information
about child restraints and their use? . . . . 313
Child restraint system anchors . . . . . . . . . . 309
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Important safety instructions for using child
safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Install ing a child restraint using the LATCH
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Mounting and releasing the anchorage
hook . . . . . . . . ................ . . ... . 311
Tether ancho rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Tet her straps . . . . ........ . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Child safety lock
Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Convertible child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Danger of using child restraints in the front
seat . . . . . . . . . . ................ . ... . 274
How do I prope rly install a child safety seat
in my vehicle? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Infant seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
LATCH system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Unused safety belts on the rear seat 301
~ Child seats
......
N
~ Lower anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
......
g Classic view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
:E:
'<t
Index
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Cleaning Alcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Cleaning artificial leather. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 7
Cleaning carbon parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356, 357
Cleaning decorative parts/trim . . . . . . . . . . 356
Cleaning decorative parts and trim . . . . . . . 356
Cleaning exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Cleaning plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Cleaning textiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Climate control system
refer to Automatic climate control . . . . . . . 71
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 249
Closing aid (doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cockpit (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Command (voice recognition syst em) . . . . . 169
Compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Compass in the mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Connect ion manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Connections
refer to Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228, 237
Consumer Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 381
Consumption (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Contacting NHTSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Additional directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Importing/exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Memory capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Storing as destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Control buttons (operating the MMI) . . . . . 159
Control knob wit h joyst ick funct ion (MMI op-
eration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Convenience key
Switching the ignition on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Unlocking/lo cking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Convenience opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Convertible child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Convertib le locking retractor
Activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Deact ivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Using to secure a child safety seat . . . . . . 308
Cooled glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Cooling mode (automatic climate
control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 , 75 , 76
387
Index

Cooling system Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . 12

Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 356
Coolant temperature indicato r . . . . . . . . . . 11 Infotainment system display . .... . 157,250
Crosshairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Mult ifunct ion steer ing whee l . . . . .. . . . . . 12
Cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 Versions (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . 157
Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Current consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Doors
Closing aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
D Driver informat ion system . . . . . . .. .. .... . 15
Data connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Changing views . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... . 12
Data protectio n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197, 228 Energy consumers . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... . 16
Data recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... . 15
Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 249 Outside temperat ure display. . . .. .. .... . 10
Date display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 9 Service int erval displ ay . . . . . . . .. .. .... 33 2
Daytime runni ng lig hts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 8 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... . 14
Declarat ion of compliance Driver seat
Audi adapt ive cruise control . . . . . . .. .. . 384 refer to Seating positi on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 7
Audi side assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 384 Drives
Cell phone package . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 384 refer to Media . . . . . . . . .......... 228, 237
Convenience key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 384 Drive select
Elect ronic immob ili zer . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 384 refer to Audi drive select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Garage doo r opener (Home li nk) . . . .. .. . 384 Drivi ng econom ically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Remote contr ol key . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 384 Driving offroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
DEF Driving on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
refer to Ad Blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Drivi ng safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Defrosting (windows) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76 Driving through water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
DEF (inst rument cluste r) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Driving t ime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Demo mode DVD drive (med ia drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
refer to Presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Dynamic vol ume
Destination on the map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 refer to System volu me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Determin ing correc t load l imit 34 7
Diesel
Diesel part iculate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
E
Prewarm ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Diesel Exhaust Fluid (DEF) Easy seat ent ry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
refer to Ad Blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Econom ical route . . . . . . . . . .......... . . 212
Diesel fuel . . . . . . . . ............ . ... . . . 315 EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Digita l compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Electromechanical parking brake . . . . . . . . . 87
Digita l Rights Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Dimen sions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Electronic immobil izer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Dimming the exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Electronic stabili zation control
Dimming the rearview mir ror . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 refer to ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 149
Directory Emergency assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
refer to Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Emergency braking fu nction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Emergency call funct ion
Audi connect emergency call and service . 203

388
 Index

Emergency flashe rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Fader (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Emergency starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Fastening
Emissions control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Convertib le child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . 303
Engine Infant seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . ....... .. .. .. .. .. . 328 Fast forwarding/rewinding (audio/video
Engine data . . . . . . ....... .. .. .. .. .. . 380 file) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 7
Start/Stop system . ....... .. .. .. .. .. . . 84 Fast forwarding (audio/video file) . . . . . . . . 237
Starting/stopping . ....... .. .. .. .. .. . . 82 Fast route 212
Starting with jumper cables .. .. .. .. .. . 3 72 Favorites
Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Media ... . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... ... . . . . 240
Opening and closing the hood . . . . . . . . . . 323 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Telephone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... .. .. . 324 File formats (media drives) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... .. .. . 326 Floor mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... .. .. . 327 Folding the backrest down/up . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Checking the oil level . . . . .. .. .... .. .. . 326 Foot pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Consumption . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... .. .. . 326
For the sake of the environment
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .... .. .. . 326
Environmentally-friendly driving . . . . . . . . 79
Oil consumption . . . . . . . . .. .. .... .. .. . 325 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Specification and viscosity .. .. .... .. .. . 324
Leaks...... . . . . . . . . ................ 323
Engine sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Warming up the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Engine Start/Stop mode Free text search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
refer to Start/Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Media . . . . .. .. .. ... .. .... .. .. .. .. . . 239
Entering characters/numbers (speller) . . . . 164 Navigation .. .. .. ... .. .... .. .. .. .. . . 206
Entering letters (speller) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Radio . . . . .. .. .. ... .. .... .. .. .. .. . . 224
Entertainment sliding menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Telephone. .. .. .. ... .. .... .. .. .. .. . . 185
Entry/ex it lighting ..................... 50 Freeze protection
Entry assistance Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Rear seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Frequency band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223, 226
Environment Front airbags
Proper disposal of drained engine oil . . . . 327 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Unleaded fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 How they work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Frontal collisions and the laws of physics . . 266
Hill descent assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Front passenger's door emergency locking . . 39
Offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Front seats
Evasive steering support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Child restraints in the front seat . . . . . . . . 274
Expanded view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 also refer to Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Fuel
Exterior mirrors ....................... 52 Additives... . . . . . . . ................ . 314
External voice operat ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 4 Blended gasoline . . . ......... .. .. .. . . 314
Current consumption ......... .. .. .. . . . 15
u Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... .. .. .. . . 314
co
......
N
r-...
F Fuel filler neck . . . . . ......... .. .. .. . . 316
N
...... Factory default settings Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . ......... .. .. .. 10, 12
0
0
:E:
Multi Med ia Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Fuel tank capacity . . ......... .. .. .. . . 379
'<t

389
Index

Gasoline 314 How are chi ld restraint system anchors relat -

Gasoline additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 15 ed to child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 14 How many a irbags does my vehicle have? . . 280
Recommendation ............. . ... . .. 314 How safety belt pretensioners work . . . . . . 271
Saving fue l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79, 134
Fue ling
Fue l gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
I
Fue l tank capac ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Imbalance (whee ls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Opening the fuel fille r door..... . . . . . .. 316 Immobili ze r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Fuses Impo rtant things to do before driv ing . . . . 256
Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 8 Impo rt ing and expo rt ing (contacts) ...... 186
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Imprope rly wo rn safety belts ........... 271
Incline ang le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
G Indicator lig hts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 5
Garage doo r opener
PASSENGERAIR BAG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
refer to Home li nk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 6
Infan t seats ......................... 301
Garment hoo ks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Input
Gas discharge lamps................ . .. 371
Using the MMI touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Gloss ar y of tire a nd load ing te rmi nology . . 335
Using the speller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Glove compartment .................... 67
Inp ut level (media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) . . . . . 379
Inspection interva l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Groun d clearan ce . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Installing the upper tether strap on the an-
chorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
H Instr ument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Handsfree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Head -up display ....................... 20 Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Headlight ra nge control system .......... 48 Instr ument illumin at ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Headlights ................. .. .. .. .. .. 48 Interio r lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51, 52
Clea ning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 355 Internet
Headlig ht ra nge contro l system . .. .. .. .. 48 refer to Aud i connect (Infotainment) 189
....
Was her system . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 55 Interne t radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Head restra ints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63, 259 Interval mode (wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Adj usting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 iPhone
Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 refer to Audi m usic interface . . . . . . . 234, 235
Heavy clothing and safety belts . . . . . . . . . . 268
High beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
49
49
J
Jukebox 230
Hill descent ass ist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Ju m p-start ing .. . . . . . . . . . . ..... .. . . . .. 372
Hill descent contro l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Jump start cable 373
Hill hold ass ist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
also refer to Hill hold ass ist . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Home address . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . 207, 213 K
Homelink ............................ 46 Key . .... . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .... . .. . . . 35
Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Key not recognized . ........... .. .. . . . 84
Key replacement . .. ........... .. .. . . . 35
Mechan ica l key . . . .. ........... .. .. 35, 36

390
 Index

Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Tie-downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Unlocking/ locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37, 39 also refer to Loading the luggage compart-
Vehicle code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 ment...... . . . . . . . . ................ 261
Kick-down (automatic transmission) . . . . . . . 95 Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Emergency release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

L Lumbar support ....................... 59

Lane assist
refer to Audi act ive lane assist . . . . . . . . . 123 M
LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 309 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Description .. . . . ... . ...... . ..... . .. . 310 Maintenance intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Installing a child restraint ... . ..... . .. . 311 Making an emergency call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 310 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) . . . . . . . . . 21
Mounting and releasing the anchorage
Map
hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Changing the scale . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 207
Leather care/clean ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 220
Left contro l button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 215
License agreement (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 216
Lifting points (vehicle jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Setting the destination . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 207
Light/rain sensor Update ... . ... . .................. .. 205
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Map update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Interva l mode (wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 36
Light functions . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 48 Media ..... . ... . ................ 228, 237
High beam assistant . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 49 Drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
I nstrument illumination . .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 52 Supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Interior lighting . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 51 Media center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Lighting Memory buttons
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 refer to Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 163
I nterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Memory capacity
Lights Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Headlight range control system . . . . . . . . . 48 Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Listening to music Memory card
refer to Media . . . ............ . . . 228, 237 SD card reader (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Loading the luggage compartment . . . . . . . 261 Supported types/formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Locking/unlocking Memory funct ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
By remote control . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 37 MENU button ........................ 156
W ith the central locking switch . .. .. .. .. 38 Menu language
W ith the convenience key . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 37 refer to Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . 249
W ith the lock cylinder . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 39
Menus/symbols ...................... 166
Low beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Lowering the rear of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 13 7
Mirrors
Luggage compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Adjusting exterior mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Cover.. . . . . . . . . . .......... .... . . . ... 68 Compass.. . ... . .................... . 57
Socket. . . . . . . . .............. .. . ..... 66 Dimming . . . . . . . . . . ...... ... .... . . . . . 53
u
~ Storing cargo correctly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
N
r-...
....
N MMI
0
0 refer to Multi Media Interface . . . . . . . . . . 156
:E:
'<t

391
Index

MMI search Occupant seating positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

refer to Free text search . . . . . . . . . . 165, 239 Octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
MMI touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System 285 Offroad driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
MP3 Offroad mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
refer to Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 OFF (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72, 75
Multifunction steering wheel Oil
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .. .. 14 refer to Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324, 326
Map zoom . . . . . . . ............ . ... .. .. 13 On-board computer .................... 15
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .. .. 12 On-Board Diagnostic System (OBD)
Speech dialog system . . . . . ........ .. .. 14 Data Link Connector (DLC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Switching tabs . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .. .. 12 Electronic speed limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Multi Med ia Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) . . . . . . . . 21
Music collection On/Off knob (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
refer to Jukebox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Online destinations
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 refer to Point of interest search . . . . . . . . 209
also refer to Muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Online map . . . . . . . . . . . . ............ . . 217
Mute (muting) ........................ 14
Online map update . . . . . . . . .......... . . 219
Muting . ... . . . . . . . ............ . ... . . . 253
Online media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Muting (mute) ........................ 14
Online roadside assistance
myAudi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 209 Audi connect emergency call and service 204
Logging in in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Online services
PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 refer to Aud i connect (Infotainment) .... 189
Opening.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..... . .. . . ... 34
N Fuel filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Natura l leather care/cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Operating
NAV/MAP button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Navigating (instrument cluster) .......... 19 Multi Media Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Navigation . . . . . . . ....... ...... .. .. .. . 205
Announcements . ....... ...... .. .. .. . 214 Options menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159, 163
Better route . . . . ....... ...... .. .. .. . 221 Other consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
also refer to Map ....... ...... .. .. .. . 215 Outside temperature display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Navigation (instrument cluster) .......... 18 Overview (Cockpit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Network connection (Wi-Fi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 p
NHTSA Paint damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Contacting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Paint number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Night vision assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Panorama glass roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Cleaning the camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Emergency operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Nitrogen oxide (NOx) catalytic converter
Parenta l control
refer to Ad Blue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
DVD .......... . . . . . . . . . ............ 240
Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Parking aid
Cleaning sensors/camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
0 Parking brake
Occupant protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 refer to Electromechanical parking brake . 87

392
 Index

Parking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Prompt

Parking location refer to Command (voice recognition sys-
Aud i connect vehicle control . . . . . . . . . . . 200 tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Parking system Proper occupant seat ing positions . . . . . . . 257
refer to Parking systems . . . . . . . . . . 139, 140 Proper safety belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Parking systems . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 138 Proper seating position
Peripheral cameras . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 143 Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Rearview camera . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 140 Occupants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 7
Set tings . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 146 Rear passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Trailer hit ch . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 147 Protecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Particulate filter (diesel) ......... . . ... . 321
Parts replaceme nt ................
PASSENGERAIR BAG light .......
. . . . 383
. . . . . . . 285
Q
quattro .... . ... . . . ................ .. 152
Paths (Owner's Manual) 159
Selective wheel torque control ..... .... 148
Pause (audio/video file) ............ . . . . 237
Question
Pedals . . . . . . . . ................ . . ... . 261 What happens to unbelted occupants? 266
Pedestrian detect ion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Peripheral display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 R
Personal route assistance 211
Radio .. . . . . . . . . . ... . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . 223
Phonebook
Additional station information . . . . . . . . . 225
refer to Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Presets 226
Physical principles of a frontal collision . . . 266
Radio text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Picture format (video) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Station list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Playback (med ia) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Rail carrier. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Playlist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Rain/light sensor
Point of interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Point of interest search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 I nterval mode (wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
also refer to Point of interest . . . . . . . . . . 208 Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Polishing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Random
Pollutant fi lter (automatic A/C system) . . . . 71 refer to Shuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Predictive efficiency assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Range (fuel level) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Pregnant women Reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Special considerations when wearing a safe- Rear axle steering
ty belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 refer to All-wheel steering ............ 152
pre sense Rear fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
refer to Audi pre sense .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 117 Rear lid
Presentation mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 refer to Luggage compartment lid . . . . . . . 40
Presets (radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Rear lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Pressure Rear Seat Entertainment preparation
Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . 351 refer to Audi Entertainment mobile 236
Prewarming .......................... 82 Rearview camera
Program guide refer to Parking systems . . . . . . . . . . 139, 140
u
co
Radio . . . . . . . ................ . . ... . 224 Rear window defogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76
......
N
r-...
Programming buttons (mult ifunct ion steer ing Rear window washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
N
...... wheel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
0 REAR(button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
0
:E:
'<t

393
Index

Recirculation mode (automatic climate con-

trol) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76
s
Safe driving habits 256
Recuperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Safety
Refueling .. . . . . . .................. . .. 316
Airbag system . . . . . . . ......... .. .... 273
Fuel filler door emergency release . . . . . . 318
Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... .. .... 265
Remote control
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......... .. .... 261
refer to Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Correct seating position ........ .. .... 257
Remote control key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . ......... .. .... 261
Remote control operation Telephone.... ....... ............... 176
Garage door opener (Home link) . . . . . . . . . 46
Safety belt height adjustment . . . . . . . .. .. 271
Remote locking and unlocking
Safety belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. 269
Audi connect vehicle control . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Safety belt height adjustment ..... .. .. 271
Removing the caps (wheel bolts) . . . . . . . . . 363 Safety belts worn by pregnant women . .. 270
Repair manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Safety belt pretensioner
Repairs Service and disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288 Safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265, 268
Replacement key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Replacing Danger to passengers who do not wear a
Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 safety belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Replacing wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56, 57 Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . 263, 264 Improperly worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Reset Not worn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
refer to Restart (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Safety belt position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Reset button (trip odometer) ............ 12 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Securing child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Resetting the trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Spec ial considerat ions for pregnant wom-
Residual heat (automatic climate control) 74, 77
en . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Restart (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Unfastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Warning/indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Reverse gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Worn properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Rewinding (audio/video file) . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Safety belt warning light 265
Right control button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Safety instructions
Rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 for side curtain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 for using child safety seats . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Ringtone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 for using safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Road carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Monitoring the Advanced Airbag System 287
Road noise compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Saving fuel
Roaming Energy consumers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
refer to Data connection . .. ...... .. .. . 196 Recuperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...... .. .. .. 70 Scan (radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Roof load . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...... .. .. .. 70 Screen
also refer to Roof rack . . . .. ...... .. .. .. 70 refer to Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Route criteria . . . . . . . . . . . .. ...... .. .. . 214 Screwdriver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Route guidance SD card reader (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
refer to Navigation ............ . ..... . 205 SDS
Run-flat (tires) . . . . .................. . 352 refer to Voice recognition system . . . . . . . 168
Running direction (tires) 365 Search area (point of interest) . . . . . . . . . . . 208

394
 Index

Search function Setting the language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

refer to Fre e text search 165,239 Shade
Seat adjustment Rear w indow/rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Head restraints 259 Shift paddles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Seat belts Ship carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
refer to Safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Shortcut keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156, 163
Seat heating/v entilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76 Shuffle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Seating capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Side a irbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Sea t ing position How they work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . 25 7 Side assist
Front passenger . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . 258 Cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 355
How to adjust the front seats . .. .. .. .. . 258 Rear cross-traff ic assist . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 130
Incorrect seat position . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . 260 also refer to Audi side ass ist . . . . . .. .. .. 126
Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . 257 Side cur t ain airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 292
Rear passengers . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . 258 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 292
Seats How they work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 293
Adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 59 Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. 294
Adjusting the rear seats . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 60 SiriusXM alert notifications . . . . . . . .. .. .. 225
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 357
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Correct seating position . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 257
Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Number of seats . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. . 265
Software update
Seat alignment. . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 65
refer to Map update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Secondary phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 , 250
refer t o System update (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . 252
Selecting a source (media) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Software (MMI)
Selection menu . . .............. 13 , 159, 163
License agreement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Selective catalytic reduction Updat e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
refer to AdBlue . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Selective wheel torque control . . . . . . . . . . 148 Sources of information about child restraints
Selector lever and their use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Selecto r lever positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Speech dialog system
Self-learning navigation Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 14
refer to Persona l route ass istance . . . . . . 211 Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Service and disposal Speed-dependen t volume control . . . . . . . . 253
Safety belt pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 Speed limit info
Service interval display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 refer to Traffic sign recognition 104
Service position Speed limits
refer to Replacing w iper blades . . . . . . . . . 56 refer to Traffic sign recognit ion . ... . . . . 104
SET REAR(button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Speedometer . . . . . . . . ... . . .... . . . . . . . . 10
Settings Speed warn ing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Directory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Speller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Map. . . . ... . . ................ ...... 216
Sport diffe rential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Media . . . . . . . . ..... . ........ ....... 240
Indi cato r light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Navigation . . . . . . ... . ........ ....... 213
Sport view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
u
co
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
...... Stabilization program
N System (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
r-... refer to ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148, 149
N
...... Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
0
0
:E: Voice recognition system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
'<t

395
Index

Start/Stop system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Tail lights

Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Cleaning 35S
Switching off/on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 TOI clean diese l
START ENGIN E STOP but ton . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 refer to Ad Blue. . . . . . . . . . .......... . . 318
Starting to drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Techn ical data . . . . . . ... . . . . . . .... . . . . . 378
Starting (eng ine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 83, 85 Technica l modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Steer ing Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . 176
All-wheel steer ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2 Connect ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . 176
Elect romech anical st eering . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 2 Dialing a numbe r . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . 179
also refer to Elect romech anical st eering . 1 52 Options du ring a phone call . . . .. .. .. . . 180
Steer ing whee l Playing music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . 231
Easy seat entry . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 82 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. . . 186
Manual adjustment . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 81 Temperature d isplay
Powe r adjus t ment . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 82 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Shift paddl es . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 94 Outs ide temperat ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Steer ing whee l heating . . .. .. .. .. .. .. .. 77 Tether anchors . . . . . . . . . . ...... .. . . . .. 312
also refer to Multifunction Tether strap . . . . . ... . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . 312
steer ing whee l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 14 Text messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
St eps fo r det ermining cor rect load lim it . . . 347 Tie-downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69, 263
Stopover (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Tig htening specification
Stopping (eng ine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Whee l bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
St orage compartments ................. 67 Tig hten ing specifi cat ion (wheel bolts) . . . . 365
Streaming Tilt angle d isplay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
refer to Online media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Time ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . . . . . 249
Street View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 17 Tire Mobi li ty System (tire repair set) . . . . . . 360
Subtitles (DVD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Tires....... . . . . . . . . . . . ............ .. 333
Subwoofer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Low-p rofile t ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 349
Sunshade quattro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 152
Rear window/rear doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Repair set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 360
Sun viso rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 362
Swap call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Run-flat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 352
Switchi ng tabs Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 343
refer to Mul tif unct ion steering w heel. . 12, 14 Tire pressure mo nitor ing system . .. .... 3 51
Switchi ng the ign ition on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Tire pressure table . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .... 344
Tire pressure (tra il er towing mode) . ..... 99
Symbo ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . 166
Unidirectiona l . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 335, 365
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . 215
Uniform tire q uali ty grading . . . . . .. .... 350
Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. . 220
also refer to Indicator lights .. .. .. .. .. . . 22 Tires and wheels
Synchronization (climate control system) . . . 73 Glossary of t ire and loading terminology . 335
Tires and vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . 346
SYNC (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
TMC
System settings (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
refer to Traff ic info rmation . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 20
System update (MMI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 52
Tone (sound)
System volu me . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
refer to Adjusti ng the sound . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
T Tor n or frayed safet y belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10, 11

396
 Index

touch Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 78
refer to MMI touch 160 Transporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 77
Towing Vehicle battery . . .. .. ........... .. .. . . 330
Tow trucks . . . . . . .......... . . . . . ... . 374 Charge level . . . .. .. ........... .. .. . . 153
Towing loop .. . . . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . 374,375 Charging . . . . . . .. .. ........... .. .. . . 331
TPMS Winter operation . .. ........... .. .. . . 330
Tire pressure monitoring system . . . ... . 351 Vehicle control modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Traffic information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 , 221 Vehicle jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Traffic messages . .............. . . . ... . 216 Lifting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Traffic sign recognition ................ 104 Wheel change mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Trailer mode (navigation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . 98 Vehicle status report
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 100 Audi connect vehicle contro l . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Parking systems . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . 147 Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Technical requirements . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . 98 Ventilation ........................... 71
Trailer mode (air suspension) . .. .. .. .. . 100 Version information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Turn signa ls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. . . 33 VI EW button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Transport Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Travel guide Voice guidance
refer to Travel (travel guide) . . . . . . . . . . . 193 refer to Multifunction steering wheel . . 12, 14
Travel (travel guide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Voicemail ........................... 184
Treb le (sound) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Voice recognit ion system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Turnassist . . . . . . .............. . . . ... . 119 Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 External . . .. .. .. .. . .. .... .. .. .. .. . . 174
Operating . .. .. .. .. . .. .... .. .. .. .. . . 169

u Settings . .
Volume . . .
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
..
..
....
....
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
. . 249
. . 254
ULSD No. 2 (Diesel fuel) ....... . . . . . ... . 315
Volume 253
Unfastening safety belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Uniform tire quality grad ing . . . . . . . . . . . . 3S0
Unlocking/locking
w
By remote control . . . . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 37 Warning lights
With the central locking switch . .. .. .. .. 38 refer to I ndicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
With the convenience key . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 37 Warranty coverages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
With the lock cylinder . . . . . . . .. .. .. .. .. 39 Washing matte finish paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Updating stations (radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Web radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
USB stick Weights.... . ... . . . ................ . . 379
refer to Audi music interface .... . . . 234, 23S What happens if you wear your safety belt too
loose? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

V What happens to unbelted occupants? . . . . 266

What impairs driving safety? . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Vanity m irror. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S4
Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Vehicle
Wheel rep lacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Care/cleaning . ................. .. .. . 3S4
u . ' Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 333
co
...... D1mens1ons ... ................ . ... . . 379
N Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 355
r-...
N
Out of service . ................. .. .. . 3S9
...... Glossary of t ire and loading terminology . 335
0
0
Raising . . . . . . ................. .. .. . 363
:E: Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 362
'<t

397
Index

Tire pressure monitoring system . . . . . . . 351

Tires and vehicle load limits . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Wheel wrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
When must a safety belt be replaced? . . . . 268
When must the airbag system be inspected? 285
Where are lower anchorages located? 310
W i-Fi
Audi music stream . . . . . . ........ .. .. . 232
Audio player . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .. .. . 232
Hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ........ .. .. . 195
Online media . . . . . . . . . . ........ .. .. . 233
also refer to Wi-Fi . . . . . . ........ .. .. . 232
Wild animal recognition......... . . . . . .. 131
W indows
Child safety lock . . ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 43
Cleaning/removing ice . . . .. .. .. .. .. .. . 356
Defrosting . . . . . . ...... .. .. .. .. .. . 73, 76
Power windows . . ...... .. .. .. .. .. .. . . 43
W indshield
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 76
also refer to Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
W indshield washer system . . . . . . . . . . 55, 331
Reservoir capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Windshield wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Winter operation
Car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 354
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 328
Defrosting the windows . . . . . . . . . .. . 73, 76
Removing ice from windows . . . . . . .. .. . 356
Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . 73, 76
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 349
Steering wheel heating . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . . 77
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 348
Vehicle battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. .. . 330
Windshield washer system . . . . . . . .. .. . 331
Winter tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

X
Xenon headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

z
Zooming on the map
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Zooming (map) . . . ................ 207,215

398
It has always been Audi's policy to cont inuous ly These instructions may not be reproduced or
improve its products. AUDI AG reserves the right translated in whole or in part without written
to make changes in design and specifications , consent of AUDI AG. All rights reserved by AUDI
and to make additions or improvements in its AG.
products without incurring any ob ligat ion to in-
stall them on products previously manufactured . @) For the sake of the environment
This Owner's Manual is based on the current data Printed on eco-friendly paper (bleached with-
available when it was printed. Text, ill ust rations out chlorine, recyclable) .
and specif ications in this owner's manua l are
based on the most up-to-date information availa-
ble at the time of printing, and shall not const i-
tute a basis for liability claims.
Owner's Manual
Englisch Nordamerika 11.201 6
4M0012721BC

1111I Ill 111

4M0012721BC www.audi.com